JP7529964B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Slot machines have been known as one type of gaming machine for some time (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2015-016110 A

The problem this invention aims to solve is to improve the performance of the gaming machine.

The present invention solves the above-mentioned problems by the following solving means (the configurations of the corresponding embodiments are shown in parentheses).
The present invention (29th embodiment) is
A control board (sub-control board 540),
A board case (700) for accommodating the control board;
The control board is provided with a first connector (board-side connector 540b),
an opening (716c) for exposing the first connector to the outside of the board case is provided at a position corresponding to the first connector in the board case;
The substrate case is provided with a predetermined air hole (716d),
a second connector (harness side connector 730b) connected to the first connector;
and a plurality of lead wires (730a) extending from the second connector;
The opening range of the predetermined air hole is formed so as to extend from any position between the upper end and the lower end of the first connector on the side surface of the board case facing the first connector, to a midpoint of the lead wire when the lead wire is vertically aligned with respect to the mounting surface of the electronic components on the control board , and further to the top surface of the board case (FIG. 172(a)) ;
When the first connector and the second connector are connected to each other, the first connector and the second connector are configured to be engaged with each other by a lock mechanism,
The lock mechanism is located on a side surface of the first connector and the second connector opposite to the side surface facing the predetermined air hole.
It is characterized by:

The present invention can improve the performance of the gaming machine.

1 is a block diagram showing an outline of the control of a slot machine, which is an example of a gaming machine, in this embodiment. 1 is a front view illustrating the process of a medal inserted through a medal insertion slot until it passes through a medal insertion sensor in this embodiment. FIG. FIG. 11 is a time chart for explaining a voltage drop when a power interruption occurs in the first embodiment (A). FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the insertion sensor and the passage of medals in the first embodiment (B). FIG. 11 is a time chart for explaining the on/off of the input sensor in the first embodiment (B). FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing when a medal is discharged from the medal dispensing device in the first embodiment (C). 13 is a schematic diagram showing the on (detection)/off (non-detection) state of the payout sensor when a medal is paid out from the medal payout device in the first embodiment (C). FIG. FIG. 11 is a time chart showing the on/off of the dispensing sensor in the first embodiment (C). FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view showing an outline of a main control board and a board case in a second embodiment. In the second embodiment, (a) is a plan view showing a board case accommodating a main control board, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A showing an example 1 of a gate mark, and (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A showing an example 2 of a gate mark. 13 is a diagram illustrating a process flow when a disconnection occurs between the main control board and the sub-control board in the third embodiment. FIG. 13A and 13B are cross-sectional views (schematic diagrams) illustrating the movement of the stop button of the stop switch in the fourth embodiment, where (a) shows an unloaded state, (b) shows a state when the detection sensor changes from off to on, (c) shows a state when the stop button is pressed all the way in, and (d) shows a state when the detection sensor changes from on to off after the stop button is released. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing time charts of the relationship between the movement of the stop button and the excitation state of the motor in the fourth embodiment, where FIG. 13A and 13B are time charts showing the relationship between power on/off and voltage levels in the fifth embodiment, where FIG. 13A shows power off after a main program is started, and FIG. 13B shows power off before a main program is started. In the sixth embodiment, (a) is a plan view of the medal payout device showing the state before the last medal discharged comes into contact with the fixed shaft and the movable shaft, and (b) is a plan view of the medal payout device showing the state before the last medal discharged comes into contact with the fixed shaft and the movable shaft and where the rotation of the hopper disk has progressed further than in (a). In the sixth embodiment, (a) is a plan view of the medal payout device showing the state in which the last ejected medal is in contact with the fixed axis and the movable axis, and (b) is a plan view of the medal payout device showing the state in which the movable axis has moved due to being pushed by the last ejected medal. In the sixth embodiment, (a) is a plan view of the medal payout device showing the state at the moment when the last medal is discharged from the discharge section, and (b) is a plan view of the medal payout device showing the state when the rotation of the hopper disk has stopped after the last medal has been discharged. 13 is a time chart showing the relationship between a drive signal of a hopper motor, a drive state of the hopper motor, and a discharge state of medals from a discharge portion in the sixth embodiment. A diagram showing the relationship between the operation of the main control board, the driving state of the hopper motor, the detection state of the payout sensor, and the medal discharge timing in the sixth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing the flow of a payout process in the sixth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the flow of the payout process in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a side cross-sectional view of the slot machine in the seventh embodiment with the front door closed, illustrating the positional relationship between the main control board and the sub-control board. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating the positional relationship between the main CPU on the main control board and the electrolytic capacitor on the sub-control board when the slot machine is viewed from the front with the front door closed in the seventh embodiment, where (a) shows example 1 and (b) shows example 2. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating the positional relationship between the main CPU on the main control board and the electrolytic capacitor on the sub-control board when the slot machine is viewed from the front with the front door closed in the seventh embodiment, where (c) shows Example 3 and (d) shows Example 4. FIG. 22 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view of the lower front part (part A in FIG. 22) of the cabinet of a slot machine in an eighth embodiment with the front door closed, illustrating the gap between the cabinet and the front door. In the ninth embodiment, (a) is a diagram showing the types of special roles (gimmicks) and the ending conditions, (b) is a diagram showing the types of game states and the specified number of each game state, and (c) is a diagram showing a number table for internal lottery and advantageous zone lottery in setting 1. A figure showing a performance determination table used commonly in non-RT and RT (non-AT) in the 9th embodiment. A figure showing a performance determination table used commonly inside RB and inside BB in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example 1 of a test pattern display of the management information display LED in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example 2 of a test pattern display of the management information display LED in the tenth embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing various LEDs on a display board, (B) is a diagram showing management information display LEDs, and (C) is a diagram showing setting value display LEDs. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits 1a to 5a and digits 1b to 5b and segments A to G and P in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an output port in the eleventh embodiment. 11A is a diagram showing the relationship between interrupts, LED display counter values, digit signals, and segment signals in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 11B is a diagram showing an LED display request flag. 4 is a diagram showing addresses, label names, names, etc. of data stored in the RWM. 1A and 1B are diagrams for explaining the concept of difference counter values, in which FIG. A figure showing the relationship between the difference counter value and the advantageous zone, where (a) shows example 1 and (b) shows example 2. 13 is a flowchart showing a program start process (M_PRG_START) by a main control board. 39 is a flowchart showing the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in step S212 in FIG. 38. 39 is a flowchart showing the power return process (M_POWER_ON) of step S213 in FIG. 38. 23 is a flowchart showing a main process (M_MAIN) in the eleventh embodiment. 42 is a flowchart showing the game start setting process (M_GAME_SET) in step S272 in FIG. 41. This is a flowchart showing the AT game count counter update process in step S281 in Figure 41. This is a flowchart showing the advantageous zone transition lottery processing in step S283 in Figure 41. A flowchart showing the favorable zone transition processing in step S347 of Figure 44. 46 is a flowchart showing the AT lottery processing in step S355 of FIG. 45. This is a flowchart showing the AT initial game count determination process in step S363 in Figure 46. A flowchart showing the push order instruction number setting process (M_ORD_INF) in step S284 of Figure 41. This is a flow chart showing the medal payout process (MS_WIN_PAY) for winning in step S294 in FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the game end check process (M_GAME_CHK) in step S301 of FIG. 41. A flowchart showing example 1 of favorable zone counter management in step S416 of Figure 50. A flowchart showing an example 2 of favorable zone counter management in step S416 of Figure 50. 13 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process (I_INTR). 54 is a flowchart showing power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S453 of FIG. 53. 54 is a flowchart showing LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S453 in FIG. 53. 23 is a flowchart showing a sub-difference number counter management process in the eleventh embodiment. 57 is a flowchart showing the sub-difference number counter management process in the eleventh embodiment, which is a continuation of the flowchart in FIG. 56 . In the twelfth embodiment, (A) shows the reel condition device and the operation end condition, (B) shows the prescribed number for each RT, and (C) shows the winning number for each winning number. 23A to 23C are a front view, a plan view, and a right side view showing an outline of the configuration including the reel and the stop switch in the 13th embodiment. This is a time chart showing the timing of the start and end of the display of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum playing time has elapsed in the 14th embodiment (A). This is a time chart showing the timing of the start and end of display of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum playing time has elapsed in the 14th embodiment (A). 23 is a flowchart showing a main process (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (B). A time chart showing the timing of the start and end of display of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum playing time has elapsed in the 14th embodiment (B). A time chart showing the timing of the start and end of display of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum playing time has elapsed in the 14th embodiment (B). 23 is a flowchart showing a main process (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (C). 23 is a flowchart showing a medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) for winning in the fourteenth embodiment (C). A time chart showing the timing of the start and end of display of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum playing time has elapsed in the 14th embodiment (C). A time chart showing the timing of the start and end of display of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum playing time has elapsed in the 14th embodiment (C). 23 is a flowchart showing a main process (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (D). A time chart showing the timing of the start and end of display of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum playing time has elapsed in the 14th embodiment (D). A time chart showing the timing of the start and end of display of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum playing time has elapsed in the 14th embodiment (D). 23 is a flowchart showing a main process (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (E). A time chart showing the timing of the start and end of display of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum playing time has elapsed in the 14th embodiment (E). A time chart showing the timing of the start and end of display of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum playing time has elapsed in the 14th embodiment (E). A front view showing an overview of the configuration including the reel, operation indicator lamps, and stop switches in the fourteenth embodiment (F). A time chart showing the timing of the start and end of display of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum playing time has elapsed in the 14th embodiment (F). A time chart showing the timing of the start and end of display of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum playing time has elapsed in the 14th embodiment (F). A time chart showing the timing of the start and end of display of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum playing time has elapsed in the 14th embodiment (G). A time chart showing the timing of the start and end of display of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum playing time has elapsed in the 14th embodiment (G). A diagram showing the execution timing of the medal addition process in the 15th embodiment (A). A diagram showing the execution timing of the medal addition process in the fifteenth embodiment (B). A diagram showing the execution timing of the medal addition process in the fifteenth embodiment (C). A schematic diagram showing the medal selector, chute passage 48, and chute sensor 49 in the 16th embodiment from the front. FIG. 23 is a front view of a passage forming member in the seventeenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a rear view of the passage forming member in the seventeenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a left side view of the passage forming member in the seventeenth embodiment. 85 , showing the passage forming member according to the seventeenth embodiment. FIG. A diagram showing the main memory areas of the RWM described in the 18th embodiment. 23 is a time chart (example 1) showing output timings of an external signal 4 and an external signal 5 in the eighteenth embodiment. 23 is a time chart (example 2) showing output timings of an external signal 4 and an external signal 5 in the eighteenth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart (example 1) showing an external signal output process in the eighteenth embodiment. 34 is a flowchart (example 1) showing an external signal output process in the 18th embodiment, which is a continuation of the flowchart in FIG. 344 . 23 is a flowchart (example 2) showing an external signal output process in the eighteenth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart (example 3) showing an external signal output process in the eighteenth embodiment. A block diagram showing an outline of the control of the slot machine in the 19th embodiment (A). This is a time chart showing the relationship between the setting change state, the setting change completion sound and lamp effect, and one game time described later in the 19th embodiment. This is an external oblique view of a pachinko game machine as seen from the front side (player side). This is an oblique view of the exterior of a pachinko game machine, seen from the back side. FIG. 1 is a block diagram of a pachinko game machine. 1 is a flowchart explaining the startup process of a pachinko game machine after it is powered on. 101 is a flowchart showing the setting change process in step S702 of FIG. 100. 1 is a flowchart showing the flow of one game in a pachinko gaming machine. 2 is an exploded oblique view of the board case (upper case and lower case) and the main control board as viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the board case (upper case and lower case) and the main control board as viewed from the rear. FIG. 2 is an external perspective view showing a state in which a main control board is housed in a board case. FIG. 11 is a front view showing the main control board housed in the board case as viewed from the front side. FIG. 1 is a front view of the main control board housed in the board case, seen from the rear (back) side. FIG. 5A and 5B are side cross-sectional views showing the mated state between the upper case and the lower case, in which FIG. 5A shows the provisionally mated state (before sliding movement) and FIG. 5B shows the fully mated state (after sliding movement). 13 is a plan view showing the vicinity of the side wall as viewed from the lower case side in a provisionally fitted state. FIG. 4 is a plan view showing a state in which a harness is connected to a connector of a main control board. FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view showing the harness and its connector terminals in detail. FIG. 13 is a perspective view showing an example of hiding the start-up lead wires. 1 is a side cross-sectional view showing the positional relationship between the upper case of the board case, the cover, the setting key insertion port, and the setting change (reset) switch. FIG. A front view of a pachinko game machine in the 23rd embodiment. This is an external oblique view of a pachinko gaming machine in the 23rd embodiment, as seen from the front side (player side). This is a front view of the right base member in the 23rd embodiment with the upper frame lamp cover and the upper portion of the right frame lamp cover removed. This is an oblique view of the right base member in the 23rd embodiment, viewed from the right side, with the upper frame lamp cover and the upper portion of the right frame lamp cover removed. This is a rear view of the right base member in the 23rd embodiment with the upper frame lamp cover and the upper portion of the right frame lamp cover removed. This is an enlarged view of the upper front portion of the right base member in the 23rd embodiment with the upper frame lamp cover and the upper portion of the right frame lamp cover removed. This is an enlarged upper oblique view of the right base member in the 23rd embodiment, seen from the left side, with the upper frame lamp cover and the upper portion of the right frame lamp cover removed. This is an enlarged view of the upper left side surface of the right base member in the 23rd embodiment with the upper frame lamp cover and the upper portion of the right frame lamp cover removed. This is an enlarged view of the upper bottom surface of the right base member in the 23rd embodiment with the upper frame lamp cover removed. This is an enlarged cross-sectional view of line AA in Figure 119. This is a front view of the right base member in the 23rd embodiment with the upper frame lamp cover, the upper part of the right frame lamp cover, and the right frame lamp board removed, and is a figure corresponding to Figure 116. This is an enlarged rear view of the right base member in the twenty-third embodiment, with the upper frame lamp cover removed and the right frame lamp cover attached. FIG. 23 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the lens portion of the right frame lamp cover in the twenty-third embodiment. In the 23rd embodiment, (a) is a time chart showing presentation pattern 1 when a pachinko gaming machine loses, and (b) is a time chart showing presentation pattern 2 when a pachinko gaming machine loses. FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating approximately the same color using a chromaticity diagram according to the CIE standard color system in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating similar colors using a chromaticity diagram according to the CIE standard color system in the twenty-third embodiment. 123. This is a diagram showing a modified example of the cross section taken along line AA in FIG. 119, and corresponds to FIG. 23rd embodiment, a modified example of the slot machine; FIG. 24 is an external oblique view seen from the front side (player side); In a modified example of the twenty-third embodiment, (a) is a time chart showing presentation pattern 1 when no winning occurs in the slot machine, and (b) is a time chart showing presentation pattern 2 when no winning occurs in the slot machine. A front view of a pachinko game machine in the 24th embodiment (A). A disassembled oblique view of a portion of the title display section of a pachinko game machine in the 24th embodiment (A) as viewed from the front side (player side). A block diagram of a pachinko game machine in the 24th embodiment (A). In the 24th embodiment (A), (1) is a diagram showing the display contents of a menu screen, and (2) is a diagram showing the display contents of a brightness adjustment mode. A diagram showing the relationship between each level of levels 1 to 5 in the 24th embodiment (A) and the brightness of each LED in the title display section, right frame lamp section, and left frame lamp section. A figure showing the relationship between each level of levels 1 to 5 and the brightness of each LED of the title display section, right frame lamp section, and left frame lamp section in a modified example of the 24th embodiment (A). A front view of a pachinko game machine in a modified example of the 24th embodiment (A). A front view of a pachinko game machine in a modified example of the 24th embodiment (A). A front view of the slot machine in the 24th embodiment (B). An oblique view of the front door of the slot machine in the 24th embodiment (B) as seen from the front side (player side). An exploded oblique view of the right frame lamp portion of the slot machine in the 24th embodiment (B) as viewed from the front side (player side). In the 24th embodiment (B), (1) is a diagram showing an embossed portion formed on the surface of the lens portion of the title display unit, and (2) is a diagram showing an embossed portion formed on the surface of the lens portion of the right frame lamp unit. In the 24th embodiment (B), (1) is a plan cross-sectional view of the slot machine, (2) is a diagram showing variant example 1 of section A, and (3) is a diagram showing variant example 2 of section A. A block diagram of a slot machine in twenty-fourth embodiment (B). A front view of a slot machine in a modified example of the 24th embodiment (B). In the 24th embodiment (B), (1) is a diagram showing modified example 1 of the embossed portion, and (2) is a diagram showing modified example 2 of the embossed portion. A front view of a pachinko game machine in the 25th embodiment. This is an external oblique view of a pachinko gaming machine in the 25th embodiment, seen from the front side (player side). In the 25th embodiment, (1) is a diagram showing each LED equipped on the special pattern display device, (2) is a diagram showing the lighting pattern when the special pattern stops when the jackpot lottery results in a miss, and (3) is a diagram showing the lighting pattern when the special pattern stops when the jackpot lottery results in a win. In the twenty-fifth embodiment, (1) to (8) are figures showing the lighting patterns while the special symbols are changing. This is a time chart showing the timing of turning on or off each LED during the change and stop of the special pattern when the reserved number is "0" and the jackpot lottery is lost in the twenty-fifth embodiment. This is a time chart showing the timing of lighting or extinguishing of each LED during the change and stop of the special pattern when the reserved number "4" is lost in the jackpot lottery in the twenty-fifth embodiment. This is a time chart showing the timing of turning on or off each LED during the change and stop of the special pattern when the reserved number "4" is lost in the jackpot lottery in a modified example of the twenty-fifth embodiment. A diagram showing each LED provided on the main control board of the slot machine in the 26th embodiment. In the 26th embodiment, (1) is a diagram showing the lighting pattern when the reel sensor of the left reel detects an index, (2) is a diagram showing the lighting pattern when the reel sensor of the middle reel detects an index, and (3) is a diagram showing the lighting pattern when the reel sensor of the right reel detects an index. This is a time chart showing an example of the operation in the twenty-sixth embodiment when the previous game ended with the reel sensor of the left reel detecting the index, and a current game is started under this circumstance. This is a time chart showing an example of the operation in the 26th embodiment when the previous game ended in a state where the reel sensors of all reels had not detected the index, and a current game is started under this circumstance. This is a time chart showing another example of the operation when the previous game ended in a state where the reel sensors of all reels had not detected the index in the 26th embodiment and a current game is started under this circumstance. A diagram showing various lead wires, a relay board 300, and a main control board 50 in the 27th embodiment. FIG. 28(1) is a front view of a board case according to the twenty-eighth embodiment (A), and FIG. 28(2) is a side view of the board case according to the twenty-eighth embodiment (A). This is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A in Figure 162 (1). FIG. 28 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate case of the twenty-eighth embodiment (A). 28(1) is an explanatory diagram of the parting line on the front cover of the substrate case of the 28th embodiment (A), and (2) is an explanatory diagram of the parting line on the rear cover of the substrate case of the 28th embodiment (A). FIG. A cross-sectional view of the substrate case of the 28th embodiment (B). 167(a) is a front view of the slot machine and board case of the 28th embodiment (C), and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 167(a). A cross-sectional view of the slot machine and board case of the 28th embodiment (C), corresponding to Figure 167 (2). FIG. 29 is an external perspective view of a board case according to a twenty-ninth embodiment. 21 (1) is an explanatory diagram of the 29th embodiment in which the air hole opens only at a position corresponding to the height of the board side connector, and (2) is an explanatory diagram of the 29th embodiment in which the air hole opens only at a position corresponding to the height of the harness side connector. (3) is an explanatory diagram of the 29th embodiment in which the air hole extends from a position corresponding to the height of the board side connector to a position corresponding to the height of the harness side connector, and (4) is an explanatory diagram of the 29th embodiment in which the air hole opens only at a position corresponding to the height of the lead wire. (5) is an explanatory diagram of the 29th embodiment in which the air hole extends from a position corresponding to the height of the board side connector to a position corresponding to the height of the lead wire, and (6) is an explanatory diagram of the 29th embodiment in which the air hole extends from a position corresponding to the height of the harness side connector to a position corresponding to the height of the lead wire. (7) is an explanatory diagram of the board-side terminal and the harness-side terminal in the 29th embodiment when the air hole reaches from a position corresponding to the height of the board-side connector to a position corresponding to the height of the lead wire, and (8) is an explanatory diagram of the 29th embodiment when the air hole reaches from a position corresponding to the height of the harness-side connector to a position corresponding to the height of the lead wire. 30(1) is a front view of the substrate case of the 30th embodiment, and FIG. 30(2) is a bottom view of the substrate case of the 30th embodiment.

In this specification, the meanings of the terms are as follows:
A "bet" refers to placing a bet on medals (game media) to play a game. To bet medals, actual medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 47, or the bet switch 40 is operated to bet credited (stored) medals.
On the other hand, "credits (also called "reserves")" are different from the above-mentioned "bet" and refer to the storing of medals inside the slot machine 10. In this specification, the term "credits" is used in a sense that does not include "bet".
Furthermore, "inserting" refers to betting or crediting medals.
In addition, the "prescribed number" refers to the number of bets that can be placed to start (execute) the game in question. For example, in a game with a prescribed number of "2" or "3", the game can be started with either the bet number of "2" or "3", and the game cannot be played with the bet number of "1".
For ease of explanation, the "specified number" may also be referred to as the "number of bets."
On the other hand, the term "number of bets" may refer to something other than the "prescribed number." For example, in a game with a prescribed number of "2" or "3," when one medal is inserted (before the game starts), the number of bets is "1" (the number bet at that time).

"Maintenance" refers to the player inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 47 (described below).
A “care bet” refers to a player betting medals by care of the medals through the medal insertion slot 47 .
The term "care credit" refers to a player crediting medals (adding credits) by care of medals through the medal insertion slot 47.
"Bet Medals" refers to medals that have been bet on.
"Stored medals" refers to medals that have been credited (stored).

A "reserved bet" refers to a player operating a bet switch 40 (described below) to bet some or all of his/her credited medals to play a game, within the range that can be bet for that game.
The "automatic bet" refers to a process in which, when a replay wins, the slot machine 10 automatically bets the number of medals that was bet in the previous game through the control process.
Here, the display of a symbol combination corresponding to a minor winning combination (meaning that the symbol combination stops on a winning line; the same applies below) is referred to as a "winning minor winning combination." On the other hand, in the "Rules for the Certification and Model Inspection of Gaming Machines (hereinafter simply referred to as the "Rules"), when a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed, it is interpreted as the operation of a condition device related to replay, and is not a "winning combination." However, in this application (this specification, etc.), a replay is also treated as one of the winning combinations (replay winning combination), and the display of a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is sometimes referred to as a "winning combination of a replay."
The term "settlement" refers to paying out bet medals and/or accumulated medals to a player. In this embodiment, the settlement process is executed when a settlement switch 43 (described later) is operated.

"Payout" refers to the payment of medals to a player based on the winning combination, or the payment of medals through the above settlement. When medals are paid out to a player based on the winning combination, this includes both storing the medals as credits (adding stored medals, in other words, updating electronic data stored in the RWM 53 (described below)) and actually paying out medals from a payout port (not shown). For example, "50" medals are credited as the limit number, and any medals that exceed "50" are controlled to actually be paid out to the player.
In addition, "payout" may be referred to as "grantment." Therefore, the "number of payouts" may be referred to as the "number of grants."

In this embodiment, the "game medium" is a medal, but in the case of an enclosed (ECO) game machine, for example, electronic information (electronic medals, electronic data) is used as the game medium. Note that, for example, when money (banknotes) is inserted into a lending machine, the "electronic information" is converted into electronic information corresponding to the amount of money, and part or all of the electronic information can be credited to the game machine as game media for playing games on the game machine.
In addition, "gaming media" may also be referred to as "gaming value."

In addition, when the gaming medium is electronic information, "paying out medals" means crediting (adding) the medals to a gaming medium credit device installed in the gaming machine. Therefore, "paying out medals" does not only mean actually paying out medals from a hopper 35 (described below), but also includes the process of crediting (adding) electronic information of the payout amount corresponding to the winning combination to the gaming medium credit device.

When a game progresses from the "N-1" game, to the "N" game, to the "N+1" game, ... (where "N" is an integer of 2 or more), and the current game is the "N" game, the "N" game is referred to as the "current game." The "N-1" game is referred to as the "previous game." Furthermore, the "N+1" game is referred to as the "next game."

In this specification, a number with "(B)" added to the end (especially 8-bit) means a binary number. Similarly, a number with "(H)" added to the end means a hexadecimal number. Specifically, for example, a number showing "16" in decimal is written as "00010000(B)" in binary and "10(H)" in hexadecimal. Furthermore, a number showing a decimal number is written as "16(D)" as necessary.
However, when it is clear whether the number is binary, decimal, or hexadecimal, the final symbols "(B)", "(D)", and "(H)" may be omitted.

The "operation mode" of the stop switch 42 means the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed and/or the operation timing (the timing at which the stop switch is pressed to stop the target symbol on an active line).
In addition, the "advantageous operation mode" of the stop switch 42 refers to an operation mode that stops a symbol combination that has a payout or has a large payout number, an operation mode that stops a symbol combination that transitions (promotes) to an advantageous RT, or an operation mode that stops a symbol combination that does not transition (fall) to an unfavorable RT, in a game in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 produces an advantageous/disadvantageous game result (symbol combination that stops on a winning line). The "advantageous operation mode" is also called the correct operation mode or the correct push order.

"Games in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 results in an advantage/disadvantage in the game outcome" corresponds to, for example, a game in which one of the winning numbers "3" to "8" shown in FIG. 58 described below is won (a game in which the so-called "push order bell" is won). Also, although not shown in FIG. 58, it also corresponds to a case in which the RT shifts depending on the type of winning replay in a game in which multiple types of replays are won (when multiple replays are won, i.e. a game in which the so-called "push order replay" is won).

The "instruction function" refers to a function of instructing the player on the operation mode of the stop switch 42. In principle, the instruction function is a function of instructing the player on the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42.
In other words, the "indicating feature" refers to a device that facilitates winning a prize.
In addition, "display" refers to visibly showing the contents of an "instruction," and "notification" refers to informing the player of the contents of the instruction. Therefore, the "instruction function" is both a "display function" and an "notification function."

Furthermore, the notification of the operation mode of the stop switch 42 may not be limited to the most advantageous operation mode. The notification of the most advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 may be the "activation of the instruction function", but the notification of any operation mode including the most advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 may be the "activation of the instruction function".
For example, if the push order bell shown in the winning numbers "3" to "8" in Figure 58 (B) described below is a push order with six options, the payout when the push order bell is won is 10 coins or 1 coin in the example of Figure 58, but instead it is assumed that the payout will be 1 coin, 3 coins, 4 coins, 10 coins, or a miss (non-winning) depending on the push order.
Here, notifying the user of the order in which to press buttons to win a 10-coin winning combination is, of course, a notification of an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42, and corresponds to the "operation of an instruction function."
On the other hand, notifying the button press sequence to win a 1-coin, 3-coin, or 4-coin prize may be considered as "notification of an advantageous operation mode (activation of the instruction function)" or not as "notification of an advantageous operation mode."

The push order for winning a 4-coin combination is not the most advantageous operation mode because it does not allow a 10-coin combination to be won. However, since the payout amount is "4" for the bet amount "3" and the difference in the number of coins for the game is "+1", it is an operation mode that increases the difference in the number of coins, and is not necessarily an unfavorable operation mode.
Similarly, the push order for winning a 3-coin combination is not the most advantageous operation mode because it does not allow a 10-coin combination to be won. However, since the payout amount is "3" for the bet amount "3" and the difference in the number of coins is maintained as it is (the difference in the number of coins is not decreased), it is not necessarily an unfavorable operation mode.

Similarly, the push order for winning a 1-coin combination is not the most advantageous operation mode because it does not result in a 10-coin combination. Furthermore, the payout amount is "1" for a bet amount of "3," which reduces the difference in the number of coins. However, this can also be said to be an operation mode that does not miss out on a combination, so it may not be an unfavorable operation mode.

In this embodiment, when the push order bell is won, the instruction function is activated to notify the player of the operation mode (correct push order) that will result in the winning combination with the highest payout amount.
However, for example, when the difference counter value (described later) during the advantageous zone approaches the upper limit value ("2400 (D)") but there is still room for the number of remaining plays in the advantageous zone (advantageous zone clear counter value described later), when the push order bell is won, it is possible to announce the push order that will result in, for example, a three-coin or four-coin role, as described above, and to control the difference counter value so that it remains at its current state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the activation of the instruction function is limited to one specified number. For example, assume that the specified number for activating the instruction function is set to "3." In this case, in a game during the AT with a specified number of "2" or "3," if the game is started with a bet number of "3" and the push order bell is won, the instruction function can be activated. In contrast, when the game is started with a bet number of "2," the instruction function cannot be activated even if the push order bell is won.

The "game zone" includes a "normal zone (non-advantageous zone)" and a "advantageous zone". Note that the 5.9 machine had a "waiting zone" (a game zone where the player has won the advantageous zone lottery but has not yet moved to the advantageous zone), but the current 6 machine rules do not provide a "waiting zone". However, this is not limited to this, and game zones other than the normal zone and the advantageous zone may be provided.
The "normal section" refers to a play section in which signals related to the instruction function, specifically the push order instruction number and winning and replay condition device number (information that can determine the correct push order) described below, are prohibited from being sent to a peripheral board (e.g., sub-control board 80), and which does not affect the performance related to the instruction function at all (no processing related to the instruction function is executed). In other words, the normal section is a play section in which the operation mode cannot be notified. However, in addition to drawing lots for roles, a decision can be made (by drawing lots, etc.) as to whether or not to move to an advantageous section.

In the normal section, the instruction function must not be activated, so push order instruction information cannot be displayed on a specified display device (such as an LED) electrically connected to the main control board 60, and since signals related to the instruction function are not transmitted to the peripheral boards, advantageous operation modes cannot be displayed (notified) by the image display device 23 electrically connected to the sub-control board 80.

On the other hand, the "advantageous zone" is a play zone that has the capability related to the instruction function (the instruction function may be activated), and specifically refers to a play zone in which, when the instruction function is activated, a signal related to the instruction function can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 only when push order instruction information is displayed so that the instruction content (the operation mode of the stop switch 42) can be identified on the main control board 60. In other words, the advantageous zone is a play zone in which the instruction function can be activated (the instruction function may be activated), that is, a play zone in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 can be displayed (may be displayed).
However, the sub-control board 80 cannot output effects that contradict the instructions given by the main control board 60 or the signals related to the instruction functions that it has received.

Furthermore, even in a game in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 results in an advantage/disadvantage in the advantageous zone, the indication function does not have to be activated.
On the other hand, during a favorable zone, in a game in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 determines an advantage/disadvantage in the game result, the indication function may be always activated to display the operation mode of the stop switch 42.
The AT (notification game state) is a game state that notifies the operation mode of the stop switch 42 in a game in which the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42. Therefore, the AT is always in an advantageous zone, and is not executed in a non-advantageous zone.

In addition, the AT may always (100%) report the operation mode of the stop switch 42 in a game in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 has an advantageous/disadvantageous effect on the game outcome; however, it is also possible that the AT may not report the operation mode of the stop switch 42 even in a game in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 has an advantageous/disadvantageous effect on the game outcome, for example, in order to keep the ball payout rate in a specified period within a range specified by the rules.
For example, if the difference counter approaches its upper limit during the AT but there are still AT games remaining, it may be possible to temporarily not notify the operation mode of the stop switch 42 (not activate the instruction function) in order to extend the life of the AT.

The relationship between the advantageous zone and the AT can be set in various ways. For example, the first setting is "advantageous zone = AT". In this case, winning the advantageous zone and winning the AT are equivalent. The AT starts from the first play in the advantageous zone. The AT ends when the advantageous zone ends.

Secondly, the AT can be set to "AT ≠ advantageous zone."
In this case, the condition for starting (executing) the AT is not satisfied simply by moving to the advantageous zone, and whether or not to execute the AT is determined by a lottery or the like, provided that the player is in the advantageous zone, and when it is decided to execute the AT, the AT is executed until the predetermined end condition of the AT is satisfied. In addition, when the player is not in the AT upon moving to the advantageous zone, the main game state may be set to, for example, the normal zone, premonition, CZ (chance zone (period in which it is easy to win the AT)), etc.

When transitioning to a premonition after transitioning to an advantageous zone, the game may always transition to the real premonition, and transition to the AT after a predetermined number of plays of the real premonition is completed. Alternatively, at the time of transition to an advantageous zone or after transitioning to an advantageous zone, whether the premonition is real or a false premonition may be determined by lottery or the like, and when the real premonition is determined, transition to the AT may be made after the end of the real premonition. Also, when the false premonition is determined, the advantageous zone may be maintained or transition to the normal zone may be made after the end of the false premonition.
Furthermore, when the AT termination condition is met, both the AT and the advantageous zone may be terminated. Alternatively, the AT may be terminated, but when the advantageous zone termination condition is not met, the advantageous zone may be continued (non-AT and advantageous zone). The same applies when the AT is started at the same time as the advantageous zone.

In addition, the number of plays in the advantageous zone is determined when the advantageous zone starts, and during the advantageous zone, lotteries or the like are not conducted regarding the advantageous zone.
Furthermore, when the advantageous zone starts, the initial number of plays in the advantageous zone is determined, and during the advantageous zone, a decision is made (by lottery, etc.) as to whether or not to add (add) to the (remaining) number of plays in the advantageous zone.
Furthermore, a specified end condition can be set for the advantageous zone, and when the specified end condition for the advantageous zone is met, the advantageous zone can be ended at that point, even if there are remaining number of plays in the advantageous zone (or remaining number of plays in the AT).

Here, the "predetermined end condition" of the advantageous zone is when the difference counter value described below exceeds "2400 (D)" or when the advantageous zone clear counter described below (number of plays during the advantageous zone) reaches "1500 (D)". When either of these conditions is met, it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous zone is met, and the next play will transition to the normal zone (non-advantageous zone). In this case, even if the final play is an AT, the AT will also end at the same time as the advantageous zone ends.

In the advantageous zone, a later-described advantageous zone display LED (also referred to as a "zone indicator") 77 is turned on. The advantageous zone display LED 77 may be turned on at all times during the advantageous zone, but may also be turned on when a predetermined lighting condition is met after transition to the advantageous zone.
Here, the "predetermined lighting condition" refers to, for example, when the instruction function is activated in a game state in which the zone Sim payout rate exceeds "1." Note that once the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned on, it remains turned on during the advantageous zone.

In addition, the "interval Sim (simulation) payout rate" is the payout rate when it is assumed that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role is always stopped (even when the role of "PB ≠ 1" is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the role is stopped), and when there are multiple symbol combinations corresponding to the winning role, the symbol combination that is most advantageous to the player (when the push order bell is won, the high-eye bell that will pay out the maximum) is stopped. The calculation of the interval Sim payout rate does not include the payout (number of payouts) due to the operation of the role (1BB operation, etc.). In addition, in a game in which a replay is won, when the number of bets is "3", the number of payouts is counted as "0", and in a replay based on the winning of a replay (the next game after the game in which a replay is won), the number of bets is calculated as "0" and the number of payouts is "x"("x" is the number of payouts in the game). Alternatively, the number of payouts in a game in which a replay is won and the number of bets in the next game may not be counted.
Furthermore, the "game state in which the interval Sim payout rate exceeds "1"" includes an RT or main game state in which the interval Sim payout rate is set to exceed "1".
Here, an example of an RT in which the interval Sim payout rate exceeds "1" is an RT in which the probability of winning a replay is set high.
In addition, assuming that normal, CZ (chance zone), AT, pull-back zone, etc. are provided as main gaming states, the AT is an example of a main gaming state in which the zone Sim ball payout rate exceeds "1".

When the advantageous zone ends, more specifically, in the final play of the advantageous zone, the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned off, for example, during the play end check process described below, or during the play start set process for the next play of the final play of the advantageous zone. When the advantageous zone end condition is met, the advantageous zone display LED flag initialization process described below is executed, and the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned off in the subsequent interrupt process.

Examples of "processing related to favorable zones" include the following processing.
1) Drawing lots for (transition to) favorable zones 2) Updating (subtracting, clearing) the favorable zone clear counter
3) Update the difference counter (calculate, clear)
4) Updating the advantageous zone type flag 5) Controlling the advantageous zone display LED 77 (updating the advantageous zone display LED flag)

In addition, the "processing related to the instruction function" includes, for example, the following processing.
1) Display of push order instruction information (operation of instruction function)
2) AT lottery 3) In the case of a game number management type AT (a specification in which the AT ends when the remaining number of games becomes "0"), the AT game number counter is updated (subtracted, added, cleared)
4) In the case of a difference number management type AT (a specification that ends the AT when the remaining difference number becomes "0"), update the AT difference number counter (subtract, add, clear)

And, the current rules stipulate that both the processing related to the advantageous zone and the processing related to the instruction function can be executed in one specified number in one game state (RT), except for the following: Therefore, in this embodiment, the specified number of "3" makes it possible to execute the processing related to the advantageous zone and the processing related to the instruction function, and the specified number of "2" makes it impossible to execute the processing related to the advantageous zone and the processing related to the instruction function.
However, during the favorable zone, updating of the favorable zone clear counter and updating of the difference counter must be performed regardless of which specified number.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the result of the lottery is not a winning combination (for example, when the winning number is "0" in FIG. 26 or FIG. 58 described later), in other words, when the condition device is not in operation, the process related to the advantageous zone (lottery for transition to the advantageous zone) is not executed. However, without being limited to this, the process related to the advantageous zone may be executed even if the result of the lottery is not a winning combination.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, even if the result of the role lottery is a non-winning result, if the probability of non-winning is a predetermined value or higher (when the probability is not extremely low, for example, 1/17,500 or higher), processing related to the instruction function (AT lottery processing) can be executed.

Furthermore, if the result of executing the advantageous zone transition lottery (processing related to the advantageous zone) is that the advantageous zone transition lottery is won, the advantageous zone will be entered from the next game. Therefore, in a game in which the advantageous zone transition lottery (processing related to the advantageous zone) is executed and the advantageous zone is won, the notification of the correct button press order (processing related to the instruction function) cannot be executed.
However, it is acceptable to perform the advantageous zone transition lottery (processing related to the advantageous zone) and the AT lottery (processing related to the instruction function) in one game. Furthermore, for example, when a specific role lottery result is obtained, it may be determined to be an advantageous zone and an AT (without executing the lottery).

The management information display LED (also called the "role ratio monitor" or "ratio display") 74 is made up of four LEDs, as shown in FIG. 31(B) described below, and is made up of a two-digit identification segment (an LED that displays which of the five items below it is, using a specified symbol or the like) and a two-digit ratio segment (an LED for displaying the calculated ratio).

The management information display LED 74 repeatedly displays the ratios of the following five items 1) to 5) at predetermined time intervals.
1) Advantageous zone ratio (cumulative) (7U.), or instruction-included role ratio (cumulative) (7P.) 2) Continuous role ratio (6000 games) (6y.)
3) Ratio of gimmicks (6000 games) (7y.)
4) Ratio of consecutive features (cumulative) (6A.)
5) Role Ratio (Cumulative) (7A.)

For example, when displaying the reel ratio (cumulative), if the ratio is "50"%, the symbol "7A." indicating the reel ratio (cumulative) is displayed in the identification segment, and "50" is displayed in the ratio segment.
Here, "cumulative" refers to the sum of the values that have been counted up to that point, and in this embodiment, counting continues until it reaches at least 175,000 games played. When the cumulative total is less than 175,000 games played, the ratio is displayed, for example, by blinking, and when it is 175,000 games played or more, the ratio is displayed, for example, by lighting up. The cumulative total continues to be added until it reaches a value that can be stored in a specified address of RWM 53 (upper limit value), even after it reaches 175,000 games played or more.
In addition, "6000 games" refers to the total number of games played over 15 sets, each set consisting of "400" games.

The "profitable zone ratio" refers to the ratio (proportion) of time spent in the profitable zone to the total play zone (non-profitable zone + profitable zone). Specifically, for example, if the number of plays in the total play zone is "1000" and the number of plays in the profitable zone during that time is "700," the profitable zone ratio is "70%."
The "ratio of special features with instructions" is the sum of the payout number when the special feature is activated and the payout number in the game with the instruction function activated, divided by the total payout number. In slot machines without special features, the "ratio of special features with instructions" is the sum of the payout number in the game with the instruction function activated, divided by the total payout number.
The sum of the number of payouts when the device is activated and the number of payouts in a game in which the instruction function is activated is counted by an instruction-included device counter.

Furthermore, the "number of payouts in a game in which the instruction function is activated" is determined based on the operation of the stop switch 42 in the pressing sequence displayed by the activation of the instruction function. For example, in FIG. 58 described below, when 10 bells corresponding to the winning numbers "3" to "8" are won, "10" is added to the instruction-included device counter.
In contrast, in a game in which the instruction function is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in a different pressing order from that displayed, and one bell is won as in the example of Figure 58, "1" is added to the instruction-included device counter.
Similarly, in a game in which the instruction function is activated, if the stop switch 42 is pressed in a different order from the displayed order and a winning combination is missed (when the combination is not won), the instruction-included combination counter is not incremented. In other words, the count value from the previous game remains the same.

In the example of FIG. 26 described later, when the common bell (winning number "3") is won during the AT, the instruction function is activated in the same way as when the push order bell is won, and push order instruction information (dummy) is displayed on the winning number display LED 78, or the instruction function is not activated. If the instruction function is activated when the common bell is won, the number of payouts for that game is added to the instruction-included device counter.

On the other hand, if the common bell is won and the instruction function is not activated, the payout number for that game will not be added to the instruction feature counter. However, the total payout number will be added to the counter. In this case, the sub-control board 80 may notify the correct button press order by image or sound.

The "continuous feature ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts when the first type special feature (RB) is activated to the total number of payouts. Therefore, in this embodiment, it refers to the "number of payouts during 1BB activation to the total number of payouts."
For example, if the total number of payouts in 6000 games is 2000 coins, and of that, the number of payouts when the first type special feature (RB) is activated is 500 coins, then the "consecutive feature ratio (6000 games)" will be 25(%).

In addition, the "role ratio" refers to the ratio of the payout number when the role is activated to the total payout number. Here, "role" includes the above-mentioned first-class special role, as well as the second-class special role (CB), MB (also called 2BB. Second-class role continuous operation device. CB operates continuously.), and SB (single bonus).
In addition, in gaming machines that do not have the functions corresponding to the above five items, the ratio segment will be displayed as "--".
For example, if the reel is not equipped with an "RB (first type special reel)," there is no continuous reel ratio, so when the ratio display numbers "2" and "4" are displayed, the ratio segment is displayed as "--."
As described above, the management information display LED 74 displays five types of ratios, but as shown in Figs. 29 and 30 described later, a test pattern is displayed at a predetermined timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

In addition, the rules stipulate that the ratio of advantageous zones and the ratio of instructed features should be 70% or less. It also states that the ratio of features should be 70% or less, and the ratio of consecutive features should be 60% or less.
Therefore, by looking at the information displayed on the management information display LED 74, it is possible to confirm whether or not the information falls within the range stipulated by the regulations.

In addition, gaming machines with specifications that set the advantageous zone ratio to 70% or less are called "7U" type, and gaming machines with specifications that set the instruction-included feature ratio to 70% or less are called "7P" type. Gaming machines with advantageous zones are either "7U" type or "7P" type. In the case of the "7U" type, the advantageous zone ratio (cumulative) is displayed on the management information display LED 74, and in the case of the "7P" type, the instruction-included feature ratio (cumulative) is displayed.
In the "7U" type, the ratio of the advantageous zone to the entire play period must be "70"% or less, but in the "7P" type, the number of payouts paid out by the operation of the instruction function and the operation of the device may be 70% or less of the total number of payouts, and for example, the entire period or most of the play period may be the advantageous zone.

For example, when moving to a non-favorable zone, it is possible to set it so that there is a 100% probability of winning the favorable zone lottery, or to set it so that there is an almost 100% (for example, about 98%) probability of winning the favorable zone lottery, or to set it so that there is a high probability (for example, 70%) of winning the favorable zone lottery.
The "7U" type cannot perform processing related to instruction functions (such as AT lottery) by referring to the set value itself, but the "7P" type can perform processing related to instruction functions by referring to the set value itself.
In the twelfth embodiment described later, most of the area within BB2 is within the advantageous zone, and a lottery is held to determine whether or not to execute the AT within this advantageous zone.

In addition, the management information display LED 74 can also be applied to pachinko gaming machines as a performance display monitor.
In this case, the management information display LED 74 (performance display monitor) is composed of a two-digit identification segment and a two-digit ratio segment, similar to the case of a slot machine (a reel-type gaming machine). It then displays the real-time (during measurement) base value (the "base value" indicates the number of safe balls per 100 out balls) for each "60,000" out balls, and the base values one time before, two times before, and three times before for each "60,000" balls in sequence. For example, the identification segment of the real-time base value is displayed as "bL.", the identification segment of the base value one time before is displayed as "b1.", the identification segment of the base value two times before is displayed as "b2.", and the identification segment of the base value three times before is displayed as "b3.".
In this way, the management information display LED 74 is not limited to slot machines, but is also applicable to pachinko machines.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
1 is a block diagram showing an outline of the control of a slot machine 10, which is an example of a gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 1 is a block diagram common to the first to fifth embodiments.
Representative control boards provided in the slot machine 10 include a main control board 50 and a sub-control board 80.
The main control board 50 has an input port 51 and an output port 52, and is equipped with an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, etc. (This does not mean that it is equipped with only those shown in FIG. 1.) The appearance of the main control board 50 and the fact that the main control board 50 is housed in a board case 56 will be described in the second embodiment (FIGS. 9 and 10).

1 , a main control board 50 and peripheral devices for game progress, including operation switches such as the bet switch 40, are electrically connected via an input port 51 or an output port 52. The input port 51 is a connection part to which signals from the operation switches and the like are input, and the output port 52 is a connection part to which signals are transmitted to peripheral devices such as the motor 32.
In FIG. 1, input peripheral devices are indicated by arrows pointing from the signals from the peripheral devices to the main control board 50, and output peripheral devices are indicated by arrows pointing from the main control board 50 to the peripheral devices (the same applies to the sub-control board 80).

The RWM 53 is a storage medium capable of storing (updating) various data (variables) based on the progress of the game, etc.
The ROM 54 is a storage medium for storing programs and various data (for example, data tables) necessary for the progress of the game.
The main CPU 55 refers to a CPU (an IC with calculation functions) provided on the main control board 50, which executes programs and performs calculations necessary for the progress of the game, and more specifically, performs the drawing of winning roles, drive control of the reels 31, and payouts when a prize is won.

Furthermore, an MPU including an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and a register is mounted on the main control board 50. The RWM 53 and the ROM 54 may be mounted inside the MPU or may be provided externally.
Incidentally, an MPU including an RWM 83, a ROM 84, and a sub-CPU 85 is also mounted on a sub-control board 80, which will be described later. Incidentally, the RWM 83 and the ROM 84 may be provided externally instead of being mounted inside the MPU.

In FIG. 1, a medal inserted through a medal insertion port 47 is sent to the inside of a medal selector.
The movement of medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 47 within the medal selector will be explained later with reference to FIG. 2 etc.
As shown in Figure 1, the medal selector is provided with a passage sensor 46, a blocker 45, and a deposit sensor 44 (a pair of deposit sensors 44a and 44b) (but is not limited to these), which are electrically connected to the main control board 50.
A medal inserted through the medal insertion port 47 is configured to be detected first by the passage sensor 46 .

Furthermore, a blocker 45 is provided downstream of the passage sensor 46. The blocker 45 is used to permit/prohibit the insertion of medals, and when the insertion of medals is not permitted, it forms a medal passage for returning medals inserted through the medal insertion port 47 from the payout port. In contrast, when the insertion of medals is permitted, it forms a medal passage for guiding medals inserted through the medal insertion port 47 to the hopper 35. The blocker 45 is composed of, for example, a switching member that blocks an opening (the opening leading to the medal return port) formed in part of the medal passage in the medal selector to form a medal passage for guiding medals to the hopper 35 side, and an actuator for driving the switching member, etc.

The blocker 45 does not permit the insertion of medals during play (from the time the reels 31 start to spin, until all reels 31 stop, and until the end of the payout corresponding to the winning combination, if a winning combination is achieved). In other words, the blocker 45 permits the insertion of medals at least when play is not being performed.

Inside the medal selector, a throw-in sensor (optical sensor) 44 is provided further downstream of the blocker 45. In this embodiment, the throw-in sensor 44 is made up of a pair of throw-in sensors 44a and 44b arranged at a predetermined distance apart, and is configured so that a medal is detected by one throw-in sensor 44a and then detected by the other throw-in sensor 44b a predetermined time later. Then, based on the timing at which the pair of throw-in sensors 44 turn on/off, it is determined whether the correct medal has been inserted.

As shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 50 is electrically connected to operation switches operated by the player, such as a bet switch 40 (40a or 40b), a start switch 41, a stop switch 42 (left, center, right), and a settlement switch 43.
Here, an "operation switch (or simply, "switch")" refers to a device (including an electrical circuit and/or electrical components) that switches an electrical signal on/off based on (receiving external force) the operation of an operating object by a player (operator), and does not limit the shape of the operating object operated by the player.

When the operation switch is in the OFF state, for example, light from the light-emitting element continues to be incident on the light-receiving element (when the light-receiving element continues to detect light, the operation switch is in the OFF state). Then, when the operation switch (the operating object) is operated by a player or the like, the light from the light-emitting element is no longer incident on the light-receiving element. When this state is detected, an electrical signal indicating that the operation switch has been turned ON is sent to the main control board 50. Note that, conversely to the above, the operation switch may be configured so that when the operation switch is in the OFF state, light from the light-emitting element does not enter the light-receiving element, and when light from the light-emitting element enters the light-receiving element, the switch is turned ON.

In this embodiment, the operating body of the start switch 41 is shaped like a lever (rod) (hence, it is also referred to as the "start lever (switch) 41"), and the operating bodies of the bet switch 40, the stop switch 42, and the settlement switch 43 are shaped like push buttons (hence, they are also referred to as the "bet button (switch) 40", the "stop button (switch) 42", and the "settlement button (switch) 43"). Note that in the fourth embodiment described below, the operating body of the stop switch 42 (the part that the player presses) is referred to as the "stop button 42a".

Although not shown in FIG. 1, an LED (light emitting means) is provided on the operating body of the operation switch and/or around or near it. When the operation of the operation switch is permitted, the LED corresponding to the operation switch emits blue light, for example, and when the operation of the operation switch is not permitted, the LED of the operation switch emits red light, for example, to indicate to the player the permitted/not permitted state of the operation switch.

Specifically, for example, when all reels 31 are spinning and the operation of the stop switch 42 is acceptable, the LEDs of all stop switches 42 are illuminated in blue to indicate to the player that they are operable. Then, when one stop switch 42 is operated, the reel 31 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is controlled to stop. The remaining stop switches 42 are then operable after the excitation state of the motor 32 corresponding to the stopped reel 31 ends and the detection sensor 42e (fourth embodiment described later) of the operated stop switch 42 turns off. Therefore, during that time, the LEDs of all stop switches 42 are illuminated in red. Then, when the excitation state of the motor 32 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 ends and the detection sensor 42e corresponding to that stop switch 42 turns off, the LED of the stop switch 42 that has already been operated continues to emit red light, but the LED of the stop switch 42 that has not yet been operated is illuminated in blue light.

The bet switch 40 is an operation switch operated by a player when betting the stored medals for the current game. In this embodiment, the bet switch 40 includes a 1 bet switch 40a for inserting one medal, and a 3 bet switch 40b for inserting three medals (the maximum number, the specified number).
However, this is not limiting, and a bet switch for betting two coins may be provided.

The specified number is determined in advance depending on, for example, when the reel is inactive/active. Specifically, it is set to three medals when the reel is inactive, when SB is active, and when 1BB is active, and two medals when 2BB is active. Operating the 1-bet switch 40a twice allows two medals to be inserted, and operating it three times allows three medals to be inserted. Also, when the specified number is three medals, operating the 3-bet switch 40b allows three medals to be inserted at once, and when the specified number is two medals, operating the 3-bet switch 40b allows two medals to be inserted at once. If the 3-bet switch 40b is operated when less than the specified number has already been bet, bet processing is performed so that the number of medals bet is three.

The start switch 41 is an operating switch that is operated by the player when starting all of the reels 31 (left, center, and right).
Furthermore, three stop switches 42 are provided corresponding to the three reels 31 (left, center, and right), and are operation switches that are operated by the player when stopping the corresponding reel 31.
Furthermore, the settlement switch 43 is an operating switch that is operated by the player when paying out medals bet and/or accumulated (credited) inside the slot machine 10 .

As shown in Fig. 1, a display board 75 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. In reality, a relay board is provided between the main control board 50 and the display board 75, and the main control board 50 and the relay board, and the relay board and the display board 75 are connected to each other, but the relay board is not shown in Fig. 1. In this way, the main control board 50 and the display board 75 may be directly connected by a harness or the like, or another board may be interposed between them.
Furthermore, the control boards are not limited to being directly connected to each other by a harness or the like, but may be connected via another separate board (relay board, etc.). For example, one or more other separate boards (relay boards, etc.) may be interposed between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80.

The display board 75 is equipped with a credit number display LED 76 and an acquisition number display LED 78 .
The credit number display LED 76 is an LED that displays the number of medals stored (credited) inside the slot machine 10, and is composed of two digits, an upper digit and a lower digit.

The winning number display LED 78 is an LED that displays the payout number (the number of winnings won by the player) when a winning combination is achieved, and like the credit number display LED 76, is composed of two digits, an upper digit and a lower digit.
The acquired number display LED 78 may be controlled to be turned off when there are no medals to be paid out. Alternatively, the upper digits may be turned off and only the lower digits may display "0".

Furthermore, the acquisition number display LED 78 normally displays the acquisition number, but when an error occurs, it also functions as an LED that displays the content (type) of the error.
Furthermore, the acquisition number display LED 78 functions as an LED that displays push order instruction information (indicates advantageous push order) in a game in which the push order is notified during the AT. Therefore, the acquisition number display LED 78 in this embodiment is an LED that also displays the acquisition number, error content, and push order instruction information. However, it is not limited to this, and it is of course possible to provide a dedicated LED for displaying push order instruction information.
During the AT, notification of advantageous button pressing sequences is also performed by the image display device 23 connected to the sub-control board 80.

In FIG. 1, a main control board 50 is electrically connected to a motor (a stepping motor in this embodiment) 32 of the symbol display device and the like.
The symbol display device includes reels 31 (three in this embodiment) that display symbols, motors 32 that drive each of the reels 31 , and a reel sensor 33 that detects the position of the reels 31 .

The motor 32 is a driving means for rotating the reels 31, is connected to the rotation center of each reel 31, and is controlled by the reel control means 65 described below. Here, the reels 31 consist of a left reel 31, a center reel 31, and a right reel 31, and the stop switch 42 operated to stop the left reel 31 is the left stop switch 42, the stop switch 42 operated to stop the center reel 31 is the center stop switch 42, and the stop switch 42 operated to stop the right reel 31 is the right stop switch 42.

The reel 31 is ring-shaped, and has a reel tape attached to its outer periphery on which a number of types of symbols (symbols constituting symbol combinations corresponding to winning combinations) are printed.
Each reel 31 is provided with one index (it may be two or more). The index is provided in a convex shape, for example, on the peripheral side of the reel 31, and is used to detect whether the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position, whether it has made one rotation, etc. Each index is detected by a reel sensor 33. A signal from the reel sensor 33 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. When an index detects (breaks) the reel sensor 33, the input signal is input to the main control board 50, and it is detected that the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position.

The symbol on the reference position at the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 is stored in advance in the ROM 54. This makes it possible to detect the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the index is detected. Furthermore, it becomes possible to identify how many pulses the (stepping) motor 32 needs to be driven from the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 in order to stop the symbol on the pay line, counting from the symbol on the reference position.

The main control board 50 is also electrically connected to a medal payout device. The medal payout device includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper motor 36 that is driven when medals in the hopper 35 are paid out from a payout port, and a payout sensor 37 for detecting medals paid out from the hopper motor 36.

The medals that are received through the medal insertion port 47 and accepted (determined to be normal) are configured to be stored in the hopper 35 .
In this embodiment, the payout sensor (optical sensor) 37 is made up of a pair of payout sensors 37a and 37b arranged at a predetermined distance apart. When a medal is paid out, a predetermined moving member (a movable piece 39a in FIG. 7 described later) is moved by the medal. The movement of the predetermined moving member turns the payout sensors 37a and 37b on/off. Whether or not the medals have been paid out correctly is determined based on whether or not the payout sensors 37a and 37b have been turned on/off within a predetermined time range.

For example, when the pair of payout sensors 37 are not detected as being on even though the hopper motor 36 is being driven, it is determined that no medals have been paid out, and a hopper error (no medals) is detected.
On the other hand, when at least one of the payout sensors 37 continues to output an ON signal, it is detected that a medal jam has occurred.
Details of these operations will be described later with reference to FIGS.

When a player starts a game, he or she inserts medals that have been credited in advance by operating the bet switch 40 (accumulated bet) or inserts medals manually through the medal insertion slot 47 (maintenance bet). When the start switch 41 is operated with the specified number of medals for that game bet, a signal is generated at that time and input to the main control board 50. When the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 described below) receives this signal, it performs a lottery using the role selection means 61 and controls the drive of all motors 32 to rotate all reels 31. In this way, the reels 31 are rotated by the motors 32, and the symbols on the reels 31 are displayed moving up and down within the display window at a predetermined speed.

Then, the player presses a stop switch 42 to stop the rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to that stop switch 42 (for example, the left reel 31 corresponding to the left stop switch 42). When the stop switch 42 is operated, the signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 described later) receives this signal, it drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to that stop switch 42, and controls the stop of the reel 31 related to that motor 32 so as to correspond to the lottery result of the role selection means 61 (the result determined by the internal selection means).

The game result of the current game is displayed based on the symbol combination when all reels 31 stop. Furthermore, when a symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination stops on an active line (when that winning combination is won), the medals corresponding to the winning combination are paid out, etc.

Next, a specific configuration of the main control board 50 will be described.
1, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the following role selection means 61, etc. The following means in this embodiment are merely examples, and are not limited to the means shown in this embodiment.

The role selection means 61 selects (determines, selects) the winning number. Here, the "selection of the winning number by the role selection means 61" is the same as the "internal lottery" in the Entertainment and Amusement Act Regulations (regulations on the certification of gaming machines and the inspection of models, etc., hereinafter simply referred to as the "Regulations"). The result of the selection by the role selection means 61 is the same as the "result determined by the internal lottery" in the Regulations. Therefore, the role selection means 61 is also referred to as the "internal lottery means 61" in accordance with the Regulations.
When the winning number is determined by the role selection means 61, the winning and replay condition device number and the role condition device number are determined based on the winning number, and the winning and replay condition devices and the role condition devices that are operable in the game are determined. For this reason, the role selection means 61 is also called a condition device number determination (lottery or selection) means, a winning role determination (lottery or selection) means, etc.

The winning lottery means 61 includes, for example, a random number generating means for the lottery (such as a hardware random number generator), a random number extracting means for extracting the random numbers generated by the random number generating means, and a winning number determining means for determining the winning number based on the random number value extracted by the random number extracting means.

The random number generating means generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, "0" to "65535" in decimal). The random numbers are generated by a counter that performs one count every 200 n (nano) seconds, and continues to count the range of "0" to "65535" as one cycle, and continues to count random numbers while the slot machine 10 is powered on.

The random number extraction means extracts the random number generated by the random number generation means at a predetermined time, which in this embodiment is when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) by the player. The determination means compares the random number value extracted by the random number extraction means with a lottery table described later, and determines the winning number corresponding to the area to which the random number value belongs.

The winning flag control means 62 controls the on/off of the winning flag corresponding to each role based on the lottery results by the role selection means 61. In this embodiment, a winning flag is provided for each role for all roles. When any role is selected as a winning role in the lottery by the role selection means 61, the winning flag for that role is turned on (the winning flag is set). Note that winning roles can occur when there is one winning role (single win) or when there are multiple winning roles (multiple wins).

The push order instruction number selection means 63 selects (determines) a push order instruction number (a number corresponding to the correct push order) based on the result of the winning number selection by the role selection means 61 (when the push order bell or push order replay is won).
The "push order" of the push order instruction number selected here means the push order that is advantageous to the player (the correct push order). For example, when the push order bell is won, it refers to the push order that will result in a high bell (the correct push order). Also, when a replay is won twice, it refers to the push order that will promote the player to an advantageous RT or will not cause the player to fall into an unfavorable RT.

In this embodiment, each winning number is provided with its own unique push order instruction number.
Then, when the push order bell or push order replay is won during the AT, the main control board 50 displays push order instruction information corresponding to the push order instruction number, specifically information such as "=*"("*" = 1, 2, ...), on the above-mentioned winning number display LED 78. In this way, the function of displaying push order instruction information when a condition device having an advantageous push order is activated is also called an instruction function.
In addition, when the push order bell or push order replay is won during the AT, the main control board 50 sends a command corresponding to the push order instruction number to the sub-control board 80 at the start of the game (after the start switch 41 is operated and the winning number is determined).
When the sub-control board 80 receives this command, it displays an image of the correct button press sequence on the image display device 23.

Note that the push order instruction number selected by the main control board 50 can only be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 during the advantageous period (AT). Therefore, even if a push order instruction number is selected by the push order instruction number selection means 63 during the normal period, that push order instruction number will not be transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Note that it is not necessary to select a push order instruction number during the normal period.

The performance group number selection means 64 selects a performance group number corresponding to the winning number and is to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 .
Here, the effect group number corresponding to the winning number is determined in advance. Then, when the start switch 41 is operated to determine the winning number, the effect group number selection means 64 selects the effect group number corresponding to the winning number of the game, and the main control board 50 transmits the selected effect group number to the sub-control board 80. The sub-control board 80 outputs an effect related to the winning role based on the received effect group number. Unlike the push order instruction number, the effect group number is selected for each game and transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80.

In addition, the main control board 50 does not transmit the winning number of the game to the sub-control board 80. Therefore, the sub-control board 80 cannot know the winning number of the game. However, since the sub-control board 80 receives the effect group number for each game, it is possible to output an effect based on the received effect group number. However, even when the push order bell or push order replay is won, the correct push order cannot be determined from the effect group number, so the sub-control board 80 does not notify the correct push order based on the effect group number. In contrast, during the AT, when the push order bell or push order replay is won, the main control board 50 transmits a push order instruction number to the sub-control board 80. This allows the sub-control board 80 to notify the correct push order based on the received push order instruction number.

When the reel control means 65 receives a command to start rotating the reels 31, particularly when it detects operation of the start switch 41 in this embodiment, it controls all (three) reels 31 to start rotating.
Furthermore, after the winning number is determined by the role selection means 61, the reel control means 65 refers to the on/off state of the winning flag for the current game and selects a stop position determination table corresponding to the on/off state of the winning flag, and when the stop switch 42 is operated, determines the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 based on the timing when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, and drives and controls the motor 32 to stop the reel 31 at the determined position.

For example, in a game in which at least one winning flag is on, the reel control means 65 controls the reel 31 to stop within the range of the reel 31 stop control so that a symbol combination corresponding to a winning role (a role for which the winning flag is on) can be stopped on an active line, and controls the reel 31 to stop so that a symbol combination corresponding to a role other than the winning role (a role for which the winning flag is off) is not stopped on an active line.

Here, "within the range of the stopping control of the reel 31" means within the range of the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated to the moment the reel 31 actually stops or the amount of rotation of the reel 31 (the number of moving symbols (frames)).
In this embodiment, the reel 31 rotates at a constant speed of approximately 80 rotations per minute.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated to the moment the reel 31 is stopped is set to within 190 ms, except for a specific reel 31 during MB operation (for example, the center reel 31). As a result, in this embodiment, the maximum number of moving symbols from the symbol at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated to the moment the reel 31 is stopped is set to four symbols, except for a specific reel 31 during MB operation.

On the other hand, for a specific reel 31 during MB operation, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set to within 75 ms. As a result, for a specific reel 31 during MB operation, the maximum number of moving symbols from the symbol at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to one symbol.

Then, at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, if any of the symbols within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 is a symbol that should be stopped on a predetermined effective line, the symbol is controlled to stop on the predetermined effective line when the stop switch 42 is operated.
In other words, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated and the symbol of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number does not stop on the specified pay line, the reel 31 is controlled to rotate and move within the range of the reel 31's stop control until the reel 31 is stopped, so that the symbol of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number is stopped on the specified pay line as much as possible (pull-in stop control).

Conversely, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated, and a symbol combination of a winning combination not corresponding to the winning number stops on an active line, the reel 31 is controlled to rotate and move within the range of the reel 31 stop control when the reel 31 stops, so that the symbol combination of a winning combination not corresponding to the winning number does not stop on an active line (kick-off stop control).
Furthermore, in a game in which multiple winning combinations are achieved (for example, when the push order bell is achieved), the priority of the winning combinations is predetermined according to the order of pushing the stop switch 42 and the timing of operating the stop switch 42, and the pulling-in stop control of the symbol associated with the most prioritized combination is performed according to the predetermined priority order.

The winning determination means 66 determines whether or not the symbol combination on the reel 31 that has stopped on the pay line corresponds to any winning combination when the reel 31 stops.
Here, the winning determination means 66 does not actually detect whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has stopped on an active line. Specifically, based on the condition device operated in the game and the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and/or the operation timing of the stop switch 42, the winning determination means 66 determines in advance the symbol combination that will stop on an active line before the reel 31 actually stops, or determines in advance the symbol combination that will stop on an active line after the reel 31 stops.

The control command transmitting means 71 transmits to the sub-control board 80 information (control commands) required for the performance to be output by the sub-control board 80 .
Control commands include, for example, information when the bet switch 40 is operated, information when the start switch 41 is operated, push order instruction number (only during AT and when a winning number with the correct push order is won), performance group number, RT (game status) information, information when the stop switch 42 is operated, information on the winning role, etc.

In FIG. 1, a sub-control board 80 controls the selection and output of effects (information) during play and during game standby.
Here, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 50 (control command transmitting means 71) transmits information (control commands) necessary for outputting the performance unidirectionally to the sub-control board 80 via parallel communication.
The main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are not limited to being electrically connected, but may be connected using optical communication means. Furthermore, both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection are not limited to parallel communication, but may be serial communication, or serial communication and parallel communication may be used in combination.

Similar to the main control board 50, the sub-control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, and a sub-CPU 85.
The sub-control board 80 is electrically connected to the following performance peripheral devices such as the performance lamps 21 as shown in Fig. 1 via an input port 81 or an output port 82. However, the performance peripheral devices are not limited to these.
The RWM 83 is a storage medium capable of temporarily storing data etc. acquired when the sub-CPU 85 controls the performance.
The ROM 84 is a storage medium that stores programs and various data, such as those used when conducting lotteries related to performance, as performance data.

The performance lamps 21 are, for example, LEDs, and light up in a predetermined pattern when a predetermined condition is met. The performance lamps 21 include back lamps that are arranged on the inner circumference of each reel 31 and illuminate the symbols displayed on the reels 31 (three consecutive symbols visible from above and below through the display window) from behind, fluorescent lamps that illuminate the symbols on the reels 31 from above the reels 31, and frame lamps that are arranged in front of the front door of the slot machine 10 and flash when a winning combination is achieved, etc.

The speaker 22 also outputs a predetermined sound when a predetermined condition is satisfied in order to provide various effects during the game.
Furthermore, the image display device 23 consists of an LCD display, an organic EL display, a dot display, etc., and displays various presentation images during play (such as correct button presses, presentations corresponding to the conditional devices activated in the game), game information (such as the number of plays and number of coins won when the reels are activated or during the advantageous zone (AT)), etc.

Fig. 2 is a schematic diagram seen from the front, showing the state of a medal M inserted through the medal insertion port 47 until it passes through insertion sensors 44a and 44b. Fig. 2 shows the inside of the medal selector. The medals M are indicated as M1 to M4 according to their positions. Position M1 indicates the state in which the medal M is placed on the medal placement section 47b of the medal insertion port 47 (the state before being released). That is, at position M1, when viewed from the front, the lowest point of the outer periphery of the medal M abuts against the upper surface of the medal placement section 47b.
In addition, in Figure 2 (and Figure 4 described later), the entire approximately square portion shown as the input sensors 44a and 44b is considered to be the light receiving and emitting range (sensor eye) of the input sensors 44a and 44b, respectively (not the housings of the input sensors 44a and 44b, respectively).

Moreover, position M2 indicates the position at the moment when medal M becomes invisible when viewed from the front. That is, position M2 is the position where the highest point of the outer periphery of medal M overlaps with the upper surface of medal placement section 47b. For example, if a player releases medal M when medal M is at position M1, medal M will fall from position M1. Therefore, at position M2, medal M has been released from the player's hand and is falling (moving) downstream.
In addition, the "upstream side" refers to the side of the medal insertion port 47, and the "downstream side" refers to the side of the insertion sensor 44b (the side of the hopper 35). In terms of the position of the medal M, from the upstream side to the downstream side, it is M1 → M2 → M3 → M4.

In the example of FIG. 2, the passage sensor 46 is disposed so that when the medal M is located at M2, the passage sensor 46 detects the medal M.
Furthermore, the position M3 indicates the position at the moment when the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a (ON), and the position M4 indicates the position at the moment when the medal M is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b (OFF).

The medal insertion slot 47 is a portion where a player inserts a medal M into the slot machine 10 (medal selector) when betting or crediting a medal M as a gaming medium. The medal insertion slot 47 has a medal guard portion 47a and a medal placement portion 47b. The medal placement portion 47b has a substantially curved surface (a curved surface with a curvature slightly greater than the periphery of the medal M) that extends perpendicularly to the paper surface of the drawing, so that multiple (up to about 10) stacked medals M can be placed thereon at the same time.

The generally curved surface of the medal placing portion 47b and the surface of the medal guard portion 47a with which the medal M comes into contact (the surface visible in FIG. 2) are formed so as to intersect generally perpendicularly.
2, the portion where the medal placing section 47b and the medal guard section 47a intersect has an opening through which one medal M can fall. When two medals M are stacked, the medal M does not fall from the opening, but when the medal M is the thickness of one medal M, the opening is designed to allow the medal M to fall. For this reason, a player can, for example, place multiple medals M stacked on the medal placing section 47b, and by pressing the multiple medals M toward the medal guard section 47a while increasing or decreasing the pressing force, drop the medals M placed on the medal placing section 47b one by one from the opening into the medal selector.

When a medal M is inserted (released downward) through the medal insertion port 47, the medal M flows down a passage in the medal selector. Inside the medal selector, from the upstream side, a passage sensor 46, insertion sensor 44a, and insertion sensor 44b are provided. Furthermore, the above-mentioned blocker 45 is provided between the passage sensor 46 and insertion sensor 44a (below insertion sensor 44a in FIG. 2).

When a medal M enters the medal selector, it is first detected by the passage sensor 46. The passage sensor 46 is a sensor provided to determine whether there is a medal jam or cheating, and if the passage sensor 46 detects the medal M for a (predetermined) specified time from the time it detects it, and if it no longer detects the medal M after the specified time has passed, it is determined to be normal. In contrast, if the passage sensor 46 continues to detect the medal M even after the specified time has passed after detecting it, it is determined to have a medal retention error. Also, if the passage sensor 46 detects the medal M and then stops detecting it before the specified time has passed, it is determined to have been an illegal passage of the medal M.

When the medal M flows down the medal passage, it reaches the position of the blocker 45. The blocker 45 is located on the underside of the medal passage. When the blocker 45 is in the on state (the output port related to the blocker 45 among the output ports 52 is on), it forms a medal flow path so that the medal M can be detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. In other words, it has the role of sending the medal M that has moved from the upstream side to the insertion sensors 44a and 44b side without sending it out of the medal passage.

In contrast, when the blocker 45 is in the off state (the output port associated with the blocker 45 among the output ports 52 is off), the blocker 45 moves so as to shift vertically relative to the plane of the drawing in FIG. 2, forming an opening (a pitfall) in the medal passage. As a result, when the blocker 45 is in the off state, the medal M falls from this opening just before reaching M3, and is sent out of the medal passage (M5 in FIG. 2). The medal M that falls from this opening is returned to the medal return port (not shown) without being detected by the insertion sensor 44a.

For example, when the specified number of games has already been bet and the number of credits has reached the upper limit, no more medals can be bet or credited, so the blocker 45 is controlled to the off state. As a result, even if a medal M is inserted from the medal insertion port 47 in this state, it will fall from the opening and be returned to the medal return port.
In contrast, when the blocker 45 is in the on state, the opening is blocked by the blocker 45, so that the medal M flowing down the medal passage passes over the blocker 45 and can move toward the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.

In this embodiment, the blocker 45 is positioned as shown in FIG. 2, but the positioning is not limited to this. It is sufficient that the passage sensor 46 can detect the medal M regardless of the on/off state of the blocker 45, that the medal M can be guided to the insertion sensors 44a and 44b when the blocker 45 is on, and that the medal M can be sent to the medal return port without being detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b when the blocker 45 is off. In other words, the blocker 45 should be located between the passage sensor 46 and the insertion sensor 44a.

The passage sensor 46 only needs to be located upstream of the blocker 45, and only needs to be located in a position where it can detect the medal M inserted through the medal insertion port 47 even when the blocker 45 is off. In addition, in FIG. 2, the passage sensor 46 is located so that it can detect the medal M when it is located at M2, but this is not limited thereto, and it is also possible to position the passage sensor 46 so that it can detect the medal M when it moves further downstream than the position of M2.

The insertion sensors 44a and 44b are sensors for detecting the medal M that has passed through the blocker 45, and these two sensors are installed at a predetermined distance apart. First, when the medal M reaches position M3, the upstream insertion sensor 44a becomes able to detect the medal M (changes from off to on). When the medal M flows further downstream, the insertion sensor 44b next detects the medal M (changes from off to on). By determining the on/off timing of these two insertion sensors 44a and 44b, it is determined whether the inserted medal M is normal or not. When the medal M reaches position M4, it is no longer detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. The medal M that has passed the insertion sensors 44a and 44b is sent to the hopper 35.

In FIG. 2, the medal selector is designed as follows.
First, time T2 is set as the time from the moment when medal M reaches position M2, i.e., when the medal selector is viewed from the front, when medal M becomes invisible, to the moment when medal M reaches position M4, i.e., the position at which medal M is no longer detected by insertion sensor 44b (the movement trajectory is shown by a dotted line in Figure 2). Note that this is the value when medal M is released from hand (at an initial speed of "0") when medal M is located at M1 and thrown downward. Therefore, the speed when medal M is located at M2 exceeds "0".

Furthermore, the acceleration of the medal M increases as it moves further downward from position M2. Meanwhile, in Fig. 2, an impact member (not shown in Fig. 2) is provided at the portion where the medal passage bends from the vertical to the horizontal. When the medal M comes into contact with this impact member, the speed of the medal M is decelerated and it moves toward the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.
The time from the moment when the medal M is positioned at M3 (the moment when it is detected by the insertion sensor 44a) to the moment when it is positioned at M4 (the moment when it is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b) is set to time T3.

<First embodiment (A)>
FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a time chart for explaining the first embodiment (A) of the present embodiments.
FIG. 3 shows the voltage levels when the power to the slot machine 10 is turned off (for example, when the power switch 11 is turned off or when a power outage occurs).
3, the voltage when the power supply is normally on is designated as a supply level V0. At the supply level V0, the slot machine 10 operates normally.

3 shows an example in which a power interruption occurs (an event occurs in which the supply of power is cut off) at time S11. In this embodiment, when a power interruption occurs, the voltage drops to a power interruption detection level V1 at time T0.
The time T0 from when a power outage occurs (time S11; supply level V0) to when the power outage is detected (time S12; power outage detection level V1) is designed to be at least 20 interrupts (1 interrupt time 2.235 ms x 20 interrupts = 44.7 ms).
A voltage monitoring device (power interruption detection circuit) (not shown) is provided on the main control board 50. When the power supply voltage falls below a power interruption detection level V1, which is a predetermined value, a power interruption detection signal is input to a predetermined bit in the input port 51, and a power interruption is detected by detecting whether or not the signal has been input.

When the voltage continues to drop from the power interruption detection level V1 and falls below the drive voltage limit V2 of the main CPU 55, it becomes impossible to drive the main CPU 55 (the operation of the main CPU 55 cannot be guaranteed).
3 shows an example in which the voltage level reaches the drive voltage limit V2 of the main CPU 55 at time S13 and then drops to Low. Since the main control board 50 cannot execute power-off processing when the voltage falls below the drive voltage limit V2, it is set so that when a power-off occurs at time S11, the power-off processing can be completed at least by time S13.

Furthermore, power interruption detection is performed within an interrupt process that is executed every 2.235 ms, but if a power interruption is detected in two consecutive interrupts, the power interruption process is executed in the next interrupt process. Therefore, time S12 in Fig. 3 is the timing when the voltage is determined to be equal to or lower than the power interruption detection level V1 in two consecutive interrupt processes, and a power interruption is detected. Then, the power interruption process is executed in the next interrupt process.
In the interrupt process, the following process is executed. First, it is determined whether or not a power cut has been detected, and if a power cut has been detected, the process proceeds to power cut process (without proceeding to normal interrupt process). In the power cut process, the output port 52 is first turned off. The process of turning off the output port 52 turns off the blocker 45. Furthermore, after sequentially executing a process of saving the stack pointer, a process of setting a power cut process completion flag (a flag for determining whether or not a power cut has been performed normally), a process of executing a checksum of the RWM 53, a process of inhibiting writing to the RWM 53, and the like, the process enters a reset wait state (loop process state). This reset wait state is, by design, a state in which no process is performed.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 3, in the interrupt process next to the interrupt process in which the power cut is detected (time S12), the power cut process is executed and the blocker 45 is turned off.
Note that the power cut processing may be executed not only in the interrupt processing following the interrupt processing in which the power cut is detected, but also within the interrupt processing in which the power cut is detected. In this case, T1=S12-S11.

Meanwhile, Figure 3 also shows the medal positions (M2, M4) after the medals are inserted. In Figure 2, assume that the player releases medal M when it is at position M1. In this case, medal M falls at an initial velocity of "0". As a result, medal M is released into the medal selector. In Figure 3, the time S11 when the power outage occurs is made to coincide with the time when medal M reaches position M2.

As shown in Figure 2, the time from the moment medal M is positioned at M2 to the moment it is positioned at M4 is designated as T2, and similarly in Figure 3, medal M is assumed to be positioned at M4 after the time T2 has elapsed from the moment medal M is positioned at M2.
In this case, the present embodiment is designed to satisfy the relationship "T2>T1."

Therefore, if a power outage occurs at the moment when medal M is positioned at M2, the power outage process is executed before medal M reaches M4, and the insertion sensor 44b no longer detects medal M. Therefore, if a power outage occurs at the moment when medal M is positioned at M2, that medal M is sent to the medal return port (lower tray) without being detected by the insertion sensor 44b. For this reason, that medal M does not pass normally through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. Therefore, although that medal M is swallowed, the process of adding "1" to the medal M (adding "1" to the bet or credit) is not executed after the power outage occurs (after time S11). This makes it possible to eliminate the possibility of a bet or credit process being executed after a power outage occurs.

For example, if a power outage occurs at the moment when medal M is positioned at M2, when time T1 has elapsed (during power outage processing), and medal M is positioned just before M4 in Figure 2 (after medal M has passed position M3), the medal M will be detected by insertion sensor 44a but not by insertion sensor 44b, and the power will be turned off.
In addition, if a power outage occurs at the moment when medal M is positioned at M2, when time T1 has elapsed (at the time of power outage processing), if medal M is positioned upstream of position M3 in Figure 2, the medal M will be detected by neither the insertion sensor 44a nor the insertion sensor 44b, and the power will be turned off.

In addition, in FIG. 2, the time from the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2 to the moment when it is positioned at M3 is defined as time T2'.
In this case, it is preferable to design so as to satisfy the relationship "T2'>T1".
In the case of a design based on the above relationship, if a power outage occurs at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, the blocker 45 is in the off state when the medal M reaches M3 due to the execution of the power outage process. Therefore, the medal M is sent out of the medal passage without being detected by the insertion sensor 44a, and is sent to the medal return port.

Here, the differences between the conventional technology and the first embodiment (A) will be described.
Conventionally, if a power outage occurs at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the medal M has already passed the position of the insertion sensor 44b by the time the power outage is detected and the blocker 45 is turned off. Therefore, after the power outage occurs, a medal "1" addition process (bet process or credit process) is executed. However, it is not preferable to execute a medal addition process after a power outage occurs. This is because all processes related to the progress of the game should be stopped promptly after the power outage occurs.
Therefore, by configuring as in the first embodiment (A), even if a power outage occurs at the moment when a player inserts a medal M into the medal insertion port 47 and the medal M is positioned at M2 (immediately after insertion), the process of adding "1" to the medal is not executed, thereby improving the functionality of the slot machine 10.

<First embodiment (B)>
In the first embodiment (B), the relationship between the input sensors 44a and 44b and the power cut is defined.
4 is a front view showing the process from when the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a until it is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b. In FIG. 4, the arrow direction indicates the proceeding (flowing down) direction of the medal M.
4A shows the moment when the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a. At this time, the insertion sensor 44a changes from off to on, and the insertion sensor 44b remains off. This position corresponds to M3 in FIG. 2.

Next, when the medal M advances to the left in Fig. 4 and reaches the state shown in Fig. 4(b), the insertion sensor 44a remains in the state of detecting the medal M, and the insertion sensor 44b begins to detect the medal M. Thus, in Fig. 4(b), the insertion sensor 44a is on, and this is the moment when the insertion sensor 44b changes from off to on.
In Fig. 4, even when the insertion sensors 44a and 44b overlap the medal M, both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b and the medal M are shown with solid lines, but this does not represent the positional relationship between the medal M and the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. The insertion sensors 44a and 44b may be disposed on the front side or the back side of the medal M in the vertical direction of the paper surface of Fig. 4.

4C, both of the insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect the medal M. Therefore, in this case, the insertion sensor 44a is ON, and the insertion sensor 44b is also ON.
Here, the diameter of the medal M is, for example, 25 millimeters (so-called 25 pi (φ)) for the general specifications and 30 millimeters (so-called 30 pi (φ)) for the special specifications. Therefore, it is necessary to set the distance between the insertion sensors 44a and 44b so that the state of FIG. 4(c) can be reached. Here, as will be described later, whether or not a medal insertion error is determined is determined depending on whether or not the state of FIG. 4(c), i.e., whether the time during which both insertion sensors 44a and 44b are on (detecting the medal M), is within a predetermined range. Therefore, the distance between the insertion sensors 44a and 44b also differs depending on how the time during which both insertion sensors 44a and 44b are on is set.

When the medal M advances further from the state shown in FIG. 4(c), the insertion sensor 44a no longer detects the medal M, as shown in FIG. 4(d). In this case, the insertion sensor 44a changes from on to off, and the insertion sensor 44b remains on. When the medal M advances further, the insertion sensor 44b no longer detects the medal M, as shown in FIG. 4(e). Therefore, in this case, the insertion sensor 44a remains off, and the insertion sensor 44b changes from on to off. The position of the medal M in FIG. 4(e) corresponds to M4 in FIG. 2.

5 is a time chart showing the on/off of the input sensors 44a and 44b. In FIG. 5, time S21 is the moment when the input sensor 44a changes from off to on (the input sensor 44b remains off), and corresponds to the timing of FIG. 4(a).
Next, the time when the insertion sensor 44b detects the medal M (changes from off to on) (FIG. 4(b)) is set as S22. Furthermore, the time when the insertion sensor 44a no longer detects the medal M (changes from on to off) (FIG. 4(d)) is set as S23. Furthermore, the time when the insertion sensor 44b no longer detects the medal M (changes from on to off) (FIG. 4(e)) is set as S24.

Here, if the time Ta (between times S21 and S23) during which the insertion sensor 44a detects the medal M is within the range of 6.705 ms (3 interrupts) or more and less than 185.505 ms (83 interrupts) (condition 1), the main control board 50 determines that the medal M has passed normally, and if it is outside this range, it determines that a medal passing error has occurred.

Furthermore, if the time Tb during which both insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect the medal M (between time S22 and S23) is within the range of 4.47 ms (2 interrupts) or more and less than 118.455 ms (53 interrupts) (condition 2), the main control board 50 determines that the medal M has passed normally, and if it is outside this range, it determines that a medal passing error has occurred.

Furthermore, if the time Tc (between times S22 and S24) during which the insertion sensor 44b detects the medal M is within the range of 6.705 ms (3 interrupts) or more and less than 185.505 ms (83 interrupts) (condition 3), the main control board 50 determines that the medal M has passed normally, and if it is outside this range, it determines that a medal passing error has occurred.
When all of the above conditions 1 to 3 are met, the passage of the medal M is determined to be normal, and when at least one of the conditions is not met, a medal passage error is determined.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5, when both the input sensors 44a and 44b are turned off (time S24), the input monitoring counter is decremented by "1".
Here, the insertion monitoring counter is a counter that becomes "+1" when the passage sensor 46 described above detects a medal M, and becomes "-1" when a medal passes through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b normally (when both insertion sensors 44a and 44b change from off to on to off, i.e., at time S24). In other words, under normal circumstances, the counter alternates between "1" and "0."
On the other hand, when the passage sensor 46 does not detect the medal M and only the insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect the passage of a medal, the insertion monitoring counter becomes "-1" and the main control board 50 determines that a medal passage error has occurred.

Furthermore, when the passage sensor 46 detects a medal M (insertion monitoring counter = "+1") and the insertion sensors 44a and 44b do not detect the passage of a medal M, if the passage sensor 46 further detects a medal M and the insertion monitoring counter reaches a predetermined value of "2" or greater, the main control board 50 determines that a medal jam error has occurred. For example, if the normal value of the insertion monitoring counter is set to "0" to "2," the main control board 50 may determine that a medal jam error has occurred when the insertion monitoring counter reaches "3" or greater.
The on-monitoring counter is cleared when the blocker 45 changes from the off state to the on state.

In FIG. 5, at time S24, when the insertion sensor 44b goes from on to off, the insertion monitoring counter is decremented by "1", and it is determined that the medal M has passed normally, the main control board 50 executes the medal insertion process (bet process or credit process). For example, if the number of bets at that time is less than the specified number, a process of adding "1" to the number of bets is executed. Specifically, if the specified number for the game is "3" and the number of bets at that time is "0", the process of adding "1" to the number of bets updates the number of bets from "0" to "1".

Also, if the number of bets has already reached the specified number at that time, and the number of credits has not yet reached the maximum number of "50", a process of adding "1" to the number of credits is executed. For example, if the number of credits at that time is "10", the number of credits is updated to "11".
When the number of bets reaches the specified number and the number of credits reaches the maximum number "50", the main control board 50 turns off the blocker 45. As a result, even if a medal M is inserted from the medal insertion slot 47, the medal M is returned. In other words, in that case, even if the medal M is inserted, it will not be detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.

5 shows the timing when a power outage occurs and when a power outage is detected, in addition to the on/off of the input sensors 44a and 44b. In FIG. 5, examples 1 and 2 are shown, and both examples show a case where a power outage occurs when the input sensor 44a changes from off to on (time S21).
In Example 1, the power outage is detected after a time T1 has elapsed from the time S21 when the power outage occurred. Here, in Example 1, "T1>T3" is set. Therefore, in the case where the insertion sensor 44a detects a medal M at the moment when the power outage occurs, the process of adding "1" to the medal M has already been performed when the power outage process is started.

Here, the time T3 from time S21 to time S24 can be expressed as "Ta+Tc-Tb." Therefore, the minimum time of the time T3 corresponds to four interrupts, which is "8.94 ms."
The maximum time for time T3 corresponds to 113 interrupts and is "252.555 ms".
In Example 1, the power-off process is always set to be executed after time S24 has elapsed. Therefore, for example, the time T1 from the occurrence of the power-off (time S21) to the execution of the power-off process is set to be 114 interrupts or more.

If you set it up as described above, even if a power outage occurs at the moment the insertion sensor 44a detects the medal M (time S21), the power outage process is executed after the medal M is added by "1", so the medal M is bet or credited normally. This makes it possible to prevent the medal M from being swallowed.

In addition, Example 2 is an example in which the power-off process is executed before the process of adding "1" to the medal M is executed, which is the opposite of Example 1. That is, in Example 2, the relationship is set to be "T1<T3".
As described above, the time T3 from time S21 to time S24 corresponds to 4 interrupts at the minimum. Therefore, in order to satisfy the relationship of "T1<T3", it is necessary to execute the power-off process within 3 interrupts from the occurrence of the power outage. However, since it is difficult to set the power-off process to be executed within 3 interrupts from the occurrence of the power outage, the minimum time of the time Tc is set to be longer than 4 interrupts. For example, the minimum time of the time Tc can be set to 15 interrupts. Then, if the time T1 from the occurrence of the power outage (time S21) to the power-off process is set to about 10 interrupts, it becomes possible to execute the power-off process before the time S24 when the power outage occurs at time S21.

When the power-off process is executed, the process of adding "1" to the medal M (bet or credit) is not executed thereafter. Therefore, in Example 2, even if the insertion sensor 44a detects the medal M at time S21 (when the power-off occurs), the process of adding "1" to the medal M1 is not executed. As a result, there is the disadvantage that the medal M is swallowed, but as explained in the first embodiment (A), after the power-off occurs, the power-off process can be executed as quickly as possible without executing the process of adding "1" to the medal M, etc.

<First embodiment (C)>
In the first embodiment (C), the relationship between the dispensing sensors 37a and 37b and power interruption is defined.
When the medals to be paid out are added to the credits, the hopper motor 36 is not driven, and the memory area for the number of credits provided in the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 is updated. Furthermore, the value indicated by the credit number display LED 76 is updated so that it corresponds to the number of credits stored in the memory area.

When medals are to be paid out after the credit number has reached the upper limit of "50", the hopper motor 36 is driven to pay out the medals from the hopper 35 (discharge them from the payout port). In this case, the payout sensors 37a and 37b are configured to detect the on/off state each time a medal is paid out. If the on/off detection results of the payout sensors 37a and 37b are within the normal range, it is determined that one medal M has been correctly paid out, and if the detection result is not within the normal range, it is determined that the medal M has not been correctly paid out, and the main control board 50 determines that a medal payout error has occurred.

Figure 6 is a plan view explaining the operation when medals M are paid out from the medal payout device. Although not shown in Figure 6, a hopper disk (a rotating disk in a substantially circular shape) is attached to the bottom of the hopper 35, and this hopper disk is rotated by driving the hopper motor 36. This hopper disk has a plurality of openings formed along the outer periphery of the hopper disk that can hold medals M. The medals M in the hopper 35 are configured to enter the openings of the hopper disk. When the hopper motor 36 is driven in this state, the hopper disk rotates and medals M held in the openings of the hopper disk are discharged one by one. When the medals M are discharged and the opening becomes empty, new medals M from the hopper 35 enter the opening.

In FIG. 6, the medal M located at M1 is shown immediately after being discharged from the opening of the hopper disk. Both the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b are components that constitute the medal payout device. The fixed shaft 38a is an axis that does not move when the medal M is paid out. In contrast, the movable shaft 38b is an axis that moves back and forth each time a medal M is paid out. In an unloaded state, the movable shaft 38b is disposed at a position shown by a solid line in the figure, and is biased toward the fixed shaft 38a by a spring (not shown in FIG. 6; it corresponds to spring 39b in FIG. 7, which will be described later). The medal M (M1) immediately after being discharged from the opening of the hopper disk is in a state of contact with both the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b.
6, when the medal M is placed at the position (M1) shown by the solid line and in contact with both the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b, the gap between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b is narrower than the diameter of the medal M. Therefore, at this point, the medal M cannot pass between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b.

The medal M discharged from the opening of the hopper disk is subjected to a pushing force in the direction F1 in FIG. 6. When the pushing force in the direction F1 acts on the medal M, the medal M becomes movable in the direction F1, and the pushing force pushes the movable shaft 38b in the direction F2 in the figure. The fixed shaft 38a does not move. As a result, the movable shaft 38b moves in the direction F2 in the figure while maintaining contact with the medal M. The movable shaft 38b further moves to a position where the medal M can pass between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b. In other words, the gap between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b becomes wider than the diameter of the medal M. The position of the movable shaft 38b at this time is shown by a two-dot chain line in the figure.

As a result, the medal M passes between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b and is discharged in the direction F1 (towards the medal payout port) in the figure. The medal M at this time is shown by a two-dot chain line in Figure 6 (M2). When the medal M is discharged, the force pushing the movable shaft 38b in the direction F2 is released. As a result, the force of the spring returns the movable shaft 38b to the position shown by the solid line in Figure 6 again.

Figure 7 is a plan view illustrating the on (detection)/off (non-detection) states of the payout sensors 37a and 37b when a medal M is paid out as described above in the medal payout device. Figure 7 shows how the movable piece 39a moves in the order (a) → (b) → (c) → (d) → (a) each time a medal M is paid out.

Fig. 7A shows the state of the movable piece 39a when the movable shaft 38b is disposed at the position (initial position) shown by the solid line in Fig. 6. The movable piece 39a is attached so as to be rotatable about the central axis in the drawing, and is biased in the clockwise direction by a spring 39b.
When the movable piece 39a is biased clockwise in the figure, the movable shaft 38b in FIG. 6 is biased toward the fixed shaft 38a in the figure.
When the movable piece 39a is biased clockwise in Figure 7 by the spring 39b and no force other than the tensile force of the spring 39b is acting on the movable piece 39a, the movable piece 39a is stopped in the position shown in Figure 7(a) by a predetermined stopper (not shown).

As shown in Fig. 7(a), the dispensing sensors 37a (upper side in the figure) and 37b (lower side in the figure) are arranged on the left side of the movable piece 39a in the figure. The movable piece 39a is formed so as to extend toward the dispensing sensors 37a and 37b, and when it is stopped in the position shown in Fig. 7(a), its tip is detected by the dispensing sensor 37a.
In Fig. 7, the dispensing sensors 37a and 37b are illustrated only as sensor housings, and the light receiving and emitting parts (sensor eyes) are not illustrated, which is different from the input sensors 44a and 44b in Fig. 2 and Fig. 4, which only show the light receiving and emitting parts (sensor eyes).

Here, the dispensing sensor 37a is set to be in an on state (e.g., Figure 7(a)) when it detects the movable piece 39a, and to be in an off state (e.g., Figure 7(b)) when it no longer detects the movable piece 39a.
Similarly, the dispensing sensor 37b is set to be in an off state (e.g., Figure 7(a)) when it is not detecting the movable piece 39a, and to be in an on state (e.g., Figure 7(c)) when it detects the movable piece 39a.
In the state of FIG. 7(a), the dispensing sensor 37a detects the movable piece 39a and is in an ON state, and the dispensing sensor 37b does not detect the movable piece 39a and is in an OFF state.

As explained in FIG. 6, when a pushing force in the F1 direction in FIG. 6 acts on the medal M, the movable shaft 38b starts to move in the F2 direction in FIG. 6. When the movable shaft 38b moves in this way, the movable piece 39a starts to rotate counterclockwise against the biasing force of the spring 39b in FIG. 7(a). Then, when the movable piece 39a moves to the position in FIG. 7(b), the tip of the movable piece 39a goes out from inside the payout sensor 37a. As a result, the payout sensor 37a no longer detects the movable piece 39a, and is in the OFF state. Also, even if the movable piece 39a rotates to the position in FIG. 7(b), the tip of the movable piece 39a does not reach the payout sensor 37b. Therefore, in the state in FIG. 7(b), the payout sensor 37a is in the OFF state, and the payout sensor 37b is in the OFF state.

In FIG. 6, when the movable shaft 38b moves further in the F2 direction and reaches the position of the two-dot chain line in FIG. 6 (the position where the medal M can pass through the gap between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b), the movable piece 39a rotates further counterclockwise in FIG. 7 and reaches the position in FIG. 7(c). As a result, the tip of the movable piece 39a enters the payout sensor 37b, and the movable piece 39a is detected by the payout sensor 37b. Therefore, in the state of FIG. 7(c), the payout sensor 37a is in the OFF state, and the payout sensor 37b is in the ON state.

In FIG. 6, when the medal M is further discharged from position M2, the force biasing the movable shaft 38b in the direction F2 in FIG. 6 disappears, and the movable shaft 38b returns to the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 6. The returning force at this time is due to the force of the spring 39b in FIG. 7. As a result, in FIG. 7, the movable piece 39a rotates clockwise, and the tip of the movable piece 39a goes outside the payout sensor 37b, which no longer detects the movable piece 39b. FIG. 7(d) shows the state at this time. In the state of FIG. 7(d), the payout sensor 37a is in the OFF state, and the payout sensor 37b is in the OFF state.

When the movable piece 39a further rotates clockwise, the tip of the movable piece 39a enters the payout sensor 37a, and the movable piece 39a is detected by the payout sensor 37a. This returns to the state shown in FIG. 7(a) (initial state). In the state shown in FIG. 7(a), as described above, the payout sensor 37a is in the ON state, and the payout sensor 37b is in the OFF state. Furthermore, when it returns to this position, the movable shaft 38b returns to the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 6.

FIG. 8 is a time chart showing the on/off states of the dispensing sensors 37a and 37b.
In FIG. 8, it is assumed that the medal payout process has started and the hopper motor drive signal is in the ON state.
In Fig. 8, before time S31, the state is as shown in Fig. 7(a). When time S31 is reached, the state is as shown in Fig. 7(b), and the dispensing sensor 37a is in the OFF state (the dispensing sensor 37b is in the OFF state). Next, when time S32 is reached, the dispensing sensor 37b is in the ON state. This state is as shown in Fig. 7(c). In Fig. 8, the time from time S31 to S32 is Td.

The dispensing sensor 37a is in the OFF state, and the dispensing sensor 37b continues to be in the ON state until time S33, at which time the dispensing sensor 37b turns OFF. This state is shown in FIG. 7(d). In FIG. 8, the time from time S32 to S33 is defined as Te. Then, when time S34 is reached, the state returns to that of FIG. 7(a) (initial position), and the dispensing sensor 37a turns ON. In FIG. 8, the time from time S32 to S34 is defined as Tf.

During the payout process, the main control board 50 monitors the on/off time of the payout sensors 37a and 37b, and if it is not within a predetermined time range, it determines that a medal payout error has occurred.
For example, in Fig. 8, the time Td is set to less than 29.055 ms (13 interrupts). Therefore, if the payout sensor 37b turns on by the 12th interrupt after the payout sensor 37a turns off, it is determined that the operation is normal, but if the payout sensor 37b does not turn on by the 12th interrupt, it is determined that a medal payout error has occurred.

The time Te during which the payout sensor 37a is in the OFF state and the payout sensor 37b is in the ON state is set to be equal to or greater than 11.175 ms (5 interrupts) and less than 62.58 ms (28 interrupts). Therefore, when time S32 is reached (when the payout sensor 37b is in the ON state), the time Te until the payout sensor 37b turns OFF is monitored, and if the time Te is not within the above-mentioned predetermined time range, the main control board 50 determines that a medal payout error has occurred.

Furthermore, the time Tf from when the payout sensor 37b turns on (time S32) until the payout sensor 37b turns off and the payout sensor 37a turns on (time S34) is set to be at least 11.175 ms (5 interrupts) and less than 62.58 ms (28 interrupts). Therefore, when it is time S32 (when the payout sensor 37b turns on), the time Tf from when the payout sensor 37b turns off and the payout sensor 37a turns on is monitored, and if the time Tf is not within the above-mentioned range of the predetermined time, the main control board 50 judges that a medal payout error has occurred.

3 and 5, FIG. 8 also shows the time from when the power outage occurred until the power outage processing is performed.
First, assume that a power cut occurs at time S31, that is, when the dispense sensor 37a is turned off. In this case, while the example of Fig. 3 describes an example in which a power cut is detected by 20 interrupts, the example of Fig. 8 (first embodiment (C)) is set to detect a power cut at least after time S34 has passed (when a time T1 has passed from time S31) and execute a power cut process.

Here, the maximum time (normal) for the time "Td+Tf" is "12+27=39" interrupts, so the time T1 from when the power is turned off until the power-off process is executed is set to, for example, 40 interrupts (89.4 ms). By setting it in this way, even if a power outage occurs the moment the payout sensor 37a turns off, the power-off process can be started after the payout process for one medal has been completed normally. In other words, it can be set to "(Td+Tf)<T1".

Conventionally, there have been cases where a power outage (blackout, etc.) occurs during a medal payout process. In such cases, depending on the timing of the medal payout process and the power outage, it may be determined that medals have been paid out even though they have not, which could result in a loss for the player.
In contrast to this, in the first embodiment (C), even if a power outage occurs during the medal payout process, the medals can be paid out correctly.

In particular, even if a power outage occurs when the medal payout process is started, that is, at time S31 in FIG. 8, the power outage is detected after the process of paying out one medal is completed and the process moves to the power outage process, so the power outage process will not be executed when, for example, payout sensor 37a is in the off state or payout sensor 37b is in the on state. This makes it possible to prevent the power outage process from being executed in the middle of the medal payout process, causing the medal payout process to be stopped before the (single) medal payout process has been successfully completed.

Note that if time T1 is set longer than necessary, there is a risk that the next medal payout process will be executed. Therefore, the power-off process is executed at least before the next medal payout process is executed. In FIG. 8, for example, assuming that the cycle of the payout process for one medal is time T4 and the payout sensor 37a changes from the on state to the off state at the timing of time S35, the time is set so that "T1<T4".

Second Embodiment
The second embodiment relates to a gate mark formed on the board case of the main control board 50.
In the prior art, the shape, size, position, etc. of the gate mark on the substrate case were determined by the die designer at the time of die production, solely for the convenience of die production.
However, because the gate mark has an uneven surface, even if a hole is drilled targeting the gate mark, it may not be visible (or may go unnoticed).

If the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 is located directly below the gate mark, there is a risk that someone could access the main CPU 55 (perform some kind of cheating) by drilling a hole in the gate mark and threading a wire through the hole. In particular, if the gate mark is shaped to be thinner than other parts, it becomes easier to drill a hole there than in other parts.
Therefore, in the second embodiment, the gate mark of the board case is used to prevent cheating.

FIG. 9 is an external perspective view showing the main control board 50 and the board case 56 (upper cover 57 and lower cover 58) in an exploded state.
The board case 56 is composed of an upper cover 57 and a lower cover 58, both of which are injection molded from transparent resin. Therefore, when the main control board 50 is housed inside, the state of the main control board 50 can be clearly confirmed visually from the outside of the board case 56.

The main control board 50 is equipped with electronic components such as the main CPU 55, the management information display LED 74 (a four-digit LED, also called the "role ratio monitor" or "ratio display"), and the set value display LED 73. The main control board 50 is equipped with many electronic components such as the RWM 53 and ROM 54, but these are not shown in FIG. 9. Furthermore, although not shown in FIG. 9, the main control board 50 is equipped with fault checking LEDs for the bet switches 40a and 40b, the start switch 41, the stop switch 42, the passage sensor 46 in the medal selector, and the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. The fault checking LEDs are not limited to these.
For example, the fault confirmation LED of the start switch 41 is an LED that is turned off when the start switch 41 is off, and turns on (lit) when the start switch 41 is operated (when the start switch 41 is operated and the sensor detects that it is on).

The fault confirmation LED of the start switch 41 and the fault confirmation LEDs of other operation switches and sensors described below may be configured to turn off when the operation switch is operated (when the sensor detects that it is on) and turn on when the switch is off.

In addition, two fault checking LEDs are provided for the bet switches 40a and 40b, one for the bet switch 40a and one for the bet switch 40b. When the bet switch 40 is not operated, the LED is turned off. When the bet switch 40 is operated and receives the electrical signal at that time, the LED is turned on.
Furthermore, a total of three fault checking LEDs are provided for each sensor of the passage sensor 46 and the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. These LEDs are turned off when no medal is detected and turned on when a medal is detected.
The administrator can check for the presence or absence of a failure (energization) of the start switch 41 by, for example, operating the start switch 41 and checking whether the failure checking LED of the start switch 41 mounted on the main control board 50 is on or off. The same applies to other switches and sensors.

The above-mentioned fault checking LED may be turned on/off by operating the start switch 41 or the like when the front door is opened during normal operation (when the settings are not being changed or checked). Alternatively, the front door may be opened, a door open error occurs, and then a specified operation is performed to check for a fault. Furthermore, the LED may be turned on/off at all times (even when the settings are being changed or checked) by operating the start switch 41 or the like.

In addition, the model number of the main control board 50 is indicated (printed, etc.) on the board. Although not shown in Fig. 9, the model numbers and the like are also indicated on the top surfaces of the RWM 53 and the ROM 54.
Furthermore, the main control board 50 has four corners each having a screw hole 50a for passing a screw therethrough.
Meanwhile, bosses 58c for screwing are formed at the four corners on the inside of the lower surface of the lower cover 58. When the main control board 50 is placed on the lower cover 58, the screw holes 50a and the bosses 58c overlap, and the main control board 50 can be fixed to the lower case 58 by passing a screw through the screw hole 50a and screwing it into the boss 58c.

When the upper cover 57 is placed on the lower cover 58 in this state, the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are formed into a shape that allows them to fit together (the specific shape of the fitting portion is not shown in FIG. 9). Furthermore, crimped portions 57a are provided on both the left and right sides of the upper cover 57 in the figure. Similarly, crimped portions 58a are provided on the left and right rows of the lower cover 58 in the figure. Note that the specific shapes and detailed shapes of the crimped portions 57a and 58b are not shown in FIG. 9.

Once the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted together and crimped using the crimping portions 57a and 58a, the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 cannot be opened unless at least a portion of the crimping portions 57a and 58a is destroyed (plastically deformed).
This ensures the security of the main control board 50.

9, gate marks 57b are provided in two places on the outer top surface of upper cover 57. In board case 56 (with upper cover 57 and lower cover 58 fitted together), the side that houses main control board 50 is referred to as the "inner side" and the side that is exposed to the outside is referred to as the "outer side."
In FIG. 9, the gate marks 57b are provided in two places, but the number of places is not limited thereto and may be any number of places.

Here, a "gate" refers to the sprue through which resin (molten metal) is poured into a mold during resin molding, and a gate mark refers to the mark left at the boundary between the gate and the molded product after resin molding.
When the substrate case 56 (upper cover 57, lower cover 58) has a shape as shown in Fig. 9, it is cost-effective to use a mold that is divided in the vertical direction in Fig. 9. Furthermore, when using a multi-cavity mold, it is preferable to use a pin gate, and from the viewpoint of the fluidity of the resin (molten metal), it is preferable to provide the gate near the center of the molded product. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the gate positions of the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are formed on the top surface, not on the side surface, in Fig. 9.

Furthermore, in consideration of the cutting off of the protrusion at the gate mark during molding, it is preferable to provide the gate mark on the outside.
For the above reasons, the gate mark 57b of the upper cover 57 is provided on the outer side of the upper surface.
For the same reason as above, the gate marks 58b of the lower cover 58 are also provided on the outer side of the lower surface (the surface opposite to the surface visible in Fig. 9). Note that, in Fig. 9, the gate marks 58b of the lower cover 58 are provided in two places like the gate marks 57b of the upper cover 57, but they may be provided in one place, or in three or more places.

In addition, when resin (molten metal) is poured into the mold from the gate, if the resin (molten metal) does not spread evenly inside the mold and there is a difference in cooling time, there is a risk of the molded product warping. Therefore, it is preferable to position the gate of the molded product at a location where the resin (molten metal) spreads evenly inside the mold. Furthermore, when gates are provided in multiple locations, it is preferable to make the distance from the end of the molded product to the gate and the distance between the gates as equal as possible.

In FIG. 10, (a) is a plan view showing the positional relationship between the gate marks 57b of the upper cover 57 and the gate marks 58b of the lower cover 58 of the board case 56 and the main control board 50. FIG. 10(a) is a plan view showing the main control board 50 housed in the board case 56 (meaning the state in which the main control board 50 is fixed to the lower cover 58 and the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted together) as seen from above. The main control board 50 is also shown as seen through from the top side of the upper cover 57.

Furthermore, (b) shows Example 1 of a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in FIG. (a), and (c) shows Example 2 of a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in FIG. (a). Note that hatching is omitted in these cross-sectional views from the viewpoint of ease of viewing the drawings.
10A, when the main control board 50 is housed in the board case 56, the model number display, management information display LED 74, setting value display LED 73, and main CPU 55 (socket) are set so as not to be located vertically (on the main control board 50 side) (directly below) the two gate marks 57b of the upper cover 57. As described above, the RWM 53, ROM 54, and fault confirmation LED are also mounted on the main control board 50, and it is preferable that the gate marks 57b are not located directly above these.

The reason for arranging the gate trace 57 as described above is as follows.
Even after the slot machine 10 is installed in the market, it is necessary to visually check the main control board 50 to see if it has been tampered with or not. In particular, it is necessary to check whether the main CPU 55, etc. (including the RWM 53 and the ROM 54; the same applies below) are compatible and whether they have been tampered with through cheating. Furthermore, since the main control board 50 is housed in the board case 56, and the board case 56 is sealed as described above, it is necessary to visually check the main control board 50 from the outside of the board case 56.
The board case 56 housing the main control board 50 therein is attached, for example, to the inside of the back surface of the inside of the housing of the slot machine 10. This is because the board case 56 is attached at a position where the numerical values displayed by the setting value display LED 73 and the management information display LED 74 can be easily seen.

For this reason, it is considered that the administrator of the slot machine 10 will visually view the board case 56 (main control board 50) from a direction perpendicular to the top surface of the top cover 57. That is, it is considered that the administrator will visually view the board case 56 (main control board 50) as shown in FIG. 10(a). For this reason, if the main CPU 55, etc. is placed vertically (directly below) the gate mark 57b, there is a possibility that the visibility of the gate mark 57 will be hindered. In particular, it is desired that information displayed (printed, etc.) on the top surface of the main CPU 55, etc. can also be viewed without visibility being hindered.

The entire upper cover 57 is molded from a transparent resin, so visibility is not completely hindered even directly below the gate mark 57b. However, as shown in (b) and (c) of Figure 10, the cross section of the gate mark 57b is an uneven surface, so it is true that the visibility directly below the gate mark 57b is reduced (worse than a flat surface). Also, in the cross section of Figure 10(b), the upper end surface of the protrusion 57d is a cut surface, so it may turn white due to the stress caused when the resin is cut. Therefore, in this case as well, visibility directly below the gate mark 57b is hindered.

Furthermore, the upper surface of the upper cover 57 is transparent and smooth with no irregularities, except for the gate mark 57b, so that even if a hole is made therein by, for example, a thief, it can be easily noticed by visual inspection.
In contrast, the gate mark 57b is an uneven surface formed by cutting the resin. Therefore, if a hole is drilled in the gate hole 57b and then sealed with, for example, a resin material, it may be difficult to visually determine whether or not a hole has been drilled in the gate mark 57b. For this reason, there is a possibility that a cheating act using the gate mark 57b may be committed.

On the other hand, if a hole is drilled in the gate mark 57b, cheating becomes easier if the main CPU 55, etc. is located vertically (directly below) the gate mark 57b. Therefore, if the main CPU 55, etc. is not located vertically (directly below) the gate mark 57b, it becomes difficult to access the main CPU 55, etc., making cheating more difficult.

In addition, the model number displayed (printed, etc.) on the surface of the main control board 50 is also important information for checking for tampering, so to make the model number easier to check (read), gate marks 57b are not placed directly above the model number display area. Furthermore, when gate marks 57b exist directly above the model number display, to prevent someone from drilling a hole in gate mark 57b to access the inside of board case 56 and tampering with the model number display, gate marks 57b are not placed directly above the model number display.

Furthermore, for the setting value display LED 73, it is necessary to look at the displayed value when changing or checking the settings. Similarly, for the management information display LED 74, it is necessary to look at the displayed value to check whether the advantageous zone ratio, the role ratio, etc. are within an appropriate range. For this reason, the gate mark 57b is not placed directly above these LEDs. Furthermore, similar to the above, the gate mark 57b is not placed directly above these LEDs in order to make it difficult for someone to access the LEDs inside the circuit board case 56 by using a hole in the gate mark 57b and accessing it from there, thereby making it difficult to commit cheating acts.

In addition, regarding the above-mentioned fault confirmation LED, the manager of the slot machine 10 operates an operation switch to check whether the fault confirmation LED corresponding to that operation switch is lit or not, so in order to improve visibility, it is preferable that the gate mark 57b is not located directly above the fault confirmation LED. As above, by not locating the fault confirmation LED vertically (directly below) the gate mark 57b, cheating is made more difficult.

10, the outer shape of the gate mark 57b is the same in the cross-sectional views of Example 1 shown in (b) and Example 2 shown in (c). In Example 1 of (b), the inner upper surface of the gate mark 57b is left flat. In contrast, in Example 2 of (c), the inner upper surface of the gate mark 57b is formed in a protruding shape (thick).
The outside of the gate mark 57b has a protrusion 57d at its center and a cylindrical recess 57c formed on its outer periphery. The boundary between the gate and the molded product is connected during molding, and this boundary is cut by a cutter when the molded product is separated from the mold. Therefore, the upper end surface of the protrusion 57d is the cut surface by the cutter. The boundary between the gate and the molded product can be cut automatically by the molding machine during injection, or in a later process.

Here, when cutting the boundary between the gate and the molded product, it is costly and difficult to process the cut surface into a completely smooth surface, in other words, to make the height of the protrusion 57d almost zero and make the surface smooth. Therefore, even if the protrusion 57d has some height remaining, a recess 57c is formed so that it does not protrude above the outer top surface of the upper cover 57. This makes it possible to prevent, for example, an assembly worker from being injured by the protrusion 57d when touching the upper cover 57.

10B, when a recess 57c is provided in the gate mark 57, the thickness of the upper cover 57 is accordingly reduced. If there is even a portion where the thickness is thin, it may be easy for someone to drill a hole in the recess 57c and access the inside of the board case 56.
10(c), a protrusion 57e is provided on the opposite side (inner side) of the upper surface where the gate mark 57b is provided, to prevent the thickness from becoming thin only at the recessed portion 57c. If the protrusion 57e is provided and no portion where the thickness becomes thin is provided, it becomes difficult to make a hole in the recessed portion 57c.

The protrusion 57e not only prevents a part of the thickness of the gate mark 57b from becoming thin, which contributes to fraud prevention, but also functions as a dimple (pool) during molding. In FIG. 10 ((b)), when resin (molten metal) is injected from the gate (position corresponding to the protrusion 57d) of the mold, if the resin (molten metal) collides with the inside of the upper surface, the flow of the resin (molten metal) may change suddenly and may not flow stably. Therefore, by providing a dimple (pool) at a position opposite the tip of the gate, the flow of the resin (molten metal) is reduced when the resin (molten metal) is injected from the gate, and the resin (molten metal) can flow stably. The protrusion 57e may have various shapes such as a square cross-section, a triangular cross-section, a trapezoid cross-section (in the case of FIG. 10 (c)), a dome cross-section, etc., and any shape may be used as long as it can prevent the thickness from becoming thin due to the provision of the recessed portion 57c.

In addition, in terms of visibility in the vertical direction (directly below) the gate mark 57b, a smooth underside of the gate mark 57 is better than an uneven shape. Therefore, in terms of visibility directly below the gate mark 57b, the shape of FIG. 10(b) is better than the shape of FIG. 10(c). In addition, compared to the shape of FIG. 10(c), the shape of FIG. 10(b) does not require the formation of a portion equivalent to the protrusion 57e in the mold, and therefore the shape of the mold can be simplified (reduced costs).

Also, the gate trace 58b of the lower cover 58 is provided on the outside (lower side in FIG. 9). Furthermore, the protrusion 57d and the recessed portion 57c shown in FIG. 10(b) are formed on the outside. As described above, providing the protrusion 57d and the recessed portion 57c on the outside of the molded product is more convenient in terms of molding.
When the main control board 50 is fixed to the lower cover 58, the pins of the main CPU 55, etc. of the main control board 50 are set so as not to be positioned vertically to the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58. This is to make it impossible to access the pins of the main CPU 55, etc. by drilling a hole in the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58.
Furthermore, if the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 is shaped as shown in Figure 10(c), the protrusion 57e in Figure 10(c) will face the pin side of the main control board 50, but it goes without saying that the pin protruding from the underside of the main control board 50 and the protrusion 57e will be formed so as not to interfere with (contact with) each other.

10(a), when the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted together, it is preferable to arrange (shift) the gate mark 57b of the upper cover 57 and the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 so as not to overlap in the vertical direction. In particular, when the gate marks 57b and 58b are arranged as shown in FIG. 10(b), the thickness of a part (recess 57c) of the gate marks 57b and 58b becomes thin, but by arranging the thin part at a position where the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 do not overlap, it is possible to prevent the easily targeted parts from overlapping.
Furthermore, if the gate mark 57b of the upper cover 57 and the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 overlap in the vertical direction, the position of the gate mark of one cover would be obvious just by looking at the other cover. To prevent this, the gate mark 57b of the upper cover 57 and the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 are made not to overlap in the vertical direction.

Third Embodiment
The third embodiment relates to processing when communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is temporarily disabled (when communication is restored after a disconnection, when communication fails due to the effects of noise, etc.) when a command is sent from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80.
As described above, the control command transmitting means 71 of the main control board 50 transmits commands such as the push sequence instruction number and information on the operated stop switch 42 to the sub-control board 80. The sub-control board 80 then outputs effects based on the commands received from the main control board 50, and during play, updates the effects in accordance with the operation of the operation switches.

Here, there is a possibility that the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are disconnected, and communication becomes impossible. Poor contact and radio wave interference are some of the causes. When the sub-control board 80 no longer receives commands from the main control board 50, the performance stops in the current state. In addition, neither the main control board 50 nor the sub-control board 80 judges whether there is a disconnection in the communication between them. Therefore, even if a disconnection occurs between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80, the main control board 50 continues to transmit commands to the sub-control board 80 according to the progress of the game (operation of the bet switch 40, the start switch 41, and the stop switch 42, etc.). On the other hand, when the sub-control board 80 does not receive commands from the main control board 50, it maintains the performance state at that time.
Even if the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are disconnected, for example during AT, the main control board 50 will operate its instruction function to display push order instruction information on the winning number display LED 78. This allows the player to see the push order instruction information and operate the stop switches 42 in the correct push order even if the sub-control board 80 is not functioning normally.
Furthermore, the player can compare the push order instruction information displayed on the winning count display LED 78 with the presentation content (correct push order) displayed as an image on the image display device 23, so when the two pieces of information contradict each other, the player can know that there is a problem with the image display by the sub-control board 80.

For example, in the case where a disconnection occurs during the "N" game and communication is restored during the "N+1" game, when the sub-control board 80 becomes able to receive commands sent from the main control board 50, the presentation cannot suddenly be switched to the "N+1" game. This is because, even when communication is restored, the sub-control board 80 cannot determine that the "N+1" game has started unless it has received a command related to the operation of the start switch 41 (a command notifying the start of a game). For this reason, when communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is restored after a disconnection, depending on the content of the presentation, it may be misleading to the player.
Therefore, in the third embodiment, when communication between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 is restored after being disconnected, a presentation is output that does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable, while avoiding any misunderstandings to the player as much as possible.

Figure 11 is a diagram showing the relationship between the operation of the main control board 50 in the third embodiment (referred to as "main operation" in Figure 11) and the display of performances by the sub-control board 80 (referred to as "sub-display" in Figure 11), and shows five examples consisting of pattern 1 (example 1) to pattern 5 (example 5).
Patterns 1 to 5 all show examples in which communication becomes impossible (disconnection occurs) during the “N”th game, and communication is restored during the “N+1”th game.
11, "bet" means that the bet switch 40 is operated and a specified number is validly bet. "start" means that after a specified number is bet, the start switch 41 is operated to start the game. Furthermore, for example, "right stop" means that the right stop switch 42 is operated (the right reel 31 stops).

Furthermore, in the sub-display, the "push order effect" refers to an effect that displays an image of the correct push order, for example, in a game in which a push order bell or push order replay has been won. Specifically, for example, the "right-left-center display" refers to an effect that notifies the player that the correct push order is "right-left-center." For example, the "left-center display" refers to an effect that appears after the left stop switch 42 has been operated, notifying the player that the second stop switch to be operated is the left, and the third stop switch 42 to be operated is the center.
Furthermore, for example, a "right stop effect" means an effect that occurs when the right stop switch 42 is operated (the right reel 31 stops) when a command indicating that the right stop switch 42 has been operated is received.

In pattern 1, when the start switch 41 is operated with the "N" game number, the main control board 50 performs a lottery for a role as described above. In this game, the push order bell, in which the correct push order is "right, left, center," is won. In this case, if the main control board 50 is in the AT, it sends a push order instruction number (command) corresponding to the correct push order "right, left, center" to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives this command, it outputs a push order presentation to the image display device 23 that displays the correct push order of "right, left, center."
Although not shown, the main control board 50 displays push order instruction information corresponding to the correct push order "right, left, middle" on the number of wins display LED 78 (activation of the instruction function).

Next, the player looks at the correct button sequence and operates the right stop switch 42 as the first stop (right stop). This causes the right reel 31 to stop, and sends a command to that effect to the sub-control board 80. Upon receiving this command, the sub-control board 80 outputs an effect that the right stop switch 42 has been operated (the right reel 31 has stopped) (right stop effect), and updates the right/left-center display to a left-center display (note that other displays include "-left center", "x left center", etc.).
Pattern 1 shows an example in which a disconnection occurs after the right reel 31 stops, and communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 becomes impossible (sub-disconnection). In other words, this is an example in which communication becomes impossible in the middle of a game.

The main control board 50 allows the game to proceed even if communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is disabled (even if the sub-control board 80 is not functioning). In the example of pattern 1, after a disconnection occurs on the "N" game play, the left and center stop switches 42 are operated (the left and center reels 31 stop) (left center stop).

Next, assume that a bet operation is performed for the "N+1" game, and the start switch 41 is operated. In the "N+1" game, as in the "N" game, an example is shown in which a push order bell (or push order replay) with the correct push order of "right, left, middle" is won. Note that in the "N+1" game, as in the "N" game, an example is shown in which the stop switch 42 is operated with the push order of right, left, middle, but this is not limited to a case in which a role with the correct push order of right, left, middle is won, and any role selection result is acceptable.

When the "N+1" game number is used to win a push order bell (or a push order replay) with the correct push order, the main control board 50 displays push order instruction information on the winning number display LED 78. Therefore, even if the correct push order is not displayed as an image on the image display device 23, the player can operate the stop switch 42 in the correct push order based on the push order instruction information displayed on the winning number display LED 78.

In the "N+1" game, the player first operates the right stop switch 42. Then, before the player operates the second left stop switch 42, the communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is restored.
As a result, when the player operates the left stop switch 42, which is the second stop switch 42, the command is sent to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives this command, it updates the image display to correspond to the received command. That is, it displays an image indicating that a left stop has been performed (left stop effect). Here, the sub-control board 80 updates it as a continuation of the effect that has already been displayed, that is, as the effect of the "N" game move.

Therefore, in reality, the second stop switch 42 (left) of the "N+1" game play is operated, but the sub-control board 80 outputs the effect that occurs when the second stop switch 42 (left) of the "N" game play is operated. Since the second correct push order in the "N" game play is left, in this example, the operation was performed in the correct push order. Therefore, the sub-control board 80 outputs a left stop effect (correct push order effect) and outputs the final center display effect.

Then, when the last middle stop switch 42 is operated in the "N+1" game play, a command to that effect is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Upon receiving this command, the sub-control board 80 outputs an effect corresponding to the third stop of the "N" game play, that is, a middle stop effect.
In addition, even if a combination having a correct push order is won in the "N+1" game play and the correct push order is other than right, left, center, the above-mentioned effect is output in the situation of pattern 1. In other words, when the push order operated by the player in the "N+1" game play is right, left, center, even if that push order corresponds to an incorrect push order, a push order failure effect such as pattern 2 described below is not output.

Furthermore, in the "N+1" game hand, if a role that does not have the correct button press sequence is won, or even if the role is not won, if the player presses right, left, or middle, the same effect as above will be output. In other words, even if the "N+1" game hand does not have the correct button press sequence, when the sub-control board 80 receives a command indicating that the left stop switch 42 has been operated after communication is restored (in the example of pattern 1), it will output a left stop effect (correct button press sequence effect) and also output a middle display.

Next, when a bet is placed for the "N+2" game, and the start switch 41 is operated to start the "N+2" game, the main control board 50 sends a command to the sub-control board 80 corresponding to the start of the "N+2" game. This causes the sub-control board 80 to output the effects at the start of the "N+2" game. Specifically, when the start switch 41 is operated, commands for the effect group number and push order instruction number are sent to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives these commands, it displays the push order effects and the correct push order, as at the start of the "N" game.

As described above, in pattern 1, until the third stop of the "N+1" game, the sub-control board 80 continues to output the presentation of the "N" game based on the command (for the "N+1" game) received from the main control board 50, and updates it to the presentation of the "N+2" game when the "N+2" game starts.
Also, the main control board 50 may send a command for the number of coins acquired to the sub-control board 80 at the end of a game, and the sub-control board 80 may display an image of the number of coins acquired during the AT as well. In such a case, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive a command for the number of coins acquired at the end of the "N" game, i.e., during the disconnection, so at the end of the "N" game, the number of coins acquired at the end of the "N-1" game remains displayed. Then, when communication is restored and a command for the number of coins acquired is received at the end of the "N+1" game, the sub-control board 80 updates the image display to show the number of coins acquired at the end of the "N+1" game.

In pattern 2, the main operation is the same as in pattern 1. In addition, the timing of the disconnection is the same as in pattern 1, but the timing of the communication recovery is different from that in pattern 2. In pattern 2, communication is recovered after the second stop, that is, the left stop, in the "N+1" game play.
In pattern 2, the main action and sub display for the "N" game number are the same as in pattern 1, so the explanation will be omitted.
Next, in the "N+1" game, the stop switches 42 are operated in the order of right, left, center, and communication is restored after the second left stop.

Just before communication is restored, the sub-control board 80 is outputting the right stop effect for the "N" game play, and the left center display. When communication is restored in this state and the player operates the center stop switch 42 (third stop) for the "N+1" game play, the command is sent to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives a center stop command while the left center display is displayed, it determines that the push order is incorrect, and outputs a push order failure effect. Note that in the third embodiment, after the push order failure effect is output, no subsequent push order effects, etc. are output.

In addition, assuming that the stop switch 42 is operated in the center, left, and right push order in an "N+1" game, if communication is restored after a center-left stop, and then a right stop is made, causing a right stop command to be sent to the sub-control board 80, the push order failure effect will be output in the same manner as above. Since the sub-control board 80 is in the middle of outputting the right stop effect and the left-center display, if it receives a right stop command at this point, it will have received the same stop command twice in one game. Even in such a case, it will process it as a push order failure without issuing an error notification or the like, and output that effect.
Then, when the "N+2" game play is started in the same manner as in pattern 1, a command for starting the "N+2" game play is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. This causes the sub-control board 80 to start the presentation of the "N+2" game play.

In pattern 3, the main action and sub display of the “N” game move are the same as those in pattern 1.
Pattern 3 shows an example in which communication is restored after the first stop right and the second stop in the "N+1" game. Therefore, after communication is restored in the "N+1" game, a command for the third stop, the left stop, is sent to the sub-control board 80. Since the sub-control board 80 outputs the "left center display" for the "N" game, if a command for the left stop is received in this state, it determines that the push order is correct. Therefore, the sub-control board 80 outputs the left stop effect (correct push order effect) and then outputs the center display.

However, on the main control board 50 side, the "N+1" game ends with the third left stop. Next, when the game moves to the "N+2" game and a command for the start of the "N+2" game is sent to the sub-control board 80, the sub-control board 80, upon receiving the command, switches to the presentation for the start of the "N+2" game. Therefore, the left stop presentation and center display that had been output up until that point are canceled. Also, even if a command for the start of the "N+2" game is received while the center display is being output, no error notification or the like is issued, and the presentation for the start of the "N+2" game is output in accordance with the received command.

Pattern 4 is an example in which the remaining number of games during the AT is displayed in the sub display. In addition, in pattern 4, the main operation, the disconnection timing, and the communication recovery timing are the same as in pattern 3.
The main control board 50 transmits a command for the number of remaining plays in the AT to the sub-control board 80 at the start of each game. When the sub-control board 80 receives a command for the number of remaining plays in the AT from the main control board 50, it updates the display of the number of remaining plays in the AT. Note that during the AT, the display of the number of remaining plays is not performed independently, but is output together with the push order presentation of Pattern 3.

In pattern 4, when the start switch 41 is operated (at the start of a game), the main control board 50 transmits a command for the number of remaining games in the AT to the sub-control board 80. Here, in the "N" game, the number of remaining games in the AT is assumed to be 10 games.
At the start of the “N”th game, the sub-control board 80 displays the remaining number of games (10 games remaining) during the AT based on a command received from the main control board 50 .
If the wire breaks during the "N" game and the break continues at the start of the "N+1" game, the main control board 50 executes a process to send a command for the number of games remaining in the AT (9 games) to the sub-control board 80 at the start (start) of the "N+1" game, but the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the command (due to the break). Therefore, in the "N+1" game, the "10 games remaining" for the "N" game remains displayed.

Then, when communication is restored in the middle of the "N+1" game (after the left center is stopped) and the game moves to the "N+2" game, at the start of the "N+2" game, the main control board 50 sends a command to the sub-control board 80 regarding the number of games remaining in the AT (8 games). Upon receiving this command, the sub-control board 80 updates the display from 10 games remaining to 8 games remaining.

Pattern 5 is an example in which the main operation, disconnection timing, and communication recovery timing are the same as pattern 4, but the "N" game number is one game remaining in the AT.
At the start of the "N" game (when the start switch 41 is operated), the main control board 50 transmits a command of the remaining number of games (one game remaining) during the AT to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives this command, it updates the display to one game remaining (from the previous display of two games remaining).
In the case where a disconnection occurs after the right stop of the "N" game, the main control board 50 transmits a command to the sub-control board 80 at the start of the "N+1" game (when the start switch 41 is operated) indicating that the number of games remaining in the AT is 0, but the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the command (same as pattern 4). Therefore, at the start of the "N+1" game, the display indicating that there is one game remaining in the AT continues.

In addition, when the AT is to be ended, the sub-control board 80 outputs an AT end effect. The AT end effect is executed at the end of the game based on receiving (at the start of the game) a command to the effect that the number of games remaining in the AT is 0.
However, in the example of pattern 5, the sub-control board 80 does not receive a command indicating that the number of remaining games in the AT is 0, so the AT end effect is not output. Therefore, even at the end of the "N+1" game, the effect indicating that there is one game remaining in the AT is output.

Then, when the "N+1" game ends and the game proceeds to the "N+2" game, at the start of the "N+2" game, the main control board 50 transmits a command indicating a normal game (non-AT) to the sub-control board 80. Based on the reception of this command, the sub-control board 80 erases the display of "1 game remaining" and outputs a normal (non-AT) presentation.
At the end of the AT, in order to prevent players from becoming addicted, an image such as "Pachinko and Pachislot are gaming machines that should be enjoyed in moderation" is displayed. However, in the case of pattern 5, the sub display does not return to normal at the end of the "N+1" game, so the image cannot be displayed. As a countermeasure, the sub control board 80 manages the game history, and when the game moves to the next game (the "N+2" game in the example of FIG. 11) after the end of the AT, the image is displayed at the start of the game.

In the above patterns 1 to 5, when a disconnection occurs on the "N"th game, the sub-control board 80 continues to output the presentation that was being shown immediately before the disconnection occurred on the "N"th game until communication is restored, and when communication is restored during the "N+1"th game, it outputs the continuation of the presentation that was being shown on the "N"th game based on the command received on the "N+1"th game. Therefore, for example, in pattern 1, when a command to stop left is received after communication is restored on the "N+1"th game, the correct push order presentation will be output regardless of whether the stop switch 42 was actually operated in the correct push order.

In contrast, for example, in pattern 1, if a center stop command is received after communication is restored on the "N+1" game number, the push order for the effect being output at that time, i.e., the push order for the left center display of the "N" game number, will be incorrect, and a push order failure effect will be output regardless of whether the stop switch 42 was actually operated in the correct push order. However, even if a push order failure effect is output on the "N+1" game number, if the player operates the stop switch 42 in the correct push order for the "N+1" game number, a symbol combination that is advantageous to the player will be displayed, and the player will not be disadvantaged.

As described above, when communication is restored in the "N+1" game, the "N+1" game outputs a presentation that continues the presentation before the disconnection (the "N" game), and at the start of the "N+2" game, the presentation is reset (returned to the correct presentation). This makes it possible to minimize the output of unnatural presentation in both the game in which the disconnection occurred and the game in which communication is restored, and to avoid misunderstandings by the player as much as possible.

In addition, the example in Figure 11 shows an example in which communication is restored in the "N+1"th game after a disconnection occurs in the "N"th game, but even if communication is restored two or more games after the disconnection occurs, the same as Figure 11 is true.
For example, if a disconnection occurs on the "N"th game and communication is restored on the "N+a"th game (a = 2 or more), the presentation that was present just before the disconnection on the "N"th game will continue to be output until the "N+a-1"th game. Then, on the "N+a"th game where communication is restored, the presentation that was continuing to be output for the "N"th game will be continued based on the command received after communication is restored. Next, at the start of the "N+a+1"th game, the presentation is updated to the presentation at the start of the "N+a+1"th game (the correct presentation).

Fourth Embodiment
The motor 32 performs acceleration, constant speed, deceleration, and stopping processes, all of which are in an excited state, when rotating and stopping the reel 31. Then, when the rotation of the motor 32 is stopped, a state in which four phases are excited simultaneously (hereinafter referred to as a "four-phase excited state") is established for a predetermined time (time T11 described later).
The fourth embodiment relates to the time relationship between the operation of the stop button 42a of the stop switch 42 and the four-phase excitation state when the motor 32 is stopped.
FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the operation of the stop button 42a and the detection sensor 42e in the fourth embodiment. In addition, hatching is omitted in FIG. 12 from the viewpoint of ease of viewing. Also, FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram for explaining the fourth embodiment, and does not mean that an actual product has the structure shown in FIG. 12. In FIG. 12, the process from when the stop button 42a is pressed to when it returns to its original state is illustrated in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (d). In the figure, the upper side is the player side, and the lower side is the inside of the slot machine 10. In the figure, the side above the front door 12 is the side that is visible to the player.
Furthermore, the line along which the detection sensor 42e detects the moving piece 42d is indicated by a dotted line. The moment when the tip of the moving piece 42d comes into contact with the dotted line is the moment when the detection sensor 42e detects the moving piece 42d.

In FIG. 12(a), the stop button 42a is an operating body of the stop switch 42, and is operated (pushed inwardly into the slot machine 10) when the player turns on the stop switch 42. The player side of the stop button 42a is arranged so as to protrude from the front door 12 provided on the front surface of the housing of the slot machine 10 by about several millimeters. When viewed from the front on the player side, this part is approximately cylindrical. In the unloaded state, the stop button 42a is biased in the F3 direction (outward, toward the player) in FIG. 12(a) by the spring force of the (compression) coil spring 42c, and this biasing force causes the end of the stop button 42a on the player side to protrude from the front door 12. In this state, the lower surface portion (hereinafter referred to as the "flange-shaped portion") of the stop button 42a in the figure is in contact with the front door 12.
On the other hand, the stopper 42b is provided on the inside of the front door 12 (inside the housing) and is a part that abuts against the stop button 42a when the stop button 42a is pressed, thereby preventing the stop button 42a from moving any further.

In the figure, a moving piece 42d that can move integrally with the stop button 42a is provided on the underside of the stop button 42a. Furthermore, a detection sensor 42e for detecting the movement of the moving piece 42d is disposed directly below the moving piece 42d. In the unloaded state shown in (a) in the figure, when the stop button 42a is biased toward the front door 12 by the biasing force of the coil spring 42c, the tip (lower end in the figure) of the moving piece 42d is disposed at a position away from the detection sensor 42e. Therefore, in the state shown in (a) in the figure, the detection sensor 42e does not detect the moving piece 42d and is in the off state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12(b), when the player wants to stop the rotation of the reel 31, he or she pushes the stop button 42a in the direction of F4. This causes the stop button 42a to move downward in the figure against the biasing force of the coil spring 42c. When the stop button 42a moves downward in the figure, the moving piece 42d, which is integral with the stop button 42a, also moves downward in the figure. This causes the tip of the moving piece 42d to enter the detection sensor 42e. When the tip of the moving piece 42d comes into contact with the dotted line of the detection sensor 42e, the detection sensor 42e changes from the OFF state to the ON state. FIG. 12(b) shows the positions of each component at the moment when the detection sensor 42e changes from the OFF state to the ON state. At the moment when the detection sensor 42e changes to the ON state, the flange-shaped portion of the stop button 42a has not yet come into contact with the stopper 42b, and there is a gap between the stop button 42a and the stopper 42b.

When the stop button 42a is pressed further from the state shown in FIG. 12(b), the flange-shaped portion of the stop button 42a comes into contact with the stopper 42c, as shown in FIG. 12(c). This position is the deepest part when the stop button 42a is pressed. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 12(c), the tip of the moving piece 42d remains detected by the detection sensor 42e, so the detection sensor 42e is in the ON state.

When the player releases the stop button 42a from the state shown in Figure 12(c) (removing the force in the direction F4 in Figure 12(c)), the spring force F3 of the coil spring 42c acts to return the stop button 42a to its initial position. This causes the stop button 42a and the moving piece 42d that is integral with the stop button 42a to move upward in the figure. As a result, the tip of the moving piece 42d no longer comes into contact with the dotted line of the detection sensor 42e, and the detection sensor 42e changes from an ON state to an OFF state (Figure 12(d)).

Fig. 12(d) shows the arrangement of each component at the moment when the detection sensor 42e changes from the on state to the off state. In the state of Fig. 12(d), the stop button 42a has not returned to the final position. When the stop button 42a is further returned from the state of Fig. 12(d), the flange-shaped portion of the stop button 42a abuts against the front door 12, and the stop button 42a stops at this position. This state is the state of Fig. 12(a), and the stop button 42a is in an unloaded state.
In addition, the state of Figure 12 (b), which shows the timing when the detection sensor 42e changes from an off state to an on state, and the state of Figure 12 (d), which shows the timing when the detection sensor 42e changes from an on state to an off state, are generally the same, but there is no particular problem even if there is a slight deviation.

13A and 13B are time charts showing the relationship between the operation of the stop button 42a and the excited state of the motor 32 in the fourth embodiment, where FIG. 13A shows Example 1 and FIG. 13B shows Example 2. In FIG.
In Fig. 13(a), the stop button 42a is in the initial position (Fig. 12(a)) in the unloaded state, and the time when the stop button 42a starts to be pressed is set to S41. The time when the stop button 42a is pressed and the detection sensor 42e changes from off to on, i.e., when the state of Fig. 12(b) is reached is set to S42. The stop button 42a is further pressed from that position, and the time when the stop button 42a reaches the deepest part (when the state of Fig. 12(c) is reached is set to S43. The above times S41, S42, and S43 depend on the pressing speed of the player and are not constant. If the stop button 42a is pressed slowly, the time from time S41 to S43 will be longer, and if the stop button 42a is pressed quickly, the time from time S41 to S43 will be shorter.

Next, at time S44, the stop button 42a is released from the depressed state. At time S44, the stop button 42a is in the deepest position.
When the stop button 42a is released, as described above, the spring force of the coil spring 42c acts to return the stop button 42a to its initial position. Note that from the moment the stop button 42a is released, the operator of the stop button 42a is not to touch the stop button 42a.
The time when the detection sensor 42e changes from on to off, that is, when the state of Fig. 12(d) is reached, is defined as S45. Here, the time from time S44 to S45 is defined as T11.

Time T11 is a variable determined by the spring force (spring constant) of the coil spring 42c and the stroke (travel distance) of the stop button 42a from the deepest position to the position where the detection sensor 42e turns off. In example 1 (a), the spring force (spring constant) of the coil spring 42c and the stroke of the stop button 42a are designed so that time T11 is 100 ms.

On the other hand, when the stop switch 42 is detected to be on (specifically, when the detection sensor 42e is on) (when the state of FIG. 12(b) is reached), the reel control means 65 executes stop control of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42, and stops the reel 31 at a position corresponding to the result of the role selection by the role selection means (the result determined by the internal selection means). As described above, the time from when the stop control of the reel 31 is started (from when the detection sensor 42e is detected to be on) until the reel 31 stops is set to within 190 ms (within 5 frames if the number of symbols on the reel 31 is 21, and within 4 frames if the number of symbols on the reel 31 is 20) (excluding a specified reel 31 during MB play). Therefore, the time from when the reel 31 starts to decelerate until the reel 31 stops is not constant, since it varies depending on the result of the role selection and the position of the reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated.

Furthermore, after moving the reel 31 to a predetermined position, the reel control means 65 causes the motor 32 to be in a state in which four phases are simultaneously excited (braked) for a predetermined period of time (the above-mentioned four-phase excitation state).
Here, the motor 32 in this embodiment is a four-phase stepping motor, and while the motor 32 (reel 31) is rotating, for example, one- and two-phase excitation is performed (however, this is not limited to one- and two-phase excitation). Therefore, even while the motor 32 is rotating, it is in one excitation state. Then, when the rotational drive of the motor 32 is stopped, it is switched to a four-phase excitation state.
In addition, when performing a bound stop after moving the reel 31 to a predetermined position (when making the reel 31 appear to vibrate at the stopped position), it is possible to use, for example, a three-phase excitation state instead of a four-phase excitation state.

The moment the rotational drive of the motor 32 is stopped, there is a risk that the inertia of the motor 32 and the reel 31 during rotation will cause them to overshoot the desired stopping position, so the moment the reel 31 is stopped at a specified position, the motor 32 is put into a four-phase excitation state and a stationary torque is generated to prevent the reel 31 from moving from the stopped position due to inertia. When the motor 32 is in a four-phase excitation state, acceptance of the next operation of the stop switch 42 is not permitted. During the first or second stop, acceptance of the next operation of the stop switch 42 is permitted when the detection sensor 42e of the operated stop switch 42 changes from the on state to the off state (returning to the state in FIG. 12(d)) and the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 that has stopped the rotational drive ends.

The reason for controlling in this manner is as follows.
In order to hold the reel 31 in its stopped position, the motor 32 is controlled to a four-phase excitation state, but when controlled in this manner, a greater load is placed on it than usual, which increases the load on the entire slot machine 10. Therefore, in order to reduce this load, the next operation of the stop button 42a is made possible after the four-phase excitation state of one motor 32 is ended.

In Example 1 of FIG. 13(a), when the result of the role selection by the role selection means (result determined by the internal selection means) is a predetermined result (for example, when the push order bell is won), the excitation time T12 from the start to the end of the four-phase excitation state is set to 90 interrupts (2.235 x 90 = 201.15 ms). Here, when the result of the role selection is a predetermined result, the excitation time T12 of the four-phase excitation state is set to "90 interrupts", meaning that the excitation time T12 is not always constant regardless of the result of the role selection.

Therefore, in Example 1 of the fourth embodiment, the values are set so that "T11<T12".
Here, when the stop control of the reel 31 is started from time S42, the reel 31 stops within 190 ms. As described above, the number of moving frames during the stop control when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is "21" is within 5 frames (minimum 1 frame), or the number of moving frames during the stop control when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is "20" is within 4 frames (minimum 1 frame), so the reel 31 stops within about "40" to "190" ms from time S42.
On the other hand, the time from when the detection sensor 42e changes from an OFF state to an ON state until the stop button 42e reaches its deepest part and the pressing force on the stop button 42e is released (the time from time S42 to S44) is about 40 to 180 ms. Therefore, the time when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 starts and the time S44 when the pressing of the stop button 42a is released are close to each other (almost the same time).

Therefore, in Example 1, the four-phase excitation state is started at the timing (time S44) when the stop button 42a is released, and the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 ends (time T12 has elapsed) after the detection sensor 42e changes from the on state to the off state (time S45). Therefore, when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 ends, it is possible to set it so that the next operation of the stop button 42a can be accepted.
In this way, if the detection sensor 42e is designed to be turned off before the end of the four-phase excitation state, it is possible to permit the next operation of the stop button 42a to be accepted at the time when the four-phase excitation state ends, which allows the game to proceed at high speed.

In contrast, in Example 2 of FIG. 13(b), the time T11 from the moment the stop button 42a, which has reached the deepest part, is released (time S44) until the detection sensor 42e goes from on to off (time S45) is set to 300 ms. Therefore, the return time of the stop button 42a is three times longer than in Example 1. As described above, the return time of the stop button 42a can be set (adjusted) by the spring force (spring constant) of the coil spring 42c and the stroke of the stop button 42a.

On the other hand, in Example 2, the time T12 from the start to the end of the four-phase excitation state is set to 45 interrupts (100.575 ms).
In Example 2, similarly to Example 1, the four-phase excitation state is started from the moment (time S44) when the stop button 42a that has reached the deepest part is released, and the detection sensor 42e is designed to be turned off after the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 ends. Therefore, when the detection sensor 42e is turned off, it is possible to set it so that the next operation of the stop button 42a can be accepted.

In this way, by designing the four-phase excitation state to end when the detection sensor 42e turns off, it is possible to permit acceptance of the next operation of the stop button 42a at the point when the detection sensor 42e turns off, which allows the game to proceed at high speed.
As described above, both Example 1 and Example 2 have advantages in terms of control.
In addition, in Example 1 and Example 2 of Fig. 13, the time T12 from the start to the end of the four-phase excitation state is different. However, for example, if the four-phase excitation time T12 is a constant value, if "T11 <T12", the next stop button 42a can be accepted at the time when the four-phase excitation state ends. Therefore, if the four-phase excitation time T12 is a constant value, Example 1 allows the game to be completed at a higher speed.

Fifth Embodiment
The fifth embodiment relates to the relationship between power on/off and program start-up, etc.
FIG. 14 is a time chart showing an outline of control in the fifth embodiment.
14A is a diagram showing a state when a power interruption occurs after the main program (the program of the main control board 50) is started. The power is turned on at time S51, and then turned off at time S55.
When the power is turned on at time S51 (when the power switch 11 in FIG. 1 is turned on), power supply begins to both the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80, and the voltage levels of the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 gradually increase and reach a supply level V0 (the level when the power is on). Note that in FIG. 14, the voltage supply level V0, power interruption detection level V1, and drive voltage limit V2 are the same as in FIG. 3 (first embodiment (A)).

After power is turned on at time S51, the time when the voltage levels of the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 reach the supply level V0 is set to S52. Then, at time S53, which is a time T22 after time S52, the sub-program by the sub-control board 80 is started. Then, at time S54, which is a time T23 (T23 > T22) after time S52, the main program by the main control board 50 is started. In this way, the sub-program is started first, and then the main program is started so that when the main control board 50 sends the first command after power is turned on to the sub-control board 80, the sub-control board 80 will be in a state where it can receive that command.

Next, when a power outage occurs at time S55 (power switch 11 is turned off, a power outage, etc.), the voltage levels of the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 gradually decrease. Even if the voltage level decreases, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 can execute the power outage process as long as the voltage is equal to or higher than the drive voltage limit V2.
Furthermore, when a power interruption occurs at time S55, the voltage reaches the power interruption detection level V1 at time T0 (20 interrupts) as in Fig. 3, and the power interruption is detected (time S56). Furthermore, after the power interruption is detected, for example, after one interrupt, power interruption processing is executed as in Fig. 3. The power interruption processing is assumed to end at time S57.
Thereafter, when time S58 is reached, the voltage falls below the drive voltage limit V2 and the program (processing) cannot be executed, so control is performed so that the power-off process ends before time S58 is reached.

When the main program is started at time S54, it sets the main CPU 55, checks the RWM 53, confirms whether the previous power off was normal, confirms the state of the setting key switch, etc., and then starts an interrupt process. If the setting key switch is off, it executes a power off recovery process (initialization of a predetermined range of the RWM 53, etc.) after starting the interrupt process. On the other hand, if the setting key switch is on, it moves to a setting change process after starting the interrupt process.
14A, if a power outage occurs after the main program is started, and the setting key switch is off, the power outage recovery process is completed, and then the power outage process is executed, allowing the program to be terminated normally.
On the other hand, if a power outage occurs after the main program is started and the setting key switch is on, the power outage process is executed without starting the setting change process, because executing the setting change process after a power outage may cause problems.

Furthermore, in order to execute the main program normally, even if a power outage is detected simultaneously with the start of the main program, the main CPU 55 is set and the RWM 53 is checked without fail.
Furthermore, even if a power outage occurs after the main program is started, the program always runs until the interrupt is started. This is to detect the power outage in the interrupt process. As in the first embodiment (A), for example, if a voltage drop (power outage detection level V1) that is judged to have occurred at the "N" interrupt is detected, and the same voltage drop is also detected at the next "N+1" game, the power outage is detected at the "N+1" interrupt (judged to be a power outage). Then, the power outage process is executed from the "N+2" interrupt.

14A, the main program is started at time S54, and a power cut occurs thereafter at time S55. However, even if a power cut occurs at the same time as time S54 (startup of the main program), the power cut process is set to be completed before the voltage reaches the drive voltage limit V2.
In FIG. 14(a), the time T21 from when the power is turned on (time S51) until the voltage reaches the supply level V0 (time S52) is set to be shorter than the time T24 from when the power is turned off (time S55) until the voltage becomes low level.
Furthermore, time T23 (the time from when the voltage reaches the supply level V0 to when the main program is started) is set to be shorter than time T24.

FIG. 14B shows an example of a case where a power cut occurs before the main program is started by the main control board 50. In the example of FIG. 14B, the power is turned on at time S51, and turned off at time S59. Here, time S59 is before time S54 in FIG. 14A. That is, after the power (supply level V0) required for starting the main program is supplied, a power cut occurs before a predetermined time (time T23) has elapsed (before time S54 is reached), and the voltage drops. In such a case, the main program does not start. Therefore, the voltage gradually drops thereafter, and the power eventually becomes low level.
In the example of FIG. 14(b), when the power is turned on again, the device can start up normally.
Also, although not shown in FIG. 14, it is possible that a power outage occurs immediately after the subprogram is started (after time S53) but before time S54 (before the main program is started).
When a power cut occurs at the above timing, the subprogram executes a power cut process of the subprogram, and is capable of completing the power cut process of the subprogram before the voltage supplied to the subcontrol board 80 reaches the drive voltage limit V2.
Furthermore, since the power is turned off at the above timing before the main program is started, the main program does not start, as described above.

Although the embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In this embodiment, the passage sensor 46 is provided. The passage sensor 46 increases the accuracy of coin insertion determination and is also effective as a countermeasure against fraud. However, the passage sensor 46 does not have to be provided, and only the pair of insertion sensors 44a and 44b may be provided.

(2) In Fig. 2, the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are configured to detect the medal M moving in a substantially horizontal direction, but this is not limited to this. For example, the insertion sensors 44a and 44b may be configured to detect the medal M when it falls substantially vertically downward.
(3) In Fig. 2, the blocker 45 is disposed on the underside of the medal passage, but this is not limited to this. Any blocker may be used as long as it has the function of sending the medal M out of the medal passage before the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a.
2, the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are illustrated as detecting a point slightly above the center of the medal M when viewed from the front, but this does not mean that the actual product will be configured like this. The insertion sensors 44a and 44b may be positioned in any way as long as they are positioned to reliably detect the medal M passing through.

(4) In FIG. 3, time T2 is the time from the moment medal M is positioned at M2 to the moment medal M is positioned at M4, but this is not limited to this. For example, when medal M is at position M1 in FIG. 2, the time from the moment it is released until medal M reaches M4 may be set as T2, and T2 > T1 may be set. Alternatively, the time from the moment medal M reaches M4 from any predetermined position between M1 and M2 may be set as T2 > T1.

(5) In the first embodiment (A), when a power cut occurs at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, the power cut process is executed before the medal M reaches M4. However, this is not limited to the above, and for example, when a power cut occurs at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, the power cut process may be executed before the medal M reaches M3. That is, in this case, the medal M is not detected by the insertion sensor 44a due to the power cut process.
Alternatively, when a power cut occurs at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, the power cut process may be executed before the medal M reaches the insertion sensor 44b. In this case, the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a but not by the insertion sensor 44b, and the power cut process is executed.

(6) Furthermore, in the first embodiment (A), when a power outage occurs at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the time T1 until the power outage is detected and the power outage process (blocker off) is executed can be set to be shorter than the time it takes for the medal M to reach the position where the blocker 45 is installed (this time is referred to as "T2'"). By setting it in this way, in the case where a power outage occurs at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, when the medal M reaches the position of the blocker 45 from the position M2, the blocker 45 has already been turned off, so that the medal can be prevented from passing through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.
In the above, the position of medal M2 may be the moment when the medal is released from the hand at position M1, or a predetermined position between M1 and M2.

(7) As shown in Fig. 3, in the first embodiment (A), the power-off process (blocker off) is executed in the interrupt process next to the interrupt process that detected the power-off. However, this is not limited to this, and the power-off process (blocker off) may be set to be executed, for example, after interrupt processes "2" to "5" counting from the interrupt process that detected the power-off. Alternatively, the power-off process (blocker off) may be executed in the interrupt process that detected the power-off.
(8) In the first embodiment (A) of FIG. 3, when a power outage occurs, the time T0 until the voltage reaches the sustain level V1 from the supply level V0 is set to 20 interrupts. However, this is not limited to this and can be set to various values depending on the performance of the power supply.

(9) In the first embodiment (C) of FIG. 7, when a medal M is paid out by the medal payout device, the payout sensors 37a and 37b are configured to detect the movable piece 39a. However, this is not limited to the above, and the payout sensors 37a and 37b may detect the medal M itself being paid out. For example, the payout sensors 37a and 37 may be arranged like the insertion sensors 44a and 44b shown in FIG. 4 to detect the passage of the (paid out) medal M.

In addition, when the payout sensors 37a and 37b are arranged in this manner, when the medal M passes through the payout sensors 37a and 37b,
Dispensing sensor 37a is on, dispensing sensor 37b is off (time S31')
Dispensing sensor 37a is on, dispensing sensor 37b is on (time S32')
Dispensing sensor 37a is off, dispensing sensor 37b is on (time S33')
Dispensing sensor 37a is off, dispensing sensor 37b is off (time S34')
Trace the progress of.
The time from time S31' to time S34' is set to be shorter than time T1 (the time from the occurrence of a power outage to the execution of a power outage process).

(10) In the second embodiment, the gate mark 57b is formed so that the protrusion 57d and the recessed portion 57c are on the outside, but it is also possible to form it the other way around, so that the protrusion 57d and the recessed portion 57c are on the inside. The same applies to the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58. In this case, if the gate mark 57b is shaped as shown in FIG. 10(b), the outside of the upper cover 57 or the lower cover 58 will be a smooth surface. On the other hand, if it is shaped as shown in FIG. 10(c), a protrusion 57e will be formed on the outside of the upper cover 57 or the lower cover 58.

(11) In the second embodiment, an example of the board case 56 in which the main control board 50 is housed is given. However, the second embodiment can be applied not only to the main control board 50 but also to other control boards for which it is desired to prevent fraud, such as the board case of the sub-control board 80. As shown in FIG. 1, the sub-control board 80 also includes the RWM 83, ROM 54, sub-CPU 85, etc., but on the upper surface of the upper cover of the board case of the sub-control board 80, at least the sub-CPU 85 is not arranged vertically (directly below) the gate mark, and further, the RWM 83 and ROM 54 are not arranged either. Similarly, the model number display area of the sub-control board 80 is not arranged vertically (directly below) the gate mark.

(12) In the third embodiment, examples are given of the push order presentation during the AT, the display of the operated stop switch 42 (stopped reel 31), and the remaining number of plays during the AT. However, the third embodiment can also be applied to cases where the number of coins won during the AT or special play (BB play, etc.) or the remaining number of coins that can be won is displayed.
For example, assume that the number of coins acquired at the start of the "N" game is "200", the number of coins acquired at the start of the "N+1" game is "209", and the number of coins acquired at the start of the "N+2" game is "218". The main control board 50 transmits a command regarding the number of coins acquired to the sub-control board 80 at the start of each game.
As in the example shown in FIG. 11, it is assumed that a disconnection occurs during the "N"th game, and communication is restored during the "N+1"th game.

In this case, the sub-control board 80 displays "200" as the number of coins won in the "N" game. Furthermore, at the start of the "N+1" game, a command regarding the number of coins won is not received (due to the disconnection), so the display of the number of coins won of "200" is also maintained for the "N+1" game. Next, when the sub-control board 80 receives a command regarding the number of coins won at the start of the "N+2" game, it updates the display of the number of coins won to "218" based on that command.

(13) In the third embodiment, FIG. 11 shows an example in which the image display is restored to normal at the start of the "N+2" game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image display may be restored to normal after the "N+1" game has stopped completely or when a bet operation is performed thereafter. Alternatively, the image display may be restored to normal at a predetermined timing based on a command sent to the sub-control board 80 at or after the stop of all the games.

(14) In the third embodiment, for example, in the middle of the disconnected "N+1" game, a lottery for adding (adding) the number of coins that can be won during the AT or the number of games may be won. In this case, since the "N+1" game is disconnected, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive a command based on the winning of the add-on lottery. Therefore, in this case, for example, at the start of the "N+2" game, the main control board 50 may send a command indicating the result after the add-on lottery, and at the start of the "N+2" game, the sub-control board 80 may display the game information after the add-on (number of coins that can be won and the number of games).

(15) In the third embodiment (FIG. 11), for example, a disconnection may occur after the first right stop in the "N" game, and communication may be restored before the first stop switch 42 in the "N+1" game is operated. Assume that the player has performed the first right stop in the "N+1" game. In this case, when the sub-control board 80 receives a command to stop to the first right in the "N+1" game, it means that it has received a stop command for the stop switch 42 that has already been operated, and outputs a push order failure presentation. Then, when a bet is made after all the stops in the "N+1" game, or at the start of the "N+2" game, the image display may be restored to normal.

(16) In the third embodiment (FIG. 11), when the number of coins won is displayed as an image during AT, the image display of the number of coins won before and after disconnection can be updated in the following manner, for example.
When a payout process is performed, the main control board 50 sends a command indicating the number of coins won to the sub-control board 80. If a disconnection occurs during the "N"th game, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the number of coins won in the "N"th game. Just before the disconnection in the "N"th game, the sub-control board 80 was displaying "100" as the number of coins won during the AT. Also, 10 coins are won in both the "N"th game and the "N+1"th game during the AT.
In this case, the number of coins won during the AT at the end of the "N" game should be "110", but remains "100" (due to a broken wire). Assume that communication is restored during the "N+1" game. This allows the sub-control board 80 to return the number of coins won during the AT to a normal value based on the command for the number of coins won received during the payout process of the "N+1" game. Here, the number of coins won may be returned to a normal value during the payout process of the "N+1" game, or, as in the example of FIG. 11, may be returned to a normal value at the start of the "N+2" game. Furthermore, the number of coins won may be updated to "110" during the payout process of the "N+1" game, and updated to "120" at the start of the "N+2" game.

(17) In this embodiment, a slot machine 10 is illustrated as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to a pachinko gaming machine, for example. A pachinko gaming machine is provided with various winning holes, such as a start hole (a winning hole that starts the pattern change by the pattern change display device and triggers the acquisition of a random number for the jackpot lottery), an electric chute winning hole (a winning hole equipped with a device that opens for a certain period of time when a gaming ball wins and then closes to make it easier to win the next prize. Note that the electric chute is not limited to a tulip shape), and an attacker (a large winning hole that opens when a jackpot is won). The first embodiment (B) can be applied to these winning holes.

Specifically, for example, the starting hole is provided with a winning sensor (a sensor that first detects a game ball that has entered the starting hole) and a discharge sensor (a sensor that detects the game ball after it has been detected by the winning sensor). Also, the attacker is provided with a V winning sensor (a sensor that first detects a game ball that has entered the attacker) and a discharge sensor (a sensor that detects the game ball after it has been detected by the V winning sensor).
For example, in the case of the start port, if a power cut occurs at the moment when the game ball is detected by the winning sensor, the discharge sensor is set to detect the game ball before the power cut process is executed. This allows the winning balls to be counted correctly even if a power cut occurs at the moment when the game ball is detected by the winning sensor. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the winning balls from not being paid out even though the game ball has entered the winning port. The same applies to the V winning sensor and discharge sensor of the attacker.

(18) In this embodiment, a slot machine 10 is given as an example of one type of gaming machine, but the slot machine 10 is not limited to a "reel type gaming machine" (so-called "pachislot gaming machine") installed in a Type 4 business establishment that is subject to the Entertainment and Amusement Act, and can also be applied to, for example, casino machines and enclosed gaming machines (medalless gaming machines) that do not use medals for gaming as gaming media.

Here, an enclosed gaming machine (medalless gaming machine) can, for example, eliminate the medal payout device (a unit including the hopper 35, hopper motor 36, and payout sensor 37) shown in FIG. 1. It can also eliminate the need for the medal insertion port 47 and medal selector. All electronic medals (electronic gaming media) awarded as a result of winning combinations are stored in the credit number display LED 76. In this case, it is conceivable that the credit number display LED 76 is configured with five digits (capable of storing a maximum of "99,999" electronic medals).
Even in such casino machines or enclosed gaming machines (medalless gaming machines), the present invention can be applied to all of the above-mentioned and following embodiments except for the first embodiment.

Sixth Embodiment
The sixth embodiment relates to the control of the medal payout device 15 by the main control board 50.
Here, FIG. 15 to FIG. 17 are diagrams for explaining the relationship between the position of the hopper disk 101, the position of the medal, and the drive control of the hopper motor 36 in the sixth embodiment.
In addition, Figure 15(a) is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing the state before the last dispensed medal comes into contact with the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b, and Figure 15(b) is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing the state before the last dispensed medal comes into contact with the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b and when the rotation of the hopper disk 101 has progressed further than in (a).

Furthermore, Figure 16(a) is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing the state in which the last ejected medal is in contact with the fixed axis 38a and the movable axis 38b, and Figure 16(b) is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing the state in which the movable axis 38b has moved due to being pushed by the last ejected medal.
Furthermore, Figure 17(a) is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing the state at the moment when the last medal is discharged from the discharge section, and (b) is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing the state when the rotation of the hopper disk has stopped after the last medal has been discharged.

In the sixth embodiment, the medal payout device 15 includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper disk 101 provided at the bottom of the hopper 35, and a hopper motor 36 for rotating the hopper disk 101. As in the first embodiment, the medal payout device 15 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. The main control board 50 controls the driving of the hopper motor 36.

As shown in Figures 15 to 17, the hopper disk 101 is formed in a disk shape, and the hopper disk 101 has eight holding portions 102, which are openings capable of holding medals stored in the hopper, provided along the outer periphery of the hopper disk 101.
Furthermore, each holding portion 102 is formed in the shape of a circular hole penetrating from the upper surface to the lower surface of the hopper disk 101. The medals stored in the hopper 35 enter each holding portion 102 from an upper opening of each holding portion 102 and are held by each holding portion 102.

Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, when the hopper motor 36 is driven during the medal payout process, the hopper disk 101 shown in Figures 15 to 17 rotates clockwise. Then, when the hopper disk 101 rotates clockwise, the medals held in each holding portion 102 move together with the hopper disk 101 in a clockwise arc, and are sequentially discharged from the discharge portion 103.
When a medal is discharged from the discharge unit 103, the holding unit 102 in which that medal was held becomes empty. Then, other medals stored in the hopper 35 newly enter the empty holding unit 102.

As described in the first embodiment (C), the medal payout device 15 includes the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b. In the sixth embodiment, the space between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b is the discharge section 103 from which medals are discharged.
16(b), when the medal pushes against the movable shaft 38b, the movable shaft 38b moves, and the gap between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b becomes wider than the diameter of the medal, the medal passes between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b. At this time, the medal is discharged from the discharge section 103.
Furthermore, the moment when a medal passes between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b and the movable shaft 38b returns to its original position (the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 6 ) is the moment when the medal is discharged from the discharge unit 103. When the movable shaft 38b returns to its original position, the payout sensor 37 detects that the medal has been discharged from the discharge unit 103.

In addition, the last medal discharged from the discharge unit 103 in one payout process is referred to as the "last discharged medal," and the first medal discharged from the discharge unit 103 in the next payout process is referred to as the "first discharged medal."
15 to 17, medals are indicated by two-dot chain lines. The medal marked with the letter "A" is the last medal dispensed in one payout process, and the medal marked with the letter "B" is the first medal dispensed in the next payout process.

In addition, the position of holding unit 102 in which the last ejected medal is held at the moment when the last ejected medal in one payout process is ejected from ejection unit 103 is referred to as the "first position," and the position of holding unit 102 in which the first ejected medal in the next payout process is held at the moment when the last ejected medal in one payout process is ejected from ejection unit 103 is referred to as the "second position."
Fig. 17(a) shows the state at the moment when the last medal is discharged from the discharge unit 103 (the relative positions of the hopper disk 101, each holding unit 102, each medal marked with the letters "A" to "D", fixed shaft 38a, and movable shaft 38b). In Fig. 17(a), the position of the holding unit 102 in which the medal marked with the letter "A" was held is the first position, and the position of the holding unit 102 in which the medal marked with the letter "B" is held is the second position.

In the sixth embodiment, when one payout process is completed, the main control board 50 controls the driving of the hopper motor 36 so that the rotation of the hopper disk 101 stops with the holding section 102, which holds the first dispensed medal in the next payout process, positioned between the first position and the second position.
Figure 17(b) shows a state in which the rotation of the hopper disk 101 has stopped after the last medal has been discharged from the discharge section 103. In Figure 17(b), the first position and the second position are respectively indicated by dashed lines. Also, in Figure 17(b), the medal marked with the letter "B" is the first medal to be discharged in the next payout process. Then, as shown in Figure 17(b), the rotation of the hopper disk 101 has stopped with the holding section 102 in which the medal marked with the letter "B" is held being located between the first position and the second position.

In the sixth embodiment, a DC motor (direct current motor) is used as the hopper motor 36 .
Therefore, at the end of the payout process, the main control board 50 can send a current to the hopper motor 36 in the opposite direction to that used when discharging medals, thereby suddenly stopping the drive of the hopper motor 36 and suddenly stopping the rotation of the hopper disk 101.

As described above, when a medal is discharged from the discharge unit 103 and the movable shaft 38b returns to its original position, the dispensing sensor 37 detects this.
Therefore, when the payout sensor 37 detects that the last medal has been discharged from the discharge section 103, a current is passed through the hopper motor 36 in the opposite direction to that used when discharging medals, causing the rotation of the hopper disk 101 to suddenly stop, and the holding section 102, which holds the first medal to be discharged in the next payout process, can be stopped at the second position.

In addition, by passing a current through the hopper motor 36 in the opposite direction to that used for discharging medals, the hopper motor 36 can be driven in the opposite direction, causing the hopper disk 101 to rotate in the opposite direction (counterclockwise).
Therefore, even if the holding section 102 that holds the first medal to be dispensed in the next medal dispensing process passes the second position when the payout process is completed, the hopper disk 101 can be rotated in the reverse direction to return to the second position by passing a current through the hopper motor 36 in the opposite direction to that used when dispensing the medals.
Then, by returning the holding unit 102 in which the first dispensed medal is held to the second position, the first dispensed medal can start moving from the same second position every time. This allows the same operation to be performed for each payout process, so that the first dispensed medal can be dispensed stably.

Here, when a constant current is applied to the DC motor serving as the hopper motor 36, the rotation of the drive shaft gradually accelerates from a stopped state, and then reaches a constant speed (constant speed).
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a time chart showing the relationship between the drive signal of the hopper motor 36, the drive state of the hopper motor 36, and the discharge state of medals from the discharge unit 103 in the sixth embodiment.
18, the top line indicates the drive signal of the hopper motor 36, the middle line indicates the drive state of the hopper motor 36, and the bottom line indicates the discharge status of medals from the discharge unit 103.

In addition, the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is a digital signal that is output from a specified output port provided on the main control board 50. When the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 changes from off to on, a constant current flows through the hopper motor 36, and when the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 changes from on to off, the current flowing through the hopper motor 36 becomes "0."
Furthermore, in FIG. 18, the driving state of the hopper motor 36 "stopped" indicates a state in which the rotation of the drive shaft has stopped, and the driving state of the hopper motor 36 "constant speed" indicates a state in which the rotation of the drive shaft has reached a constant speed (constant speed).

As shown in FIG. 18, when the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 changes from OFF to ON, the drive state of the hopper motor 36 gradually increases from "stop" and then reaches "constant speed."
Moreover, the portion where the line indicating the drive state of the hopper motor 36 rises diagonally to the right indicates that the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 gradually accelerates.

In this manner, in the hopper motor 36 using a DC motor, when the drive signal changes from off to on, the rotation of the drive shaft gradually accelerates.
Therefore, if the holding portion 102 that holds the first dispensed medal is stopped at the second position, the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 gradually accelerates until the holding portion 102 reaches the first position, which takes a longer time than the interval between medal dispenses at a constant speed.
In other words, when the holding section 102 that holds the first discharged medal is stopped at the second position, the time required from when the hopper motor 36 starts to drive until the first discharged medal is discharged from the discharge section 103 becomes longer than the medal discharge interval when the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 is rotating at a constant speed.
This may give the player the impression that the first medal was dispensed late.

Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, the main control board 50 controls the driving of the hopper motor 36 so that, at the end of one payout process, the holding section 102, which holds the first dispensed medal in the next payout process, is positioned between the first position and the second position and the rotation of the hopper disk 101 stops.
When the holding unit 102 that holds the first dispensed medal stops between the first and second positions, the distance it takes to reach the first position is shorter than when it stops at the second position. This makes the time it takes to reach the first position shorter than when it stops at the second position, so even if the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 gradually accelerates, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the dispense of the first (first) medal is delayed.

Furthermore, when the holding portion 102 that holds the first ejected medal is stopped between the first position and the second position, the portion of the hopper disk 101 corresponding to the space between two adjacent holding portions 102 is positioned directly in front of the ejection portion 103, as shown in FIG. 17(b).
As a result, even if someone commits a fraudulent act (cheating) by inserting a fraudulent device such as a wire through the medal payout opening located at the bottom front of the front door 12 and using this fraudulent device to access the holding section 102 of the hopper disk 101, the portion of the hopper disk 101 corresponding to the space between two adjacent holding sections 102 acts as a barrier, preventing the fraudulent device from accessing the holding section 102.

When the driving state of the hopper motor 36 is "constant speed", the hopper disk 101 rotates at a constant speed in a clockwise direction. At this time, the medals held in each holding section 102 are sequentially discharged from the discharge section 103 at equal intervals.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 18, when the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 changes from on to off, the drive state of the hopper motor 36 gradually decreases from "constant speed" and then reaches "stop."
In FIG. 18, the line indicating the drive state of the hopper motor 36 slopes diagonally downward to the right, indicating that the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 is gradually decelerating.

In this manner, in the hopper motor 36 using a DC motor, when the drive signal changes from on to off, the rotation of the drive shaft gradually decelerates.
Then, when the last ejected medal passes between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b (ejection section 103) and the movable shaft 38b returns to its original position, the payout sensor 37 detects that the last ejected medal has been ejected from the ejection section 103, and the main control board 50 changes the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 from on to off.
As a result, the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 gradually decelerates, and the rotation of the hopper disk 101 stops with the holding section 102, which holds the first medal dispensed in the next payout process, positioned between the first position and the second position.

18, when the main control board 50 changes the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 from OFF to ON, it then transmits a payout start command to the sub-control board 80. This payout start command is a command indicating that the main control board 50 has started the payout process.
On the other hand, when the sub-control board 80 receives the payout start command, it starts processing related to the output of the payout sound. After that, the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 starts.

18, when the main control board 50 turns the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 from on to off, it then transmits a payout end command to the sub-control board 80. This payout end command is a command indicating that the main control board 50 has ended the payout process.
On the other hand, when the sub-control board 80 receives the payout end command, it ends the process related to the output of the payout sound, whereby the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 ends.

Here, the "payout sound" refers to a sound output from the sub-control board 80 in synchronization with the payout of medals. For example, a "ringing" sound can be output from the speaker 22 as the payout sound.
Further, the "processing related to output of the payout sound" refers to a series of processes such as a process of selecting a sound to be output, a process of selecting a channel to output the selected sound, and a process of outputting the selected sound from the speaker 22. By executing this series of processes, the payout sound is actually output from the speaker 22.

Then, when the main control board 50 turns on the drive signal for the hopper motor 36, it sends a payout start command to the sub-control board 80, and when the sub-control board 80 receives the payout start command, it starts processing related to the output of the payout sound, so that the payout sound can start to be output from the speaker 22 before the first medal is discharged from the discharge unit 103.

In addition, when the main control board 50 turns off the drive signal of the hopper motor 36, it sends a payout end command to the sub-control board 80, and when the sub-control board 80 receives the payout end command, it terminates the processing related to the output of the payout sound, so that when the discharge of medals from the discharge unit 103 stops, the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 ends.
This gives the player the impression that the payout sound is synchronized with the payout of medals.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing the relationship between the operation of the main control board 50, the driving state of the hopper motor 36, the detection state of the payout sensors 37a and 37b, and the timing of medal discharge from the discharge unit 103.
When a winning combination with a payout is achieved, the main control board 50 sets payout number data in a specified memory area of the RWM 53 and turns on the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 .
For example, when a 10-coin combination is won and 10 medals are paid out, the payout number data "10" is set in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.
That is, when paying out "N" medals (N≧1), "N" is set in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 as the payout number data.

Furthermore, when the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned on, the hopper motor 36 goes from a "stopped" state to a "started" state (begins driving), and then goes through "acceleration" and reaches a "constant speed."
When one payout process ends, the holding unit 102 that holds the first dispensed medal in the next payout process stops between the first position and the second position, but when the next payout process begins, the hopper motor 36 reaches "constant speed" by the time the holding unit 102 that holds the first dispensed medal reaches the first position.
In other words, the stopping position of the holding unit 102 that holds the first dispensed medal is set so that the hopper motor 36 reaches a "constant speed" by the time the holding unit 102 that holds the first dispensed medal reaches the first position.

Then, after the hopper motor 36 has gone from "stop" to "accelerate" and then to "constant speed", the holding section 102 that holds the first ejected medal reaches the first position, thereby ensuring that the first ejected medal is ejected from the ejection section 103.
Furthermore, at the timing (a) in FIG. 19, the dispensing sensors 37a and 37b are both off.
The timing of (a) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state of (a) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).

In the sixth embodiment, the dispensing sensor 37a is set to low active, unlike the first embodiment (C). That is, the dispensing sensor 37a is set to be off when it detects the movable piece 39a, and to be on when it does not detect the movable piece 39a.
On the other hand, the dispensing sensor 37b is set to high active as in the first embodiment (C), i.e., the dispensing sensor 37b is set to be off when it does not detect the movable piece 39a and to be on when it detects the movable piece 39a.
Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, at the timing (a) in FIG. 19, the dispensing sensors 37a and 37b are both turned off.
In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the dispensing sensor 37a is set to low active and the dispensing sensor 37b is set to high active, so that the on/off waveform of the dispensing sensor 37a signal is reversed from that in Figure 8 in the first embodiment (C).

At the timing (b) in FIG. 19, the medal pushes the movable shaft 38b, causing the movable shaft 38b to move, and the payout sensor 37a goes into the ON state, while the payout sensor 37b goes into the OFF state.
The state (b) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state (b) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).
19(c), the distance between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b becomes wider than the diameter of the medal, the payout sensor 37a is turned on, and the payout sensor 37b is also turned on. At this time, the medal is discharged from between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b (the discharge section 103).
The state (c) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state (c) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).

Furthermore, at the timing of (d) in FIG. 19, the movable shaft 38b is being urged by the spring 39b and is in the middle of returning to its original position, the payout sensor 37a is in the ON state, and the payout sensor 37b is in the OFF state.
The state of (d) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state of (d) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).
19(e), the movable shaft 38b is biased by the spring 39b to return to its original position, and the payout sensors 37a and 37b are both turned off. At this time, the main control board 50 determines that one medal has been dispensed, and updates the payout number data.
The state (e) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state (a) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).

When paying out "N" medals, steps (a) to (e) in FIG. 19 are repeated until it is determined that the "N"th medal has been dispensed.
Then, when it is determined that the "N"th medal has been discharged, the main control board 50 turns off the drive signal of the hopper motor 36.
Furthermore, when the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned off, the hopper motor 36 goes through a "deceleration" process and then reaches a "stop" process.
This completes the payout process for "N" medals.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the flow of the payout process in the sixth embodiment.
In the payout process by the main control board 50, first, in step S101, payout number data is set. This process is a process of storing the payout number data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 of the main control board 50. For example, when paying out "N" medals (N≧1), "N" is stored as the payout number data. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S102.

In step S102, the main control board 50 turns on the drive signal for the hopper motor 36. When the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned on, the hopper motor 36 starts. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S103.
In step S103, the main control board 50 judges whether the payout sensor 37a is on or not. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the payout sensor 37a is set to low active, and is set to be on when the movable piece 39a is not detected (when the movable shaft 38b is moved by being pushed by the medal).

If the answer is "Yes" in step S103, the process proceeds to the next step S104, where the main control board 50 judges whether the payout sensor 37b is off. If the answer is "Yes" in step S104, the process proceeds to the next step S105. On the other hand, if the answer is "No" in step S104, an error occurs.
Here, if the payout sensor 37b is already on when the payout sensor 37a changes from off to on, the result in step S104 will be "No". In this case, it is possible that a medal is jammed in the discharge unit 103 (a medal jam error). Furthermore, if a medal jam error occurs, the error will continue until the jammed medal is removed (the cause of the error is removed) and the reset switch is operated. Then, once the jammed medal is removed and the reset switch is operated, the error will be cleared.

Although not shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, if "No" continues for a predetermined time in step S103 (the predetermined time passes while remaining as "No"), an error occurs. In this case, it is considered that the hopper 35 is empty of medals (hopper empty error). Furthermore, if a hopper empty error occurs, the error will continue until the hopper 35 is replenished with medals (removing the cause of the error) and the reset switch is operated. Then, when the hopper 35 is replenished with medals and the reset switch is operated, the error is cleared.
In step S105, the main control board 50 again judges whether the dispense sensor 37a is on. If the answer is "Yes" in step S105, the process proceeds to the next step S106. If the answer is "No" in step S105, an error occurs, just like when the answer is "No" in step S104.

In step S106, the main control board 50 determines whether the dispensing sensor 37b is on. If the answer is "Yes" in step S106, the process proceeds to the next step S107, where the main control board 50 again determines whether the dispensing sensor 37a is on. If the answer is "Yes" in step S107, the process proceeds to the next step S108. On the other hand, if the answer is "No" in step S107, an error occurs, just like when the answer is "No" in step S104 or S105.

When the process proceeds to step S108, the main control board 50 then determines whether the dispensing sensor 37b is off. If the result of step S108 is "Yes", the process proceeds to the next step S109, where the main control board 50 determines whether the dispensing sensor 37a is off. If the result of step S109 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step S110, where the main control board 50 determines whether the dispensing sensor 37b is off.
If the answer is "Yes" in step S110, the process proceeds to the next step S111. If the answer is "No" in step S110, an error occurs, just like if the answer is "No" in steps S104, S105, or S107.

In step S111, the main control board 50 updates the payout number data by subtracting "1" from the payout number data stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53, and stores the data after the subtraction as new payout number data.
In the next step S112, the main control board 50 determines whether the payout number data is "0" or not. If the answer is "Yes" in step S112, the process proceeds to the next step S113, where the main control board 50 turns off the drive signal for the hopper motor 36. When the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned off, the hopper motor 36 stops. The payout process according to this flowchart is then terminated. In contrast, if the answer is "No" in step S112, the process returns to step S103. This allows the next medal to be paid out. The process of returning from step S112 to S103 is then repeated until the payout number data becomes "0".

Here, medals discharged from the discharge unit 103 are normally guided to a medal tray through a passage called a medal chute.
However, on rare occasions, a medal discharged from discharge unit 103 may hit the inner wall of the medal chute, bounce back, and return to discharge unit 103. When this happens, the bouncing medal may hit the next medal that is about to be discharged from discharge unit 103, pushing back the medal that is about to be discharged.

Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, as in steps S103 to S110 in the payout process flowchart of FIG. 20, the on/off of the payout sensors 37a and 37b is repeatedly determined in the order of "payout sensor 37a" → "payout sensor 37b".
This makes it possible to detect an error such as a medal being pushed back when it is being discharged from the discharge unit 103.

For example, suppose that one medal is about to be dispensed, and this medal pushes movable shaft 38b, causing movable shaft 38b to move, turning payout sensor 37a on and payout sensor 37b off (timing (b) in FIG. 19). At this time, suppose that the medal dispensed before this medal bounces back and hits this medal, pushing it back and turning payout sensor 37a off. In this case, the answer is "No" in step S105 in FIG. 20, resulting in an error.
Also, for example, if the medal is pushed back at the timing (c) in Fig. 19, and the payout sensor 37a is turned off, the result in step S107 in Fig. 20 becomes "No", resulting in an error.

<Modification of the Sixth Embodiment>
Although the sixth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the sixth embodiment, eight holding portions 102 are provided on the hopper disk 101. However, the number of holding portions is not limited to eight and may be set appropriately depending on the size of the hopper disk 101, for example, to five, six, ten, etc.
(2) In the sixth embodiment, the hopper disk 101 is formed in a disk shape, but this is not limiting, and for example, the hopper disk 101 may be formed in a sprocket shape. In other words, the holding portion 102 is not limited to a circular hole shape as long as it can hold medals.

(3) In the sixth embodiment, the rotation direction of the hopper disk 101 during the medal payout process is clockwise, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the hopper disk 101 may rotate counterclockwise so that the medals held in the holding section 102 are sequentially discharged from the discharge section 103.
(4) In the sixth embodiment, a DC motor (direct current motor) is used as the hopper motor 36. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a stepping motor may be used as the hopper motor 36.

(5) The flow of the payout process in the sixth embodiment is not limited to the flow shown in the flowchart of Fig. 20, and may be, for example, the flow shown in the flowchart of Fig. 21. Even with this type of payout process flow, it is possible to detect the discharge of medals. However, with this type of payout process flow, it is not possible to detect an error in which a medal that is about to be discharged is pushed back by a medal that has bounced off the inner wall of the medal chute.
In addition, the same step numbers are used for processes having the same content in FIG. 20 and FIG.
(6) The first to sixth embodiments and the various modified examples shown in the first to sixth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

Seventh Embodiment
This relates to the arrangement of the main control board 50 mounted inside the cabinet 13 and the sub-control board 80 mounted on the back surface of the front door 12 .
FIG. 22 is a side cross-sectional view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, and is a diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80.

The housing of the slot machine 10 includes a box-shaped cabinet 13 that is open on the front side, and a front door 12 that is attached so as to be able to open and close the opening of the cabinet 13.
The cabinet 13 is configured into a box shape with an opening on the front side by assembling a bottom plate 13a, a back plate 13b, a right side plate, a left side plate, a top plate, etc.
Furthermore, a medal payout device 15 is disposed at the lower interior portion (above the bottom plate 13a) of the cabinet 13. This medal payout device 15 is for paying out medals, and includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper disk 101 provided at the bottom of the hopper 35, and a hopper motor 36 for rotating the hopper disk 101.

Furthermore, inside the cabinet 13, above the medal payout device 15, there is provided a plate-shaped reel base 110 supported by the back panel 13b, the right side panel, and the left side panel, and a pattern display device 14 is arranged on top of this reel base 110.
The symbol display device 14 also includes a rectangular reel frame 14a, and three reels 31 are arranged side by side inside this reel frame 14a.

Furthermore, a motor 32 is connected to the rotation center of each reel 31, and each motor 32 is fixed to a reel bracket, and each reel bracket is supported by the reel frame 14a.
Furthermore, a transparent reel board case 121 is disposed on the reel frame 14a, and a reel control board 120 is housed in this reel board case 121. This reel control board 120 controls the driving of the three motors 32.

A transparent main board case 56 is disposed inside the cabinet 13 above the pattern display device 14. More specifically, the main board case 56 is fixed to the front side (the inner surface side of the housing) of the back panel 13b of the cabinet 13 at a position corresponding to the upper side of the pattern display device 14. The main control board 50 is accommodated in the main board case 56.
The main control board 50 controls the progress of the game, and includes an input port 51, an output port 52, a RWM 53, a ROM 54, and a main CPU 55. The main control board 50 is further electrically connected to the bet switch 40, the start switch 41, the stop switch 42, the symbol display device 14, the medal payout device 15, the reel control board 120, the sub-control board 80, and the like via the input port 51 or the output port 52.

The front door 12 is attached so as to cover the opening on the front side of the cabinet 13 and be capable of opening and closing the opening of the cabinet 13. More specifically, the left side of the front door 12 is attached to the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13 via a hinge. The front door 12 is configured to rotate around this hinge, thereby allowing the opening on the front side of the cabinet 13 to be opened and closed.

A transparent display window is provided in the center of the front door 12. This display window is disposed in a position corresponding to the front of the symbol display device 14. Through the display window, the player can see each of the three symbols on each reel 31 of the symbol display device 14.
Further, on the front side (player side) of the front door 12, below the display window, there are arranged a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a settlement switch 43, a medal insertion slot 47, etc.

Furthermore, at the bottom of the front side (player side) of the front door 12, there are disposed a medal payout port, which is an opening through which medals paid out from the medal payout device 15 pass, and a medal tray for receiving medals paid out from the medal payout port.
Furthermore, at the top of the front side (player side) of the front door 12, a performance lamp 21, a speaker 22, an image display device 23, etc. are arranged.

A transparent sub-board case 87 is disposed on the upper part of the rear surface of the front door 12. More specifically, the sub-board case 87 is fixed on the rear surface side of the front door 12 (the inner surface side of the housing), at a position above the pattern display device 14 and corresponding to the rear surface of the image display device 23. The sub-board case 87 houses the sub-control board 80.
The sub-control board 80 controls the effects, and includes an input port 81, an output port 82, a RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub-CPU 85, an electrolytic capacitor 86, etc. The sub-control board 80 is electrically connected to the effect lamps 21, the speaker 22, the image display device 23, the main control board 50, etc., via the input port 81 or the output port 82. The sub-control board 80 determines what effect is to be output and at what timing based on the control command received from the main control board 50, and controls the output of the effect lamps 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23 according to the determination.

As described above, inside the cabinet 13, above the pattern display device 14, the main board case 56 is disposed, and the main control board 50 is housed within this main board case 56.
In addition, a sub-board case 87 is arranged above the pattern display device 14 on the rear surface of the front door 12, and a sub-control board 80 is housed within this sub-board case 87.
As shown in FIG. 22, when the front door 12 is closed, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are disposed so as to face each other.
Furthermore, when the front door 12 is closed, the distance between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is set to be wider than the width of the reel control board 120 in the depth direction.

Here, an electrolytic capacitor 86 for storing electricity is arranged on the sub-control board 80. The electrolytic capacitor 86 is filled with an electrolyte. If the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 bursts due to a malfunction, the electrolyte may scatter. If the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is arranged in a position opposite the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, when the electrolytic capacitor 86 bursts due to a malfunction, the scattered electrolyte may adhere to the main CPU 55, causing the main CPU 55 to malfunction. There is also a possibility that the main CPU 55 may be damaged by the impact caused by the bursting of the electrolytic capacitor 86.

Therefore, in the seventh embodiment, the electrolytic capacitor 86 is disposed in a position on the sub-control board 80 other than the position facing the main CPU 55 .
As a result, even if the electrolytic capacitor 86 bursts due to a malfunction and the electrolyte splashes, the splashed electrolyte can be prevented from adhering to the main CPU 55, and thus the main CPU 55 can be prevented from malfunctioning. Also, the main CPU 55 can be prevented from being damaged by the impact caused when the electrolytic capacitor 86 bursts.
Furthermore, if the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is positioned opposite the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, there is a possibility that noise from the electrolytic capacitor 86 will cause the main CPU 55 to malfunction. However, by positioning the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 in a position other than the position opposite the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, it is possible to prevent the main CPU 55 from malfunctioning due to noise from the electrolytic capacitor 86.

Figure 23 (a) is a diagram showing example 1 of the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed.
In FIG. 23A , the circle indicated by the dashed line is a projection of the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 onto the main control board 50 .

In example 1 shown in Figure 23 (a), there is one electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80, and it is located above the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 in the vertical direction and to the left of the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 in the horizontal direction.
In this way, by arranging the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 at a different position in both the vertical and horizontal directions relative to the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, the position of the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 can be a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50.

<Modification of the Seventh Embodiment>
Although the seventh embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) The number of electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 is not limited to one. For example, as shown in FIG. 23(b), the number may be two.
Figure 23 (b) is a diagram showing example 2 of the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed.

23(b), like FIG. 23(a), the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is shown projected onto the main control board 50 by a dashed line.
In FIG. 23B , the upper left electrolytic capacitor 86 and the lower right electrolytic capacitor 86 are both disposed at different positions in both the vertical and horizontal directions with respect to the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 .
As a result, also in example 2 of FIG. 23( b ), the two electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 are disposed in positions other than the positions facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 .

(2) The number of electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 may be, for example, four, as shown in FIG. 24( c ).
Figure 24 (c) is a diagram showing example 3 of the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed.
The electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 are projected onto the main control board 50 and indicated by dashed circles, similar to Figures 23(a) and (b).

24(c), the sub-control board 80 has four electrolytic capacitors 86, three of which are arranged at different positions both vertically and horizontally with respect to the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50. The remaining electrolytic capacitor 86 is arranged at a different position horizontally but at the same position vertically with respect to the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50.
Even with this arrangement, the four electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 are located in positions other than the positions facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 .

(3) The electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 may be disposed, for example, in a location away from the main control board 50 .
Figure 24 (d) is a diagram showing example 4 of the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed.
The electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is projected and indicated by a dashed circle, similar to Figures 23(a), (b) and 24(c).

In Figure 24 (d), similar to Figure 23 (a), there is one electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80. However, unlike Figure 23 (a), the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is positioned away from the main control board 50.
In this way, even when the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is positioned away from the main control board 50, it is still positioned at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50.

As shown in Figures 23(a), (b), 24(c) and (d), by arranging the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 in a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, even if the electrolytic capacitor 86 bursts due to a malfunction and electrolyte is scattered, the scattered electrolyte will not adhere to the main CPU 55, and the main CPU 55 will not malfunction.

(4) As shown in Figures 9 and 10 of the second embodiment, a management information display LED 74 (also called a "role ratio monitor") is disposed on the main control board 50. This management information display LED 74 displays management information such as a favorable zone ratio, a continuous role ratio, and a role ratio.
In addition, the "favorable zone ratio" refers to the proportion of the favorable zone to the entire play zone (normal zone + standby zone + favorable zone), the "continuous device ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of medals acquired when the first type special device (RB) is activated to the total number of medals acquired, and the "device ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of medals acquired when the device is activated to the total number of medals acquired.

Furthermore, the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 may be disposed in a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and in a position other than the position facing the management information display LED 74.
As a result, even if the electrolytic capacitor 86 bursts due to a malfunction and the electrolyte splashes, the splashed electrolyte can be prevented from adhering to the management information display LED 74, and ultimately the management information displayed on the management information display LED 74 can be prevented from becoming unidentifiable.
In addition, the management information display LED 74 can be prevented from being damaged by the impact when the electrolytic capacitor 86 explodes.
(5) The first to seventh embodiments and the various modified examples shown in the first to seventh embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

Eighth Embodiment
The eighth embodiment relates to the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 at the bottom of the housing of the slot machine 10.
25 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view of the lower front part (part A in FIG. 22) of the housing of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, and illustrates the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 25, a first closing portion 13c is provided at the bottom of the cabinet 13, which protrudes towards the front door 12 when the front door 12 is closed.
In other words, the first blocking portion 13c is a plate-shaped protruding portion that protrudes forward from the front end portion of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13, and when the front door 12 is closed, the protruding direction of the first blocking portion 13c is toward the front door 12.
The first closing portion 13 c is formed horizontally extending from the right end to the left end of the front end of the bottom plate 13 a of the cabinet 13 .
Furthermore, the first closing portion 13c is formed from sheet metal and is fixed to the front end portion of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13 with screws.

Also, as shown in Figure 25, a second closing portion 12a is provided at a position below the first closing portion 13c at the bottom of the front door 12, and protrudes toward the cabinet 13 when the front door 12 is closed.
In other words, the second blocking portion 12a is a plate-shaped protruding portion that protrudes rearward from the lower part of the back surface of the front door 12, and when the front door 12 is closed, the protruding direction of the second blocking portion 12a is toward the cabinet 13.

The second blocking portion 12a is disposed at a lower position than the first blocking portion 13c.
Furthermore, the second blocking portion 12 a is formed horizontally extending from the right end to the left end of the lower rear surface of the front door 12 .
Furthermore, like the first blocking portion 13c, the second blocking portion 12a is also formed from sheet metal and is fixed to the lower part of the rear surface of the front door 12 with screws.

Also, as shown in Figure 25, a third closing portion 12b is provided at a position above the first closing portion 13c at the bottom of the front door 12, and protrudes toward the cabinet 13 when the front door 12 is closed.
In other words, the third blocking portion 12b, like the second blocking portion 12a, is a plate-shaped protruding portion that protrudes rearward from the lower part of the back surface of the front door 12, and when the front door 12 is closed, the protruding direction of the third blocking portion 12b is toward the cabinet 13.

Similarly to the second closing portion 12a, the third closing portion 12b is formed horizontally extending from the right end to the left end of the lower part of the rear surface of the front door 12.
Furthermore, the third blocking section 12b is disposed at a position higher than the first blocking section 13c, unlike the second blocking section 12a.
Furthermore, like the first blocking portion 13c and the second blocking portion 12a, the third blocking portion 12b is also formed from sheet metal and is fixed to the lower part of the rear surface of the front door 12 with screws.

When the front door 12 is closed, the first closing portion 13c is disposed between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b.
Therefore, when the front door 12 is closed, the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 at the bottom of the housing has a bent shape resembling an inverted U-shape, as shown in Fig. 25. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts (cheating) such as passing a wire through the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 into the housing to access the medal payout device 15, etc.

A door sensor that detects the opening of the front door 12 is provided on the front side of the left side panel of the cabinet 13. This door sensor is configured using an optical sensor having a light receiving and emitting portion, and is electrically connected to the main control board 50.
Furthermore, a detection piece is provided on the front side of the left side panel of cabinet 13, which is movable in the front and rear directions by opening and closing the front door 12. When the front door 12 is closed, this detection piece is pushed rearward by the front door 12, and when the front door 12 is open, the detection piece jumps out forward by being biased by a spring.

Furthermore, when the front door 12 is closed, the detection piece is pushed backward by the front door 12 and enters the door sensor. At this time, the door sensor detects the detection piece and is in the OFF state. In other words, the door sensor is set to low active.
On the other hand, when the front door 12 is open, the detection piece is biased by the spring and jumps out forward from the inside of the door sensor. At this time, the door sensor is not detecting the detection piece and is in the ON state.

When the door sensor is in the OFF state, the main control board 50 determines that the front door 12 is closed, and when the door sensor is in the ON state, the main control board 50 determines that the front door 12 is open.
In this manner, the detection piece moves forward and backward when the front door 12 is opened or closed, and the door sensor is turned on and off, thereby detecting whether the front door 12 is opened or closed.

In addition, when the front door 12 is opened from a closed state, the detection piece moves forward from a pushed-in state, goes from inside the door sensor to outside, and the door sensor changes from an off state to an on state.
The position of the front door 12 when the door sensor first detects that the front door 12 is open is referred to as the "detection start position."
Moreover, the moment when the door sensor first detects the opening of the front door 12 means the moment when the door sensor changes from an off state to an on state.

In the eighth embodiment, the first blocking portion 13c is arranged between the second blocking portion 12a and the third blocking portion 12b not only when the front door 12 is closed, but also when the front door 12 is in the detection start position.
In other words, the first blocking portion 13c is arranged between the second blocking portion 12a and the third blocking portion 12b even at the moment when the front door 12 is opened from a closed state and the door sensor changes from an off state to an on state.

Therefore, when the front door 12 is opened from a closed state, the door sensor first changes from an off state to an on state, and then the first blocking portion 13c comes out from between the second blocking portion 12a and the third blocking portion 12b.
When the door sensor is turned on, the main control board 50 determines that the front door 12 is open and transmits a door open command to the sub-control board 80. Upon receiving the door open command, the sub-control board 80 notifies the user that the front door 12 is open via the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc. This allows the hall staff to be notified that the front door 12 is open.

Therefore, the first blocking portion 13c will not come out from between the second blocking portion 12a and the third blocking portion 12b before the notification that the front door 12 is open begins, and even at the position where the notification that the front door 12 is open begins, the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 has a curved shape, so it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts (cheating) such as passing a wire through the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 into the inside of the housing to access the medal payout device 15, etc.

In the sixth embodiment, the holding section 102 that holds the first dispensed medal can be stopped between the first and second positions, so that the portion of the hopper disk 101 that corresponds to the portion between the two adjacent holding sections 102 can be positioned in front of the dispense section 103, thereby preventing fraudulent acts of inserting a wire or the like through the medal payout opening to access the holding section 102 of the hopper disk 101. However, by incorporating the configurations of both the sixth and eighth embodiments, fraudulent acts of inserting a wire or the like to access the medal payout device 15 can be more firmly prevented.

Here, the distance between the first blocking portion 13c and the second blocking portion 12a is "h1", the distance between the first blocking portion 13c and the third blocking portion 12b is "h2", the distance between the second blocking portion 12a and the third blocking portion 12b is "h3", and the protruding width (depth) of the second blocking portion 12a is "w".
Also, the diameter of the medal is "d" and the thickness of the medal is "t".
Generally, the size of a medal is 24.5 to 25.5 mm in diameter and 1.5 to 2.0 mm in thickness.
In the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the distance "h2" between the first blocking portion 13c and the third blocking portion 12b and the thickness "t" of the medal is set to satisfy "h2>t."

When a hall attendant opens the front door 12 and refills the hopper 35 with medals, there is a possibility that the medals may fall onto the bottom plate 13 a of the cabinet 13 .
In particular, when medals are replenished into the hopper 35 from the opening on the front side of the cabinet 13, medals may fall near the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13, i.e., near the first closing portion 13c.

In this case, if the setting is made so that "h2>t" is satisfied, even if the front door 12 is closed with a medal remaining near the first blocking section 13c, the medal that has fallen near the first blocking section 13c will get caught between the first blocking section 13c and the third blocking section 12b. This allows the front door 12 to close without damaging the front door 12 or the cabinet 13. It also prevents the medal from getting caught between the first blocking section 13c and the third blocking section 12b, preventing the front door 12 from closing.

In addition, in the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the protruding width (depth) "w" of the second blocking portion 12a and the diameter "d" of the medal is set to satisfy "w<(d/2)".
By setting w so as to satisfy "w<(d/2)", it is possible to make it impossible to place medals on the second blocking portion 12a.
This makes it possible to prevent the front door 12 from being closed with medals placed on the second blocking section 12a, and in turn makes it possible to prevent the front door 12 and the cabinet 13 from being damaged by medals placed on the second blocking section 12a.

<Modification of the Eighth Embodiment>
Although the eighth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described content, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the eighth embodiment, the door sensor is configured using an optical sensor having a light receiving and emitting portion. However, the invention is not limited to this and may be configured using, for example, a proximity sensor.
Furthermore, even when a door sensor is constructed using a proximity sensor, the first blocking portion 13c is configured to be positioned between the second blocking portion 12a and the third blocking portion 12b not only when the front door 12 is closed, but also when the front door 12 is in the detection start position.

(2) In the eighth embodiment, a detection piece that can move back and forth by opening and closing the front door 12 is provided on the front side of the left side panel of the cabinet 13. When the front door 12 is closed, the detection piece is pushed rearward by the front door 12 and enters the door sensor, and when the front door 12 is open, the detection piece is biased by the spring to jump forward and go out from inside the door sensor. However, the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, a door sensor that detects the opening of the front door 12 may be provided on the front side of the left side panel of the cabinet 13, and a detection piece may be provided on the front door 12 at a position corresponding to the door sensor. Then, when the front door 12 is closed, the detection piece provided on the front door 12 may enter the door sensor, and when the front door 12 is open, the detection piece provided on the front door 12 may exit from the door sensor.

(3) In the eighth embodiment, the door sensor is provided on the cabinet 13 side. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the door sensor may be provided on the front door 12 side.
(4) In the eighth embodiment, the door sensor is set to an OFF state when the detection piece is detected, and is set to an ON state when the detection piece is not detected. In other words, the door sensor is set to a low active state. However, the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the door sensor may be set to be in an ON state when the detection piece is detected and in an OFF state when the detection piece is not detected, in contrast to the eighth embodiment. That is, the door sensor may be set to be highly active.
In this case, the main control board 50 is configured to determine that the front door 12 is closed when the door sensor is on, and to determine that the front door 12 is open when the door sensor is off.

(5) In the eighth embodiment, the first closing portion 13c is formed horizontally extending from the right end to the left end of the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13. Also, the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b are formed horizontally extending from the right end to the left end of the lower part of the rear surface of the front door 12. However, this is not limited to this.
For example, the first blocking section 13c may be composed of two members: a first member extending from the right end to the center of the bottom plate 13a and a second member extending from the center to the left end of the bottom plate 13a, or it may be composed of three members divided into three parts.
Similarly to the first blocking section 13c, the second blocking section 12a and the third blocking section 12b may be configured from two members or from three members.
In this way, the first blocking section 13c, the second blocking section 12a and the third blocking section 12b are not limited to being composed of a single member, and may be composed of a plurality of members.

In addition, the first blocking portion 13c may not extend from the right end to the left end of the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13, and may have a portion where the first blocking portion 13c is not provided, for example, near the right end or near the left end of the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13.
Similarly, the lower rear surface of the front door 12 may have a portion where the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b are not provided.
In this way, even if there are some areas where the first blocking section 13c, the second blocking section 12a, and the third blocking section 12b are not provided, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as accessing the medal payout device 15, etc., by passing a wire into the inside of the housing through the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12.
In addition, the first closing portion 13 c may be a part of the bottom plate 13 a of the cabinet 13 , or may be a separate member from the bottom plate 13 a of the cabinet 13 .
Similarly, the second blocking portion 12 a and the third blocking portion 12 b may be part of the front door 12 or may be separate members from the front door 12 .

(6) In the eighth embodiment, when the front door 12 is closed, the first blocking portion 13c is disposed between the second blocking portion 12a and the third blocking portion 12b.
At this time, a gap may be formed between the first blocking portion 13c and the second blocking portion 12a, or the first blocking portion 13c and the second blocking portion 12a may be in contact with each other.
Similarly, a gap may be provided between the first blocking portion 13c and the third blocking portion 12b, or the first blocking portion 13c and the third blocking portion 12b may be in contact with each other.
In addition, the entire first blocking portion 13c may be disposed between the second blocking portion 12a and the third blocking portion 12b, or only a portion of the first blocking portion 13c may be disposed between the second blocking portion 12a and the third blocking portion 12b.

Furthermore, when the front door 12 is closed, the first blocking portion 13c may be in contact with a position on the rear surface of the front door 12 that corresponds to a position between the second blocking portion 12a and the third blocking portion 12b.
Furthermore, contrary to the eighth embodiment, the first closing portion 13c may be provided on the front door 12 side, and the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b may be provided on the cabinet 13 side.
That is, a first blocking portion 13c may be provided protruding from the lower back surface of the front door 12 toward the cabinet 13, a second blocking portion 12a may be provided protruding toward the front door 12 from a position lower than the first blocking portion 13c at the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13, and a third blocking portion 12b may be provided protruding toward the front door 12 from a position higher than the first blocking portion 13c at the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13.

(7) In the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the distance "h2" between the first blocking portion 13c and the third blocking portion 12b and the thickness "t" of the medal is set to satisfy "h2>t."
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set so as to satisfy, for example, "h2<t."
If the setting satisfies "h2>t", when the front door 12 is closed with a medal having fallen near the first blocking portion 13c, the medal that has fallen near the first blocking portion 13c hits the rear end of the third blocking portion 12b and is pushed into the cabinet 13. This allows the front door 12 to close without damaging the front door 12 or the cabinet 13. Also, there is no risk of the medal getting caught between the first blocking portion 13c and the third blocking portion 12b, preventing the front door 12 from closing.

(8) In the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the protruding width (depth) "w" of the second blocking portion 12a and the diameter "d" of the medal is set to satisfy "w<(d/2)."
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set so as to satisfy, for example, "(d/2)<w<d."
By satisfying "(d/2)<w," it becomes possible to place medals on the second blocking portion 12a. Furthermore, by satisfying "w<d," even if an attempt is made to close the front door 12 with medals placed on the second blocking portion 12a, the medals placed on the second blocking portion 12a will hit the front end of the cabinet 13 before the front door 12 closes, and the front door 12 will not close.
This allows the hall staff to know that medals have been placed on the second blocking section 12a, and ultimately allows the hall staff to remove the medals placed on the second blocking section 12a before closing the front door 12.

(9) The relationship between the protruding width (depth) "w" of the second blocking portion 12a and the diameter "d" of the medal, as well as the relationship between the distance "h1" between the first blocking portion 13c and the second blocking portion 12a and the thickness "t" of the medal, may be set to satisfy "(d/2) <w" and "h1 <t."
As described above, by satisfying "(d/2)<w," it becomes possible to place a medal on the second blocking portion 12a. Furthermore, by satisfying "h1<t," even if an attempt is made to close the front door 12 with a medal placed on the second blocking portion 12a, the medal placed on the second blocking portion 12a will hit the front end of the first blocking portion 13c before the front door 12 closes, and the front door 12 will not close.
This allows the hall staff to know that medals have been placed on the second blocking section 12a, and ultimately allows the hall staff to remove the medals placed on the second blocking section 12a before closing the front door 12.

(10) The relationship between the protruding width (depth) "w" of the second blocking portion 12a and the diameter "d" of the medal, as well as the relationship between the distance "h1" between the first blocking portion 13c and the second blocking portion 12a and the thickness "t" of the medal, may be set to satisfy "d<w" and "h1>t."
By satisfying "d<w", the entire medal can be placed on the second blocking portion 12a. In other words, the medal can be placed on the second blocking portion 12a without any part of the medal protruding from the second blocking portion 12a. Furthermore, by satisfying "h1>t", the medal can be inserted between the first blocking portion 13c and the second blocking portion 12a.

Therefore, when the front door 12 is closed with a medal placed on the second blocking portion 12a, the front door 12 closes with the medal placed between the first blocking portion 13c and the second blocking portion 12a. This allows the front door 12 to close without damaging the front door 12 or the cabinet 13. In addition, there is no risk of the medal placed on the second blocking portion 12a hitting the first blocking portion 13c or the front end of the cabinet 13, preventing the front door 12 from closing.
(11) The first to eighth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to eighth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but may be implemented in appropriate combination.

Ninth embodiment
The ninth embodiment relates to the control of stopping the reels 31 on the main control board 50 side and the control of the output of effects on the sub-control board 80 side.
Figure 26(a) is a diagram showing the types of special roles (gimmicks) and the ending conditions, Figure 26(b) is a diagram showing the types of game states and the specified number of each game state, and Figure 26(c) is a diagram showing a number table for the internal lottery and advantageous zone lottery in setting 1.

As shown in FIG. 26(a), in the ninth embodiment, there are three special roles (roles): BB (first type of role continuous operation device; first type big bonus), RB (first type of special role; regular bonus), and MB (second type of role continuous operation device; second type big bonus).
Here, BB is a device that can operate RB continuously. That is, RB games are executed continuously during BB games. Also, during RB games, the probability of winning a small prize increases. Furthermore, when the number of medals paid out during RB games exceeds 100, the RB game ends. Furthermore, when the number of medals paid out during BB games exceeds 250, the BB game ends.

The MB is a device that can continuously operate the CB (second type special role). In other words, the CB game is executed continuously during the MB game. Furthermore, during the CB game, regardless of the lottery result by the role selection means 61, all minor roles are won in duplicate, and for a specific reel 31 (for example, the left reel 31), the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated to the time the reel 31 stops is within 75 ms (the maximum number of moving frames is 1 frame). Furthermore, the CB game ends after one game, and when the number of medals paid out during the MB game exceeds 14, the MB game ends.

26B, in the ninth embodiment, seven game states are provided: non-RT, RT, in RB, in BB, RB game, BB game, and MB game. The main control board 50 controls the transition of these game states.
Here, the "prescribed number" refers to the number of medals inserted that enables the start switch 41 to be operated (to start a game). In the ninth embodiment, the prescribed number during MB is set to "1", and the prescribed number during a game state other than during MB is set to "3".

In addition, "RT" means that the type (number) of conditional devices (reel, replay, small role) to be selected and the probability of winning are in a specific selection state.
Furthermore, "non-RT" does not mean that it is not included in the concept of RT, but rather that the type of condition device that is the subject of the lottery and its winning probability are different from those of RT.
In any game state, when an RT start condition is satisfied, the next game shifts to RT, and when an RT end condition is satisfied in RT, the next game shifts to non-RT.

When a special combination is won, the winning information of the special combination is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the won special combination stops on an effective line.
A game in which a special role is not won is called a "non-internal game," and a game in which a special role is won but the symbol combination corresponding to the special role that has been won does not stop on an active line, i.e., a game in which the winning information of the special role is carried over, is called an "internal game."

In addition, the probability that a desired symbol to be displayed on a pay line can be stopped on the pay line during the period from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated to the moment the reel 31 stops (maximum number of moving frames) is called the "pull-in rate (PB)."
Furthermore, unless the stop switch 42 is operated at an appropriate position on the reel 31 (at a timing at which the target symbol can be stopped on a winning line within the range of the maximum number of moving frames), the target symbol cannot be stopped on a winning line (pulled in to the winning line), which is referred to as "PB≠1."
In contrast, the ability to always stop (pull in) the target symbol on a valid line regardless of the position of the reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of the timing of operation of the stop switch 42) is called "PB=1."

Also, if BB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to BB stops on a winning line (BB wins), no medals are paid out in the current game, but BB game will start from the next game. During BB game, RB game is executed continuously, so the probability of winning a small prize increases. Then, if the number of medals paid out during BB game exceeds 250, BB game ends, and from the next game, the game state before the transition to BB game is returned to.
Furthermore, if the BB is won but the symbol combination corresponding to the BB does not stop on an active line, the winning information of the BB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the BB stops on an active line. The game state in which the winning information of the BB is carried over is called "inside the BB".
The timing of the transition into the BB can be set appropriately. For example, the transition into the BB may be made after all the reels 31 have stopped in the game in which the BB has been won, or the transition into the BB may not be made in the game in which the BB has been won, but may be made in the next game.

Also, when RB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to RB stops on a winning line (RB wins), no medals are paid out in the current game, but RB game will start from the next game. During RB game, the probability of winning a small prize increases. And when the number of medals paid out during RB game exceeds 100, RB game ends and the game state before switching to RB game is returned from the next game.
Furthermore, if the RB is won but the symbol combination corresponding to the RB does not stop on a winning line, the winning information of the RB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the RB stops on a winning line. The game state in which the winning information of the RB is carried over is called "inside RB".
The timing of the transition into the RB can be set appropriately, similar to the timing of the transition into the BB. For example, the transition into the RB may be made after all the reels 31 have stopped in the game in which the RB has been won, or the transition into the RB may not be made in the game in which the RB has been won, but may be made in the next game.

In addition, if you win MB and the symbol combination corresponding to the MB stops on a valid line (MB wins), no medals will be paid out in the current game, but MB game will start from the next game. During MB game, CB game will be executed continuously. Then, if the number of medals paid out during MB game exceeds 14, MB game will end and from the next game, the game will return to the game state before switching to MB game.

Furthermore, if the MB is won but the symbol combination corresponding to the MB does not stop on a winning line, the winning information of the MB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the MB stops on a winning line. The game state in which the winning information of the MB is carried over is called "inside MB".
In the ninth embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to the MB is set to "PB=1", so that when the MB is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the MB in the current game always stops on a valid line, and therefore will never be inside the MB.

In addition, the condition device (role) of the ninth embodiment is broadly divided into a special role (role), a replay (replay role), and a small role.
Furthermore, there are three types of special roles: BB, RB, and MB; two types of replay roles: Replay 1 and Replay 2; and seven types of minor roles: Common bell, Left correct bell, Middle correct bell, Right correct bell, Watermelon, Cherry 1, and Cherry 2.
The left correct bell, middle correct bell, and right correct bell are collectively referred to as the "push order bells."
Furthermore, the "condition device" is something that operates in response to a winning number determined by the lottery by the role selection means 61. When one winning number is determined, one or more condition devices corresponding to the winning number are activated, and a winning flag corresponding to the activated condition device is turned on.

As shown in Figure 26 (c), in the ninth embodiment, one winning number from "0" to "16" is determined by lottery using the role selection means 61, and one of the condition devices from non-winning to MB corresponding to the determined winning number is activated.
Both types of replays can be won individually and cannot be won in combination with other condition devices (roles).
In addition, there are four types of bells: common bell, left correct bell, center correct bell, and right correct bell, but each can be won individually and cannot be won in combination with other roles.

Furthermore, Suica can be a winning combination either alone or in combination with BB.
Furthermore, Cherry 1 can be a single winning berry or a double winning berry with BB, and Cherry 2 can be a single winning berry, a double winning berry with RB, or a double winning berry with BB.
In addition, BB may win alone or may be won in combination with watermelon, cherry 1, or cherry 2, whereas RB never wins alone and can only be won in combination with cherry 2, and MB only wins alone and cannot be won in combination with other roles.

In addition, "payout" refers to the number of medals paid out when a symbol combination corresponding to each condition device stops (a winning combination is achieved).
In the ninth embodiment, for the left correct bell, middle correct bell, and right correct bell, the payout differs between the specified number of 3 (game state other than during MB) and the specified number of 1 (during MB), but otherwise the payout is the same for the specified number of 3 and the specified number of 1.

The correct left bell is a push order bell where the first button on the left is the correct button press and any button press other than the first button on the left is an incorrect button press. With a specified number of 3, the correct button press will pay out 8 medals and an incorrect button press will pay out 1 medal. With a specified number of 1, the correct button press will pay out 14 medals and an incorrect button press will pay out 15 medals.
Similarly, the middle correct bell is a press order bell where the first stop in the middle is the correct press order and anything other than the first stop in the middle is an incorrect press order, and the right correct bell is a press order bell where the first stop on the right is the correct press order and anything other than the first stop on the right is an incorrect press order.
The common bell is a bell that will pay out eight medals regardless of the order in which it is pressed.

As described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes a role selection means 61 (internal lottery means 61). The role selection means 61 selects a winning number. When the winning number is selected by the role selection means 61, a condition device corresponding to the selected winning number is activated.
In addition, the drawing of the winning number by the role drawing means 61 (internal drawing means 61) is sometimes referred to as an "internal drawing."
As shown in Fig. 26(c), in the ninth embodiment, one of the winning numbers "0" to "15" is determined by lottery by the role selection means 61. The winning numbers "0" to "15" correspond to the condition devices "non-winning" to "MB", respectively. When the winning number is determined, the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number is activated.

For example, if the winning number is determined to be "1," a condition device for "Replay 1" corresponding to the winning number "1" is activated. Also, if the winning number is determined to be "8," a condition device for "Watermelon + BB" corresponding to the winning number "8" is activated.
As explained in the first embodiment, the role selection means 61 includes a random number generation means, a random number extraction means for extracting a random number generated by the random number generation means, and a winning number determination means for determining a winning number based on the random number value extracted by the random number extraction means. When the winning number is determined, a condition device corresponding to the determined winning number is activated.
For example, the random number value extracted by the random number extraction means may be the same in a non-internal state and an internal state, and the condition device that operates may be the same, or the random number value extracted by the random number extraction means may be the same but the condition device that operates may be different.

As described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes a winning flag control means 62. The winning flag control means 62 controls the on/off of a winning flag corresponding to each role based on the lottery result of the winning number by the role selection means 61.
In the ninth embodiment, a winning flag is provided for each of all roles. Then, when a winning number is determined by the lottery by the role selection means 61, the winning flag control means 62 turns on the winning flag of the role included in the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number (sets the winning flag).

For example, in non-RT, when the winning number "1" is determined by lottery by the role selection means 61, the winning flag for "Replay 1" included in the condition device for "Replay 1" corresponding to the winning number "1" is turned on, and the other winning flags are turned off.
Similarly, in non-RT, when the winning number "10" is determined by the lottery by the role selection means 61, the two winning flags "Cherry 1" and "BB" included in the condition device of "Cherry 1 + BB" corresponding to the winning number "10" are turned on, and the other winning flags are turned off.

In addition, since winning information of roles other than the special roles (BB, RB, MB) is not carried over, even if a role that does not carry over winning information is won in the current game and the winning flag of that role is turned on, the winning flag is turned off at the end of the current game regardless of whether the role wins or not.
On the other hand, since winning information of special roles (BB, RB, MB) is carried over, when a special role is won in the current game and the winning flag of the special role is once turned on, the winning flag is maintained in the on state until the special role wins, and when the special role wins, the winning flag is turned off.

For example, in non-RT, when the winning number "10" is determined by the lottery by the role selection means 61, the two winning flags for "Cherry 1" and "BB" included in the condition device for "Cherry 1 + BB" corresponding to the winning number "10" are turned on, but if "BB" does not win in the current game, the winning flag for "Cherry 1" is turned off at the end of the current game, and the winning flag for "BB" remains on, regardless of whether "Cherry 1" wins in the current game. In this case, the game will transition to inside BB from the next game.

Also, for example, when the winning number "9" is determined by the lottery by the role selection means 61 inside BB, in addition to the winning flag of "BB" carried over, the winning flag of "Cherry 1" included in the condition device of "Cherry 1" corresponding to the winning number "9" is turned on. In other words, the two winning flags of "Cherry 1" and "BB" are turned on.
For this reason, in non-RT, when the winning number "10" is determined by the lottery by the role selection means 61 (double winning of "Cherry 1 + BB"), the on/off state of the winning flag will be the same as when the winning number "9" is determined by the lottery by the role selection means 61 within BB (single winning of "Cherry 1").

During MB play, the winning flag control means 62 turns on the winning flags of all small roles (seven roles: common bell, left correct bell, center correct bell, right correct bell, watermelon, cherry 1, and cherry 2). Therefore, although the winning is not achieved by the lottery by the role selection means 61, the player is in the same state as if he or she had won all the small roles.
For example, during MB play, when the winning number "0" is determined by the lottery by the winning lottery means 61, the "non-winning" corresponding to the winning number "0" does not include any winning combination, but the winning flags of all the minor combinations (the above seven minor combinations) are turned on.
Also, for example, when the winning number "1" is determined by the lottery by the role selection means 61 during MB play, in addition to the winning flag of "Replay 1" included in the condition device of "Replay 1" corresponding to the winning number "1", the winning flags of all the minor roles (the above seven minor roles) are turned on.

As described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes a reel control means 65, which includes a plurality of stop position determination tables corresponding to the on/off states of the win flags. Each stop position determination table defines the stop position of the reel 31 relative to the position of the reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated.
A winning number is determined by lottery using a role selection means 61, and the winning flag of the role included in the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number is controlled to be on/off by a winning flag control means 62. Then, a reel control means 65 selects a stop position determination table corresponding to the on/off state of the winning flag.

When a stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the selected stop position determination table and the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, and the reel 31 is controlled to stop at the determined position.
In addition, the stop position determination table selected when the winning flag for Replay 1 is on and the winning flags for roles other than Replay 1 are off determines the stop positions of each reel 31 so that the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 1 stops on an active line and so that the symbol combination corresponding to roles other than Replay 1 does not stop on an active line.

Furthermore, the stop position determination table that is selected when the winning flag for the left correct bell is on and the winning flags other than the left correct bell are off determines the stop positions of each reel 31 so that when the stop switch 42 is operated at the first left stop, a symbol combination that will result in the payout of eight medals stops on an active line, and when the stop switch 42 is operated at any stop other than the first left stop, a symbol combination that will result in the payout of one medal stops on an active line.

26(c) indicates the number of winning numbers placed for each winning number in each gaming state. The winning probability is calculated by dividing the number of winning numbers placed for each winning number by 65536.
For example, since the number of places for the winning number "4" in non-RT is "3000", the winning number "4" is determined by lottery by the role selection means 61 in non-RT, and the probability that the condition device for the "left correct bell" corresponding to the winning number "4" will be activated is "3000/65536".

Also, in the "Internal lottery setting number" column in Figure 26 (c), the "*" mark indicates that a favorable zone lottery can be executed.
Here, "advantageous zone" refers to a gaming zone that has the performance related to the instruction function (where the instruction function may be activated).
Moreover, the "instruction function" refers to a function of displaying (informing) the player of "advantageous operation modes."
Furthermore, "activation of the instruction function" includes displaying the correct button press order when the button press bell is won.

Furthermore, "favorable zone lottery" refers to a lottery that determines whether or not to move to a favorable zone.
Then, when the advantageous zone lottery is won and the player moves to the advantageous zone, it becomes possible to activate the instruction function, and when the push order bell is won, it becomes possible to announce the correct push order.
For example, the number of places "8000" for the winning number "3"("commonbell") in non-RT is marked with an "*". This means that when the winning number "3"("commonbell") is determined by lottery by the role selection means 61 (internal lottery means 61) in non-RT, a favorable zone lottery can be executed.

Also, as shown in Figure 26 (c), in non-RT, when the winning number is determined to be "0" (non-winning), or when the winning number is determined to be "4" to "6"("left correct bell", "middle correct bell", or "right correct bell"), the drawing of the advantageous zone is not performed, but the drawing of the advantageous zone can be performed otherwise.
Furthermore, during RT, RB, and BB, when the winning number is determined to be the same as that in non-RT and the number of places is determined, except when the winning numbers are determined to be "4" to "6"("left correct bell,""middle correct bell," or "right correct bell"), a favorable zone lottery can be executed.

In addition, since the winning information of the BB is carried over inside the BB, the on/off state of the winning flag will be the same when the winning number is determined to be "9" (a single winning number of "Cherry 1") inside the BB and when the winning number is determined to be "10" (a double winning number of "Cherry 1 + BB") during a non-RT (not inside the BB).
Furthermore, the number of entries for the winning number "10" (double win of "Cherry 1 + BB") in a non-RT (non-internal) state and the number of entries for the winning number "9" (single win of "Cherry 1") in a BB state are set to the same "200".
Therefore, when the winning number "9" (a sole winning number of "Cherry 1") is determined during BB, the drawing of the advantageous zone can be carried out.

Also, when the winning number "9" (a single winning "Cherry 1") is determined during RB, the winning flag for "Cherry 1" and the winning flag for "RB" that has been carried over are turned on.
Furthermore, "BB" and "RB" are similar in that they are both special roles (gimmicks), and the number of places for the winning number "10" (a double win of "Cherry 1 + BB") in a non-RT (non-internal) reel and the number of places for the winning number "9" (a single win of "Cherry 1") in an RB reel are both set to the same value of "200."
For this reason, even when the winning number "9" (a single winning "Cherry 1") is determined during RB, the drawing of the advantageous zone can be carried out.

In addition, when the winning number "12" (a double win of "Cherry 2 + RB") or the winning number "13" (a double win of "Cherry 2 + BB") is determined in a non-RT, the same happens as when the winning number "11" (a single win of "Cherry 2") is determined while inside RB or BB, in that the winning flag for "Cherry 2" and the winning flag for the special role (gimmick) are turned on.
Furthermore, the total number of places for the winning number "12" (a double win of "Cherry 2 + RB") and the winning number "13" (a double win of "Cherry 2 + BB") in non-RT is "300", which matches the number of places for the winning number "11" (a single win of "Cherry 2") inside RB and inside BB, which is "300".
For this reason, even when the winning number "11" (a single winning number of "Cherry 2") is determined during RB and BB, the drawing of the advantageous zone can be carried out.

26(c) indicates the number of winning numbers. The winning probability is calculated by dividing the number of winning numbers in the advantageous zone by 16384.
For example, when the winning number "1" (the sole winning number of "Replay 1") is determined by the lottery means 61 during non-RT, RB or BB, the probability of winning in the advantageous zone lottery is "20/16384."
Also, for example, in non-RT or RT, when the winning number "8" (a double win of "Watermelon + BB") is determined by the lottery drawing means 61, the probability of winning in the advantageous zone lottery is "10,000/16,384."

As described above, in the ninth embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to MB is set to "PB=1".
Also, as shown in FIG. 26(c), in non-RT and RT, a lottery for an MB is held. If an MB is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the MB in the current game always stops on a valid line, so that the game will transition to an MB game from the next game without being inside the MB.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 26(c), during MB play, a lottery is conducted for Replay 1 or Replay 2, and regardless of the lottery results by the role selection means 61, all minor roles are won in duplicate.

Therefore, when the winning number "1" (sole winning of "Replay 1") is determined during MB play, the winning flag of "Replay 1" and the winning flags of all minor symbols (seven symbols: common bell, left correct bell, middle correct bell, right correct bell, watermelon, cherry 1, and cherry 2) are turned on.
Similarly, when the winning number "2" (sole winning of "Replay 2") is determined during MB play, the winning flag of "Replay 2" and the winning flags of all the minor winning symbols are turned on.

When the winning number is determined to be "1" (single winning of "Replay 1") during MB play, that is, when the winning flag of "Replay 1" and the winning flags of all the minor roles are turned on, the same stop position determination table as when only the winning flag of the left correct answer bell is turned on is selected. However, during MB play, the specified number is 1 (one coin is inserted), and the payout is different from non-RT etc., and 14 or 15 coins are paid out.
As a result, when the winning number "1" (single winning "Replay 1") is determined during MB play, if the stop switch 42 is operated at the first left stop (when the button press sequence is correct), the symbol combination for the payout of 14 medals will stop on an active line, and if the stop switch 42 is operated at any stop other than the first left stop (when the button press sequence is incorrect), the symbol combination for the payout of 15 medals will stop on an active line.

Similarly, when the winning number is determined to be "2" (a single win for "Replay 2") during MB play, the same stop position determination table is selected as when only the winning flag for the right correct bell is on, and 14 coins are paid out when it stops on the first bell on the right (when the button press sequence is correct), and 15 coins are paid out when it stops on anything other than the first bell on the right (when the button press sequence is incorrect).
During the first play during MB play, the push order for the payout of 14 coins is announced, and during the second play during MB play, the push order for the payout of 15 coins is announced.
As described above, the end condition of the MB game is set when the number of medals paid out exceeds 14, so by making such a notification, 29 medals can be paid out during the MB game. Also, since the specified number is set to "1" during the MB game, the player can obtain 27 medals, which is the number of medals paid out ("29") minus the number of medals inserted ("2").

In addition, in order to inform the player of the push order that is advantageous to him/her during MB play, it is necessary to transition to the advantageous zone.
For this reason, as shown in Figure 26 (c), in non-RT or RT, when the winning number "15" (sole winning of "MB") is determined by the lottery selection means 61, the winning probability of the advantageous zone lottery is set to "16384/16384", or "100%".

As described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes a performance group number selection means 64. The performance group number selection means 64 selects a performance group number corresponding to the winning number and to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
As shown in Fig. 26(c), the performance group numbers corresponding to the winning numbers are predefined. Specifically, the performance group numbers "0" to "3" are defined corresponding to the winning numbers "0" to "3", the performance group number "4" is defined corresponding to the winning numbers "4" to "6", and the performance group numbers "5" to "13" are defined corresponding to the winning numbers "7" to "15".
When a winning number is determined by the lottery by the role lottery means 61, the performance group number selection means 64 selects a performance group number corresponding to the determined winning number.

As described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 is equipped with a push order instruction number selection means 63. This push order instruction number selection means 63 is for selecting a push order instruction number (a number corresponding to the correct push order) corresponding to the determined winning number when the winning number corresponding to the push order bell (left correct bell, middle correct bell, right correct bell) is determined by the lottery by the role selection means 61.

As described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes a control command transmission means 71. This control command transmission means 71 transmits, to the sub-control board 80, information (control commands) required for the performance to be output by the sub-control board 80.
In the ninth embodiment, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits, as control commands, to the sub-control board 80, information indicating the game status (non-RT, RT, inside RB, inside BB, in RB, in BB, in MB), the performance group number, etc., in addition to information when the bet switch 40 is operated, information when the start switch 41 is operated, push order instruction number (only during AT and only when the winning number corresponding to the condition device having the correct push order is determined), the performance group number, information when the stop switch 42 is operated, information on the winning role, etc.

This allows the sub-control board 80 to determine the game status on the main control board 50 side, and the condition devices (excluding the left correct bell, middle correct bell, and right correct bell) that are operating in the role selection means 61.
Furthermore, on the sub-control board 80 side, it is possible to determine whether the left correct bell, middle correct bell, or right correct bell has been won based on the performance group number, but it is not possible to determine whether the left correct bell, middle correct bell, or right correct bell has been won (the correct button press order).
Also, during the AT, the correct button press order can be announced by the button press order instruction number.

In addition, the sub-control board 80 controls the selection and output of effects during play and while waiting to play.
The main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 50 (control command transmitting means 71) transmits information (control commands) necessary for outputting the performance unidirectionally to the sub-control board 80.
Similar to the main control board 50, the sub-control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, and a sub-CPU 85.
In addition, the sub-control board 80 is electrically connected to the performance lamp 21, speaker 22, image display device 23, etc. via an input port 81 or an output port 82.

Furthermore, the sub-CPU 85 of the sub-control board 80 is equipped with a performance output control means 91 and the like, and the ROM 84 of the sub-control board 80 is equipped with a performance determination table and the like.
Furthermore, the performance decision table determines the performance to be output, and a plurality of performance decision tables are provided, and the performance output control means 91 determines the performance to be output using one of the performance decision tables and controls to output the determined performance.
In other words, the performance output control means 91 determines what kind of performance to output and at what timing based on the control command received from the main control board 50 and one of the performance decision tables, and controls the output of the performance lamp 21, speaker 22, and image display device 23 in accordance with that decision.

Figure 27 is a diagram showing a performance decision table used in common for non-RT (not inside) and RT (non-AT and not inside), and Figure 28 is a diagram showing a performance decision table used in common for inside RB and inside BB.
As shown in Fig. 27, in the ninth embodiment, there are 18 types of presentation patterns, ranging from "no presentation" to "continuous presentation." In addition, each presentation pattern, ranging from "character presentation (entertainment)" to "continuous presentation," defines a presentation with different content.
For example, the "confirmation effect" is an effect that informs the player that he or she has won a special role, the "notification effect after first stop" is an effect that is output after the first stop (after the first operation of stop switch 42), the "left first stop effect" is an effect that instructs the player to operate the left stop switch 42 first, and the "continuous effect" is an effect that is output continuously over multiple plays.

The "Number of Effects Patterns Allocated" column in Fig. 27 indicates the number of effects patterns allocated when each effect group number is received. Dividing the number of effects patterns allocated by "256" gives the selection probability of each effect pattern. In Fig. 27, the name of the corresponding condition device is written under each effect group number.
For example, in a non-RT situation, when the winning number "1" (the sole winning number of "Replay 1") is determined by lottery by the role selection means 61 and the performance group number "1" is transmitted, the probability of selecting "No performance" is "128/256", the probability of selecting "Character performance (entertainment)" is "20/256", the probability of selecting "Conversation performance (entertainment)" is also "20/256", and the probability of selecting "Cut-in performance (strong performance)" is "0/256".

As described above, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits information indicating the game status (non-RT, RT, in RB, in BB, in RB, in BB, in MB) and the presentation group number to the sub-control board 80.
Then, the presentation output control means 91 of the sub-control board 80 selects a presentation decision table corresponding to the game status based on the information indicating the game status received from the main control board 50, and determines which presentation pattern to output based on the selected presentation decision table and the presentation group number received from the main control board 50, and controls the output of the presentation lamp 21, speaker 22, and image display device 23 in accordance with that decision.

Here, in a non-RT (non-internal) state, if the winning number "14" (a single win of "BB") is determined by the role selection means 61 in a lottery and the performance group number "12" is transmitted, the performance output control means 91 selects the performance determination table shown in FIG. 27 which is used commonly for non-RT and RT (non-AT), and uses the number entered in the column for performance group number "12" (a single win of "BB") in this performance determination table to determine which performance pattern to output. As shown in FIG. 27, when a single win of "BB" occurs in a non-RT state, for example, "continuous performance" is selected with a probability of "40/256".

In contrast, when the winning number "0"("non-winning") is determined by the lottery by the role selection means 61 in the BB and the performance group number "0" is transmitted, the performance output control means 91 selects the performance determination table used commonly in the RB and the BB shown in Fig. 28, and uses the number entered in the column for the performance group number "0"("non-winning") in this performance determination table to determine which performance pattern to output. As shown in Fig. 28, when there is a "non-winning" in the BB, for example, a "definite performance" is selected with a probability of "80/256".
In this way, the effect output control means 91 determines the effect to be output using different effect determination tables for a game in which the role selection means 61 has won "BB" alone during a non-RT (non-internal) and a game in which the role selection means 61 has become "non-winning" during a BB. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is different.

In addition, in non-RT, when the winning number "14" (a single winning of "BB") is determined by the lottery by the role selection means 61, on the main control board 50 side, the winning flag control means 62 turns on the winning flag of "BB" included in the condition device of "BB" corresponding to the winning number "14", and turns off the other winning flags. In addition, the reel control means 65 selects the corresponding stop position determination table when the winning flag of "BB" is on and the other winning flags are off. This stop position determination table is called the "BB single winning flag".

The "BB only stop position determination table" determines the stop position of each reel 31 so that a symbol combination corresponding to BB stops on an active line, and so that a symbol combination corresponding to a role other than BB does not stop on an active line.
Then, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the reel control means 65 determines the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to that stop switch 42 based on the "BB only stop position determination table" and the position of the reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated, and controls the reel 31 to stop at the determined position.

Also, when the winning number "0"("non-winning") is drawn by the role selection means 61 inside BB, the winning flag control means 62 on the main control board 50 side keeps the carried-over winning flag of "BB" on and turns off the other winning flags. Also, the reel control means 65 selects a corresponding stop position determination table when the winning flag of "BB" is on and the other winning flags are off. In other words, it selects the same "BB alone stop position determination table" as when "BB" is won alone by the role selection means 61 in non-RT.
For this reason, when the role selection means 61 indicates "non-winning" during BB, the same stop control of the reel 31 is performed as when the role selection means 61 has won "BB" alone during non-RT. In addition, "the same stop control of the reel 31 is performed" means that when each stop switch 42 is operated in the same manner (push order and operation timing), each reel 31 stops in the same position and the same stop result is displayed.

In this way, when the role selection means 61 wins "BB" alone in non-RT and when the role selection means 61 becomes "non-winning" during BB, the main control board 50 determines the stop position of the reel 31 using the same stop position determination table, but the sub-control board 80 determines the effect to be output using a different effect determination table. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is different.
As a result, even if the main control board 50 performs the same stop control of the reel 31, the sub-control board 80 can output different effects, thereby diversifying the effects.
Furthermore, even if the main control board 50 controls the stopping of the same reel 31 and displays the same stop result, the sub-control board 80 outputs a different effect, allowing the player to guess that he or she has won a special role (is in the internal role).

Furthermore, by selecting different effect determination tables on the sub-control board 80 side when "BB" is won alone in a non-RT and when "it is not won" inside the BB, it is possible to select an effect determination table with a low probability of selecting a confirmed effect (an effect that lets the player know that he or she has won the BB) when "BB" is won alone in a non-RT, and to select an effect determination table with a high probability of selecting a confirmed effect when "it is not won" inside the BB.
This makes it difficult for the player to know that he has won "BB" in the game in which he has won "BB", and by making it easy for the player to know that he has won "BB" while he is in the BB, the player will aim to win "BB" and the BB period will not continue indefinitely, so that the player will not be put at a disadvantage.

In addition, in a non-RT, if the winning number "8" (double win of "watermelon + BB") is determined by the lottery by the role selection means 61 and the effect group number "6" is transmitted, the effect output control means 91 selects the effect determination table shown in FIG. 27 which is used commonly in non-RT (non-internal) and RT (non-AT and non-internal), and uses the number entered in the column for effect group number "6" (double win of "watermelon + BB") in this effect determination table to determine which effect pattern to output. As shown in FIG. 27, in the case of a double win of "watermelon + BB" in a non-RT, for example, there is a probability of "50/256" to select "character effect (lively)", "conversation effect (lively)", or "cut-in effect (strong effect)", and a probability of "30/256" to select "continuous effect".

In contrast, when the winning number "7" (single winning of "watermelon") is determined by the lottery by the role selection means 61 in the BB and the performance group number "5" is transmitted, the performance output control means 91 selects the performance determination table used commonly in the RB and the BB shown in Fig. 28, and uses the number entered in the column of the performance group number "5" (single winning of "watermelon") in this performance determination table to determine which performance pattern to output. As shown in Fig. 28, when a single "watermelon" is won in the BB, for example, a "character performance (lively)" or a "conversation performance (lively)" is selected with a probability of "73/256", and a continuous performance is selected with a probability of "20/256".
In this way, the effect output control means 91 determines the effect to be output using different effect determination tables for a game in which "watermelon + BB" is won by the role selection means 61 during a non-RT (non-internal) period and a game in which "watermelon" is won alone by the role selection means 61 during a BB period. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is different.

In addition, during non-internal periods, the player is shown consecutive performances over multiple plays, thereby prolonging the player's anticipation of winning "BB," and the probability of selecting consecutive performances when "watermelon + BB" are won multiple times is set high.
On the other hand, if the player is shown consecutive effects over multiple plays during the BB period, the winning of the "BB" will be delayed accordingly, resulting in a decrease in the player's medals. Therefore, the probability of selecting consecutive effects when only the "watermelon" is won is set low, and the probability of selecting a fixed effect when the player does not win is set high in order to encourage the player to aim for the winning of the "BB" early.
During BB, the probability of winning each role and the number of medals to be paid out upon winning may be set so that the player's medals do not decrease, and the probability of selecting consecutive effects may be set high.

In addition, in a non-RT (non-internal) state, if the winning number "8" (double winning of "watermelon + BB") is determined by the lottery by the role selection means 61, on the main control board 50 side, the winning flag control means 62 turns on the two winning flags "watermelon" and "BB" included in the condition device of "watermelon + BB" corresponding to the winning number "8", and turns off the other winning flags. In addition, the reel control means 65 selects the corresponding stop position determination table when the two winning flags "watermelon" and "BB" are on and the other winning flags are off. This stop position determination table is called the "watermelon + BB double winning stop position determination table".

The "stop position determination table for overlapping watermelon and BB" determines the stop position of each reel 31 so that a symbol combination corresponding to watermelon or BB can stop on an active line, and symbol combinations corresponding to roles other than watermelon and BB cannot stop on an active line.
Then, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the reel control means 65 determines the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to that stop switch 42 based on the "watermelon + BB overlap stop position determination table" and the position of the reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated, and controls the reel 31 to stop at the determined position.

In addition, when the winning number "7" (single winning of "watermelon") is determined by the lottery by the role selection means 61 inside BB, the winning flag control means 62 on the main control board 50 side keeps the winning flag of "BB" carried over on, and in addition, turns on the winning flag of "watermelon" included in the condition device of "watermelon" corresponding to the winning number "7", and turns off the winning flags other than "watermelon" and "BB". As a result, the two winning flags of "watermelon" and "BB" are turned on. In addition, the reel control means 65 selects the corresponding stop position determination table when the two winning flags of "watermelon" and "BB" are on and the other winning flags are off. In other words, it selects the same "watermelon + BB overlap stop position determination table" as when the role selection means 61 wins "watermelon + BB" overlap in non-RT.

For this reason, when the "watermelon" is won solely by the role selection means 61 during a BB, the reel 31 is stopped in the same manner as when the "watermelon + BB" is won doubly by the role selection means 61 during a non-RT.
In this way, when the role selection means 61 wins "watermelon + BB" in a non-RT and when the role selection means 61 wins "watermelon" alone during BB, the main control board 50 uses the same stop position determination table to determine the stop position of the reel 31, but the sub-control board 80 uses a different effect determination table to determine the effect to be output. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is different.

In addition, when "Cherry 1 + BB" is won multiple times in a non-RT, or when "Cherry 1" is won alone within a BB, the main control board 50 uses the same stop position determination table to determine the stop position of the reel 31, just as when "Watermelon + BB" is won multiple times in a non-RT, or when "Watermelon" is won alone within a BB, but the sub-control board 80 uses a different effect determination table to determine the effect to be output. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is different.

Furthermore, when "Cherry 2+BB" or "Cherry 2+RB" are multiple wins in a non-RT, and when "Cherry 2" is won alone while inside a BB or inside a RB, the main control board 50 determines the stop position of the reel 31 using the same stop position determination table, just as when "Watermelon+BB" are multiple wins in a non-RT, and when "Watermelon" is won alone while inside a BB, but the sub-control board 80 determines the effect to be output using a different effect determination table. For this reason, the selection probability of each effect pattern is different.
As a result, even if the main control board 50 performs the same stop control of the reel 31, the sub-control board 80 can output different effects, thereby diversifying the effects.

As shown in Figures 27 and 28, when a "watermelon" is won alone in a non-RT and when a "watermelon" is won alone during a BB, the number of allocations for each presentation pattern is the same, so the probability of selecting each presentation pattern is the same.
However, when "watermelon" is won alone in a non-RT, the winning flag for "watermelon" is on and the corresponding stop position determination table is selected when the other winning flags are off, whereas when "watermelon" is won alone during a BB, the two winning flags for "watermelon" and "BB" are on and the corresponding stop position determination table is selected when the other winning flags are off. Therefore, the stop control of the reel 31 is different when "watermelon" is won alone in a non-RT and when "watermelon" is won alone during a BB.
In this way, when "watermelon" is won alone in a non-RT and when "watermelon" is won alone during a BB, the probability of selecting each presentation pattern is the same on the sub-control board 80 side, but the stopping control of the reel 31 is different on the main control board 50 side.

As described above, in multiple game states, when the random number value extracted by the random number extraction means of the role selection means 61 is the same, the winning number determined by the winning number determination means of the role selection means 61 is the same, and the same condition device is activated, the stopping control of the reel 31 for each game state (the selected stop position determination table) is the same, but the selection probability of each presentation pattern (the selected presentation determination table) may differ.

In addition, in a plurality of game states, when the random number values extracted by the random number extraction means of the role selection means 61 are different and the winning numbers determined by the winning number determination means of the role selection means 61 are the same, and the same condition device is activated, the stopping control of the reel 31 for each game state (the selected stop position determination table) is the same, but the selection probability of each presentation pattern (the selected presentation determination table) may be different.

Furthermore, when the random number values extracted by the random number extraction means of the role selection means 61 are different and the winning numbers determined by the winning number determination means of the role selection means 61 are different in a plurality of game states and the same condition device is activated, the stopping control of the reel 31 for each game state (the selected stopping position determination table) is the same, but the selection probability of each presentation pattern (the selected presentation determination table) may be different.

<Modification of the ninth embodiment>
Although the ninth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described content, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) The types of roles, types of condition devices, types of game states, specified numbers in each game state, payouts when each role is won, allocation of internal lottery numbers, allocation of advantageous zone lottery numbers, types of presentation patterns, and allocation of allocation numbers for each presentation pattern shown in the ninth embodiment are merely examples and can be set appropriately depending on the content of the game.

(2) In the ninth embodiment, only the number setting table for the internal lottery and the advantageous zone lottery for setting 1 is shown, but six setting values from setting 1 to setting 6 can be set, and each setting value can be provided with a different number setting table for the internal lottery and the advantageous zone lottery.
(3) In the ninth embodiment, the control command transmission means 71 transmits information indicating the game state and the presentation group number to the sub-control board 80. As a result, the sub-control board 80 determines the game state and the condition device on the main control board 50 side, and selects a presentation pattern with a probability according to the game state and the condition device. However, this is not limited to this.
For example, the control command transmission means 71 may transmit a winning number determined by an internal lottery to the sub-control board 80, or may transmit information indicating a condition device corresponding to the winning number determined by an internal lottery. Then, the sub-control board 80 may determine the condition device on the main control board 50 side based on the received winning number or information indicating the condition device.

Also, for example, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits information indicating the condition device determined by the internal lottery and information on the winning combination to the sub-control board 80. Then, the sub-control board 80 may determine the game state on the main control board 50 side based on the information indicating the condition device and the information on the winning combination.
Furthermore, for example, if the sub-control board 80 receives information indicating that "BB" has been won, but does not receive information indicating that "BB" has been awarded, it can determine that the game status on the main control board 50 side is within BB.
Then, a presentation pattern may be selected on the sub-control board 80 side based on the game status on the main control board 50 side determined on the sub-control board 80 side and information indicating the presentation group number, winning number, and condition device received from the main control board 50.

(4) For example, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits information indicating whether a winning flag corresponding to each role is on/off and information on a winning role to the sub-control board 80. Then, the sub-control board 80 may determine the game state and the condition device on the main control board 50 side based on the information indicating whether a winning flag is on/off and the information on a winning role.
For example, if information is received indicating that the winning flag for "BB" is on, but no information is received indicating that "BB" has won, it can be determined that the game status on the main control board 50 side is within BB.

In addition, since the drawing for "BB" is not performed inside BB, when information indicating that only the winning flag for "BB" is on is received inside BB, it can be determined that the winning number "0"("non-winning") has been determined in the internal drawing on the main control board 50 side.
Then, a presentation pattern may be selected on the sub-control board 80 side based on the game state on the main control board 50 side determined on the sub-control board 80 side and a condition device on the main control board 50 side determined on the sub-control board 80 side.

(5) In the ninth embodiment, the term “single win” is used to mean that only a role other than the special role is won, and the special role is not won at the same time, and the term “multiple wins” is used to mean that a special role and a role other than the special role are won at the same time.
For example, the winning of "watermelon + control role 1" inside the BB is a multiple win in the sense that multiple types of roles are won at the same time, but since only roles other than the special role are won and the special role is not won at the same time, it is a single win in the sense of the 9th embodiment.

In addition, when "watermelon + control role 1 + BB" is won outside the internal state (duplicate win) and when "watermelon + control role 1" is won inside the BB (single win), the on/off state of the win flag is the same on the main control board 50 side, so the same stop position determination table is used to determine the stop position of the reel 31. However, since the win number and performance group number are different, a different performance determination table is used on the sub-control board 80 side to determine the performance to be output.
In addition, a "control role" is a role that changes the on/off state of the winning flag, thereby changing the selected stop position determination table and thereby changing the stopping control of the reel 31, and is not a role for winning a prize.

(6) In the ninth embodiment, when the winning number “11” (a single win of “Cherry 2”) is determined during RB and BB, the drawing of the advantageous zone can be executed. However, when a role that overlaps with multiple types of special roles is won, the drawing of the advantageous zone may not be executed.
(7) The first to ninth embodiments and the various modified examples shown in the first to ninth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

Tenth Embodiment
The tenth embodiment relates to control of the display of the management information display LED 74 .
The main CPU 55 controls all LEDs of the management information display LED 74 to be lit for 5 seconds from a predetermined timing based on power-on (for example, when power is turned on, when the first interrupt processing is started, when a program is started, etc.) in the setting change state (setting change mode, setting change in progress), setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation in progress), and RWM abnormal error state.
As described in the second embodiment, the management information display LED 74 is configured with four-digit LEDs, so when all the LEDs are lit, "8888" is displayed. This makes it possible to check whether the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are malfunctioning.

When the setting key switch is on when the power is turned on, the device transitions to a setting change state in which the setting values can be changed. Furthermore, when the device transitions to the setting change state, all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are turned on.
The five seconds from the specified timing based on power-on is set to a time longer than the time required from power-on to transition to the setting change state if the setting key switch is on when the power is turned on.

Here, for example, suppose that the lighting period of all LEDs of the management information display LED 74 from a specific timing based on power-on is set to a time shorter than the time required from power-on to transition to a setting change state. In this case, first, all LEDs of the management information display LED 74 will be lit, then management information will be temporarily displayed on the management information display LED 74, and then all LEDs of the management information display LED 74 will be lit again. This could lead the manager (hall staff) to suspect that there is some kind of malfunction with the gaming machine.

Therefore, the lighting period of all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 from a predetermined timing based on power-on is set to 5 seconds.
In addition, the lighting period of all LEDs of the management information display LED 74 from a specified timing based on power-on is not limited to 5 seconds, and may be set to any time as long as it is longer than the time required from power-on to transition to the setting change state.

The test pattern display of the management information display LED 74 will be further described below.
In the tenth embodiment, the four-digit LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are referred to as "digit 6,""digit7,""digit8," and "digit 9" from the left.
Furthermore, of the four-digit LEDs that the management information display LED 74 has, the two LEDs on the left (digits 6 and 7) are referred to as the "identification segment," and the two LEDs on the right (digits 8 and 9) are referred to as the "ratio segment."

Furthermore,
Digit 6: upper digit of identification segment, Digit 7: lower digit of identification segment, Digit 8: upper digit of ratio segment, Digit 9: lower digit of ratio segment.
Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, each LED (digit) of the management information display LED 74 is an 8-segment LED consisting of segments A to G and a segment DP.

The display of the test pattern on the management information display LED 74 is performed to check whether all segments (segments A to G and DP) are properly lit and extinguished. Therefore, during the period (time) in which the test pattern is displayed, all segments are set to have both a lit state and an extinguished state.
Furthermore, when the test pattern is to be displayed on the management information display LED 74, it is displayed at one of the following times.
(1) Within 5 seconds after the power is turned on. (2) Within 5 seconds after the setting change start process. (3) During setting change (mode). (4) During setting confirmation (mode). (5) During RWM abnormal error.

The first test pattern is a pattern in which a predetermined display is switched every second and displayed for five seconds. Note that the time for which one display is maintained is not limited to one second, and the display time of the test pattern is not limited to five seconds (it may be any time other than five seconds).
Then, the test pattern is set so that all segments of all LEDs are either in a lit state or in an unlit state during the 5 seconds that is the display time of the test pattern.
A second test pattern is to blink all segments of all LEDs. Even with this setting, all segments of all LEDs can be switched between the lit and extinguished states with a single blink (on and off).

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example 1 of the test pattern display of the management information display LED 74. As shown in FIG.
In the test pattern display of Fig. 29 and Fig. 30 described later, lit segments are indicated by solid lines and unlit segments by dotted lines. Also, the lit state of the segment DP is indicated by a black circle and the unlit state is indicated by a white circle.
In the following description, "." indicates that the segment DP is in a lit state, and "." indicates that the segment DP is in an unlit state.

In Example 1 shown in FIG. 29, two types of display are provided for each LED of the test pattern.
One of them is a pattern that displays "0." More specifically, this is a pattern in which segments A through F and DP are lit, and segment G is off.
The other is a pattern that displays "-." More specifically, this is a pattern in which segment G is lit, and segments A to F and DP are unlit.
Therefore, "0." and "-." have the opposite relationship of lit and unlit segments, respectively.

In the state shown in FIG. 29(a), the upper digits of the identification segment and the upper digits of the ratio segment are displayed as "0.", and the lower digits of the identification segment and the lower digits of the ratio segment are displayed as "-.".
Furthermore, in Example 1 shown in Fig. 29, the display state shown in Fig. 29(a) is maintained for one second. The one-second count can be measured by the number of interrupt processes. For example, when the display of Fig. 29(a) is started, a counter is set to "447(D)", and "1" is subtracted for each interrupt process. When the counter reaches "0", the display of Fig. 29(a) is terminated. This allows the display of Fig. 29(a) to be maintained for "2.235 x 447 = 999.045 ms".

After the display of FIG. 29(a) is completed for about one second, the display shifts to that of FIG. 29(b).
Also, the display in Fig. 29(b) is obtained by switching the LEDs displaying "0." and the LEDs displaying "-." in comparison with the display in Fig. 29(a). That is, the display in Fig. 29(b) is the opposite of the display in Fig. 29(a), in that the upper digits of the identification segment and the upper digits of the ratio segment are displayed as "-.", and the lower digits of the identification segment and the lower digits of the ratio segment are displayed as "0.".
Furthermore, similarly to the case of FIG. 29(a), the display state shown in FIG. 29(b) continues for one second (447 interrupts).

The display contents of Fig. 29(a) and Fig. 29(b) are switched every second for five seconds. Therefore, in Fig. 29, (c) and (e) have the same display contents as (a), and (d) has the same display contents as (b).
Then, when the display of the test pattern (for 5 seconds) ends, the display transitions to the normal ratio display.
In Fig. 29, (f) shows an example in which the advantageous zone ratio is displayed as "7. U. 5. 0." Also, instead of the advantageous zone ratio, a role ratio may be displayed.

As described above, by displaying "0." and "-." on the LED, it is possible to create lit and unlit states for all segments (A to G and DP), making it easy to visually determine whether a segment is faulty (cannot be lit or unlit).
Furthermore, when displaying the ratio, neither the discrimination segment nor the ratio segment will display "0.-." or "-.0." Therefore, there is no risk of confusing the test pattern with the actual ratio display.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a second example of the test pattern display of the management information display LED 74. In FIG.
In Example 1 of Fig. 29, the display content is changed every second, and a test pattern is displayed for five seconds. As described above, such a test pattern is suitable for displaying within five seconds from a predetermined timing based on power-on or within five seconds from the start of the setting change process.
In contrast, the test pattern display example 2 shown in FIG. 30 is suitable for displaying a test pattern until a predetermined end condition is met, such as during setting change, setting confirmation, or an RWM abnormal error.
Of course, the test pattern display in FIG. 29 may be used in a case where the display is continued until a predetermined end condition is met.
Similarly, the test pattern display in FIG. 30 may of course be used when displaying within a predetermined period of time from when the start condition for displaying the test pattern is satisfied.

In example 2 of Fig. 30, "8.8.8.8.", in which all segments of all LEDs are lit, and "*.*.*.*.", in which all segments of all LEDs are turned off ("*" indicates that segments A through G are turned off), are alternately repeated. In other words, this is a pattern in which "8.8.8.8." is flashed.
In example 2 of Fig. 30, the all-segment lit state shown in Fig. 30(a) is maintained for 0.3 seconds, and then the all-segment off state shown in Fig. 30(b) is maintained for 0.3 seconds. The lit state shown in Fig. 30(a) and the off state shown in Fig. 30(b) are then repeated to create a flashing state.

In the tenth embodiment, the blinking interval is set to 0.3 seconds. For example, the timer is set to "134(D)" as the initial value, and the timer value is subtracted by "1" for each 2.235 ms interrupt process. When the timer value reaches "0", it is determined that the light-on time or light-off time has elapsed. In this way, by counting the number of interrupts "134", it is possible to count "299.49" ms.

In the test pattern display example 2 in Fig. 30, the "8." and "*." can be used to create a lit or unlit state for all segments. This makes it easy to visually determine whether a segment is faulty (cannot be lit or unlit).
Furthermore, when displaying a ratio, neither the identification segment nor the ratio segment will display "8.8." For example, when the ratio reaches 88%, the display will blink regardless of the ratio, but in that case, "8.8." will be displayed and the DP segment will not light up. On the other hand, when displaying "8.8," the DP segment will also light up, so there is no confusion between the two.

The ratios displayed on the management information display LED 74 are updated (calculated) when the game ends (after all reels 31 have stopped and the payout process has been completed). The updated ratios are then displayed in the subsequent interrupt process. Here, if a power outage occurs just before the ratios are updated and a test pattern is displayed for five seconds after the power is restored, the ratio update (calculation) process is executed during the five seconds during which the test pattern is displayed. Then, when the display of the test pattern ends and the ratio display begins, the updated ratios are displayed after the power is restored from the power outage.

Eleventh Embodiment
31A is a diagram showing various LEDs on a display board 75 in the 11th embodiment, FIG. 31B is a diagram showing a management information display LED 74 in the 11th embodiment, and FIG. 31C is a diagram showing a setting value display LED 73 in the 11th embodiment.
As shown in Fig. 31A, the credit display LED 76 is composed of a digit 1a (higher digit) and a digit 2a (lower digit). The acquired number display LED 78 is composed of a digit 3a (higher digit) and a digit 4a (lower digit).
Here, "digit" refers to a display unit, and in this embodiment, in particular, is composed of a seven-segment LED (so-called 7-segment).
Each of these digits 1a to 4a is a seven-segment display having a dot segment (segment P). In particular, the segment P of digit 4a (the lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78) functions as the advantageous zone display LED 77.

The digit 5a is composed of six dot LEDs, and these six dot LEDs are collectively referred to as the status display LEDs 79. Note that in Fig. 1, the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 are illustrated, but the status display LED 79 is not illustrated. However, in reality, the credit number display LED 76, the acquired number display LED 78, and the status display LED 79 are mounted on the display board 75, as shown in Fig. 31(A).
In the status display LED 79, the 1-bet display LED 79a to 3-bet display LED 79c are LEDs that respectively display the number of medals bet at that time. When one medal is bet, only the 1-bet display LED 79a lights up. When two medals are bet, the 1-bet display LED 79a and the 2-bet display LED 79b light up. When three medals are bet, the 1-bet display LED 79a, the 2-bet display LED 79b, and the 3-bet display LED 79c are all configured to light up.

The game start display LED 79d is an LED that lights up when medals are inserted and the start switch 41 becomes operable. Therefore, it does not light up when medals are not bet (or replays are not automatically inserted).
The insertion indicator LED 79e is an LED that lights up when a medal can be inserted. That is, it lights up when a game ends and before medals are inserted to move to the next game, indicating a so-called bet waiting state. Note that even after a replay has been activated, it lights up when a bet can be made according to the number of credits. When the number of bets is at its maximum (when no more bets can be made), the insertion indicator LED 79e goes out.

The replay display LED 79f is an LED that lights up when a replay wins, and when an automatic bet is made based on the replay win, the replay display LED 79f lights up to inform the player that an automatic bet is in effect.
Note that an example of the status display LED 79 not shown in FIG. 31(A) is a settlement display LED (an LED that lights up during settlement processing), but this is omitted from FIG. 31(A).

In Fig. 31(B), the management information display LED 74 is the same as that shown in Fig. 10, Fig. 29 and Fig. 30, and is composed of four digits 1b to 4b. These digits 1b to 4b are 7-segment displays equipped with dot segments (segment P) like the above-mentioned digits 1a to 4a. The digits 1b to 4b respectively display the upper information type, the lower information type, the upper numerical value and the lower numerical value.
The segment P of digit 2b (lower information type) functions as a digit separator LED. The digit separator LED is used to clearly indicate the separator between the information type and the numerical value.

Also, the segments P of digits 1b to 4b can be lit when displaying a test pattern, as shown in FIGS.
Furthermore, in FIG. 31(C), the setting value display LED 73 is the same as that shown in FIG. 10, and is an LED that displays the current setting value while the setting is being changed or confirmed, and is composed of one (single digit) 5b.
As shown in FIG. 10, the management information display LED 74 (digits 1b to 4b) and the setting value display LED 73 (digit 5b) are mounted on the main control board 50.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits 1a to 5a and digits 1b to 5b and segments A to G and P in this embodiment.
A 7-segment digit is a 7-segment digit made up of seven bar-shaped segments A to G and one dot-shaped segment P. Note that an LED made up of segments A to G without segment P may be referred to as a "7-segment" LED, and an LED made up of eight segments including segment P may be referred to as an "8-segment" LED, but in this specification, the term "7-segment" includes LEDs made up of eight segments.

32, for example, in digit 1a, segments A to G form the seven most significant digits of the credit number display LED 76, and segment P is unused. Similarly, segments A to G in digits 2a and 3a form the seven most significant digits of the credit number display LED 78, and segment DP is unused.
In addition, segments A to G of digit 4a constitute the lower 7-segment digits of the winning number display LED 78, and segment P constitutes the advantageous zone display LED 77.

Digit 5a is an LED that constitutes the status display LED 79. As shown in FIG. 32, segment A of digit 5a corresponds to 1 bet display LED 79a, segment B corresponds to 2 bet display LED 79b, ..., segment F corresponds to replay display LED 79f. Also, segments G and P of digit 5a are not provided.

Digits 1b to 4b constitute the management information display LED 74, and segments 1b and 2b display the information type of the management information. Segments 3b and 4b display the numerical value of the management information corresponding to the information type displayed by segments 1b and 2b. Segments P of digits 1b, 3b, and 4b are normally off, but as shown in Figures 29 and 30, they are lit when the test pattern is displayed. Segment P of digit 2b also functions as a digit separator display LED to clarify the boundary between digits 1b and 2b, which indicate the information type, and digits 3b and 4b, which indicate the numerical value, for easy confirmation. Note that while the test pattern is being displayed, the digit separator display LED may be repeatedly lit and unlit like the segments P of other digits, but may also be lit all the time.

Of the digits 5b, segments A to G make up the seven-segment setting value display LED 73, with segment P being an LED that lights up while the setting is being changed. In other words, when segment P of the setting value display LED 73 is off, it indicates that the setting is being confirmed, and when segment P is lit, it indicates that the setting is being changed. Note that segment P of the setting value display LED 73 is not necessarily limited to this use. For example, segment P of the setting value display LED 73 may be a segment that lights up when the setting value is finalized during a setting change.

32 also illustrates the configuration of segment data. The segment data is 1 byte data, with the D0 bit corresponding to segment A, the D1 bit corresponding to segment B, ..., the D7 bit corresponding to segment P.
For example, to display "0" in digit 1a, segments A through F are turned on and segments G and P are turned off, resulting in segment data of "00111111(B)."

In addition, when the digit 4a is displayed as "1" and the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned on, segments B, C, and P are turned on, so that the segment data becomes "10000110 (B)."
Furthermore, when three medals are bet before the start of play and play is possible, the 1 bet display LED 79a, the 2 bet display LED 79b, the 3 bet display LED 79c, and the game start display LED 79d are lit up, so that the segment data of digit 5a becomes "00001111 (B)".

Fig. 33 is a diagram showing an output port 52 in the eleventh embodiment. Note that the type of output port is not limited to that shown in Fig. 33.
As the output port 52 in the eleventh embodiment, one output port (output port 2) for transmitting a digit signal and two output ports (output ports 3 and 4) for transmitting a segment signal are provided.
The output port 3 is an output port that transmits segment signals of a credit number display LED 76, an acquired number display LED 78, and a status display LED 79 (digits 1a to 5a).
The output port 4 is an output port for transmitting segment signals of the management information display LED 74 (digits 1b to 4b) and the setting value display LED 73 .

In output port 2, digit 1 to 5 signals are assigned to bits D0 to D4, respectively. Here, the digit 1 signal includes both the digit 1a signal and the digit 1b signal, and the same is true for the digits 2 to 5 signals. Therefore, for example, when a "1" signal is output from bit D0 of output port 2, a drive signal is supplied to both digit 1a (credit number display LED 76 (high-order digit)) and digit 1b (management information display LED 74 (high-order information type)).

In addition, in output port 2, bits D5 to D7 are unused.
The output port 3 is an output port for the segment A to P signals of the digits 1a to 5a, and the segment A to P signals are assigned to the bits D0 to D7, respectively.
Similarly, output port 4 is an output port for the segment A to P signals of digits 1b to 5b, and the segment A to P signals are assigned to bits D0 to D7, respectively.
Furthermore, external signals 1 to 5, a data strobe signal, a medal insertion signal, and a medal payout signal are output from output port 5.

Here, an "external signal" is a signal to be output to the outside of the slot machine 10 (such as the hall computer 200 or a data counter installed in the hall) via the external centralized terminal board 100. Specifically, there are external signals 1 to 3 indicating, for example, advantageous periods, ATs, specific RTs, and when a special device is in operation, external signal 4 indicating an error or power outage that has occurred in the slot machine 10, and external signal 5 indicating that the front door of the slot machine 10 is open.

The data strobe signal is a signal transmitted to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the data strobe signal, it performs control so as to obtain the sub-control data signal from a buffer provided in the sub-control board 80 based on the rising edge of the data strobe signal.
In addition, output ports (not shown) other than output ports 2 to 5 shown in Figure 33 output, for example, a signal from motor 32, a signal from blocker 45, a drive signal for hopper motor 36, a condition device signal (the so-called winning number), a sub-control data signal, a test signal, etc.

34A is a diagram showing the relationship between interrupts, LED display counter values, digit signals, and segment signals in the 11th embodiment, while FIG. 34B is a diagram showing LED display request flags.
In this embodiment, the main control board 50 processes a main process (M_MAIN) (see FIG. 41, described later) for each game, and in parallel with this main process, an interrupt process (I_INTR) (see FIG. 53, described later) is executed once every 2.235 ms.

The LED display counter is a 1-byte data counter that is continually updated with each interrupt. The LED display counter is a counter that determines which of digits 1 (1a and 1b) to 5 (5a and 5b) to light up. The bits of the LED display counter are assigned as follows: bit D0 is the digit 1 signal, bit D1 is the digit 2 signal, ..., bit D4 is the digit 5 signal. Then, in one interrupt process, dynamic lighting of digits 1 (1a and 1b) to 5 (5a and 5b) is performed so that the digit corresponding to the bit that is set to "1" in the LED display counter is lighted up.

In this embodiment, the LED display counter has an initial value of "00010000 (B)". As interrupts progress from "1" to "2" to... (for each interrupt), the LED display counter is updated by shifting the bit "1" of the LED display counter value to the right by one digit. In addition, in FIG. 34, in the interrupt following interrupt "5", the LED display counter is shifted to the right by one digit to become "00000000 (B)", but at the time of this interrupt, the LED display counter is initialized to "00010000 (B)". As a result, the LED display counter repeats the values "5" → "4" →... → "1" → "5" → "4" →... for each interrupt process. In other words, five interrupts make up one cycle.

From the above, the LED display counter value is
"N" Interruption: 00010000 (B)
"N+1" interruption: 00001000 (B)
"N+2" interruption: 00000100 (B)
"N+3" interruption: 00000010 (B)
"N+4" interruption: 00000001 (B)
"N+5" interruption: 00000000 (B) → 00010000 (B) (initialization; same value as "N" interruption)
"N+6" interruption: 00001000 (B)
:
It becomes.

In the eleventh embodiment, five interrupts constitute one cycle, and digits 1a to 5a and digits 1b to 5b are lit. Specifically, in FIG. 34(A), for example, when interrupt "1", that is, when the LED display counter value is "00010000(B)", a digit 5 signal is output. The output of the digit 5 signal enables digits 5a and 5b to be lit. Therefore, the status display LED 79 and the setting value display LED 73 can be lit. When the next interrupt "2" occurs, the LED display counter becomes "00001000(B)", the digit 4 signal is output, and the lower digits of the acquisition count display LED D78 and the lower numerical digits of the management information display LED 74 can be lit.

34B is a diagram showing the data structure of the LED display request flag. The LED display request flag is data indicating the digits that are permitted to be lit. As shown in FIG. 34B, the LED display request flag is 8-bit data in which bit D0 corresponds to the digit 1 signal, bit D1 corresponds to the digit 2 signal, ..., bit D4 corresponds to the digit 5 signal. Each bit of the LED display request flag is matched with a bit of output port 2.
As shown in Fig. 34(B), digits 1 to 5 can be lit during normal operation, digits 3 to 5 can be lit during setting change, and digits 1 to 5 can be lit during setting confirmation. Note that "normal operation" refers to waiting for a game and during a game.

In the interrupt process, an AND operation is performed on the LED display counter and the LED display request flag, and the digit corresponding to the bit that becomes "1" becomes the digit that will be lit in the current interrupt process.
For example, if the LED display counter is "00010000 (B)" and the LED display request flag is "00011111 (B) (normal mode)," ANDing the two results in "00010000 (B)," and only the digit 5 signal becomes "1." However, during normal mode (when waiting to play or during a game), a segment signal is output from output port 3 to enable the status display LED 79 to light up, but no segment signal is output from output port 4, and control is exercised so that the setting value display LED 73 (digit 5b) is not turned on.

On the other hand, during a setting change, for example, at the interrupt timing when the digit 5 signal is turned on (the LED display counter is "00010000 (B)"), a segment signal is output from output port 4, enabling the setting value display LED 73 (digit 5b) to be lit.
In addition, during a setting change, at the interrupt timing when, for example, the digit 3 or 4 signal is turned on (the LED display counter is "00000100 (B)" or "00001000 (B)"), the digit 3 signal (the most significant digit of the acquisition number display LED 78) and the digit 4 signal (the least significant digit of the acquisition number display LED 78) are output, respectively, and the acquisition number display LED 78 displays "88" (indicating that the setting is being changed).

Furthermore, when the LED display counter is interrupted to "00001000 (B)" (interrupt "2" in FIG. 34), a segment signal is generated for output port 3 by referencing the value of the favorable zone display LED flag. Then, when the favorable zone display LED flag is on, the generated segment signal is ORed with "10000000 (B)" and the resulting value is output from output port 3 as a segment signal. This makes it possible to light up segment P (favorable zone display LED 77) for digit 4a.

FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the address, label name, number of bytes, name and content of data stored in the RWM 53.
It should be noted that the data shown in FIG. 35 is used for explaining the eleventh embodiment, and the data stored in the RWM 53 is not limited to this.

Address "F000(H)" is a storage area for setting value data (_NB_RANK). When the setting value is "N", "N-1" is stored as the setting value data. In this embodiment, the setting values are "1" to "6". Therefore, any value from "0(H)" to "5(H)" is stored as the setting value data.
Then, the set value display LED 73 displays "N" which is the set value data plus "1" as the set value.

Address "F010(H)" is a storage area for credit number data (_NB_CREDIT). The credit number data is data to be displayed on the credit number display LED 76. In this embodiment, any value from "0" to "50(D)" is stored as the credit number data.
In this embodiment, the credit number data is stored as a value obtained by converting the credit number into a decimal number. For example, when the credit number to be displayed is "29", the value "29(H)" is stored. In other words, "00101001(B)" is stored in the address "F010(H)". As a result, the lower four bits D0 to D3 of the address "F010(H)" are data for displaying the lower digits of the credit number ("9" in this example), and the upper four bits D4 to D7 are data for displaying the upper digits of the credit number ("2" in this example). In this embodiment, the upper limit of the credit number is "50(D)", so the stored data value is in the range of "0" to "50".
In this embodiment, the address of the RWM 53 for storing the credit number data itself is not provided, but the credit number data is provided as display data for the credit number display LED 76 .

Address "F011(H)" is a storage area for acquired number data (_NB_PAYOUT). The acquired number data is data to be displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. In the acquired number data, similar to the above-mentioned credit number data, the lowest 4 bits D0 to D3 are data for displaying the lower digit, and the highest 4 bits D4 to D7 are data for displaying the upper digit.
In this embodiment, when a small win occurs, the payout number data corresponding to the small win is stored as the winning number data in order to display the payout number corresponding to the small win on the winning number display LED 78. Specifically, when a small win occurs and medals are paid out, the winning number data is added together with the medal payout, and the display on the winning number display LED 78 is updated. For example, when "1 (H)" is stored as the winning number data, "01" is displayed on the winning number display LED 78.

In this case, the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) at address "F040(H)" described later stores, for example, "8(H)" when an 8-coin combination is won, and the payout number data is decremented by "1" according to the payout number when medals are paid out (including addition to credits), such as "8" → "7" → ... → "0".
In contrast, the winning number data stored in address "F011(H)" is incremented by "1" each time one medal is paid out, for example, when an 8-coin combination is won, from "0" → "1" → "2" → ... → "8". Therefore, the display of the winning number display LED 78 also counts up, from "0" → "1" → "2" → ... → "8".

In addition, in this embodiment, while the setting is being changed, the acquired number display LED 78 displays "88". Therefore, while the setting is being changed, setting change in progress display data for displaying "88" is stored as the acquired number data. By displaying "88" on the acquired number display LED 78, it is possible to identify from the front side of the gaming machine that the setting is being changed. Furthermore, by lighting up all segments and showing "88", it is possible to confirm that there are no segment defects (that there are no segments that cannot be lit). Note that the upper limit for the number of medals that can be paid out is 15 medals, so when the acquired number display LED 78 displays "88", it can be understood that this is not a display of the number of medals to be paid out.

Furthermore, in the twelfth embodiment described later, when the conditions for indicating the specified number (the number of medals to be bet in the current game) are met, the specified number is indicated (displayed, notified) on the acquired number display LED 78 before the game starts (before betting becomes possible or before the start switch 41 is operated). In this embodiment, to indicate the specified number "2", "0A" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. Therefore, when indicating the specified number, the specified number display data for displaying "0A" is stored as the acquired number data. Details will be described later, but the specified number display data for displaying "0A" is "0B(H)".

Furthermore, when a push order bell or the like is won during the AT, push order instruction information is displayed on the winning number display LED 78. The push order instruction information corresponding to the winning numbers "3" to "8" shown in FIG. 58 described later are "=1" to "=6", respectively. Therefore, when the push order instruction information is displayed on the winning number display LED 78, the push order instruction number is stored as the winning number data. As will be described in detail later, the push order instruction numbers corresponding to the push order instruction information "=1" to "=6" are "A1(H)" to "A6(H)", respectively. For example, in a game in which the winning number "3" is won, when the push order instruction information is displayed, the push order instruction number "A1(H)" is stored as the winning number data. As a result, the push order instruction information "=1" corresponding to the push order instruction number "A1(H)" is displayed on the winning number display LED 78.

In addition, when a specified error occurs, an error number is displayed on the acquisition count display LED 78. Therefore, when a specified error occurs, error number display data for displaying the error number is stored as acquisition count data. For example, when the error number to be displayed is "HP", error number display data for displaying "HP" is stored as acquisition count data.

Address "F030(H)" is a storage area for the operation status flag (_FL_ACTION). The operation status flag (_FL_ACTION) is a flag for determining whether or not replay and reels are activated. For example, when 1BB is activated, the D2 bit of the operation status flag is set to "1".
This operation status flag is updated in the game start setting process described later (step S317 in FIG. 42). For example, in step S313 in FIG. 42, the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag described later is read, and when it is determined that the D0 bit is "1", it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, and the D0 bit of the operation status flag is set to "1".
The replay operation status flag (D0 bit) is cleared in step S413 of FIG. 50 (game end check process) described later.
In addition, the operation status flag of the reel is also cleared by the game end check process (not shown in Figure 50).

Address "F031 (H)" is a storage area for the symbol combination display flag (_FL_WIN). The symbol combination flag is a flag for determining the symbol combination that has been stopped and displayed. In this embodiment, the D0 bit is assigned to REPLAY, and the D2 bit is assigned to 1BB. Therefore, the same bits as the replay and 1BB bits assigned in the operation status flag are assigned to the replay and 1BB bits of the symbol combination display flag, respectively.
During the main process of Fig. 41, in step S291, the winning determination means 66 determines whether the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed. Then, the symbol combination display flag is updated according to the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed. For example, when it is determined that the replay symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the D0 bit of the symbol combination flag is set to "1".
The symbol combination display flag is cleared at the start of the next game, specifically, during the main processing of FIG. 41, in step S279 (start switch reception processing).

Address "F040(H)" is a storage area for payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL). The payout number data becomes data indicating a value corresponding to the payout number when a small win is won in the game and the payout number is determined (step S293 in FIG. 40). When a small win is won, the payout number data corresponding to the won small win is stored and the medal payout process is executed. Here, each time one medal is paid out (adding "1" to the credit amount, or paying out one actual medal (from the hopper 35)), the payout number data is decremented by "1". In other words, it serves as the number of times the payout process is executed. As a result, when the medal payout process is completed, the payout number data becomes "0".

Address "F041(H)" is the storage area for the payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL). Like the payout number data, the payout number data buffer becomes data that indicates a value corresponding to the payout number when a small combination is won in the game and the payout number is determined. Unlike the payout number data, the payout number data buffer is not decremented each time a medal is paid out, but rather the initially stored value is maintained. This value is then maintained until the medal payout number update process for the next game (step S293 in FIG. 41). For example, when a small combination that pays out eight medals is won in the game, "8(H)" is stored as the payout number data buffer, and when no combination is won in the next game, "0" is overwritten as the payout number data buffer.

Address "F042(H)" is a storage area for automatic bet number data (_NB_REP_MEDAL). The automatic bet number data indicates the number of medals to be automatically bet when a replay is won, and in this embodiment, "2" or "3" is stored.
The automatic bet number data is set in step S325 during the game start setting process of FIG.
Address "F043(H)" is a storage area for bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL). The bet number data indicates the number of bets in the current game, and in this embodiment, any one of "0" to "3" is stored. The bet number data is used in the medal management process in step S276 during the main process of FIG. 41 (inserted medals are detected, and bet processing and credit addition processing are performed).

Address "F051(H)" is the storage area for the LED display counter (_CT_LED_DSP). The LED display counter is shown in Fig. 34(A), and as described above, is updated each time an interrupt process is performed.
Address "F052(H)" is a storage area for the LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP). The LED display request flag is shown in Fig. 34(B) and takes a value according to whether the device is in normal mode, changing settings, or checking settings.

Address "F061 (H)" is a storage area for the advantageous zone type flag (_NB_ADV_KND). The advantageous zone type flag is a flag that indicates whether the current game zone is a normal zone or an advantageous zone.
The favorable zone type flag stores "00000000 (B)" when in a normal zone, and when transitioning from a normal zone to a favorable zone, the D0 bit becomes "1".
The timing at which the advantageous zone type flag is updated will be described later.

Address "F062(H)" is a storage area for the advantageous zone display LED flag (_FL_ADV_LED). The advantageous zone display LED flag is a flag that indicates whether the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit or not. When the advantageous zone display LED 77 is off, the advantageous zone display LED flag is "0", and when the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit, the advantageous zone display LED flag is "1".
In addition, the advantageous zone display LED 77 may be turned on at any time after the transition to the advantageous zone (for example, the advantageous zone display LED 77 may be turned on at the same time as the transition to the advantageous zone).

On the other hand, even after moving into the favorable zone, the favorable zone display LED 77 does not have to be turned on.
Specifically, first, the advantageous zone display LED 77 is not turned on when transitioning to the advantageous zone, but may be turned on later (during the advantageous zone).
Secondly, the advantageous zone display LED 77 may not be turned on when transitioning to the advantageous zone, and if the conditions for ending the advantageous zone are met before the conditions for turning on the advantageous zone display LED 77 are met, the advantageous zone may end without ever turning on the advantageous zone display LED 77.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the instruction function is activated (when the correct button press sequence is notified) in a game state in which the zone is favorable and the zone Sim ball payout rate exceeds "1", the favorable zone display LED 77 is lit up.
Furthermore, once the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned on, it remains lit during the advantageous zone.
In addition, during the game end check process in the final game of the advantageous zone, a process is executed to turn off the advantageous zone display LED 77. Specifically, when the advantageous zone end condition is met, an initialization process of the advantageous zone display LED flag storage area (clearing the advantageous zone display LED flag) is executed. As a result, the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned off in the subsequent interrupt process.

Furthermore, when the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned on in a game that activates the indication function, the timing of lighting is, for example, when the start switch 41 is operated (more specifically, after the reel 31 starts rotating, until the rotation of the reel 31 reaches a constant speed state).
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other lighting timings are possible, for example:
1) Before the start switch 41 is operated. 2) After the start switch 41 is operated, when all the reels 31 are in a constant speed state and the operation of the stop switch 42 is available,
3) When at least one reel 31 is stopped and at least one other reel 31 is spinning,
4) When all reels 31 have stopped,
5) After all the reels 31 have stopped (the game has ended) and before the settlement switch 43 can be operated before the start of the next game.

However, in order to light up the advantageous zone display LED 77 in a game that activates the instruction function, the winning role for that game must have been determined, so this does not apply before the start switch 41 is operated (before the role is drawn).
When the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned on in a game in which the indication function is activated, this is done after the start switch 41 is operated and the winning combination is selected, so the shortest possible time for turning on the advantageous zone display LED 77 after the reel 31 starts to rotate and before the reel 31 reaches a constant speed state is achieved.

Address "F063 (H)" is the storage area for the favorable zone clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR). The favorable zone clear counter is a decrement counter for counting the number of plays during the favorable zone. The favorable zone clear counter is "0" during the normal zone, and when moving to the favorable zone, the initial value "1500 (D)" is set. The favorable zone clear counter is set to decrement "1" per play during the favorable zone as well as during the normal zone. However, the minimum value is "0". For this reason, when the favorable zone clear counter (before decrement) is "0" during the normal zone, even if "1" is decremented, the counter used will have a value of "0" after decrement. Therefore, during the normal zone, "0" is maintained, although "1" is decremented for each play. In other words, when "0" is stored in the favorable zone clear counter, it is a normal zone (non-favorable zone).

Furthermore, when the player moves into the advantageous zone, the advantageous zone clear counter is set to an initial value of "1500 (D)", so that the advantageous zone clear counter will become "1499 (D)" in the next game.
In addition, the favorable zone clear counter is configured with 2 bytes because it stores a maximum initial value of "1500 (D)". In other words, when a value other than "0" is stored in the favorable zone clear counter, it is a favorable zone.

Address "F065 (H)" is a storage area for a difference counter (_SC_24HGAME). The difference counter is a counter that stores a value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference in the number of coins during the advantageous period, and is also called an "MY counter."
The difference counter does not simply store the cumulative value of the difference number itself, but stores a "value corresponding to" the cumulative value of the difference number. For example, when the difference number becomes a value corresponding to a negative number, the value is corrected to "0 (H)". Therefore, the "cumulative value of the difference number ≠ the difference counter value".
The difference counter is an increment counter for determining whether or not the value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference in number of coins during the advantageous period exceeds "2400 (D)". For this reason, the difference counter is configured with a storage area of 2 bytes.

The difference number counter is required to count the cumulative value of the difference number of coins at least during the advantageous period, and does not need to count during the non-advantageous period (normal period).
Here, when updating the difference counter value on the condition that it is in an advantageous zone, a process is required to determine whether or not the game is in an advantageous zone for each game. For this reason, in this embodiment, the difference counter value is updated even during a non-advantageous zone (normal zone). In this way, the difference counter value can be updated without determining whether or not the game is in an advantageous zone for each game, simplifying the process.

Furthermore, even if the difference in number becomes negative in the current game and the value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference in number becomes carry-down data, the difference counter value is updated. However, if the result of the calculation is that the difference counter is carry-down data, a correction is made to set the difference counter value to "0."

To give a specific example (assuming that the difference counter value at the start of the first game is "0 (H)"),
First game: When the bet amount is "3" and the payout amount is "0", the difference counter after calculation is "FFFD (H)" and the difference counter after correction is "0 (H)".
Second game: bet number "3", payout number "9", difference counter after calculation "0006 (H)" (no correction)
3rd game: bet number "3", payout number "0", difference counter after calculation "0003 (H)" (no correction)
4th game: bet number "3", payout number "1", difference counter after calculation "0001 (H)" (no correction)
5th game: bet number "3", payout number "0", difference counter after calculation "FFFE (H)", difference counter after correction "0 (H)"
It will be updated as follows.
In addition, even if the difference number counter for the previous game was "0 (H)" and the difference number counter for the current game is "0 (H)", this is the result of a recalculation of the difference number counter value reflecting the difference number for that game, so this also corresponds to an "update" of the difference number counter.

As described above, when the difference counter value after the calculation is a value in which a carry-over has occurred, the difference counter value is corrected to "0" (the initial value is set to "0"). Note that the method of determining whether or not a carry-over has occurred will be described later.
By updating the difference counter value in this way, for example, when the payout number is large compared to the bet number, that is, when the difference number is increasing, the difference counter value increases as the game progresses. On the other hand, when the payout number is less than the bet number, for example, during a game in a normal section, the difference counter value increases by the payout number when a payout is made based on the winning of a small combination, but after that, if the payout number falls below the bet number, it will eventually become "0".

36 is a diagram (slump graph) for explaining the concept of the difference counter value, where (a) shows Example 1 and (b) shows Example 2. In FIG. 36, the horizontal axis is the number of games played, and the vertical axis is the difference.
In Example 1, the difference number initially progresses in the negative direction as the game progresses, but then, partway through, for example, when an AT is started, the difference number starts to increase. The difference number counter counts the point at which the difference number reaches its lowest value during the game's progress as "0," so the range indicated by the arrow in the figure is counted by the difference number counter as the increase in the difference number. As described above, in this embodiment, the advantageous period ends when the difference number counter value exceeds "2400 (D)" (the next game is controlled to be a game in the normal period).

In addition, the condition for ending the advantageous zone is met when the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)". Therefore, for example, if the difference counter is exactly "2400 (D)" at the end of the current game, the condition for ending the advantageous zone is not met in the current game.
Assuming that the maximum difference in number of coins for the gaming machine is obtained in the next game, the bet number is "1" and the payout number is "15", so the difference in number of coins in the next game will be "+14", and the difference counter value at the end of the next game will be "2414(D)". When the difference counter is "2414(D)", it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous period is met.
Therefore, the maximum value that the difference counter can take is "2414(D)."

In addition, the determination of whether the difference counter has exceeded "2400 (D)" is not limited to merely reading and determining the difference counter value stored in RWM53, but also includes determining the difference counter value temporarily stored in a register for updating, etc. (the same applies below).
Furthermore, when it is determined whether or not the difference counter value temporarily stored in the register has exceeded "2400(D)," if it is determined that the difference counter value has not exceeded "2400(D)," the difference counter value in the register is stored (saved) in the RWM 53. On the other hand, if it is determined that the difference counter value has exceeded "2400(D)," it is also possible to control so that the difference counter value is not stored in the RWM 53 and the difference counter value stored in the RWM 53 is cleared.

Similarly, in Example 2, as in Example 1, the difference number progresses in the negative direction as the game progresses, but then, halfway through, for example, when an AT is started, the difference number starts to increase. In Example 2, even when the difference number counter exceeds "2400 (D)", the cumulative value of the difference number is not positive, but even in such a case, the advantageous zone ends. In other words, regardless of the cumulative value of the difference number that has accompanied the game up to that point, if the difference number counter value exceeds "2400 (D)", counting from the point when the difference number reached its lowest value, the advantageous zone ends (the next game is controlled to be a game in the normal zone).

In addition, when updating the difference counter during the normal period, there is a possibility that the difference counter will exceed "2400 (D)" even during the normal period. For example, this may occur if you win a special combination many times and play the special combination repeatedly. In such a case,
1) A method of updating the difference counter value as it is until the advantageous period begins,
2) When the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)", the difference counter value is reset to "0" at that point.
For example, if the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)" during a favorable period and the difference counter is cleared based on the end of the favorable period, then if the process is executed regardless of whether or not the period is favorable, the difference counter will be cleared even if it exceeds "2400 (D)" during a normal period.

In contrast, if the process of clearing the difference counter is a process specific to the favorable period, the difference counter will not be cleared even if the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)" during the normal period.
When the advantageous period starts (the first game of the advantageous period), the difference counter is cleared (set to an initial value of "0"; step S354 in FIG. 45 described later). Therefore, it does not matter what the difference counter is before the advantageous period starts.
and,
1) When the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)" during the favorable period,
2) When the number of games played in the advantageous zone reaches 1,500 games,
satisfies the end condition of the favorable zone.
When the conditions for the end of the advantageous period are met, the difference counter is cleared (initialized). The reason for clearing the difference counter at the end of the advantageous period is to prevent data (values) related to the advantageous period from being carried over to the normal period when the advantageous period ends and the period transitions to the normal period. The difference counter is cleared in step S435 in FIG. 51, which will be described later.

FIG. 37 is a diagram (slump flag) showing the relationship between the difference counter value and the favorable zone, where (a) shows Example 1 and (b) shows Example 2.
In Example 1, in the normal zone, the difference number decreases as the game progresses, and from the time when the advantageous zone starts ("A" in the figure) until it progresses to "B" in the figure, the difference number is further decreased. In addition, in the case where the AT is not started at the same time as the advantageous zone starts, and the advantageous zone starts from the CZ, premonition, or AT preparation (for example, when the RT state is in a low probability state, while waiting for a replay to be won to move the RT state from a low probability state to a high probability state), the difference number may decrease even after the advantageous zone starts. In addition, even if the AT starts, the difference number may decrease if the situation where the push order bell is not won continues.

The difference number counter value is initialized at the start of the favorable period, so it is "0" at point "A" in the figure. Also, as described above, in a situation where the difference number is decreasing, the difference number counter value maintains "0". Therefore, in the figure, the difference number counter value remains "0" from point "A" to point "B".
Also, from point "B" onwards, the difference number starts to increase. This causes the difference number counter value to increase. When it is determined that the difference number counter value exceeds "2400 (D)" (when it reaches point "C" in the figure), it is determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous period are met, and the advantageous period ends (transitions to the normal period).

In this way, the difference counter starts counting from the point where the difference reaches its lowest value ("B") after the start of the advantageous zone, rather than the difference from the start of the advantageous zone, so medals will not be awarded to the player beyond the range where the most balls were dispensed (the range from "B" to "C" in Figure 37(a)). This makes it possible to avoid encouraging the player's gambling instincts.

The above points will be explained more specifically using numerical examples.
For example, if the specifications are such that an AT is started by lottery after a favorable zone has started, when the advantageous zone is in a non-AT state, the difference number may decrease as the game progresses.
For example, suppose that player X wins the advantageous zone and the advantageous zone starts, but the AT does not start and the player stops playing when the difference becomes "-200 coins."

Next, assume that player Y starts playing on the gaming machine, and wins the AT when the difference becomes "-50 coins," and the AT starts. After the advantageous zone starts, if the advantageous zone (AT) continues until the difference exceeds "+2400 coins," player Y will win "2400 + 250 = 2650 coins."
Therefore, as described above, by setting the end condition as "from the point where the difference number reaches its lowest value until it exceeds +2,400 coins" after the advantageous period has begun, it is possible to prevent a player from winning coins including those of other players, and to avoid encouraging gambling.

Example 2 shown in Figure 37(b) shows an example in which the difference number decreases in the normal zone, turns positive at point "D" midway, and then the favorable zone starts at point "E". In such a case, as described above, when the difference number counter value is updated to include the normal zone, the difference number counter value is positive at point "E" in the figure. However, the difference number counter value is initialized (cleared, i.e., updated to "0") at the start of the favorable zone (at "E" in the figure).
Therefore, the increase before the advantageous zone (the increase from "D" to "E") is not counted by the difference counter. Therefore, the difference counter continues to count up from point "E", and the advantageous zone ends when it exceeds "2400 (D)".

Returning to the explanation of FIG.
Address "F067(H)" is a storage area for the AT flag (_FL_AT_KND). The AT flag is a flag for determining whether or not the AT is in progress, and is set to "0" during non-AT and "1" during AT. The AT flag is set to "1" when the AT lottery is won, and is executed in step S364 of FIG. 46 described later. The AT flag is turned off when the final game of the AT ends, and is executed, for example, in the game end check process (step S415 of FIG. 50) described later. The AT flag is included in the data that is cleared (initialized) at the end of the advantageous period.

Address "F068 (H)" is the storage area of the AT play count counter (_CT_ART). The AT play count counter is a decrement counter that counts the number of plays during the AT (including ART). Unlike the favorable zone clear counter, when the AT play count counter becomes "0", it stops counting (subtracting) thereafter.
The AT game count counter is updated (decremented) during the AT after the start switch 41 is operated during the main processing (step S281 in FIG. 41 described later).

In this embodiment, the initial value of the number of AT games may exceed "255 (D)", so the AT game counter is configured as a 2-byte counter. When the number of AT games is a maximum of "255 (D)" or less, the AT game counter may be configured as a 1-byte counter.
When the AT is started (or when the state transitions to AT preparation), an initial value is set in the AT play count counter. The initial value may be a fixed value, or may be determined by lottery or the like when the AT is won. Also, after the initial value is determined, the number of AT plays may be updated to "0" without being changed thereafter. Alternatively, when a predetermined condition is met during the AT, the number of AT plays may be increased, and when a lottery for adding the number of AT plays is won, the number of AT plays may be increased. In this case, the increase is added to the AT play count counter.
This AT game count counter is also included in the data that is cleared at the end of the advantageous period.

In this embodiment, since a game number management type AT is exemplified, an AT play count counter is provided. Therefore, in the case of a difference number management type AT, an AT difference number counter is provided instead of an AT play count counter. Then, when the AT starts, an initial value of the difference number of coins that can be obtained is set. Also, when an additional coin is won, the additional difference number is added. Then, each time a payout is made, the difference number of coins for that play is subtracted, and when the AT difference number counter becomes "0", the AT ends.

Next, each process during a game will be explained using a flowchart.
38 is a flow chart showing a program start process (M_PRG_START) by the main control board 50. When the power is turned on, execution begins with the program start process of FIG.
38, when the program is started in step S201, the main control board 50 initializes the registers in the next step S202. Specific processing includes, for example, setting the communication speed of the serial communication circuit provided in the main CPU 55, setting the type of interrupt (for example, setting it to a maskable interrupt), and setting the parity bit to be added to the control command to be transmitted (for example, setting it to even parity). In other words, initial values required for the slot machine 10 to operate normally are set in various registers.

Then, proceeding to step S203, the main control board 50 judges whether the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value. In this embodiment, when the power is turned off, the power-off processing completed flag is stored (step S484 in FIG. 54 described later). This power-off processing completed flag is a flag for judging whether the previous power-off was performed normally when the power is turned on. Then, if it is judged that the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value, proceeding to step S204, and if it is judged that the power-off processing completed flag is not a normal value, proceeding to step S206.

In step S204, a checksum is calculated for the RWM 53. Specifically, a checksum is calculated for the same range (for example, a work area, an unused area, and a stack area used by a program) as the checksum for the RWM 53 calculated during the power-off process.
In step S205, it is determined whether the range of the RWM 53 for which the checksum is to be calculated is complete. Specifically, the next address is specified from the address of the RWM 53 for which the current checksum is calculated, and it is determined whether the next address is an address for which the checksum is to be calculated. If it is determined that the checksum calculation is not complete, the process returns to step S204 to continue. On the other hand, if it is determined that the range of the RWM 53 for which the checksum is to be calculated is complete, the process proceeds to step S206.

Furthermore, in the subsequent processing, when data stored in multiple ranges (addresses) of the RWM 53 is to be initialized, the same processing is executed in the specified range of the RWM 53 in this embodiment.
If it is determined in step S203 that the power-off processing completion flag is not a normal value, the checksum calculation of the RWM 53 is not performed, and an abnormal value is set as the power-off recovery data.

In step S206, the main control board 50 stores the power interruption recovery data in a specified register (e.g., register B). If the power interruption processing completed flag is a normal value and it is determined that the RWM 53 checksum calculation (full range) has ended normally, the normal value is stored as the power interruption recovery data. On the other hand, if the power interruption processing completed flag is an abnormal value ("No" in step S203), or if it is determined that an abnormality occurred during the RWM 53 checksum calculation (full range) in step S204, the abnormal value is stored as the power interruption recovery data.

In the next step S207, the level data of the specified input port 51 is stored in a specified register (for example, register A). Next, the process proceeds to step S208, where it is determined whether or not the designated switch is on based on the level data of the specified input port 51. Here, the "designated switch" refers to, in this embodiment, three of the signals of the specified input port 51: a door switch (a switch that is turned on when the front door 12 (housing) is opened), a setting door switch (a door provided on the setting key switch; the setting door is not necessary), and a setting key switch (a switch that is turned on when the setting key is inserted and rotated in a specified direction).

The setting change is permitted only when the door switch signal is on (the front door 12 is open), the setting door switch signal is on (the setting door is open), and the setting key switch signal is on. When all three designated switches are on, the process can proceed to the setting change process of step S212, but when at least one designated switch is not on, the process does not permit the process to proceed to the setting change process of step S212.
In other words, even if the door switch signal is off (the front door 12 is closed) or the setting door switch signal is off (the setting door is closed), it is impossible for the setting key switch signal to be on, which creates a high possibility of fraud, and therefore transition to setting change processing is not permitted.

Therefore, if it is determined in step S208 that all the designated switches are on, the process proceeds to step S209, and if it is determined that all the designated switches are not on, the process proceeds to step S211.
In step S209, the main control board 50 judges whether the power interruption recovery data is abnormal or not. This power interruption recovery data is the data stored in the register in step S206.

If it is determined that the power failure recovery data is abnormal, the process proceeds to step S212 for setting change processing (M_RANK_SET), and if it is determined that the power failure recovery data is not abnormal, the process proceeds to step S210. In step S210, it is determined whether or not a setting change disable flag is on. Here, the setting change disable flag is one of the data stored in the RWM 53, and is a flag that is disabled during the period from the start switch acceptance processing (step S279) to the game end check processing (step S301) in FIG. 41, which will be described later. If the setting change disable flag is on, the process proceeds to step S211, and if it is not on, the process proceeds to step S212 for setting change processing (M_RANK_SET).
In this embodiment, the setting change disable flag is provided, but if the setting is configured to be changeable at all times, the setting change disable flag need not be provided. In that case, the process corresponding to step S210 is not required.

In step S211, the main control board 50 determines whether the power interruption recovery data is a normal value. This process is equivalent to step S209. If it is determined that the power interruption recovery data is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S213 and performs power recovery processing (M_POWER_ON). In contrast, if it is determined that the power interruption recovery data is not a normal value, an "E1" error occurs, and the process proceeds to step S214 and performs unrecoverable error processing.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in step S212 of FIG.
First, in step S221, a "predetermined range" is stored in a register as an initialization range within the use area of the RWM 53. Here, "within the use area" refers to an area within the memory area of the RWM 53 for storing data related to the progress of the game. The ranges shown in FIG. 35 are all within the use area. In contrast, "outside the use area" described below refers to an area within the memory area of the RWM 53 for storing data unrelated to the progress of the game. Specifically, this includes a memory area that stores data related to the display of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor).

In addition, the "predetermined range" is the initialization range when it is determined that the power-off process has been executed normally, and the initialization range in which the setting value data (address "F000(H)"), game status (for example, RT status), flags of special roles that have been won, etc. are not initialized is defined as the "predetermined range."
Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment described later, if BB2 was in operation (the winning flag of BB2 is on) before the power was turned off, and the power was turned off normally, the winning flag of BB2 will be maintained even if the setting change process is executed.
On the other hand, the "predetermined range" does not include data related to the advantageous zone or AT. Therefore, in FIG. 35, addresses "F061(H)" to "F068(H)" are the targets of initialization.

Next, the process proceeds to step S222, where the main control board 50 judges whether the power interruption recovery data (the value stored in step S206) is a normal value. If it is judged that the power interruption recovery data is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S224, where the "predetermined range" stored in step S221 is maintained. On the other hand, if it is judged in step S222 that the power interruption recovery data is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S223.
In step S223, the main control board 50 stores the "specific range" in the register as the initialization range within the usage area of the RWM 53. Here, the "specific range" is the initialization range when it is determined that the power cut is not normal, and is the entire range within the usage area including the setting value data (address "F000(H)").

Then, the process proceeds to step S224, where initialization of the predetermined range set in step S221 or the specific range set in step S223 (within the area used by RWM53) begins. In the next step S225, it is determined whether the initialization started in step S224 has ended. If it is determined that the initialization has ended, the process proceeds to step S226.

In step S226, the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) is saved. The AF register is saved because, although it would normally be the F (flag) register that is wanted to be saved, the AF register is saved instead due to the nature of the command. Then, the process proceeds to step S227, where a specified range outside the area in use is stored as the initialization range of RWM53. The "specified range" is the initialization range when it is determined that the power-off process has been performed normally.

In the next step S228, similar to step S222, it is determined whether the power interruption recovery data (the value stored in step S206) is a normal value. If it is determined that the power interruption recovery data is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S230, where the "predetermined range" stored in step S227 is maintained. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S228 that the power interruption recovery data is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S229.
In step S229, the main control board 50 stores the "specific range" in the register as the initialization range outside the use area of the RWM 53. Here, the "specific range" is the initialization range when it is determined that the power outage is not normal, and is the entire range including the ring buffer that stores the number of games played and the number of payouts for displaying the ratio.
Then, the process proceeds to step S230, where initialization of the predetermined range set in step S227 or the specific range set in step S229 (outside the area used by the RWM 53) begins.

In the next step S231, it is determined whether the initialization started in step S230 has been completed. If it is determined that the initialization has been completed, the process proceeds to step S232.
In step S232, the AF register saved in step S226 is restored. In the next step S233, the start-up setting of the interrupt process is performed. Here, various registers corresponding to the interrupt process specified in step S202 are set. In this embodiment, timer interrupt process is used as the interrupt process, so a process for setting the timer interrupt period (in this embodiment, "2.235 ms") is included. Then, after the process of step S233, the interrupt process is executed. In other words, the interrupt process is configured not to be executed before "interrupt activation".
In the next step S234, an output request for starting the setting change is set. This is a process for setting (storing) in a register a control command to be sent to the sub-control board 80 in order to notify the sub-control board 80 that the setting change process is about to start.

The term "output request set" refers to a process of setting a control command to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80. The control command here does not only refer to a command that is actually transmitted, but also refers to a command that is the source of the command that is actually transmitted.
Next, the process proceeds to step S235, where the main control board 50 executes control command set 1. This process is a process for storing control commands to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in the control command buffer (RWM 53).

Next, the process proceeds to step S236, where the main control board 50 executes a 2-byte time wait process (wait process) for when the setting change begins. In this embodiment, it waits until the interrupt count of "224" is counted (1 is subtracted for each interrupt count, and the set interrupt count becomes "0"). This wait is also called a delay process or standby process, as it does not allow the main process to proceed. During this wait time (during the 2-byte time wait process), the main process is prevented from proceeding, but the interrupt process is executed.

The reason why the 2-byte time wait process (wait process) is executed in step S236 is that the initialization process of the RWM 53 on the main control board 50 is completed in a relatively short time, whereas the initialization process of the RWM 83 on the sub-control board 80 takes time, and therefore the 2-byte time wait process is executed on the main control board 50. In particular, this is because the main control board 50 has no way of knowing whether the initialization process on the sub-control board 80 has been completed.

Therefore, while the initialization process is still in progress on the sub-control board 80 side, the initialization process has already been completed on the main control board 50 side and further processing is progressing, which can prevent the progress of the control processing on the main control board 50 from becoming unsynchronized with the progress of the control processing on the sub-control board 80.
After the output request set and control command set 1 are executed at the start of the setting change, the sub-control board 80 starts initializing the RWM 83, but a wait time is set that is long enough for the initialization of the RWM 83 to finish. This allows the main control board 50 to proceed to the processing of step S238 and subsequent steps after the initialization process of the RWM 83 is finished on the sub-control board 80 side.

The control command set in steps S234 and S235 at the start of the setting change is sent to the sub-control board 80 even during the 2-byte time wait process in step S236. However, while the 2-byte time wait process is being executed in step S236, the process does not proceed to step S237 and subsequent steps (the main process does not proceed).

After the 2-byte time wait process in step S236 is completed, the process proceeds to step S237, where the setting change display data is stored as the number of acquisitions data. Next, the process proceeds to step S238, where the value "00011100 (B)" corresponding to the setting change is stored in the LED display request flag.

The processes in steps S237 and S238 enable the lighting of digits 3a, 4a, and 5b (acquired number display LED 78 and set value display LED 73) when an interrupt process is executed after these processes.
Specifically, in the interrupt processing executed after step S238, "8" can be displayed in digits 3a and 4a ("88" can be displayed in the acquisition number display LED 78), and the current setting value can be displayed in digit b5 (setting value display LED 73).
Incidentally, since the acquired number data and the LED display request flag have been initialized by the initialization process in the use area of the RWM 53 in step S224, the values thereof before step S237 are "0".

Next, the process proceeds to step S239, where an interrupt wait process is executed. This process waits until one interrupt time (2.235 ms) has elapsed. After one interrupt time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S240.
In step S240, it is determined whether or not operation of a setting change switch (not shown in FIG. 1) has been detected. Here, it is determined whether or not the setting change switch has been turned on by judging rising edge data of the input port 51 that includes the setting change switch. If it is determined that operation of the setting change switch has been detected, the process proceeds to step S241, and if it is determined that operation has not been detected, the process proceeds to step S242.
In step S241, the setting value data (address "F000(H)") of the RWM 53 is stored (updated). When an interrupt process is executed after the setting value data is updated, the setting value display LED 73 displays the updated value.

In the next step S242, it is determined whether or not operation of the start switch 41 has been detected. In this embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated during a setting change, the setting value at that time is confirmed.
If it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S243, and if it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S239.

In the above process, step S239 (wait for interrupt) is provided to clear the rising edge data of the setting change switch.
For example, if the processing of step S239 is not provided, when it is determined in step S240 that the rising data of the setting change switch is on, the setting value data is updated in step S241, and when it is determined in the next step S242 that the start switch 41 is not on, the process proceeds to step S240, where it is determined whether the rising data of the setting change switch is on or not.

If the setting change switch is determined to be on in step S240 and an interrupt process is executed even once, the rising data of the setting change switch will be turned off. However, until an interrupt process is executed, the rising data of the setting change switch will continue to be determined to be on in step S240. As a result, the setting value data will continue to increase by "2" or more even if the setting change switch is operated only once. Therefore, in step S239, an interrupt wait process is executed.

In step S243, it is determined whether the setting key switch (not shown in FIG. 1) has been turned off. If it is determined that the setting key switch has been turned off, the process proceeds to step S244, where the acquisition count data is cleared (set to "0"). This is to erase the display of "88", which indicates that the setting is being changed. Next, the process proceeds to step S245, where the value "00011111 (B)", which corresponds to the normal state, is stored in the LED display request flag.

Due to the interrupt process executed after the process of step S244, the display of digits 3a and 4a (acquired number display LED 78) changes from "88" to "00".
Furthermore, the interrupt process executed after the process of step S245 causes digits 1a and 2a to display "0" (the credit number display LED 76 displays "00"). Also, since the bit corresponding to digit 5 of the LED display request flag is "1", digit 5a (status display LED 79) can be lit. In contrast, digit 5b (setting value display LED 73) does not light up because the setting is not being changed or confirmed.

Next, the process proceeds to step S246, where an output request is set at the end of the setting change, similar to step S234. This process sets a control command to notify the sub-control board 80 of the end of the setting change process and the data corresponding to the determined setting value (specifically, the setting value data stored at address "F000(H)"). Next, the process proceeds to step S247, where the main control board 50 executes control command set 1, similar to step S235. Then, the process proceeds to step S248, where the process transitions to main processing (M_MAIN).

FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing the power return process (M_POWER_ON) of step S213 in FIG.
First, in step S251, the stack pointer (SP register) is restored. Here, the stack pointer refers to an area (address) of the RWM 53 that stores data at the time of power interruption (e.g., register values, command processing of the main processing before the interrupt processing, etc.) and that indicates the next area (address) to be stacked when power interruption occurs.
In the next step S252, the set value data is read and it is determined whether the set value data is within the normal range (whether it is within the range of set value 1 to set value 6), in other words, whether the set value data of "F000(H)" is within the range of "0(H)" to "5(H)". If it is determined that the set value data is within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S253, and if it is determined that the set value data is not within the normal range, an "E6" error occurs, and the process proceeds to step S264, where the process moves to unrecoverable error processing.

When the process proceeds to step S253, an unused area within the used area of the RWM 53 is set in a register as an initialization range. Then, in the next step S254, initialization of the RWM 53 is performed for the range set in step S253. Here, it is possible that a value may be stored in the RWM 53 due to noise or the like, even in an unused area. If a value is stored in an unused area, this may lead to fraudulent behavior, etc. Therefore, the unused area is initialized when the power is turned on (normally once a day).
In the next step S255, it is determined whether or not the initialization of the RWM 53 (unused area in the used area) is completed, and if it is determined that the initialization is completed, the process proceeds to step S256.

In step S256, the AF register is saved. This process is the same as the process in step S226 described above. In the next step S257, the initialization range of the unused area outside the used area of the RWM 53 is set in the register. Then, in the next step S258, the initialization of the RWM 53 is executed for the range set in step S257.
In the next step S259, it is determined whether the initialization of the RWM 53 (unused area outside the used area) is completed, and if it is determined that the initialization is completed, the process proceeds to step S260. In step S260, the AF register is restored. This process is the same as the process in step S232 described above.

In the next step S261, the CPU 10 reads data from a predetermined input port 51. This process is for updating each data item (level data, rising edge data, falling edge data) of the input port 51 before the power is turned off to the latest data.
Next, the process proceeds to step S262, where an interrupt is started. This process is, for example, a process for setting a timer interrupt period, and is the same process as step S233 described above.
Next, the flow proceeds to step S263, where the power-off processing completion flag is cleared, i.e., set to "0." Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

In the above program start process, setting change process, and power recovery process,
1) In the program start process of Fig. 38, if the determination in step S203 is "No" (the power-off processing completed flag is an abnormal value) or if an abnormality occurs during the checksum calculation in step S204, the abnormal value is stored as power-off recovery data in step S206. In this case, the determination in step S209 is "Yes", so the process proceeds to the setting change process of step S212 (Fig. 39).
Then, in the setting change process of FIG. 39, since the results of steps S222 and S228 are "No," the entire range of data both inside and outside the used area of RWM 53 is initialized, that is, all data from "F000(H)" onwards is initialized.

2) In the program start process, if the power-off processing flag is determined to be a normal value and the checksum calculation is also performed normally, when proceeding to the setting change process, "Yes" is determined in steps S222 and S228 in FIG. 39, so the process proceeds to steps S224 and S230, respectively, and the specified range of RWM53 (within the used area and outside the used area) is initialized.

3) In the program start process, if the power off processing flag is determined to be a normal value, the checksum calculation is also performed normally, and the setting change processing is not performed, the process proceeds to the power recovery processing of step S213 (Figure 40). In this case, in Figure 40, if the setting value is normal in step S252, the initialization of RWM53 (inside and outside the used area) that occurs when the power is normally turned on is performed. As described above, this initialization is a process of initializing the unused area of RWM53.

41 is a flow chart showing the main process (M_MAIN) in this embodiment. The main process is a process for one game. During the progress of a game, the main process is repeated for each game.
First, in step S271, a stack pointer is set. As described above, the stack pointer refers to an area of the RWM 53 that stores data at the time of power failure (e.g., register values, instruction processing of the main processing before the interrupt processing, etc.) when a power failure occurs, and setting the stack pointer is a process of setting register values to initial values in the area of the RWM 53.

In the next step S272, a game start setting process (M_GAME_SET) is performed. This process is the process shown in Fig. 42, which will be described later, and is a process for generating, updating, storing, etc. of an operating state flag.
In the next step S273, the bet medals are read in. This is a process for reading the number of medals currently bet, and the bet number data or the automatic bet number data is read.
In the next step S274, it is determined whether or not there are any bet medals based on the number of bets read in step S273.

If it is determined in step S274 that there are bet medals, the process proceeds to step S276, and if it is determined that there are no bet medals, the process proceeds to step S275 to wait for medal insertion, and then proceeds to step S276. The medal insertion waiting process in step S275 determines whether or not the setting key switch is on, and if it is on, processes such as transitioning to a setting confirmation mode are performed.
In step S276, a management process for the inserted medals is carried out. This process includes determining whether the medals have been handled and whether the settlement switch 43 has been operated.

In the next step S277, a software random number update process is performed. This process updates (for example, adds "1" at a time) the random number for processing (calculation process) to a random number (hard random number or built-in random number) used by the role selection means 61. The software random number is a 16-bit random number with a range of "0" to "65535 (D)". As an update method, a process of adding an interrupt count value (a count value (variable) that is incremented at the time of an interrupt) to the value before the update may be executed.

In the next step S278, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. If it determines that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S279, and if it determines that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S273. Note that even if the start switch 41 has been operated, if the number of bets has not reached the specified number for the game, the determination in step S278 is "No."

In step S279, the process for when the start switch is accepted is executed, which includes setting a setting change unchangeable flag, setting an output request at the start of rotation of the reels 31, and setting the number of outputs for outputting a medal insertion signal as an external signal to the hall computer or the like.
In the next step S280, the winning number data is cleared. Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated, even if the instruction specified number display data and payout number data have been stored as the winning number data before, they are cleared.
Here, although details will be described later, in the twelfth embodiment, before the start of a game, a specified number may be indicated (displayed) on the acquisition number display LED 78. Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated, specified number display data may be stored as acquisition number data. Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated, this acquisition number data is cleared, and a process is executed to display "00" on the acquisition number display LED 78 (or to turn it off).
Furthermore, if payout number data from the previous game is stored as the winning number data at the time of step S280, the payout number data is cleared in this step S280.

Next, the process proceeds to step S281, and the main control board 50 executes an update process of the number of AT games. This process is the process shown in FIG. 43 described later, and is a process of subtracting the number of AT games when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the AT. Therefore, this process is not executed during non-AT.
In addition, whether or not to add to the AT game count during the AT is determined based on the result of the role lottery process in step S282. For example, when a rare role is won, the number of additional AT games is determined. Therefore, when the number of AT games is added and the additional amount is added to the AT game count counter, it is executed after the process of step S282 (not shown in FIG. 41).
After the start switch is accepted (step S279), the AT game count counter is updated in step S281. However, this is not limited to the above, and the AT game count counter may be updated after the role selection process in step S282 or after all reels 31 have stopped (after step S290).
In addition, in the specifications of the difference number management type AT, if it has an AT difference number counter, the AT difference number counter is updated after all reels 31 have stopped and the medal payout process due to a winning combination has been completed (after step S300).

In step S282, the role selection means 61 executes a role selection (corresponding to the "internal selection" described above) at the timing when the start switch 41 is operated, i.e., when an operation signal of the start switch 41 is received. The random number value at the time of role selection is acquired in step S279. Then, in step S282, a process is performed to determine whether the acquired random number value is a random number value corresponding to any of the winning roles using the role selection table.

In the next step S283, the main control board 50 executes a lottery process for transition to a favorable zone. This process is the process of FIG. 44 described later. In this embodiment, when the lottery for transition to a favorable zone is executed, an AT lottery is also executed. As shown in FIG. 44 described later, when the player is in a favorable zone but not in an AT (for example, when the main game state is a CZ), an AT lottery process is executed in step S348 in FIG. 44.
Next, the process proceeds to step S284, and the push order instruction number is set (M_ORD_INF). This process is the process shown in FIG. 48, and is a process for generating push order instruction numbers and displaying push order instruction information when the instruction function is activated in the game during the AT (displaying the push order instruction number on the acquisition number display LED 78).

In the next step S285, a reel spin start preparation process is executed, which includes a process of determining whether or not the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) has elapsed, and if the minimum game time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step S286.
Here, the RWM 53 is provided with an area for storing the timer value of the minimum play time (not shown in FIG. 35), and the initial value is "1834 (D) (2.235 ms x 1834 ≈ 4099 ms)." If it is determined in step S279 that the minimum play time is "0," the initial value "1834 (D)" is set as the minimum play time (timer value). Then, the minimum play time is decremented by "1" for each interrupt process. When the process proceeds to step S285 for the next game, it is determined whether the minimum play time is "0," and if it is determined that the minimum play time is "0," the process proceeds to step S286.

In step S286, the reel control means 65 controls the driving of the motor 32 to start the rotation of the reel 31. Then, when the reel 31 reaches a constant speed state, the operation of the stop switch 42 is permitted to be accepted, and the process proceeds to step S287.
In step S287, the acceptance of stopping the reel 31 is checked. Here, it is detected whether or not an operation signal of the stop switch 42 has been received, and when an operation signal has been received, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the lottery result of the winning combination and the position of the reel 31, and the reel 31 is controlled to stop at the determined position.

In the next step S288, the reel control means 65 checks whether all the reels 31 have stopped and proceeds to step S289. In step S289, it is determined whether all the reels 31 have stopped, and if it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped, it proceeds to step S290, and if it is determined that all the reels 31 have not stopped, it returns to step S287.

In step S290, the acquisition number data is cleared (set to "0"). For example, during AT, the instruction function may be activated, causing the acquisition number display LED 78 to display push order instruction information (e.g., "=1"). In this case, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 becomes "00" due to the interrupt process executed after the process of step S290.
It is also possible to turn off the acquisition number display LED 78. Specifically, "00010011(B)" may be stored in the LED display request flag, or data for turning off the LED 78 may be provided as segment data and the data may be output.

In step S291, a symbol display determination is performed. Here, the winning determination means 66 determines whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination has stopped on an active line.
In the next step S292, it is determined whether or not a display error has occurred in the pattern. If it is determined that a display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S304, and if it is determined that a display error has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S293.
Here, the reel 31 is stopped based on the stop position determination table, so that the reel 31 does not normally stop at a position other than that determined by the stop position determination table. However, when a pattern that should not be displayed (a kicking pattern) is displayed on an active line as a result of the pattern display determination, it is determined to be abnormal (an "E5" error), and the process proceeds to step S304 to execute an unrecoverable error process.

If it is determined in step S292 that no display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S293, where an update process for the payout number is executed. This process is a process for storing the payout number for the game in question as the payout number data and the payout number data buffer.
In the next step S294, the payout means 67 pays out medals (M_WIN_PAY) corresponding to the winning combination. This process is shown in FIG. 49, which will be described later. Next, the process proceeds to step S295, where an interrupt waiting process is performed. In the next step S296, the interrupt process is inhibited. By the processes of steps S295 and S296, the interrupt is inhibited immediately after the interrupt.

In the next step S297, the AF register is saved. This process is the same as step S256 in FIG. 40. Next, the process proceeds to step S298, where the ratio set process is executed. This "ratio set process" is a process that updates various counter values and calculates ratios in order to display five types of ratios on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor). Then, in step S299, the AF register saved in step S297 is restored, and in the next step S300, interrupts are permitted (resumed). In this way, when the ratio set process is executed, the AF register is saved and interrupts are prohibited before it is executed.

Interrupt processing is prohibited while the ratio set processing is being executed because the ratio set processing is a process that uses a program stored outside the usage area, and if an interrupt processing occurs while the main processing is executing a program outside the usage area, the program inside the usage area and the program outside the usage area will be mixed, complicating the processing.

Next, the process proceeds to step S301, where a game end check process (_M_GAME_CHK) is performed. This process is the process shown in FIG. 50, which will be described later, and includes clearing the condition device (winning combination) flag, etc. Then, the process proceeds to step S302, where an output request is set at the end of the game, and in the next step S303, a control command is set 1. These processes are processes for setting control command data for transmitting to the sub-control board 80 the fact that one game has ended.
When the process of step S303 ends, the process returns to the beginning of the main process (step S248).

FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing the game start setting process (M_GAME_SET) in step S272 in FIG.
First, in step S311, the game standby display time is set (stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 (not shown in FIG. 35)). Since the game standby display time in this embodiment is set to "26846" interrupts (≈60000 ms, i.e., about 60 seconds (1 minute)), "26846" is set in the predetermined storage area of the RWM 53. When the game standby display time is set in step S301, the value is decremented by "1" for each interrupt process from this point on.

When the game standby display time becomes "0", in step S275 (waiting for medal insertion) in Fig. 41, the acquired number data is cleared. As a result, "00" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. For example, even if the number of medals paid out in the previous game was "8" and the player operates the settlement switch 43 to settle the account and end the game, "00" will be displayed about one minute later. This has the effect of reducing the number of vacant machines by allowing the hall staff or other players to recognize the machine as an empty machine.
Note that the display of the number of winnings display LED 78 is not limited to "00", and the number of winnings display LED 78 (higher and lower digits) may be turned off, or the higher digits of the number of winnings display LED 78 may be turned off and the lower digits may display "0". In any case, it is sufficient to execute a display that allows a hall staff member or another player to recognize that the machine is vacant.

Next, the process proceeds to step S312, where an initialization process for the push order instruction numbers is executed. This process is a process for clearing the push order instruction numbers stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.
In the next step S313, the data of the symbol combination display flag is obtained. In the next step S314, it is determined whether or not the 1BB operation symbol is displayed. In this process, if the D2 bit corresponding to 1BB in the symbol combination display flag data is "1", it is determined as "Yes", and if it is "0", it is determined as "No". If it is determined that the 1BB operation symbol is displayed, the process proceeds to step S315, and if it is determined that the 1BB operation symbol is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S316.

In step S315, the number of coins that can be won during 1BB operation (1BB game) is saved. This process is a process of storing the maximum number of coins that can be won during 1BB game in a predetermined storage area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to step S316.
In step S316, an operation status flag is generated. This process is a process for generating a value of the operation status flag based on the symbol combination display flag.
Furthermore, in the next step S317, the operation status flag is updated, and in the next step S318, the operation status flag is stored. This process is a process of storing the generated operation status flag (which is stored in the A register, for example, at this point) at address "F030(H)" of the RWM 53. As a result, the information of the operation status flag up to that point is replaced with the information of the operation status flag updated in step S317.
For example, when a 1BB symbol combination is displayed (when 1BB is won), the D2 bit corresponding to 1BB in the operation status flag changes from "0" to "1."

In the next step S319, it is determined whether RB operation has started. In this embodiment, in 1BB play, the RB operation flag is turned off ("0") at the end of 2 games (or when two wins are made), but if the end conditions of 1BB play are not met (if the D2 bit corresponding to 1BB in the operation status flag is "1"), it is set to "1" in this game start set process. If it is determined in step S319 that RB operation has started, the process proceeds to step S320, and if it is determined that RB operation has not started, the process proceeds to step S321.

In step S320, the number of games played and the number of wins when the RB is activated are saved. This process saves (stores) "2 (H)" in the number of games played when the RB is activated counter (not shown in FIG. 35) provided in the RWM 53, and saves (stores) "2 (H)" in the number of wins when the RB is activated counter (not shown in FIG. 35) provided in the RWM 53. Then, proceed to step S321.

The number of games played when the RB is activated and the number of wins won when the RB is activated are both set to an initial value of "2 (H)" and are decremented by "1" each time the number of games played or the number of wins increases by "1". However, this is not limited to the above, and the initial value of these counter values may be set to "0" and incremented by "1" each time the number of games played or the number of wins increases by "1", and it may be determined whether these counter values have reached "2 (H)".

In the next step S321, it is determined whether or not the condition for specifying a prescribed number is met. In the eleventh embodiment, there is no case where a prescribed number is specified. However, in the twelfth embodiment described later, there is a case where a prescribed number is specified at the start of a game, and therefore this process is included in this flowchart. If it is determined that the condition for specifying a prescribed number is met, the process proceeds to step S322, and if it is determined that the condition for specifying a prescribed number is not met, the process proceeds to step S323.
In step S322, the designated specified number display data is stored as the acquisition number data. In the twelfth embodiment, there is a case where the specified number "2" is designated, and when the specified number "2" is designated, "0A" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. The designated specified number display data for displaying "0A" is set to "0B(H)" (details will be described later), and in this step S322, "0B(H)" is stored as the acquisition number data.
In addition, when displaying the specified number "2", it is displayed as "0A" instead of "02" to avoid confusion with the payout number, error number, and push order instruction information.
The payout number is displayed as any of "01" to "15", and the lower digits will never have "A" displayed. Also, error numbers will never have "A" displayed in the lower digits.

Here, the error numbers (numbers displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 when an error occurs) in this embodiment are as follows:
HP: Medal jam error HE: Medal empty error (no medals in hopper 35)
H0: Abnormality in the payout sensor 37 CE: Medal retention error CP: Illegal medal passage error CH: Abnormality in the passage sensor 46 C0: Abnormality in the insertion sensor 44 C1: Abnormal medal insertion error FE: Subtank (not shown in FIG. 1) full dE: Front door open E1: Power interruption recovery abnormality E5: Display judgment error E6: Setting value abnormal E7: Random number error

The types of errors are not limited to those mentioned above. An error whose most significant digit in the error number is "E" indicates an unrecoverable error.
As described above, there is no case where an "A" is displayed in the lowest digit of an error number, so there is no confusion between the error number and the specified number.
In addition, the push order instruction information displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 by the operation of the instruction function is "=1" to "=6". Therefore, there is no confusion between the push order instruction information and the instruction specified number.

In addition, in step S322, before the command specified number display data is stored as the acquired number data, the payout number data from the previous game may be stored as the acquired number data (if a small winning combination was won in the previous game). The payout number data is stored in step S399 of the medal payout process for winning (FIG. 49 described later). Therefore, when the command specified number display data is stored, it may overwrite the previous payout number data. However, this is not limited to the above, and a process of clearing the acquired number data may be provided before step S322 (for example, immediately before step S311).

In the next step S323, it is determined whether or not the replay symbol combination has been displayed as stopped based on the symbol combination display flag obtained in step S313. If it is determined that the replay symbol combination has been displayed as stopped, the process proceeds to step S324, and if it is determined that the replay symbol combination has not been displayed as stopped, the process proceeds to step S326.

In step S324, the main control board 50 reads the bet medals. This process is a process of reading the number of medals bet in the previous game (bet number data). Next, the process proceeds to step S325, where the automatic bet number data is set. This process is a process of storing the bet number read in step S324 in the automatic bet number data.
Next, the process proceeds to step S326, where an output request for the operating state is set. In the next step S327, the control command set 1 is executed. Specifically, information indicating that the replay or 1BB has been activated is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

Note that previously (meaning before the filing of this application, not "publicly known"; the same applies below), when the number of bets was being added, specifically, during the main processing in Fig. 41, during the medal management processing in step S276, the winning number data was cleared. As a result, even if a small win was won in the previous game and the payout number data at the time of the small win was stored as the winning number data, the winning number data was cleared when the number of bets was being added.
However, in this embodiment, when the condition for specifying the specified number is met before the medal management process is executed, specified specified number display data is stored as acquired number data.
When the specified number is specified, it is necessary to prevent the specified number display data from being cleared during bet processing. In this embodiment, when the specified number is specified, the specified number is maintained in the specified number state at least until the start switch 41 is operated.
Therefore, in this embodiment, the medal management process does not execute the process of clearing the acquired number data, and when the start switch 41 is operated, the acquired number data is cleared in the process of step S280 in FIG.

However, this is not limited to the above, and when a specified number is specified, the specified number display data is cleared after the start switch 41 is operated, but when a specified number is not specified, the acquired number data may be cleared when the bet number is added (by the medal management process) as before. In this case, for example, in the bet number addition process, before executing the acquired number data clearing process, it is determined whether or not a specified number has been specified in the current game, and if it is determined that a specified number has been specified, the acquired number data is not cleared, and if it is determined that a specified number has not been specified, the acquired number data is cleared.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the AT game count counter update process in step S281 in FIG.
First, in step S331, it is determined whether the AT flag is on ("1"). If it is determined that the AT flag is on, the process proceeds to step S332, and if it is determined that the AT flag is not on, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. In other words, if the AT is not in progress, the AT game count counter is not updated.

In step S332, it is determined whether the number of bets is "3". This process reads the bet number data or automatic bet number data of the RWM 53 and determines whether the number of bets for the game is "3". If the number of bets is "3", the process proceeds to step S333, and if the number of bets is not "3", the process according to this flowchart is terminated. In this embodiment, the AT game count counter is updated (processing related to the instruction function is executed) only when a game is played with a bet number (prescribed number) of "3" during the AT. In other words, even during the AT, when a game is started with a bet number (prescribed number) of "2", the AT game count counter is not updated.
In contrast, as described below, the advantageous zone clear counter and the difference counter are updated regardless of the number of bets.

When the process proceeds to step S333, the main control board 50 subtracts "1" from the value of the AT game number counter. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
In the case of a difference number management type AT, when an AT difference number counter is provided, the AT difference number counter is not subtracted (updated) even during the AT if the bet number is not "3".

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the advantageous zone transition lottery processing in step S283 in FIG.
In this embodiment, the AT lottery process (step S348) is provided in the advantageous zone transition lottery process, but this is not limited to this, and the advantageous zone transition lottery process and the AT lottery process may be executed independently. For example, in FIG. 41, step S283 may be only the advantageous zone transition lottery process, and the AT lottery process may be executed after step S283.
First, in step S341, it is determined whether or not the number of bets (prescribed number) for the current game is 3. If it is determined that the number of bets is 3, the process proceeds to step S342, and if it is determined that the number of bets is not 3, the process according to this flowchart ends.
Therefore, when the number of bets (prescribed number) is "3", the advantageous zone transition lottery in step S345 and the advantageous zone transition process (processing related to the advantageous zone) in step S347 described later can be executed, and the AT lottery process (processing related to the instruction function) in step S348 can be executed. However, when the number of bets (prescribed number) is not "3", these processes are not executed.

In step S342, it is determined whether the advantageous zone type flag is "0". If it is determined that the advantageous zone type flag is "0" (non-advantageous zone), the process proceeds to step S343, and if it is determined that the advantageous zone type flag is "1" (advantageous zone), the process proceeds to step S348. If the advantageous zone type flag is "1" (already in an advantageous zone), a lottery for transition to an advantageous zone is not held, but an AT lottery is held.

In step S343, it is determined whether the result of the role selection in the current game is the target result, that is, whether the player has won the role that is the target of the advantageous zone. Although detailed explanation is omitted here, the target result is determined to be the case when, for example, a special role is selected alone, a special role and a small role are selected together, or a small role (rare small role) is selected. In addition, the target result does not include non-winning results. This is because the processing related to the advantageous zone is not executed in a game in which the role is not selected (a game in which the condition device is not activated).
If it is determined in step S343 that the result is the target lottery result, then proceed to step S344; if it is determined that the result is not the target lottery result, then the processing according to this flowchart is terminated (i.e., the advantageous zone lottery is not conducted, or the result is determined to be a non-winning advantageous zone).

In step S344, it is determined whether the target lottery result is a specific lottery result. Here, a detailed explanation is omitted, but for example, among the roles to be drawn, the middle cherry (single win or double win with a special role) is set as a fixed role (a role that is sure to win) in the advantageous zone transition lottery, and when the middle cherry is won, it is determined to be a specific lottery result.
If it is determined in step S344 that the result is a specific lottery result, the process proceeds to step S347, and if it is determined that the result is not a specific lottery result, the process proceeds to step S345. In other words, if the result is not a specific lottery result, a favorable zone transition lottery is held, and if the result is a specific lottery result, the favorable zone transition process (step S347) is executed without holding a favorable zone transition lottery (always transitioning to the favorable zone). Note that even if the result is a specific lottery result, it is possible to execute a favorable zone transition lottery and set the system so that there is a 100% chance of winning the favorable zone transition lottery.

In step S345, a lottery for moving to an advantageous zone is performed. For example, a lottery for moving to an advantageous zone may be performed in the same manner as the lottery for a role, using a lottery table in which the number of pieces according to the result of the lottery for a role is predetermined. For example, the probability of winning the advantageous zone with the winning number "A" is 35%, the probability of winning the advantageous zone with the winning number "B" is 60%, and so on.
In addition, if the result of the hand selection is not eligible for the advantageous zone selection, the result is "No" in step S343. Therefore, if the result of the hand selection is "Yes" in step S343, that is, if the result of the hand selection is eligible for the advantageous zone transition lottery, the lottery is performed using a lottery table having a minimum of "1" or more. However, the winning probability of the advantageous zone transition lottery is set to "1/17500" or more.

Next, the process proceeds to step S346, where it is determined whether or not the player has been selected in the lottery of step S345 to be in the advantageous zone. If it is determined that the player has been selected in the advantageous zone, the process proceeds to step S347, and if it is determined that the player has not been selected in the advantageous zone, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
In step S347, a favorable zone transition process is executed. This process is the process shown in Fig. 45, and is a process for setting flags and counters based on winning in the favorable zone.
In the next step S348, an AT lottery is performed. This process is the process shown in Fig. 46. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
In addition, not limited to the example of this embodiment, when moving to the advantageous zone, the AT may always be started (without performing AT lottery). Alternatively, when moving to the advantageous zone, the AT may always be non-AT, and after moving to the advantageous zone (for example, after a predetermined number of games are consumed), a lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to execute the AT.

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the favorable zone transition processing in step S347 of FIG. 44.
First, in step S351, the main control board 50 turns on the advantageous zone type flag ("1"). Next, in step S352, the main control board 50 sets the advantageous zone clear counter to the initial value of the number of games played in the advantageous zone, "1500 (D)."

In the next step S353, the difference counter is set to "0". If the difference counter is continuously updated during the normal period (non-advantageous period) and is always set to "0" when the game ends when the period is not advantageous, the process of step S353 is not required. However, the initial value "0" may be set to prevent noise, etc.
At the end of the favorable period, an initialization process is performed including the difference counter, so at the start of the normal period, the difference counter is set to "0." Therefore, in the case of specifications in which the difference counter is updated only during the favorable period, the difference counter is set to "0" at the start of the favorable period, so it is possible to omit the process of step S353.
On the other hand, in the case where the difference counter is continuously updated during the non-advantageous zone as in the present embodiment, the difference counter may be positive even immediately before the transition to the advantageous zone. For this reason, the difference counter is set to "0" in step S353. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the AT lottery processing in step S348 of FIG.
First, in step S361, an AT lottery is performed based on the result of the lottery. As in step S345, the lottery may be performed using a lottery table in which the number of winning positions is determined for each result of the lottery.
In addition, the AT lottery does not necessarily have to be executed, and for example, there may be role lottery results that do not determine an AT and role lottery results that always determine an AT.
In the next step S362, the main control board 50 judges whether or not the AT has been won in the AT lottery in step S361. If it is judged that the AT has been won, the process proceeds to step S363, and if it is judged that the AT has not been won, the process proceeds to step S365.

In step S363, the main control board 50 executes the AT initial game number determination process. This process is the process shown in FIG. 47, which will be described later. Next, the process proceeds to step S364, where the main control board 50 sets the main game state to AT and turns on the AT flag. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
Here, the main game state in this embodiment includes normal (non-advantageous zone), CZ (advantageous zone and non-AT), AT, and 1BB operation. It is also possible to provide a premonition as the main game state after the AT is won and before the AT starts, but in this embodiment, for the sake of simplicity, when the AT is won, the AT starts immediately. Information on the main game state is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53 (not shown in FIG. 35).
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S362 that the AT has not been won and the process proceeds to step S365, the main control board 50 sets the main gaming state to CZ, and ends the process according to this flowchart.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the AT initial game number determination process in step S363 in FIG.
In Fig. 47, in step S371, it is determined whether the result of the lottery for the current game is a winning combination. As described above, the winning combination is set to a rare combination such as a middle cherry. If it is determined that the winning combination is a winning combination, the process proceeds to step S372, and if it is determined that the winning combination is not a winning combination, the process proceeds to step S373.
In step S372, the initial number of games of the AT is set to "100 (D)" and stored in the AT game count counter. On the other hand, in step S373, the initial number of games of the AT is set to "30 (D)" and stored in the AT game count counter. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

In the example of Fig. 47, the initial number of times of play of the AT is allocated depending on whether or not the fixed role is won, but it is not limited to this, and the number of times of play may be selected using a lottery table based on the result of the lottery. In other words, even if the result of the lottery is one role, any one of the multiple number of times of play may be selected.
Also, during the AT, the AT game count determination process shown in Fig. 47 may be executed as a lottery for adding the number of AT games. When the lottery for adding the number of AT games is won, the determined number of additions is added to the AT game count counter.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the push order instruction number setting process (M_ORD_INF) in step S284 of FIG.
First, in step S381, it is determined whether or not the instruction condition (the condition for activating the instruction function) is satisfied. When the game is AT and a combination with an advantageous push order such as the push order bell is won, it is determined that the instruction condition is satisfied.
In addition, if the player wins the advantageous zone in the current game ("Yes" in step S346 in FIG. 44) and wins the AT ("Yes" in step S362 in FIG. 46), the player will move to the advantageous zone from the next game, so the current game is not in the advantageous zone. Therefore, the instruction function cannot be activated in the current game, so the answer is "No" in step S381.
If it is determined in step S381 that the designated condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S382, and if it is determined that the designated condition is not satisfied, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

In the next step S382, it is determined whether the number of bets in the current game is "3." This process reads the bet number data or the automatic bet number data of the RWM 53 to determine whether the number of bets is "3."
If it is determined that the bet number is "3", the process proceeds to step S383, and if it is determined that the bet number is not "3", the process according to this flowchart ends. Thus, in this embodiment, the condition for activating the instruction function (executing the process related to the instruction function) is set to the bet number being "3" (the prescribed number of one). For this reason, for example, even if a game is started during the AT with the bet number being "2" and a role with an advantageous push order (for example, a push order bell) is won, the instruction function will not be activated (the correct push order will not be announced).

In the next step S383, a winning number (condition device number) is set. The winning number (condition device number) determined in the role selection process is stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53. Then, in step S383, the value stored in this storage area is stored in the A register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S384, where a push order instruction number table (not shown) is set. Here, the top address of the push order instruction number table is stored in the HL register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S385.

In step S385, the specified address data is set. In this process, the value obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value becomes the new HL register value, and the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
That is, the data stored in the winning number (condition device number) is used as an offset value, and the data corresponding to the address obtained by adding the offset value to the top address of the push order instruction number table is obtained. As a result, the push order instruction number corresponding to the winning number is stored in the A register.
Then, in step S386, the A register value (push order instruction number) is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53 (area for storing push order instruction numbers; not shown in Figure 35).
In the next step S387, the A register value (push order instruction number) is stored as the acquisition number data.

In the eleventh embodiment, the winning combination is the same as that shown in FIG. 58 (the twelfth embodiment) described later. When the winning numbers "3" to "8" are won during the AT, the push order instruction number corresponding to the winning number is set. The relationship between the winning number and the push order instruction number stored in the winning number data is as follows.
Winning number "3": Push order instruction number "A1 (H)"
Winning number "4": Push order instruction number "A2 (H)"
Winning number "5": Push order instruction number "A3 (H)"
Winning number "6": Push order instruction number "A4 (H)"
Winning number "7": Push order instruction number "A5 (H)"
Winning number "8": Push order instruction number "A6 (H)"

For example, when the winning number "3" is won during the AT, the push order instruction number "A1 (H)" is stored as the winning number data by the push order instruction number setting process of FIG. 48. As a result, the push order instruction information "=1" corresponding to the push order instruction number "A1 (H)" is displayed on the winning number display LED 78 by the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) of FIG. 55 described later.

After step S387, the process proceeds to step S388, where it is determined whether the advantageous zone display LED flag is on (illuminated). If it is determined that the advantageous zone display LED flag is on, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the advantageous zone display LED flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S389.
In step S389, it is determined whether the game state (RT or main game state) of the current game is a game state in which the section Sim ball output rate exceeds "1". Incidentally, whether the game state in which the section Sim ball output rate exceeds "1" is set in advance, and here, it is determined whether it is a game state set in advance. Specifically, the data of the current RT or main game state is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53, and this data is read to determine whether the game state of the current game is a game state in which the section Sim ball output rate exceeds "1". If it is determined that the section Sim ball output rate is a game state in which it exceeds "1", proceed to step S390, and if it is determined that the section Sim ball output rate is not a game state in which it exceeds "1", the process according to this flowchart is terminated. In step S390, the advantageous zone display LED flag is turned on. Therefore, the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned on by the interrupt process executed after this step S390. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

As described above, in a game in which the instruction function is activated, when the advantageous zone display LED 77 is not yet lit and the game state is such that the zone Sim ball payout rate exceeds "1", the condition for turning on the advantageous zone display LED 77 is met, so the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned on.
However, this is not limiting, and for example, when a lottery for shifting to a favorable zone is won, the favorable zone display LED 77 may be turned on before the start of the next game. Alternatively, after shifting to the favorable zone, before the instruction function is activated, or even if the zone Sim payout rate is not in a game state exceeding "1", the favorable zone display LED 77 may be turned on at any timing (when a lighting condition set by an arbitrary user is satisfied).

FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing the medal payout process (MS_WIN_PAY) for winning in step S294 in FIG.
First, in step S391, the main control board 50 acquires payout number data, which is a process for storing the value of the payout number data in the A register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S392, where it is determined whether or not any medals have been paid out. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the payout number data (A register value) is "0." If it is determined that the payout number data is "0," that is, if it is determined that no medals have been paid out, the process according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the payout number data is not "0," that is, if it is determined that any medals have been paid out, the process proceeds to step S393.

In step S393, the value of the credit amount data is obtained.
Next, the process proceeds to step S394 to determine whether the number of credits has reached the limit value. Specifically, if the credit number data acquired in step S393 is "50(D)", it is determined that the number of credits has reached the limit value and the process proceeds to step S398, whereas if the credit number data acquired is less than "50(D)", it is determined that the number of credits has not reached the limit value and the process proceeds to step S395.

In step S395, the waiting time for adding credits is set. In this embodiment, in order to set the waiting time to about 100 ms, the number of interrupt processes is set to "46" (46 x 2.235 ms = about 100 ms). Specifically, the B register value is set to "00000000 (B)" and the C register value is set to "00101110 (B)".
Next, the process proceeds to step S396, where a 2-byte time wait process is executed, in which the BC register value is decremented for each interrupt process, and the process waits until the BC register value becomes "0."

When the 2-byte time waiting process in step S396 is completed, the process proceeds to step S397, where "1" is added to the value of the credit number data. As a result, the display on the credit number display LED 76 becomes "+1" due to the interrupt process executed after the process in step S397. For example, the display on the credit number display LED 76 changes from "08" to "09". After the process in step S397, the process proceeds to step S399.

When the process proceeds from step S394 to step S398, a process for paying out one medal (a process for paying out an actual medal from the hopper 35 to the player) is executed. This process drives the hopper motor 36, and as shown in Figures 7 and 8, when the on/off of the payout sensors 37a and 37b is detected at a predetermined timing, it is determined that one medal has been correctly paid out.
Through the above process, the number of credits is increased until the number of credits reaches the limit value, and when the number of credits reaches the limit, a process of paying out actual medals from the hopper 35 is executed.

In step S399, "1" is added to the acquisition number data. As a result, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 becomes "+1." For example, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 changes from "02" to "03."
In the next step S400, the payout number data is subtracted by "1." In this step S400, only the payout number data is updated, and the value of the payout number data buffer is not updated.

Then, proceed to step S401 to determine whether or not medal payout has been completed. This process is to determine whether or not the updated payout number data has become "0". If it is determined that the payout number data is "0", the process according to this flowchart ends, and if it is determined that the payout number data is not "0", return to step S393 to continue processing.

In the above payout process, when performing a payout process to add "1" to the number of credits, a waiting time of about 100 ms is set by the processes of steps S395 and S396. This allows the display of the credit number display LED 76 to appear as if it is counting up to the player. For example, when the display of the credit number display LED 76 before the credit addition is "08" and 8 medals are added to this, the display becomes "display "08" → waiting process for 100 ms → display "09" → waiting process for 100 ms → ... → waiting process for 100 ms → display "16". In contrast, if no waiting time is set when adding "1" to the number of credits, it will appear as if the display has changed from "08" to "16" instantly.
Furthermore, as in this embodiment, by executing a 2-byte time wait process for each addition of "1" when adding up the number of credits, it is possible to synchronize the payout sound ("pururu...") output from the sub-control board 80 with the count-up of the number of credits.

In contrast to this, when the number of credits exceeds the maximum number "50 (D)" and medals are actually paid out in the process of step S398, the 2-byte time waiting process of steps S395 and S396 is not provided.
This is because it takes about 100 ms to actually pay out one medal, since the hopper motor 36 must be driven to pay out one medal. Therefore, when actually paying out a medal, it can be synchronized with the payout sound output from the sub-control board 80 without providing a 2-byte time waiting process.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the game end check process (M_GAME_CHK) in step S301 of FIG.
First, in step S411, a process is performed to clear the flags of the condition devices (also called winning information, which is stored in a specified area of the RWM 53 (not shown in FIG. 35)). This process is a process to clear all but the condition devices of the special role, and when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the special role has stopped on an active line, a process to clear the condition devices of the special role is also executed. In the next step S412, a process to turn off the replay display LED 79f is performed. This process is a process to set the bit corresponding to the replay of the medal management flag (not shown in FIG. 35) provided in the RWM 53 to "0". Next, the process proceeds to step S413, where the replay operation flag is cleared. This process is a process to set the D0 bit of the operation status flag to "0".

In the next step S414, it is determined whether the AT game count counter has become "0". Here, the AT game count counter is updated in step S281 (FIG. 43) during the main processing of FIG. 41, as described above. In this embodiment, the AT game count counter is updated after the start switch acceptance processing (step S279 in FIG. 41), but it is not limited to this, and may be executed, for example, before step S301 (game end check processing) in FIG. 41 or within the processing of step S301 (for example, before step S414 in FIG. 50).
Furthermore, in this embodiment, an example of a game number management type AT that updates the AT game number counter is shown, but in the case of a difference number management type AT, in step S414, it is determined whether the AT difference number counter has become "0". The AT difference number counter is updated after the medal payout process due to winning (step S294 in FIG. 41).
When it is determined that the AT game number counter is "0", the process proceeds to step S415, and when it is determined that the AT game number counter is not "0", the process proceeds to step S416. In step S415, the AT flag is turned off.
Next, the process proceeds to step S416, where advantageous zone counter management is executed. This process is a process for updating advantageous zone clear counters and difference number counters, and is the process shown in Fig. 51 or 52 described later. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

51 and 52 are flow charts showing advantageous zone counter management in step S416 of Fig. 50. Fig. 51 shows Example 1, and Fig. 52 shows Example 2.
The advantageous zone counter management executes the following processes.
1) Update the favorable zone clear counter. 2) Update the difference counter. 3) Determine whether the favorable zone end conditions are met. 4) If the favorable zone end conditions are met, initialize (clear) the data related to the favorable zone.
In addition, advantageous zone counter management is performed regardless of the number of bets (prescribed number).
In this embodiment, the advantageous zone counter management is executed regardless of whether the zone is advantageous or non-advantageous (normal) zone. However, the advantageous zone counter management may be executed only when the zone is advantageous by determining whether the zone is advantageous or not.

In Example 1 of Figure 51, in step S421, the address value of the advantageous zone clear counter is stored in the HL register. Therefore, "F063 (H)" is stored in the HL register.
In the next step S422, "1" is subtracted from the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register. The subtraction here is, for example, as follows:
"0010(H)" → "1" subtraction → "000F(H)"
"0001(H)" → "1" subtraction → "0000(H)" (zero flag = 1)
"0000(H)" → "1" subtraction → "0000(H)" (carry flag = 1)

As described above, subtracting "1" from "0000(H)" does not result in a carryover, and the value remains "0000(H)". In this way, regardless of the value before the subtraction, it is a single instruction (one step) to subtract "1", so there is no need to determine whether the count value before the update is "0" or not, and there is no need to add the value of the carry flag after the subtraction. Therefore, the time required to update the count value can be significantly reduced. Also, by configuring in this way, it is no longer necessary to determine whether or not the device is in an advantageous zone from the value of the advantageous zone clear counter, or to determine whether or not the end condition of the advantageous zone has been met (for example, whether or not 1500 games have been played in the advantageous zone, or whether or not an arbitrary end condition has been met, etc.).

In the next step S423, the main control board 50 judges whether the favorable zone clear counter value before the subtraction was "0". This process is judged by whether the carry flag became "1" in the subtraction process of step S422.
When the carry flag becomes "1" (when the value before the subtraction is "0"), the process proceeds to step S436, and when the carry flag is not "1" (when the value before the subtraction is not "0"), the process proceeds to step S424. Note that when the carry flag becomes "1" (when the value before the subtraction is "0"), this means that the current game is not being played in an advantageous zone (the current game is being played in a non-advantageous zone (normal zone)).

In step S424, the main control board 50 determines whether the result of the subtraction in step S422 (after the subtraction) is "0". This process is performed based on whether the zero flag has become "1" in the subtraction process in step S422. In other words, it is determined whether the value before the subtraction was "1".
When the zero flag becomes "1", the process proceeds to step S435, and when the zero flag is not "1" (when the subtraction result is not "0"), the process proceeds to step S425. Note that when the zero flag becomes "1" (when the subtraction result is "0"), this means that the current game will end in the advantageous zone (the next game will be a game in the non-advantageous zone (normal zone)).

In step S425, the value of the difference counter is obtained. This is a process of reading the value of the difference counter and storing it in the HL register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S426, where the main control board 50 judges whether or not a replay activation symbol has been displayed in the current game (whether or not a replay has been won). This process judges whether or not the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag is "1", and if it is "1", it is judged that a replay activation symbol has been displayed. If it is judged that a replay activation symbol has been displayed, the process proceeds to step S434, and if it is judged that a replay activation symbol has not been displayed, the process proceeds to step S427.

In step S427, the payout number data buffer is obtained. This process reads the payout number data buffer and stores the value in the A register.
In the next step S428, the process of adding the payout number to the difference counter is executed. This process is to add the A register value (payout number data buffer value) to the HL register value (difference counter) and store the added value in the HL register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S429, where the value of the bet number data is obtained. This is a process of reading the bet number data and storing the value in the A register.
In the next step S430, the bet number is subtracted from the difference counter. This process subtracts the A register value from the HL register value and stores the subtraction result in the HL register. When the HL register value becomes less than "0", the carry flag becomes "1".

In the next step S431, it is determined whether the result of the subtraction in step S430 is less than "0". This process determines whether the carry flag has become "1" as a result of the subtraction in step S430, and if the carry flag is "1", it is determined that the result of the subtraction is less than "0" and the process proceeds to step S432. On the other hand, if the carry flag is not "1" (if the result of the subtraction is not less than "0"), the process proceeds to step S433.

In step S432, the HL register value is cleared (set to "0"). Then, in the next step S433, the difference counter value is saved. This is a process for storing the HL register value in the difference counter. Therefore, when the process moves to step S433 via step S432, the difference counter becomes "0".
In the next step S434, the main control board 50 determines whether the difference counter has exceeded the upper limit. The upper limit of the difference counter is set to "2400(D)". The process here involves a comparison between the HL register value and "2401(D)". In this comparison, if the HL register value is greater, the carry flag becomes "0", and if the HL register value is smaller, the carry flag becomes "1". Therefore, when the carry flag is "1" (when the HL register value is smaller), it is determined that the upper limit has not been exceeded, and the process according to this flowchart ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the upper limit is exceeded (when the carry flag is "0"), the process proceeds to step S435. When the difference counter exceeds the upper limit, the end condition of the advantageous period is met.
In step S435, the memory area relating to the advantageous zone is initialized in the RWM 53 (data relating to the advantageous zone is cleared). Data relating to the advantageous zone includes an advantageous zone clear counter, an advantageous zone type flag, a difference counter, an advantageous zone display LED flag, an AT flag, an AT game count counter, and the like. Furthermore, information on the main game state is included. Note that information relating to the advantageous zone does not include an RT state number, an LED display counter, and the like. Specifically, in FIG. 35, "F000 (H)" to "F052 (H)" are not included.

For example, the data cleared in step S435 does not include the LED display counter.
Here, it is assumed that the LED display counter is cleared. In that case, the LED display counter becomes "0" when the advantageous period ends. Specifically, if the LED display counter is initialized when it is "00000010 (B)", the LED display counter will become "00010000 (B)" even though the LED display counter should be updated to "00000001 (B)" in the next interrupt process and the LED corresponding to the LED display counter (specifically, the upper digit of the credit number display LED 76) can be turned on. Therefore, the display of the LED corresponding to "00000001 (B)" is delayed, and it may appear to be turned off for a moment.

Furthermore, the data cleared in step S435 does not include, for example, the following data:
1) Excitation information of the motor 32 2) Error information when an error occurs 3) Data for displaying the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) (total number of games played counter, total payout counter, etc.)
4) Timer value for minimum play time (4.1 seconds) (set in step S285 in FIG. 41)
5) Information of input port 51 6) Data of control command buffer 7) Data of stack area 8) Information of external signals Note that the above are examples of representative data, and it does not mean that the data that is not cleared is limited to the above data.

Next, the process proceeds to step S436, where the main control board 50 determines whether the advantageous zone type flag is "0" (normal zone). If the advantageous zone type flag is "0", the process according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, if the advantageous zone type flag is not "0", particularly in this embodiment, if it is determined that the advantageous zone type flag is "1" (advantageous zone), the process proceeds to step S437. Note that the advantageous zone type flag is "1" at this point in time when the advantageous zone type flag is "1" in the case where the player wins the advantageous zone transition lottery in the current game and the advantageous zone type flag is set to "1" in step S351 in FIG. 45, and "Yes" is determined in step S423 and the process proceeds to step S436. On the other hand, if the process proceeds to step S436 via step S435, the advantageous zone type flag is cleared in step S435, so "No" is not determined in step S436.

In step S437, the favorable zone clear counter is set to an initial value. This process sets the favorable zone clear counter to "1500 (D)". Here, "1500 (D)" is stored in the address indicated by the HL register value. Note that "F063 (H)" was set in the HL register in step S421. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In the above-mentioned advantageous zone counter management, when updating the difference counter, the payout number is first added (step S428), and then the bet number is subtracted (step S430). The reason for this processing is as follows.
For example, assume that the difference counter is "2(D)", the bet amount is "3(D)", and the payout amount is "9(D)".
Here, when the bet number is first subtracted from the difference counter, it becomes "-1(D) (actually "FFFF(H)")" and the carry flag becomes "1." Then, when the payout number is added, "9(D)" is added to "-1(D)", so it becomes "8(D)" and the carry flag becomes "1" (indicating that a carry has occurred).

Because the difference in the number of coins played this time is "+6", simply adding the difference in the number of coins "+6" to the difference counter before the update of "2 (D)" sets the carry flag to "1", creating an irregular situation. In other words, the process of step S431 (whether the subtraction result is less than "0" or not) cannot be determined based on whether the carry flag is "1" or not. If it were to be determined based on whether the carry flag is "1" or not, step S431 would be determined as "Yes" even though no carry has occurred, and the difference counter would be set to its initial value in step S432. Note that the carry flag is a flag that becomes "1" in either case of a carry or a borrow as a result of the subtraction.

On the other hand, when the difference counter is "2(D)", if the payout number "9(D)" is added at first, the difference counter becomes "11(D)" at that point, and when the bet number is subsequently subtracted, it becomes "8(D)". In this case, since no carry occurs, the carry flag is "0".
For the above reasons, when updating the difference counter, if the payout number is first added and then the bet number is subtracted, the judgment process of step S431 can be executed by a simple process using the carry flag.

In addition, in the advantageous zone counter management of this embodiment, the subtraction process of the advantageous zone counter (step S422) is executed first, and if the value before subtraction is "0" (if "Yes" in step S423, i.e., if it is a non-advantageous zone), the process proceeds to step S436 without executing the update process of the difference counter (steps S425 to S430). Therefore, in this embodiment, the advantageous zone counter management is configured to be executed regardless of whether it is an advantageous zone or a non-advantageous zone, but the process of updating the difference counter is not executed when it is a non-advantageous zone, thereby improving the processing efficiency. For this reason, the process of subtracting the advantageous zone clear counter is executed first, and then the process of updating the difference counter is executed. Of course, if the specifications are such that it is determined whether it is in an advantageous zone, and if it is in an advantageous zone, the process of subtracting the advantageous zone clear counter and the process of updating the difference counter are executed, it is also possible to execute the process of updating the difference counter before the process of subtracting the advantageous zone clear counter.

In addition, even when the determination in step S426 is "Yes" (when a replay is won), the processing in step S434 is executed. By doing so, even if a situation occurs at the end of a game where an abnormal value (a value exceeding 2400 (D)) is stored in the difference counter due to noise or the like, the result in step S434 will be "Yes" and the advantageous period can be ended. On the other hand, if such a confirmation is not necessary, the processing in this flowchart may be ended when the result in step S426 is "Yes".

Also, in the example of Figure 51, in step S426, it is determined whether or not the re-play activation pattern has stopped, and if it is determined that the re-play activation pattern has stopped, the process of updating the difference counter (steps S427 to S430) is skipped, thereby speeding up the process.
In particular, in a game in which the replay operation symbol is stopped and displayed, it is possible to consider the payout number of the game to be "0" (deemed payout number) and the bet number of the next game to be "0" and update the difference number counter. However, for example, if SB (single bonus) is set as a winning role during the advantageous period, when SB is won, one SB game with the bet number set to "1" is played in the next game, but in this SB game, a replay is won and the replay operation symbol is stopped and displayed. In this case, the next game is not an SB game, so the bet number is "3" (other than SB game, it is not possible to play with the bet number "1"). However, in this case, since the deemed payout number in SB game and the bet number of the next game do not match, how to count the difference number counter becomes a problem.
Therefore, in this embodiment, the above problem can be solved by not updating the difference number counter in a game in which the replay activation symbol is stopped and displayed.

Fig. 52 is a flow chart showing an example 2 of advantageous zone counter management in step S416 of Fig. 50. In Fig. 52, the same processes as those in Fig. 51 are given the same step numbers.
In Example 1 of FIG. 51, first the payout number is added to the difference number counter, and then the bet number is subtracted from the difference number counter.
In contrast to this, in Example 2 of FIG. 52, first the bet number is subtracted from the difference number counter, and then the payout number is added to the difference number counter.

In the example of Figure 51, when the bet number is subtracted from the difference counter and then the payout number is added, the carry flag may become "1" even if no final carry occurs, and it is therefore impossible to determine whether the calculation result is "0" or not based on whether the carry flag is "1" or not.
In contrast, in Example 2 of FIG. 52, the number of bets is subtracted from the difference counter (step S430) and then the payout amount is added (step S428), and in step S441, it is determined whether the calculation result is less than "0" without referring to the value of the carry flag.
Specifically, in step S441 of FIG. 52, it is determined whether the calculation result of step S441 is less than "0" by checking whether the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register (register that stores the most significant digits) value of the HL register is "1".

for example,
Difference counter value (HL register value) = 0000 (H) (before operation)
Bet number data = 3 (H)
Payout number data = 0 (H)
Let us assume that it was.
In this case, the difference counter value after the calculation is
0000(H)-3(H)=FFFD(H)
It becomes.
therefore,
H register value = FF(H) (1111/1111(B))
L register value = FD (H) (1111/1101 (B))
It becomes.
In addition, "/" indicates a division into 4-bit units when expressed in binary notation.

In the above example, the HL register value before the calculation is "0000 (H)". However, if the HL register value before the calculation is not "0000 (H)" and "the difference in the number of coins in the current game>HL register value", for example,
Difference in number of coins in this game = 03 (H)
HL register value = 0001 (H) (before operation)
When this is the case, the HL register value after the operation is
HL register value=FFFE(H)
It becomes.
therefore,
H register value = FF(H) (1111/1111(B))
L register value = FE(H) (1111/1110(B))
It becomes.

Furthermore, if the HL register value is not "0000 (H)" and "the difference in the number of coins in the current game < the HL register value", for example, first,
Difference in number of coins in this game = 03 (H)
HL register value = 0100 (H) (256 (D)) (before operation)
When this is the case, the HL register value after the operation is
HL register value = 00FD (H)
It becomes.
therefore,
H register value = 00 (H) (0000/0000 (B))
L register value = FD (H) (1111/1101 (B))
It becomes.

Secondly,
Difference in number of coins in this game = 03 (H)
HL register value = 00FF (H) (255 (D)) (before operation)
When this is the case, the HL register value after the operation is
HL register value = 00FC (H)
It becomes.
therefore,
H register value = 00 (H) (0000/0000 (B))
L register value = FC(H) (1111/1100(B))
It becomes.

And thirdly,
Difference in number of coins in this game = 03 (H)
HL register value = 0960 (H) (2400 (D)) (before operation)
When this is the case, the HL register value after the operation is
HL register value = 095D (H) (after calculation)
It becomes.
therefore,
H register value = 09 (H) (0000/1001 (B))
L register value = 5D (H) (0101/1101 (B))
It becomes.

On the other hand, the upper limit of the difference counter is "2400(D)". Here, "2400(D)" can be expressed in binary as follows:
"0000/1001/0110/0000(B)"
It becomes.
Since the upper limit value of the difference counter is "2400 (D)", when a value exceeding "2400 (D)" is stored in the difference counter, it is determined that the condition for ending the favorable period is met, and the difference counter is cleared (step S435 in Figures 51 and 52).
At the end of the current game, the difference counter value becomes "2400 (D)", but since it does not exceed "2400 (D)", it is determined that the condition for the end of the advantageous zone is not met, and the game moves to the next game. In the next game, the difference in number of coins increases most when the number of bets is "1" and the number of payouts is "15 (D)", so the difference in number of coins in that game becomes "14 (D)".
Therefore, the difference counter value in this case is "2414(D)."
Here, "2414(D)" is expressed in binary as follows:
"0000/1001/0110/1110(B)"
It becomes.

Furthermore, when the difference counter value becomes "2414 (D)", it exceeds "2400 (D)", so the difference counter is cleared for that game and becomes "0 (D)".
From the above, the maximum value that the difference counter can take during play is "2414 (D)", or "0000/1001/0110/1110 (B)".

Therefore, when the HL register value is "2414(D)",
H register value = 0000/1001 (B)
L register value = 0110/1110 (B)
and the D7 bit (the most significant bit) of the H register value becomes "0".
Therefore, when the HL register value, that is, the difference counter value, is in the range of "0(D)" to "2414(D)", the D7 bit of the H register value is always "0".

As a result, except for cases where a carry is borrowed, bit D7 (the most significant bit) of the H register value is always "0" and never "1".
In addition, in order for the D7 bit of the H register value to become "1", the difference counter value must become "32768 (D)", and except for carryover, the advantageous zone will not continue until the difference reaches such a value.

On the other hand, as mentioned above,
Bet number data = 3 (H)
Payout number data = 0 (H)
HL register value (difference counter) = 0000 (H) (before operation)
If so, the HL register value after the operation will be "FFFD(H)."
Here, "FFFD(H)" is
"1111/1111/1111/1101(B)"
It is.

therefore,
H register value = 1111/1111 (B)
L register value = 1111/1101 (B)
and the D7 bit of the H register value becomes "1".
Similarly, before the operation,
Bet number data = 3 (H)
Payout number data = 0 (H)
HL register value (difference counter) = 0002 (H)
When the difference counter is updated, the HL register value becomes "FFFF (H)."

Here, "FFFF(H)" means
"1111/1111/1111/1111 (B)"
It is.
therefore,
H register value = 1111/1111 (B)
L register value = 1111/1111 (B)
and the D7 bit of the H register value becomes "1".
In this way, when a borrow occurs, the D7 bit (the most significant bit) of the H register value becomes "1".

As a result of updating the difference counter, if no borrow occurs, the D7 bit of the H register value is "0", and if a borrow occurs, the D7 bit of the H register value is "1".
52, when determining whether the operation result is less than "0", it is determined whether the D7 bit of the H register value is "1". If the D7 bit of the H register value is "1", it is determined that the operation result is less than "0".
In this way, it is possible to determine whether the operation result is "0" or not without determining whether the carry flag is "1" or not.
Since it is determined whether the calculation result is "0" without using the carry flag, there is no problem in adding the payout amount to the difference counter value after subtracting the bet amount.

Also, as is clear from the above, even if the difference counter reaches the maximum possible value of “2414 (D)”, not only the D7 bit (the most significant bit) of the H register value, but also the D6 bit, D5 bit, and D4 bit are all “0”.
On the other hand, when a borrow occurs in the difference counter value, not only the D7 bit (the most significant bit) of the H register value but also the D6, D5, and D4 bits become "1".

52, in step S441, instead of determining whether the D7 bit of the H register value is "1", it may be determined whether the D6 bit is "1", it may be determined whether the D5 bit is "1", or it may be determined whether the D4 bit is "1". In any case, when the bit is "1", the operation result is less than "0", and when it is not "1", the operation result is not less than "0".
As is clear from the above, even in Example 1 (step S431) of Figure 51, it is also possible to determine whether the operation result is less than "0" by referring to the D7 bit (or D6, D5, or D4 bit) of the H register value.

As is clear from Figures 51 and 52, the updating of the advantageous zone clear counter (step S422), the updating of the difference counter (steps S428 and S430), the determination of whether the advantageous zone clear counter is "0" (step S424), the determination of whether the difference counter has exceeded the upper limit (step S434), and the initialization of information related to the advantageous zone (step S435) are executed regardless of the number of bets (prescribed number) in the current game. Therefore, even if a game is played with the number of bets (prescribed number) of "2", and the advantageous zone clear counter becomes "0" or the difference counter exceeds the upper limit, the advantageous zone ends.

Fig. 53 is a flowchart showing the interrupt process (I_INTR) by the main control board 50 (main CPU 55). As described above, the main control board 50 performs the interrupt process shown in Fig. 53 at a cycle of 2.235 ms (however, the time cycle is not limited to this cycle) in parallel with the main process.
When the process proceeds to the interrupt process in step S451, in step S452, the process of saving register values and prohibiting overlapping interrupts is performed as an initial process. Here, the current register values are saved in the stack area of the RWM 53 in order to use the registers of the main CPU 55 used in the main process in the interrupt process. Furthermore, the interrupt prohibition flag is turned on so that the next interrupt process is not started during the interrupt process. This is because, for example, a request to execute an interrupt process may be made during the execution of a power-off process.

In the next step S453, a power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed. This process is shown in Fig. 54 and is a process for detecting whether or not a power-off detection signal has been input.
In the next step S454, the interrupt counter value is updated. The interrupt counter value is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53 (not shown in FIG. 35).
In the next step S455, a timer measurement is performed. This process is a process for subtracting the time set in the main process. Specifically, for example, it is possible to check whether the minimum play time (4.1 seconds) has elapsed.

Next, the process proceeds to step S456, where LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is performed. This process is shown in FIG. 55, which will be described later, and is a process for turning on the LEDs (digits 1 to 5) according to the state of the slot machine 10.
Incidentally, there are two types of errors that occur in the slot machine 10: unrecoverable errors and recoverable errors. In the case of unrecoverable errors, an error display is output by the main processing (for example, step S304 in FIG. 41), but the display of recoverable errors is performed by this LED display control each time an interrupt processing is performed.

Then, the process proceeds to step S457, where a process of reading the input port 51 is performed. This reads whether the bet switch 40, start switch 41, stop switch 42, etc. have been operated, switch signals, and input signals from various sensors, and generates data based on the input port 51 (level data, rising edge data, falling edge data) and stores it in a specified area of the RWM 53 (not shown in FIG. 35).

In the next step S458, it is determined whether the set value is within the normal range. Here, the set value data stored in address "F000(H)" is read, and it is determined whether the range of the set value data is within the normal range (whether the set value data is within the range of "0" to "5"). If it is determined that the set value data is within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S459, and if it is determined that the set value is not within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S470, where it moves to unrecoverable error processing. In this embodiment, the error in this case is called an "E6" error, and the fact that it is "E6" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.

In step S459, a check process for the built-in random number is performed. In this embodiment, a flag is provided that is turned on when an error occurs in the built-in random number, and it is determined whether this flag is on or not.
Specifically, for example, when an abnormality in the clock frequency of the random numbers used for role selection (such as slow updates of the random numbers) is detected, the error flag is turned on.
Then, the process proceeds to step S460 to determine whether an error has occurred in the internal random number (whether the error flag is on or not), and if it is determined that no error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S461, and if it is determined that an error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S470 to move to unrecoverable error processing. The error display content at this time is "E7".

In step S461, drive control of the reels 31 is performed. This control is performed in units of reels 31 (left, center, right), and depending on the operating state of each reel, it may be stopped, constant speed, accelerate, decelerate, start of deceleration, or standby. When drive control of the reels 31 is completed, the process proceeds to step S462, where port output processing is performed. This processing performs excitation output of the (reel) motor 32 and hopper motor 36, and excitation output of the blocker 45.

In the next step S463, an input error check process is executed to determine whether or not there are any abnormalities in the various sensors.
In the next step S464, a control command transmission process is performed to transmit the set control command (an untransmitted control command stored in the command buffer (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53) to the sub-control board 80.
Specifically, when a control command is set in the command buffer, the control command is sent to the sub-control board 80 in step S464 in the interrupt processing from that point onwards (in principle, in the next interrupt processing that arrives after that point if the command buffer is empty).

In the next step S465, the data for the external signal stored in the RWM 53 is stored in a register. Then, in the next step S466, the external signal is output from the output port 52 (output port 5 in FIG. 33) (the signal is transmitted to the external centralized terminal board 100).
Next, the flow proceeds to step S467, where a ratio display preparation process is performed, which includes updating the timer related to the ratio display on the management information display LED 74, outputting segment data, and the like.

In the next step S468, a random number update process is performed. Next, the process proceeds to step S469, where the register values saved in step S452 are restored and the next interrupt is permitted. Specifically, the register data stored at the start of the interrupt process is restored, and the interrupt prohibition flag is turned off so that the next interrupt process can be started. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

As shown in the above process, the on/off of the credit number display LED 76, acquired number display LED 78, status display LEDs 79 (79a to 79f), setting value display LED 73, and management information display LED 74 is controlled by interrupt processing every 2.235 ms.
Furthermore, for each interrupt process, if a control command that has not yet been sent to the sub-control board 80 is stored in the command buffer, the command is sent.

During unrecoverable error processing, interrupt processing is not performed (interrupt processing is suspended until normal recovery is achieved).
An unrecoverable error is a serious error that would not normally occur, and interrupts themselves are prohibited in order to prevent the execution of processes based on abnormal data (such as updating data in the RWM 53 based on data from the input port, or sending control commands to the sub-control board 80).
If an unsent command is stored in the control command buffer when an unrecoverable error occurs, that command is not sent to the sub-control board 80. This is because there is a risk that the control command stored in the buffer is incorrect.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S453 of FIG.
In step S481, the main control board 50 judges whether the power interruption detection signal was ON in the previous interrupt process. Here, a voltage monitoring device (power interruption detection circuit; not shown) provided on the main control board 50 inputs a power interruption detection signal to a predetermined bit of a predetermined input port 51 when the voltage falls below a predetermined value (V1 or less in the example of FIG. 3), so it detects whether the signal was input. Furthermore, when the power interruption detection signal is ON, it is stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53.
If it was determined in the previous interrupt process that the power interruption detection signal was on, the process proceeds to step S482, and if it was determined that the power interruption detection signal was not on, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In step S482, the main control board 50 judges whether the power interruption detection signal is ON in this interrupt process. If it is not ON, the process according to this flow chart is terminated. On the other hand, if it is ON, the process proceeds to step S483.
If the answer is "Yes" in both steps S481 and S482 (if the power interruption detection signal is input in two consecutive interrupts), it is determined that a power interruption has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S483 and subsequent steps.
In step S483, the outputs of all the output ports 52 are turned off. By this process, for example, when the motor 32 is being driven (while the reel 31 is being rotated) or when the hopper motor 36 is being driven (while medals are being paid out), the driving of the motor 32 is stopped.
Next, the process proceeds to step S484, where a power-off processing completion flag is stored in the RWM 53. This process is a process for storing in the RWM 53 data indicating that the power-off processing has been executed normally.

In the next step S485, checksum data is calculated for the RWM 53. This process calculates a checksum including the work area (RWM 53) used by the program, and the areas used by the program include the program work area, unused area, stack area, etc.
Then, in the next step S486, it is determined whether or not the calculation of the entire range of the checksum has been completed, and if it is determined that the calculation has not been completed, the process returns to step S485 to continue the calculation of the checksum, whereas if it is determined that the calculation of the checksum has been completed, the process proceeds to step S487.

In step S487, the calculated checksum is stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53. Here, the data stored in the RWM 53 is one-byte data (also called complement data) that becomes "0" when all data in the program use area is added to the value stored in the predetermined address at the time of the checksum of the RWM 53.
When the checksum of the RWM 53 is executed at the start of the program, all data in the program use area of the RWM 53 in the same range as above is added to the checksum data. If the checksum data calculated in this way is "0", it is determined to be a normal value, and if it is not "0", it is determined to be an abnormal value.
Next, the process proceeds to step S488, where a reset wait state is entered. When the voltage reaches a predetermined value, a reset signal is output from the voltage monitoring device (power interruption detection circuit) provided on the main control board 50, and in step S488, the process enters a state of waiting for the output of the reset signal.

FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S456 in FIG.
First, in step S491, output ports 2 and 3 (see FIG. 33) are turned off. This process outputs "00000000(B)" from output ports 2 and 3. In the next step S492, output port 4 (see FIG. 33) is turned off. This process also outputs "00000000(B)" from output port 4, similar to the above process.

In step S493, the LED display counter is updated by shifting the bit "1" of the LED display counter to the right by one digit.
In the next step S494, it is determined whether the LED display counter is "0" or not. If it is determined that it is "0", the process proceeds to step S495, and if it is determined that it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S496.
In step S495, the LED display counter is initialized. Here, the LED display counter is set from "00000000 (B)" to "00010000 (B)". Then, the process proceeds to step S496.
In step S496, the LED display counter and the LED display request flag are obtained from the RWM 53. Here, the value of the LED display counter is stored in the D register, and the value of the LED display request flag is stored in the E register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S497, where error number display data, LED display data, and bet display data are acquired. Here, the memory area of the RWM 53 includes a memory area for storing error number display data when an error occurs, a memory area for storing LED display data indicating the on/off state of the game start display LED 79d to the replay display LED 79f among the status display LEDs 79, and a memory area for storing bet display data indicating the on/off state of the (1 to 3) bet display LEDs 79a to 79c.
Specifically, the LED display data is configured as follows.
D0: Unused D1: Unused D2: Unused D3: "1" when game can be started, "0" when game cannot be started
D4: "1" when medals can be inserted, "0" when medals cannot be inserted
D5: "1" when replay is won, "0" when replay is not won
D6: Unused D7: Unused The D3 to D5 bits of the LED display data correspond to the segments D to F of the status display LED 79 shown in FIG.

The bet display data is configured as follows.
When 0 coins are bet: 00000000
When betting 1 coin: 00000001
When betting 2 coins: 00000011
When betting 3 coins: 00000111
The D0 to D2 bits of the bet display data correspond to the segments A to C of the status display LED 79 shown in FIG.
Then, in step S497, the error number display data is read and stored in register B. Also, the LED display data is read and stored in register A, and the bet display data is read and stored in register C.

In the next step S498, the A register value (LED display data) and the C register value (bet display data) are ORed (combined), and the result of the operation is set as segment data for output port 3. The A register value (LED display data) and the C register value (bet display data) are ORed to obtain data indicating whether the status display LED 79 is on or off. When there is a request to display digit 5 (step S516 returns "Yes"), this segment data is output from output port 3.
Next, the process proceeds to step S499, where the register in which the segment data for output port 4 is set is cleared.

In the next step S500, the LED display counter value (D register value) and the LED display request flag value (E register value) are ANDed and stored in the D register, and it is determined whether the value is "0." If it is determined that the value is "0," it is determined that there is no display request, and the process proceeds to step S516. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is not "0," it is determined that there is a display request, and the process proceeds to step S501.

In step S501, LED segment table 2 is set. Here, the LED segment table of this embodiment is provided with LED segment table 1 that defines the segment data when displaying an error number, and LED segment table 2 that defines the segment data when displaying other than the error number (number of credits, number of payouts, setting value, setting change indication, push order instruction information, and specified instruction number), and is stored in the usage area of ROM 54. Then, in step S501, the top address of LED segment table 2 is read, and the value is stored in the HL register.

Here, in the LED segment table 2 set in step S501, offsets and segment data are defined as follows.
Offset "0": Segment data displaying "0" Offset "1": Segment data displaying "1" Offset "2": Segment data displaying "2" Offset "3": Segment data displaying "3" Offset "4": Segment data displaying "4" Offset "5": Segment data displaying "5" Offset "6": Segment data displaying "6" Offset "7": Segment data displaying "7" Offset "8": Segment data displaying "8" Offset "9": Segment data displaying "9" Offset "A": Segment data displaying "=" Offset "B": Segment data displaying "A"

For example, first, when the payout number data "10 (H)" is stored in the acquisition number data, the offset of the upper digit of the payout number data is "1" and the offset of the lower digit is "0." As a result, when digit 3a is lit, segment data displaying "1" is obtained, and when digit 4a is lit, segment data displaying "0" is obtained.
Secondly, for example, if the setting change display data "88(H)" is stored in the acquisition number data, the offset of the upper digit of the setting change display data will be "8" and the offset of the lower digit will be "8." As a result, when digit 3a is lit, segment data displaying "8" is obtained, and when digit 4a is lit, segment data displaying "8" is obtained.

Furthermore, for example, thirdly, when the push order instruction number "A1 (H)" is stored in the acquisition number data, the offset of the upper digit of the push order instruction number becomes "A" and the offset of the lower digit becomes "1." As a result, when digit 3a is lit, segment data displaying "=" is obtained, and when digit 4a is lit, segment data displaying "1" is obtained.
Furthermore, for example, fourthly, when the instruction prescribed number display data "0B(H)" is stored in the acquisition number data, the offset of the upper digit becomes "0" and the offset of the lower digit becomes "B." As a result, when digit 3a is lit, segment data displaying "0" is obtained, and when digit 4a is lit, segment data displaying "A" is obtained.

Next, the process proceeds to step S502, where the setting value data is acquired. Here, the setting value data stored at address "F000(H)" is read and stored in the A register. Next, "1" is added to the A register value to generate setting value display data, which is then stored in the A register. This setting value display data becomes the offset value when displaying the setting value.
As described later, the segment data stored at an address (in LED segment table 1 or 2) that is equal to the top address value of LED segment table 1 or 2 plus an offset value is acquired.
Next, the process proceeds to step S503, where it is determined whether or not there is a request to display the set value. If the D register value is "00010000(B)" and the setting is being changed or confirmed, it is determined that there is a request to display the set value. If it is determined that there is a request to display the set value, the process proceeds to step S514, and if it is determined that there is no request, the process proceeds to step S504.

In step S504, the credit number data is obtained and stored in the A register. In the next step S505, an upper digit offset is obtained. This process executes an operation to divide the credit number data (A register value) obtained in step S504 by "10 (D)", stores the quotient value in the A register, and stores the remainder value in the E register.
In the next step S506, it is determined whether or not there is a request to display the upper digits of the credit number. This process determines whether or not the D0 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 1a) of the D register value is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined as "Yes". If it is determined that there is a request to display the upper digits of the credit number, the process proceeds to step S514, and if it is determined that there is no request, the process proceeds to step S507.

In step S507, it is determined whether there is a request to display the lower digits of the credit number. This process determines whether the D1 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 2a) of the D register value is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined to be "Yes" and proceeds to step S513. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no request to display the lower digits of the credit number, it proceeds to step S508.

In step S508, the winning number data is read and stored in the A register. Here, when medals are paid out based on the winning of a minor prize, the winning number data stores the payout number data. When the setting is being changed, the setting change display data "88 (H)" is stored. When it is time to specify the specified number, the specified number display data "0B (H)" is stored. When the command function is activated (when the pressing order is being notified), the pressing order command number "=x (x = any of 1 to 6)" is stored. Then, one of these data is obtained and stored in the A register.

In the next step S509, it is determined whether or not an error is being displayed. This process reads the value of the B register (the error number display data stored in step S497), determines whether it is "0", and if it is not "0", it is determined that an error is being displayed and proceeds to step S510, and if it is "0", it is determined that an error is not being displayed and proceeds to step S511.
In step S510, the LED segment table 1 for error display is set. Note that a description of the specific configuration of the LED segment table 1 is omitted. In step S510, a process is executed to store the top address of the LED segment table 1 in the HL register. Therefore, in this case, the top address of the LED segment table 1 is set (stored in the HL register) instead of the top address of the LED segment table 2 set in step S501.

In the next step S511, the offset for the upper digits is obtained. In this process, when an error is being displayed (when the B register value is not "0"), the B register value is divided by "10 (D)", the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is stored in the E register. On the other hand, when an error is not being displayed (when the B register value is "0"), the A register value (payout number data, setting change display data, instruction specified number display data, or push order instruction number) is divided by "10 (D)", the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is stored in the E register.

In the next step S512, it is determined whether there is a request to display the upper digits of the acquisition number display LED 78. This process determines whether the D2 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 3a) of the D register value is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined that there is a display request. If it is determined that there is a display request, the process proceeds to step S514, and if it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S513.

In step S513, the offset for the lower digits is obtained. This is a process for storing the data stored in the E register in the A register. In other words, the upper and lower digit values are swapped between the A and E registers. Then, the process proceeds to step S514.
In step S514, the segment data is acquired. This process adds the data stored in the HL register (the top address of LED segment table 1 or 2) to the data stored in the A register (the offset value), and stores the segment data (of LED segment table 1 or 2) corresponding to the address after the addition in the C register.

In the next step S515, segment data for output port 4 is set. The data set here is segment data for displaying the set value (digit 5b). Digits 1b to 4b are turned on in the ratio display process (step S522) described later, so segment data for digits 1b to 4b is not set here.
Therefore, in step S515, when the result in step S503 is “Yes” (a request to display the setting value exists) and the segment data for displaying the setting value is obtained in step S514 and stored in the C register, the C register value is set as the segment data for output port 4.

Then, proceed to step S516 to determine whether or not there is a request to display digit 5. Here, a request to display digit 5 exists when the D register value is "00010000(B)." If it is determined that there is a request to display digit 5, proceed to step S520; if it is determined that there is no request to display digit 5, proceed to step S517.

In step S517, segment data for output port 3 is set. Here, the C register value stored in step S514 is set as the segment data for output port 3. Note that if step S516 is "Yes" (if there is a request to display digit 5), the data set in step S498 becomes the segment data for output port 3.

In the next step S518, data for the advantageous zone display LED 77 is set. Here, the value of the advantageous zone display LED flag is obtained, and it is determined whether this value is "0". If the value of the advantageous zone display LED flag is not "0", it is determined whether the digit to be lit in this interrupt process is digit 4a. If the D3 bit of the D register value is "1", it is determined that it is time to light up digit 4a. In this case, the data obtained by ORing the segment data set in step S517 with "10000000" is set as the segment data for output port 3. This sets data that allows segment P (advantageous zone display LED 77) for digit 4a to light up.

Next, the process proceeds to step S519, where the segment data for output port 4 set in step S515 is cleared. This is to prevent digit 5b (set value display LED 73) from being lit when there is no request to display digit 5 (step S516: No).
Then, the process proceeds to step S520, where the digit signal is output from output port 2, and the segment signal is output from output port 3. Here, the value of the D register is set as the digit data of output port 2, and is output from output port 2.
Moreover, the data of the segment signal output from output port 3 is the data set in step S498 (when digit 5 is lit) or the data set in step S517 (when digits 1 to 4 are lit).

Next, the process proceeds to step S521, where a segment signal is output from output port 4. The data of the segment signal output from output port 4 is the segment data set in step S515 (when there is a request to display the set value) or the data cleared in step S519 (when there is no request to display the set value). In other words, when the segment data for output port 4 is cleared in step S519, "00000000 (B)" is output from output port 4.
Next, the process proceeds to step S522, where the ratio display process (processing for turning on the management information display LED 74) is performed. Note that in this embodiment, a description of the ratio display process is omitted. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

Next, the relationship between the favorable zone display LED 77 and a power outage (when a power outage occurs while the favorable zone display LED 77 is lit) will be explained.
In the interrupt process, when a power cut is detected in FIG. 54, the process proceeds to step S483 and subsequent steps. In this case, the data stored in the RWM 53 is retained even after the power cut.
Then, after the power is turned on, in the program start process (M_PRG_START) of FIG. 38, if the setting key switch is off, a "No" is determined in step S208, so if the power interruption recovery is normal, the process proceeds to the power interruption recovery process (M_POWER_ON; FIG. 40) in step S213.

In the power failure recovery process in Figure 40, the initialization range of RWM 53 is set in step S253, but as described above, this range is an unused area of RWM 53. Therefore, in Figure 35, the favorable zone display LED flag at address "F062 (H)" is not subject to initialization. The same is true for the LED display counter at address "F051 (H)".

In the power failure recovery process of FIG. 40, when the initialization of the RWM 53 is completed, an interrupt is started in step S262. Therefore, after step S262, the interrupt process of FIG. 53 is executed at intervals of 2.235 ms. When the interrupt process is executed, the LED display counter value is read in step S496 during the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) of FIG. 55. Also, when step S512 is "No", there is a request to display the digit 4a. In this case, when there is no error display (step S509 is "No") and the favorable zone display LED flag is "1", in step S518, the D7 bit of the segment data is set to "1", and the segment data is output (step S520). This causes the favorable zone display LED 77 to light up.
In this manner, when the power is cut off while the favorable zone display LED 77 is lit, the favorable zone display LED 77 will light up again when an interrupt process is executed in the power cut recovery process.

On the other hand, if the power is turned on after being turned off with the setting key switch in the on position, the following occurs.
In the program start process of FIG. 38, when the setting key switch is on, the result in step S208 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET; FIG. 39) in step S212.
39, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is specified in step S221, and this initialization range includes the advantageous zone display LED flag at address "F062(H)". If it is determined that the power recovery is not normal and the process proceeds to step S223, the entire range of the RWM 53 (including address "F062(H)") is initialized.

Therefore, when the advantageous zone display LED flag is initialized, even if a "1" indicating that the LED is on has been stored, it will become a "0" indicating that the LED is off.
Thereafter, in step S233 in Fig. 39, an interrupt is started. When the interrupt is started, in the LED display control (Fig. 55), when the timing for lighting the set value display LED 73 comes, the current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73. Then, in Fig. 39, when the process proceeds to step S240, the set value becomes changeable (the set value can be changed by turning on the setting change switch).

Also, in Figure 39, when interrupt processing is started in step S233 and LED display control (Figure 55) is executed, even when the timing for digit 4a to light up arrives, the value of the advantageous zone display LED flag is already "0", so the advantageous zone display LED 77 remains off.
As described above, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch on and the process proceeds to the setting change process, the advantageous zone display LED 77 does not light up. Even if the setting change process is terminated and the process proceeds to the main process, the advantageous zone display LED 77 remains off.

Also, in the main processing of Figure 41, if the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit and a power outage occurs during the loop from step S286 to step S289, i.e., while the reel 31 is rotating, the following will occur.
When a power outage is detected in the interrupt process, in step S483 in Fig. 54, all output ports 52 are turned off, and therefore the drive signal for the motor 32 for rotating the reels 31 is also turned off. As a result, the reels 31 (motor 32) that are rotating also stop due to the power outage.

Next, when power is supplied, the state before the power cut is restored through the power recovery process (M_POWER_ON) in FIG. 40 described above. This causes the output port 52 to output the same drive signal for the motor 32 as before the power cut. Here, the drive signal for the motor 32 before the power cut is a signal that maintains a constant speed state. Note that in this embodiment, when the motor 32 (reel 31) is in a constant speed state, it is driven one step per interrupt (2.235 ms). However, even if a drive signal for a constant speed state is output from the beginning to the motor 32 after it has stopped driving, the rotation torque is weak and the motor 32 cannot be driven.

Therefore, the reel 31 does not rotate, and the index sensor 33 does not detect the index of the reel 31 (does not cut the index). When it is determined that the index has not been detected for a certain period of time, it is determined that the reel 31 is not rotating, and the motor 32 is accelerated again (restarted). The motor 32 is accelerated, for example, by first driving one step with 20 interrupts (20 x 2.235 = 44.7 ms), then one step with 16 interrupts, then one step with 12 interrupts, and so on, driving one step in gradually shorter periods of time. The accelerated state takes, for example, about 100 steps. This allows the reel 31 to start rotating.

On the other hand, when the power is turned on and an interrupt is started in step S262 in Figure 40, digits 1a to 5a are dynamically lit based on the value of the LED display counter, but if the first LED display counter after the interrupt is started is the value that lights up digit 3a ("00000100 (B)" in Figure 34), then after four interrupts from that point on, the LED display counter will become "00001000 (B)" and the timing for lighting digit 4a (advantageous zone display LED 77) will arrive.

On the other hand, if the power is cut off just before the index of reel 31 is detected by reel sensor 33 (for example, when reel sensor 33 detects the index of reel 31 when there is only one or a few steps remaining), even if it is determined that the index of reel 31 is not detected by reel sensor 33 after power is turned on and re-acceleration is performed, as described above, at least several tens of interrupts are required for reel 31 (motor 32) to reach a constant speed state.
Therefore, after the power is turned on, the advantageous zone display LED 77 lights up, and then the reel 31 enters a constant speed state. In other words, when the stop switch 42 is ready to be operated, the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned on.

Furthermore, when the reel 31 stops at a position where the index of the reel 31 is relatively far from the reel sensor 33, several to several tens of interrupts are required after the interrupt is started until the reel sensor 33 determines that it has not detected the index of the reel 31. Therefore, in this case, the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned on before the motor 32 accelerates again.
As described above, after recovery from a power outage, the advantageous zone display LED 77 is set to light up before the reel 31 starts spinning again and returns to a constant speed state.

41, if the advantageous zone display LED 77 is on and a power outage occurs while the hopper motor 36 is being driven during the medal payout process in step S294 due to a winning prize, the following occurs: As explained in the sixth embodiment, the hopper motor 36 is a DC motor.
In the medal payout process for winning shown in Fig. 49, in step S398, the hopper motor 36 is driven, and when the payout sensors 37a and 37b each normally detect the movable piece 39a as shown in Fig. 7 (S31 to S34 in Fig. 8), it is determined that one medal has been normally paid out. Then, the hopper motor 36 continues to drive until it is determined that a number of medals equivalent to the payout number have been paid out.
If a power outage is detected in the interrupt process before all medals have been paid out while medals are being paid out, all output ports 52 are turned off in step S483 in Fig. 54, and the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is also turned off. This causes the medal payout process to be interrupted.

Next, when power is supplied, the process goes through the power recovery process (M_POWER_ON) in FIG. 40 described above, and returns to step S294 (award medal payout process for winning) of the main process (FIG. 41). This causes the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 to be output from the output port 52 in the same manner as before the power was cut off. Note that, as shown in FIG. 41, the main process does not proceed until the award payout process in step S294 is completed.
On the other hand, when the power is restored after a power outage, as described above, the timing for lighting digit 4a (advantageous zone display LED 77) arrives within four interrupts.

In contrast, as shown in FIG. 8, the time required to pay out one medal is roughly about 100 ms, although it cannot be said in general. Therefore, the advantageous zone display LED 77 lights up when the medal payout process for winning is resumed after the power is turned off and before the remaining medals are paid out. In other words, when the medal payout process for winning is completed after the power is restored from the power outage, the advantageous zone display LED 77 lights up at that point.

In addition, the following methods can be used to prevent the advantageous zone display LED 77 from turning off for a moment when there is a momentary power outage.
54, when a power outage is detected, the outputs of all ports 52 are turned off in step S483, so that after this process, no digit signal is output from output port 2 and no segment signal is output from output port 3. As a result, the advantageous zone display LED 77, which is the segment P of digit 4a, is turned off.

Therefore, when the advantageous zone display LED flag is "1" after proceeding to step S488 in Fig. 54 and waiting for reset, an ON signal of D3 bit (digit 4a) is output from output port 2, and an ON signal of D7 bit (segment P) is output from output port 3. Note that in Fig. 54, in the loop processing after proceeding to step S488 and waiting for reset, no interrupt processing occurs, so the lighting of the advantageous zone display LED 77 in this case is constant lighting (static lighting). This makes it possible to prevent the advantageous zone display LED 77 from appearing to be turned off even if a momentary interruption occurs.
Alternatively, in the process of step S483 in Fig. 54, the output ports 2 and 3 may not be turned off, but the other output ports may be turned off. Even with this control, it is possible to prevent the advantageous zone display LED 77 from being turned off due to a momentary interruption.

In this embodiment, the segment P of digit 4a is set as the advantageous zone display LED 77, and the advantageous zone display LED 77 is illuminated by dynamic lighting. However, this is not limited to the above, and the advantageous zone display LED 77 may be configured as a separate, independent LED. Then, by statically lighting the advantageous zone display LED 77 and not turning off the output port corresponding to the advantageous zone display LED 77 even when a power outage is detected, it is possible to prevent the advantageous zone display LED 77 from going out in the event of a momentary power outage.

Next, the display of the difference in number on the sub-control board 80 side will be described. The sub-control board 80 displays the difference in number on the image display device 23 during AT. For this reason, in this embodiment, the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80 is provided with the following memory areas.
has the following:
1) AT flag 2) Sub difference number counter 3) Pull back flag 4) Pull back game count counter

The main control board 50 transmits a command corresponding to the on/off of the AT flag for each game to the sub-control board 80. Note that a command may be transmitted only when the AT flag on the main control board 50 side changes from off to on or from on to off.
The sub-control board 80 receives on/off information about the AT flag from the main control board 50 and turns on/off the AT flag provided on the sub-control board 80. Furthermore, the sub-control board 80 stores when the AT flag on the sub-control board 80 side has changed from off to on (AT flag rising data) and from on to off (AT flag falling data).

As described above, the main control board 50 updates the AT game count counter for each game during the AT, and ends the AT when the AT game count counter becomes "0." Furthermore, when the difference counter becomes "2400 (D)" or the advantageous zone clear counter becomes "0," the AT (and advantageous zone) ends.
When the AT and advantageous period are ended, the main control board 50 executes an initialization process for the difference number counter, so that when the next game is played and the normal period is entered, the difference number counter becomes "0".

In contrast, the sub-control board 80 is equipped with a sub-difference number counter that counts the difference number during the AT. The sub-difference number counter is "0" when the AT starts (except when the AT is won during the pull-back period described below and the AT starts), and thereafter the difference number is updated for each game. Note that when a carryover occurs, unlike the difference number counter on the main control board 50, it is not corrected to "0" and the carryover remains as it is.

For example, when AT is started,
1st game: No winning combination (difference in number of coins "-3")
Second game: No winning combination (difference in number of coins "-3")
3rd game: Push order bell win (difference in number of coins "+5")
4th game: No winning combination (difference in number of coins "-3")
5th game: Push order bell win (difference in number of coins "+5")
Let us assume that it was.
In this case, the sub-difference counter (2-byte counter) is
1st game: 0(H)-3(H)=FFFD(H)
Second game: FFFD(H)-3(H)=FFFA(H)
3rd game: FFFA(H)+5(H)=FFFF(H)
4th game: FFFF(H)-3(H)=FFFC(H)
5th game: FFFC(H)+5(H)=0001(H)
It will be updated as follows.

When a replay is won, the sub-difference counter is not updated, as is the difference counter. However, this is not limited to this, and in a game when a replay is won, the payout number may be set to "0", and the bet number for the next game (replay) may be set to "0" to calculate the sub-difference.
Furthermore, as described above, the difference counter of the main control board 50 executes initialization processing when the advantageous period ends, but the sub-difference counter of the sub-control means 80 may not immediately execute initialization processing and may not stop counting even when the AT (advantageous period) ends. When the sub-control board 80 ends the AT and continues counting the sub-difference counter, it sets the pull-back flag to ON ("1").

The sub-control board 80 judges the sub-difference number counter value when the AT ends, and if the sub-difference number counter value is less than (or equal to or less than) a predetermined value (for example, "2000 (D)"), the sub-difference number counter continues counting. In contrast, if the sub-difference number counter value exceeds (or is equal to or greater than) the predetermined value, the sub-difference number counter is cleared. If the AT ends when the sub-difference number counter is close to its upper limit, when the AT is pulled back, there is a possibility that the sub-difference number counter value will immediately reach the upper limit, so in such a case, the difference number is not carried over to the next AT.

The pull-back flag is a flag for determining whether the AT has been pulled back (won again or not) within a predetermined number of plays ("50" plays in this embodiment) after the AT has ended.
When the AT ends, the pull-back flag is turned on and the pull-back play count counter is set to "50 (D)". The pull-back play count counter is used to count the number of plays after the AT ends (during the pull-back period). When the AT ends, the pull-back play count counter is set to "50 (D)", and thereafter, if the AT is not won, it continues to subtract "1" for each play. When the pull-back play count counter becomes "0", the AT pull-back has failed, the pull-back flag is turned off, and the sub difference number counter is cleared (initialized).
Then, after the AT ends, when the pull-back flag is on, the sub-control board 80 updates the sub-difference number counter.

In addition, during the pull-back period (when the pull-back flag is on), when a special role such as BB is won and a special game such as BB game is played, the pull-back game count counter is not decremented (updated) during the special game.
On the other hand, if the AT is won before the pull-back game number counter reaches "0", the AT pull-back is successful, and in the subsequent AT, the number of coins inherited from the difference in the number of coins from the previous AT is displayed as an image.
for example,
When the difference in number of coins at the first AT is +1000 coins and the difference in number of coins from the end of the first AT until winning the second AT is -100 coins, the difference in number of coins at the start of the second AT is displayed as "+900 coins" in the image.

In addition, an upper limit value that can be counted by the sub difference number counter is set. In this embodiment, it is set as follows.
1) Upper limit during AT: 2414 (D)
2) When a symbol combination corresponding to a special role stops during AT and the number of coins that can be won in the special game related to the special role (expected difference in number of coins) is "250 (D)", the upper limit is: "2414 (D) - 250 (D) = 2164 (D)".
3) Upper limit during the withdrawal period: 2000 (D)

As shown in 1) above, when the sub-difference number counter value exceeds "2414 (D)" during the AT, further counting of the sub-difference number is stopped and the sub-difference number counter is cleared.
In this embodiment, the sub-difference number counter value and the difference number displayed as an image on the image display device 23 are linked (matched). For example, when the sub-difference number counter becomes "1000 (D)" during the AT, the image display device 23 displays an image such as "Number of coins acquired during AT: 1000 coins."

As described above, when the difference counter of the main control board 50 exceeds "2400 (D)", the AT (and the advantageous section) ends. Therefore, as described above, the maximum value that the difference counter can take is "2414 (D)".
Therefore, the maximum countable value of the sub-difference number counter on the sub-control board 80 is set to "2414 (D)" in accordance with the difference number counter of the main control board 50.
Since the maximum value of the sub-difference number counter is "2414 (D)", the maximum difference number displayed on the image display device 23 is "2414". This makes it possible to prevent an excessive difference number from being displayed as an image, and to prevent an image display that significantly stimulates gambling.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 26 (ninth embodiment), when the number of coins that can be won in BB play is 250, if BB is won during AT and the symbol combination corresponding to BB is displayed in a stopped state, the sub-difference number counter value at that time is determined. Then, when the sub-difference number counter value exceeds the above-mentioned "2164 (D)", it will exceed "2414 (D)" at the end of BB play, so the sub-difference number counter is cleared at the time the symbol combination corresponding to BB is displayed in a stopped state (2) above).

In this case, the image display device 23 displays an image such as "Congratulations" or "Congratulations" as an image display corresponding to the difference in number of coins. Note that instead of displaying "Congratulations" or the like from the start of the BB game in this way, the sub difference number counter may not be cleared at the start of the BB game, but may continue to count until it exceeds "2414(D)", and when it exceeds "2414(D)", the sub difference number counter may be cleared and an image such as "Congratulations" may be displayed.

Furthermore, there is a possibility that the difference number may increase during the pull-back period. For example, a case may be mentioned in which a special combination is won during the pull-back period, and the difference number counter value increases as a result of playing a special game.
In particular, in the case where the AT is won when a specific BB is won, the AT is started after the BB game ends. On the other hand, if the sub-difference number counter is close to the upper limit at the end of the BB game, the upper limit is reached immediately even if the difference number is carried over to the AT after the BB game ends. Therefore, when the sub-difference number counter value exceeds "2000 (D)" during the pull-back period, the sub-difference number counter is cleared. For example, if the BB with AT is won during the AT pull-back period and the BB game is consumed, when the sub-difference number counter value exceeds "2000 (D)" at the end of the final BB game, the sub-difference number counter is cleared. As a result, the display of the difference number starts from "0" in the AT after the BB ends.

As mentioned above, even if the game transitions to a special game during the pull-back period, the pull-back game count counter is not decremented during the special game. If a special combination is won during the pull-back period, the update of the sub-difference number counter may be continued or interrupted during the special game. As an example of interrupting the update, for example, if the sub-difference number counter value during the pull-back period is "1000 (D)" and a BB with AT is won, the sub-difference number counter value stops at "1000 (D)". Then, even if "250" coins are won in the subsequent BB game, this "250" coins is not added to the sub-difference number counter. Therefore, when the game transitions to the AT after the BB game ends, the difference number starts from "1000" coins.

On the other hand, as an example of continuing to update the sub-difference number counter, for example, when the sub-difference number counter value during the pull-back period is "1000 (D)" and you win a BB with AT, and then win "250" in the BB game, the sub-difference number counter at the end of the BB game will be "1250 (D)". Then, when you move to the AT after the BB game ends, the difference number will start from "1250".
In addition, when the sub-difference number counter continues to be updated, for example, when the sub-difference number counter value during the pullback period is "1800 (D)" and you win a BB with AT, and win "250" in the subsequent BB game, the sub-difference number counter at the end of the BB game will be "2050 (D)", exceeding "2000 (D)". Therefore, the sub-difference number counter is cleared by the end of the BB game, and in the AT after the BB ends, the display of the difference number starts from "0".

In addition, the sub difference number counter may update the difference number of the game regardless of the number of bets, but in this embodiment, the difference number of the game is updated only when the game is started with a predetermined specified number.
Here, the difference counter of the main control board 50 is updated regardless of the number of bets for the game.
In contrast, in this embodiment, the condition for updating the sub-difference number counter is set to when the bet number (prescribed number) is "3", and when a game is started with the bet number (prescribed number) of "2", the difference number is not updated for that game.

Next, the sub-difference number counter management process will be described with reference to a flowchart.
56 and 57 are flowcharts showing the sub-difference number counter management process in the 11th embodiment.
In step S531 in Fig. 56, the sub-control board 80 judges whether the AT flag is on or not (whether AT is currently being performed or not). If it is judged that the AT flag is on, the process proceeds to step S533, and if it is judged that the AT flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S532.

In step S532, the sub-control board 80 determines whether the withdrawal flag is on. If it is determined that the withdrawal flag is on, the process proceeds to step S533, and if it is determined that the withdrawal flag is not on, the process according to this flowchart ends. In other words, when the AT is not in progress and the withdrawal flag is off, the sub-difference number counter is not updated.

In the next step S533, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not a bet command has been received from the main control board 50. When the start switch 41 is operated and the number of bets for the game is determined, the main control board 50 transmits a bet command that can determine the number of bets for the game to the sub-control board 80. If it is determined that this bet command has been received, the process proceeds to step S534.

In step S534, it is determined whether the bet number (prescribed number) is "3" based on the received bet command. If it is determined that the bet number is "3", the process proceeds to step S535, and if it is determined that the bet number is not "3", the process according to this flowchart ends. In this manner, in this embodiment, the sub difference number counter is updated only when the bet number is "3". Therefore, even during the AT or during the pullback period, if the bet number is other than "3", the sub difference number counter is not updated in that game. Note that, as is clear from Figures 51 and 52, the difference number counter on the main control board 50 side is updated regardless of the bet number (prescribed number) in that game.

When proceeding from step S534 to step S535, the sub-control board 80 subtracts the bet number ("3") from the sub-difference number counter. Next, proceeding to step S536, the sub-control board 80 judges whether or not a payout command has been received. During the main process (M_MAIN) of FIG. 41, after the display judgment is made in step S291, the main control board 50 transmits a payout command capable of determining the payout number to the sub-control board 80.
When it is determined in step S536 that a payout command has been received, the process proceeds to step S537, in which the sub-control board 80 adds the payout number to the sub difference number counter.
In the next step S538, the sub-control board 80 judges whether the AT flag is on or not. If it is judged to be on, the process proceeds to step S539, and if it is judged not to be on, the process proceeds to step S547 in FIG.

In step S539, it is determined whether the AT flag has been turned on in the current game (whether the AT flag has risen to on or not). If it is determined that the AT flag has been turned on in the current game, the process proceeds to step S540, and if it is determined that the AT flag has not been turned on in the current game (the AT flag has risen to off), the process proceeds to step S543. Therefore, the process proceeds from step S539 to step S543 only if the AT has been on since before the previous game.

In step S540, the sub-control board 80 determines whether the pull-back flag is on. If it is determined that the pull-back flag is on, the process proceeds to step S541, and if it is determined that the pull-back flag is not on, the process according to this flowchart ends. For example, if the AT flag is on in the current game ("Yes" in step S539) and the pull-back flag is off ("No" in step S540, i.e., the pull-back period is not in progress), the sub-difference number counter is "0" at this point, so there is no need to update the sub-difference number counter, and the process according to this flowchart ends.

When the process proceeds from step S540 to step S541, the sub-control board 80 turns off the pull-back flag. In the next step S542, the sub-control board 80 clears the pull-back play count counter. Here, when step S539 is "Yes" and step S540 is "Yes", this corresponds to a case where the AT is won during the pull-back period. Therefore, in this case, the pull-back flag is turned off and the pull-back play count counter is cleared.
Next, the process proceeds to step S543, where the sub-control board 80 judges whether the sub-difference number counter exceeds the upper limit value of "2414 (D)". If it is judged that the sub-difference number counter exceeds "2414 (D)", the process proceeds to step S546. Then, in step S546, the sub-difference number counter is cleared. This can occur when the difference number increases during the pull-back period after the AT ends, and the sub-difference number counter exceeds "2414 (D)".

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S543 that the sub-difference counter does not exceed "2414 (D)", the process proceeds to step S544, where the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to BB has been stopped in the current game. When a symbol combination corresponding to BB has been stopped, a command for this is transmitted from the main control board 50.
The answer to "Yes" in step S544 is when the BB with AT is won during the pull-back period. In this flowchart, the symbol combination corresponding to the BB is stopped and displayed in the game in which the BB is won.
When it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to BB has been stopped and displayed, the process proceeds to step S545, and when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to BB has not been stopped and displayed, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S545, the sub-control board 80 determines whether the sub-difference number counter exceeds "2164 (D)". If it is determined that the sub-difference number counter exceeds "2164 (D)", the process proceeds to step S546, where the sub-difference number counter is cleared as described above, and the process according to this flowchart ends. In contrast, if it is determined in step S545 that the sub-difference number counter does not exceed "2164 (D)", the process according to this flowchart ends (maintaining the sub-difference number counter value).

As described above, in the case where the BB game of this embodiment ends with a payout of more than 250 coins as shown in FIG. 26 (ninth embodiment), if the sub difference number counter exceeds "2164 (D)" at the start of the BB game, it will exceed "2414 (D)" (upper limit) by the time of the final game of the BB game. Therefore, in the example of this flowchart, at the start of the BB game (before the start), it is determined whether the sub difference number counter will exceed the upper limit during the BB game, and if it is determined that it will exceed the upper limit, the sub difference number counter is cleared before the start of the BB game. And, since the difference number displayed as an image on the image display device 23 is based on the sub difference number counter, in the BB game after the sub difference number counter is cleared, the difference number itself is not displayed, or instead of the difference number display, for example, "Congratulations" or "Congratulations" is displayed.

When it is determined in step S538 that the AT flag is not on and the process proceeds to step S547 in FIG. 57, the sub-control board 80 determines whether the AT flag has been turned off in the current game (whether the falling edge of the AT flag is on or not, i.e., whether the AT has ended in the current game). If it is determined that the AT flag has been turned off in the current game, the process proceeds to step S548, and if it is determined that the AT flag has not been turned off in the current game (the falling edge of the AT flag is off), the process proceeds to step S551.

In step S548, the sub-control board 80 determines whether the sub-difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)". If it is determined that the sub-difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)", the process proceeds to step S549. On the other hand, if it is determined that the sub-difference number counter is not less than "2000 (D)", the process proceeds to step S557.

In step S549, the sub-control board 80 turns on the pull-back flag. Next, the process proceeds to step S550, where the sub-control board 80 sets the pull-back game number counter to the initial value "50 (D)". Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
By the above processing of steps S548 to S550, when the sub-difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)" at the end of the AT, the pull-back flag is turned on and the initial value of the number of pull-back games is set to "50 (D)". The reason for setting "50 (D)" as the initial value of the number of pull-back games is to make AT pull-backs within 50 games a consecutive AT (a condition for carrying over the sub-difference number to the next AT). Therefore, the number of pull-back games is not limited to "50 (D)" and can be set to various values such as "30 (D)" or "100 (D)" depending on the specifications.
In addition, when the sub-difference number counter is equal to or greater than "2000 (D)" at the end of the AT, even if the AT is subsequently pulled back, there is a high possibility that the sub-difference number counter will exceed the upper limit value during the AT after the pull-back, so in such a case, the pull-back flag is not set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S548 that the sub-difference number counter is not less than "2000 (D)" and the process proceeds to step S557, the sub-control board 80 clears the sub-difference number counter. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends. In other words, if the sub-difference number counter is equal to or greater than "2000 (D)" when the AT ends, the sub-difference number counter will start from the initial value "0" even if the process subsequently transitions to the AT.

Also, when the process proceeds from step S547 to step S551, the sub-control board 80 judges whether or not the current game is in BB operation (BB game in progress). The information on the operation state flag shown in FIG. 35 is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80.
If it is determined in step S551 that the BB is not in operation, the process proceeds to step S552, where the sub-control board 80 determines whether the pull-back flag is on or not. If it is determined that the pull-back flag is on, the process proceeds to step S553, and if it is determined that the pull-back flag is not on, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In step S553, the pull-back play count counter is decremented by "1". In other words, during the pull-back period, when the BB is in operation (BB play), the specification is such that the update (decrement) process of the pull-back play count counter is not executed. However, this is not limited to this, and the pull-back play count counter may be decremented even during the BB play during the pull-back period.
In the next step S554, the sub-control board 80 judges whether the pull-back game counter has become "0". If it is judged that the pull-back game counter is not "0", the process according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the pull-back game counter is "0", the process proceeds to step S555.

In step S555, the pull-back flag is turned off. In the next step S556, the pull-back play count counter is cleared. When step S554 is "Yes", the pull-back play count counter is set to "0", so the process of clearing the pull-back play count counter in step S556 may be omitted. However, when step S560 described later is "No", the pull-back play count counter is cleared via step S556.
Next, the process proceeds to step S557, where the sub-control board 80 clears the sub-difference number counter. In this way, when the pull-back flag is off and the pull-back game count counter is "0" (cleared), the sub-difference number counter is cleared (set to "0"), and thereafter maintains "0" until the AT starts.

When it is determined in step S551 that the BB is in operation and the process proceeds to step S558, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the current game is the final game during the BB operation (BB game). The determination of whether or not the BB game is the final game may be made by the sub-control board 80 by calculating the number of payouts from the start of the BB game, or may be made based on a command sent from the main control board 50.
If it is determined that this is the final game of the BB game, the process proceeds to step S559, and if it is determined that this is not the final game, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S559, the sub-control board 80 judges whether the pull-back flag is on or not. If it is judged that the pull-back flag is on, the process proceeds to step S560, and if it is judged that the pull-back flag is not on, the process according to this flowchart ends.
In step S560, the sub-control board 80 judges whether the sub-difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)". When it is judged that the sub-difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)", the process proceeds to step S561, and the pull-back game number counter is reset to "50 (D)". Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. As a result, when the pull-back flag is on, a BB game is executed, and when the sub-difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)" in the final game of the BB game, a pull-back period (50 games) is newly set again from the next game. That is, after the AT ends, the pull-back game number is set to the initial value "50", and when the BB game is executed during the pull-back period, and the difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)" in the final game of the BB game, the pull-back game number is reset to "50".

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S560 that the sub-difference number counter is not less than "2000 (D)", the process proceeds to step S555. In step S555 and subsequent steps, the pull-back flag is turned off, the pull-back game count counter is cleared, and the sub-difference number counter is cleared. This ends the pull-back period. In this way, in the final play of the BB game, if the pull-back period is in progress, the sub-difference number at that time is determined, and if the sub-difference number is "2000 (D)" or more, the pull-back period ends.

In the above-described sub difference number counter management, the sub difference number counter is updated when a bet command is received. That is, the sub difference number is updated before all reels 31 stop. In contrast, the difference number counter is executed in the advantageous zone counter management of the game end check process, so the subtraction of the bet number is also executed after all reels 31 stop.
Therefore, in the same manner as the difference counter, the sub difference number counter may also subtract the bet number and add the payout number after all the reels 31 have stopped.

In addition, the sub-difference number counter stores the value (the value after the digits are subtracted) even if the difference number at the end of the game becomes negative (if the digits are subtracted), but is not limited to this, and may be corrected to "0" when the sub-difference number counter is negative (if the digits are subtracted) at the end of the game, just like the difference number counter.
Furthermore, even if the sub-difference number counter is specified to be negative, the image display device 23 displays the difference number "0".

In this case, the following processing can be performed.
As described above, the sub difference number counter is a 2-byte counter, and its upper limit is "2414 (D)", i.e., "096E (H)". Therefore, the value of the most significant digit is "0 (H)". Therefore, by determining whether the value of the most significant digit is "0 (H)", it is possible to determine whether a carry-over has occurred. Then, when it is determined that a carry-over has occurred (the value of the most significant digit is not "0 (H)"), the difference number displayed on the image display device 23 can be set to "0".

In addition, in the examples of Figures 56 and 57, BB is given as an example, but this is not limited to this and can also be applied to a sub-bonus (AT that looks like a bonus (BB)). The end condition of a sub-bonus is set to the number of plays, the number of coins paid out, or the difference in the number of coins. In this case, in step S544, it is determined whether the sub-bonus symbol has stopped and been displayed. Also, in step S551, it is determined whether a sub-bonus play is in progress. Furthermore, in step S558, it is determined whether this is the final play of the sub-bonus play.

<Twelfth embodiment>
Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described. In the twelfth embodiment, a prescribed number (a bet number) is specified before the start of a game when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
The display of push order instruction information is the operation of an instruction function (processing related to the instruction function), but here, the "instruction function" is a device that makes it easier to win. Therefore, the instruction of a specified number is not the operation of an instruction function (processing related to the instruction function). However, this is not limited to this, and the instruction of a specified number may be defined as one of the processes related to the instruction function.

FIG. 58 is a diagram showing the reel condition device, the prescribed number for each RT, and the number of winning positions in the 12th embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 58(A), BB1 and BB2 are provided as special role condition devices. When BB1 is won and the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 stops, the game moves to BB1. The BB1 game ends with the payout of more than 100 coins. After the BB1 game ends, the game moves to non-RT.
In addition, when BB2 is won and the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 is stopped, the game shifts to BB2 game. The BB2 game ends when the payout exceeds 30 coins. After the BB2 game ends, the game shifts to non-RT.

As shown in FIG. 58(B), RT includes non-RT, BB1 inside, BB2 inside, BB1 operating, and BB2 operating.
Non-RT continues until either BB1 or BB2 is selected. If BB1 is selected during non-RT, the player moves to the BB1 interior, and if BB2 is selected, the player moves to the BB2 interior.
The period inside BB1 continues until the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 is stopped. When the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 is stopped inside BB1, the game shifts to BB1 operation, i.e., BB1 game. Similarly, the period inside BB2 continues until the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 is stopped. When the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 is stopped inside BB2, the game shifts to BB2 operation, i.e., BB2 game.
In addition, the number of special roles that can be carried over is limited to one. Therefore, when BB1 is in, BB2 is not won. Similarly, when BB2 is in, BB1 is not won.

As shown in FIG. 58B, when BB1 and BB2 are in operation (when the reels are in operation), the specified number is limited to "3." A game cannot be started with a bet number of "1" or "2."
On the other hand, in the non-RT state where the role is not in operation, the specified number in BB1 and BB2 is either "2" or "3." As a result, a game can be started if the specified number is either "2" or "3."
In Fig. 58(C), the internal lottery number indicates the number of places when the denominator is "65536". For example, the winning probability of the winning number "1" (normal replay) in non-RT is "9000/65536". In addition, the advantageous zone lottery number indicates the number of places when the denominator is "16384". Therefore, when the advantageous zone lottery number is "16384", it means that the probability of winning the advantageous zone is "16384/16384".
58(C), in the non-RT mode, BB2 is drawn but BB1 is not drawn when the specified number is 2. Conversely, BB1 is drawn but BB2 is not drawn when the specified number is 3.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 58(C), when the non-RT specified number is "3" or when the specified number inside BB2 is "3", it is possible to draw a favorable zone. The drawing of the favorable zone is set so that the favorable zone is always won except when the winning role is not won. Therefore, in the 12th embodiment, it is possible to make the game zone almost the favorable zone. In other words, the 12th embodiment is a specification of the "7P" type described above.

In the twelfth embodiment, it is assumed that the game proceeds within BB2 with the specified number "3". Then, the AT is drawn within BB2, and when the AT is won, the AT is executed. Furthermore, it is assumed that the BB2 that has carried over the winning will not be allowed to win.
For example, if the current state is non-RT, it is necessary to move from non-RT to inside BB2 (to win BB2 in non-RT). In order to win BB2 in non-RT, it is necessary to play with the specified number "2".
Therefore, if the current state is not RT, the game is played with the specified number "2", BB2 is won, and the next game is moved to inside BB2. Furthermore, since the lottery for the advantageous zone is held in inside BB2 when the specified number is "3", the game is played with the specified number "3" in inside BB2.

In addition, BB2, which has won with the specified number of "2", cannot stop and display the symbol combination unless the specified number is "2". Similarly, BB1, which has won with the specified number of "3", cannot stop and display the symbol combination on the activated line unless the specified number is "3".
For this reason, when BB2 is won at the specified number "2" in non-RT, the game moves to inside BB2, and the game progresses at the specified number "3", the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 will not be displayed stopped on the active line even when the winning combination is not won.
In this way, in the twelfth embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning special role is stopped and a transition to a special game is made, and the number of medals is not increased in the special game, but the special role is used to carry over the winning role, in other words, to create a BB inside.

As shown in FIG. 58(C), in non-RT, there is a probability of about 1/5 to win BB2, so it is possible to move from non-RT to inside BB2 early.
In addition, when a small win or a replay is won within BB2, there is a 100% probability that the advantageous zone will be won. Therefore, most of the game period within BB2 will be an advantageous zone. Of course, it is also possible to set the winning probability of the advantageous zone to less than 100%.

In addition, the instruction function can be activated (processing related to the instruction function can be executed) only when play is performed with a specified number, particularly with the specified number "3" in this embodiment. Therefore, if the AT is won during a favorable zone inside BB2 and the AT is executed, when play begins with the specified number "3" and the push order bell is won, the instruction function is activated and push order instruction information is displayed on the winning number display LED 78. In contrast, when play begins with the specified number (number of bets) "2" during the AT, the instruction function is not activated even if the push order bell is won.

Also, similar to the eleventh embodiment, even when a game is played with the specified number "2" during the AT, the difference number counter is updated based on the number of bets and the number of payouts in that game, and the advantageous zone clear counter is updated. However, the AT play count counter (AT difference number counter in the case of a difference number management type AT) is not updated. On the other hand, when a game is played with the specified number "3" during the AT, the difference number counter, advantageous zone clear counter, and AT play count counter (AT difference number counter in the case of a difference number management type AT) are all updated.
In addition, for RT, a transition is always made when a transition condition is met (when a symbol combination that satisfies the transition condition is displayed in a stopped state) regardless of the specified number. On the other hand, for the main game state (normal, CZ, AT, etc.), a transition may be made regardless of the specified number, or a transition may be made only when a game is played with one specified number (for example, "3").

When a game is started with the specified number "2" inside BB2 due to a player's operational error and the game does not result in a winning combination, the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 with the winning combination can be displayed as a stop symbol. On the other hand, when a game is started with the specified number "2" due to a player's operational error and any role is won in the game, the winning role in the game takes priority, so the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 with the winning combination will not be displayed as a stop symbol. However, if a replay is won in the game, the next game will also be played with a bet number of "2", so there is a possibility that the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 with the winning combination will be displayed as a stop symbol in the next game as well.

For example, if play is started with the specified number "2" in BB2 and in the AT, and the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 is stopped and displayed, BB2 play will start. Then, when BB2 play ends, a transition to non-RT (AT) will occur. Then, in this non-RT, information corresponding to the specified number "2" is displayed on the winning number display LED 78, and the player is notified that they should play with the specified number "2" (specified number instruction). This is to allow play to be performed with the specified number "2", win BB2, and transition to inside BB2. Therefore, in the AT and non-RT, the specified number "2" is indicated until BB2 is won.

As described above, when displaying information corresponding to the specified number "2" on the acquired number display LED 78, "0A" is displayed. Note that the indication of the specified number "2" is not limited to "0A", and other indications may be used as long as they are not confused with the payout number, the setting change indication "88", the error number, or the push order indication information. For example, since the maximum number of medals that can be displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 is "15", for example, "22" may be displayed as information corresponding to the specified number "2".

In addition, in this embodiment, the specified number is specified only during AT, and the specified number is not specified during non-AT. For example, when the BB2 game ends and the game transitions to non-RT, if the game is not in AT at that time, the specified number is not specified. Therefore, in this case, the player must decide to play with the specified number "2" and transition to BB2.
As shown in Fig. 58, in the case of non-RT and non-advantageous zone, if a game is played with the specified number "3", if a small win or replay is won, the advantageous zone will also be won. And, when it becomes a non-RT and advantageous zone, the specified number "2" may be instructed (even if it is not AT).
Furthermore, not limited to the above, when a transition occurs to non-RT, the specified number "2" may be indicated regardless of whether the zone is AT/non-AT or advantageous/non-advantageous.

Also, in non-RT, when the player bets "2", the specified number may not be specified, and when the player bets "3", the specified number may be specified. In the main processing of FIG. 41, the number of bets is determined in the medal management processing of step S276, and here, when it is determined that the current number of bets is "2", the specified number "2" is not specified (a process of clearing the acquired number data is executed), and when the current number of bets is "3", the specified number "2" is specified (instruction specified number display data is stored as acquired number data).

In addition, when BB2 play ends and the game transitions to non-RT, wait processing may be executed at the end of the final BB2 game. During this wait processing, game progress (progression of the main processing shown in FIG. 41) cannot be performed. Therefore, after the wait processing ends, the game transitions to the game start set processing for the next game (non-RT), where the specified number is specified.

In the non-RT during the AT, the instruction of the prescribed number "2" continues until BB2 is won. Therefore, it may end in one game or may be played multiple times.
Also, as shown in FIG. 58(C), when playing with the specified number "2" in a non-RT, a replay (normal replay, watermelon replay, cherry replay) may be won. When a replay is won as a result of playing with the specified number "2", it is optional whether or not to specify the specified number "2" in the next game. In a non-RT and AT, the specified number "2" may be specified before the start of the game until BB2 is won, regardless of whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the replay has stopped. Alternatively, when a symbol combination corresponding to the replay has stopped and been displayed, the player cannot arbitrarily select the specified number (number of bets) in the next game (replay), so the specified number may not be specified in that game.

This also applies when, for example, a game is played with a specified number of "3" in a non-RT and AT and a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed in a stopped state. In the next game (replay), the player cannot select the specified number (number of bets) at will, so in this case too, the specified number may not be specified. Alternatively, even if the number of bets in that game cannot be selected, the specified number "2" may be specified as a warning.
In non-RT and AT, when a game is played with the specified number "2", BB2 is won, and the game moves to inside BB2 from the next game, the specified number will not be indicated thereafter unless the game moves to non-RT again.

The timing for indicating the specified number is after all reels 31 have stopped, and after the payout process has ended if there has been a payout based on the winning of a small winning combination, and before the start switch 41 for the next game is operated (for example, before medal betting becomes possible (before bets are accepted)). Therefore, after a payout based on the winning of a small winning combination in the final game of BB2 play, the specified number "2" is indicated before the start of the next game (non-RT). As shown in FIG. 42 (eleventh embodiment), in step S321 of the game start set process (MS_GAME_SET), the main control board 50 determines that the condition for indicating the specified number is met if the game in question is non-RT and AT.

Then, when it is determined in step S321 of FIG. 42 that the specified number of instruction conditions are met, the process proceeds to step S322, and "0B(H)" is stored in the acquisition number data as the instruction specified number display data corresponding to the instruction specified number "2".
As a result, in the subsequent LED display control (FIG. 55), at the timing when digit 3a (the most significant digit of the acquisition number display LED 78) is turned on, the most significant digit offset "0(H)" is obtained from the designated specified number display data "0B(H)" in step S511, and segment data displaying "0" is obtained based on the LED segment table 2 in step S514. This segment data is output from the output port 3 in step S520, so that "0" is displayed in digit 3a (the most significant digit of the acquisition number display LED 78).

In addition, at the timing when digit 4a (the lowest digit of the acquisition number display LED 78) is turned on, the lower digit offset "B(H)" is obtained from the designated number display data "0B(H)" in step S513, and segment data displaying "A" is obtained based on LED segment table 2 in step S514. This segment data is output from output port 3 in step S520, causing digit 4a (the lowest digit of the acquisition number display LED 78) to display "A".

In the main processing (M_MAIN) of FIG. 41, the game start setting processing of step S272 is processing before betting is possible and before the start switch 41 is operated, so the specified number is displayed before betting is possible and before the start switch 41 is operated.
Furthermore, as shown in Fig. 42, after the designated number display data is stored as the winning number data in step S322, the automatic bet number data is set in step S325. Therefore, when the designated number is designated for the next game after a replay win, the designated number is designated before the automatic bet is made. This allows the designated number to be designated to the player as soon as possible.
41, when operation of the start switch 41 is detected in step S278, the acquisition number data (instruction specified number display data) is cleared in step S280. As a result, in the interrupt processing from step S280 onwards, the acquisition number display LED 78 displays "00".

Here, the winning number display LED 78 displays information "0A" corresponding to the specified command number "2", and when a game is played with the specified number "2", the command function does not operate even during the AT. In other words, even if the push order bell is won in that game, the winning number display LED 78 does not display push order command information. This is because, in this embodiment, processing related to the command function is limited to when the specified number is "3". Therefore, after the winning number display LED 78 displays information "0A" corresponding to the specified command number "2", when the start switch 41 is operated, the winning number display LED 78 displays "00" at least until all reels 31 have stopped.

In contrast, in AT and non-RT, the winning number display LED 78 displays the information "0A" corresponding to the specified number "2", but when the game is played with the specified number "3" and the push order bell is won, the push order instruction information (for example, "=1") is displayed on the winning number display LED 78. This process is executed in step S284 in FIG. 41. Therefore, in this case, the winning number display LED 78 displays the information "0A" corresponding to the specified number "2" before the game starts, and when the start switch 41 is operated (with the specified number "3"), it displays "00", and then displays the push order instruction information (for example, "=1") when the push order bell is won.

In addition, when the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, it is cleared in step S290 (after all reels have stopped) in Fig. 41. Note that since the acquisition number data is cleared in step S280 after the start switch 41 is operated, in a game in which the push order instruction information is not displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, the process of step S290 may be skipped.
When a small winning combination is achieved and the process of paying out medals due to the winning combination is executed in step S294, the winning number data is incremented by "1", and the payout number is displayed on the winning number display LED 78 accordingly.

When the process proceeds to the game start setting process in step S272 for the next game, as described above, if the condition for specifying the specified number is met, information corresponding to the specified number is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. When displaying information corresponding to the specified number, the specified number display data is stored as acquisition number data. However, since the payout number data from the previous game may be stored as the acquisition number data at this point, a process for clearing the acquisition number data may be executed before storing the information corresponding to the specified number. For example, in FIG. 42, a process for clearing the acquisition number data may be executed before step S311.

In addition, in the case of AT and non-RT, even if the specified number "2" is specified, it is possible that this is ignored and the game is played with the specified number "3", winning BB1, transitioning into BB1, and further playing BB1.
In order to suppress such behavior, for example, processing related to the instruction function may be not executed within BB1. Also, the payout rate of BB1 may be set to less than "1" so that the number of medals cannot be increased in BB1.
Furthermore, since the player is free to choose which specified number to play with, in a game in which the specified number "2" is indicated during AT and non-RT, even if the player plays with the specified number "3", no penalty will be imposed on the player.

In the above example, when a specified number is specified, the specified number is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 (on the main control board 50 side). However, this is not limited to the above, and in addition to displaying the specified number on the acquisition number display LED 78, the specified number may also be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 23 or the like (on the sub-control board 80 side).
Here, the timing at which the specified number is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 23 or the like can be set to be almost the same (before the game starts) as the timing at which the specified number is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
Furthermore, the timing at which the display ends after the specified number is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 23 or the like may be the same as or different from the timing at which the display ends after the specified number is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 .
The timing for ending the display after displaying the specified number on the liquid crystal display device 23 or the like is as follows:
(1) When the start switch 41 is operated. (2) When all the reels 31 stop. (3) When the start switch 41 is operated during a game with the specified number of "2". (4) When all the reels 31 stop during a game with the specified number of "2". (5) After winning BB2 during a game with the specified number of "2". (6) When all the reels 31 stop during a game with the specified number of "2" and in which BB2 has been won.
In addition, when the specified number is displayed on a dedicated display, it is possible to continue displaying the specified number as an image on the image display device 23 or the like across multiple games.

Thirteenth Embodiment
In each of the above embodiments, the number of reels 31 and the number of stop switches 42 are three.
In contrast to this, in the thirteenth embodiment, the number of reels 31 and the number of stop switches 42 are four.
59 are a front view, a plan view, and a right side view showing an outline of the configuration including the reels 31 (31A to 31D) and the stop switches 42 (42A to 42D) in the thirteenth embodiment. In the front view, the reels 31A to 31D are illustrated so that they can be seen without being obstructed by the front surface of the front door 12. In the plan view, the reel 31 located behind the front surface of the front door 12 is illustrated so that it can be seen. In the right side view, the medal insertion slot 47 is omitted from the illustration.

As shown in Fig. 59, a control panel 12c is provided on the front surface of the front door 12, and an operation button 24 and a medal insertion slot 47 are arranged on this control panel 12c. The medal insertion slot 47 is the same as that shown in Fig. 2. Although not shown in Fig. 1, the operation button 24 is electrically connected to a sub-control board 80 and is capable of two-way communication with the sub-control board 80. For example, at least a part of the operation button 24 is formed so that it can be lit, and the lighting state of the operation button 24 can be controlled by the control of the sub-control board 80. When the operation button 24 is operated, a signal is input to the sub-control board 80.
A start switch 41 and four stop switches 42A to 42D are disposed below the control panel 12c of the front door 12.

In the front view of Figure 59, a vertical line passing through the midpoints of the four reels 31A to 31D is called line L1 (center line). Line L1 is located midway between reels 31B and 31C. The distances between reels 31A and 31B, between reels 31B and 31C, and between reels 31C and 31D are all W1 (even). Therefore, reels 31A and 31B, and reels 31C and 31D are disposed symmetrically with respect to line L1.
In addition, for the four stop switches 42A to 42D, the distance between the stop switches 42A and 42B, between the stop switches 42B and 42C, and between the stop switches 42C and 42D are all uniform (W2). The stop switches 42B and 42C are arranged so that the line L1 passes through the middle position.

Furthermore, the gap W2 between the stop switches 42 may be the same as the gap W1 (W2=W1), may be larger than the gap W1 (W2>W1), or may be smaller than the gap W1 (W2<W1).
Furthermore, in the front view, a vertical line passing through the left end of the leftmost reel 31A is designated as line L2, and a vertical line passing through the right end of the rightmost reel 31D is designated as line L3. In this case, the leftmost stop switch 42A is located to the right (closer to the center) of line L2, and the rightmost stop switch 42D is located to the left (closer to the center) of line L3.

Furthermore, in the front view, if the spacing (center distance) of reels 31 is W3, the spacing between reels 31A and 31B, between reels 31B and 31C, and between reels 31C and 31D are all W3 (constant).
Furthermore, if the spacing (center distance) of the stop switches 42 is W4, the spacing between the stop switches 42A and 42B, between the stop switches 42B and 42C, and between the stop switches 42C and 42D are all W4 (constant).

59, part of the spherical body (operating part) at the tip of the start switch 41 is disposed so as to intersect with the line L2. However, this is not limited to the above, and the spherical body (operating part) at the tip of the start switch 41 may be disposed to the left (outside) of the line L2 without intersecting with the line L2, or to the right (closer to the center) of the line L2 without intersecting with the line L2.
In addition, in the front view, the medal insertion port 47 is disposed so that it intersects with the line L4. However, this is not limiting, and for example, the medal insertion port 47 may be disposed to the right (closer to the outside) of the line L4 so as not to intersect with the line L4. Alternatively, the medal insertion port 47 may be disposed to the left (closer to the center) of the line L4.

The operation button 24 is formed in a horizontally long shape, and a line that contacts the left end of the operation button 24 is designated as a line L4, and a line that contacts the right end of the operation button 24 is designated as a line L5.
In this case, in the front view, the leftmost stop switch 42A is disposed so that a portion of the stop switch 42A intersects with the line L4, and the rightmost stop switch 42D is disposed so that a portion of the stop switch 42D intersects with the line L5.

As shown in the plan view, an index 12d is formed on the control panel 12c. The index 12d is formed by engraving, printing, etc., and in the example of FIG. 59, it is in the shape of an arrow pointing toward the stop switch 42. Furthermore, the left index 12d is positioned on the center line of the stop switch 42A (it does not matter if it is slightly offset from the center line). Furthermore, the right index 12d is positioned on the center line of the stop switch 42D (it does not matter if it is slightly offset from the center line).

With the above arrangement, the player can operate the leftmost stop switch 42A by using the left end of the operation button 24 as a guide. Similarly, the player can operate the rightmost stop switch 42D by using the right end of the operation button 24 as a guide.
Alternatively, the player can operate the stop switch 42A using the left index 12d as a guide, and similarly, the player can operate the stop switch 42D using the right index 12d as a guide.

When there are three reels 31 and three stop switches 42, a maximum of "3! = 6" possible push sequences can be provided, as shown in Fig. 58 (the twelfth embodiment). In contrast, when there are four reels 31 and four stop switches 42, a maximum of "4! = 24" possible push sequences can be provided.
Furthermore, the more times the stop switch 42 is pressed, the lower the base during non-AT (this refers to the number of out coins per 100 in coins when the reel is not in operation and during non-AT. For example, if the number of in coins is 100 and the number of out coins is 50, the base is 50).

When the number of reels 31 and stop switches 42 is four, the push order bells to be drawn can be 24 types: 1234 bells (stop switches 42A → 42B → 42C → 42D indicate the correct push order), 1243 bells, ..., 4312 bells, and 4321 bells. As shown in FIG. 58, if the winning number of each push order bell is the same, the winning number of each push order bell can be set to "1500". In this way, the winning number of each push order bell can be set to "1/4", which reduces the probability that the push order operated by the player when the push order bell is won will match the correct push order.

Here, when the number of reels 31 and stop switches 42 is three, images such as "123" or "left, center, right" can be displayed during the AT. This makes it easy to intuitively understand the correct button press order.
In contrast, when the number of reels 31 and stop switches 42 is four, the following methods can be used to notify the correct button press sequence during the AT.

For example, a first method is to designate stop switches 42A, 42B, 42C, and 42D as "1," "2," "3," and "4," respectively, and to notify the order in which stop switches 42 should be operated. For example, when the order in which stop switches 42 are pressed is stop switches 42C, 42D, 42A, and 42B, the notification can be "3412" (at least one of an image display, an audio display, and a notification by lamp color). Alternatively, stop switches 42A, 42B, 42C, and 42D can be designated as "A," "B," "C," and "D," respectively, and in the above example, the notification can be "CDAB."

As a second method, a color may be applied to the base of the reel 31 and/or the stop switch 42 for identification purposes.
For example, the color of the base and/or stop switch 42A of reel 31A may be white, the color of the base and/or stop switch 42B of reel 31B may be blue, the color of the base and/or stop switch 42C of reel 31C may be yellow, and the color of the base and/or stop switch 42D of reel 31D may be red (each being a different color). In the above example, instead of the notification of "3412," the notification may be "yellow, red, white, blue" (at least one of an image display, an audio display, and a notification by a lamp color).

Furthermore, as a third method, an image corresponding to the stop switch 42 that is to be operated fourth (last) among the stop switches 42 that are to be operated first to fourth may be displayed darkly (or hidden). In this case, a setting may be made such that "brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 that is to be operated first>brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 that is to be operated second≧brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 that is to be operated third≧brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 that is to be operated fourth."
Then, when the first (initial) stop switch 42 is operated, the image corresponding to the first stop switch 42 is darkened (or concealed), and the brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 that is to be operated fourth is made to be approximately the same as the brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 that is to be operated third.
For example, when visually notifying the push order of "3412" as in the above example, the image displayed first is "3●12." Note that the "●" is an image that corresponds to the "4th" push order, and may be darkened (hidden) so that the character "4" is not visible at all, or may be dimmed to the extent that the character "4" is identifiable.

When the image of "3●12" is displayed, it is the same as when there are six options, so the player can intuitively understand the push order. When the first stop switch 42C is operated, one of the following actions 1) to 3) can be performed.
1) The "1" corresponding to the operated stop switch 42C is changed to a "●", and the previous "●" is changed to a "4". Specifically, the image displayed is "34●2".
2) The "1" corresponding to the operated stop switch 42C is changed to a display such as "-" or "o", and the previous "●" is changed to a "4". Specifically, the image is displayed as "34-2" or "34o2".
3) The "1" corresponding to the operated stop switch 42C is changed to a blank (no image), and the previous "●" is changed to a "4." Specifically, the image displayed is "34*2"("*" means blank).

Further, after the second stop, similarly to the above, images such as "34●●", "34--", "34OO", and "34**" may be displayed.
Furthermore, after the third stop, images such as "●4●●", "-4--", "○4○○", and "*4**" may be displayed.
Alternatively, after the third stop, the image of the push sequence itself may be erased.
Even if all the push sequences are displayed as images of "4312" as in the first method described above, it is preferable to erase the images corresponding to the operated stop switches 42 as in 1) to 3) above after the stop switches 42 are operated, as this makes it easier to understand which stop switches 42 have been operated. Specifically, after displaying the image of "4312," the images may be displayed as follows: "43●2" (after operation of stop switch 42C) ->"43●●" (after operation of stop switch 42D) ->"4●●●" (after operation of stop switch 42B) (where "●" may be "○,""-," or "*" as described above).

As a fourth method, the pressing order is notified using a four-character idiom. For example, when the pressing order is notified using the four-character idiom "Spring, Summer, Autumn, Winter," the correct pressing order is "Spring → Summer → Autumn → Winter."
When the button press sequence is "3412" as described above, the announcement "Autumn, Winter, Spring, Summer" may be made (by image display or audio display) as in the first method described above.
Alternatively, as in the third method described above, an image of "Autumn * Spring * Summer" may be displayed before the first stop, and an image of "Autumn * Winter * Summer" may be displayed after the first stop.
In any of the first to fourth methods, if a mistake is made in the button press sequence during the process, the image of the button press sequence may continue to be displayed as is, or the image may be erased at the point at which the mistake is made.

In the thirteenth embodiment, when a 24-option push order bell is provided as described above, 24 types of push order instruction numbers and push order instruction information are provided. For example, if the push order instruction information is "A1" to "A9", "AA", "AC", "AF", "F1" to "F9", "FA", "FC", and "FF", 24 types can be provided.

Although the eleventh to thirteenth embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described contents, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
A. Eleventh embodiment (1) In the non-advantageous zone, the lottery for the advantageous zone was performed only when the result of the lottery for the hand was the target lottery result. The reason for this setting is that, as described above, when the result of the lottery for the hand is a non-winning hand (when the condition device does not operate as a result of the internal lottery), it is considered preferable not to perform the lottery for the advantageous zone transition, which is a process related to the advantageous zone. Therefore, it is not necessarily required to set it in this way, and the lottery for the advantageous zone transition may be performed when the hand is not a winning hand.

(2) In the eleventh embodiment, after the lottery for the transition to the favorable zone, the AT lottery process was executed. Here, a lottery result (winning number) that always determines the favorable zone may be set, and when the lottery result for the favorable zone is reached, the lottery for the transition to the favorable zone may not be executed, and the transition to the favorable zone process (FIG. 45) may be executed. Similarly, a lottery result (winning number) that always determines the AT may be set, and when the lottery result for the favorable zone is reached, the AT set process (steps S363 and S364 in FIG. 46) may be executed, without executing the AT lottery.
Furthermore, a role selection result (winning number) may be set that will always determine an advantageous zone and an AT, and when that role selection result is reached, advantageous zone transition processing and AT set processing may be executed without executing the advantageous zone transition lottery or AT lottery processing.
In addition, in the case where a lottery result (winning number) that does not win the advantageous zone transition lottery is set, the advantageous zone transition lottery may be executed even when the lottery result is the winning number. In this case, the winning number of the advantageous zone may be set to "0".

(3) When the AT is won, the initial number of times the AT is played is determined, and that number of times is stored in the AT play count counter, and when the AT play count counter becomes "0", the AT is terminated. However, the AT is not limited to such a game number management type AT, but may be a difference number management type AT. In the case of a difference number management type AT, when the AT is won, the initial value of the difference number of coins that can be obtained is determined and stored in the AT difference number counter (different from the difference number counter). Then, the difference number is subtracted from the AT difference number counter every time a payout is made, and when the AT difference number counter becomes "0", the AT is terminated.
Even in the case of such a difference number management type AT, when the number is one specified number (for example, "3"), the AT difference number counter is decremented, but when the number is another specified number (for example, "2"), the AT difference number counter is not decremented.

(4) In the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) of FIG. 39, the setting can be changed after the initialization process is executed. For this reason, if the advantageous zone display LED 77 was on before the power was turned off, when the setting change process is started, the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned off before the setting can be changed. However, this is not limited to this, and the advantageous zone display LED flag may be cleared (initialized) after the state in which the setting can be changed is ended (after step S242 in FIG. 39 becomes "Yes") and before the main process is started (before step S248). In this way, it is possible to control the advantageous zone display LED 77 to be turned off after the setting value is confirmed.

(5) One each of the advantageous zone clear counter and the difference number counter is provided. However, this is not limited to this, and two advantageous zone clear counters and two difference number counters (important counters) may be provided to check the consistency.
For example, a first advantageous zone clear counter and a second advantageous zone clear counter are provided as advantageous zone clear counters. During an advantageous zone, both the first advantageous zone clear counter and the second advantageous zone clear counter are updated each time a game is played. Also, for example, in Figures 51 and 52, in the judgment of step S424, a judgment is made regarding the first advantageous zone clear counter. When it is judged that the first advantageous zone clear counter is "0", it is judged whether the value of the second advantageous zone clear counter is "0" or whether the first advantageous zone clear counter and the second advantageous zone clear counter are the same value. When it is judged that the value is "0" or that the values are the same, the process proceeds to step S435.

The same applies to the difference counter.
A first difference counter and a second difference counter are provided as difference counters. Then, both the first difference counter and the second difference counter are updated every time a game is played. Also, for example, in FIG. 51 and FIG. 52, in the judgment of step S434, a judgment is made regarding the first difference counter. When it is judged that the first difference counter exceeds the upper limit, it is judged whether or not the second difference counter exceeds the upper limit, or whether or not the first difference counter and the second difference counter have the same value. When it is judged that the first difference counter exceeds the upper limit or that they have the same value, the process proceeds to step S435.

By determining the favorable zone clear counter value and/or the difference counter value in the above manner, even if the counter value becomes an abnormal value (incorrect value) due to the influence of noise, etc., it is possible to more accurately determine whether the favorable zone clear counter value is "0" and/or whether the difference counter value has exceeded the upper limit value.
In addition, if the first favorable zone clear counter and the second favorable zone clear counter do not match, or if the first difference number counter and the second difference number counter do not match, for example, an error message may be displayed and the game progress (main processing) may be stopped.

(6) In the sub-difference number management process of FIG. 56, if it is determined in step S544 that the symbol combination corresponding to BB has stopped and displayed, the process proceeds to step S545, it is determined that the sub-difference number counter has exceeded "2164 (D)", and the sub-difference number counter has been cleared, a special effect different from that in a normal BB game may be output in that BB game. The special effect during the BB game can indicate to the player that the sub-difference number counter has been cleared.

In addition, when a symbol combination corresponding to BB is displayed, the sub-difference number counter may not be checked, and instead, in BB play, a check may be made to see if the sub-difference number counter has exceeded, for example, "2000 (D)" (this is an example of a threshold value, and is not limited to this value) for each play. When it is determined that the sub-difference number counter has exceeded "2000 (D)," the sub-difference number counter may be cleared, and a special effect (an effect suggesting that the sub-difference number counter has been cleared) may be output from the next play.

Furthermore, in the above case, if a power outage occurs during a game in which the sub number difference counter during BB play has exceeded "2000 (D)" (a special effect has not yet been output), the special effect may be output from the game that resumes after the power outage. In this case, when the power is restored from the power outage, the sub number difference counter value and the fact that BB play is in progress may be read to determine whether or not to output a special effect.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs during the rotation of the reels 31 in a game in which the sub-number difference counter during BB play exceeds "2000 (D)", the special effect may be output from the game that resumes after the power outage. Therefore, in this case, if there is no power outage, the special effect is output from the next game, but if there is a power outage while the reels 31 are rotating, the special effect is output from that game.

(7) When a game is played with the specified number "2" during the AT (when the specified number is "2", the instruction function does not operate), the push order bell is won, the stop switch 42 is accidentally operated with the correct push order, a small prize is paid out, and the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)", it is preferable to output a presentation notifying the end of the AT, such as an image display of "END" at the end of that game. This is to prevent the AT from ending during a game where the correct push order is not announced, causing a sense of discomfort to the player.

(8) On the other hand, as described above, in order to prevent the AT from ending during a game in which the correct button press sequence is not announced, for example, when a game is played with the specified number of "2", even if the button press bell is won and the stop switch 42 is operated with the correct button press sequence, the payout number for that game may be set to "2" or less (the difference in the number of coins for that game may be "0" or less) so that the AT does not end during that game.

(9) As shown in Figures 56 and 57, the sub-difference number counter continues counting even during BB play. However, this is not limited to this, and when BB is won during AT and the game shifts to BB play, the sub-difference number counter may not be updated (updating of the sub-difference number counter may be suspended during BB play).
In this case, for example, before step S531 in Fig. 56, it is determined whether or not the BB is in operation (determined by the operation state flag). If the BB is in operation, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
In addition, when the sub difference number counter is not updated during BB game, the processes of step S551 and steps S558 to S561 in Fig. 57 are unnecessary. Then, when "No" is determined in step S547, the process proceeds to step S552.

B. Twelfth embodiment (1) As in the eleventh embodiment, in FIG. 58, when the lottery for the winning combination is not successful, the lottery for the transition to the advantageous zone (processing related to the advantageous zone) is not executed. As described above, this is done in consideration of the rules. Therefore, if the rules are not taken into consideration, the lottery for the transition to the advantageous zone may be executed in the case of a non-winning combination.
Also, as shown in Fig. 58, the advantageous zone transition lottery (processing related to the advantageous zone) is performed in one game state (RT) with only one specified number (the specified number is "3" in the example of Fig. 58). This is because the rules stipulate that the advantageous zone transition lottery (processing related to the advantageous zone) is performed with only one specified number in one game state (RT). Therefore, if this point is not taken into consideration, advantageous zone transition lotteries may be performed with multiple specified numbers in one game state (RT).

(2) In the twelfth embodiment, in the non-RT and AT mode, the specified number "2" is specified. However, when the game is the final game of the AT game, the specified number does not need to be specified.
(3) In the 12th embodiment, the game is played inside BB2, and it is irregular for BB2 to win and transition to BB2 game. However, this is not limited to this, and when the AT end condition is met after the AT is executed inside BB2, the BB2 may be made to win and the BB2 game may be executed. In this case, when the AT end condition is met inside BB2, the specified number "2" is indicated after the end of the game in which the AT end condition is met (after all reels 31 stop and payout processing is executed in the case of a small winning), before the start of the next game (non-AT) (before betting is possible), and BB2 is prompted to win. In the 12th embodiment, since BB2 is won with the specified number "2", the specified number for winning BB2 is "2", but for example, when a BB that wins with the specified number "1" is provided, when the BB is made to win, the specified number "1" is indicated.
In addition, the BB game in such a specification may be a BB game in which the number of medals increases, or a BB game in which the number of medals decreases.

(4) When the specified number is specified, it is executed in the game start setting process (step S322 in FIG. 42). However, it is not limited to this, and it may be executed in the game end check process (FIG. 50). For example, in the BB2 game, it is judged whether or not it is the final game of the BB2 game, and if it is the final game, the specified number for the next game is specified at the time of the game end check process. However, when a small role is won in the final game of the BB2 game, a payout is made, and the payout number is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, the specified number is specified after the payout number is displayed. Note that if the LED that indicates the specified number is a dedicated LED, the specified number for the next game can be specified on the dedicated LED while the payout number is being displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
Furthermore, when a freeze is executed in the final game of BB2 game, the specified number for the next game may be indicated at the end of the game either before the freeze is executed, while the freeze is being executed, or after the freeze has ended.

(5) As in the twelfth embodiment, when a game can be played with any of a plurality of prescribed numbers, the function of the 3 (MAX) bet switch 40b can be changed. For example, in a situation where playing with the prescribed number "3" is advantageous during a game during an advantageous period (for example, when inside BB2 in FIG. 58), the 3 (MAX) bet switch 40b may be set as a button dedicated to betting 3 coins. That is, when the number of credits is "3" and during an advantageous period and playing with the prescribed number "3" is advantageous, the 3 bet switch 40b is set to bet "3" when operated. On the other hand, when the number of credits is "2" and during an advantageous period and playing with the prescribed number "3" is advantageous, the 3 bet switch 40b is set not to bet "2" even when operated.

Alternatively, even if it is possible to play with the specified number of "3", if the number of credits is "2", it may be set so that "2" is bet when the 3 bet switch 40b is operated. In particular, in FIG. 58, in non-RT and AT, it is preferable to set so that "2" is bet when the 3 bet switch 40b is operated when the number of credits is "2".

(6) As in the twelfth embodiment, when most of the game zone is set as the advantageous zone, the instruction function can be activated at any timing. For example, a difference number counter (different from a difference number counter) capable of counting the negative difference number is provided to calculate the ball payout rate for a predetermined period. When the ball payout rate for a predetermined period reaches a predetermined lower limit (the predetermined lower limit is set, for example, higher than the lower limit set by the rules), the instruction function can be activated to increase the ball payout rate. Then, when the ball payout rate increases and recovers to the reference value, the instruction function is terminated.
Such activation of the indication function when the predetermined lower limit is reached may or may not be included in "AT." However, since the indication function is still activated, it is equivalent to processing related to the indication function.

(7) In the twelfth embodiment, the LED for displaying information corresponding to the specified number is the acquisition number display LED 78. However, this is not limited to this, and may be set to another existing LED, or a dedicated LED for displaying information corresponding to the specified number may be separately provided.
When a dedicated LED for displaying information corresponding to the specified command number is provided separately, after the information corresponding to the specified command number is displayed in the game start setting process, the information corresponding to the specified command number does not need to be erased even if the start switch 41 is operated. Furthermore, even if all the reels 31 stop, a small winning combination is achieved, and medals are paid out, the information corresponding to the specified command number does not need to be erased.
In addition, when a dedicated LED is provided to display information corresponding to the specified number, the specified number can be displayed in any manner since it will not be confused with the payout number, error number, etc. For example, if the specified number is "2", it can be displayed as "2".

(8) In the twelfth embodiment, an example was given in which the prescribed number "2" was indicated, but depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, it is also possible to indicate the prescribed number "1" or the prescribed number "3". If the specifications allow for the possibility of indicating any of the prescribed numbers "1" to "3", the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 when indicating the prescribed number "1" could be "A1", the display when indicating the prescribed number "2" could be "A2", and the display when indicating the prescribed number "3" could be "A3".

C. Thirteenth embodiment (1) In the front view of Fig. 59, the line L1 is set to pass through the center of the four reels 31 and the center of the four stop switches 42. However, this is not limited to the above, and all four stop switches 42 may be positioned to the right of the position in Fig. 58, for example, so that a portion of stop switch 42B intersects with line L1. Conversely, all four stop switches 42 may be positioned to the left of the position in Fig. 58, for example, so that a portion of stop switch 42C intersects with line L1.

(2) As shown in the front view of Figure 59, Roman numerals "1" to "4" are written below the four reels 31, and these Roman numerals may be replaced with lamps. In this case, for example, when the next stop switch to be operated is 42C, the lamp with the Roman numeral "3" may be turned on.
Alternatively, different colors may be applied to the range of Roman numerals "1" to "4," and stop switches 42A to 42D may be applied with colors corresponding to the Roman numerals "1" to "4." In the above example, stop switch 42A is colored white, stop switch 42B is colored blue, stop switch 42C is colored yellow, and stop switch 42D is colored red. In this case, the range of Roman numeral "1" may be colored white, the range of Roman numeral "2" blue, the range of Roman numeral "3" yellow, and the range of Roman numeral "4" red.

(3) The portion including the periphery of the reel 31 may also be constructed from the image display device 23. Then, as described above, a different color is assigned to each stop switch 42. In this case, when announcing the push order, for example, when the stop switch 42B (blue) is selected, the periphery of the reel 31B may be illuminated in blue.

(4) In the front view of FIG. 59, the distance W3 between the reels 31 is set to be longer than the distance W4 between the stop switches 42.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the interval W3 between the reels 31 and the interval W4 between the stop switches 42 may be set to be substantially the same. Alternatively, the interval W4 between the stop switches 42 may be set to be longer than the interval W3 between the reels 31.

(5) In the thirteenth embodiment, a maximum of 24 push order options can be set for the push order bell. However, this is not limited to this, and it is also possible to set a first stop push order bell. Here, in the conventional technology, the first stop push order bell had three options. In contrast, in the thirteenth embodiment, it is possible to set it to four options. When displaying an image of the correct push order when the first stop push order bell is selected, for example, if the correct stop switch 42 is stop switch 42C, an image of "xx1x" can be displayed.

It is also possible to provide a first and second stop push order bell (a push order bell in which the correct push order is set for the first and second stops). For example, the first stop is set to stop switch 42C, the second stop to stop switch 42A, and the third and fourth stops are optional (either stop switch 42B or 42D is acceptable). In this case, the correct push order can be set to 12 options. Furthermore, when the correct push order is displayed as an image, in the above example, an image of "2x1x" can be displayed. Then, after the operation of stop switch 42C, an image of "2x-x" can be displayed.

D. Others All of the embodiments and various modified examples described in this specification are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Fourteenth embodiment>
The fourteenth embodiment relates to the timing of starting and ending the display of push order instruction information.
Below, we will explain the 14th embodiments (A) to (G) which differ in the timing of starting or ending the display of the push order instruction information.

<Fourteenth embodiment (A)>
60 and 61 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (A).
Figure 60 shows the timing at which the display of the push order instruction information starts and ends when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum play time has elapsed, and Figure 61 shows the timing at which the display of the push order instruction information starts and ends when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum play time has elapsed.

Here, the hardware configuration in the fourteenth embodiment (A) is similar to the hardware configuration shown in FIGS. 31 to 35 of the eleventh embodiment.
In addition, the main processing (M_MAIN), push order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF), medal payout upon winning (M_WIN_PAY), interrupt processing (I_INTR), and LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in the 14th embodiment (A) are similar to the main processing (M_MAIN) in Figure 41, push order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF) in Figure 48, medal payout upon winning in Figure 49, interrupt processing (I_INTR) in Figure 53, and LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in Figure 55 in the 11th embodiment.
In the 14th embodiment (A), similarly to the 11th embodiment, when the push order bell is won during the AT, push order instruction information is displayed on the winning number display LED 78.

In step S457 of the interrupt process (I_INTR) in FIG. 53, input port read processing is executed. If the start switch 41 is on at this time, then, in step S278 of the main process (M_MAIN) in FIG. 41, "Yes" is obtained.
Also, as shown in FIG. 41, if the answer is "Yes" in step S278, then a role selection process (step S282), a favorable zone transition selection process (step S283), and a push order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF) (step S284) are executed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 48, in the push order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF), when the conditions for activating the instruction function are met, that is, when a role with an advantageous push order such as a push order bell is won during the AT, a push order instruction number corresponding to the winning number is generated and stored as the winning number data. Then, by the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) during the interrupt processing (I_INTR) executed after this processing, the push order instruction information (for example, "=1") is displayed on the winning number display LED 78.

In the 14th embodiment (A), an interrupt process (I_INTR) is executed every 2.235 ms, as in the 11th embodiment. Furthermore, dynamic lighting of digits 1 (1a and 1b) to 5 (5a and 5b) is performed so that five interrupts make one cycle.
Therefore, in the 14th embodiment (A), as shown in Figures 60 and 61, regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum play time has elapsed or the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum play time has elapsed, the display of push sequence instruction information on the winning number display LED 78 will begin after the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the reel 31 starts to rotate, more specifically, within 5 interrupts (2.235 x 5 = 11.175 ms) after the push sequence instruction number is stored as the winning number data.

After the push order instruction number is stored as acquisition number data, the push order instruction information may be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 at the first interruption, or the push order instruction information may be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 at the fifth interruption.
Also, although not shown in FIG. 41, control command set 1 is executed between the push order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF) in step S284 and the preparation for starting reel spinning in step S285. In control command set 1 between the push order instruction number set and the preparation for starting reel spinning, the performance group number or push order instruction number is stored in the control command buffer as a control command. Then, the control command stored in the control command buffer is sent to the sub-control board 80 by the control command transmission (step S464) during the interrupt processing (I_INTR) executed after this processing.

In the fourteenth embodiment (A), the control command is composed of a first control command and a second control command. Both the first control command and the second control command are one-byte data. The first control command is data indicating the type of the control command, and the second control command is data indicating a parameter (variable). The two-byte data of the first control command and the second control command constitute one control command.
Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), two sets of 8-bit parallel communication lines are used, and a first control command is sent to the sub-control board 80 over one parallel communication line, and a second control command is sent to the sub-control board 80 over the other parallel communication line. This makes it possible to send a control command consisting of 2 bytes of data to the sub-control board 80 in one interrupt process.

Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), a 64-byte storage area is secured in the RWM 53 as a control command buffer. As described above, one control command is composed of two bytes of data, the first control command and the second control command, so the control command buffer can store 32 control commands. Then, by transmitting control commands during interrupt processing, the unsent control commands stored in the control command buffer are transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in the order in which they were stored.
In addition, if a control command is stored when the control command buffer is empty, the control command is sent to the sub-control board 80 by the control command transmission during the next interrupt processing that arrives at that time.

As described above, in the 14th embodiment (A), as shown in Figures 60 and 61, regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum play time has elapsed or after the minimum play time has elapsed, the push order instruction number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 after the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the reel 31 starts to rotate, more specifically, approximately one interrupt (2.235 ms) after the push order instruction number is stored in the control command buffer.

In the fourteenth embodiment (A), the sub-control board 80 is composed of a first sub-control board (sub-main control board) and a second sub-control board (sub-sub control board). The first sub-control board and the second sub-control board are control boards subordinate to the main control board 50, and control the selection and output of effects during play and during game standby. The second sub-control board is also a control board subordinate to the first sub-control board. The main control board 50 transmits control commands unidirectionally to the first sub-control board, and the first sub-control board and the second sub-control board communicate bidirectionally.

Furthermore, the first sub-control board determines what kind of effect is to be output and at what timing based on the control commands transmitted from the main control board 50. The first sub-control board then transmits control commands related to the determined effect to the second sub-control board.
Furthermore, the second sub-control board is electrically connected to peripheral devices for performance, such as a performance lamp 21, a speaker 22, and an image display device 23. The second sub-control board selects a performance based on a control command transmitted from the first sub-control board, and controls the peripheral devices for performance to output various performances.

Specifically, when the first sub-control board receives a control command transmitted from the main control board 50, it stores (saves) the received control command in a specified memory area.
In addition, the first sub-control board executes sub-main processing every 16 ms, and analyzes the control command in the loop processing during this sub-main processing. If it is determined that the control command is related to an image, the image command corresponding to the analysis result is stored in the command buffer.
Furthermore, in a command sending process during the next sub-main process (which is executed before the loop process), the first sub-control board sends the image command stored in the command buffer to the second sub-control board.

Therefore, it takes approximately 32 ms (= 16 ms x 2, the sub-main processing period) from the time the main control board 50 sends the push order instruction number as a control command to the first sub-control board until the second sub-control board receives the image command.
Then, the second sub-control board executes drawing processing based on the received image command and displays an image on the image display device 23.
In the fourteenth embodiment (A), the second sub-control board executes drawing processing at 30 fps (frames per second). Therefore, it takes about 33.33 ms to display one image on the image display device 23.

As a result of the above, it takes approximately 65.33 ms (= 32 ms + 33.33 ms) from the time the main control board 50 sends the push order instruction number as a control command to the first sub-control board until the second sub-control board displays an image indicating the push order (pull order instruction image) on the image display device 23.
Therefore, in the 14th embodiment (A), when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum playing time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 60, after the reel 31 has started to rotate but before the reel 31 can be stopped, that is, before the rotation of the reel 31 has reached a constant speed and the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted, the display of the push order indication image on the image display device 23 begins.

In contrast, for example, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) one second before the minimum play time has elapsed, it takes about one second from the turning on (operation) of the start switch 41 to the start of rotation of the reel 31, so as shown in Figure 61, the display of the push order indication image on the image display device 23 begins before the reel 31 starts rotating.
Also, in the 14th embodiment (A), as shown in Figures 60 and 61, regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum play time has elapsed or whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum play time has elapsed, first, the display of push order instruction information on the number of winnings display LED 78 begins, and then the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 begins.

Although not shown in FIG. 41, control command set 1 is executed between the reel stop acceptance check in step S287 and the all reel stop check in step S288. In control command set 1 between this reel stop acceptance check and the all reel stop check, control commands related to the operation of the stop switch 42 and control commands related to the stop position of the reel 31 are stored in the control command buffer. Then, the control commands stored in the control command buffer are sent to the sub-control board 80 by control command transmission (step S464) during interrupt processing (I_INTR) executed after this processing.

Furthermore, the first sub-control board analyzes the received control command, and if it determines that the control command is related to the operation of the first stop switch 42 (the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 that is to stop first), it transmits an image command corresponding to the operation of the first stop switch 42 to the second sub-control board.
Similarly, when it is determined that the control command is related to the operation of the second stop switch 42 (the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 that stops second), an image command corresponding to the operation of the second stop switch 42 is transmitted to the second sub-control board, and when it is determined that the control command is related to the operation of the third stop switch 42 (the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 that stops last), an image command corresponding to the operation of the third stop switch 42 is transmitted to the second sub-control board.

When the second sub-control board receives an image command corresponding to the operation of the first stop switch 42, it displays an image corresponding to the operation of the first stop switch 42 (for example, a press order instruction image prompting the operation of the second stop switch 42) on the image display device 23.
Similarly, when an image command corresponding to the operation of the second stop switch 42 is received, an image corresponding to the operation of the second stop switch 42 (for example, a press order instruction image prompting the operation of the third stop switch 42) is displayed on the image display device 23.

In addition, when an image command corresponding to the operation of the third stop switch 42 is received, for example, the display of the push order indication image is terminated, and an image corresponding to the operation of the third stop switch 42 (for example, an image corresponding to the stopped state of all reels 31) is displayed on the image display device 23.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in Figures 60 and 61, after the third stop switch 42 is turned on, the display of the push order indication image on the image display device 23 ends.

Also, as shown in FIG. 41, when all reels 31 stop (step S289 becomes "Yes"), the winning number data is cleared (step S290). For example, when the push order bell is won during the AT, the winning number display LED 78 displays push order information (for example, "=1"). In this case, the display of the winning number display LED 78 becomes "00" due to the interrupt process executed after the process of step S290.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in Figures 60 and 61, when all the reels 31 stop, the display of the push order instruction information on the winning number display LED 78 ends.
Also, in the 14th embodiment (A), as shown in Figures 60 and 61, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 ends first, and then the display of the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 ends.

As shown in Fig. 41, in step S294, the medal payout (M_WIN_PAY) for winning is executed. Furthermore, as shown in Fig. 49, in step S399 during the medal payout (M_WIN_PAY) for winning, "1" is added to the winning number data. As a result, the display of the winning number display LED 78 is increased by "+1" by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S399. For example, the display of the winning number display LED 78 changes from "00" to "01".
For this reason, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in Figs. 60 and 61, when medals are paid out, the number of medals acquired is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

In the fourteenth embodiment (A), when the push order bell is won during the AT and push order instruction information (for example, "=1") is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, if all the reels 31 come to a halt, the acquisition number data is cleared and the acquisition number display LED 78 becomes "00". After that, the acquisition number display LED 78 remains at "00" until the medals are paid out. Then, for example, when there are 10 medals to be paid out, the acquisition number display LED 78 counts up as follows at the time of medal payment: "00" → "01" → "02" → ... → "09" → "10".

As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), after the role selection process (step S282) and the advantageous zone transition selection process (step S283) are executed, the push order instruction number setting (step S284) is then executed.
60 and 61, regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum play time has elapsed, the display of the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 can be started after the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the reels 31 start to spin. In other words, the display of the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 can be started immediately after the start switch 41 is turned on (operated).

<Fourteenth embodiment (B)>
In the 14th embodiment (B), the timing at which the push order instruction information starts to be displayed on the winning number display LED 78 is different from that in the 14th embodiment (A), and the push order instruction information starts to be displayed when the reel 31 starts to rotate.
FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the main processing (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (B), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 41 of the eleventh embodiment.
In the flowchart of the fourteenth embodiment (B) shown in FIG. 62, steps different from those in FIG. 41 are underlined, and steps that are the same as those in FIG. 41 are given the same step numbers.

In Figure 41, the processing is executed in the order of setting the push order instruction numbers, preparing to start reel rotation, and starting the reel rotation, whereas in the 14th embodiment (B), as shown in Figure 62, the processing is executed in the order of preparing to start reel rotation, setting the push order instruction numbers, and starting the reel rotation.
That is, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), the order of steps S284 and S285 is reversed from that in FIG. 41, and after preparation for starting reel rotation is performed, the push order instruction number setting is performed.

An input port read process is performed in step S457 of the interrupt process (I_INTR) in FIG. 53. If the start switch 41 is on at this time, then the result is "Yes" in step S278 of the main process (M_MAIN) in FIG. 62.
Also, as shown in FIG. 62, if the answer is "Yes" in step S278, then the following are executed: role selection process (step S282), advantageous zone transition selection process (step S283), control command set 1 (step S601), preparation for starting reel rotation (step S285), and push order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF) (step S284).

In step S601, the control command set 1 is executed. In this control command set 1, the effect group number or the push order instruction number is stored as a control command in the control command buffer. Then, after step S601, the process proceeds to step S285.
In step S285, the CPU 101 executes preparations for starting the rotation of the reels, which first determines whether the timer value for the minimum game time (the minimum time from the start of rotation of the reels 31 to the start of rotation of the reels 31 in the next game) is "0" or not.

The RWM 53 has an area for storing the timer value of the minimum game time. The initial value of the timer value is "1834 (D) (2.235 ms x 1834 ≈ 4099 ms)." Furthermore, the timer value is decremented by "1" every interrupt process (2.235 ms). When it is determined that the timer value is not "0," it is again determined whether the timer value is "0," and when it is determined that the timer value is "0," the initial value of the timer value is set and the process proceeds to step S284.
In this manner, in the preparation for starting reel rotation in step S285, it is determined whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed, and if it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S284.

Also, as shown in FIG. 62, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), once the reel stop acceptance check is executed in step S287, the process proceeds to step S602.
In step S602, the control command set 1 is executed. In this control command set 1, the control command related to the operation of the stop switch 42 and the control command related to the stop position of the reel 31 are stored in the control command buffer. Then, after step S602, the process proceeds to step S288.
Incidentally, the control command set 1 is executed between the reel stop acceptance check in step S287 and the all reel stop check in step S288, as explained in the fourteenth embodiment (A).
Other than the above, the process is the same as that of the flowchart in FIG. 41 in the eleventh embodiment.

63 and 64 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (B).
Figure 63 shows the timing at which the display of the push order instruction information starts and ends when the start switch 41 is operated after the minimum playing time has elapsed, and Figure 64 shows the timing at which the display of the push order instruction information starts and ends when the start switch 41 is operated before the minimum playing time has elapsed.

As described above, in the 14th embodiment (B), when the advantageous zone transition lottery process of step S283 is executed, the process proceeds to step S601, where control command set 1 is executed. In this control command set 1, the performance group number or push order instruction number is stored in the control command buffer as a control command. Then, by the interrupt process executed after this process, the performance group number or push order instruction number stored in the control command buffer is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.

For this reason, in the 14th embodiment (B), as shown in Figures 63 and 64, regardless of whether the start switch 41 is operated before the minimum play time has elapsed or after the minimum play time has elapsed, the push order instruction number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 (first sub-control board) after the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the reel 31 starts to rotate, more specifically, approximately one interrupt (2.235 ms) after the push order instruction number is stored in the control command buffer.

In the fourteenth embodiment (B), when the control command set 1 in step S601 is executed, the next step is to execute preparation for starting reel rotation in step S285, and then the push order instruction number setting in step S284.
Therefore, in the 14th embodiment (B), as shown in Figures 63 and 64, regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum play time has elapsed or whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum play time has elapsed, the display of push order instruction information on the number of wins display LED 78 will begin when the reel 31 starts to rotate.

Also, as explained in the fourteenth embodiment (A), it takes about 65.33 ms from when the main control board 50 transmits the push order instruction number to the first sub-control board until the second sub-control board displays the push order instruction image on the image display device 23. For this reason, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum play time has elapsed, as shown in Fig. 63, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 begins after the reels 31 start to rotate and before the reels 31 can be stopped.
In contrast, for example, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) one second before the minimum play time has elapsed, it takes about one second from the turning on (operation) of the start switch 41 to the start of rotation of the reel 31, so that, as shown in Figure 64, the display of the push order indication image on the image display device 23 begins before the reel 31 starts to rotate.

Furthermore, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum playing time has elapsed, as shown in Figure 63, first, the display of push order instruction information on the number of winnings display LED 78 begins, and then the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 begins.
In contrast, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum playing time has elapsed, as shown in Figure 64, first the display of a push order instruction image begins on the image display device 23, and then the display of push order instruction information begins on the number of winnings display LED 78.
In other words, depending on whether the start switch 41 is operated before or after the minimum play time has elapsed, the order in which the push order instruction information starts to be displayed on the winning number display LED 78 and the push order instruction image starts to be displayed on the image display device 23 is reversed.

Here, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum play time has elapsed or the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum play time has elapsed, the display of the push order instruction information on the winning number display LED 78 begins after the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the reel 31 starts to rotate. In other words, the display of the push order instruction information on the winning number display LED 78 begins immediately after the start switch 41 is turned on (operated).

However, if the timing at which the push order instruction information starts to be displayed on the winning number display LED 78 is too early, the player will immediately know after turning on (operating) the start switch 41 that he or she has won a role with an advantageous push order, such as a push order bell, in the role lottery (internal lottery).
Although this does not offer an advantageous button press sequence, it may disappoint players who were waiting to win a rare symbol, which is a condition for determining whether or not the number of times the AT can be played will be increased.

Therefore, in the 14th embodiment (B), when it is determined that the minimum playing time has elapsed, the push order instruction number is stored as winning number data, and when the reel 31 starts to rotate, the push order instruction information begins to be displayed on the winning number display LED 78.
As a result, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum play time has elapsed, the timing for starting to display the push order instruction information on the winning number display LED 78 can be delayed until the minimum play time has elapsed, so that a player who has been waiting for a rare combination is not disappointed immediately after operating the start switch 41.

In addition, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum play time has elapsed, it is determined that the minimum play time has elapsed, and the display of push order instruction information on the winning number display LED 78 will begin within 5 interrupts (2.235 x 5 = 11.175 ms) after the push order instruction number is stored as the winning number data.
Furthermore, in the 14th embodiment (B), before the push order instruction number is stored as the number of winning data, the push order instruction number is stored in a control command buffer and transmitted to the sub-control board 80 (first sub-control board), but it takes approximately 65.33 ms from the time the main control board 50 transmits the push order instruction number to the first sub-control board until the second sub-control board displays the push order instruction image on the image display device 23.

In this way, when the time required from storing the push order instruction number as the number of acquisitions data to displaying the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 is defined as "X," and the time required from the main control board 50 transmitting the push order instruction number to the first sub-control board to the second sub-control board displaying the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is defined as "Y," the setting is set so as to satisfy "X<Y."
In addition, when the cycle of the interrupt process is "T" and the number of digits to be dynamically lit by the interrupt process is "N", it takes a maximum of "T x N" time from when the push sequence instruction number is stored as the acquisition number data until the push sequence instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. For this reason, it is set to satisfy "T x N <Y".
As a result, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum playing time has elapsed, first, the display of push order instruction information on the winning number display LED 78 begins, and then the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 begins.

<Fourteenth embodiment (C)>
In the fourteenth embodiment (C), the timing at which the display of the push order instruction information on the winning number display LED 78 ends is different from that in the fourteenth embodiments (A) and (B), and the display of the push order instruction information ends when the medals are paid out.
FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the main process (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (C), and corresponds to FIG. 41 of the eleventh embodiment.
In the flowchart of the fourteenth embodiment (C) shown in FIG. 65, steps different from those in FIG. 41 are underlined, and steps that are the same as those in FIG. 41 are given the same step numbers.

In Figure 41, when it is determined in step S289 that all reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S290 and the winning number data is cleared, but in the 14th embodiment (C), as shown in Figure 65, when it is determined in step S289 that all reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S291 and a pattern display determination is made without clearing the winning number data.
Also, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), the medal payout (M_WIN_PAY) (step S603) for winning is different from that in the eleventh embodiment shown in FIG. 41 and FIG.

An input port read process is performed in step S457 of the interrupt process (I_INTR) in FIG. 53. If the start switch 41 is on at this time, then the result is "Yes" in step S278 of the main process (M_MAIN) in FIG. 65.
Also, as shown in FIG. 65, if the result in step S278 is “Yes”, then the following processes are executed: role selection process (step S282), advantageous zone transition selection process (step S283), push order instruction number setting (M_ORD_INF) (step S284), control command set 1 (step S601), and preparation for starting reel rotation (step S285).
Step S601 is the same as in the fourteenth embodiment (B).

Also, in Figure 65, after the reel stop acceptance check (step S287), control command set 1 (step S602) is executed, and then an all reel stop check (step S288) is executed, which is the same as in Figure 62 of the 14th embodiment (B).
65, when it is determined in step S289 that all the reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S291, where a display determination of the symbols is performed. That is, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), after all the reels 31 have stopped, the winning number data is maintained without being cleared.

FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the medal payout (M_WIN_PAY) for winning in the fourteenth embodiment (C), and corresponds to FIG. 49 of the eleventh embodiment.
In the flowchart of the fourteenth embodiment (C) shown in FIG. 66, steps different from those in FIG. 49 are underlined, and steps that are the same as those in FIG. 49 are given the same step numbers.

As shown in Fig. 66, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), when the payout number data is acquired in step S391, the process proceeds to step S611, where the payout number data is stored as the acquired number data, and then the process proceeds to step S392. That is, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), the payout number data is stored as the acquired number data between step S391 and step S392.
Also, as shown in Fig. 66, in the 14th embodiment (C), when the process of paying out one medal is executed in step S398, the process proceeds to step S400, and "1" is subtracted from the payout number data. Therefore, in the 14th embodiment (C), unlike Fig. 49 of the 11th embodiment, "1" is not added to the acquisition number data between step S398 and step S400.

67 and 68 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (C).
Figure 67 shows the timing at which the display of the push order instruction information starts and ends when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum play time has elapsed, and Figure 68 shows the timing at which the display of the push order instruction information starts and ends when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum play time has elapsed.
As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), the winning number data is not cleared but maintained even after all the reels 31 have stopped. Therefore, as shown in Fig. 67 and Fig. 68, the push order instruction information (for example, "=1") continues to be displayed on the winning number display LED 78 even after all the reels 31 have stopped.

In the fourteenth embodiment (C), when the payout number data is stored as the acquired number data in step S611 of FIG. 66, the number of medals acquired (for example, "10" when 10 medals are paid out) is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 by the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) during the interrupt process (I_INTR) executed after this process.
For this reason, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), as shown in Figures 67 and 68, until the medals are paid out, the acquired number display LED 78 continues to display push order instruction information (for example, "=1"), and at the time of medal payment, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 switches from the push order instruction information to the number of medals acquired (for example, from "=1" to "10").
The timing of starting to display the number of medals won, the timing of sending the push order instruction number as a control command, and the timing of starting and ending the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 are the same as in the 14th embodiment (A).

In the fourteenth embodiment (C), even after all the reels 31 have stopped, the winning number data is not cleared but maintained, and the payout number data is stored as winning number data in step S611 for the medal payout (M_WIN_PAY) due to winning in FIG.
Therefore, as shown in Figures 67 and 68, even after all the reels 31 have stopped, the push order instruction information can continue to be displayed on the winning number display LED 78.
Furthermore, until the medals are paid out, the acquired number display LED 78 continues to display push sequence instruction information, and when the medals are paid out, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 is switched from the push sequence instruction information to the number of medals acquired. Therefore, although the acquired number display LED 78 is a display device that serves both the push sequence instruction information and the number of medals acquired, the display of the number of medals acquired is not hindered.

<Fourteenth embodiment (D)>
In the fourteenth embodiment (D), the timing at which the push order instruction information starts to be displayed on the winning number display LED 78 is different from that of the fourteenth embodiments (A) to (D), and the display of the push order instruction information starts when the reel 31 becomes capable of being stopped.
FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the main processing (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (D), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 41 of the eleventh embodiment.
In the flowchart of the fourteenth embodiment (D) shown in FIG. 69, steps that differ from those in FIG. 41 are underlined, and steps that are the same as those in FIG. 41 are given the same step numbers.

As shown in Fig. 69, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), when the rotation of the reel 31 is started in step S286, the process proceeds to step S604, where it is determined whether the reel 31 can be stopped. That is, it is determined whether the rotation of the reel 31 has reached a constant speed and the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted. Then, when it is determined that the reel 31 can be stopped, the process proceeds to step S284, where the push order instruction number set (M_ORG_INF) is executed.
In addition, the contents of the processing in the push order instruction number set (M_ORG_INF) in step S284 are the same as those in the 11th embodiment and the 14th embodiment (A) to (C).
Moreover, the contents of the processes in steps S601 and S602 for control command set 1 are similar to those in the fourteenth embodiment (B) and (C).

70 and 71 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (D).
Figure 70 shows the timing at which the display of the push order instruction information starts and ends when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum play time has elapsed, and Figure 71 shows the timing at which the display of the push order instruction information starts and ends when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum play time has elapsed.
As described above, in the 14th embodiment (D), when the reel 31 becomes capable of being stopped, the push order instruction number set is executed, so that, as shown in Figures 70 and 71, when the reel 31 becomes capable of being stopped, regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum play time has elapsed or the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum play time has elapsed, the display of push order instruction information on the winning number display LED 78 begins.

Also, in the 14th embodiment (D), as in the 14th embodiments (A) to (C), when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum play time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 70, the display of a push order instruction image on the image display device 23 begins after the reel 31 has started to rotate and before the reel 31 can be stopped, and when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum play time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 71, the display of a push order instruction image on the image display device 23 begins to rotate.
For this reason, in the 14th embodiment (D), as in the 14th embodiments (A) to (C), regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum play time has elapsed, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 begins before the reels 31 can be stopped.

Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum play time has elapsed, when the reel 31 becomes capable of being stopped, the display of push order instruction information on the winning number display LED 78 begins.
Therefore, in the 14th embodiment (D), as shown in Figures 70 and 71, regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum play time has elapsed, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 will begin first, and then the display of the push order instruction information on the number of winnings display LED 78 will begin.

Furthermore, in the 14th embodiment (D), the timing at which the push order instruction information starts to be displayed on the winning number display LED 78 can be delayed until the reel 31 can be stopped, so that, similar to the 14th embodiment (B), a player who has been waiting for a rare win is not disappointed immediately after operating the start switch 41.
Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), although the timing at which the push order instruction information starts to be displayed on the winning number display LED 78 is delayed, when the reel 31 becomes capable of being stopped, the push order instruction information starts to be displayed on the winning number display LED 78, so that the push order instruction information can be notified to the player before the player operates the stop switch 42.

<Fourteenth embodiment (E)>
In the 14th embodiment (E), like the 14th embodiment (B), the display of push order instruction information begins when the reel 31 starts to rotate, and like the 14th embodiment (C), the display of push order instruction information ends when the medals are paid out.
FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the main processing (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (E), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 62 of the fourteenth embodiment (B) and FIG. 65 of the fourteenth embodiment (C).
In FIG. 72, steps S271 to S286 are similar to those in FIG. 62 of the fourteenth embodiment (B), and steps S287 to S303 are similar to those in FIG. 65 of the fourteenth embodiment (C).

73 and 74 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (E).
Figure 73 shows the timing at which the display of the push order instruction information starts and ends when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum play time has elapsed, and Figure 74 shows the timing at which the display of the push order instruction information starts and ends when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum play time has elapsed.
As shown in Figures 73 and 74, in the 14th embodiment (E), similar to Figures 63 and 64 of the 14th embodiment (B), the display of push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 begins when the reel 31 starts to rotate, and similar to Figures 67 and 68 of the 14th embodiment (C), the display of push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 ends when the medals are paid out.

The timing of starting to display the number of medals won, the timing of sending the push order instruction number as a control command, and the timing of starting and ending the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 are the same as in the 14th embodiment (B).
In addition, in the 14th embodiment (E), similarly to the 14th embodiment (B), when it is determined that the minimum play time has elapsed, the push order instruction number is stored as winning number data, and when the reel 31 starts to rotate, the push order instruction information begins to be displayed on the winning number display LED 78.
Therefore, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum play time has elapsed, the timing for starting to display the push order instruction information on the winning number display LED 78 can be delayed until the minimum play time has elapsed, so that a player who has been waiting for a rare combination is not disappointed immediately after operating the start switch 41.

Furthermore, in the 14th embodiment (E), similarly to the 14th embodiment (C), even after all the reels 31 have stopped, the winning number data is not cleared but maintained, and the payout number data is stored as winning number data in step S611 of the medal payout (M_WIN_PAY) due to winning in FIG. 66.
Therefore, even after all the reels 31 have stopped, the push sequence instruction information can continue to be displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 until the medals are paid out, and further, when the medals are paid out, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 is switched from the push sequence instruction information to the number of medals acquired. Therefore, although the acquired number display LED 78 is a display device that serves both the push sequence instruction information and the number of medals acquired, the display of the number of medals acquired is not impeded.

<Fourteenth embodiment (F)>
FIG. 75 is a front view showing an outline of a configuration including the reel 31, the stop switch 42, and the operation indicator lamp 25 in the fourteenth embodiment (F).
As shown in Figure 75, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), a stop instruction lamp 25 is provided below each reel 31. This stop instruction lamp 25 indicates the reel 31 to be stopped, and is constituted by an LED lamp.

The left stop instruction lamp 25 is provided below the left reel 31 and is turned on when instructing the left reel 31 to stop.
Similarly, the stop instruction lamp 25 that is provided below the center reel 31 and turns on when instructing the center reel 31 to stop is the center stop instruction lamp 25.
In addition, a stop instruction lamp 25 that is provided below the right reel 31 and lights up when instructing the right reel 31 to stop is a right stop instruction lamp 25.
The sub-control board 80 controls the turning on/off of each stop indication lamp 25 .

Here, the sub-control board 80 is made up of a first sub-control board and a second sub-control board, and the stop indicator lamp 25 is electrically connected to the second sub-control board.
The second sub-control board controls the turning on/off of each stop indication lamp 25 and displays images on the image display device 23 based on the control commands transmitted from the first sub-control board.

Specifically, when the conditions for activating the instruction function are met, that is, when a role with an advantageous push order, such as a push order bell, is won during the AT, the main control board 50 stores the push order instruction number as a control command in the control command buffer in control command set 1 during the main processing (M_MAIN).
Then, the main control board 50 sends the push order instruction number as a control command stored in the control command buffer to the first sub-control board by sending a control command (step S464) during the interrupt processing (I_INTR) executed after this processing.

In addition, when the first sub-control board receives a control command transmitted from the main control board 50, it stores (saves) the received control command in a specified memory area.
Furthermore, the first sub-control board executes sub-main processing every 16 ms, and analyzes the control command in the loop processing during this sub-main processing.If the result indicates that the control command is a push order instruction number, the lamp control command and image command corresponding to the analysis result are stored in the command buffer.

Furthermore, in the command sending process during the next sub-main process, the first sub-control board sends the lamp control commands and image commands stored in the command buffer to the second sub-control board.
For this reason, as in the 14th embodiment (A), it takes approximately 32 ms (= 16 ms x 2 of the sub-main processing period) from the time the main control board 50 sends the push order instruction number as a control command to the first sub-control board until the second sub-control board receives the lamp control command and image command.

The second sub-control board then controls the turning on/off of the (left, middle, right) stop indicator lamps 25 based on the received lamp control command, and also performs drawing processing based on the received image command to display an image on the image display device 23.
For example, when a lamp control command and an image command indicating a left first stop are received, the second sub-control board turns on the left stop indication lamp 25, turns off the middle stop indication lamp 25 and the right stop indication lamp 25, and displays an image on the image display device 23 prompting the user to operate the left stop switch 42.

In addition, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), the second sub-control board executes an interrupt process every 1 ms, and controls the turning on/off of each stop indication lamp 25 during this interrupt process.
For this reason, it takes approximately 1 ms for the second sub-control board to turn on the stop indication lamp 25 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped after receiving the lamp control command sent from the first sub-control board.

Furthermore, as described above, it takes approximately 32 ms from when the main control board 50 sends a control command to the first sub-control board until the second sub-control board receives the lamp control command.
Therefore, it takes approximately 33 ms (= 32 ms + 1 ms) from the time the main control board 50 sends a control command to the first sub-control board until the second sub-control board turns on the stop indicator lamp 25 .

Also, in the 14th embodiment (F), as in the 14th embodiment (A), the second sub-control board performs drawing processing at 30 fps (frames per second), so that it takes approximately 33.33 ms to display one image on the image display device 23.
For this reason, in the 14th embodiment (F), as in the 14th embodiment (A), it takes approximately 65.33 ms (= 32 ms + 33.33 ms) from the time the main control board 50 sends a control command to the first sub-control board until the second sub-control board displays the push order indication image on the image display device 23.
As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), the stop indicator lamp 25 lights up first, and then the push order indicator image is displayed on the image display device 23.

76 and 77 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (F).
Figure 76 shows the timing at which the display of the push order instruction information starts and ends when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum play time has elapsed, and Figure 77 shows the timing at which the display of the push order instruction information starts and ends when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum play time has elapsed.

Although not shown, in the 14th embodiment (F), as in the 14th embodiment (B), after preparation for starting reel rotation is performed, the push order instruction numbers are set.
For this reason, as shown in Figures 76 and 77, in the 14th embodiment (F), as in the 14th embodiment (B), regardless of whether the start switch 41 is operated before or after the minimum play time has elapsed, the display of push order instruction information on the number of wins display LED 78 begins when the reel 31 starts to rotate.

Although not shown, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), when it is detected that the third stop switch 42 is turned on, the acquisition number data is cleared. Then, due to an interrupt process executed after this process, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 becomes "00".
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), as shown in Figures 76 and 77, when the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated), the display of the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 ends.
The timing of starting to display the number of medals won and the timing of sending the push order instruction number as a control command are the same as in the fourteenth embodiment (A) to (E).

As described above, it takes approximately 33 ms from when the main control board 50 sends a control command to the first sub-control board until the second sub-control board turns on the stop indicator lamp 25, and it takes approximately 65.33 ms from when the main control board 50 sends a control command to the first sub-control board until the second sub-control board displays the push order indicator image on the image display device 23.

Therefore, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum playing time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 76, after the reel 31 starts to rotate and before the reel 31 can be stopped, first the stop indication lamp 25 lights up, and then a push order indication image is displayed on the image display device 23.
In contrast, for example, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) one second before the minimum play time has elapsed, it takes about one second from the turning on (operation) of the start switch 41 to the start of rotation of the reel 31, so as shown in Figure 77, first the stop indication lamp 25 lights up before the reel 31 starts to rotate, and then a push order indication image is displayed on the image display device 23.

Also, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum playing time has elapsed, as shown in Figure 76, first, push order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, then the stop instruction lamp 25 lights up, and finally, a push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23.
In contrast, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum playing time has elapsed, as shown in Figure 77, first the stop indicator lamp 25 lights up, then a push order indication image is displayed on the image display device 23, and finally the push order indication information is displayed on the number of winnings display LED 78.

In addition, in the 14th embodiment (F), similar to the 14th embodiments (B) and (E), when it is determined that the minimum playing time has elapsed, the push order instruction number is stored as winning number data, and the display of push order instruction information on the winning number display LED 78 begins when the reel 31 starts to rotate.
Therefore, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum play time has elapsed, the timing for starting to display the push order instruction information on the winning number display LED 78 can be delayed until the minimum play time has elapsed, so that a player who has been waiting for a rare combination is not disappointed immediately after operating the start switch 41.

As shown in Figures 76 and 77, regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum play time has elapsed, the stop indication lamp 25 lights up first, and then the push order indication image is displayed on the image display device 23.
Both the stop indication lamp 25 and the image display device 23 are controlled by the second sub-control board, but since a drawing process needs to be executed to display an image on the image display device 23, the stop indication lamp 25 lights up earlier.

<Fourteenth embodiment (G)>
The 14th embodiment (G) differs from the 14th embodiment (F) in that it is equipped with a dedicated 7-segment display (7-seg) for displaying the push order instruction information and in the timing at which the display of the push order instruction information ends, but is otherwise similar to the 14th embodiment (F).
In addition, a 7-segment display dedicated to displaying push order instruction information is called a push order instruction LED.
In the fourteenth embodiment (G), a storage area for push order instruction data is secured in the RWM 53. The push order instruction data is data for displaying push order instruction information on the push order instruction LEDs.

78 and 79 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (G).
Figure 78 shows the timing at which the display of the push order instruction information starts and ends when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum play time has elapsed, and Figure 79 shows the timing at which the display of the push order instruction information starts and ends when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum play time has elapsed.

In the fourteenth embodiment (G), as in the fourteenth embodiments (B) and (F), after preparation for starting reel rotation is performed, the push order instruction numbers are set.
For this reason, as shown in Figures 78 and 79, in the 14th embodiment (G), as in the 14th embodiments (B) and (F), regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum play time has elapsed, the display of push order instruction information begins when the reel 31 starts to rotate.
In the fourteenth embodiment (G), a push order instruction number is set in the push order instruction data storage area of the RWM 53. As a result, push order instruction information is displayed on the push order instruction LED in the interrupt processing executed after this processing.

In addition, in the fourteenth embodiment (A) to (F), push order instruction information was displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, and by clearing the acquired number data by the time the medals were paid out, it was possible to display the number of medals acquired on the acquired number display LED 78.
In contrast, in the 14th embodiment (G), the push order instruction data is maintained and not cleared even when medals are paid out, so that, as shown in Figures 78 and 79, the push order instruction LED continues to display push order instruction information (for example, "=1") even when medals are paid out.

Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (G), when the payout of medals is completed, the push order instruction data is cleared. Then, the push order instruction LED display becomes "00" due to an interrupt process executed after this process.
For this reason, in the fourteenth embodiment (G), as shown in Figures 78 and 79, after the medals are paid out, the display of the push order instruction information on the push order instruction LEDs ends.

In this way, in the 14th embodiment (G), the push order instruction information is not displayed on the number of medals won display LED 78, but is displayed on a dedicated push order instruction LED, so that even if the push order instruction information continues to be displayed when medals are paid out, it does not interfere with the display of the number of medals won.
The timing of starting to display the number of medals won, the timing of sending the push order instruction number as a control command, the timing of starting and ending the display of the operation instruction lamp 25, and the timing of starting and ending the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 are the same as in the 14th embodiment (F).

<Summary of the fourteenth embodiment>
If push sequence instruction information is displayed from when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) until the reel 31 can be stopped (when the rotation of the reel 31 reaches a constant speed and the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted), the player can be informed of the correct push sequence before he or she turns on (operates) the stop switch 42.
Therefore, the timing for displaying the push order information is as follows:
1) When the start switch 41 is turned on (operated); 2) After the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the reel 31 starts to rotate; 3) When the reel 31 starts to rotate; 4) After the reel 31 starts to rotate and before the reel 31 can be stopped; 5) When the reel 31 can be stopped.

Furthermore, when the push order instruction information is displayed on the winning number display LED 78, if the display of the push order instruction information is terminated from the time the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated) to the time the medals are paid out, the display of the winning number of medals can be prevented from being impeded.
Therefore, the timing for the end of displaying the push order information is as follows:
1) When the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated). 2) When the third stop switch 42 is turned on and then turned off (when the player releases his/her hand from the third stop switch 42).
3) When all reels 31 stop; and 4) When medals are paid out.
In addition, when the push order instruction information is displayed on a dedicated push order display LED, the display of the push order instruction information may continue when the medals are paid out, and the display of the push order instruction information may be terminated after the medals are paid out.

In addition, it takes a certain amount of time for the sub-control board 80 (second sub-control board) to display the push order indication image on the image display device 23, as this involves the generation of a control command in the main control board 50, the transmission of the control command from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80, the reception and analysis of the control command by the sub-control board 80, and the drawing processing and display on the sub-control board 80 (second sub-control board).
Therefore, even if the main control board 50 simultaneously displays the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 and transmits a control command to the sub-control board 80, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 will be delayed.

In addition, the order of when the reel 31 starts to rotate and when the push order indication image starts to be displayed on the image display device 23 may be reversed depending on whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum play time has elapsed.
Therefore, the timing for starting display of the push order indication image on the image display device 23 is as follows:
1) After the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the reel 31 starts to rotate. 2) After the reel 31 starts to rotate and before the reel 31 can be stopped.

In addition, it takes a certain amount of time from when the main control board 50 sends a control command to the sub-control board 80 until the sub-control board 80 (second sub-control board) finishes displaying the push order indication image on the image display device 23.
Therefore, the timing at which the display of the push order indication image on the image display device 23 ends is after the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated).
Furthermore, the timing at which the display of the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 begins, the timing at which the display of the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 ends, the timing at which the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 begins, and the timing at which the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 ends can be set in any appropriate combination, without being limited to the combinations shown in the 14th embodiments (A) to (G).

In addition, in a game in which push order instruction information is displayed on the winning number display LED 78, even if a push order error occurs during the game, the push order instruction information may continue to be displayed as is until a specified time after the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated), or the display of the push order instruction information may be terminated at the point in time when the push order error occurs.
Similarly, in a game in which a push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23, even if a push order error occurs during the game, the push order instruction image may continue to be displayed until a predetermined time after the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated), or the display of the push order instruction image may be terminated at the point in time when the push order error occurs.

In addition, when three medals are inserted and a replay is won, three medals are automatically bet and the game can be started, so that the 1 bet display LED 79a, the 2 bet display LED 79b, the 3 bet display LED 79c, the game start display LED 79d, and the replay display LED 79f are lit up.
At this time, when the third stop switch 42 is operated and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, first, the 1 bet display LED 79a is turned on, and the 2 bet display LED 79b, the 3 bet display LED 79c, the game start display LED 79d, and the replay display LED 79f are turned off.

Thereafter, the 2 bet display LED 79b and the 3 bet display LED 79c are sequentially lit, and finally, the 1 bet display LED 79a, the 2 bet display LED 79b, the 3 bet display LED 79c, the game start display LED 79d, and the replay display LED 79f are lit.
Then, when a replay is won when three coins are inserted, the 1 bet display LED 79a is lit and the 2 bet display LED 79b, the 3 bet display LED 79c, the start of game display LED 79d, and the replay display LED 79f are turned off, and the display of the push order instruction information on the number of winnings display LED 78 may be terminated.

In addition, when a small winning combination is achieved, the display of the push order instruction information on the won number display LED 78 may be terminated when the third stop switch 42 is turned on, when the third stop switch is turned off, when all reels 31 are stopped, or when medals are paid out, and when a replay is achieved, the display of the push order instruction information on the won number display LED 78 may be terminated when the 1 bet display LED 79a is lit and the 2 bet display LED 79b, the 3 bet display LED 79c, the game start display LED 79d, and the replay display LED 79f are turned off.
In other words, the timing at which the display of the push order instruction information ends may be different depending on whether a small win is won or a replay is won.
Of course, the timing at which the display of the push order instruction information ends may be the same when a small win is won and when a replay is won.

Although the fourteenth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and for example, the following modifications are possible.
(1) In the fourteenth embodiment (A), two sets of 8-bit parallel communication lines are used, and a first control command is sent to the sub-control board 80 via one parallel communication line and a second control command is sent to the sub-control board 80 via the other parallel communication line, making it possible to send a control command consisting of 2 bytes of data to the sub-control board 80 with a single interrupt processing.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a control command consisting of 2 bytes of data may be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 using only one set of 8-bit parallel communication lines.
In this case, the first control command and the second control command may be transmitted in sequence during one interrupt process, thereby enabling a control command consisting of 2 bytes of data to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in one interrupt process.

Also, a first control command may be transmitted in one interrupt process, and a second control command may be transmitted in the next interrupt process, thereby transmitting a control command consisting of two bytes of data to the sub-control board 80 in two interrupt processes.
Furthermore, control commands may be sent from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 by serial communication instead of parallel communication.
Furthermore, control commands may be transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 via an electrical connection, or control commands may be transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 via a connection using optical communication means.

(2) In the 14th embodiment (A), the main control board 50 transmits a push order instruction number as a control command to the sub-control board 80 (first sub-control board), and the sub-control board 80 (second sub-control board) executes a drawing process based on the received push order instruction number and displays a push order instruction image on the image display device 23.
However, without being limited to this, for example, the main control board 50 may transmit a condition device number as a control command to the sub-control board 80 (first sub-control board), and the sub-control board 80 (second sub-control board) may execute a drawing process based on the received condition device number and display the push order instruction number on the image display device 23.

Also, for example, the main control board 50 may transmit a performance group number as a control command to the sub-control board 80 (first sub-control board), and the sub-control board 80 (second sub-control board) may execute a drawing process based on the received performance group number and display a push order instruction number on the image display device 23.
(3) The first to fourteenth embodiments and the various modified examples shown in the first to fourteenth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Fifteenth embodiment>
The fifteenth embodiment relates to the timing of the addition process for medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 47.
Below, we will explain fifteenth embodiments (A) to (C) which differ in the timing of the medal addition process.

<Fifteenth embodiment (A)>
The configuration of the medal selector in the fifteenth embodiment (A) is similar to the configuration of the medal selector shown in Figure 2 of the first embodiment.
That is, when a medal is inserted through the medal insertion port 47, the medal flows down a medal passage in the medal selector. On the medal passage in the medal selector, from the upstream side, a passage sensor 46, a insertion sensor 44a, and an insertion sensor 44b are provided. In addition, a blocker 45 is provided between the passage sensor 46 and the insertion sensor 44a.

A medal inserted through the medal insertion port 47 first passes through the passage sensor 46 and then reaches the position of the blocker 45. When the blocker 45 is in the on state, a medal flowing down the medal passage passes through the blocker 45 and then reaches the positions of the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.
The input sensors 44a and 44b are installed at a predetermined distance from each other.
Before the medal reaches the positions of the insertion sensors 44a and 44b, both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are off.
Furthermore, when a medal flows down the medal passage, first the insertion sensor 44a changes from off to on, and the insertion sensor 44b remains off.

When the medals further flow down the medal passage, the insertion sensor 44a remains on, and the insertion sensor 44b changes from off to on.
Thereafter, when the medals further flow down the medal passage, the insertion sensor 44a changes from on to off, and the insertion sensor 44b remains on.
Thereafter, when the medals further flow down the medal passage, the insertion sensor 44a remains off, and the insertion sensor 44b changes from on to off.
Then, the medals that have passed through the insertion sensors 44 a and 44 b reach the hopper 35 .

FIG. 80 is a diagram showing the execution timing of the medal addition process in the fifteenth embodiment (A).
At the timing (a) in FIG. 80, the input sensors 44a and 44b are both off.
At the timing (b) in FIG. 80, the input sensor 44a is on and the input sensor 44b is off.
The state in FIG. 80(b) corresponds to the state in FIG. 4(a) in the first embodiment (B).
80 (b) continues for a predetermined time or longer, the main control board 50 determines that a medal passing error has occurred, and transmits an error command to the sub-control board 80. Then, upon receiving the error command, the sub-control board 80 outputs an error sound from the speaker 22.

At the timing (c) in FIG. 80, the input sensors 44a and 44b are both on.
The state (c) in FIG. 80 corresponds to the state (b) or (c) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
80(c) continues for a predetermined time or longer, the main control board 50 determines that a medal passing error has occurred, as in the case of FIG. 80(b), and transmits an error command to the sub-control board 80. Then, upon receiving the error command, the sub-control board 80 outputs an error sound from the speaker 22.

At the timing (d) in FIG. 80, the input sensor 44a is off and the input sensor 44b is on.
The state (d) in FIG. 80 corresponds to the state (d) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
80 (d) continues for a predetermined time or longer, the main control board 50 determines that a medal passing error has occurred, as in the cases of (b) and (c) in Fig. 80, and transmits an error command to the sub-control board 80. Then, upon receiving the error command, the sub-control board 80 outputs an error sound from the speaker 22.

At the timing (e) in FIG. 80, the input sensors 44a and 44b are both off.
The state (e) in FIG. 80 corresponds to the state (e) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
Also, when the state shown in FIG. 80(e) is reached, the main control board 50 determines that a medal has been inserted, and executes a process of adding "1" to the medal (a bet process or a credit process).
80(e), if the number of bets is less than the specified number, the main control board 50 executes a process of adding "1" to the number of bets. For example, if the specified number for the game is "3" and the number of bets at that point is "1", the process of adding "1" to the number of bets updates the number of bets from "1" to "2".

80(e), if the number of bets has already reached the specified number and the number of credits has not yet reached the maximum number of "50", the main control board 50 executes a process of adding "1" to the number of credits. For example, if the number of credits at that time is "20", the number of credits is updated to "21".
80(e), the main control board 50 transmits a closing command to the sub-control board 80. Upon receiving the closing command, the sub-control board 80 outputs a closing sound from the speaker 22.
If a medal passing error occurs before the state of (e) in Figure 80 is reached, the main control board 50 will not execute the medal "1" increment process, nor will it send an insertion command.

When a plurality of medals are inserted through the medal insertion slot 47, steps (a) to (e) in FIG. 80 are repeated.
Then, in the state of (e) in Figure 80, by executing the process of adding "1" to the number of bets, when the number of bets reaches a specified number, the main control board 50 places the start switch 41 in a state in which it can accept operation (game can be started) and lights up the game start indication LED 79d.

<Fifteenth embodiment (B)>
The fifteenth embodiment (B) differs from the fifteenth embodiment (A) in the timing of execution of the process of adding "1" to the medal.
The configuration of the medal selector in the fifteenth embodiment (B) is similar to the configuration of the medal selector shown in Figure 2 of the first embodiment.

FIG. 81 is a diagram showing the execution timing of the medal addition process in the fifteenth embodiment (B).
As (a) to (c) in Figure 81 are similar to (a) to (c) in Figure 80, their explanation will be omitted. As (d) and (e) in Figure 81 are different from (d) and (e) in Figure 80, they will be explained below.

At the timing (d) in FIG. 81, the input sensor 44a is off and the input sensor 44b is on.
The state of (d) in FIG. 81 corresponds to the state of (d) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
In the 15th embodiment (B), when the state shown in Fig. 81 (d) is reached, the main control board 50 determines that a medal has been inserted and executes a process of adding "1" to the medal (bet process or credit process). At this time, if the number of bets is less than the specified number, a process of adding "1" to the number of bets is executed, and if the number of bets has already reached the specified number but the number of credits has not yet reached the maximum number of "50", a process of adding "1" to the number of credits is executed, which is the same as in the 15th embodiment (A).

81 (d), the main control board 50 transmits a closing command to the sub-control board 80. Upon receiving the closing command, the sub-control board 80 outputs a closing sound from the speaker 22.
However, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), if the state of (d) in FIG. 81 continues for a predetermined time or longer, the main control board 50 determines that a medal passing error has occurred, and transmits an error command to the sub-control board 80. Then, upon receiving the error command, the sub-control board 80 outputs an error sound from the speaker 22.

For this reason, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), after the process of adding "1" to the medal and outputting the insertion sound, there are cases where it is determined that a medal passing error has occurred and an error sound is output.
In this way, when the state of (d) in Figure 81 is reached, the process of adding "1" to the number of medals is executed and the insertion sound is output. If the state of (d) in Figure 81 continues for a predetermined period of time or more and an error sound is output thereafter, the insertion sound is output followed by an error sound, so that even if an error occurs, the player can be informed by the insertion sound that a medal has been inserted.
In addition, when a medal passing error occurs in the state of (b) or (c) in Figure 81, the main control board 50 does not execute the medal "1" increment process, nor does it send an insertion command.

At the timing (e) in FIG. 81, the input sensors 44a and 44b are both off.
When a plurality of medals are inserted through the medal insertion slot 47, steps (a) to (e) in FIG. 81 are repeated.
Then, when the number of bets reaches the specified number by executing the process of adding "1" to the number of bets, the main control board 50 places itself in a state in which it can accept operation of the start switch 41, in the state shown in (e) of Figure 81, and lights up the game start indication LED 79d.
For this reason, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), the timing of executing the process of adding "1" to the number of medals and outputting the insertion sound is different from the timing of making the start switch 41 available for operation and lighting up the game start indication LED 79d.

Here, as explained in the 15th embodiment (A), it is common to execute the process of adding "1" to the medal at the timing of (e) in Figure 80 (when both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are turned off).
However, if the medal flows down the medal passage to the position shown in FIG. 81(d), the medal will enter the hopper 35 because it has already passed through the blocker 45.
Therefore, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), the process of adding "1" to the number of medals is executed at the timing of (d) in Fig. 81 (when the insertion sensor 44b remains on and the insertion sensor 44a changes from on to off). This makes it possible to prevent medals from entering the hopper 35 even though the process of adding medals has not been executed, i.e., to prevent the so-called medal swallowing.

In addition, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), as described above, if the state of (d) in FIG. 81 continues for a predetermined time or longer, the main control board 50 determines that a medal passing error has occurred and sends an error command to the sub-control board 80, which then outputs an error sound from the speaker 22. In this case, the medal addition process has already been executed and the medal insertion sound has already been output when the error sound is output, so the error can be cleared and the medals stuck in the medal selector can be put into the hopper 35. This makes it possible to prevent any disadvantage from being inflicted on the player.

When medals are continuously inserted from the medal insertion port 47, when the number of credits reaches the maximum number "50", the 51st medal is removed from the medal passage at the position of the blocker 45 and is returned from the medal payout port 16.
At this time, when the 50th medal reaches the state of (d) in Fig. 81 (the insertion sensor 44a is off and the insertion sensor 44b is on), the process of adding "1" to the number of credits is executed and the blocker 45 is turned off. This allows the 51st medal to be returned reliably from the medal payout opening 16 without being swallowed.

In the fifteenth embodiment (B), when the bet number reaches a specified number by executing a process of adding "1" to the bet number in the state of (d) in FIG. 81, the state becomes one in which operation of the start switch 41 can be accepted. When the start switch 41 is operated at this time, the main control board 50 transmits a start command to the sub-control board 80. Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the start command, it outputs a sound effect from the speaker 22.

Here, as in the 15th embodiment (A), if the start switch 41 is made capable of accepting operation and a power-on command is sent to the sub-control board 80 at the timing of (e) in Figure 80, there is a possibility that the power-on sound and the sound effect based on the operation of the start switch 41 will overlap.
Therefore, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), a turn-on command is sent to the sub-control board 80 at the timing of (d) in Fig. 81, and the start switch 41 is made ready to accept operation at the timing of (e) in Fig. 81. This makes it possible to prevent the turn-on sound and the sound effect based on the operation of the start switch 41 from overlapping.

<Fifteenth embodiment (C)>
The fifteenth embodiment (C) is the same as the fifteenth embodiment (B) in terms of the timing of execution of the process of adding "1" to the medal, but differs from the fifteenth embodiment (B) in terms of the timing of output of the insertion sound.
The configuration of the medal selector in the fifteenth embodiment (C) is similar to the configuration of the medal selector shown in Figure 2 of the first embodiment.

FIG. 82 is a diagram showing the execution timing of the medal addition process in the fifteenth embodiment (C).
As (a) to (c) in Figure 82 are similar to (a) to (c) in Figures 80 and 81, their explanation will be omitted. As (d) and (e) in Figure 82 are different from (d) and (e) in Figures 80 and 81, they will be explained below.

At the timing (d) in FIG. 82, the input sensor 44a is off and the input sensor 44b is on.
The state of (d) in FIG. 82 corresponds to the state of (d) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
Then, in the fifteenth embodiment (C), when the state shown in Fig. 82 (d) is reached, the main control board 50 determines that a medal has been inserted, and executes a process of adding "1" to the medal (bet process or credit process). At this time, if the number of bets is less than the specified number, a process of adding "1" to the number of bets is executed, and if the number of bets has already reached the specified number but the number of credits has not yet reached the maximum number of "50", a process of adding "1" to the number of credits is executed, which is the same as in the fifteenth embodiments (A) and (B).

However, in the fifteenth embodiment (C), unlike the fifteenth embodiment (B), the main control board 50 does not send a power-on command to the sub-control board 80 at the timing (d) in Figure 82.
In the fifteenth embodiment (C), at the timing of (e) in Fig. 82, the main control board 50 transmits a closing command to the sub-control board 80. Upon receiving the closing command, the sub-control board 80 outputs a closing sound from the speaker 22.

82(d) continues for a predetermined time or more, and the main control board 50 judges that a medal passing error has occurred and transmits an error command to the sub-control board 80. Then, the sub-control board 80 outputs an error sound from the speaker 22.
In this case, the process of adding "1" to the medal is executed, but the insertion sound is not output and an error sound is output. This allows the error notification to take precedence.

Then, when the error is cleared, the main control board 50 transmits an insertion command to the sub-control board 80, and the sub-control board 80 outputs an insertion sound from the speaker 22 based on the received insertion command. This notifies the player that the medal has been inserted, so that the player can feel at ease.
Also, in the state of (e) in Figure 82, by executing the process of adding "1" to the number of bets, when the number of bets reaches a specified number, the state becomes one in which operation of the start switch 41 can be accepted, and the game start indication LED 79d is turned on, which is the same as in the fifteenth embodiment (A) and (B).

Sixteenth Embodiment
The sixteenth embodiment relates to a chute passage 48 that guides medals that have passed through the insertion sensors 44 a and 44 b of the medal selector to the hopper 35 , and a chute sensor 49 provided midway along the chute passage 48 .
Figure 83 is a diagram showing the medal selector, chute passage 48, and chute sensor 49, and is a schematic diagram showing how a medal M inserted through the medal insertion port 47 passes through the insertion sensor 44a, the insertion sensor 44b, and the chute sensor 49 to reach the hopper 35.

The chute passage 48 is a passage that guides the medals M that have passed through the medal selector's insertion sensors 44a and 44b to the hopper 35, and is connected to the downstream side of the medal passage of the medal selector. Then, the medals M inserted from the medal insertion port 47 pass through the medal passage of the medal selector and the chute passage 35 to reach the hopper 35.

The chute sensor 49 is a sensor provided to determine whether or not there is a medal jam or cheating, and is constructed using an optical sensor having a light receiving and emitting element. It is positioned at a predetermined position midway along the chute passage 48 and is electrically connected to the main control board 50.
Since the chute passage 48 is a passage that guides the medals M that have passed the throw-in sensors 44a and 44b to the hopper 35, the chute sensor 49 is disposed downstream of the throw-in sensors 44a and 44b.

In the sixteenth embodiment, the insertion monitoring counter is a counter that adds "1"("+1") when the insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect the passage of a medal M (when both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b change from off to on to off), and subtracts "1"("-1") when the chute sensor 49 detects the passage of a medal M. For this reason, the insertion monitoring counter normally alternates between "1" and "0."
The timing at which the input monitoring counter is incremented by "1" is the timing at which the input sensor 44b changes from on to off (the timing of (e) in FIG. 4 and FIGS. 80 to 82).
Furthermore, the timing for incrementing the insertion monitoring counter by "1" is not limited to the timing when the insertion sensor 44b goes from on to off, but may be, for example, the timing when the insertion sensor 44a goes from off to on (timing (b) in FIG. 4 and FIGS. 80 to 82), the timing when the insertion sensor 44a goes from on to off (timing (c) in FIG. 4 and FIGS. 80 to 82), or the timing when the insertion sensor 44b goes from off to on (timing (d) in FIG. 4 and FIGS. 80 to 82). This is because it is considered that if the medal M reaches these timings, the medal M will enter the hopper 35.
Furthermore, when a medal M passes through the chute sensor 49, the chute sensor 49 changes from OFF to ON to OFF, and the insertion monitoring counter is decremented by "1" when the chute sensor 49 changes from ON to OFF.

In addition, when the insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect the passage of a medal M (insertion monitoring counter = "+1") and the chute sensor 49 does not detect the passage of a medal M, if the insertion sensors 44a and 44b further detect the passage of a medal M, the insertion monitoring counter becomes "+2", and the main control board 50 determines that a medal passage error has occurred.
Furthermore, when the insertion sensors 44a and 44b do not detect the passage of a medal M and only the chute sensor 49 detects the passage of a medal M, the insertion monitoring counter becomes "-1" and the main control board 50 determines that a medal passage error has occurred.

The main control board 50 does not necessarily determine that a medal passage error has occurred when the insertion monitoring counter reaches "+2" or "-1." For example, the main control board 50 may determine that a medal passage error has occurred when the insertion monitoring counter reaches a predetermined value of "+2" or more or a predetermined value of "-1" or less.
Furthermore, the main control board 50 determines that a medal retention error has occurred if the chute sensor 49 continues to detect the medal M even after a predetermined time has elapsed after detecting the medal M. When the main control board 50 determines that a medal retention error has occurred, it stops the progress of the game until the error is resolved.

83, a medal M inserted from the medal insertion port 47 passes through the medal passage and the chute passage 48 and reaches the hopper 35. At this time, the medal M passes through the insertion sensor 44a, the insertion sensor 44b, and the chute sensor 49.
Now, suppose that a medal M has become stuck at the end of the chute passage 48. In Figure 83, position M1 indicates the position of the medal M placed in the medal insertion slot 47, position M2 indicates the position of the medal M that has become stuck at the end of the chute passage 48, position M3 indicates the position of the second medal M from the end of the chute passage 48, and position M4 indicates the position of the third medal M from the end of the chute passage 48.

As shown in Figure 83, in the sixteenth embodiment, a chute sensor 49 is positioned at a position where it can detect the third medal M (M4) from the end of the chute passage 48 when a medal M becomes stuck at the end of the chute passage 48.
Therefore, when a medal M becomes stuck at the end of the chute passage 48, the chute sensor 49 detects the third medal M (M4) from the end of the chute passage 48, and if this condition continues for a predetermined period of time or more, the main control board 50 determines that a medal retention error has occurred and stops the progress of the game until the error is cleared.

For example, suppose that three medals M are inserted through the medal insertion slot 47 when the specified number is "3" and both the bet number and credit number are "0". In this case, when the insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect the passage of the third medal M, the main control board 50 places the start switch 41 in a state in which it is ready to accept operation (play can begin) and turns on the game start indicator LED 79d. At this time, if the first medal M (M2) gets stuck at the tip of the chute passage 48, the third medal M (M4) is detected by the chute sensor 49. If this state continues for a predetermined time or longer, the main control board 50 determines that a medal retention error has occurred and stops the progress of the game. This makes it possible to prevent the player from playing with medals M stuck in the chute passage 48.

The position of the chute sensor 49 is not limited to a position where it can detect the third medal M (M4) from the end of the chute passage 48 when a medal M is stuck at the end of the chute passage 48. If the specified number is "N", the chute sensor 49 may be placed in a position where it can detect the Nth medal M from the end of the chute passage 48 when a medal M is stuck at the end of the chute passage 48. This makes it possible to prevent the player from playing a game when the chute passage 48 is stuck with a medal M.

Seventeenth Embodiment
The seventeenth embodiment relates to a medal payout passage 134 that guides medals ejected from the discharge portion 103 of the medal payout device 15 to the medal payout opening 16 .
84 is a front view of the passage forming member 130, FIG. 85 is a rear view of the passage forming member 130, FIG. 86 is a left side view of the passage forming member 130, and FIG. 87 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG.

The slot machine 10 comprises a box-shaped cabinet 13 with an opening at the front, and a front door 12 that closes the opening of the cabinet 13.
Furthermore, a medal payout device 15 is disposed at the lower interior portion of the cabinet 13 .
Furthermore, a medal insertion slot 47, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, etc. are arranged in the center of the front surface of the front door 12, and a medal selector is arranged on the back surface of the front door 12 in a position corresponding to the medal insertion slot 47.
Furthermore, a medal payout opening 16 is provided at the bottom of the front door 12, a medal tray for receiving medals paid out from the medal payout opening 16 is provided at the bottom of the front surface of the front door 12, and a passage forming member 130 is attached to the bottom of the back surface of the front door 12.

In addition, the passage forming member 130 is formed in a curved shape as shown in Figures 84 and 85, and is a member that forms a return medal passage 132 and a payout medal passage 134 by being attached to a predetermined position on the lower part of the back surface of the front door 12.
Furthermore, the return medal passage 132 is a passage that guides medals that are not permitted to be inserted by the blocker 45 of the medal selector to the medal payout opening 16.
Furthermore, the payout medal passage 134 is a passage that guides the medals ejected from the discharge section 103 of the medal payout device 15 to the medal payout opening 16 .
In addition, the return medal passage 132 and the payout medal passage 134 merge midway to form a single passage.

84 and 85, an upper medal receiving port 131 is provided on the upper part of the passage forming member 130. This upper medal receiving port 131 is an opening for receiving medals that have been prohibited from being inserted by the blocker 45, and is an opening that serves as the upstream end of the return medal passage 132, and is formed so as to be located below the blocker 45 of the medal selector when the front door 12 is closed.
Then, the medals that are not permitted to be inserted by the blocker 45 pass through the upper medal receiving port 131, are guided by the returned medal passage 132, pass through the medal payout port 16, and are stored in the medal receiving tray.

84 and 85, a lower medal receiving opening 133 is provided below the center of the passage forming member 130 and toward the left when viewed from the front (to the right when viewed from the back). This lower medal receiving opening 133 is an opening for receiving medals ejected from the discharge section 103 of the medal payout device 15, and is an opening that forms the upstream end of the payout medal passage 134, and is formed so as to be located in front of the discharge section 103 of the medal payout device 15 when the front door 12 is closed.
Then, the medals ejected from the discharge section 103 of the medal payout device 15 pass through the lower medal receiving port 133, are guided by the payout medal passage 134, pass through the medal payout port 16, and are stored in the medal receiving tray.

86 and 87 , the lower medal receiving opening 133 is formed on the back side of the passage forming member 130, and a plate material that forms the back side of the front door 12 is disposed on the front side of the passage forming member 130. In this way, there is a distance from the lower medal receiving opening 133 to the back side of the front door 12 that corresponds to the depth of the passage forming member 130.
Here, the medal M ejected from the discharge unit 103 of the medal payout device 15 passes through the lower medal receiving opening 133, passes through the payout medal passage 134, and bounces off at a position facing the lower medal receiving opening 133 on the back surface of the front door 12. If the distance from the lower medal receiving opening 133 to the back surface of the front door 12 is short at this time, there is a possibility that the medal M that bounces off the back surface of the front door 12 will collide with the medal M that is ejected from the discharge unit 103 of the medal payout device 15 next after this medal M.

Therefore, in the 17th embodiment, as shown in Figure 87, when the distance from the lower medal receiving opening 133 to the rear surface of the front door 12 is "L1" and the diameter of the medal M is "D", it is set so as to satisfy "L1 ≧ 2D".
In other words, the distance "L1" from the lower medal receiving opening 133 to the rear surface of the front door 12 is set to be at least twice the diameter "D" of the medal M.
This makes it difficult for a medal M that has bounced off the rear surface of the front door 12 to collide with a medal M that is subsequently ejected from the ejection section 103 of the medal payout device 15.

That is, the medal M ejected from the ejection section 103 of the medal payout device 15 falls downward due to gravity, heading toward the back surface of the front door 12 (to the right in FIG. 87). Therefore, the medal M ejected from the ejection section 103 of the medal payout device 15 hits the back surface of the front door 12 at a position lower than the position at which it was ejected. Furthermore, the medal M that bounces off the back surface of the front door 12 falls downward due to gravity, heading toward the lower medal receiving opening 133 (to the left in FIG. 87).
Furthermore, by setting the distance "L1" from the lower medal receiving opening 133 to the back surface of the front door 12 to more than twice the diameter "D" of the medal M, a sufficient difference in height can be secured between the medal M that is ejected from the discharge section 103 of the medal payout device 15 and heads toward the back surface of the front door 12 and the medal M that hits the back surface of the front door 12, bounces off, and heads toward the lower medal receiving opening 133, making it less likely that the two medals M will collide.

In addition, if medals M are ejected one after another at short intervals from the ejection section 103 of the medal payout device 15, even if the distance "L1" from the lower medal receiving opening 133 to the back surface of the front door 12 is set to at least twice the diameter "D" of the medal M, there is a possibility that the medal M ejected from the ejection section 103 of the medal payout device 15 will collide with the medal M that bounces off the back surface of the front door 12.

Therefore, in the 17th embodiment, after the medal M ejected from the ejection section 103 of the medal payout device 15 hits the back surface of the front door 12 and bounces off, the next medal M is ejected from the ejection section 103 of the medal payout device 15.
In other words, the interval at which medals M are ejected from the ejection section 103 of the medal payout device 15, the ejection speed of medals M from the ejection section 103 of the medal payout device 15, and the distance from the lower medal receiving port 133 to the rear surface of the front door 12 are set to satisfy the above relationship.

In this way, if the medal M ejected from the discharge section 103 of the medal payout device 15 hits the rear surface of the front door 12 at a position lower than the ejected position, bounces off, and falls to an even lower position before the next medal M is ejected from the discharge section 103 of the medal payout device 15, the distance and height difference between the two medals can be sufficiently secured, making it less likely that the two medals M will collide with each other.
Here, if a medal M that bounces off the back surface of the front door 12 collides with a medal M that is subsequently ejected from the discharge section 103 of the medal payout device 15, there is a possibility that the medal M will become clogged near the lower medal receiving port 133 or in the medal payout passage 134.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as described above, the two medals M are set to be less likely to collide with each other, thereby preventing the medals M from becoming clogged near the lower medal receiving port 133 or within the medal payout passage 134.
In this embodiment, the medal M that bounces off the back surface of the front door 12 is set to be unlikely to collide with the medal M ejected from the ejection section 103 of the medal payout device 15 next after this medal M, but this does not mean that when a large number of medals M are ejected continuously from the ejection section 103, all of the medals M before and after will not collide, but it is sufficient that at least the first medal M and the second medal M do not collide. When a small prize is won, two medals are most often paid out, so if the first medal M and the second medal M are set to be unlikely to collide, it is possible to prevent the medals M from clogging near the lower medal receiving opening 133 and inside the medal payout passage 134.

Also, as described in the sixth embodiment, the hopper disk 101 is provided with a plurality of holding portions 102 capable of holding medals M stored in the hopper along the outer periphery of the hopper disk 101.
When the following conditions (a) and (b) are met, or when the following conditions (a) and (c) are met, two or more medals M will be ejected consecutively from the ejection section 103 of the medal payout device 15.
(a) A medal M is held in each of two adjacent holding portions 102 on the hopper disk 101 .
(b) When the number of remaining medals until the upper limit of the number of credits is set to "N" and the number of medals M paid out as a result of winning is set to "M", "(M-N) ≧ 2" is satisfied.
(c) The settlement switch 43 is operated when the number of credits is "2" or more.

For example, in Figure 17 (b) of the sixth embodiment, when a medal M is held in each of the holding portions 102 at the position of the letter "B" and the holding portion 102 at the position of the letter "C," the above condition (a) is met even if a medal M is not held in the holding portion 102 at the position of the letter "D."
Also, for example, in Figure 17 (b) of the sixth embodiment, when no medal M is held in the holding portion 102 at the position of the letter "B", but a medal M is held in each of the holding portion 102 at the position of the letter "C" and the holding portion 102 at the position of the letter "D", the above condition (a) is met.

Furthermore, in Figure 17 (b) of the sixth embodiment, when a medal M is held in each of the holding portions 102 at the position of the letter "B," the holding portion 102 at the position of the letter "C," and the holding portion 102 at the position of the letter "D," the above condition (a) is met.
Of course, when medals M are held in all of the holding portions 102 of the hopper disk 101, the above condition (a) is met.

Also, for example, when the upper limit of the number of credits is "50" and the number of credits is "47", the number of coins remaining until the upper limit of the number of credits is reached is "3". In this case, if a small combination with a payout amount of "5" or more is won, the above condition (b) will be satisfied.
Furthermore, for example, when the number of credits has already reached the upper limit of "50", the number of coins remaining until the upper limit of the number of credits is reached is "0". In this case, if a small winning combination with a payout of "2" or more is won, the above condition (b) will be met.

From the above, for example, in Figure 17 (b) of the sixth embodiment, when at least a medal M is held in each of the holding portions 102 at the position of the letter "B" and the holding portion 102 at the position of the letter "C," if the above condition (b) or (c) is satisfied, two or more medals M will be successively ejected from the discharge portion 103 of the medal payout device 15.
Furthermore, for example, in Figure 17 (b) of the sixth embodiment, no medal M is held in the holding portion 102 at the position of the letter "B", but at least a medal M is held in the holding portion 102 at the position of the letter "C" and in the holding portion 102 at the position of the letter "D", and when the above condition (b) or (c) is satisfied, two or more medals M will be successively ejected from the discharge portion 103 of the medal payout device 15.

Furthermore, there are cases where the medal M ejected from the ejection section 103 of the medal payout device 15 hits the rear surface of the front door 12, bounces off, and returns to the vicinity of the lower medal receiving opening 133. If this returning medal M passes through the lower medal receiving opening 133, it falls into the interior of the cabinet 13 and cannot be paid out to the player.
Therefore, in the 17th embodiment, as shown in Figure 87, when the height of the peripheral portion of the lower medal receiving port 133 is "L2" and the thickness of the medal M is "T", it is set so as to satisfy "L2 ≧ T".

In other words, the height "L2" of the peripheral portion of the lower medal receiving opening 133 is set to be equal to or greater than the thickness "T" of the medal M.
As a result, even if a medal M ejected from the discharge section 103 of the medal payout device 15 hits the rear surface of the front door 12, bounces off, and returns to the vicinity of the lower medal receiving opening 133, the returning medal M can be made to hit the peripheral portion of the lower medal receiving opening 133 and not pass through the lower medal receiving opening 133.

In addition, because the hopper disk 101 of the medal payout device 15 is arranged at an incline with respect to the horizontal plane, the medals M are ejected from the ejection section 103 of the medal payout device 15 in an inclined state with respect to the horizontal plane. For this reason, as shown in Figures 84 and 85, the lower medal receiving opening 133 and the medal ejection passage 134 are also inclined according to the inclination of the medals M being ejected.

Here, the height direction is defined as the direction perpendicular to the front and back surfaces of the medal M ejected in an inclined state. In the 17th embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87, when the height of the payout medal passage 134 is "L2" and the diameter of the medal M is "D", it is set so that "L2 < D" is satisfied. In other words, the height "L2" of the payout medal passage 134 is set to be less than the diameter "D" of the medal M.

As a result, even if the medal M that hits the back surface of the front door 12 and bounces off rotates in the payout medal passage 134, the front and back surfaces of the medal M can be prevented from being parallel to a vertical plane in the payout medal passage 134, so that the medal M can be prevented from blocking the payout medal passage 134.
It should be noted that all of the embodiments and various modified examples described in this specification are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Eighteenth embodiment>
The eighteenth embodiment relates to a transmission process of an external signal.
In the eighteenth embodiment, signals indicating on/off can be output as the external signal 4 and the external signal 5 .
In the 18th embodiment, the external signal 4 is an on signal of the setting key switch (setting key switch signal), a signal indicating that an error has been detected, a signal indicating that an error is being displayed, or a signal indicating that the power switch 11 has been turned on (that power has been detected).
The external signal 5 is a signal indicating that the front door 12 of the slot machine 10 is opened (a door switch ON signal).

FIG. 88 is a diagram showing the main storage areas of the RWM 53 described in the eighteenth embodiment.
The input port 0 level data at address "F00A(H)" is a storage area for storing data indicating the on/off state of input port 0. Each bit of input port 0 is configured as follows.
D0: Setting switch signal (on: "1", off: "0")
D1: Reset switch signal (on: "1", off: "0")
D2: Setting key switch signal (on: "1", off: "0")
D3: Door switch signal (on: "1", off: "0")
D4: Unused D5: Unused D6: Power failure detection signal D7: Full detection signal

Here, the "power interruption detection signal" of D6 bit is a signal that is input when a power interruption occurs (for example, when "Yes" is determined in step S482 in FIG. 54 (eleventh embodiment)).
1, the slot machine 10 is also provided with a sub-tank for storing medals that overflow from the hopper 35. Furthermore, a full tank sensor is provided that turns on when the sub-tank is full and medals come into contact with it. When the full tank sensor turns on, a full tank detection signal is input to the D7 bit of input port 0.
Also, although not shown in FIG. 88, in addition to the memory area for input port 0 level data, it is also possible to provide a memory area for input port rise data for storing data indicating that each bit of input port 0 has changed from off (at the previous interrupt processing) to on (at the current interrupt processing), and a memory area for input port fall data for storing data indicating that each bit of input port 0 has changed from on (at the previous interrupt processing) to off (at the current interrupt processing).

Furthermore, the input port 51 shown in FIG. 1 is not limited to the input port 0, but may be, for example,
(1) an input port 1 to which operation switch signals such as the bet switch 40 (40a and 40b), the start switch 41, the stop switch 42, the settlement switch 43, etc. are input;
(2) Input port 2 to which signals from the passage sensor 46, the input sensor 44, the payout sensor 37, the reel sensor 33, etc. are input
etc.
Then, a storage area for input port level data corresponding to each input port is provided. Furthermore, as described above, it is also possible to provide a storage area for input port rising data and input port falling data for each input port.
Furthermore, in the case where only a storage area for input port level data is provided (where no storage area for input port rising data and input port falling data is provided), not only a storage area for input port level data for the current interrupt processing, but also a storage area for input port level data for the previous interrupt processing may be provided.

The external signal 4 output time at power recovery in address "F013(H)" is a storage area for a timer value that counts the time for outputting the external signal 4 at power recovery. In this embodiment, when the power switch 11 in FIG. 1 is turned on and the main control board 50 detects recovery from power loss, "136(D)" is set as an initial value in address "F013(H)" and "1" is subtracted for each interrupt. Then, until this value becomes "0", it is determined that the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating that the external signal 4 is on can be output).
In the eighteenth embodiment, as in the other embodiments, the interrupt period is 2.235 ms. Therefore, 136 interrupts correspond to 303.96 ms. As a result, when the power is restored from a power outage, the external signal 4 is turned on for about 300 ms (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4).

The external signal 4 management time at address "F014(H)" is a storage area for a timer value for managing the output time of the external signal 4. In this embodiment, an initial value "24(D)" is set when the output of the external signal 4 starts (excluding the time of recovery from the above-mentioned power outage), and "1" is subtracted for each interrupt. Then, until this value becomes "0", it is determined that the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating that the external signal 4 is on can be output).
In addition, the "24" interrupt corresponds to "53.64 ms." This causes the external signal 4 to be turned on for at least "50" ms or more (allowing a signal indicating on to be output as the external signal 4).

The external signal 5 management time at address "F015(H)" is a storage area for a timer value for managing the output time of the external signal 5. In this embodiment, an initial value "24(D)" is set when the output of the external signal 5 starts, and "1" is subtracted for each interrupt. Then, until this value becomes "0", it is determined that the external signal 5 is turned on (a signal indicating that the external signal 5 is on can be output).
As in the above, interrupt "24" corresponds to "53.64 ms." This causes the external signal 5 to be turned on for at least "50" ms (allowing the output of a signal indicating on as the external signal 5).

In this embodiment, the external signal 4 output time at power recovery, the external signal 4 management time, and the external signal 5 management time are all 1-byte timers that measure "255 (D)" or less. These timer values are subtracted by the timer measurement in step S455 during the interrupt process in FIG. 53.
In the 18th embodiment, the above three timers are located at addresses "F013(H)" to "F015(H)". Therefore, in the first step of timer measurement, "F013(H)" is set as the measurement start timer address. Also, "3" is set as the 1-byte timer count. As a result, all timers including addresses "F013(H)" to "F015(H)" are decremented by "1" by the timer measurement process.
In addition, when the subtraction process is performed while the timer value is "0", in other words when "0" is subtracted from "00(H)", the timer value becomes "00(H)".

The error number at address "F051(H)" is a storage area for storing a number corresponding to a detected error when an error is detected. As shown in FIG. 88, when no error is detected, the value of address "F051(H)" is "0(D)". Then, when an "E5" error, for example, is detected, the value "105(D)" corresponding to the detected error is stored in address "F051(H)".
In FIG. 88, "E0" to "E7" are shown as examples of error numbers.
In the above-mentioned eleventh embodiment, the errors "E1", "E5", "E6", and "E7" are exemplified as unrecoverable errors. In contrast, the errors "E0" to "E7" in the eighteenth embodiment (FIG. 88) all correspond to recoverable errors.

When such a recoverable error occurs, the game is stopped in principle. Also, even if at least one reel 31 is rotating, error detection is performed for at least some errors (errors "E7", "E6", and "E5" in the example of the 18th embodiment). When an error is detected during the rotation of at least one reel 31, the game continues until all reels 31 stop, and when all reels 31 stop, the game transitions to an error state (error display) before executing the payout process and the game is stopped. Then, when the error is removed by the hall staff, the game is resumed. Of course, it is also possible to configure the game to stop (without stopping control by operating the stop switch 42) when any of the errors "E7", "E6", and "E5" occurs during the rotation of the reel 31.

In FIG. 88, an "E0" error occurs when the insertion sensor 44 determines that a medal has been retained.
The "E1" error occurs when it is determined that the medal did not pass the insertion sensors 44a and 44b in the correct order.
The "E2" error occurs when it is determined that the subtank is full.
The "E3" error occurs when it is determined that the hopper 35 is empty of medals.
The "E4" error occurs when the payout sensor 37 determines that a medal has accumulated (become jammed) while a medal payout signal is being output.
The "E5" error occurs when the payout sensor 37 turns on when no medal payout signal is being output.
The "E6" error occurs when the insertion sensor 44b detects a medal when the blocker 45 is not forming a medal flow path.
The "E7" error occurs when it is determined that a medal has become stuck in the selector passage.

When any of the above errors are detected, a number corresponding to the detected error is stored in address "F051(H)". When an error number is stored in address "F051(H)", it becomes possible to display an error corresponding to the stored error number. For example, segment data corresponding to the number stored in address "F051(H)" is output to the acquisition number display LED 78 to display the error number. Specifically, when the error number "101(D)" is stored in address "F051(H)", in the LED display control in the interrupt process (for example, FIG. 55 in the eleventh embodiment), at the lighting timing of digit 3, lighting data for digit 3 and segment data for lighting "E" are output. Also, at the lighting timing of digit 4, lighting data for digit 4 and segment data for lighting "1" are output.

Furthermore, when any error number is stored in address "F051(H)" (when it is not "0"), external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as external signal 4).
When the waiting staff removes the error that has occurred, they turn on the reset switch. When it is detected that the reset switch has been turned on, it is determined whether or not the error that has occurred has been removed. If it is determined that the error that has occurred has not been removed, the current state (error display) is maintained. In contrast, if it is determined that the error that has occurred has been removed (no error has occurred), the error number stored in address "F051(H)" is cleared. When the error number in address "F051(H)" is cleared, the error display (display of the error number using digits 3 and 4) is terminated.
It should be noted that the above is an example of displaying an error number on the acquired number display LED 78 based on the other embodiment described above, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be displayed on the credit number display LED 76, or an LED dedicated to error display may be provided and the error number may be displayed on that LED.

The error detection flag at address "F294(H)" is a memory area for storing the fact that an error has been detected, in case an error cannot be immediately transitioned to an error state when an error is detected. In the example of Figure 88, bits D0 to D2 in the memory area at address "F294(H)" are used as detection flags for the "E7", "E6", and "E5" errors, respectively. The "E7", "E6", and "E5" errors are all errors that can potentially be detected even when at least one reel 31 is spinning.

Here, even when the reel 31 is spinning, for example, a determination is made by interrupt processing as to whether an "E5", "E6", or "E7" error has occurred. If the occurrence of any of these errors is detected while the reel 31 is spinning, the bit corresponding to the error in the error detection flag is set to "1". If the error detection flag is "1", an external signal 4 is output.
However, even if these errors are detected while the reels 31 are rotating, the system does not immediately transition to an error state (error display) at that point, but transitions to an error state after all the reels 31 have stopped and before the payout process is executed.

When all reels 31 have stopped, if any bit of the error detection flag is set to "1", the corresponding error number is stored in address "F051 (H)". When an error number is stored in address "F051 (H)", the stored error number is displayed. Note that when an error detection flag is stored in address "F294 (H)" and then an error number is stored in address "F051 (H)", it is optional when to clear the error detection flag in address "F291 (H)". For example, the first method is not to clear the error detection flag until the error is removed. In this case, after the error detection flag is stored and after all reels 31 have stopped, the external signal 4 is turned on based on either the error detection flag or the error number (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). Then, when it is determined that the error has been removed, both the error detection flag and the error number are cleared. When the error detection flag and the error number are cleared, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 4). However, even if both the error detection flag and the error number are cleared, for example, if the setting key switch is on, the external signal 4 will not be turned off (a signal indicating that the external signal 4 is off will not be output).

Secondly, when an error number is stored in address "F051(H)" after storing an error detection flag in address "F294(H)", the error detection flag in address "F291(H)" is cleared. In this case, after the error detection flag is stored, external signal 4 is turned on based on the error detection flag until the error number is stored (a signal indicating ON can be output as external signal 4). When the error number is stored and the error detection flag is cleared, external signal 4 is turned on based on the error number (a signal indicating ON can be output as external signal 4). After that, when it is determined that the error has been removed, the error number is cleared. As a result, external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating OFF can be output as external signal 4). However, even in a situation where both the error detection flag and the error number are cleared, for example, if the setting key switch is on, external signal 4 is not turned off (a signal indicating OFF is not output as external signal 4).

When an error is detected while the reels 31 are rotating, for example, the state cannot immediately transition to an error state (error display) (the state cannot transition to an error state until all reels 31 have stopped), but since it is necessary to immediately turn on the external signal 4 when an error is detected (to be able to output a signal indicating that the external signal 4 is on), an error detection flag is provided.
Therefore, when an "E5", "E6", or "E7" error occurs under a situation where an error state can be immediately entered, such as when the reel 31 is stopped, it is optional whether or not to store "1" in the error detection flag. In order to simplify the process, even when an "E5", "E6", or "E7" error occurs under a situation where an error state can be immediately entered, "1" may be stored in the error detection flag. Alternatively, when an "E5", "E6", or "E7" error occurs under a situation where an error state cannot be immediately entered (for example, when at least one reel 31 is rotating), "1" may be stored in the error detection flag, and when an error state can be immediately entered (for example, during game standby), an error number may be stored but "1" may not be stored in the error detection flag.

In the above memory areas of RWM53, the memory areas at addresses "F00A(H)", "F013(H)" to "F015(H)", and "F051(H)" are memory areas within the used area. In contrast, the memory area at address "F294(H)" is a memory area outside the used area. In addition, the program for detecting errors is stored in a control area outside the used area of ROM54.

89 and 90 are time charts showing the output timing of the external signals 4 and 5, with FIG. 89 showing Example 1 and FIG. 90 showing Example 2.
In example 1 of Fig. 89, (a) shows the relationship between the on/off of the setting key switch and the output of the external signal 4. When it is detected that the setting key switch is on, the external signal 4 is immediately turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4). The minimum value of the time t1 from when it is detected that the setting key switch is on to when it is turned on the external signal 4 (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4) is "0" ms. Therefore, when it is detected that the setting key switch is on, the external signal 4 is immediately turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4).
Whether the setting key switch is on or not is detected in the interrupt process. For example, during the interrupt process shown in Fig. 53 (11th embodiment), the level data of input port 0 is read in the input port read process in step S457, and if the level data of the setting key switch is "1", external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as external signal 4).

In addition, once the setting key switch is turned on, the external signal 4 is kept on for at least 50 ms (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4) (t3 in the drawing). Therefore, even if the setting key switch is turned off immediately (for example, after 10 ms has elapsed) after being turned on, the external signal 4 is kept on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4) until at least 50 ms has elapsed.
When the setting key switch is turned off, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 4) on the condition that 50 ms or more have passed since the external signal 4 was turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). If 50 ms or more have passed since the external signal 4 was turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4), it is possible to turn off the external signal 4 (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 4) at the point in time when it is detected that the setting key switch is turned off (t2 in the figure).

Therefore, when the setting key switch is detected as being on and external signal 4 is turned on (making it possible to output a signal indicating that external signal 4 is on) and then the setting key switch is detected as being off before 50 ms has elapsed, external signal 4 is turned off (making it possible to output a signal indicating that external signal 4 is off) after a minimum of 50 ms has elapsed as the output time for external signal 4.
On the other hand, if it is detected that the setting key switch is on and external signal 4 is turned on (making it possible to output a signal indicating that external signal 4 is on) and then 50 ms or more have elapsed before it is detected that the setting key switch is off, it is possible to immediately turn external signal 4 off (making it possible to output a signal indicating that external signal 4 is off).

1B shows the relationship between the detection/non-detection of an error and the output of the external signal 4. Here, "detection of an error" corresponds to any bit in the error detection flag of address "F294(H)" being "1", and "non-detection of an error" corresponds to the error detection flag being "0".
When "1" is stored in the error detection flag, it is possible to immediately turn on the external signal 4 (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). After "1" is stored in the error detection flag, the minimum value of the time t1 until the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) is "0" ms.
Once the error detection flag is set to "1", the external signal is turned on for at least "50" ms (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) (time t3). When the error detection flag is cleared, the external signal 4 can be turned off (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 4) (time t2). As described above, the error detection flag is cleared when the error is removed and when the error is not removed but an error number is stored.

Therefore, if it is detected that the error detection flag has become "1" and external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as external signal 4), and then it is detected that the error detection flag has become "0" before "50" ms has elapsed, external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as external signal 4) after at least "50" ms has elapsed as the output time of external signal 4.
On the other hand, if it is detected that the error detection flag has become "1" and external signal 4 has been turned on (making it possible to output a signal indicating that external signal 4 is on), and then 50 ms or more has elapsed before it is detected that the error detection flag has become "0", it is possible to immediately turn off external signal 4 (making it possible to output a signal indicating that external signal 4 is off).

(c) shows the relationship between the display/non-display of an error and the output of the external signal 4. Here, "display of an error" corresponds to a value other than "0" (in the example of FIG. 88, any of "100(D)" to "107(D)") being stored in the error number at address "F051(H)", and "non-display of an error" corresponds to the value of the error number being "0". Note that a memory area for storing a flag indicating whether an error is displayed or not may be provided, but as in this embodiment, by determining whether an error is displayed or not based on the data stored in a memory area for displaying the error number, it is possible to reduce the amount of memory area used.

When a value other than "0" is stored in the error number, it is possible to immediately turn on the external signal 4 (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). After a value other than "0" is stored in the error number, the minimum value of the time t1 until the external signal 4 is output is "0" ms.
Once a value other than "0" is stored in the error number, the external signal 4 is turned on for at least "50" ms (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) (time t3). Furthermore, after the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) for at least "50" ms or more after a value other than "0" is stored in the error number, when the error number is cleared, it is possible to immediately turn off the external signal 4 (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 4) (time t2).

Therefore, when the error number is stored and the error number is cleared before 50 ms has elapsed after external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating that external signal 4 is on can be output as external signal 4), external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating that external signal 4 is off can be output as external signal 4) after at least 50 ms has elapsed as the output time of external signal 4.
On the other hand, if the error number is stored and the error number is cleared after 50 ms or more have elapsed since external signal 4 was turned on (a signal indicating that external signal 4 is on can be output as external signal 4), then external signal 4 can be immediately turned off (a signal indicating that external signal 4 is off can be output as external signal 4).

(d) shows the relationship between the on/off of the power supply and the output of the external signal 4. Here, various methods can be used to detect whether the power supply is on (whether the power supply switch 11 in FIG. 1 is on), but in this example, "power supply on" corresponds to the time when the initial value "136(D)" of the external signal 4 output time at power recovery is stored in address "F013(H)."
When power on is detected (when the initial value is stored in the output time of external signal 4 when power is restored), it is possible to immediately turn on external signal 4 (a signal indicating on can be output as external signal 4). After the initial value is stored in the output time of external signal 4 when power is restored, the minimum value of the time t1 until external signal 4 is output is "0" ms.
Furthermore, when the initial value is stored in the external signal 4 output time when power is restored, the external signal 4 is turned on for 300 ms (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) (time t3). Here, 300 ms corresponds to the number of interrupts of 136. Furthermore, when the external signal 4 output time when power is restored becomes 0, the external signal 4 can be immediately turned off (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 4) (time t2).

Therefore, an initial value is stored for the output time of external signal 4 when power is restored after a power outage, and after external signal 4 is turned on (making it possible to output a signal indicating that external signal 4 is on), when it is detected that power switch 11 has been turned off (when bit D7 of the input port 0 level data becomes "1"), external signal 4 is turned off after "300" ms has elapsed as the output time of external signal 4 (making it possible to output a signal indicating that external signal 4 is off).
On the other hand, an initial value is stored for the output time of external signal 4 when power is restored after a power outage, and after external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating that external signal 4 is on can be output as external signal 4), when the output time of external signal 4 has elapsed for 300 ms, external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating that external signal 4 is off can be output as external signal 4) even if the power switch 11 remains on.

17(e) shows the relationship between the opening/closing of the front door 12 and the output of the external signal 5. Here, "the front door 12 is opened" corresponds to the time when the door switch is detected to be on. In particular, in the 18th embodiment, this corresponds to the time when the D3 bit of the input port 0 level data (or the input port 0 rising edge data) becomes "1".
When it is detected that the door switch is on, it is possible to immediately turn on the external signal 5 (to output a signal indicating on as the external signal 5). The minimum value of the time t1 from when it is detected that the door switch is on until the external signal 5 is output is "0" ms.
Furthermore, when it is detected that the door switch is on, the external signal 5 is turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 5) for at least 50 ms (time t3). As a result, even if the front door 12 is opened and then immediately closed, the external signal 5 is turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 5) for at least 50 ms.

Therefore, if the door switch is detected as being on and external signal 5 is turned on (a signal indicating that external signal 5 is on can be output), and then the door switch is detected as being off before 50 ms has elapsed, external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating that external signal 5 is off can be output) after at least 50 ms has elapsed as the output time of external signal 5.
On the other hand, if the door switch is detected as being on and external signal 5 is turned on (a signal indicating that the external signal 5 is on can be output as external signal 5) and then the door switch is detected as being off after 50 ms or more have elapsed, it is possible to immediately turn off external signal 5 (a signal indicating that the external signal 5 is off can be output as external signal 5).

The output destination of external signal 4 and external signal 5 is a hall computer, etc., but by keeping external signal 4 or 5 on for 50 ms or more (enabling the output of a signal indicating on as external signal 4 or 5), external signals 4 and 5 can be reliably received by the hall computer (data lamp), etc. Therefore, even if fraudulent acts such as turning on the setting key switch for an instant (for example, about 5 to 10 ms) or opening the front door 12 for an instant are performed, external signal 4 or 5 can be received by the hall computer, etc.

Example 2 shown in FIG. 90 is a modified example of Example 1 shown in FIG.
In FIG.
A time t1 from when the setting key switch shown in (a) is detected to be on until the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4),
A time t1 from when the error detection flag shown in (b) becomes “1” to when the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4);
(c) is a time t1 from when the error number is stored to when the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4);
The time t1 from when the door switch is detected to be on to when the external signal 5 is turned on (when a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 5) shown in (e)
are all set to "0" ms.

In FIG. 90, the interval of time t1 is shown as exceeding "0", but in reality, for example during (a), the timing at which the setting key switch changes from off to on and the timing at which the output of external signal 4 changes from off to on are almost the same (the timing at which the setting key switch changes from off to on and the timing at which the output of external signal 4 changes from off to on are within "2" tenths).
Furthermore, the time t3 during which the external signal 4 in (a) to (c) and the external signal 5 shown in (e) are turned on (the external signals 4 and 5 can be output as signals indicating on) is a minimum of 50 ms. This is the same as the example in FIG. 89.
Furthermore, the time t3 at which the external signal 4 in FIG. 89(d) is turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4) is 300 ms, as in the example of FIG.

Furthermore,
A time t2 from when the setting key switch shown in (a) is detected to be turned off to when the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4);
A time t2 from when the error detection flag shown in (b) is cleared to when the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4);
A time t2 from when the error number shown in (c) is cleared to when the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4);
A time t2 from when the output time of the external signal 4 at power recovery from power failure shown in (d) becomes “0” to when the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating that the external signal 4 is off can be output),
Time t2 from when the door switch is detected to be off (e) to when the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5)
In both cases, the time is set to "50" ms.

To achieve this, for example, when it is detected that the setting key switch is off, when the error detection flag is cleared, or when the error number is cleared, a timer value "24 (D)" for managing the output time of the external signal 4 is set, and the timer value is decremented by "1" for each interrupt processing, and when the timer value becomes "0", the external signal 4 is turned off (making it possible to output a signal indicating that the external signal 4 is off).
Similarly, when it is detected that the door switch is off, a timer value "24 (D)" for managing the output time of the external signal 5 is set, and the timer value is decremented by "1" for each interrupt processing. When the timer value becomes "0", the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating that the external signal 5 is off can be output).

Next, the output of the external signals 4 and 5 will be described with reference to a flowchart. Figures 91 to 94 are flowcharts showing the external signal output process.
Fig. 91 and Fig. 92 are flowcharts showing example 1 of external signal output processing. Fig. 92 is a flowchart continuing from Fig. 91. Fig. 93 is a flowchart showing example 2 of external signal output processing. Fig. 94 is a flowchart showing example 3 of external signal output processing.
The external signal output process (step S3221) is, for example, a process that is inserted between step S455 (timer measurement) and step S456 (LED display control) in FIG.

First, an example 1 of the external signal output process will be described.
91, in step S3231, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch is on. This process determines whether or not the D2 bit of the input port 0 level data is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined that the setting key switch is on. If it is determined that the setting key switch is on, the process proceeds to step S3237, and if it is determined that it is not on, the process proceeds to step S3232.

In step S3232, it is determined whether an error has been detected. This process determines whether any bit of the error detection flag is "1". If it is determined that any bit of the error detection flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S3237, and if it is determined that none of the bits is "1" (no error has been detected), the process proceeds to step S3233.
In step S3233, it is determined whether or not an error is being displayed. This process reads the error number and determines whether it is "0." If it is "0," it is determined that no error is being displayed and the process proceeds to step S3234, and if it is a value other than "0," it is determined that an error is being displayed and the process proceeds to step S3237.

In step S3234, it is determined whether "300" ms have elapsed since the power was turned on. As described above, when recovery from power interruption is detected, the external signal 4 output time at power interruption recovery in address "F013(H)" is set to the initial value "136(D)", and is decremented by "1" for each interrupt process. Then, in step S3234, it is determined whether the external signal 4 output time at power interruption recovery is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that "300" ms have elapsed since the power was turned on, and the process proceeds to step S3235. On the other hand, if the external signal 4 output time at power interruption recovery is not "0", the process proceeds to step S3241.

In step S3235, it is determined whether the output time of the external signal 4 has passed a predetermined time. Here, the external signal 4 management time of address "F014(H)" is set to "24(D)" in step S3240 described later. Then, in step S3235, it is determined whether this external signal 4 management time is "0" or not, and if it is determined to be "0" (if it is determined that the output time of the external signal 4 has passed), the process proceeds to step S3236, and if it is determined to be not "0", the process proceeds to step S3241.
In step S3236, external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating that external signal 4 is off can be output), and the process proceeds to step S3242 (in FIG. 92).

In contrast, if the answer is "Yes" in step S3231, S3232, or S3233 and the process proceeds to step S3237, it is determined whether the setting key switch has changed from off to on in the current interrupt process. Whether the D2 bit (setting key switch signal) of the input port 0 level data has changed to on in the current interrupt process is, for example, firstly, if there is input port 0 rising data, it is determined whether the D2 bit of the input port 0 rising data is "1". Secondly, the input port 0 level data at the previous interrupt process is saved, and if the D2 bit of the input port 0 level data at the previous interrupt process was "0" and the D2 bit of the input port 0 level data at the current interrupt process is "1", it is determined that the setting key switch has changed from off to on in the current interrupt process. If it is determined that the setting key switch has changed from off to on, the process proceeds to step S3240, and if it is determined that it has not changed from off to on, the process proceeds to step S3238.

In step S3238, it is determined whether the error detection flag has changed from off to on. Here, for example, the error detection flag from the previous interrupt process is saved, and a comparison operation is performed with the error detection flag in the current interrupt process to determine whether the error detection flag has changed from off to on in the current interrupt process. If it is determined that the error detection flag has changed from off to on, the process proceeds to step S3240, and if it is determined that the flag has not changed from off to on, the process proceeds to step S3239.

In step S3239, it is determined whether the error number has changed from hidden ("0") to displayed (other than "0"). Here, for example, the error number from the previous interrupt process is saved, and a comparison operation is performed with the error number from the current interrupt process to determine whether the error number has changed from "0" to a value other than "0" in the current interrupt process. Then, if it is determined that the error number has changed from "0" to a value other than "0", the process proceeds to step S3240, and if it is determined that the error number remains at "0", the process proceeds to step S3241.

When the flow proceeds from step S3237, S3238, or S3239 to step S3240, the external signal 4 management time at address "F014(H)" is set to "24(D)", which corresponds to an output time of "50" ms, as the initial value.Then the flow proceeds to step S3241.
In step S3241, external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as external signal 4), and the process proceeds to step S3242 (in FIG. 92).
In step S3242, it is determined whether the door switch is on. This process determines whether the D3 bit of the input port 0 level data is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined that the door switch is on. If it is determined that the door switch is on, the process proceeds to step S3245, and if it is determined that it is not on, the process proceeds to step S3243.

In step S3243, it is determined whether the output time of the external signal 5 has elapsed. Here, the external signal 5 management time of address "F015(H)" is set to "24(D)" in step S3246 described later. Then, in step S3243, it is determined whether this external signal 5 management time is "0" or not, and if it is determined to be "0", the process proceeds to step S3244, and if it is determined to be not "0", the process proceeds to step S3247.
In step S3244, the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating that the external signal 5 is off can be output), and the process according to this flowchart ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3242 that the door switch is on and the process proceeds to step S3245, it is determined whether the door switch has changed from off to on in the current interrupt process. Whether the D3 bit (door switch signal) of the input port 0 level data has changed to on in the current interrupt process is, for example, determined as follows: first, if there is input port 0 rising data, whether the D3 bit of the input port 0 rising data is "1". Second, the input port 0 level data from the previous interrupt process is saved, and if the D3 bit of the input port 0 level data in the previous interrupt process was "0" and the D3 bit of the input port 0 level data in the current interrupt process is "1", it is determined that the door switch has changed from off to on in the current interrupt process. If it is determined that the door switch has changed from off to on, the process proceeds to step S3246, and if it is determined that the door switch has not changed from off to on, the process proceeds to step S3247.

In step S3246, the external signal 5 management time of address "F015(H)" is set to an initial value of "24(D)" which corresponds to an output time of "50" ms, and the process proceeds to step S3247.
In step S3247, the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating that the external signal 5 is off can be output), and the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing example 2 of an external signal output process.
In the example of FIG.
(1) As shown in step S3237, when the setting key switch is turned from off to on,
(2) As shown in step S3238, when the error detection flag is changed from off to on,
(3) As shown in step S3239, when the error number is newly stored, the output time of external signal 4 is set.
In contrast to this, in the example of Figure 93, in the current interrupt processing, the output of the external signal 4 is controlled based on whether the setting key switch is on or not, whether the error detection flag is on or not, and whether an error number is stored or not.

In Fig. 93, the same steps as those in Fig. 91 and Fig. 92 are denoted by the same step numbers. The example in Fig. 93 does not include any steps different from those in Fig. 91 and Fig. 92.
In the example of FIG.
(1) When it is determined in step S3231 that the setting key switch is on (when the D2 bit of the input port 0 level data of the address "F00A(H)" is "1"),
(2) In step S3234, if "300" ms has not elapsed since the power was turned on (the power-off recovery external signal 4 output time of address "F013(H)" is not "0"),
(3) In step S3233, when it is determined that an error is being displayed (when the error number stored in address "F051(H)" is other than "0"),
(4) In step S3232, when an error is being detected (when any bit of the error detection flag at address "F294(H)" is "1")
each proceeds to step S3240 and stores the number of interrupts "24(D)" corresponding to the output time of external signal 4 "50" ms in address "F014(H)".

Therefore, in the previous interrupt process, for example, if it is determined in step S3231 that the setting key switch is on and the external signal 4 management time at address "F014(H)" is set to "24(D)" in step S3240, and then in the current interrupt process, if it is determined in step S3231 that the setting key switch is on again, the process proceeds to step S3240 and the external signal 4 management time is reset to "24(D)". The same applies when it is determined in step S3234 that "300" ms has not elapsed since the power was turned on, when it is determined in step S3233 that an error is being displayed, and when it is determined in step S3233 that an error is being detected. Then, after step S3240, the process proceeds to step S3241.

If it is determined in step S3232 that no error is being detected, the process proceeds to step S3235. In step S3235, it is determined whether the output time of external signal 4 of "50" ms has elapsed. Here, as described above, if the external signal 4 management time of address "F014(H)" is "0", it is determined that the output time of external signal 4 of "50" ms has elapsed. Then, if the output time of external signal 4 has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3236, where external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating that external signal 4 is off can be output), and if the output time of external signal 4 has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3241, where external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating that external signal 4 is on can be output).

Next, the program proceeds to step S3242, where it is determined whether the door switch is on or not. If it is determined that the door switch is on, the program proceeds to step S3246, and if it is determined that the door switch is not on, the program proceeds to step S3243.
In step S3246, "24(D)" is set to the external signal 5 management time at address "F015(H)". In this case, as in the above, if it is determined in the previous interrupt process that the door switch is on and "24(D)" is set as the external signal 5 management time in step S3246, and then it is determined in step S3242 in the current interrupt process that the door switch is also on, the external signal 5 management time is reset to "24(D)" in step S3246. Then the process proceeds to step S3247.

In step S3243, it is determined whether the output time of external signal 5, "50" ms, has elapsed. Here, as described above, when the external signal 5 management time of address "F015(H)" is "0", it is determined that the output time of external signal 5, "50" ms, has elapsed. Then, if it is determined that the output time of external signal 5 has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3244, where external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating that external signal 5 is off can be output), and if it is determined that the output time of external signal 5 has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3247, where external signal 5 is turned on (a signal indicating that external signal 5 is on can be output). Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

As described above, in Example 1 of FIG. 91, in each of the determinations of whether the setting key switch has changed from off to on, whether the error detection flag has changed from off to on, and whether the error number has changed from "0" to a value other than "0", the external signal 4 management time is set in the interrupt processing which determines "Yes", and thereafter, the external signal 4 management time is subtracted by "1" for each interrupt processing, and when it becomes "0", the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating that the external signal 4 is off can be output).
93, when the setting key switch is on, when the error detection flag is "1", and when an error number other than "0" is stored, the external signal 4 is kept on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4). When the setting key switch is off, the error detection flag is "0", and "0" is stored as the error number, the external signal 4 is turned off when the external signal 4 management time becomes "0" (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).

In other words, the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating that the external signal 4 is on can be output as the external signal 4) until 50 ms have elapsed since the setting key switch is off, the error detection flag is "0", and "0" is stored as the error number. Therefore, for example, when an error is detected or the setting key switch is detected as on only for an instant (for example, only interrupt "3"), even if the conditions for turning off the external signal 4 (a signal indicating that the external signal 4 is off) are met, the external signal 4 can be turned on (a signal indicating that the external signal 4 is on can be output) for at least 50 ms.

In addition, in the external signal output process (interrupt process) shown in FIG. 93, after the timer value "24(D)" is set for external signal 4 in step S3240, when the next interrupt process is executed, the timer value is subtracted from "24(D)" to "23(D)". Thereafter, in the external signal output process of the next interrupt process, if the condition for turning on external signal 4 (enabling the output of a signal indicating on as external signal 4) is met, the process proceeds to step S3240 and the timer value "24(D)" is set again.

After that, the timer value is decremented for each interrupt process, but if the condition for turning on external signal 4 (enabling the output of a signal indicating that external signal 4 is on) is no longer met, the process of step S3240 is not performed, and the timer value ultimately becomes "0 (D)". When the timer value becomes "0 (D)", step S3235 returns "Yes", so the process proceeds to step S3236, where external signal 4 is turned off (enabling the output of a signal indicating that external signal 4 is off).

By doing this, the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) from the moment the condition for turning on the external signal 4 (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) is satisfied. Then, while the condition for turning on the external signal 4 (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) is satisfied, the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). Next, when the condition for turning on the external signal 4 (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) is no longer satisfied, the timer value is decremented by "1 (D)" for each interrupt process until it becomes "0 (D)". Until the timer value becomes "0 (D)", the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). Then, when the timer value becomes "0 (D)", the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 4).

The above also applies to the external signal 5 .
93, after the timer value "24(D)" for the external signal 5 is set in step S3246, when the next interrupt process is executed, the timer value is subtracted from "24(D)" to "23(D)". Thereafter, in the external signal output process of the next interrupt process, if the door switch is on (if the condition for turning on the external signal 5 (enabling the output of a signal indicating on as the external signal 5) is satisfied), the process proceeds to step S3246, where the timer value "24(D)" is set again.

After that, the timer value is decremented for each interrupt process, but if the door switch is turned off (the condition for turning on external signal 5 (enabling the output of a signal indicating ON as external signal 5) is no longer met), the process of step S3246 is not performed, and the timer value ultimately becomes "0 (D)". When the timer value becomes "0 (D)", step S3243 returns "Yes", so the process proceeds to step S3244, where external signal 5 is turned off (enabling the output of a signal indicating OFF as external signal 5).

By doing this, from the time when the door switch is turned on (the condition for turning on the external signal 5 (enabling the output of a signal indicating ON as the external signal 5) is satisfied), the external signal 5 is turned on (enabling the output of a signal indicating ON as the external signal 5). Then, while the condition for turning on the external signal 5 (enabling the output of a signal indicating ON as the external signal 5) is satisfied, the external signal 5 is turned on (enabling the output of a signal indicating ON as the external signal 5). Next, when the condition for turning on the external signal 5 (enabling the output of a signal indicating ON as the external signal 5) is no longer satisfied, the timer value is decremented by "1" for each interrupt process until it becomes "0 (D)". Until the timer value becomes "0 (D)", the external signal 5 is turned on (enabling the output of a signal indicating ON as the external signal 5). Then, when the timer value becomes "0 (D)", the external signal 5 is turned off (enabling the output of a signal indicating OFF as the external signal 5).
In example 2 of Figure 93 above, there is no need to generate rising edge data and there is no need to check level data from the previous interrupt processing, so the external signal output processing can be simplified while the time during which the hall computer can receive a signal indicating that external signal 4 or 5 is on can be guaranteed.

Fig. 94 is a flowchart showing an example 3 of an external signal output process. In Fig. 94, steps performing the same processes as in Fig. 93 are given the same numbers, and steps performing different processes are given underlines to the step numbers.
In Example 3 of Fig. 94, when determining whether to output the external signal 4, first, in step S3251, it is determined whether the external signal 4 management time of the address "F014(H)" is "0". If it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S3241 to turn on the external signal 4 (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). On the other hand, if the external signal 4 management time is "0" and the output condition of the external signal 4 is satisfied in the determinations of steps S3231, S3234, S3233, and S3232, the process proceeds to step S3240 to set the external signal 4 management time of the address "F014(H)" to "24(D)" which corresponds to an output time of "50" ms, and the process proceeds to step S3241. On the other hand, if it is determined in steps S3231, S3234, S3233, and S3232 that the output conditions for external signal 4 are not met, the process proceeds to step S3236, where external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating that external signal 4 is off can be output).

Similarly, when determining whether to output the external signal 5, first, in step S3252, it is determined whether the external signal 5 management time of address "F015 (H)" is "0". If it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S3247 to turn on the external signal 5 (enabling the output of a signal indicating ON as the external signal 5). On the other hand, if the external signal 5 management time is "0" and it is determined in step S3242 that the door switch is ON, the process proceeds to step S3246 to set the external signal 5 management time of address "F015 (H)" to "24 (D)", which corresponds to an output time of "50" ms, and the process proceeds to step S3247. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3242 that the door switch is not ON, the process proceeds to step S3244 to turn off the external signal 5 (enabling the output of a signal indicating OFF as the external signal 5).

94, when the set timer value (external signal 4 management time or external signal 5 management time) is "0", the timer value is reset if the output condition of external signal 4 or 5 is satisfied. Even if the set timer value becomes "0", the timer value is set again if the output condition of external signal 4 or 5 is satisfied.
As with example 2 in Figure 93, the method of example 3 in Figure 94 does not require the generation of rising edge data and does not require checking level data from the previous interrupt processing, so it is possible to simplify the external signal output processing while ensuring the time during which the hall computer can receive a signal indicating that external signal 4 or 5 is on.

Although the eighteenth embodiment has been described above, the eighteenth embodiment is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) When any of the following conditions is met: when the setting key switch is on, when an error is detected, or when an error is being displayed, external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as external signal 4), but this is not limited thereto, and each individual external signal (e.g., external signals 4, 6, 7) may be turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as external signal 4, 6, 7). Also, when either or both of the following conditions are met: when the setting key switch is on or when the door switch is on, a specific external signal (e.g., external signal 5 or 6) may be turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as external signal 5 or 6).

(2) The timer values of the addresses "F013(H)" to "F015(H)" are decremented by "1" for each interrupt process, but this is not limited to the above, and may be decremented by "N" for each "N (N≧2)" interrupts, or may be decremented by "1" for each "N" interrupts. For example, after setting "12(D)" as the external signal 4 management time or the external signal 5 management time, "1" may be decremented every two interrupts.
(3) The various modified examples and values described in the 18th embodiment are merely examples and can be designed as appropriate. For example, in Fig. 89, the times t1 and t2 are the minimum of "0" ms, but can be set to various values such as "5" ms, "10" ms, etc.

Also, in FIG. 89, time t3 (in the figures, (a), (b), (c), and (e)) is a minimum of 50 ms, but can be set to various values, such as 75 ms or 100 ms.
In particular, time t3 in Figures 89 and 90 ((a), (b), (c), and (e) in Figures 89 and 90) may be any time that enables the hall computer etc. to reliably receive external signals 4 and 5, and may be less than 50 ms depending on the performance of the hall computer etc.
Furthermore, the time t2 in FIG. 90 is not limited to "50" ms, but can be set to various values according to the specifications, etc.

(4) When the setting key switch changes from off to on or when the setting key switch is on, the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4). However, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is entered, the external signal 4 may be turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4).
Here, as in the 18th embodiment, when the external signal 4 is configured to be turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4) when the setting key switch is changed from off to on or when the setting key switch is on, the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4) even if the setting key switch is changed from off to on while the reel 31 is rotating.
In contrast, when the external signal 4 is configured to be turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4) when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is entered, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4) based on the status of the setting key switch even if the setting key switch changes from off to on while the reel 31 is spinning. However, there may be cases where the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4) based on an error.

(5) In the eighteenth embodiment, when any one of the following conditions is met: when the setting key switch is on, when an error is detected, when an error is being displayed, or when "300" ms has not elapsed since power-on, the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4). However, it is not necessary to provide all of these conditions, and the external signal 4 may be turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4) only when one or some of the conditions are met, for example, when the setting key switch is on. In other words, even when other conditions are met, for example, when "300" ms has not elapsed since power-on, the external signal 4 may not be turned on (a signal indicating on can not be output as the external signal 4).
(6) All of the embodiments and various modified examples described in this specification, including the eighteenth embodiment, are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Nineteenth embodiment>
The nineteenth embodiment relates to a setting change completion sound.
Below, the setting change completion sound will be explained in both the case where the gaming machine is a slot machine (19th embodiment (A)) and the case where the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine (19th embodiment (B)).
In the following description, the "setting change state (also referred to as the "setting change mode" or "setting change processing in progress")" is a game state in which the setting value can be changed and in which the game cannot be started (progressed). In the setting change state, it is also possible to end the game without changing the setting value.
In addition, the "setting confirmation state (also called the "setting confirmation mode" or "setting confirmation processing in progress")" is a state in which the setting value cannot be changed, but the current setting value can be confirmed. In the setting confirmation state, like the setting change state, it is not possible to start (progress) the game.
In contrast, the "normal state (also called the "normal mode")" refers to a state other than the setting change state and the setting confirmation state. In the normal state, it is possible to start (progress) a game unless there are special circumstances such as an error occurring.

<19th embodiment (A): When the gaming machine is a slot machine>
FIG. 95 is a block diagram showing an outline of the control of the slot machine 10 in the 19th embodiment (A), and corresponds to FIG. 1 of the first embodiment.
95, as components not shown in Fig. 1, there are provided a door switch 17, a setting key insertion port 151, a setting key switch 152, and a setting change (reset) switch 153. Although the above components are not shown in Fig. 1, this does not mean that the above components are not provided in the first embodiment.
The setting key insertion port 151, the setting key switch 152, and the setting change (reset) switch 153 do not necessarily have to be provided on the main control board 50, and may be provided as separate devices.

The door switch 17 is attached to either the cabinet 13 or the front door 12 in FIG.
22, the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 are usually closed, but the front door 12 is opened when changing or checking settings. The door switch 17 is a switch that turns on when the front door 12 is open and detects the opening of the front door 12. When the door switch 17 detects that the front door 12 is open, a door open error is notified.
In addition, the setting key insertion port 151 , the setting key switch 152 , and the setting change (reset) switch 153 are mounted on the main control board 50 .
The setting key switch 152 is a switch that is turned on by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion port 151 and rotating the setting key 90 degrees clockwise, and is used when transitioning to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state.

Furthermore, the setting change (reset) switch 153 serves as both a setting change switch and a reset switch. The setting change switch is operated when changing a setting value in a setting change state. The reset switch is operated when restoring the state before the error occurred after removing the error that occurred.
In the following description, it may be referred to as a "setting change (reset) switch 153," a "setting change switch 153," or a "reset switch 153."
In this embodiment, the setting change switch 153 and the reset switch 153 are provided integrally, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting change switch 153 and the reset switch 153 may be provided separately.

To transition to the setting confirmation state, with the power on, insert the setting key into the setting key insertion port 151 and rotate it, for example, 90 degrees clockwise. This turns on the setting key switch 152. When the door switch 17 is turned on and the setting key switch 151 is turned on while the power is on, the state transitions to the setting confirmation state. In the setting confirmation state, the setting value cannot be changed (the setting value does not change even if the setting change switch 153 is operated), but the current setting value can be confirmed. The current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 73. Turning the setting key counterclockwise and turning off the setting key switch 152 ends the setting confirmation state.

In addition, when the power is off, inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion port 151, rotating the setting key 90 degrees clockwise, turning the setting key switch 152 on, and then turning on the power switch 11 will allow the device to transition to a setting change state (setting change process in Figure 39).

When the slot machine 10 is powered on as described above, as shown in FIG. 38, a checksum is executed (step S204), and if the designated switch is on (step S208) and the power recovery is abnormal (step S209) or the setting can be changed (step S210), the setting can be changed (step S210).

In the nineteenth embodiment, the “designated switches” in step S208 are the door switch 17 and the setting key switch 152.
Alternatively, if a setting door switch (a switch that turns on when a cover provided to cover the setting key insertion port 151 and the setting change (reset) switch 153 is opened) is provided in addition to the door switch 17 and the setting key switch 152, there are three switches including the setting door switch.
In the following description, it is assumed that a setting door switch is not provided, and the designated switches are the door switch 17 and the setting key switch 152.

38, only when the door switch 17 and the setting key switch 152 are on, the answer in step S208 is "Yes" and the state can be changed. On the other hand, when only one of the door switch 17 and the setting key switch 152 is on or when both switches are off, the answer in step S208 is "No" and the state does not change.
As a result, in a situation where there is a high possibility of fraud, such as when the front door 12 is not open or the setting key is not inserted, the system does not transition to the setting change state.

38, the "start of the setting change state" is determined, first, when step S209 is judged as "Yes" or when step S210 is judged as "No." In this case, the "setting change state" includes the processes of steps S221 to S233 in FIG. 39 as processes during the setting change state.
Alternatively, secondly, in FIG. 39, an output request at the start of a setting change is set in step S234, and the time when control command set 1 is executed in step S235 (when a command to start a setting change is sent to the sub-control board 80) is defined as the "start of the setting change state."

However, this is not limiting, and in FIG. 39, the period immediately before step S221 may be defined as the "start of the setting change state." Also, the period immediately after step S231 (when initialization ends) may be defined as the "start of the setting change state." Furthermore, the period when an interrupt is started in step S233, or the period immediately after step S233 (immediately before step S234) may be defined as the "start of the setting change state."

Furthermore, in FIG. 39, "end of setting change state" is determined when the setting key switch 152 is turned off in step S243.
Alternatively, secondly, in FIG. 39, an output request at the end of the setting change is set in step S246, and when control command set 1 is executed in step S247 (when a command to end the setting change is sent to the sub-control board 80), this is defined as the "end of the setting change state."
However, without being limited to this, when the determination in step S242 is "Yes" (when the start switch 41 is operated and the setting value is confirmed), it may be determined as "the end of the setting change state."

Furthermore, as described later, the setting change state may be terminated when the front door 12 is closed, in other words, when the door switch 17 is turned from on to off. In this case, even if the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting change state does not end if the front door 12 is open (when the door switch 17 is on).
Also, if the front door 12 is closed (the door switch 17 is off) when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting change state is not ended. This is to prevent cheating.
In the following description, in the 19th embodiment (A), the time when "Yes" is determined in step S243 in FIG. 39, i.e., when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, is defined as "the end of the setting change state."

39, when a command to the effect that the setting change has been completed is transmitted to the sub-control board 80, the sub-control board 80 receives the command. Upon receiving the command, the sub-control board 80 executes an output (output by the performance lamp 21) that produces a sound indicating the completion of the setting change and visually indicates the completion of the setting change.
Here, the setting change completion sound corresponds to a voice saying “setting change is now complete” being output from the speaker 22 in this embodiment.

There are various ideas regarding the speed at which words (Japanese) should be spoken. For example, if one follows the idea that a speed of about 300 characters per minute is appropriate, then "T01" can be set to about 2000 ms, which is the time from the start of the voice output of "Ending setting changes" to the end of the output.
FIG. 96 is a time chart showing the relationship between the setting change state, the setting change completion sound and lamp effects, and one game time, which will be described later, in the 19th embodiment.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the command to the effect that the setting change is complete, it immediately outputs a setting change completion sound. Here, if "Yes" is determined in step S243 in Fig. 39, a command to the effect that the setting change is complete is transmitted in step S464 in the first interrupt process (Fig. 53) after "Yes" is determined in step S243.

The sub-control board 80 executes its own interrupt process and judges for each interrupt whether or not it has received a control command (a command indicating that the setting change has been completed). When it judges that it has received a command indicating that the setting change has been completed, it starts outputting a setting change completion sound.
In order to go through the above process, the setting change completion sound output process or output of the setting change completion sound by the sub-control board 80 begins at least one interrupt (referring to an interrupt by the main control board 50. One interrupt time is 2.235 ms) after the determination of "Yes" in step S243 in Figure 39. In other words, the setting change completion sound is not output until at least one interrupt has passed after the determination of "Yes" in step S243 in Figure 39.

In FIG. 96, the timing at which the setting change state changes from on to off is when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, as described above. However, since the time it takes for a command to be sent from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80, for the sub-control board 80 to receive the command and for the setting change completion sound to start being output after the setting key switch 152 is turned off, is extremely short, in FIG. 96 the timing at which the setting change state ends and the timing at which the setting change completion sound starts being output are made to match.

In addition, as a performance to indicate that the setting change has been completed, in addition to the setting change completion sound described above, an effect is executed in which the performance lamp 21 is lit in a predetermined lighting mode ("lit" is a concept that includes flashing, and "lighting mode" is a concept that includes the lighting color).
Here, when lighting the performance lamp 21, at least the lighting mode is not the same as the lighting mode when lighting the performance lamp 21 when a special role (gimmick) is won. For example, if it is determined that the lamp A of the performance lamp 21 is lit in the lighting mode a as a performance indicating that a special role has been won, a lamp other than the lamp A is lit when lighting the performance lamp 21 as a performance indicating that the setting change has been completed. In this case, if a lamp other than the lamp A is lit, it may be the same as the lighting mode when indicating that a special role has been won.

In addition, when the effect lamp 21 is turned on as an effect indicating that the setting change has been completed, the lamp A may be turned on. However, the lighting mode in this case is different from the lighting mode when indicating that a special combination has been won.
As described above, when lighting the effect lamp 21 as an effect indicating that the setting change is completed, the lighting state of the effect lamp 21 is not the same as that of the effect notifying that a special role has been won (that a special role has been won in the game, or that the winning of a special role has been carried over). This makes it possible to prevent the player from confusing that a special role has been won when a game is started immediately after the setting change is completed, even if the lighting of the effect lamp 21 is executed as an effect indicating that the setting change is completed.

In addition, it is preferable to make the lighting pattern of the performance lamp 21 indicating that the setting change has been completed different from the lighting pattern of the performance lamp 21 indicating that a special role has been won, so that the two are not confused. In other words, it is preferable to set the lighting pattern of the performance lamp 21 indicating that the setting change has been completed to a lighting pattern that is not used for other effects, so that it can be understood that the lighting pattern indicates the completion of the setting change.
Furthermore, for the performance lamp 21, the lighting pattern indicating that the setting change has been completed and the lighting pattern indicating that a special role has been won may be the same, and for the lamps other than the performance lamp 21, the lighting pattern indicating that the setting change has been completed and the lighting pattern indicating that a special role has been won may be different.
Specifically, for example, when the setting change is completed, the effect lamp 21 and the other lamps are all lit, and when a special role is won, the effect lamp 21 is lit but the other lamps are not lit. In this way, the manager can know what state the machine is in by checking the lighting pattern of the effect lamp 21 and the other lamps (general lamps of the gaming machine).

Furthermore, when the effect lamp 21 is lit as an effect indicating that the setting change has been completed, in principle, it is output at the same time as the setting change completion sound. However, this is not limited to this, and the lighting effect of the effect lamp 21 may be started before the setting change completion sound is output. Alternatively, the lighting effect of the effect lamp 21 may be started after the output of the setting change completion sound has started and before the output of the setting change completion sound has ended. Furthermore, the lighting effect of the effect lamp 21 may be started after the output of the setting change completion sound has ended.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 96, in the following embodiment, the effect lamp 21 indicating that the setting change has been completed is turned on at the same time as the setting change completion sound starts to be output.
In addition, if the lighting time of the effect lamp 21 indicating that the setting change is completed is "T02",
T01>T02
T01=T02
T01 < T02
However, in this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 96, it is assumed that "T01<T02". For example, when the time T01 is set to about "2000" ms as described above, the time T02 can be set to, for example, about "2500" ms to about "4000" ms.

Next, a case will be considered in which the setting change state is ended and a transition is made to a normal state (a state in which game play can be started) and game play is immediately started.
In the following, as shown in Fig. 96, the time required from the moment the setting change state is ended until the game starts (until the game start conditions are satisfied) (preparation time until the game starts) is "T11". Also, the time from the start of the game (from the game start conditions are satisfied) until the game ends (one game time) is "T12".
In the setting change state, as shown in Fig. 39, the data stored in the RWM 53 is cleared, so that even if there is bet data or credit data before the setting change starts, these are also cleared. Therefore, immediately after the setting change state ends, the number of bets is "0" and the number of credits is also "0". Therefore, after the setting change state ends, as shown in Fig. 2, it is necessary to insert medals M into the medal insertion slot 47 and bet a specified number before starting play.

Here, in normal play (when the device is not in operation), the specified number of bets is generally "3", but in the 19th embodiment (A), the minimum bet number is set to "1", and play can be started with the bet number "1". When the specified number is "1", play can be started earlier than when the specified number is "2" or "3".
2, when the medal M is at position M1 and released into the medal selector, it passes through the passage in the medal selector and is detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b, as described in the first embodiment. When the insertion sensors 44a and 44b determine that the medal has passed normally, a bet of "1" is placed.

In FIG. 2, the time from when the medal M is inserted at position M1, when it is detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b, until the specified number is bet corresponds to the preparation time "T11" for starting the game (note that the preparation time "T11" in this case does not take into account the operation time for closing the front door 12 or resetting a door open error).
Here, when the specified number is "1", one medal must be inserted, when the specified number is "2", two medals must be inserted, and when the specified number is "3", three medals must be inserted. In FIG. 2, if the time from the state of medal M1 until one medal is inserted and "1" is bet is "T11a", the time until two medals are inserted and "2" is bet is "T11b", and the time until three medals are inserted and "3" is bet is "T11c",
T11a<T11b<T11c
It becomes.
However, since two or three medals can be inserted consecutively, T11b (when the specified number is "2") is considered to be shorter than twice the time of T11a (when the specified number is "1"). Similarly, T11c (when the specified number is "3") is considered to be shorter than three times the time of T11a (when the specified number is "1").

Once the specified number has been bet, a game can be started by operating the start switch 41, so in this embodiment, it is assumed that the start switch 41 is operated the moment "1" is bet. Therefore, the time from when the specified number is bet to when the start switch 41 is operated is set to "0".
In FIG. 41, when the start switch 41 is operated ("Yes" in step S278), the reels 31 start to rotate in step S286.
Here, the motor 32 accelerates the reel 31 until it reaches a speed of 80 rotations per minute. Once the speed of 80 rotations per minute is reached, the reel 31 is set in a constant speed state. Until the reel 31 reaches the constant speed state, the stop switch 42 is prohibited from being operated. After the constant speed state is reached, the stop switch 42 is allowed to be operated.
The time from when the start switch 41 is operated (when the reels 31 start to rotate) until when the stop switch 42 becomes ready to be operated is defined as "T12a".

Next, it is assumed that the first stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the stop switches 42 become ready to accept operation. In other words, the time from the moment when the stop switches 42 become ready to accept operation to the moment when the first stop switch 42 is operated is set to "0".
13, when the stop switch 42 is operated, a reel stop control time (the time until the reel 31 stops) and a four-phase excitation state time are required (note that it is also possible to accept the next operation of the stop switch 42 before the four-phase excitation state ends. An example of this will be described later). The total time of these is designated as "T12b".
When the four-phase excitation state ends, it becomes possible to accept operation of the next (second) stop switch 42. Here, it is assumed that the second stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 to be stopped first ends and it becomes possible to accept operation of the next stop switch 42. In other words, the time from the end of the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 to be stopped first to the operation of the second stop switch 42 is set to "0".

When the second stop switch 42 is operated, similarly to the above, after the time "T12b" which is the reel stop control time and the four-phase excitation state time has elapsed, the third stop switch 42 can be operated. Here, it is assumed that the third stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the four-phase excitation state of the second motor 32 ends and the next stop switch 42 can be operated. In other words, the time from the end of the four-phase excitation state of the second motor 32 to be stopped until the third stop switch 42 is operated is set to "0".
When the third stop switch 42 is operated, the time "T12b" which is the reel stop control time and the time for the four-phase excitation state is required, as in the above.

The end of one game may be determined to be the moment when the last reel 31 stops, but in the 19th embodiment (A), the end of one game is determined to be when the time for the four-phase excitation state for the last reel 31 ends (if no payout is made).
In addition, when a symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination comes to a stop during the game, the game is deemed to have ended when the payout process is completed, specifically, when the process of FIG. 49 is completed.
When a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is stopped and displayed, an automatic bet process is executed at the start of the next game, as shown in Fig. 42. Therefore, when a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is stopped and displayed, the end of the game is determined to be when the four-phase excitation state for the third reel 31 ends, not when the automatic bet process ends.

For example, first, when a symbol combination corresponding to a small win stops and a process of adding to credits is executed, the end of the process of adding to credits is determined as the end of the game.
Also, when the symbol combination corresponding to the minor win has stopped and the actual medal payout process has been executed, the payout of the last medal (driving of the hopper 36) is terminated, and the time "Yes" in step S401 in FIG. 49 (when it is determined that the payout number data is "0") is determined to be the end of the game. However, immediately after the setting change is completed, the number of credits is "0", and even if a game is started immediately after the setting change state is completed and a minor win with the maximum payout number of "15" is won, all of the medals paid out will be credited. For this reason, there is no case in which medals are actually paid out in one game immediately after the setting change is completed.
The time from when the symbol combination corresponding to the minor prize is stopped and the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 for the third reel 31 ends to when the payout of medals (addition to credits) ends is defined as "T12c".
However, when the combination is not a winning combination (when no medals are paid out), "T12c = 0".

In addition, if an effect (such as an effect announcing a winning combination) is output when all reels 31 have stopped, the time for that effect is not included in the time for one game. For example, even if an effect is output for several seconds from the time when all reels 31 have stopped, one game is considered to end when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 ends when the last reel 31 has stopped (even if the effect that began to be output when all reels 31 had stopped is still continuing at that point). In other words, the end of one game is based on the control of the main control board 50.

As described above, when an operation for starting a game is performed immediately after the setting change state ends, a preparation time "T11" is required before the game can start.
Furthermore, one game time "T12" is, as described above,
(1) The time "T12a" from when the start switch 41 is operated (from when the reels 31 start to rotate) until when the stop switch 42 can be operated
(2) The time from when the first stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops and the time of the four-phase excitation state "T12b"
(3) The time from when the second stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops and the time of the four-phase excitation state "T12b"
(4) The time from when the third stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops and the time of the four-phase excitation state "T12b"
(5) When a small win is won, the time until the medal payout (addition to credit) is completed "T12c"
It is necessary.
Therefore,
T12=T12a+3×T12b+T12c
It becomes.
It is assumed that the three "T12b" times are the same.

Furthermore, when the start switch 41 is operated, a lottery for a role is held (step S282 in FIG. 41), and if, for example, a special role (a role object) is won in this lottery, a freeze (also called a "freeze effect") may be selected to be executed.
In this case, "freeze" refers to a state in which the progress of the game is stopped for a certain period of time. Therefore, for example, when the start switch 41 is operated, a lottery for a role is performed, a special role is won, and it is decided to execute a freeze as an effect corresponding to the winning of the special role, the reels 31 do not start spinning. Then, after the freeze ends, the reels 31 start spinning. When the progress of the game is stopped by the freeze, the sub-control means 80 outputs an effect using the image display device 23 or the like.
In this case, if the freeze time is "T12d", one game time "T12" when the freeze is executed is "T12a + T12b x 3 + T12c + T12d".

Next, the shortest time of one game time "T12" will be considered. In order for one game time to be the shortest time, the freeze is not executed and no winning combination is obtained.
Therefore, the shortest time for one game time "T12" is "T12a + 3 x T12b".
First, the specified number is set to "1", and the time "T11" from when the medal M is inserted (dropped) into the medal selector from position M1 in Figure 2 to when the bet is made (the time required to start playing) is assumed to be at least approximately "800" ms.
It is also assumed that the time "T12a" from when the start switch 41 is operated until the reels 31 reach a constant speed and the operation of the stop switch 42 is permitted is approximately "1200" ms.

Furthermore, the time "T12b" from when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is controlled to stop and the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 ends (the next operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted), as illustrated in Figure 13, is assumed to be at least approximately "140" ms (the reel stop control time is at least approximately "40" ms, and the four-phase excitation state time is at least approximately "100" ms).
In this case, the time required to start one game and the time required for one game (shortest time), "T11+T12", is approximately "800 (T11) + 1200 (T12a) + 140 x 3 (T12b x 3)" = "2420" ms.
When medals are paid out after all reels 31 have stopped, or when a freeze is executed when the start switch 41 is operated, one game time "T12" will be longer than the above-mentioned time.

On the other hand, as described above, when the setting change state is ended, a setting change end sound is output for a time "T01" (approximately "2000" ms), and the illumination of the performance lamp 21 indicating the end of the setting change is output for a time "T02" (for example, approximately "2500" to "4000" ms).
Therefore, when a game is started immediately after the setting change state is ended, the relationship between the setting change end sound "T01" output immediately after the setting change state is ended, the preparation time "T11" for starting the game, and one game time "T12 (shortest time)" is as follows:
T01<T11+T12
It becomes.
As a result, even if the operation (preparation) to start playing is performed the moment the setting change state is ended, and the game is started the moment preparations to start playing are completed, the output of the setting change completion sound will have ended before the game is ended.
FIG. 96 shows the relationship between the above times "T01", "T11", and "T12".

Here, the above example is an example in which the next operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted after the stop switch 42 is operated and the four-phase excitation state is ended. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the next operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted before the four-phase excitation state is ended after the stop switch 42 is operated. By controlling in this way, it is possible to complete the game more quickly. For example, after the stop switch 42 is operated (the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted), the next operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted at the time of the next interrupt processing.
In this case, the time of the four-phase excitation state within the above-mentioned time "T12b" can be considered to be approximately "0", so "T12b (shortest time) = 40 (ms)".
Therefore, in this case, the time required to start one game and the time required for one game (shortest time), "T11 + T12", is approximately "800 (T11) + 1200 (T12a) + 40 x 3 (T12b x 3)" = "2120" ms.
Therefore, even when controlled in this way, "T01<T11+T12" holds.

In addition, the timing of the presentation of the slot machine 10 includes when the start switch 41 is operated (when the reel 31 starts to rotate), when the first stop switch 42 is operated (when the first reel 31 stops), when the second stop switch 42 is operated (when the second reel 31 stops), and when the third stop switch 42 is operated (when all reels 31 stop), but the timing for outputting the presentation that finally announces the winning role of the game (the most important presentation in the game) is often when all reels 31 stop.
Therefore, when an effect to announce a winning combination for the game is output when all the reels 31 have stopped, the effect is output after the output of the setting change completion sound has finished, so the effect when all the reels 31 have stopped and the setting change completion sound do not overlap (do not overlap). Therefore, even if a game is started immediately after the setting change state is ended, the effect when all the reels 31 have stopped can be accurately understood.

However, when there is an effect that is output when the start switch 41 or the first or second stop switch 42 is operated, the output timing of that effect may overlap with the output timing of the setting change completion sound.
Here, the speaker 22 of this embodiment has a plurality of channels. The channel for outputting the setting change completion sound and the channel for outputting the winning role notification effect are set to be different. As a result, even if the winning role notification effect is output from the speaker 22 after the setting change completion sound starts to be output, the setting change completion sound is not erased midway. However, there may be cases where the setting change completion sound and the winning role notification effect sound overlap.

In addition, the lighting time T02 of the performance lamp 21 indicating that the setting change has been completed is
T02<T11+T12
T02=T11+T12
T02>T11+T12
However, as described above, if the lighting of the effect lamp 21 indicating the completion of the setting change is not confused with the lighting of the effect lamp 21 as the notification effect of the winning combination, no problem will occur.

Furthermore, the preparation time "T11" before the start of play does not take into account the time required to close the front door 12 after the setting change state is ended, or the time required to resolve a door open error (an error indicating that the front door 12 is open).
When the setting change state is ended, at least the front door 12 should be in an open state. Therefore, even if the setting change state is ended, the slot machine 10 detects a door open error and notifies the user of the error. When a door open error occurs, the game cannot proceed (start). When a door open error occurs, the blocker 45 is controlled to be off (a state in which medals are returned), so that no bets are made even if medals are inserted through the medal insertion slot 47. Even if a bet has been made, the game cannot be started even if the start switch 41 is operated.

To cancel the door open error, the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off. It is possible to configure the door open error to be canceled the moment the door switch 17 is turned off, but generally the door open error is canceled (error notification is terminated) by inserting a key into the key insertion port for opening the front door 12 provided on the front door 12 and turning the key in the opposite direction (for example, counterclockwise) to the direction in which the front door 12 is opened. Therefore, the preparation time "T11" for starting play after the setting change state ends includes the operation time for closing the front door 12 and inserting the key to cancel the door open error. This is because play cannot be started with the door open error occurring.

When the setting change state is ended on the condition that the setting key switch 152 is turned off, it is possible to end the setting change state even if the front door 12 is open. Therefore, in this case, the setting change end sound starts to be output with the front door 12 open, and the effect lamp 21 also starts to light up, indicating that the setting change has ended.

On the other hand, it is also possible to configure the setting change state not to end unless the front door 12 is closed. In this case, the setting change state is not ended simply by turning off the setting key switch 152, and closing the front door 12 (the door switch 17 turning off) is set as one of the conditions for ending the setting change state. Note that the setting change state may be ended simply by closing the front door 12. In this case, when the front door 12 is closed (the door switch 17 turns off), the output of the setting change end sound begins. Alternatively, the setting change state may be ended when the front door 12 is closed and the door open error is cleared. In this case, the output of the setting change end sound begins when the door open error is cleared.

Even in the case where the specification is such that the setting change state ends when the front door 12 is closed and the door open error is cleared, as described above, the output time of the setting change completion sound "T01" is shorter than the time from the end of the setting change to the end of one game, "T11+T12," so that the output of the setting change completion sound ends before the end of one game immediately after the setting change is completed.
Furthermore, if the setting key switch 152 is turned off and the setting change state is to be ended even if the front door 12 is open, output of the setting change end sound starts while the front door 12 is open. Therefore, even if the front door 12 is subsequently closed, the door open error is released, and one game ends after the time "T11+T12" has elapsed, output of the setting change end sound ends before the end of that game.
If the time (operation) from the end of the setting change state to closing the front door 12 and canceling the door open error is "T10", the preparation time from the end of the setting change state to starting one game is "T10 + T11". Therefore, it goes without saying that "T01 < T10 + T11 + T12".

The above is the case where the output time "T01" of the setting change completion sound is set to be shorter than the time "T11+T12" from the end of the setting change state to the end of one game. However, this is not limited to the above, and the relationship between the output time "T01" of the setting change completion sound and the time "T11+T12" from the end of the setting change state to the end of one game can be set in various ways as follows.
(1) The output time "T01" of the setting change completion sound is set to be shorter than the average time "T11 + T12" when the result of the role lottery is a non-winning one.
(2) The output time "T01" of the setting change completion sound is set shorter than the average time "T11 + T12" when a special role is won in the role lottery. When a special role is won in the role lottery, the above-mentioned freeze may or may not be executed, so the average time is "T12". For example, when a special role is won, if the freeze is executed with a probability of "p"% and the freeze is not executed with a probability of "100-p", the average value of one play time "T12" is
"Average one game time without freeze T12 x (100-p)/100" + "Average one game time with freeze T12 x p/100"
It becomes.

<19th embodiment (B): When the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine>
Next, the relationship between the setting change state, the setting change completion sound, and one game time in the pachinko gaming machine will be explained.
First, an overview of the pachinko gaming machine will be provided.
Fig. 97 is an external perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 500 as seen from the front side (player side). Fig. 98 is an external perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 500 as seen from the back side. Note that in Fig. 98, the illustration of the unit including the image display device 543 and the game board 504 is omitted, and the glass door 505 is shown from the back side. Furthermore, in Fig. 98, illustration of board cases other than the main board case 550 is omitted as appropriate.
Furthermore, Figure 99 is a block diagram of a pachinko gaming machine 500.

In a hall, a pachinko gaming machine 500 is generally installed on an island. First, the pachinko gaming machine 500 includes an outer frame 501 and a front frame 502. The outer frame 501 is a frame formed to surround the outer periphery of the pachinko gaming machine 500. The front frame 502 is attached to the front side (player side) of the outer frame 501 in FIG. 97. The front frame 502 is attached to the outer frame 501 by a hinge mechanism 503 provided at the upper left end of the outer frame 501 in FIG. 97 so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame 501. Therefore, when the pachinko gaming machine 500 is installed on an island, the outer frame 501 is fixed to the island, but the front frame 502 is openable and closable relative to the outer frame 501, making it possible to access the back side of the front frame 502.

The front frame 502 is provided with a game board 504. Although not shown, the game board 504 is provided with an image display device 543, nails, accessories, a windmill, various winning holes (including the starting hole 532 described below), etc. In addition, the part of the front frame 502 other than the game board 504 is provided with a performance lamp 541, a speaker 542, an upper tray 506, a lower tray 507, a launch handle 508, etc.

A key insertion hole 521 is formed on the right edge of the front frame 502 in FIG.
When the front frame 502 is closed relative to the outer frame 501 (as shown in FIG. 97), a key is inserted through the key insertion opening 521 and an operation is performed to unlock the outer frame 501 and the front frame 502, whereby the front frame 502 can be opened forward (toward the player) relative to the outer frame 501, with the hinge mechanism 503 as the central axis. When the front frame 502 is opened relative to the outer frame 501, the entirety of the machine, including the game board 504, glass door 505, performance lamp 541, speaker 542, upper tray 506, lower tray 507, and launch handle 508 attached to the front frame 502 side, moves forward relative to the outer frame 501.
When the front frame 502 is opened, a frame opening switch 523, which will be described later, is turned on. When the frame opening switch 523 is turned on, a frame opening error is notified.

The glass door 505 is attached to the front of the game board 504 so as to be able to open and close and cover the game area. For example, this is to clear any jams of game balls that may occur in the game area. By inserting a key into the key insertion slot 521 and performing the unlocking operation of the glass door 505, the lock between the glass door 505 and the game board 504 is released and the glass door 505 can be opened. When the glass door 505 is opened, a door opening switch 522, which will be described later, is turned on. When the door opening switch 522 is turned on, it is configured to notify a door opening error.

In the block diagram of Figure 99, the pachinko game machine 500 is equipped with a main control board (main board, main control board) 530 which corresponds to the main control board 50 of the slot machine 10, and a sub-control board (performance control board, performance board) 540 which corresponds to the sub-control board 80 of the slot machine 10.
The main control board 530, the payout control board 520, and the sub-control board 540 each include a CPU, an RWM, a ROM, etc., similar to the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 of the slot machine 10. In FIG. 99, the CPU, the RWM, the ROM, etc. are omitted from illustration.

Based on the power switch 511 being turned on, the power supply board 510 controls the supply of power.
The power supply board 510 and the payout control board (also called the "prize ball control board") 520 are connected by a harness (consisting of one or more lead wires (also called "signal wires"). Note that all of the boards shown in Figure 99 are connected to each other by a harness. Also, although the illustration of relay boards is omitted in Figure 99, in reality, the boards illustrated in Figure 99 may be connected via relay boards, in addition to being directly connected.
A launch board 512 is connected to the power supply board 510. The launch board 512 is a board for driving and controlling the launch device 513. The launch device 513 is a device that launches game balls into the game board 504 (play area). When the launch handle 508 is operated, the operation is detected and the launch device 513 is driven and controlled to launch the game balls into the play area.

The power supply board 510 is connected to a payout control board 520. A payout device 524 is connected to the payout control board 520. The payout device 524 is a device that lends out game balls corresponding to the requested number when a ball lending request is made from the CR unit, and also pays out prize balls corresponding to the winning game when a game ball wins. The payout control board 520 and the CR unit are connected via an external terminal board 525.

A door opening switch 522 and a frame opening switch 523 are electrically connected to the dispensing control board 520. The door opening switch 522 and the frame opening switch 523 may be connected to the main control board 530.
As described above, when glass door 505 is opened, door opening switch 522 is turned on, and the signal is input to dispensing control board 520 and further transmitted to main control board 530. When main control board 530 detects that door opening switch 522 is on, sub-control board 540 executes, for example, a door opening error notification, etc.
Furthermore, when the front frame 502 is opened, the frame opening switch 523 is turned on, and the signal is input to the dispensing control board 520 and further transmitted to the main control board 530. When the main control board 530 detects that the frame opening switch 523 is turned on, the sub-control board 540 executes, for example, a frame opening error notification, etc.

A start port switch 533 is connected to the main control board 530 to detect a win at the start port 532, which is one of the winning ports provided within the play area of the game board 504. When a game ball enters the start port 532 and the main control board 530 detects that the start port switch 533 is on, a random number is obtained as described below and a win/loss determination is performed (lottery process). Then, based on the win/loss determination result, the change time and stop pattern of the special pattern on the special pattern display device 531 are determined, and the change pattern and stop pattern of the special pattern display device 531 are controlled to correspond to the determination result.

In addition, on the game board 504, there are other winning holes other than the starting hole 532, such as a general winning hole and a big winning hole (a winning hole that opens during a special game when a big win occurs), but explanations of these winning holes will be omitted in the 19th embodiment (B).
The special symbol display device 531 is provided on the game board 504 and is a device that displays the result of the win/loss judgment based on the start switch 533 being turned on using a special symbol. In other words, the "special symbol" is a symbol that displays whether the result of the win/loss judgment is a win or a loss depending on the stopped symbol after the change. The special symbol display device 531 is composed of, for example, a 7-segment display.
The process from when the special symbols start to change to when they stop will be described later.

The main control board 530 is provided with a setting key switch 535 having a setting key insertion port 534, and a setting change (reset) switch 536. Note that the setting key insertion port 534, the setting key switch 535, and the setting change (reset) switch 536 do not necessarily need to be provided on the main control board 530, and may be provided as separate devices.
The setting key switch 535 is a switch that is turned on when a predetermined setting key is inserted through the setting key insertion port 534 and rotated clockwise by 90 degrees, for example.

The setting change (reset) switch 536 is a switch that functions both as a setting change switch and a reset switch. The setting change switch is a switch that is operated when changing a setting value during a setting change state. The reset switch is a switch that is operated when restoring to the state before the error occurred after an error that has occurred has been removed. In the following description, it may be referred to as the "setting change (reset) switch 536", the "setting change switch 536", or the "reset switch 536".
In this embodiment, the setting change switch 536 and the reset switch 536 are provided integrally, but this is not limiting, and the setting change switch 536 and the reset switch 536 may be provided separately.
In the pachinko game machine 500, when the power is off, the setting key can be inserted into the setting key insertion port 534, rotated to turn on the setting key switch 535, and with the reset switch 536 turned on, the power switch 511 can be turned on to transition to a setting change state.

When the state shifts to the setting change state, the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 537. The setting value display LED 537 is equivalent to the setting value display LED 73 in the slot machine 10 shown in Fig. 1, and is configured, for example, by a 7-segment display.
When changing the set value, the setting change switch 536 is operated. Each time the setting change switch 536 is operated (pressed), the set value increments by "+1." For example, when there are six set values, each time the setting change switch 536 is pressed, the set value changes cyclically from "1" → "2" → ... → "5" → "6" → "1" → .... Then, when the setting key is rotated, for example, counterclockwise and the setting key switch 535 is turned off, the set value is confirmed and the setting change state ends. When the setting change state ends, the set value displayed on the setting value display LED 537 also goes out.

Furthermore, when the power is off, inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion slot 534, rotating the setting key, and turning the power switch 511 on with the reset switch 536 off allows the device to transition to a setting confirmation state. In the setting confirmation state, the setting value cannot be changed, but the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 537. When the setting key switch 535 is turned off by rotating the setting key, the setting confirmation state ends. When the setting confirmation state ends, the setting value displayed on the setting value display LED 537 also goes out.
In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 500, unlike the slot machine 10, even if the setting key switch 535 is turned on after power is turned on, the machine does not enter a setting confirmation state, and the setting value is not displayed.

The management information display LED 538 corresponds to the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 in the slot machine 10, and in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500, as described above, is called a performance display monitor. The management information display LED 538 is composed of four 7-segment displays, similar to the management information display LED 74.

The sub-control board 540 is connected to the main control board 530, and is a board that determines the content of the performance based on commands sent from the main control board 530, and controls the output of the determined performance. Note that although one sub-control board 540 is illustrated in FIG. 99, in reality, the sub-control board 540 is divided into, for example, a sub-main board (a board for controlling the overall performance) and a sub-sub board (for example, a board for controlling the image display of the image display device 23).

The peripheral devices for the effects include, similar to the slot machine 10 , an effect lamp 541 , a speaker 542 , and an image (liquid crystal) display device 543 , and the outputs of these are controlled by a sub-control board 540 .
97, at least a part of the effect lamp 541 is attached so as to cover the outer periphery of the front frame 502. Also, the speaker 542 is attached to the upper side of the front frame 502. Furthermore, the image display device 543 is attached so as to display an image in approximately the center within the playing area of the game board 504.

Next, the control process of the pachinko gaming machine 500 will be described.
Figure 100 is a flowchart explaining the startup process of the pachinko gaming machine 500 after it is turned on.
When the power switch 511 is turned on and the power is turned on, in step S701, the main control board (specifically, the main CPU) 530 determines whether or not the conditions for transitioning to the setting change state are met. In this embodiment, the conditions for transitioning to the setting change state are set such that the frame open switch 523 is on, the setting change key switch 535 is on, and the reset switch 536 is on. If it is determined that all of these conditions are met, the process proceeds to step S702, and if it is determined that all three switches are not on, the process proceeds to step S703. In step S702, the process proceeds to setting change processing (setting change state). Then, when the setting change processing is completed, the process proceeds to step S709.

In step S703, the main control board 530 determines whether the conditions for transitioning to the setting confirmation state are met. In this embodiment, the conditions for transitioning to the setting confirmation state are set to the frame open switch 523 being on, the setting change key switch 535 being on, and the reset switch 536 being off. If it is determined that these conditions are met, the process proceeds to step S704, and if it is determined that these conditions are not met, the process proceeds to step S706.

When the process proceeds to step S704, the setting confirmation state is entered, and the main control board 530 reads the setting value data stored in the RWM and displays the current setting value on the setting value display LED 537. Next, the process proceeds to step S705, where it is determined whether the setting key switch 535 has been turned off. If it is determined that the setting key switch 535 has been turned off, it is determined that the conditions for terminating the setting confirmation state are met, and the process proceeds to step S710. On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key switch 535 is not turned off, the process returns to step S704, and the setting confirmation state (display of the setting value) continues.

If the determination in step S703 is "No" and the process proceeds to step S706, the main control board 530 determines whether the reset switch 536 is on. If it is determined that the reset switch 536 is on, the process proceeds to step S709, and if it is determined that the reset switch 536 is not on, the process proceeds to step S707.
In step S707, it is determined whether the RWM of the main control board 530 is normal. When the power is turned off, information at the time of power off is stored in the RWM of the main control board 530, and when the power is turned on again, it is determined whether the information at the time of power on matches the information at the time of power off. If they match, it is determined that the RWM is normal, and if they do not match, it is determined that the RWM is abnormal. If it is determined that the RWM is normal, the process proceeds to step S708, and if it is determined that the RWM is not normal, the process proceeds to step S709.
In step S708, a state restoration process is executed. This process restores the solenoid state, the state of the special symbol display device 531, and the like to the state when the power was turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step S710.

When the setting change process (setting change state) in step S702 is completed, when it is determined in step S706 that the reset switch 536 is on, or when it is determined in step S707 that the RWM is not normal, the process proceeds to step S709, where the RWM clear process is executed. This process is a process for clearing data stored in a specified storage area of the RWM (a process for initializing the specified storage area). Note that the data to be cleared does not include setting value data. The process then proceeds to step S710.

In step S710, a timer interrupt is permitted. This is a process for permitting interrupt processing. Therefore, after the interrupt processing is permitted in step S710, when the interrupt processing timing arrives, the interrupt processing is executed.
In the next step S711, a random number update process (random number counter increment process) is executed. This random number is used for various lotteries (selection of symbols to be stopped, selection of effects, etc.).

Fig. 101 is a flowchart showing the setting change processing in step S702 in Fig. 100. In this embodiment, the start of the processing in step S721 is regarded as the start of the setting change processing (setting change state).
In step S721, the main control board (main CPU) 530 reads the setting value written in the RWM and judges whether the setting value is within the normal range. In this embodiment, the values stored in the RWM corresponding to the setting values "1" to "6" are "0" to "5", respectively.

For example, if the value stored in the RWM is "0", the set value will be "1". Therefore, in step S722, it is determined whether the value stored in the RWM is within the range of "0" to "5", and if it is determined that it is within that range, the process proceeds to step S724. In contrast, if it is determined that the value stored in the RWM is not within the range of "0" to "5", "0" is stored in the RWM. When the value of the RWM is "0", the set value will be "1". The set value "1" becomes the default set value, as described below. The process then proceeds to step S724.

In step S724, the main control board 530 displays the setting value corresponding to the value stored in the RWM on the setting value display LED 537. For example, when the RWM value is "0", the setting value display LED 537 displays "1".
Next, the process proceeds to step S725, where the main control board 530 judges whether the setting change switch 536 has been operated. If it is judged that the setting change switch 536 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S726, and if it is judged that the setting change switch 536 has not been operated, the process proceeds to step S729. In step S726, the set value is incremented by "1". For example, if the set value display LED 537 has displayed "1" up until that point, the display is updated from "1" to "2" by the process of step S726, and the set value data stored in the RWM is updated from "0" to "1". In the example of FIG. 101, if the set value "6" is displayed in step S724, and if it is judged in step S725 that the setting change switch 536 has been operated, the process skips the process of step S726 and proceeds to step S727.

In step S727, it is determined whether the set value has exceeded the upper limit. For example, if the set value "6" is displayed in step S724, and it is determined in step S725 that the setting change switch 535 has been operated, it is determined in step S727 that the upper limit has been exceeded. In contrast, if the set values "1" to "5" are displayed in step S724, and it is determined in step S725 that the setting change switch 536 has been operated, it is not determined in step S727 that the set value has exceeded the upper limit.
If it is determined in step S727 that the upper limit of the set value has been exceeded, the process proceeds to step S728, and if it is determined that the upper limit has not been exceeded, the process proceeds to step S729.

In step S728, the basic setting value is set. That is, "0" is stored as the setting value data of the RWM, and "1" is displayed on the setting value display LED 537. Then, the process proceeds to step S729.
In step S729, the main control board 530 judges whether or not the conditions for terminating the setting change process (setting change state) have been met. In this embodiment, it is judged that the conditions for terminating the setting change process are met when the setting key switch 535 is turned off. Therefore, in step S729, the main control board 530 judges whether or not the setting key switch 535 is on, and if it is determined that the setting key switch 535 is on, the process returns to step S724, and if it is determined that the setting key switch 535 is off, the process proceeds to step S730.

In step S730, the setting value display of the setting value display LED 537 is made non-display.
Next, the process proceeds to step S731, where the main control board 530 transmits a setting change end command to the sub-control board 540. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
When the sub-control board 540 receives a setting change completion command, it outputs a setting change completion sound from the speaker 542 and executes the process of turning on the performance lamp 541 to indicate that the setting change is complete.

The timing at which the setting change state of the pachinko gaming machine 500 ends is as follows:
(1) When the answer is "Yes" in step S729 (when it is detected that the setting key switch 535 has been turned off).
(2) In step S730, the display of the set value by the set value display LED 537 is made non-display.
(3) When a setting change end command is sent in step S731.
The timing for ending the setting change state in the 19th embodiment (B) is set to “when it is detected that the setting key switch 535 has been turned off” as described above in (1).
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above (2) or (3) may be set as the end timing of the setting change state.

FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the flow of one game in the pachinko gaming machine 500.
In the pachinko game 500, the start timing of one game can be any one of the following.
(1) When a game ball is launched by the launching device 513 toward the game area of the game board 504. In this case, one game starts even if the game ball has not yet reached the game area.
(2) When the game ball is launched by the launching device 513 toward the game area of the game board 504 and enters the game area. Although not shown in FIG. 97, a rail is provided in the area from the bottom of the game area, passing through the left side and up to the upper left, for guiding the game ball launched by the launching device 513 into the game area. The moment when the game ball comes off the rail (the moment when the game ball enters the game area) is regarded as the start of one game.

(3) When the game ball enters the start hole 532 provided in the game area, or when the game ball enters the start hole 532 provided in the game area and the start hole switch 533 is turned on.
As described above, there are various possibilities for the time point at which one game should begin in the pachinko game machine 500, but in this embodiment, the start timing of one game is determined to be the above (3), "when the game ball enters the starting hole 532."
Further, the timing of the end of one game is when the fluctuation of the special symbol display device 531 ends and the special symbol is displayed stationary.

In step S741, the main control board (main CPU) 530 continues to determine whether or not a game ball has entered the start hole 532, that is, whether or not the start hole switch 533 has been turned on. When it is determined that the start hole switch 533 has been turned on, the process proceeds to step S742.
In step S742, various lottery processes are executed when the start port switch 533 is turned on. A random number is sampled when the start port switch 533 is turned on, and based on the sampled random number, a big win lottery (a win or loss determination), a special symbol lottery (a lottery for determining which special symbol will be stopped), and a variation pattern lottery (a lottery for the variation time of the special symbol) are executed.

In the next step S743, a prize ball process (a prize ball payout process) is executed based on the winning of the ball into the starting hole 532. Here, the payout control board 520 drives and controls the payout device 524 to pay out a predetermined number of game balls.
Among the various lottery processes executed in step S742, at least a part of the lottery results including the variable time are transmitted to the sub-control board 540. Upon receiving the lottery result of the current game, the sub-control board 540 controls the performance lamp 541, the speaker 542, and the image display device 543 in accordance with the lottery result.

Next, proceeding to step S744, the main control board 530 starts varying the special patterns by the special pattern display device 531 based on the lottery result in step S742. Note that the variation of special patterns by the special pattern display device 531 is conditional on the previous special pattern variation having ended at that point in time. If a special pattern is currently varying, the variation of the next special pattern is put on hold, and the variation of the next special pattern will begin after the variation of the currently varying special pattern has ended.

In step S745, the sub-control board 540 executes variation of the decorative symbols by the image display device 543. The variation of the decorative symbols corresponds to a part of the effects in the current game.
Here, the device that directly shows the result of the jackpot lottery in step S742 is the special pattern display device 531, and the stopped patterns after the change by the special pattern display device 531 include a special pattern corresponding to a jackpot (for example, "7") and a special pattern corresponding to a loss (for example, "-").

Furthermore, the image display device 543 changes the decorative pattern so as to be linked (synchronized) with the change of the special pattern. When the special pattern corresponding to a jackpot is stopped, the decorative pattern is also stopped with a decorative pattern corresponding to a jackpot, such as "777". On the other hand, when the special pattern corresponding to a loss (non-win), the decorative pattern is also stopped with a decorative pattern corresponding to a loss (a pattern other than the decorative pattern corresponding to a jackpot). The special pattern display device 531 is composed of a small seven-segment display, but the image display area of the image display device 543 that displays the decorative pattern is larger than the image display area of the special pattern display device 531 (for example, occupying more than half of the game area). This allows the player to check whether the current game is a jackpot or not by looking at the stopping state of the decorative pattern.

The variation of the decorative symbols in step S745 is controlled so as to be within the variation time determined by lottery in step S742. Then, when the variation of the decorative symbols ends, the process proceeds to step S746, where the main control board 530 varies the special symbols for the variation time determined by lottery, and then ends the variation of the special symbols so as to become the stopping symbols determined by lottery.
Next, the process proceeds to step S747, where a post-stop process of the special symbol is executed. For example, the post-stop process may include a process for shifting to a special game when the current game is a big win.

In the 19th embodiment (B) of the pachinko game machine, similarly to the 19th embodiment (A) of the slot machine, after the end of the setting change state, a setting change end sound is emitted and a lamp indicating the end of the setting change is turned on. Furthermore, assuming that a game is started simultaneously with the end of the setting change state, the output of the setting change end sound is configured to end before the end of the game.
As described above, assuming that the setting change state is ended when the determination in step S729 in FIG. 101 is "Yes", then in step S731 a setting change end command is sent to the sub-control board 540, and upon receiving the command, the sub-control board 540 begins outputting a setting change end sound from the speaker 542, etc.

The time from when "Yes" is determined in step S729 until the output of the setting change completion sound (and the specified lighting of the effect lamp 541) begins is longer than "0" ms, and is, for example, a timing when one interrupt time (for example, "4" ms in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500) has elapsed from when "Yes" is determined in step S729. In other words, after "Yes" is determined in step S729, the setting change completion sound is not output until at least one interrupt has elapsed.
The setting change completion sound is, as in the 19th embodiment (A), a sound saying "The setting change is completed." If the time from the start of outputting the sound saying "The setting change is completed" to the end of outputting it is "T01" as in the 19th embodiment (A), the time "T01" can be set to about "2000" ms as in the 19th embodiment (A).

In addition to the setting change completion sound, an effect is executed in which the effect lamp 541 is lit in a predetermined lighting mode to indicate that the setting change has been completed.
Here, when lighting the performance lamp 541, the lighting mode is at least not the same as the lighting mode when lighting the performance lamp 541 at the time of a jackpot. For example, if it is determined that the lamp A among the performance lamps 541 is to be lit in the lighting mode a as a performance indicating a jackpot, when lighting the performance lamp 541 as a performance indicating that the setting change is completed, a lamp other than the lamp A is lit. In this case, if a lamp other than the lamp A is lit, it may be the same as the lighting mode when indicating a jackpot.

In addition, when lighting the effect lamp 541 as an effect indicating that the setting change has been completed, the lamp A may be lit. In this case, the lighting mode is different from the lighting mode when indicating that a jackpot has been reached.
As described above, when lighting the effect lamp 541 as an effect indicating that the setting change is completed, the lighting state of the effect lamp 541 is not made to be the same as that when a jackpot occurs. This makes it possible to prevent the player from mistakingly thinking that a jackpot has occurred when the player starts playing immediately after completing the setting change, even if lighting of the effect lamp 541 is executed as an effect indicating that the setting change is completed.

Furthermore, it is preferable to make the lighting pattern of the performance lamp 541 indicating the end of the setting change different from the lighting pattern of the performance lamp 541 when a big win occurs, so that the two are not confused. In other words, it is preferable to set the lighting pattern of the performance lamp 541 indicating the end of the setting change to a lighting pattern that is not used for other performances (or is used very infrequently), so that it can be understood that the lighting pattern is a performance that means the end of the setting change.
Furthermore, for the performance lamp 541, the lighting pattern indicating that the setting change has been completed and the lighting pattern when a jackpot has been reached may be the same, but for the lamps other than the performance lamp 541, the lighting pattern indicating that the setting change has been completed and the lighting pattern when a jackpot has been reached may be different.
Specifically, for example, when the setting change is completed, the effect lamp 541 and the other lamps are all lit, and when a big win occurs, the effect lamp 541 is lit but the other lamps are not lit. In this way, the manager can know what state the machine is in by checking the lighting pattern of the effect lamp 541 and the other lamps (general lamps of the gaming machine).

Furthermore, when lighting the performance lamp 541 as a performance indicating that the setting change has been completed, in principle, it is output at the same time as the setting change completion sound. However, this is not limited to this, and the lighting performance of the performance lamp 541 may be started before the setting change completion sound is output. Alternatively, the lighting performance of the performance lamp 541 may be started after the output of the setting change completion sound has started and before the output of the setting change completion sound has ended. Furthermore, the lighting performance of the performance lamp 541 may be started after the output of the setting change completion sound has ended.
In addition, in the 19th embodiment (B), the lighting of the effect lamp 541 indicating that the setting change has been completed is executed at the same time as the output of the setting change completion sound starts.

In addition, if the lighting time of the effect lamp 541 indicating the completion of the setting change is set to "T02" as in the 19th embodiment (A),
T01>T02
T01=T02
T01 < T02
However, in this embodiment, it is assumed that "T01<T02". For example, when the time "T01" is set to about "2000" ms as described above, the time "T02" can be set to, for example, about "2500" ms to about "4000" ms.

Next, a case where a game is started as soon as possible after the setting change state is ended will be described.
In this embodiment, it is assumed that the launcher 513 cannot be operated to launch a game ball into the game area during the setting change state. Therefore, unless the setting key switch 535 is turned off, the game ball cannot be launched into the game area.

However, this is not limited to the above, and the configuration may be such that it is possible to operate the launch device 513 and launch game balls into the game area even during the setting change state. In this case, even if a game ball enters one of the winning holes during the setting change state, control may be performed so that the prize balls are not paid out. Also, even if a game ball enters the starting hole 532, a jackpot lottery is not executed, and the special pattern display device 531 and the decorative pattern displayed by the image display device 543 are not changed.

In the setting change state, as described above, at least the front frame 502 is open. First, a case will be described in which it is assumed that play is possible even with the front frame 502 open.
As described above, the timing for starting the game is when the game ball enters the starting hole 532.
First, if the preparation time until the start of the game is defined as "T21", the total time from guiding the game ball to the launch position within the launching device 513, launching the game ball from the launch position, and having the game ball enter the starting hole 532 is the time "T21".
In this case, the time "T21" is considered to be approximately "2000" ms.
In the above assumption, it is assumed that the first game ball launched from the launching device 513 will land in the starting hole 532.

When the game ball enters the starting hole 532, "Yes" is determined in step S741 in Fig. 102, and then the variation of the special symbols starts (step S744), and after the special symbols vary for the determined variation time, the variation of the special symbols is stopped (step S746). Here, the time from when "Yes" is determined in step S741 in Fig. 102 to when the processing of step S746 is completed is one game time, and this one game time is "T22".
First, when a game ball enters the starting hole 532 in a state where there are no reserved balls, one game time "T22" is determined within a range of, for example, about "10,000" to "30,000" ms. Therefore, the shortest time for one game time "T22" is "10,000" ms.

Note that there is a known function that increases time efficiency by shortening the time it takes for special symbols to change when there are a specified number of reserved balls (e.g., three or more); however, in this embodiment, since the setting change state has ended, there are no reserved balls. Therefore, the function for shortening the time it takes for special symbols to change is not taken into consideration during one play time "T22."

From the above, the time required to start playing immediately after ending the setting change state is "T21 + T22".
The shortest time of "T21+T22" is approximately "12000" ms.
Therefore,
T01 (time when the setting change completion sound is output) < T21 + T22 (preparation time to start playing + shortest time for one game)
It becomes.

Furthermore, even if the lighting of the performance lamp 541 is executed to indicate the end of the setting change immediately after the setting change state ends (at the same time as the output of the setting change end sound starts), the relationship between the lighting time T02 of the performance lamp 541 and "T21 + T22" is as follows:
T02 (approx. “2500” to “4000” ms) <T21+T22
It becomes.
As a result, even if play is started immediately after the setting change state is ended, the output of the setting change completion sound will cease and the illumination of the effect lamp 541 indicating the end of the setting change will cease before one game is ended.
FIG. 96 shows the time relationship at this time.

Furthermore, the above one game does not take into account the time required to close the front frame 502 after the setting change state ends, or the operation time required to resolve a frame open error after closing the front frame 502.
As with the slot machine 10, when the setting change state is ended, at least the front frame 502 should be in an open state. Therefore, even if the setting change state is ended, the pachinko game machine 500 detects a frame open error and issues an error notification. When a frame open error is being notified, the game cannot be started. When a frame open error occurs, first, the launch device 513 is not operated. Secondly, although the launch device 513 is in an operable state, even if a game ball enters the start hole 532 (even if the game ball is detected by the start hole switch 533), the game is not started (lottery processing is not executed, the special pattern display device 531 is not started, and prize balls are not paid out).

To clear the frame open error, close the front frame 502 and turn off the frame open switch 523. Furthermore, insert a key into the key insertion slot 521 and perform a specific operation to clear the frame open error (end the error notification). Therefore, the preparation time "T21" from the end of the setting change state until the start of play includes the operation time to close the front frame 502, insert the key, and clear the frame open error. If the time from the end of the setting change state until the end of the frame open error by closing the front frame 502 and turning off the frame open switch 523 is "T20", then
T01 (time when the setting change completion sound is output) < T20 + T21 + T22
T02 (lighting time of the performance lamp 541) < T20 + T21 + T22
It becomes.

In the above example, the setting change state is ended when the setting key switch 535 is turned off. However, this is not limiting. It is also possible to end the setting change state on the condition that the front frame 502 is closed (the frame open switch 523 is turned off) and an operation to clear the frame open error is performed (such as inserting a key into the key insertion slot 521 and rotating it in a specified direction). In this case, the setting change state ends when the front frame 502 is closed and the operation to clear the frame open error is completed, and the output of a setting change completion sound begins. In addition, the setting change state may be ended by closing the front frame 502 on the condition that the frame open switch 523 is turned off (without performing an operation to clear the frame open error). In this case, the setting change state ends when the frame open switch 523 is turned off, and the setting change completion sound is output.

Therefore, even if the specification is such that the setting change state ends when the front frame 502 is closed and the frame open error is released, as described above, the output time "T01" of the setting change completion sound is shorter than the time "T21+T22" from the end of the setting change to the end of one game, so the output of the setting change completion sound ends before the end of one game immediately after the setting change is completed.

The above is the case where one game time "T22" is completed in the shortest time.
On the other hand, the relationship between the output time "T01" of the setting change completion sound and the time "T21+T22" from the end of the setting change to the end of one game can be set in various ways as follows.
(1) The output time "T01" of the setting change completion sound is set shorter than the total time of the average one game time "T22" when the jackpot lottery result is a miss (non-win) and the preparation time "T21."
For example, if the fluctuation time of the special symbol display device 531 when a miss occurs is in the range of "T22 (min1)" to "T22 (max1)" and the average time is "T22 (avg1)", then
T01<T21+T22(avg1)
Examples of setting the

(2) The output time "T01" of the setting change completion sound is set to be shorter than the total time of the average one game time "T22" when a jackpot is obtained in the jackpot lottery and the preparation time "T21."
For example, if the fluctuation time of the special symbol display device 531 when a jackpot occurs is in the range of "T22 (min2)" to "T22 (max2)" and the average time is "T22 (avg2)", then:
T01<T21+T22(avg2)
Examples of setting it to

<Twentieth embodiment>
The twentieth embodiment relates to a board case for a control board.
There are known board cases for accommodating a control board that have a double door type and a sliding type, but the twentieth embodiment is a sliding type board case.
Compared to the double door system, the sliding system has a smaller exposed area of the control board, which reduces the number of points for unauthorized access.
Furthermore, in the twentieth embodiment, the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are slidably moved with the main control board 530 fixed to the upper case 560. Therefore, the surface of the main control board 530 that is exposed during the sliding movement is the solder surface.
In addition, the surface of a control board on which a CPU, connectors, and other electronic components are mounted is referred to as the "component surface," and the surface on which the pins of the electronic components are soldered is referred to as the "solder surface."

In the twentieth embodiment, a board case 550 for housing a main control board 530 in a pachinko gaming machine 500 is given as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the board case 550 of the twentieth embodiment can be applied to cases for housing not only the main control board 530 in a pachinko gaming machine 500, but also the payout control board 520, the sub-control board 540, and other control boards equipped with a CPU that require security.

Furthermore, the board case 550 of the 20th embodiment can be applied to a case for housing not only the control board of a pachinko game machine 500, but also the main control board 50 of a slot machine 10, the sub control board 80, and other control boards equipped with a CPU and requiring security.
Specifically, the main control board 50 of the slot machine 10 can be formed in the same or similar shape as the main control board 530 in the pachinko game machine 500 and housed in the board case 550 (upper case 560 and lower case 570) of the 20th embodiment.
The board case 56 shown in the second embodiment (FIGS. 9 and 10) can also be applied to the main control board 530 and other control boards of the pachinko game machine 500. Furthermore, the second and twentieth embodiments may be implemented independently, but the second and twentieth embodiments can also be implemented simultaneously.

Fig. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the board case 550 (upper case 560 and lower case 570) and the main control board 530 as viewed from the front side. Also, Fig. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the board case 550 (upper case 560 and lower case 570) and the main control board 530 as viewed from the rear side.
Furthermore, Fig. 105 is an external perspective view of the state in which main control board 530 is housed in board case 550, as viewed from the front. Furthermore, Fig. 106 is a front view of the state in which main control board 530 is housed in board case 550, as viewed from the front. Also, Fig. 107 is a front view of the state in which main control board 530 is housed in board case 550, as viewed from the rear (back) side.

Here, the “front side” refers to the component side of the main control board 530 , and the “rear (back) side” refers to the solder side of the main control board 530 .
Additionally, the "upper" in "upper case 560" refers to the component side of main control board 530, and may be referred to as the "front case (or cover)" or the "component side case (or cover)".
Furthermore, the "bottom" in "bottom case 570" refers to the solder side of the main control board 530, and may be referred to as the "rear (back) side case (or cover)" or the "solder side case (or cover)."
103 and 106 show a state in which a cover 561 is attached to the upper case 560, while FIG. 105 shows the upper case 560 without the cover 561.

As shown in Fig. 103, the main control board 530 is provided with the above-mentioned setting change (reset) switch 536 and a setting key insertion port 534. Furthermore, it is provided with connectors 539a to 539h for connecting with other boards, electronic components, or electronic devices via harnesses. The various components shown in the twentieth embodiment in Fig. 103 etc. are merely examples, and are not limited to these.
Furthermore, holes 530 a are formed in the four corners of the main control board 530 for use in screwing when mounting (fixing) the main control board 530 to the upper case 560 .

On the other hand, as shown in Figures 103 and 104, the upper case 560 is formed with openings 563a to 563i through which the connectors 539a to 539h, setting change (reset) switch 536, and setting key insertion port 534 of the main control board 530 can pass (pass through) with appropriate clearances.
A cover 561 is attached to the upper case 560 so as to be freely opened and closed, at a portion where the setting change (reset) switch 536 and the setting key insertion port 534 are exposed when the main control board 530 is attached. Note that in this embodiment, the opening and closing of the cover 561 is not detected by a sensor or the like, but it is also possible to detect the opening and closing of the cover 561 by a sensor. Then, it is also possible to make it possible to transition to the setting change state on the condition that the sensor is on (cover 561 is in the open state), or to make it possible to end the setting change state on the condition that the sensor is on (cover 561 is in the open state).

Crimping portions 562 and 572 are provided on one end of the upper case 560 and the lower case 570, specifically, on the left edge as viewed from the front in Fig. 103. The crimping portions 562 and 572 are used to seal (crimp) the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 when they are fitted together. After sealing (crimping), the fitting between the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 cannot be released unless the crimping portion 562 on the upper case 560 side is destroyed.
103, side walls 565 and 571 are provided on the ends opposite to the one ends (the ends on which the crimping portions 562 and 572 are provided) of the upper case 560 and the lower case 570, respectively. These side walls 565 and 571 come into contact with each other when the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are fitted together.

In Fig. 104, four bosses 564 are provided on the back side of the upper case 560. Two bosses 564 are visible in Fig. 104. The spacing between the four bosses 564 is the same as the spacing between the four holes 530a of the main control board 530. Furthermore, the bosses 564 are formed with screw holes.
In the state shown in FIG. 104 , when the main control board 530 is placed against the back side of the upper case 560 , the four holes 530 a of the main control board 530 and the screw holes of the four bosses 564 of the upper case 560 are aligned.

Furthermore, in this state, the connector 539 a of the main control board 530 passes through an opening 563 a of the upper case 560 , and its connector surface is exposed on the front side of the upper case 560 .
Similarly, connectors 539 b and 539 c of the main control board 530 pass through an opening 563 b of the upper case 560 , with their connector surfaces exposed on the front side of the upper case 550 .
Furthermore, connectors 539 d , 539 e , and 539 f of main control board 530 pass through openings 563 c , 563 d , and 563 e of upper case 560 , respectively, and their connector surfaces are exposed on the front side of upper case 560 .

Furthermore, connectors 539 g and 539 h of main control board 530 pass through openings 563 f and 563 g of upper case 560 , respectively, and their connector surfaces are exposed on the front side of upper case 560 .
In this manner, all of the connectors provided on the main control board 530 pass through the openings formed in the upper case 560 and are exposed to the front side of the upper case 560. Figures 105 and 106 show the state at this point.
In this case, the gaps between the connectors 539a to 539h and the openings 563a to 563g are all set to be appropriate gaps, so that the connectors 539a to 539h can pass through the openings 563a to 563g without resistance, and are configured so that no more gap than necessary is created between the connectors 539a to 539h and the openings 563a to 563g after passing through (for example, the gap between the connectors and the openings is designed to be about 0.5 mm). This makes it difficult to commit a cheating act using the gaps between the connectors and the openings.

Furthermore, the setting change (reset) switch 536 and the setting key insertion port 534 of the main control board 530 are disposed so as to be accessible from the front side of the upper case 560 by passing through openings 563h and 563i formed in the upper case 560, respectively (see FIG. 105), but since a cover 561 is attached over the setting change (reset) switch 536 and the setting key insertion port 534 as shown in FIGS. 103 and 106, they are not exposed to the front side. However, the board case 550 (upper case 560 and lower case 570) including the cover 561 is formed from a transparent resin, and the setting change (reset) switch 536 and the setting key insertion port 534 can be visually confirmed from the outside of the cover 561.
In the above state, screws are inserted into holes 530 a (four places) from the solder side of main control board 530 and screwed into bosses 564 of upper case 560 , and main control board 530 is fixed to upper case 560 .

As a result, even when the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are fitted together, the main control board 530 moves integrally with the upper case 560 .
In this manner, since the main control board 530 is fixed to the upper case 560 before the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are fitted together, there is no relative movement between the upper case 560 and the main control board 530 when the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are fitted together. Therefore, by forming the openings 563a to 563g slightly larger than the outer shape of the connectors 539a to 539h of the main control board 530 on the upper case 560 side and configuring the connectors 539a to 539h to pass through the openings 563a to 563g, it is possible to configure the structure so that no more than necessary gaps are generated between the connectors 539a to 539h and the openings 563a to 563g. For example, even if the positional relationship between upper case 560 and lower case 570 is shifted by a thief action after upper case 560 and lower case 570 are fitted together, upper case 560 and main control board 530 do not shift relative to each other, so it is not possible to increase the gap between each of connectors 539a to 539h and each of openings 563a to 563g. This makes it possible to suppress thieves.

Next, a method of fitting the upper case 560, to which the main control board 530 is attached, and the lower case 570 will be described.
FIG. 108 is a side cross-sectional view showing the mated state of upper case 560 and lower case 570, where (a) shows the provisionally mated state (before sliding movement) and (b) shows the actual mated state (after sliding movement).
In Fig. 108, the cross-sectional area is not hatched for ease of viewing the drawing. In the drawing, the upper case 560 is shown by a solid line, and the lower case 570 is shown by a two-dot chain line.
As shown in FIGS. 103, 104, and 108, the upper case 560 is provided with a side wall 565, and the lower case 570 is provided with a side wall 571.

103, 104, and 108, the lower edge of the upper case 560 in the longitudinal direction (on the lower case 570 side) is referred to as a lower edge 560a. The edge of the lower case 570 in the longitudinal direction is referred to as an outer edge 570a.
The shapes of the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are formed so that when the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are overlapped, they overlap in the positional relationship shown in FIG. 108(a). When the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are overlapped, a lower edge 560a of the upper case 560 and an outer edge 570a of the lower case 570 are formed to abut against each other. This position is called a "provisionally fitted state." In the provisionally fitted state, a gap L between a side wall 565 of the upper case 560 and a side wall 571 of the lower case 570 is formed to be about several tens of mm (for example, about "10" to "30" mm).
In addition, in the provisionally fitted state, it is possible to separate the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 at any time. In other words, in the state shown in Fig. 108(a), it is possible to move the upper case 560 relative to the lower case 570 in a direction away from the lower case 570 without interference with components or the like.

FIG. 109 is a plan view of the vicinity of the side wall 565 and the side wall 571 as viewed from the lower case 570 side in the provisionally fitted state.
109, in the provisionally fitted state, upper case 560 and lower case 570 have a gap L therebetween, and one end of the solder surface of main control board 530 is visible through this gap L. Here, among the connectors of main control board 530, if the legs of connector 539g are defined as connector legs 539g' and the legs of connector 539h are defined as connector legs 539h', then these connector legs 539g' and 539h' each form two rows of legs in the longitudinal direction (see FIG. 104).
In the provisionally mated state, only the outer rows of connector feet 539g' and 539h' are exposed, as shown in Fig. 109. In other words, even in the provisionally mated state, connector feet 539g' and 539h' are not entirely exposed, but only partially exposed.

108(a) , the lower case 570 can be slidably moved relative to the upper case 560. The direction of the sliding movement is the longitudinal direction of the board case 550, which is the leftward direction in FIG.
When the lower case 570 is slid relative to the upper case 560, it can be moved to the end of the sliding movement without interference between the upper case 560 and the main control board 530 and the lower case 570. Then, as shown in Fig. 108(b), it can be slid to a position where the side wall 565 of the upper case 560 and the side wall 571 of the lower case 570 abut. This state of Fig. 108(b) is the fully fitted state. Note that Fig. 107 shows the state where the side wall 565 of the upper case 560 and the side wall 571 of the lower case 570 abut (fully fitted state).

When the fully engaged state is reached, engaging members (not shown) formed on the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 engage with each other. This prevents the upper case 560 from being moved in a direction away from the lower case 570 relative to the lower case 570. However, in this state, the lower case 570 can be slid in the opposite direction relative to the upper case 560, and the fully engaged state can be returned to the provisionally engaged state at any time by sliding in the opposite direction.

In the provisionally fitted state shown in FIG. 108(a), the crimping portion 562 of the upper case 560 and the crimping portion 572 of the lower case 570 are misaligned in the vertical direction, but in the fully fitted state shown in FIG. 108(b), the crimping portion 562 of the upper case 560 and the crimping portion 572 of the lower case 570 overlap, making it possible to crimp them together. Once the crimping portion 562 and the crimping portion 572 are crimped together in this position, it is no longer possible to separate the fully fitted case 560 and the lower case 570, or to slide the lower case 570 relative to the upper case 560 to return to the provisionally fitted state shown in FIG. 108(a), unless the crimping portion 562 of the upper case 560 is cut (destroyed).

However, it is conceivable that a goofy action could be taken in some way to slide lower case 570 relative to upper case 560 to return to the provisionally fitted state, thereby exposing the solder surface of main control board 530.
In contrast, if the connector pins are not all exposed, but only some of them are exposed, as shown in FIG. 109, cheating can be made more difficult.
Furthermore, even in the provisionally mated state, not all of the connector legs are exposed. In the example of the twentieth embodiment, the exposed connector legs are connector legs 539g' and 539h', and the legs of the other connectors 539a, 539b, 539c, 539d, 539e, and 539g are not exposed.

When a sliding method is adopted for the board case 550, the sliding direction is usually the longitudinal direction of the board case. In this case, the amount of sliding movement is related to the number of exposed connector pins.
In this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 103, the connector is disposed near the outer periphery of the main control board 530. For example, if a connector is provided in the center of the main control board 530, the opening in the upper case 560 corresponding to the connector must be roughly square-shaped with four sides surrounded by side walls. However, if the connector is disposed inside a roughly square shape surrounded by four sides by side walls, it becomes difficult to insert and remove the connector. Therefore, in this embodiment, the connectors 539a to 539h are disposed near the outer periphery of the main control board 530 as shown in Fig. 103.

Specifically, in FIG. 103, connector 539a is arranged near the left edge of main control board 530, connectors 539b, 539c, 539d, 539e, and 539f are arranged near the upper edge, and connectors 539g and 539h are arranged near the right edge.
And, each of the openings 563 for the connector in the upper case 560 has a structure in which there is no wall at least on the outside. For example, as shown in Fig. 105, the periphery of the opening 563a through which the connector 539a passes is in a generally concave shape with no sidewall on the left side (outside) in the figure.
As shown in FIG. 105, the periphery of the opening 563b through which the connectors 539b and 539c pass is substantially concave with no sidewall on the upper side (outer side) in the figure.

Furthermore, the periphery of the openings 563c, 563d and 563e through which the connectors 539d, 539e and 539f pass, respectively, is substantially L-shaped with no side walls on the upper and right sides (outside) in FIG.
Furthermore, the periphery of the openings 563f and 563g through which the connectors 539g and 539h pass, respectively, has a side wall only on the left side (inner side) in the figure, as shown in Fig. 105. This shape makes it easy to insert and remove the connectors.

Furthermore, when the connectors are arranged on the main control board 530 as described above, when the lower case 570 is slid in as in this embodiment, the connector legs that are exposed first are the legs of connectors 539g and 539h (539g' and 539h').
Furthermore, when the amount of sliding movement is greater than that of this embodiment, the legs of connector 539f are next exposed.

In this embodiment, among the connectors of the main control board 530, the legs of connectors 530a to 539f are not exposed even when the lower case 570 is slid relative to the upper case 506. For example, in FIG. 105, if the group of connectors 539d, 539e, and 539f is positioned further to the left in the figure (closer to connectors 539b and 539c), the legs of connector 539f can be configured not to be exposed even if a sliding movement amount is set greater than in this embodiment.

In addition, when the lower case 570 is slid relative to the upper case 560 as in this embodiment, the legs of the connectors 539g and 539h located near the right edge of the main control board 530 in FIG. 105 tend to become exposed. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the lower case 570 is slid relative to the upper case 560, the legs of the connectors 539g and 539h (connector legs 539g' and 539h') become exposed, but the entire legs are not exposed, and only parts of the legs are exposed, making it as difficult as possible to cheat.

It is preferable to minimize the number of connectors whose legs are at least partially exposed by sliding movement.
Furthermore, when the number of rows of legs of one connector is "N (N is an integer of 2 or more)," it is preferable that the number of exposed legs is "N-1" or less (i.e., none of the legs are exposed). Furthermore, when the number of rows of legs of a connector is "1," it is preferable that the legs of the connector are configured not to be exposed.
Alternatively, when the number of pins of a connector is "N", i.e., the number of legs of the connector is "N", the "N" pins up to the "n"("n"≦"N-1") pin are exposed, but the "n+1" pin and beyond are not exposed (i.e., none of the pins are exposed).
Furthermore, among the pins of the connector, at least one pin serving as a reference may be configured not to be exposed. By not exposing at least one pin, it is possible to make cheating more difficult than when all pins are exposed.

Also, when the main control board is the main control board 530 in the pachinko game machine 500, as shown in Fig. 99, the main control board 530 is electrically connected to the payout control board 520, the special symbol display device 531, the start switch 533, the sub-control board 540, etc., and is therefore connected to these boards and electronic components. The connection is made using lead wires. Also, multiple lead wires are bundled together to make a harness, a connector terminal is attached to the end of the harness, and this connector terminal is connected to the connector on the main control board 530.
Here, among the leads connected to the main control board 530, the lead that should particularly ensure security is the lead to which the signal (lottery-related signal) of the start port switch 533 is input. Therefore, it is preferable that the connector to which the signal of the start port switch 533 is input is configured so that the connector legs are not exposed even when slid (at least one leg row is not exposed, or at least one pin is not exposed).

Furthermore, from the viewpoint of preventing dispensing slippage, it is preferable that the connector connected to the dispensing control board 520 is configured so that its connector legs are not exposed even when slid (at least one row of legs is not exposed, or at least one pin is not exposed).
Furthermore, it is preferable that each connector to which the lead wires supplying power to the main control board 530 (the lead wires connected to the power supply board 510 when the power supply board 510 and the main control board 530 are directly connected), the lead wires connecting to the sub-control board 540, and the lead wires connecting to a board for outputting external signals are connected is configured so that at least one row of legs is not exposed, or at least one pin is not exposed.

On the other hand, when the main control board is the main control board 50 in a slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 50 is electrically connected to a medal selector, various operation switches, a power switch 11, a medal count display device, a pattern display device, a medal payout device, etc.
Among the leads connected to the main control board 50, the lead for which security is particularly required is the lead to which the signal (signal related to the lottery) of the start switch 41 is input. Therefore, it is preferable that the connector to which the lead to which the signal of the start switch 41 is input is connected is configured so that the connector legs are not exposed even when slid (at least one row of legs is not exposed, or at least one pin is not exposed).

Furthermore, the lead wire through which the signal from the insertion sensor 44 is input also requires security from the viewpoint of preventing credit theft. Therefore, it is preferable that the connector to which the lead wire through which the signal from the insertion sensor 44 is input is connected is configured so that the connector legs are not exposed even when it is slid (at least one row of legs is not exposed, or at least one pin is not exposed).

Furthermore, with regard to the lead wires connected to the medal payout device, specifically the lead wires for outputting the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 and the lead wires for inputting the signal from the payout sensor 37, it is preferable to configure each connector to be connected so that the connector legs are not exposed even when slid, from the standpoint of preventing payout slippage (at least one leg row is not exposed, or at least one pin is not exposed).
In addition, as in the case of the pachinko game machine 500, it is preferable that each connector to which is connected a connector having lead wires related to the power supply, a connector having lead wires connected to the sub-control board 80, and a lead wire connected to a board for transmitting external signals is respectively connected, be configured so that at least one row of legs is not exposed or at least one pin is not exposed.

<Twenty-first embodiment>
The twenty-first embodiment relates to the thickness (diameter) of a lead wire (also called a "signal wire").
In the 21st embodiment, the lead wire related to starting is made the thinnest, and within one connector terminal having the lead wire related to starting, at least one other lead wire having the same thickness as the lead wire related to starting is provided, and at least one lead wire thicker than the lead wire related to starting is provided, making it difficult to identify the lead wire related to starting and preventing cheating (starting illegally or starting at an intentional timing).
In addition, lead wires do not have exactly the same thickness because there is some manufacturing error. Therefore, "the same thickness" is considered to be within the range of "±ε" when the range of manufacturing error (variation) is "ε". In other words, the same thickness "α" is synonymous with "α±ε".

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 500, the lead wire related to starting corresponds to the lead wire connecting the start port switch 533 and the main control board 530.
In the slot machine 10 , the lead wire related to starting corresponds to the lead wire connecting the start switch 41 and the main control board 50 .
In addition, the "start-related lead wire" actually consists of two wires, one of which is a start signal wire and the other is a GND wire. In this embodiment, the start signal wire is referred to as the "start-related lead wire" and does not include the GND wire. However, the lead wires other than the start-related lead wire may include the GND wire.

FIG. 110 is a plan view showing a state in which harnesses BH are connected to connectors 539b to 539h of main control board 530, respectively.
110, the board case 550 is omitted. Also, in FIG. 110, the main control board 530 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to the main control board 530 and can also be applied to the main control board 50. In other words, the twenty-first embodiment can be applied to both the slot machine 10 and the pachinko game machine 500.
The connector terminals attached to the ends of the harnesses B to H will be referred to as "harness B connector terminal" to "harness H connector terminal", respectively.

The connector 539a is normally not connected to a cable, etc. The connector 539a is connected to a verification device when a gaming machine regulatory authority uses the verification device to check the data stored in the CPU, ROM, and RWM.
Connectors 539b to 539h are concave connectors mounted on the main control board 530, and are connected to harness B connector terminals to harness H connector terminals (convex connectors), respectively.
FIG. 111 is a front view showing in detail each of the harnesses BH and the connector terminals of the harnesses BH.
Each of the harnesses B to H is made up of multiple lead wires, and each lead wire is numbered in Fig. 111. For example, the harness B is made up of nine lead wires 1 to 9 in the first row (top row in the figure) and nine lead wires 10 to 18 in the second row (bottom row in the figure).

Each of the connector terminals of the harnesses B, C, D, G, and H is configured with two rows of terminals, whereas each of the connector terminals of the harnesses E and F is configured with one row of terminals.
Note that the harnesses and connector terminals shown in Fig. 111 are merely examples, and the connector terminals may be configured with, for example, three or more rows. The number of lead wires in one row is determined according to the application (number of signal lines) and is not limited to that shown in Fig. 111, and may be one, or ten or more.
Even if it is made up of a single lead wire, it will be called a "harness."
Furthermore, the harness also includes cables in which all the lead wires are joined together as a unit (whether separable or not), such as flat cables or ribbon cables, in addition to cables in which each lead wire is separate (whether bundled or not), such as discrete wire cables in particular.

Also, in Fig. 111, two types of lead wire thickness are shown. In the figure, the lead wires shown as single circles indicate thin lead wires, and the lead wires shown as double circles indicate thick lead wires. Here, "lead wire thickness" refers to the diameter of the lead wire. Therefore, for example, if the thickness of the lead wire shown as a single circle is diameter D1 and the thickness of the lead wire shown as a double circle is diameter D2, then "D1 <D2".
In the example of FIG. 111, two types of lead wire thickness are shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the harness may be configured from lead wires of three or more types of thickness.
In the twenty-first embodiment (FIG. 111), all the lead wires have a circular cross section, but "circular" does not necessarily mean a perfect circle, but also includes a nearly circular cross section. Furthermore, the cross section may not necessarily be circular, but may be non-circular (for example, nearly square). In this case, the "thickness" of the lead wire refers to the maximum dimension (maximum length) of the cross section.

In FIG. 111, the lead wire related to starting (in the case of the pachinko game machine 500, the lead wire connecting the start port switch 533 and the main control board 530; in the case of the slot machine 10, the lead wire connecting the start switch 41 and the main control board 50) is the seventh lead wire of the harness D. And, of the two types of thickness, the thin lead wire is used for the lead wire related to starting. By using a thin lead wire, the lead wire related to starting is made as inconspicuous as possible. Also, by using a thin lead wire, it is easier to break when fraudulent acts (tampering, etc.) are performed, so that abnormalities can be easily detected. In other words, thick lead wires are less likely to break even when fraudulent acts are performed compared to thin lead wires, and in the case of thick lead wires in a bundle, it is difficult to detect even if one part is broken.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lead wire related to starting may be a thick lead wire. Alternatively, when three lead wires of different thicknesses are used, the lead wire related to starting may be a lead wire of intermediate thickness.
In some cases, only two wires, the start-related lead wire and its GND wire, are connected to one connector terminal.
In contrast, harness D shown in FIG. 111 has a starting lead (number 7) as well as several other leads.

Furthermore, in harness D, which includes a lead wire (number 7) related to starting, at least one lead wire of the same thickness as the lead wire (number 7) related to starting is provided. This is to make it difficult to identify which lead wire it is (to make cheating difficult) even if it is known that the lead wire related to starting is included in connector D. In this example, lead wires 2, 4, and 8 are the same thickness as lead wire 7 (lead wire related to starting).

Furthermore, lead wire No. 8 of the same thickness is placed adjacent to lead wire No. 7 of harness D. By placing lead wires of the same thickness adjacent to the lead wires related to starting, it is made difficult to identify the lead wire related to starting. Note that in the example of FIG. 111, lead wire No. 8 located to the right of lead wire No. 7 in harness D is set to the same thickness as lead wire No. 7, but this is not limited to this, and lead wire No. 6 may be set to the same thickness as lead wire No. 7. Alternatively, lead wire No. 3 may be set to the same thickness as lead wire No. 7. In harness D, lead wires "adjacent" to lead wire No. 7 correspond to lead wires No. 3, 6, and 8 in the example of FIG. 111. At least one of these lead wires is set to the same thickness as lead wire No. 7.

Furthermore, harness D is provided with one or more lead wires having a thickness different from the lead wire related to starting (number 7). In the example of FIG. 111, lead wires 1, 3, 5, and 6 have a thickness different from the lead wire related to starting (number 7). By including lead wires of a different thickness from the lead wire related to starting within one connector terminal (harness D connector terminal), it is possible to make the lead wire related to starting more difficult to identify.

In addition, in addition to the lead wires related to startup, for important signal wires, specifically, lead wires related to the insertion of gaming media, lead wires related to payout, lead wires for transmitting external signals, etc., it is preferable to provide one or more other signal wires of the same thickness as the lead wires related to startup, and one or more other signal wires of a different thickness within one connector terminal, in the same manner as the lead wires related to startup, from the standpoint of preventing cheating.
Furthermore, it is preferable to arrange the start-related lead wires and the power supply lead wires so that they are not adjacent to each other, in order to make the start-related lead wires less susceptible to the effects of noise.
Here, "not adjacent" means that, for example, when lead wire No. 7 of harness D is a lead wire related to starting, leads No. 3, No. 6, and No. 8 of harness D are not set as leads for power supply.

Furthermore, as in this embodiment, for example, when the harness G connector terminal and the harness H connector terminal are arranged in a straight line on the main control board 530 and the distance between the two connector terminals is short, when setting lead wire No. 5 of harness G as a lead wire related to starting, it is preferable not to set lead wire No. 1 of harness H as a lead wire for power supply.
On the other hand, even if the harness G connector terminal and the harness H connector terminal are arranged in a straight line on the main control board 530, if there is a certain distance between the two connector terminals, it is acceptable to set lead wire No. 5 of harness G as the lead wire related to starting and lead wire No. 1 of harness H as the lead wire for power supply.

Furthermore, when the connector terminal of a harness including the lead wires related to starting is adjacent to the connector terminal of another harness, it is preferable that the harness including the lead wires related to starting is positioned below the other harness and that the lead wires related to starting are wired so as to be hidden from the outside as much as possible.
Fig. 112 is a perspective view showing an example of hiding the lead wires related to starting. In Fig. 112, for the sake of simplicity, both harness D and harness E are shown as having one row of lead wires, with harness D having three lead wires and harness E having five lead wires. It is assumed that the lead wire of harness D closest to harness E is set as the lead wire related to starting.
In this case, the harness D is wired so that the harness E extends toward the harness E and passes above the harness D. This allows the start-related lead wires of the harness D to be hidden from the outside as much as possible, improving security.

<Twenty-second embodiment>
The twenty-second embodiment relates to a setting change state. The twenty-second embodiment will be described below, although it will be partially overlapped with the nineteenth embodiment.
First, in the case of the slot machine 10, before transitioning to the setting change state, it is determined whether the door switch 17 is on or not, whether the setting key switch 152 is on or not, and whether the reset switch 153 is on or not, and transition to the setting change state is possible on the condition that all of these switches are on. If only some of the above three switches are on or if all of the switches are off, transition to the setting change state is not made. As a result, even if, for example, a hole is illegally drilled in the front door 12 and the setting key switch 152 is accessed, unless the door switch 17 is on, transition to the setting change state is not made.

In addition, even if the door switch 17, setting key switch 152, and reset switch 153 are all turned on after the power is turned on, the state does not transition to the setting change state. When the setting key switch 152 is turned on after the power is turned on, it is possible to transition to the setting confirmation state. In the setting confirmation state, the current setting value can be confirmed, but the setting value cannot be changed. Note that the door switch 17 may be turned on as a condition for transitioning to the setting confirmation state. Furthermore, the reset switch 153 may be turned off as a condition for transitioning to the setting confirmation state.

Furthermore, the conditions for ending the setting change state are set to the setting key switch 152 being turned from on to off and the door switch 17 being on. This makes it possible to eliminate a state in which the setting change state ends with the door switch 17 off, i.e., the front door 12 not being open (a state in which there is a high possibility of cheating).
In this embodiment, the state can be transitioned to the setting change state on condition that the door switch 17 is on, and the state can be ended on condition that the door switch 17 is on.
However, without being limited to this, first, the setting change state can be transitioned to on the condition that the door switch 17 is on, and when the setting change state ends, the on/off state of the door switch 17 need not be determined.

Secondly, when transitioning to the setting change state, the on/off status of the door switch 17 is not judged, but when the setting change state ends, the on/off status of the door switch 17 is judged, and the setting change state cannot be ended unless the door switch 17 is on.
Thirdly, when transitioning to the setting change state, the on/off state of the door switch 17 is not determined, but if the door switch 17 is not on, the setting value may be set not to be changed even if the setting change switch 153 is operated.
Fourthly, when transitioning to the setting change state, the on/off state of the door switch 17 is not determined, and while in the setting change state, the setting value can be changed by operating the setting change switch 153. However, when the start switch 41 is operated, which is an operation for confirming the setting value, if the door switch 17 is not on, the setting value is not confirmed (a new setting value is not stored in the RWM 53).

In addition, in order to transition to the setting change state in the slot machine 10, the power is turned on with the reset switch 153 turned on, so the current setting value stored in the RWM 53 is cleared before transitioning to the setting change state (setting change processing) or before the setting value becomes changeable after transitioning to the setting change state (setting change processing). In this case, the setting value data becomes "0". Therefore, the setting value at the start of the setting change state is "1".

When the reset switch 153 is turned on and the power switch 11 is turned on to transition to the setting change state, the data related to the information displayed on the management information display LED 73 (role ratio monitor) in the memory area of the RWM 53 is not cleared. The data related to the information displayed on the management information display LED 73 includes the number of games counter, payout counter (including the ring buffer), each ratio data, etc.

In addition, in the case of the pachinko game machine 500, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the frame open switch 523 is on or not, whether the setting key switch 535 is on or not, and whether the reset switch 536 is on or not, and it is possible to transition to the setting change state if these three switches are on. If only some of the above three switches are on, or if all of the switches are off, it will not transition to the setting change state. As a result, in an illegal state in which the front frame 502 is not open, it will not transition to the setting change state even if the setting key switch 535 is turned on.

In particular, the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 500 is not configured in a closed state (see FIG. 22) like the slot machine 10, but is in an open state, as shown in FIG.
For this reason, depending on the state of the island installed in the hall, it is expected that someone may get around to the back side of the pachinko game machine 500 and access the main control board 530 without opening the front frame 502. However, if the frame opening switch 523 is not on, it is determined that the state is not normal, and the setting change state will not be entered (the setting value cannot be changed).

In addition, even if the frame open switch 523, the setting key switch 535, and the reset switch 536 are all turned on after the power is turned on, the state does not change to the setting change state. Furthermore, even if the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 534 after the power is turned on and the setting key switch 535 is turned on, the state does not change to the setting change state, nor does it change to the setting confirmation state.
In the case of the pachinko game machine 500, as described above, when the power is turned on with the setting key inserted into the setting key insertion port 534 and the setting key switch 535 turned on (with the reset switch 536 in the off state), the machine can transition to a setting confirmation state.

Furthermore, in a case where the opening of the front frame 502 and the opening of the glass door 505 can be detected individually as in this embodiment, the specifications may be such that when both the front frame 502 and the glass door 505 are open simultaneously (i.e., when the door opening switch 522 is on and the frame opening switch 523 is on), transition to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state is permitted.
By setting in this way, it becomes possible to inspect the function of the setting value without performing an extra procedure during the manufacturing process of the pachinko gaming machine 500. Furthermore, after the pachinko gaming machine 500 is installed in the hall, even if the glass door 505 is removed from the pachinko gaming machine 500 during the maintenance work on the board surface in the hall, the setting can be changed or checked in parallel with the maintenance work on the board surface, which improves convenience.

In addition, when transitioning to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the door open switch 522 (a switch that turns on when the glass door 505 is open) is not detected. Therefore, when transitioning to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the glass door 505 may be either open or closed. However, it may be determined that the glass door 505 is closed when transitioning to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, and the on/off state of the door open switch 522 may be determined when transitioning to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, and transition to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state may be made on the condition that it is off.

103 and 106, the setting key insertion port 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 are covered with a cover 561. In order to insert the setting key into the setting key insertion port 534, the cover 561 must be opened.
Therefore, a sensor that detects whether the cover 561 is opened or closed (hereinafter, referred to as a "cover sensor") may be provided, and the state may be changed to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state on condition that the cover sensor is on.

The pachinko gaming machine 500 is similar to the slot machine 10 in that in the setting change state, the setting value can be changed each time the setting change switch 536 is operated.
In addition, in the slot machine 10, the operation of the start switch 41 is the operation for confirming the setting value, whereas in the pachinko game machine 500, turning off the setting key switch 535 is the operation for confirming the setting value and ending the setting change state.
Furthermore, in the case of the pachinko game machine 500, the setting change state can be ended on condition that the setting key switch 535 is turned from on to off and the frame opening switch 523 is on. This makes it possible to eliminate a state where the setting change state ends with the frame opening switch 523 off, i.e., the front frame 502 not being opened (a state where there is a high possibility of cheating).

In this embodiment, the state can be transitioned to the setting change state on condition that the frame opening switch 523 is on, and the state can be terminated on condition that the frame opening switch 523 is on.
However, without being limited to this, first, it is possible to transition to the setting change state on the condition that the frame opening switch 523 is on, and when the setting change state ends, it is not necessary to determine the on/off state of the frame opening switch 523.

Secondly, when transitioning to the setting change state, the on/off status of the frame opening switch 523 is not judged, but when the setting change state ends, the on/off status of the frame opening switch 523 is judged, and the setting change state cannot be ended unless the frame opening switch 523 is on.
Furthermore, thirdly, when transitioning to the setting change state, the on/off state of the frame opening switch 523 is not determined, but if the frame opening switch 523 is not on, the setting value may be set so that it is not changed even if the setting change switch 536 is operated.

Fourthly, when transitioning to the setting change state, the on/off state of the frame opening switch 523 is not judged, and while in the setting change state, the setting value can be changed by operating the setting change switch 536, but when the setting key switch 535, which is the operation for finalizing the setting value, is turned off, if the frame opening switch 523 is not on, the setting value is not finalized (a new setting value is not stored in the RWM).

In the case of the pachinko game machine 500, even if the power is turned on with the reset switch 536 turned on to transition to the setting change state, the data related to the information to be displayed on the management information display LED (performance display monitor) 538 in the memory area of the RWM is not cleared. The data related to the information to be displayed on the management information display LED 538 is the base value.

Furthermore, it is preferable to provide the setting key insertion port 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 on the back side of the front frame 502, close to the hinge mechanism 503. In this way, it is possible to prevent the setting key insertion port 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 from being easily accessed by simply opening the front frame 502 slightly.
98, for example, the setting key insertion port 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 are disposed inside the cover 561, but when the main control board 530 is viewed from the front, the setting key insertion port 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 are disposed to the right within the area of the main control board 530. This allows the setting key insertion port 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 to be disposed closer to the hinge mechanism 503. In FIG. 98, the left side is the open side, so by forming as in FIG. 98, the setting key insertion port 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 can be disposed in a position far from the open side (the left side in the figure).

As for the slot machine 10, it is preferable to arrange the setting key insertion port 151 and the setting change (reset) switch 153 on the main control board 50 so that they are closer to the axis of rotation of the front door 12 when the front door 12 is opened, as in the above. For example, if the main control board 50 is arranged as shown in FIG. 22, and the left side is the axis of rotation of the front door 12 when the front door 12 is viewed from the front (player) side, and the right side is the open side, when the front door 12 is opened and the main control board 50 is viewed, it appears as in FIG. 10(a). Therefore, if the setting key insertion port 151 and the setting change (reset) switch 153 are arranged closer to the left in FIG. 10(a), the setting key insertion port 151 and the setting change (reset) switch 153 can be arranged farther from the open side of the front door 12.

Furthermore, as a measure to make it difficult to transition to the setting change state due to cheating, for example, in the pachinko game machine 500, the setting key switch 535 may be configured to be turned on by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion slot 534 and then rotating the setting key counterclockwise. In this case, if the setting key is configured to be rotatable clockwise as well and the transition to the setting change state is not made when the setting key is rotated clockwise, the transition to the setting change state can be made difficult to notice.
In particular, if the structure is designed so that, when inserting a key into key insertion port 521 to open front frame 502, front frame 502 is opened by rotating the key clockwise, the direction of rotation of the key when front frame 502 is opened will be opposite to the direction of rotation of the setting key, making it difficult to notice the transition to the setting change state.

The same applies to the slot machine 10.
The setting key switch 152 may be configured to be turned on by rotating the setting key counterclockwise after inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion port 151. In this case, if the setting key is configured to be rotatable clockwise as well and configured not to transition to the setting change state when the setting key is rotated clockwise, it is possible to make the transition to the setting change state less obvious.
In particular, if the front door 12 is designed to be opened by rotating the key clockwise when opening the front door 12, the direction of rotation of the key when the front door 12 is opened will be opposite to the direction of rotation of the setting key, making it difficult to notice the transition to the setting change state.

Fig. 113 is a side cross-sectional view showing the positional relationship between the upper case 560 of the board case 550, the cover 561, the setting key insertion port 534, and the setting change (reset) switch 536. In Fig. 113, similar to Fig. 108, the cross section is not hatched in order to make the drawing easier to read.
105 and 113, the highest surface of the upper case 560 is designated as surface S1, and the opening surface of the setting key insertion port 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 is designated as surface S2. In this case, surface S2 is formed lower than surface S1. By forming it in this manner, for example, when an attempt is made to access the setting key insertion port 534 or the setting change (reset) switch 536 by inserting a wire-like object from the outside, it becomes more difficult to access surface S2 than to access surface S1. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the act of cheating settings.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 103 and 113, when a cover 561 is attached to the upper surfaces of the setting key insertion port 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536, the upper surface of the cover 561, namely, surface S3 (Figure 113), is positioned at a lower position than surface S1 of the upper cover 560.
By forming it in this manner, when someone attempts to access the setting key insertion port 534 or the setting change (reset) switch 536, even if they try to insert a wire-like object between the upper cover 560 and cover 561 or try to open cover 561, it is possible to make such actions difficult, thereby preventing setting the device from being tampered with.

Although the nineteenth to twenty-second embodiments have been described above, these embodiments are not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
A. Nineteenth embodiment (1) In the nineteenth embodiment, a setting confirmation end sound may be output when the setting confirmation state is ended. For example, a sound saying "Setting confirmation is ended" may be output.
Furthermore, if you start playing at the same time as the setting confirmation state ends,
a) The output of the setting confirmation completion sound is terminated before the end of the game when the game is ended at the shortest possible time.
b) The output of the setting confirmation completion sound is terminated before the end of the game when the game is completed in the average time for one game.
c) In a game in which a special role is won (in the case of the slot machine 10) or a game in which a jackpot is won (in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500), the output of the setting confirmation completion sound is terminated before the end of the game when the game is completed in the average time for one game.
Examples of setting this include:

(2) Furthermore, at the same time as the setting confirmation state is ended, the effect lamp 21 (in the case of the slot machine 10) or the effect lamp 541 (in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500) may be used to output an effect indicating that the setting confirmation state is ended. In this case, as in the 19th embodiment, the effect time by the lamp is
a) To end the lamp effect before the end of the game when the game is ended in the shortest time possible.
b) The lamp effect is ended before the end of the game when the game is ended in the average time for one game.
c) In a game in which a special role is won (in the case of the slot machine 10) or a game in which a jackpot is won (in the case of the pachinko game machine 500), the lamp effect is ended before the end of the game when the game is ended in the average time for one game.
The following are some of the reasons:

(3) When the setting change state is ended (or when the setting confirmation state is ended as in the above example), a setting change (or confirmation) completion sound and a lamp effect are output. However, these setting change (or confirmation) completion sounds and lamp effects are controlled by the sub-control board 80 or 540.
However, this is not limited to the above, and when the setting change (or confirmation) state is ended, an output indicating that the setting change (or confirmation) state has been ended may be executed by an output device controlled by the main control board 50 or 530.

(4) In the slot machine 10, the setting key insertion port 151 (setting key switch 152) and the setting change (reset) switch 153 are provided on the main control board 50, but this is not limited to the above. A setting change board may be provided separately from the main control board 50, and the setting key insertion port 151 (setting key switch 152), setting change (reset) switch 153, and setting value display LED 73 may be provided on this setting change board.
The same applies to the pachinko game machine 500. A setting change board may be provided separately from the main control board 530, and a setting key insertion port 534 (setting key switch 535), a setting change (reset) switch 536, and a setting value display LED 537 may be provided on this setting change board.

(5) As the setting change completion sound, an example was given of outputting the sound “Setting changes are now complete.” However, the sound is not necessarily limited to this wording and may be, for example, “The setting values have been updated.”
(6) In the 19th embodiment, an example is shown in which a game is started immediately after the setting change state is ended, but in actual hall business, it is not assumed that a game will be started immediately after the setting change state is ended. For example, it is assumed that a hall manager changes the setting and then plays one game as a trial. In such a case, one of the objectives is to confirm that the setting change state has been properly ended by the setting change completion sound and the output of the effect lamp, while preventing confusion between the notification by the setting change completion sound and the effect lamp and the effect output during the game.

B. Twentieth embodiment (1) In the twentieth embodiment, the lower edge 560a of the upper case 560 and the outer edge 570a of the lower case 570 are brought into contact with each other to enable sliding movement. However, there are various methods for engaging the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 before sliding movement, and the method is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 108. In addition, the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 may have a shape that allows them to overlap with a certain degree of freedom when overlapped. Alternatively, the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 may have a shape that allows them to overlap only at a specific position.

(2) There are various methods for arranging each of the connectors 539a to 539h on the main control board 530 and for setting which connector legs are exposed when the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are temporarily fitted together.
When upper case 560 and lower case 570 slide relative to each other as in this embodiment, the connector legs that are exposed first are connector legs 539g' and 539h', as shown in Fig. 109. Therefore, in the case of connector 539a, which is provided at a symmetrical position to connectors 539g and 539h on main control board 530, its connector legs are not exposed even if the amount of sliding movement increases.

Therefore, for example, on the main control board 530, connectors that are important in terms of security (connectors having signal lines related to start-up, connectors having signal lines related to the acceptance and payout of game media, connectors having signal lines related to the output of external signals, and connectors having signal lines related to presentation) can be arranged in sequence from the connector 539a side (left side in the figure) in Figure 103, and connectors for signal lines that are not as important in terms of security can be used for connectors 539g and 539h.

(3) Although the substrate case 550 has been exemplified as having the crimped portions 562 and 572, this embodiment can also be applied to a substrate case 550 that does not have a crimped portion. For example, the substrate case that houses the sub-control substrate 540 of a pachinko game machine 500 may not have a crimped portion, but the 20th embodiment can also be applied to such a substrate case.

C. Twenty-First Embodiment (1) The types and numbers of connectors and the types and numbers of harnesses (connector terminals) shown in the above embodiment are merely examples, and are not limited to these.
For example, in FIG. 111, harnesses B and C may be made entirely of thick lead wires, or may be made entirely of thin lead wires.
Further, the harness E has been described as an example in which only thin lead wires are arranged in a single row, but the harness and connector terminal may have two or more rows of thin lead wires.
Furthermore, the harness and connector terminals may have any number of rows, and the number of lead wires (terminals) in one row may be any number.
Furthermore, in a harness in which thick and thin lead wires are mixed in a row, there may be at least one thick lead wire in the row, and at least one thin lead wire.

(2) In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110, a set of lead wires connected to one connector of main control board 530 is defined as "one harness."
For example, harness G connected to connector 539g is one harness, and harness H connected to connector 539h is one harness. When harness G and harness H are tied together at a further end, it is called a "harness group" and not called "one harness."

(3) When the main control board 530 and other boards are connected by a harness, it is assumed that a specific connector is mounted on the main control board 530 and that a connector terminal of a harness consisting of N lead wires is connected to the specific connector.
On the other hand, at the other end of the harness, the N lead wires are divided into Nx wires (Nx≧1) and Ny wires (Ny≧1), a connector terminal X is attached to the tip of the Nx lead wires and the connector terminal X is connected to another board, and further, a connector terminal Y (≠ connector terminal X) is attached to the tip of the Ny lead wires and the connector terminal Y is connected to another board (the same board as the board to which the Nx lead wires are connected or a different board).
In this case, the term "one harness" in this embodiment refers to a set of N lead wires connected to the main control board 530.

D. 22nd embodiment (1) In the pachinko game machine 500, the state can be changed to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state when the power is turned on, but the state can be changed to a setting confirmation state by turning on the setting key switch 535 after the power is turned on, as in the slot machine 10. In this case, it is possible to determine whether the frame opening switch 523 is on or not, and to change to the setting confirmation state if the frame opening switch 523 is on.

(2) As mentioned above, the setting change board may be provided as a separate board from the main control board 50 or 530. In this case, in the case of the slot machine 10, it is preferable to place the setting change board inside the cabinet on the opening axis side (closer to the opening axis) of the front door 12, in other words, on the side away from the opening end as seen from the player side. Similarly, in the case of the pachinko game machine 500, it is preferable to place the setting change board on the hinge mechanism 503 side (closer to the hinge mechanism 503) on the back side of the front frame 502, in other words, on the side away from the opening end as seen from the player side. By placing them in this way, the setting key insertion port 151, 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 153, 536 can be placed in a position far from the opening end. Even in this case, it is preferable to place the main control board 50 or 530 in a position far from the opening end.

In particular, the main control board 50 or 530 is equipped with a management information display LED 74 or 538, respectively, and it is preferable that the information displayed by the management information display LED 74 or 538 is not easily visible. Therefore, it is preferable that the management information display LED 74 or 538 on the main control board 50 or 530 is disposed in a position away from the open side, and the main control board 50 or 530 is also disposed in a position away from the open end.
However, it is possible to make the information displayed by the management information display LED 74 or 538 easily invisible by simply arranging the management information display LED 74 or 538 in a position away from the open side on the main control board 50 or 530, respectively. Similarly, even if the management information display LED 74 or 538 is mounted in approximately the center of the main control board 50 or 530, respectively, it is also possible to make the information displayed by the management information display LED 74 or 538 easily invisible by simply arranging the main control board 50 or 530 in a position away from the open end.

E. All of the embodiments and various modified examples described in this specification, including the 19th to 22nd embodiments, may be implemented in any suitable combination, rather than being limited to being implemented alone.

<Twenty-third embodiment>
The twenty-third embodiment relates to a performance lamp (decorative lamp unit) 541 .
Here, "substantially the same" is a concept that includes things that are roughly the same but not completely the same due to manufacturing errors, etc., and things that are not completely the same but look the same. Also, "substantially the same" is a concept that includes "the same."
The description of the 23rd embodiment will be partially overlapped with that of the 19th embodiment (B), but will be described again.
FIG. 114 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 500, and FIG. 115 is an external perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 500 as viewed from the front side (player side).

Figure 116 is a front view of the right base member 650 with the upper frame lamp cover 613 and the upper portion of the right frame lamp cover 622 removed, Figure 117 is a perspective view of the right base member 650 from the right side with the upper frame lamp cover 613 and the upper portion of the right frame lamp cover 622 removed, and Figure 118 is a rear view of the right base member 650 with the upper frame lamp cover 613 and the upper portion of the right frame lamp cover 622 removed.

Figure 119 is an enlarged view of the upper front part of the right base member 650 with the upper frame lamp cover 613 and the upper part of the right frame lamp cover 622 removed, Figure 120 is an enlarged perspective view of the upper part of the right base member 650 from the left side with the upper frame lamp cover 613 and the upper part of the right frame lamp cover 622 removed, and Figure 121 is an enlarged view of the upper left side part of the right base member 650 with the upper frame lamp cover 613 and the upper part of the right frame lamp cover 622 removed.

122 is an enlarged view of the upper bottom surface of the right base member 650 with the upper frame lamp cover 613 removed, and FIG. 123 is an enlarged cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG.
Figure 124 is a front view of the right base member 650 with the upper frame lamp cover 613, the upper portion of the right frame lamp cover 622, and the right frame lamp board 621 removed, and corresponds to Figure 116.
FIG. 125 is an enlarged rear view of the right base member 650 with the upper frame lamp cover 613 removed and the right frame lamp cover 622 attached.
FIG. 126 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the lens portion 670 of the right frame lamp cover 622.

As shown in Figures 114 and 115, the pachinko game machine 500 comprises a rectangular outer frame 501 fixed to an island (not shown), and a front frame 502 attached to the front side of the outer frame 501.
In addition, a game board 504 is attached to the center of the front frame 502 with the game area (not shown) facing the front, and a glass door (glass frame) 505 is attached to the front side of the front frame 502 so as to cover the front side of the front frame 502 and the game area of the game board 504.

Furthermore, an upper tray 506, a lower tray 507, a launch handle 508, etc. are attached to the front side of the front frame 502 and below the glass door 505.
Furthermore, a hinge mechanism 503 is provided on the left side of the outer frame 501 .
The front frame 502 is attached to the outer frame 501 by a hinge mechanism 503 so as to be openable and closable, and the glass door 505 is attached to the front frame 502 by the hinge mechanism 503 so as to be openable and closable.

A locking device (not shown) is provided on the right side of the front frame 502, and a key insertion port 521 is provided on the right side of the glass door 505, into which a key to operate the locking device is inserted.
Then, when the front frame 502 is closed relative to the outer frame 501, a key is inserted through the key insertion port 521 and the operation of unlocking the outer frame 501 and the front frame 502 is performed, and the front frame 502 can be opened (moved) forward (towards the player) relative to the outer frame 501, with the hinge mechanism 503 as the central axis.

In addition, when the front frame 502 is opened relative to the outer frame 501, the game board 504, glass door 505, upper tray 506, lower tray 507, launch handle 508, etc. attached to the front frame 502 move forward relative to the outer frame 501 together with the front frame 502, with the hinge mechanism 503 as the central axis.
When the front frame 502 is opened, a frame opening switch 523 (see Figure 99 of the 19th embodiment (B)) is turned on, thereby detecting the opening of the front frame 502.

In addition, when the glass door 505 is closed relative to the front frame 502, by inserting a key into the key insertion port 521 and unlocking the front frame 502 and the glass door 505, the glass door 505 can be opened forward relative to the front frame 502, with the hinge mechanism 503 as the central axis.
When the glass door 505 is opened, a door open switch 522 (see FIG. 99 of the 19th embodiment (B)) is turned on, thereby detecting the opening of the glass door 505.

In addition, a starting hole 532, a special symbol display device 531, and an image display device 543 are provided in the play area of the game board 504 (see FIG. 99 of the 19th embodiment (B)).
Furthermore, two transparent glass plates (not shown) are arranged parallel to each other at a predetermined distance in the center of the glass door 505, and decorative lamps 541 are attached to the upper, right, and left sides of the front side of the glass door 505, surrounding the periphery of the glass plates.
Furthermore, when the glass door 505 is closed relative to the front frame 502, the glass plate is located in front of the play area of the play board 504. This makes it possible to view the play area of the play board 504 from the front side of the pachinko game machine 500 through the glass plate.

As shown in Figures 114 and 115, the performance lamp (decorative lamp section) 541 includes an upper frame lamp section 610 arranged along the upper front edge of the glass door 505, a right frame lamp section 620 arranged along the right front edge of the glass door 505, and a left frame lamp section 630 arranged along the left front edge of the glass door 505.

That is, the upper frame lamp portion 610 is a decorative lamp portion that is formed horizontally extending from near the right end to near the left end of the upper front surface of the glass door 505 .
The right frame lamp portion 620 is a decorative lamp portion that is formed vertically long from near the upper end to near the lower end of the front right side of the glass door 505.
Furthermore, the left frame lamp portion 630 is a decorative lamp portion that is formed vertically extending from near the top end to near the bottom end of the left side of the front surface of the glass door 505 .

Furthermore, the right end of the upper frame lamp section 610 and the upper end of the right frame lamp section 620 are continuous, and the left end of the upper frame lamp section 610 and the upper end of the left frame lamp section 630 are continuous.
As a result, the glass plate positioned in the center of the glass door 505 is surrounded at its upper edge, right edge, and left edge by the upper frame lamp portion 610, the right frame lamp portion 620, and the left frame lamp portion 630.

As shown in FIGS. 114 and 115 , the upper frame lamp section 610 includes an upper frame right side lamp board 611 , an upper frame left side lamp board 612 , and an upper frame lamp cover 613 .
The upper frame right side lamp board 611 is a lamp board on which a light-emitting element (also referred to as "light-emitting means") for illuminating the right side of the upper frame lamp section 610 and connectors 642a-b to which a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light-emitting element is connected are mounted, and it is positioned on the right side of the upper front part of the glass door 505 with the mounting surface of the light-emitting element facing the front side (player side).

The upper frame left side lamp board 612 is a lamp board on which a light-emitting element for illuminating the left side of the upper frame lamp section 610 and a connector to which a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light-emitting element is connected are mounted, and it is positioned on the left side of the upper front part of the glass door 505 with the mounting surface of the light-emitting element facing the front side.
116, 119, and 120, four LEDs 641a-d are mounted as light-emitting elements on the upper frame right lamp board 611. Although not shown, four LEDs are also mounted as light-emitting elements on the upper frame left lamp board 612, similar to the upper frame right lamp board 611. All of these LEDs are full-color LEDs.

The full-color LED is provided with three LEDs, one for emitting red light, one for emitting green light, and one for emitting blue light, and full color can be expressed by adjusting the output of these three LEDs.
In other words, a full-color LED is a light-emitting means that has three light-emitting elements, one that emits red light, one that emits green light, and one that emits blue light, and that can express full colors by adjusting the output of these three light-emitting elements.

Furthermore, the mounting surfaces of the light emitting elements on the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612 are configured in white.
Specifically, a white coating film is formed on the entire mounting surfaces of the light-emitting elements on the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612. The white coating film is formed by applying or silk screen printing (also called silk printing or screen printing) a white resist.

The upper frame lamp cover 613 is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612, and is attached to the upper front part of the glass door 505 as shown in Figures 114 and 115.
The upper frame lamp cover 613 has a horizontally elongated shape extending from near the right end to near the left end of the upper front surface of the glass door 505, and is made of a colorless, translucent resin.
Furthermore, the upper frame lamp cover 613 faces the mounting surfaces of the light-emitting elements on the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612. Therefore, light emitted from the light-emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612 is irradiated onto the upper frame lamp cover 613. As a result, when the light-emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612 emit light, the upper frame lamp cover 613 appears to glow.

In this embodiment, as described above, the upper frame lamp cover 613 is formed of a colorless, translucent resin. Therefore, the mounting surfaces of the light-emitting elements on the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612 can be seen through the upper frame lamp cover 613. Therefore, if the mounting surfaces of the light-emitting elements on the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612 are made of a color such as green or black, the appearance of the upper frame lamp unit 610 may be poor when the light-emitting elements are turned off, and when the light-emitting elements are lit, they may appear to emit a color different from the set color.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the entire mounting surfaces of the light-emitting elements on the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612 are configured in white. This makes it possible to prevent the appearance of the upper frame lamp unit 610 from being impaired even if the mounting surfaces of the light-emitting elements on the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612 are visible through the upper frame lamp cover 613.
Furthermore, by forming the entire mounting surface of the light-emitting elements on the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612 in white, the light emitted from the light-emitting elements is efficiently reflected by the mounting surface of the light-emitting elements toward the upper frame lamp cover 613. This makes it possible to make the upper frame lamp cover 613 appear to shine brighter. Furthermore, by forming the entire mounting surface of the light-emitting elements in white, the color of the light-emitting elements can be made to look beautiful. In particular, when the light-emitting elements emit light, they can be made to appear to emit the color that has been set.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 114 and 115 , the right frame lamp unit 620 includes a right frame lamp board 621 and a right frame lamp cover 622 .
The right frame lamp board 621 is a lamp board on which are mounted light-emitting elements for illuminating the right frame lamp unit 620 and a connector 642c to which a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light-emitting element is connected, and is positioned on the front right side of the glass door 505 with the mounting surface of the light-emitting element facing the front side (player side).

The right frame lamp board 621 is formed in a generally rectangular shape that is vertically long and extends from near the upper end to near the lower end of the right side of the front surface of the glass door 505 .
116 and 117, seven LEDs 641e to 641k are mounted as light-emitting elements on the upper portion of the right frame lamp board 621. Although not shown, a plurality of LEDs are also mounted as light-emitting elements on the lower portion of the right frame lamp board 621. All of these LEDs are full-color LEDs.
Furthermore, the mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the right frame lamp board 621 is configured in white. Similar to the upper frame right side lamp board 611, a white coating film is formed by applying or silk-screen printing a white resist on the entire mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the right frame lamp board 621.

The right frame lamp cover 622 is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the right frame lamp board 621, and is attached to the front right side of the glass door 505 as shown in Figures 114 and 115.
The right frame lamp cover 622 has a vertically elongated shape extending from near the upper end to near the lower end of the front right side of the glass door 505, and is made of a colorless, translucent resin.
Furthermore, the right frame lamp cover 622 faces the mounting surface of the right frame lamp board 621 on which the light-emitting elements are mounted. Therefore, light emitted from the light-emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp board 621 is irradiated onto the right frame lamp cover 622. As a result, when the light-emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp board 621 emit light, the right frame lamp cover 622 appears to glow.

The entire mounting surface of the light-emitting elements on the right frame lamp board 621 is made white to prevent the appearance of the right frame lamp unit 620 from being impaired, and the light emitted from the light-emitting elements is efficiently reflected toward the right frame lamp cover 622, making the right frame lamp cover 622 appear brighter and the color of the light-emitting elements appear more beautiful, just like the upper frame lamp unit 610 described above.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 114 and 115 , the left frame lamp unit 630 includes a left frame lamp board 631 and a left frame lamp cover 632 .
The left frame lamp board 631 is a lamp board on which are mounted light-emitting elements for illuminating the left frame lamp unit 630 and a connector to which a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light-emitting element is connected, and is positioned on the left front side of the glass door 505 with the mounting surface of the light-emitting element facing the front side (player side).

The left frame lamp board 631 is formed in a generally vertically long rectangular shape extending from near the upper end to near the lower end of the left front side of the glass door 505 .
Furthermore, although not shown, a plurality of LEDs are mounted as light-emitting elements on the left frame lamp board 631. All of these LEDs are full-color LEDs.
Furthermore, the mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the left frame lamp board 631 is configured in white. Similar to the upper frame right side lamp board 611, a white coating film is formed by applying or silk screen printing a white resist on the entire mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the left frame lamp board 631.

The left frame lamp cover 632 is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the left frame lamp board 631, and is attached to the front left side of the glass door 505 as shown in Figures 114 and 115.
The left frame lamp cover 632 has a vertically elongated shape extending from near the top end to near the bottom end of the left front side of the glass door 505, and is made of a colorless, translucent resin.
Furthermore, the left frame lamp cover 632 faces the mounting surface of the left frame lamp board 631 on which the light-emitting elements are mounted. Therefore, light emitted from the light-emitting elements mounted on the left frame lamp board 631 is irradiated onto the left frame lamp cover 632. As a result, when the light-emitting elements mounted on the left frame lamp board 631 emit light, the left frame lamp cover 632 appears to glow.

The entire mounting surface of the light-emitting elements on the left frame lamp board 631 is made white to prevent the left frame lamp unit 630 from looking bad, and the light emitted from the light-emitting elements is efficiently reflected toward the left frame lamp cover 632, making the left frame lamp cover 632 appear brighter and the color of the light-emitting elements appear more beautiful, just like the upper frame lamp unit 610 described above.

Furthermore, the glass door (glass frame) 505 is equipped with a right base member 650 (see Figures 116 to 121) and a left base member (not shown).
The right base member 650 is a member that forms the framework of the right side of the glass door 505, and the left base member is a member that forms the framework of the left side of the glass door 505. The left base member is formed in a shape that is approximately symmetrical to the right base member 650. The framework of the glass door 505 is formed by the right base member 650 and the left base member.

Also, as shown in Figures 119 to 121, the upper front part of the right base member 650 is provided with an upper frame right side board mounting portion 651 to which the upper frame right side lamp board 611 is mounted, and an upper frame right side cover mounting portion 652 to which the right portion of the upper frame lamp cover 613 is mounted.
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 119 to 121, the front right side of the right base member 650 is provided with a right frame board mounting portion 653 to which the right frame lamp board 621 is attached, and a right frame cover mounting portion 654 to which the right frame lamp cover 622 is attached.

Also, although not shown, the upper front part of the left base member is provided with an upper frame left side board mounting portion to which the upper frame left side lamp board 612 is mounted, and an upper frame left side cover mounting portion to which the left portion of the upper frame lamp cover 613 is mounted.
Furthermore, although not shown, the front left side of the left base member is provided with a left frame board mounting portion to which the left frame lamp board 631 is attached, and a left frame cover mounting portion to which the left frame lamp cover 632 is attached.

The upper frame lamp section 610 is composed of the upper frame right side lamp board 611, the upper frame left side lamp board 612, the upper frame lamp cover 613, the upper frame right side board mounting section 651, the upper frame left side board mounting section (not shown), the upper frame right side cover mounting section 652, and the upper frame left side cover mounting section (not shown).
As shown in Figures 114 and 115, the upper frame lamp cover 613 is attached so as to straddle the upper front surface of the right base member 650 and the upper front surface of the left base member.
In addition, the right frame lamp section 620 is composed of the right frame lamp board 621, the right frame lamp cover 622, the right frame board mounting section 653, and the right frame cover mounting section 654.
Furthermore, the left frame lamp section 630 is composed of a left frame lamp board 631, a left frame lamp cover 632, a left frame board mounting section (not shown), and a left frame cover mounting section (not shown).

The upper frame right side board mounting portion 651 is the portion to which the upper frame right side lamp board 611 is mounted, and is provided on the upper front surface of the right base member 650 as shown in Figures 120 to 122.
120 to 122, the upper frame right side board attachment portion 651 is provided with a board support rib 661a shaped to follow the outer periphery of the upper frame right side lamp board 611. This board support rib 661a is for supporting the upper frame right side lamp board 611. When the upper frame right side lamp board 611 is placed in a predetermined position on the upper frame right side board attachment portion 651, the outer periphery of the upper frame right side lamp board 611 rests on the board support rib 661a.

116, 117, 119, and 120, three positioning bosses 682a-c are provided on the upper frame right side board attachment part 651. These positioning bosses 682a-c are used when positioning the upper frame right side lamp board 611 at a predetermined position on the upper frame right side board attachment part 651, and are formed in a cylindrical shape.
123, a screw-fastening boss 681 is provided on the upper frame right side board attachment part 651. This screw-fastening boss 681 is used when fixing the upper frame right side lamp board 611 to the upper frame right side board attachment part 651, and is formed in a cylindrical shape. A screw hole 684 is provided in the center of the screw-fastening boss 681.

123, a positioning hole 685a is provided in the upper frame right lamp board 611 at a position corresponding to the positioning boss 682a. This positioning hole 685a is a hole into which the positioning boss 682a is inserted when positioning the upper frame right lamp board 611 at a predetermined position of the upper frame right board attachment part 651, and penetrates the upper frame right lamp board 611 from one surface to the other surface.
123, a fixing hole 686a is provided in the upper frame right side lamp board 611 at a position corresponding to the screw boss 681. This fixing hole 686a is a hole used when fixing the upper frame right side lamp board 611 to the upper frame right side board attachment part 651, and penetrates the upper frame right side lamp board 611 from one surface to the other surface.

When the positioning boss 682a is inserted into the positioning hole 685a from the side opposite the mounting surface of the LED 641a on the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame right lamp board 611 is positioned at a predetermined position on the upper frame right board mounting part 651. At this time, the position of the screw hole 684 provided at the center of the screw fixing boss 681 coincides with the position of the fixing hole 686a. Then, when a screw 683a is inserted into the fixing hole 686a from the mounting surface side of the LED 641a on the upper frame right lamp board 611 and this screw 683a is screwed into the screw hole 684, the upper frame right lamp board 611 is fixed to the upper frame right board mounting part 651.

As shown in FIG. 123, the positioning hole 685a and the fixing hole 686a are provided close to each other.
In this embodiment, the diameter of the threaded shaft 688 of the screw 683a is set to be larger than the diameter of the positioning boss 682a. The fixing hole 686a is formed in a circular shape, and the inner diameter of the fixing hole 686a is set to be approximately the same as the diameter of the threaded shaft 688 of the screw 683a.

Furthermore, the positioning hole 685a is formed in an oval shape, the minor diameter of the positioning hole 685a is set to be approximately the same as the diameter of the positioning boss 682a, and the major diameter of the positioning hole 685a is set to be larger than the diameter of the screw shaft 688 of the screw 683a.
Furthermore, the opening area of the positioning hole 685a and the opening area of the fixing hole 686a are set to be different from each other. In this embodiment, the opening area of the fixing hole 686a is set to be larger than the opening area of the positioning hole 685a.

In this way, the positioning hole 685a and the fixing hole 686a have different shapes and opening areas, which makes it possible to prevent the positioning hole 685a and the fixing hole 686a from being confused when fixing the upper frame right lamp board 611 to the upper frame right board attachment part 651, and allows the assembly work to proceed smoothly.
In addition, since the minor diameter of the positioning hole 685a is set smaller than the diameter of the screw shaft 688, the screw shaft 688 cannot be inserted into the positioning hole 685a, which also prevents the positioning hole 685a from being confused with the fixing hole 686a.

When the positioning boss 682a is inserted into the positioning hole 685a and the upper frame right lamp board 611 is positioned at a predetermined position on the upper frame right board attachment part 651, as shown in Figures 122 and 123, the tip of the positioning boss 682a protrudes toward the mounting surface side of the LED 641a on the upper frame right lamp board 611. The tip of the positioning boss 682a protruding toward the mounting surface side of the LED 641a is called the protrusion 687. This protrusion 687 is formed in a convex curved shape (dome shape). This allows the light emitted from the LED 641a to be reflected by the protrusion 687 formed in a convex curved shape, making the upper frame lamp part 610 look beautifully illuminated.

In addition, when a screw 683a is inserted into the fixing hole 686a from the mounting surface side of the LED 641a on the upper frame right side lamp board 611 and this screw 683a is screwed into the screw hole 684 to fix the upper frame right side lamp board 611 to the upper frame right side board mounting portion 651, as shown in Figures 122 and 123, the screw head 689 of the screw 683a is exposed on the mounting surface side of the LED 641a on the upper frame right side lamp board 611.
As shown in FIG. 123, a height T1 of the screw head 689 from the mounting surface of the LED 641a is set to be larger than a height T2 of the LED 641a from the mounting surface of the LED 641a.

That is, when the height of the screw head 689 from the mounting surface of the LED 641a is "T1" and the height of the LED 641a from the mounting surface of the LED 641a is "T2", they are set so as to satisfy "T1>T2".
In other words, the screw head 689 is set to a height greater than that of the LED 641a from the mounting surface of the LED 641a.

Furthermore, the screw head 689 of the screw 683a is subjected to a surface treatment that reflects the light emitted from the LED 641a. Specifically, the screw head 689 of the screw 683a is subjected to a silver plating as a surface treatment that reflects the light emitted from the LED 641a. Examples of silver plating include silver plating, chrome plating, nickel plating, tin plating, tin-cobalt plating, and zinc plating.

In this way, the height of the screw head 689 from the mounting surface of the LED 641a is set to be greater than the height of the LED 641a from the mounting surface of the LED 641a. Furthermore, by applying a surface treatment to the screw head 689 that reflects light, the light emitted from the LED 641a is reflected by the screw head 689 of the screw 683a, making the upper frame lamp section 610 appear to shine beautifully.

The upper frame right side cover mounting portion 652 is the portion to which the right side portion of the upper frame lamp cover 613 is mounted, and is provided on the upper front surface of the right base member 650 as shown in Figures 119 and 120.
Furthermore, the upper frame right cover attachment portion 652 is provided with a cover fitting groove 662a. This cover fitting groove 662a is a groove into which the upper edge of the upper frame lamp cover 613 fits, and is formed along the upper edge of the right base member 650. When the upper edge of the upper frame lamp cover 613 is fitted into the cover fitting groove 662a and the upper frame lamp cover 613 is screwed in place from the back side of the right base member 650, the upper frame lamp cover 613 is fixed to the upper frame right cover attachment portion 652.

The right frame board mounting portion 653 is the portion to which the right frame lamp board 621 is mounted, and is provided on the right side of the front surface of the right base member 650 as shown in Figures 120 and 124.
124, the right frame board attachment portion 653 is provided with board support ribs 661b-e shaped to follow the outer periphery of the right frame lamp board 621. These board support ribs 661b-e are for supporting the right frame lamp board 621. When the right frame lamp board 621 is placed in a predetermined position on the right frame board attachment portion 653, the outer periphery of the right frame lamp board 621 rests on the board support ribs 661b-e.

As shown in Figures 116, 117, 119, and 120, the right frame lamp board 621 is provided with a positioning hole 685b and a fixing hole 686b in close proximity to each other.
The positioning hole 685b is a hole into which a positioning boss is inserted when positioning the right frame lamp board 621 at a predetermined position on the right frame board mounting portion 653, and penetrates from one side surface to the other side surface of the right frame lamp board 621.
The fixing hole 686b is a hole used when fixing the right frame lamp board 621 to the right frame board mounting portion 653, and penetrates from one surface of the right frame lamp board 621 to the other surface.

Although not shown, a positioning boss is provided at a position on the right frame board mounting portion 653 corresponding to the positioning hole 685b, and a screw boss is provided at a position on the right frame board mounting portion 653 corresponding to the fixing hole 686b. When the positioning boss provided on the right frame board mounting portion 653 is inserted into the positioning hole 685b, the right frame lamp board 621 is positioned at a predetermined position on the right frame board mounting portion 653. When a screw is inserted into the fixing hole 686b from the mounting surface side of the right frame lamp board 621 on which the LEDs 641e-k are mounted, and the screw is screwed into the screw boss provided on the right frame board mounting portion 653, the right frame lamp board 621 is fixed to the right frame board mounting portion 653.
116, 117, 119, and 120, the positioning bosses and screws are omitted in order to make the positioning holes 685b and the fixing holes 686b easier to see.

119, in this embodiment, both the positioning hole 685b and the fixing hole 686b are formed in a circular shape. Furthermore, the inner diameter of the fixing hole 686b is set to be larger than the inner diameter of the positioning hole 685b. Therefore, the opening area of the fixing hole 686b is different from the opening area of the positioning hole 685b. Specifically, the opening area of the fixing hole 686b is set to be larger than the opening area of the positioning hole 685b.
This ensures that when fixing the right frame lamp board 621 to the right frame board mounting portion 653, the positioning hole 685b and the fixing hole 686b are not mixed up, allowing the assembly work to proceed smoothly.

The right frame cover mounting portion 654 is the portion to which the right frame lamp cover 622 is attached, and is provided on the front right side of the right base member 650 as shown in Figures 119, 120, and 124.
Further, a cover fitting groove 662b is provided in the right frame cover attachment portion 654. This cover fitting groove 662b is a groove into which the right edge of the right frame lamp cover 622 fits, and is formed along the right edge of the right base member 650.

Then, the right edge of the right frame lamp cover 622 is fitted into the cover fitting groove 662b and the right frame lamp cover 622 is screwed in place from the back side of the right base member 650, whereby the right frame lamp cover 622 is fixed to the right frame cover mounting portion 654, as shown in Figures 114 and 115.
As shown in Figures 118 and 125, the left edge (the edge on the game board 504 side) of the right frame lamp cover 622 is formed to cover the outside of the left edge (the edge on the game board 504 side) of the right base member 650.

As described above, the right frame lamp board 621 is formed in a vertically long, generally rectangular shape (see FIG. 116), and the right frame board attachment portion 653 is formed in a shape that follows the outer periphery of the right frame lamp board 621 (see FIG. 124). The width W1 (FIG. 116) in the short side direction of the right frame lamp board 621 is configured to be generally the same as the width W2 (FIG. 124) in the short side direction of the right frame board attachment portion 653.
That is, when the width in the short side direction of the right frame lamp board 621 is "W1" and the width in the short side direction of the right frame board attachment part 653 is "W2", they are set so that "W1 ≈ W2" is satisfied. In this way, the right frame lamp board 621 covers the right frame board attachment part 653.

The entire mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the right frame lamp board 621 is made up of white color, and by covering the right frame board mounting portion 653 with such a right frame lamp board 621, the entire mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the right frame lamp board 621 can function as a reflector, thereby making the color of the light-emitting element appear beautiful.
Note that "substantially rectangular" means "approximately rectangular in shape." Therefore, as long as the shape is approximately rectangular, for example, the long or short sides may have irregularities along the way, the long or short sides may be curved or inclined in whole or in part, and the corners may not be right angles, and may be rounded. Also, "substantially rectangular" is a concept that includes "rectangle."

The right frame board attachment portion 653 is formed in a shape that follows the outer peripheral edge of the right frame lamp board 621, and the right frame cover attachment portion 654 is formed in a shape that follows the outer peripheral edge of the right frame board attachment portion 653. The edge of the right frame lamp cover 622 on the right frame cover attachment portion 654 side is formed in a shape that follows the outer peripheral edge of the right frame lamp board 621.
For this reason, when the right frame lamp board 621 is attached to the right frame board attachment portion 653 and the right frame lamp cover 622 is attached to the right frame cover attachment portion 654, the entire interior of the right frame lamp cover 622 appears to be covered by the right frame lamp board 621. Therefore, even if the molding color of the right base member 650 is not white (for example, even if it is black), the entire interior of the right frame lamp cover 622 appears white, so that the light-emitting element appears to emit light beautifully.

115, a lens portion 670 is provided in the right frame lamp cover 622 at a position facing the right frame lamp substrate 621. As shown in Figures 126(a) and 126(b), the lens portion 670 is configured by connecting curved surfaces having different curvatures but the same thickness.
126(a) shows a partial cross-sectional view of the lens portion 670 of the right frame lamp cover 622, and FIG. 126(b) shows another partial cross-sectional view of the lens portion 670 of the right frame lamp cover 622. FIG.

As shown in Figures 126(a) and (b), the lens portion 670 has the same thickness at every location, but the curvature differs depending on the location.
In this way, by making the shape of the lens portion 670 a shape that connects curved surfaces with different curvatures but the same thickness, the manufacturing cost of the mold that forms the right frame lamp cover 622 can be reduced while making the light emitted by the light-emitting element appear beautiful.
In addition, the upper frame lamp cover 613 and the left frame lamp cover 632 also have a lens portion facing the lamp substrate, and the shape of the lens portion is a combination of curved surfaces with different curvatures but the same thickness, similar to the right frame lamp cover 622.

Also, as explained in the 19th embodiment (B), the pachinko game machine 500 is equipped with a main control board (main board, main control board) 530 corresponding to the main control board 50 of the slot machine 10, a sub-control board (presentation control board, presentation board) 540 corresponding to the sub-control board 80 of the slot machine 10, and a payout control board (prize ball control board) 520.
The main control board 530 controls the progress of the game, the sub-control board 540 controls the output of the presentation, and the payout control board 520 controls the operation of the payout device 524. All of these control boards are connected to each other by harnesses.

In addition, the sub-control board 540 is connected to the upper frame right side lamp board 611, the upper frame left side lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 by harnesses.
The sub-control board 540 controls the light emission of the light-emitting elements mounted on these lamp boards.
In addition, connectors mounted on these lamp boards are used for harness connection between the sub-control board 540 and these lamp boards.

Specifically, the sub-control board 540 is connected to the main control board 530, determines the content of the performance based on commands transmitted from the main control board 530, and controls the output of the determined performance. At this time, the sub-control board 540 controls the emission of light-emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right side lamp board 611, the upper frame left side lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631.
The sub-control board 540 includes a sub-main board that controls the overall performance, and a sub-sub board that controls the image display of the image display device 23 .

As explained in the 19th embodiment (B), the main control board 530 is connected to a start hole switch 533 for detecting that a game ball has entered a start hole 532 provided in the game area of the game board 504 (see FIG. 99). When a game ball enters the start hole 532 and detects that the start hole switch 533 is turned on, the main control board 530 acquires a random number value, executes various lotteries based on the acquired random number value, and starts the variable display of special symbols on the special symbol display device 531. Then, based on the results of the various lotteries, the main control board 530 determines the variable time and stop symbols of the special symbols on the special symbol display device 531, and controls the display of the special symbols on the special symbol display device 531 in accordance with the determination.

Specifically, the main control board 530 continues to determine whether or not a game ball has entered the start hole 532 (the start hole switch 533 has been turned on) (step S741 in FIG. 102). When it is determined that the start hole switch 533 has been turned on, the main control board 530 acquires a random number value, and executes a jackpot lottery (lottery for a jackpot or a loss), a special symbol lottery (lottery for which symbol the special symbol will stop), and a variation pattern lottery (lottery for the time to vary the special symbol) based on the acquired random number value (step S742 in FIG. 102).
Furthermore, when the main control board 530 executes the above-mentioned various lotteries, it transmits commands indicating at least a part of the lottery results to the sub-control board 540. Then, when the sub-control board 540 receives the commands indicating the lottery results, it controls the performance lamp 541, the speaker 542, and the image display device 543 so as to correspond to the lottery results.

Specifically, when a jackpot is reached in the jackpot lottery, the main control board 530 transmits a command indicating that a jackpot has been reached (jackpot command) to the sub-control board 540 .
Then, when the sub-control board 540 receives a jackpot command, it causes the light-emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right side lamp board 611, the upper frame left side lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 to emit light in an emission pattern corresponding to a jackpot.
In addition, as a light emission pattern corresponding to a jackpot, the output values of the red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light emitting elements are changed in a predetermined pattern within a range of "0" to "255." This allows the light emitting elements to emit light in so-called rainbow colors, and the player can be informed that he or she has won the jackpot in the jackpot lottery.

Furthermore, lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 are formed from a colorless, translucent resin, and the entire mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp board such as the upper frame right side lamp board 611 is made of white color, so that the light-emitting element can be made to emit light in rainbow colors when a jackpot is hit, thereby making the color of the light-emitting element look beautiful.
When a jackpot is reached, the light-emitting elements mounted on one or more of the lamp boards may be caused to emit light in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the jackpot. Therefore, only the light-emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612 may be caused to emit light in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the jackpot, or the light-emitting elements mounted on all of the lamp boards may be caused to emit light in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the jackpot.

In addition, when a jackpot is reached, the light-emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612 may be made to emit light in an emission pattern corresponding to the jackpot, and the light-emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp board 621 and the left frame lamp board 631 may be made to emit white light.
In addition, by setting the output values of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light-emitting element to "255", the light-emitting element can be made to emit white light.

As described in the 19th embodiment (B), a door opening switch 522 and a frame opening switch 523 are electrically connected to the dispensing control board 520 (see Figure 99).
When the glass door 505 is opened, the door opening switch 522 is turned on, and the signal is input to the dispensing control board 520 and further transmitted to the main control board 530. When the main control board 530 detects that the door opening switch 522 is on, it transmits a command (door opening command) indicating that the door opening switch 522 is on to the sub-control board 540.
When the sub-control board 540 receives a door open command, it controls the light-emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right side lamp board 611, the upper frame left side lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 to emit white light.

Furthermore, when the front frame 502 is opened, the frame opening switch 523 is turned on, and the signal is input to the dispensing control board 520 and further transmitted to the main control board 530. When the main control board 530 detects that the frame opening switch 523 is on, it transmits a command (frame opening command) indicating that the frame opening switch 523 is on to the sub-control board 540.
When the sub-control board 540 receives the frame open command, it controls the light-emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right side lamp board 611, the upper frame left side lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 to emit white light.

As described above, by setting the red (R), green (G), and blue (B) output values of the light-emitting element to "255," the light-emitting element can be made to emit white light.
In addition, when it is detected that the door opening switch 522 or the frame opening switch 523 is on, the light-emitting elements mounted on the lamp boards such as the upper frame right side lamp board 611 emit white light, thereby notifying the hall staff that the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is open.

Furthermore, lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 are made of a colorless, translucent resin, and the entire mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp board such as the upper frame right side lamp board 611 is made of white, so that when the light-emitting element emits white light, it stands out, making it easier for the hall staff to notice that the glass door 505 or front frame 502 is open.

When the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is open, the light-emitting elements mounted on one or more of the lamp boards may be made to emit white light. Therefore, only the light-emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp board 621 and the left frame lamp board 631 may be made to emit white light, or the light-emitting elements mounted on all of the lamp boards may be made to emit white light.
Furthermore, when the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is open, the light emitting element may be made to blink in a predetermined pattern corresponding to the opening of the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 .

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 500, when the game ball enters the start hole 532 and the start hole switch 533 is detected as being on, the main control board 530 obtains a random number value and, based on the obtained random number value, executes a jackpot lottery (a lottery for a jackpot or a loss), a special symbol lottery (a lottery for which symbol the special symbol will stop in), and a variation pattern lottery (a lottery for the time at which the special symbol will be displayed in a variable manner), and starts the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display device 531.

In addition, the main control board 530 determines the variation time and stopping pattern of the special pattern on the special pattern display device 531 based on the results of the various lotteries described above, and controls the display of the special pattern on the special pattern display device 531 in accordance with that determination.
In the pachinko game machine 500, one game begins when the game ball enters the start hole 532 and the start hole switch 533 is detected as being on, and one game ends when the varying display of the special pattern on the special pattern display device 531 ends and the special pattern is displayed as a static pattern.

Furthermore, when the main control board 530 executes the above-mentioned various lotteries, it transmits commands indicating at least a part of the lottery results to the sub-control board 540. Then, when the sub-control board 540 receives the commands indicating the lottery results, it controls the performance lamp 541, the speaker 542, and the image display device 543 so as to correspond to the lottery results.
Specifically, when the jackpot lottery results in a loss, the main control board 530 transmits a command (loss command) indicating the loss to the sub-control board 540 .

In addition, when the sub-control board 540 receives a loss command, it executes a lottery for the presentation pattern in the event of a loss (a lottery to determine whether presentation pattern 1 or presentation pattern 2 will be used).
The sub-control board 540 then controls the light-emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right side lamp board 611, the upper frame left side lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the results of the presentation pattern lottery, and also controls the red LED mounted on the decorative board on the game board 504 to emit light.

Figures 127 (a) and (b) show the presentation patterns when the jackpot lottery results in a miss, with (a) being a time chart showing presentation pattern 1 when the jackpot lottery results in a miss, and (b) being a time chart showing presentation pattern 2 when the jackpot lottery results in a miss.
In Figures 127 (a) and (b), "LED1" indicates LEDs 641e to 641k (all full-color LEDs) mounted on the right frame lamp board 621, and "LED2" indicates LEDs 641a to 641d (all full-color LEDs) mounted on the upper frame right side lamp board 611.

In addition, in Figures 127(a) and (b), "LED3" indicates one red LED mounted on a board provided for the decoration on the game board 504, and "LED4" indicates another red LED mounted on a board provided for the decoration on the game board 504. The mounting surface of the red LED on the board provided for the decoration on the game board 504 is composed of green.

In this embodiment, when presentation pattern 1 is determined and when presentation pattern 2 is determined, the variation time of the special symbol is set to 10 seconds.
127(a), when the effect pattern 1 is determined, the LED1 (LEDs 641e to 641k mounted on the right frame lamp board 621) lights up (ON) at the same time as the special symbol starts to change, and goes out (OFF) before the special symbol ends to change. In the effect pattern 1, the lighting time of the LED1 is set to 6 seconds.

127(a), when the effect pattern 1 is determined, the LED 2 (the LEDs 641a to 641d mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611) lights up after the start of the special symbol variation, and goes out before the end of the special symbol variation, simultaneously with the turning off of the LED 1. In the effect pattern 1, the lighting time of the LED 2 is set to 1 second.
127(a), when presentation pattern 1 is selected, LED3 (a red LED mounted on a board of the decoration on the game board 504) lights up after the special symbols start to change and goes out before the special symbols stop changing. In presentation pattern 1, the lighting time of LED3 is set to 2 seconds.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 127(a), when presentation pattern 1 is selected, LED4 (another red LED mounted on a board provided in the decoration on the game board 504) lights up at the same time as LED3 lights up after the special symbol starts to change, and goes out at the same time as LED2 lights up before the special symbol stops changing. Also, in presentation pattern 1, the lighting time of LED4 is set to 3 seconds.

127(b), when presentation pattern 2 is selected, LED1 is turned on simultaneously with the start of the variation of the special symbols and is turned off before the variation of the special symbols ends, in the same way as when presentation pattern 1 is selected. Also, in presentation pattern 2, as in presentation pattern 1, the lighting time of LED1 is set to 6 seconds.
127(b), when presentation pattern 2 is selected, LED 2 does not light up, unlike when presentation pattern 1 is selected. Therefore, in presentation pattern 2, the lighting time of LED 2 is 0 seconds.

127(b), when the effect pattern 2 is selected, the LED 3 is turned on after the special symbol starts to vary and is turned off before the special symbol ends to vary, simultaneously with the turning off of the LED 1. In the effect pattern 2, the lighting time of the LED 3 is set to 4 seconds.
127(b), when the effect pattern 2 is selected, the LED 4 is turned on after the special symbol starts to vary and at the same time as the LED 3, and is turned off before the special symbol ends to vary and before the LED 3 is turned off. Also, in the effect pattern 2, as in the effect pattern 1, the lighting time of the LED 4 is set to 3 seconds.

In this manner, in this embodiment, in a game in which the jackpot lottery is lost, either presentation pattern 1 or presentation pattern 2 is determined by a presentation pattern lottery, and the illumination of LED1 to LED4 is controlled according to the determined presentation pattern.
Furthermore, LED 1 is turned on (emits light) for six seconds regardless of whether presentation pattern 1 or presentation pattern 2 is selected.
Therefore, the average time for which the LED 1 is turned on (emitted light) in a game in which the jackpot lottery is lost is 6 seconds.

As for LED 2, when presentation pattern 1 is selected, it is lit for one second, and when presentation pattern 2 is selected, it is not lit.
Therefore, in a game in which the big win lottery is lost, the average time for which the LED 3 is turned on is 1 second or less.
Furthermore, when performance pattern 1 is selected, LED 3 is turned on for two seconds, and when performance pattern 2 is selected, LED 3 is turned on for four seconds.
Therefore, in a game in which the big win lottery is lost, the average time for which the LED 4 is turned on is 2 seconds or more and 4 seconds or less.

Furthermore, LED 4 is turned on (emits light) for three seconds regardless of whether presentation pattern 1 or presentation pattern 2 is selected.
Therefore, the average time for which the LED 4 is turned on in a game in which the jackpot lottery is lost is 3 seconds.
From the above, the average time for which LED1 is turned on in a game resulting in a loss in the jackpot lottery is set to be longer than the average time for which LED2 to LED4 are turned on in a game resulting in a loss in the jackpot lottery.

As described above, the entire mounting surface of the LEDs 641e to 641k on the right frame lamp board 621 is constructed in white, and the right frame lamp cover 622 is formed from a colorless, translucent resin. This allows the light emitted by the LEDs 1 (the LEDs 641e to 641k mounted on the right frame lamp board 621) to be clearly visible, so that a beautiful presentation using the LEDs 1 can be seen even in a game that does not result in a jackpot lottery.

Although the twenty-third embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described content, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the twenty-third embodiment, the lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 are formed from a colorless, light-transmitting resin. However, this is not limited to this.
The lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 may have any colorless or white light-transmitting portion.

Therefore, a lamp cover such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 may be, for example, entirely colorless and translucent, or entirely white and translucent.
Furthermore, in lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 613, for example, only the portion corresponding to the front of the light-emitting element is colorless and translucent, and the other portions may be colored, such as red or blue, and translucent, or may not be translucent.
Furthermore, lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 may, for example, have only the portion corresponding to the front of the light-emitting element be white and translucent, and the other portions may be colored, such as red or blue, and translucent, or may not be translucent.

Furthermore, all or part of the lamp cover such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 may be configured to be visible in a color that is substantially the same as or similar to one of the emission colors of the full-color LED serving as the light-emitting means.
Specifically, for example, the LEDs 641e to 641k of the right frame lamp board 621 can be made to emit light in blue (red (R) output value "0", green (G) output value "0", blue (B) output value "255"), and the entire right frame lamp cover 622 can be made of blue resin that appears approximately the same color as when the LEDs 641e to 641k emit the above-mentioned blue light, or blue resin that appears a similar color to the above-mentioned blue.

Due to manufacturing errors, the color of the right frame lamp cover 622 may be the same as the emitted color when, for example, the red (R) output value is "0", the green (G) output value is "0", and the blue (B) output value is "250", or it may be the same as the emitted color when the red (R) output value is "5", the green (G) output value is "5", and the blue (B) output value is "255".
Taking this into consideration, the term "substantially the same color" is used.
The term "substantially the same color" includes the concept of "the same color." Furthermore, the term "substantially the same color" includes colors that are not completely the same color, but that appear to be the same color.
FIG. 128 is a diagram for explaining approximately the same color using a chromaticity diagram according to the CIE (International Commission on Illumination) standard color system (XYZ color system).
FIG. 128 uses blue as an example to show a range of colors that are "almost the same color" as blue.
In FIG. 128, the black circle indicates blue (red (R) output value "0", green (G) output value "0", blue (B) output value "255"), and the circle around the black circle indicates an example of a range of "almost the same color" as blue.

Moreover, the term "similar colors" is a concept that does not include the target color, but includes colors close to the target color.
FIG. 129 is a diagram for explaining similar colors using a chromaticity diagram according to the CIE standard color system.
FIG. 129 uses blue as an example to show the range of "similar colors" to blue.
In FIG. 129, the white circle indicates the color blue (red (R) output value "0", green (G) output value "0", blue (B) output value "255"), and the hatched circle surrounding the white circle indicates an example of the range of "similar colors" of blue.

Furthermore, the range of "similar colors" to blue is not limited to the range of the hatched circle in Figure 129, and can be any range that an average player would recognize as blue.
For example, in the chromaticity diagram based on the CIE standard color system shown in Figure 129, the range from 0 to 0.2 on the x-axis and from 0 to 0.3 on the y-axis is the range that an average player would recognize as blue, and therefore can be considered the range of "similar colors" to blue.

The same applies to the range of "similar colors" other than blue.
For example, in the chromaticity diagram based on the CIE standard color system shown in Figure 129, the range from 0 to 0.3 on the x-axis and 0.6 or above on the y-axis is the range that an average player would recognize as green, and therefore can be considered the range of "similar colors" to green.
Also, for example, in the chromaticity diagram based on the CIE standard color system shown in Figure 129, the range of 0.5 or more on the x-axis and 0.2 to 0.4 on the y-axis is the range that an average player would recognize as red, and therefore can be considered the range of "similar colors" to red.

In addition, in the 23rd embodiment, the mounting surface of the light-emitting element (light-emitting means) on a lamp board such as the upper frame right side lamp board 611 is configured entirely in white, but it is sufficient if at least a portion of it is configured in approximately white.
For example, on the mounting surface of the upper frame right lamp board 611 on which the LEDs 641a to 641d are mounted, the periphery of the LEDs 641a to 641d may be substantially white, and the outer periphery of the upper frame right lamp board 611 may be black.
The term "substantially white" is a concept that includes "white." Also, the term "substantially white" is a concept that includes colors that are not completely white but appear to be white.

Even if at least a portion of the lamp cover is configured to be visible in approximately the same or similar color as the light emitted by the light-emitting means, by configuring at least a portion of the mounting surface of the light-emitting means on the lamp board in approximately white, it is possible to prevent the mounting surface of the light-emitting means on the lamp board from looking bad even when seen through the lamp cover, and it is possible to make the color of the light-emitting means look beautiful, and furthermore, when the light-emitting means is emitting light, it can be seen to emit the color as set.

(2) In the twenty-third embodiment, the opening area of the fixing hole 686a is set to be larger than the opening area of the positioning hole 685a. However, this is not limited to the above.
For example, the opening area of the fixing hole 686a may be set to be smaller than the opening area of the positioning hole 685a.
Fig. 130 is a diagram showing a modified example of the cross section taken along line A-A in Fig. 119, and corresponds to Fig. 123. As shown in Fig. 130, the diameter of the positioning boss 682a may be set to be larger than the inner diameter of the fixing hole 686a. In this case, the opening area of the fixing hole 686a becomes smaller than the opening area of the positioning hole 685a, and the positioning boss 682a cannot be inserted into the fixing hole 686a. Even in this way, it is possible to prevent the positioning hole 685a from being confused with the fixing hole 686a.

(3) In the twenty-third embodiment, the positioning hole 685a is formed in an oval shape. However, the shape is not limited to this and may be, for example, a circle.
(4) In the twenty-third embodiment, the head 689 of the screw 683a is plated with silver as a surface treatment for reflecting the light emitted from the LEDs 641a to 641d, but this is not limited to the above. The head 689 of the screw 683a may be painted white as a surface treatment for reflecting the light emitted from the LEDs 641a to 641d.

(5) In the 23rd embodiment, the upper frame lamp section 610 has two lamp substrates, an upper frame right side lamp substrate 611 and an upper frame left side lamp substrate 612. However, this is not limited to this and, for example, it may have only one lamp substrate, or it may have three or more lamp substrates.
In addition, the upper frame lamp cover 613 may be a single integrally formed member, or may be composed of three members, for example, a first member (upper frame right side member) located in the right side portion, a second member (upper frame central member) located in the central portion, and a third member (upper frame left side member) located in the left side portion.

(6) In the twenty-third embodiment, the right frame lamp unit 620 includes only one lamp substrate, the right frame lamp substrate 621. However, the present invention is not limited to this and may include two or more lamp substrates.
In addition, the right frame lamp cover 622 may be a single integrally formed member, or may be composed of two members, for example, a first member (right frame upper member) located in the upper portion and a second member (right frame lower member) located in the lower portion.

(7) In the twenty-third embodiment, the left frame lamp unit 630 includes only one lamp substrate, the left frame lamp substrate 631. However, the present invention is not limited to this and may include two or more lamp substrates.
That is, as described in the 23rd embodiment and variants (5) to (7), the upper frame lamp section 610, the right frame lamp section 620, and the left frame lamp section 630 may each be provided with only one lamp substrate, or may be provided with multiple lamp substrates.
In addition, the left frame lamp cover 632 may be a single integrally formed member, or may be composed of two members, for example, a first member (left frame upper member) located in the upper portion and a second member (left frame lower member) located in the lower portion.

In addition, for example, an upper frame right side lamp board 611 and an upper frame left side lamp board 612 may be attached to the upper front upper part of the glass door 505, and an upper frame lamp cover 613 may be attached to cover the upper frame right side lamp board 611 and the upper frame left side lamp board 612 to form the upper frame lamp section 610.
Similarly, a right frame lamp board 621 may be attached to the front right side of the glass door 505, and a right frame lamp cover 622 may be attached to cover the right frame lamp board 621 to form a right frame lamp unit 620, and a left frame lamp board 631 may be attached to the front left side of the glass door 505, and a left frame lamp cover 632 may be attached to cover the left frame lamp board 631 to form a left frame lamp unit 630.

That is, the performance lamp (decorative lamp section) 541 such as the right frame lamp section 620 may be unitized, but the performance lamp 541 may also be configured by directly attaching a lamp board such as the right frame lamp board 621 to a predetermined position on the glass door 505 and directly attaching a lamp cover such as the right frame lamp cover 622 to cover the lamp board.

(8) In the twenty-third embodiment, when it is detected that the door opening switch 522 or the frame opening switch 523 is turned on, a light-emitting element mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611, etc. is made to emit white light to notify a hall attendant that the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 has been opened.
However, this is not limited to the above, and for example, when in a setting change state or setting confirmation state, a light-emitting element mounted on the lamp board 611 on the right side of the upper frame can be made to emit white light to inform the hall staff that the device is being controlled to the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

Here, although the explanation will overlap with the 19th embodiment (B), the setting change state and the setting confirmation state will be explained.
As explained in the nineteenth embodiment (B), the main control board 530 is provided with a setting key switch 535 having a setting key insertion port 534, and a setting change (reset) switch 536 (see FIG. 99).

The setting key switch 535 is a switch that is turned on when a predetermined setting key is inserted through the setting key insertion port 534 and rotated clockwise by 90 degrees, for example.
The setting change (reset) switch 536 is a switch that functions both as a setting change switch and a reset switch. The setting change switch is a switch that is operated when changing a setting value during a setting change state. The reset switch is a switch that is operated when restoring the state before the error occurred after removing an error that has occurred.

In the pachinko gaming machine 500, when the power switch 511 is turned off (power off state), the setting key switch 535 and the reset switch 536 are turned on, and in this state, when the power switch 511 is turned on, the machine transitions to a setting change state.
Specifically, when the power switch 511 is turned on, the main control board 530 determines whether the frame open switch 523 is on, the setting key switch 535 is on, and the reset switch 536 is on (step S701 in FIG. 100).
Then, when it is determined that the frame open switch 523 is on, the setting key switch 535 is on, and the reset switch 536 is on ("Yes" in step S701 of FIG. 100), the process transitions to a setting change state (step S702 of FIG. 100).

When the state shifts to the setting change state, the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED.
In addition, in the setting change state, the setting value is incremented by "+1" each time the setting change switch 536 is operated. In this embodiment, the setting value has six stages, from setting 1 to setting 6, and in the setting change state, each time the setting change switch 536 is operated, the setting value changes cyclically from "1" → "2" → ... → "5" → "6" → "1" → ....
Then, when the setting key switch 535 is turned off, the set value is confirmed and the setting change state ends.

Moreover, when the power switch 511 is turned off and the setting key switch 535 is turned on, and the power switch 511 is turned on with the reset switch 536 in the off state, the state transitions to a setting confirmation state.
Specifically, when the main control board 530 determines that the conditions for transitioning to the setting change state are not met when the power switch 511 is turned on ("No" in step S701 of FIG. 100), it then determines whether the frame open switch 523 is on, the setting key switch 535 is on, and the reset switch 536 is off (step S703 of FIG. 100).

Then, when it is determined that the frame open switch 523 is on, the setting key switch 535 is on, and the reset switch 536 is off ("Yes" in step S703 of Figure 100), the process moves to a setting confirmation state (step S704 of Figure 100).
In the setting confirmation state, the setting value cannot be changed, but the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED, making it possible to check the current setting value.
Then, when the setting key switch 535 is turned off, the setting confirmation state ends.

Also, when the setting change state is entered, the main control board 530 transmits a command (setting change start command) to the sub-control board 540 indicating that the setting change state has been entered.
Then, when the sub-control board 540 receives the setting change start command, it controls the light-emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right side lamp board 611, the upper frame left side lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 to emit white light.

Furthermore, when the setting change state ends, the main control board 530 sends a command indicating the end of the setting change state (setting change end command) to the sub-control board 540.
Then, when the sub-control board 540 receives the setting change end command, it ends the control of causing the light-emitting element to emit white light.
As a result, the light emitting element continues to emit white light while the setting change state (step S702 in FIG. 100) continues, and when the setting change state ends, the light emitting element stops emitting white light.

Also, when the main control board 530 transitions to the setting confirmation state, the main control board 530 transmits a command (setting confirmation start command) to the sub-control board 540 indicating that the main control board 530 has transitioned to the setting confirmation state.
When the sub-control board 540 receives the setting confirmation start command, it controls the light-emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right side lamp board 611, the upper frame left side lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 to emit white light.

Furthermore, when the setting confirmation state ends, the main control board 530 sends a command indicating the end of the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation end command) to the sub-control board 540.
Then, when the sub-control board 540 receives the setting confirmation end command, it ends the control of causing the light-emitting element to emit white light.
As a result, the light emitting element continues to emit white light while the setting confirmation state (step S704 in FIG. 100) continues, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the light emitting element stops emitting white light.

As described above, by setting the red (R), green (G), and blue (B) output values of the light-emitting element to "255," the light-emitting element can be made to emit white light.
In addition, by making the light-emitting elements mounted on lamp boards such as the lamp board 611 on the right side of the upper frame emit white light when in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, it is possible to inform the hall staff that the device is being controlled to the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

Furthermore, lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 are made of a colorless, translucent resin, and the entire mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp board such as the upper frame right side lamp board 611 is made of white, so that when the light-emitting element is made to emit white light, it stands out, making it easier for hall staff to notice that the setting has been changed or the setting has been confirmed.

When the lamp is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the light-emitting elements mounted on one or more of the lamp boards may be made to emit white light. Therefore, only the light-emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp board 621 and the left frame lamp board 631 may be made to emit white light, or the light-emitting elements mounted on all of the lamp boards may be made to emit white light.

When the device is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the light emitting element may be caused to blink in a predetermined pattern corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.
Furthermore, when the light-emitting element is made to blink when the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is open and when it is controlled to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, the blinking pattern of the light-emitting element can be made different when the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is open and when it is controlled to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state.

Furthermore, the condition for transitioning to the setting change state is not limited to turning on the setting key switch 535 and the reset switch 536 with the power switch 511 turned off, and then turning on the power switch 511 in this state.
For example, the condition for transitioning to the setting change state may be to turn on the setting key switch 535 with the power switch 511 turned off, and then turn on the power switch 511 in this state. In other words, the condition for transitioning to the setting change state may not be that the reset switch 536 is turned on.

Furthermore, the condition for transitioning to the setting confirmation state is not limited to turning on the power switch 511 with the power switch 511 turned off, turning on the setting key switch 535, and turning on the power switch 511 with the reset switch 536 turned off.
For example, the condition for transitioning to the setting confirmation state may be that the power switch 511 is on and the setting key switch 535 is on.

(9) In the twenty-third embodiment, when it is detected that the door opening switch 522 or the frame opening switch 523 is turned on, a light-emitting element mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611, etc. is made to emit white light to notify the hall staff that the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 has been opened.
In addition, in the above-mentioned modified example (8), when in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the light-emitting element mounted on the lamp board 611 on the right side of the upper frame, etc., is made to emit white light to inform the hall staff that the device is being controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.
However, this is not limited to the above. For example, when the power is restored after a power outage, the light-emitting element mounted on the lamp board 611 on the right side of the upper frame can be made to emit white light to inform the hall staff that the power is being restored after the power outage.

As described in the 19th embodiment (B), in the pachinko gaming machine 500, when the power switch 511 is turned on (when recovering from a power outage), the processing according to the flowchart shown in Fig. 100 is executed. Fig. 100 is a flowchart showing the flow of the processing when recovering from a power outage.
When the power switch 511 is turned off (power off), the main control board 530 stores information about the power off in the RWM.
Also, when the power switch 511 is turned on (when recovering from a power outage), the main control board 530 determines whether the information at the time of recovery from a power outage matches the information at the time of power outage (step S707 in FIG. 100).

If the information at the time of recovery from power outage matches the information at the time of power outage, it is determined that the RWM is normal ("Yes" in step S707 of FIG. 100), and status recovery processing is executed (step S708 of FIG. 100).
On the other hand, if the information when the power is restored from the power outage does not match the information when the power was out, it is determined that there is an RWM abnormality ("No" in step S707 of FIG. 100), and the RWM clear process is executed (step S709 of FIG. 100).

In addition, the state restoration process (step S708 in FIG. 100) is a process for restoring the solenoid state, the state of the special symbol display device 531, etc. to the state when the power was turned off.
Furthermore, the RWM clear process (step S709 in FIG. 100) is a process for clearing data stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM (a process for initializing the predetermined storage area). When the setting change process (step S702 in FIG. 100) is executed or when it is determined that an RWM abnormality exists ("No" in step S707 in FIG. 100), the RWM clear process is executed.

Furthermore, when the setting confirmation state ends, or when the state restoration process (step S708 in FIG. 100) is executed, or when the RWM clear process (step S709 in FIG. 100) is executed, a process to enable a timer interrupt (step S710 in FIG. 100) is then executed.
Then, when the process for enabling the timer interrupt is executed, the series of processes executed when the power is restored from a power interruption is completed.

In addition, when the power switch 511 is turned on (when recovering from a power outage), the main control board 530 sends a command (power recovery start command) to the sub-control board 540 indicating that power has recovered from the power outage.
Then, when the sub-control board 540 receives the power recovery start command, it controls the light-emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right side lamp board 611, the upper frame left side lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 to emit white light.

Furthermore, when the process to allow the timer interrupt is executed, the main control board 530 sends a command (power recovery end command) to the sub-control board 540 indicating that the series of processes to be executed when recovering from a power outage have been completed.
Then, when the sub-control board 540 receives the power recovery end command, it ends the control of causing the light-emitting element to emit white light.
As a result, the light-emitting element continues to emit white light while the series of processes executed when recovering from a power outage are being executed, and when the series of processes executed when recovering from a power outage are completed, the light-emitting element stops emitting white light.

As described above, by setting the red (R), green (G), and blue (B) output values of the light-emitting element to "255," the light-emitting element can be made to emit white light.
In addition, when the power is restored after a power outage, the light-emitting elements mounted on lamp boards such as the lamp board 611 on the right side of the upper frame can be made to emit white light, thereby informing the hall staff that the power is being restored after a power outage.

Furthermore, lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 are formed from a colorless, translucent resin, and the entire mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp board such as the upper frame right side lamp board 611 is made of white color, so that when the light-emitting element emits white light, it stands out, making it easier for hall staff to notice that the power is being restored after a power outage.
During recovery from a power outage, the light-emitting elements mounted on one or more of the lamp boards may be made to emit white light. Therefore, only the light-emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp board 621 and the left frame lamp board 631 may be made to emit white light, or the light-emitting elements mounted on all of the lamp boards may be made to emit white light.

During recovery from a power outage, the light emitting element may be caused to blink in a predetermined pattern corresponding to recovery from a power outage.
Furthermore, when the light-emitting element is made to blink when the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is open, when it is controlled to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, and during recovery from a power outage, the blinking pattern of the light-emitting element can be made different when the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is open, when it is controlled to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, and during recovery from a power outage.

(10) In the 23rd embodiment and modified examples (8) to (9), when the door opening switch 522 or the frame opening switch 523 is detected as being on, when the device is controlled to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, or when the device is recovering from a power outage, the light-emitting element mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611 or the like is illuminated in white light to notify the hall staff that the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is open, that the device is controlled to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, or that the device is recovering from a power outage.

However, the color of the light emitted by the light-emitting elements is not limited to white. For example, when it is detected that the door open switch 522 or the frame open switch 523 is on, when it is controlled to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, or when it returns from a power outage, the light-emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611, etc. may be made to emit light in a color that is not emitted during normal play.

An example of a color that is not emitted during normal play is a specific red color. An example of a specific red color is the red color emitted by the light-emitting element when the output value of red (R) is set to "255" and the output values of green (G) and blue (B) are each set to "0". This type of red color is not emitted during normal play, and emitting light from the light-emitting element in this red color is conspicuous, making it easier for the hall staff to notice that the glass door 505 or front frame 502 is open, that the machine is in a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, or that the machine is recovering from a power outage.

(11) In the 23rd embodiment, a performance lamp (decorative lamp section) 541 in which the mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp substrate is configured in white was described using the example of the gaming machine being a pachinko gaming machine 500. However, the 23rd embodiment can also be applied when the gaming machine is a slot machine 10.
FIG. 131 is an external perspective view of a slot machine 10 in a modified example of the twenty-third embodiment, as viewed from the front side (player side).
The following description partially overlaps with that of the seventh embodiment (FIG. 22), but will be explained again.

As shown in FIG. 131, the slot machine 10 comprises a box-shaped cabinet 13 with an opening on the front side, and a front door 12 attached so as to be able to open and close the opening on the front side of the cabinet 13.
Furthermore, a door sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the front door 12 is provided at a predetermined position of the cabinet 13. When the front door 12 is opened, the door sensor is turned on, thereby detecting that the front door 12 is opened.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 22 of the seventh embodiment, a pattern display device 14 having three reels 31 arranged in a row is arranged inside the cabinet 13, and a main control board 50 housed in a main board case 56 is arranged inside the cabinet 13 at a position corresponding to above the pattern display device 14.
The main control board 50 controls the progress of the game, and includes an input port 51, an output port 52, a RWM 53, a ROM 54, and a main CPU 55. In addition, the main control board 50 is electrically connected to a door sensor, a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a symbol display device 14, a sub-control board 80, and the like via the input port 51 or the output port 52.

A transparent display window (not shown) is provided in the center of the front door 12. This display window is disposed in a position corresponding to the front of the symbol display device 14. This allows the three symbols on each reel 31 of the symbol display device 14 to be seen from the front side of the slot machine 10 through the display window.
Further, on the front side (player side) of the front door 12, below the display window, there are arranged a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a settlement switch 43, a medal insertion slot 47, etc.

Furthermore, an image display device 23 is located at the top of the front side (player side) of the front door 12, and performance lamps (decorative lamp units) 21 are attached to the top, right side, and left side of the front door 12.
Furthermore, a sub-control board 80 housed in a sub-board case 87 is disposed at the upper part of the rear side of the front door 12 , at a position corresponding to the rear side of the image display device 23 .

The sub-control board 80 controls the effects, and includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub-CPU 85, etc. The sub-control board 80 is also electrically connected to the effect lamps 21, the speaker 22, the image display device 23, the main control board 50, etc. via the input port 81 or the output port 82. The sub-control board 80 then determines what effect to output and when based on the commands received from the main control board 50, and controls the output of the effect lamps 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23 according to the determination.

As shown in FIG. 131 , the performance lamp (decorative lamp section) 21 includes an upper frame lamp section 26 arranged along the upper front edge of the front door 12, a right frame lamp section 27 arranged along the right front edge of the front door 12, and a left frame lamp section 28 arranged along the left front edge of the front door 12.
That is, the upper frame lamp portion 26 is a decorative lamp portion that is formed horizontally from near the right end to near the left end of the upper front surface of the front door 12 .
The right frame lamp portion 27 is a decorative lamp portion that is formed vertically long from near the upper end to near the lower end of the front right side of the front door 12.
Furthermore, the left frame lamp portion 28 is a decorative lamp portion that is formed vertically long from near the upper end to near the lower end of the left front side of the front door 12.

As shown in FIG. 131, the upper frame lamp section 26 includes an upper frame lamp board 26a and an upper frame lamp cover 26b.
The upper frame lamp board 26a is a lamp board on which are mounted light-emitting elements for illuminating the upper frame lamp section 26 and a connector to which a harness for transmitting control signals to the light-emitting elements is connected, and is positioned at the upper front part of the front door 12 with the mounting surface of the light-emitting elements facing the front side (player side).
The upper frame lamp board 26a is formed in a horizontally elongated shape extending from near the right end to near the left end of the upper front surface of the front door 12.

Furthermore, although not shown, eight LEDs are mounted as light-emitting elements on the upper frame lamp board 26a. All of these eight LEDs are full-color LEDs.
Furthermore, the mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the upper frame lamp board 26a is configured in white. Specifically, similar to the example of the pachinko game machine 500 of the 23rd embodiment, a white coating film is formed on the entire mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the upper frame lamp board 26a. Also, the white coating film is formed by applying a white resist or by silk screen printing.

In addition, the upper frame lamp cover 26b is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the upper frame lamp board 26a, and is attached to the upper front part of the front door 12.
Furthermore, the upper frame lamp cover 26b has a horizontally elongated shape extending from near the right end to near the left end of the upper front surface of the front door 12, and is made of a colorless, translucent resin.
Furthermore, light emitted from the light-emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a is irradiated onto the upper frame lamp cover 26b.

As shown in FIG. 131, the right frame lamp unit 27 includes a right frame lamp board 27a and a right frame lamp cover 27b.
The right frame lamp board 27a is a lamp board on which are mounted light-emitting elements for illuminating the right frame lamp section 27 and a connector to which a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light-emitting element is connected, and is positioned on the front right side of the front door 12 with the mounting surface of the light-emitting element facing the front side (player side).

The right frame lamp board 27a is formed in a generally rectangular shape that is vertically long and extends from near the upper end to near the lower end of the front right side of the front door 12.
Furthermore, although not shown, 16 LEDs are mounted as light-emitting elements on the right frame lamp board 27a. All of these 16 LEDs are full-color LEDs.
Furthermore, the mounting surface of the right frame lamp board 27a on which the light emitting elements are mounted is configured in white, similar to the upper frame lamp board 26a.

In addition, the right frame lamp cover 27b is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the right frame lamp board 27a, and is attached to the front right side of the front door 12.
Furthermore, the right frame lamp cover 27b has a vertically elongated shape extending from near the upper end to near the lower end of the front right side of the front door 12, and is made of a colorless, translucent resin.
Furthermore, light emitted from a light-emitting element mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a is irradiated onto the right frame lamp cover 27b.

As shown in FIG. 131, the left frame lamp unit 28 includes a left frame lamp board 28a and a left frame lamp cover 28b.
The left frame lamp board 28a is a lamp board on which are mounted light-emitting elements for illuminating the left frame lamp section 28 and a connector to which a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light-emitting element is connected, and is positioned on the left front side of the front door 12 with the mounting surface of the light-emitting element facing the front side (player side).

The left frame lamp board 28a is formed in a generally rectangular shape that is vertically long and extends from near the upper end to near the lower end of the left front surface of the front door 12.
Furthermore, although not shown, 16 LEDs are mounted as light-emitting elements on the left frame lamp board 28a. All of these 16 LEDs are full-color LEDs.
Furthermore, the mounting surface of the left frame lamp board 28a on which the light emitting elements are mounted is configured in white, similar to the upper frame lamp board 26a and the right frame lamp board 27a.

In addition, the left frame lamp cover 28b is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the left frame lamp board 28a, and is attached to the front left side of the front door 12.
Furthermore, the left frame lamp cover 28b has a vertically elongated shape extending from near the upper end to near the lower end of the front left side of the front door 12, and is made of a colorless, translucent resin.
Furthermore, light emitted from a light-emitting element mounted on the left frame lamp board 28a is irradiated onto the left frame lamp cover 28b.

As in the case where the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine 500, the upper frame lamp cover 26b, the right frame lamp cover 27b, and the left frame lamp cover 28b are formed from a colorless, translucent resin, and the entire mounting surfaces of the light-emitting elements on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a are made white, thereby preventing the appearance of the upper frame lamp section 26, the right frame lamp section 27, and the left frame lamp section 28 from being impaired and allowing the color of the light-emitting elements to be clearly seen.

In addition, although not shown, the front right side of the front door 12 is provided with a right frame board mounting portion to which the right frame lamp board 27a is attached, and a right frame cover mounting portion to which the right frame lamp cover 27b is attached.
Furthermore, the right frame lamp board 27a is formed in a vertically long, generally rectangular shape, and the width of the right frame lamp board 27a in the short side direction is configured to be generally the same as the width of the right frame board mounting portion in the short side direction, so that the right frame lamp board 27a covers the right frame board mounting portion.

The entire mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the right frame lamp board 27a is made of white, and by covering the right frame board mounting portion with such a right frame lamp board 27a, the entire mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the right frame lamp board 27a can function as a reflector, thereby making the color of the light-emitting element appear beautiful.

Similarly, the front left side of the front door 12 is provided with a left frame board mounting portion to which the left frame lamp board 28a is attached, and a left frame cover mounting portion to which the left frame lamp cover 28b is attached.
The left frame lamp board 28a is formed in a vertically long, generally rectangular shape, and the width of the left frame lamp board 28a in the short side direction is configured to be generally the same as the width of the left frame board mounting portion in the short side direction. This allows the left frame lamp board 28a to cover the left frame board mounting portion. The entire mounting surface of the left frame lamp board 28a for the light emitting elements functions as a reflector, making the color of the light emitting elements appear beautiful.

Also, just as in the case where the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine 500, the right frame lamp board 27a is provided with a positioning hole into which a positioning boss is inserted when positioning the right frame lamp board 27a at a predetermined position on the right frame board mounting part, and a fixing hole used when fixing (screwing) the right frame lamp board 27a to the right frame board mounting part, which are provided close to each other. The opening area of the positioning hole and the opening area of the fixing hole are set to be different. This prevents the positioning hole and the fixing hole from being confused, allowing the assembly work to proceed smoothly.

Furthermore, the positioning boss has a protrusion that protrudes toward the mounting surface of the light emitting element when the right frame lamp board 27a is positioned at a predetermined position on the right frame board mounting portion.
That is, the positioning boss is inserted into the positioning hole from the side opposite to the mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the right frame lamp board 27a, and the tip of the positioning boss protrudes onto the mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the right frame lamp board 27a. The tip of the positioning boss is called the protrusion. This protrusion is formed into a convex curved surface (dome-shaped). This allows the light emitted from the light-emitting element to be reflected by the protrusion formed into a convex curved surface, making the right frame lamp unit 27 appear to shine beautifully.

As in the case where the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine 500, when the right frame lamp board 27a is fixed to the right frame board mounting portion, it is fixed by screwing it from the mounting surface side of the light-emitting element on the right frame lamp board 27a to the right frame board mounting portion. At this time, the screw head is exposed on the mounting surface side of the light-emitting element on the right frame lamp board 27a. The height of the screw head from the light-emitting element mounting surface is set higher than the height of the light-emitting element from the light-emitting element mounting surface.

Furthermore, as in the case where the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine 500, the screw head is subjected to a surface treatment that reflects the light emitted from the light-emitting element.
This allows the light emitted from the light-emitting element to be reflected by the screw head, making the right frame lamp portion 27 appear to shine beautifully.

Also, as in the case where the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine 500, a lens portion is provided in the right frame lamp cover 27b at a position facing the right frame lamp board 27a. The lens portion is configured by connecting curved surfaces having different curvatures but the same thickness. This reduces the manufacturing cost of the mold for forming the right frame lamp cover 27b, while making the light emitted by the light-emitting element look beautiful.
In addition, the upper frame lamp cover 26b and the left frame lamp cover 28b also have a lens portion facing the lamp substrate, and the shape of the lens portion is a combination of curved surfaces with different curvatures but the same thickness, similar to the right frame lamp cover 27b.

As described above, the slot machine 10 includes the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 .
In addition, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are connected by a harness, making it possible to transmit information (commands) necessary for outputting the performance in one direction from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80.

Furthermore, the sub-control board 80 is connected to the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a by harnesses.
The sub-control board 80 then determines the content of the performance based on the commands sent from the main control board 50, and controls the output of the determined performance. At this time, the sub-control board 80 controls the emission of the light-emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a.

When the start switch 41 is operated with the specified number of medals bet, the signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When this signal is input to the main control board 50, the role selection means 61 acquires a random number value and performs a lottery for a winning number based on the acquired random number value, and the reel control means 65 drives and controls all the motors 32 to rotate all the reels 31.

Thereafter, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When this signal is input to the main control board 50, the reel control means 65 drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42, and stops the rotation of the reel 31 related to that motor 32 in accordance with the lottery result of the role selection means 61.
The game result of the current game is displayed based on the symbol combination when all reels 31 stop. At this time, if a symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination stops on an active line, that winning combination wins, and medals corresponding to the winning combination are paid out.

In addition, when a lottery is conducted by the role selection means 61, the main control board 50 transmits a command corresponding to the lottery result to the sub-control board 80.
When the sub-control board 80 receives a command corresponding to the lottery result, it controls the light emission of the light-emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a in accordance with the lottery result.

Specifically, when the winning number corresponding to a special role is won in the role selection means 61, the main control board 50 transmits a command to that effect (special role command) to the sub-control board 80.
When the sub-control board 80 receives a special role command, it causes the light-emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a to emit light in an emission pattern corresponding to the special role.
In addition, as a light emission pattern corresponding to a special role, the output values of the red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light emitting element are changed in a predetermined pattern within the range of "0" to "255." This allows the light emitting element to emit light in so-called rainbow colors, and the player can be informed that he or she has won a special role.

Furthermore, since lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 26b are formed from a colorless, translucent resin, and the entire mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp board such as the upper frame lamp board 26a is made of white, when a special role is won, the light-emitting element is made to emit light in rainbow colors, making the color of the light-emitting element look beautiful.
When a special role is won, the light-emitting elements mounted on one or more of the lamp boards may be caused to emit light in a pattern corresponding to the special role. Therefore, only the light-emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a may be caused to emit light in a pattern corresponding to the special role, or the light-emitting elements mounted on all of the lamp boards may be caused to emit light in a pattern corresponding to the special role.

In addition, when a special role is won, the light-emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a may be made to emit light in a pattern corresponding to the special role, and the light-emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 28a may be made to emit light in white.
In addition, by setting the output values of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light-emitting element to "255", the light-emitting element can be made to emit white light.

As described above, a door sensor is electrically connected to the main control board 50, and when the front door 12 is opened, the door sensor turns on and the signal is input to the main control board 50. When the main control board 50 detects that the door sensor is on, it transmits a command to that effect (door open command) to the sub-control board 80.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the door open command, it controls the light-emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a to emit white light, thereby notifying the hall staff that the front door 12 is open.

Furthermore, since lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 26b are formed from a colorless, translucent resin, and the entire mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp board such as the upper frame lamp board 26a is made of white, the light-emitting element stands out when it emits white light, making it easier for hall staff to notice that the front door 12 is open.
When the front door 12 is open, the light-emitting elements mounted on one or more of the lamp boards may be caused to emit white light. Therefore, only the light-emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 28a may be caused to emit white light, or the light-emitting elements mounted on all of the lamp boards may be caused to emit white light.
Also, when the front door 12 is open, the light emitting element may be made to blink in a predetermined pattern corresponding to the opening of the front door 12 .

In addition, in the slot machine 10, one game can be considered to start when the start switch 41 is operated with a specified number of medals bet, and one game can be considered to end when all the reels 31 have stopped and processing such as the payout of medals has been carried out.
Furthermore, when the role selection means 61 determines that a non-winning combination has not been achieved, the main control board 50 transmits a command to that effect (non-winning command) to the sub-control board 80 .

Furthermore, when the sub-control board 80 receives a non-winning command, it executes a lottery for the presentation pattern in the case of a non-winning event (a lottery for determining whether presentation pattern 1 or presentation pattern 2 will be used).
The sub-control board 80 then controls the light-emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a to emit light in a manner corresponding to the results of the performance pattern lottery, and also controls the red LED mounted on the board provided for the decoration around the display window to emit light.

Figures 132 (a) and (b) show the presentation patterns when the role selection means 61 does not result in a winning combination, where (a) is a time chart showing presentation pattern 1 when no winning combination is obtained, and (b) is a time chart showing presentation pattern 2 when no winning combination is obtained.
In Figures 132 (a) and (b), "LED1" indicates an LED mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a, and "LED2" indicates an LED mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a.
In addition, in Figures 132(a) and (b), "LED3" indicates one red LED mounted on the board of the decoration around the display window, and "LED4" indicates another red LED mounted on the board of the decoration around the display window. The mounting surface of the red LED on the board of the decoration around the display window is composed of green.

Furthermore, in Figures 132(a) and (b), "reel rotation start" indicates the time when the reels 31 start to rotate. "First stop operation" indicates the time when the first stop operation is performed (when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped first is operated (on)). "Second stop operation" indicates the time when the second stop operation is performed (when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped second is operated (on)). "Third stop operation" indicates the time when the third stop operation is performed (when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped last is operated (on)). "Payout" indicates the time when processing such as the payout of medals is performed.

As shown in FIG. 132(a), in a game in which the winning combination is not achieved by the role selection means 61, when presentation pattern 1 is determined by the presentation pattern selection, LED 1 (the LED mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a) lights up (ON) when the reel 31 starts to rotate and turns off (OFF) when the second stop operation is performed.
In the performance pattern 1, the LED2 (the LED mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a) is turned on after the first stop operation and before the second stop operation, and is turned off at the second stop operation. Also, the LED1 and the LED2 are turned off at the same time.

Furthermore, in performance pattern 1, LED 3 (one red LED around the display window) lights up after the reel 31 starts to rotate and before the first stop operation, and goes out when the first stop operation is performed.
Furthermore, in performance pattern 1, LED4 (the other red LEDs around the display window) lights up after the reel 31 starts to rotate and before the first stop operation, and goes out after the first stop operation and before the second stop operation. LED3 and LED4 light up at the same time. Furthermore, LED4 goes out at the same time as LED2 lights up.

As shown in FIG. 132(b), in a game that is not won by the role selection means 61, when presentation pattern 2 is determined by the presentation pattern selection, LED 1 (the LED mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a) lights up (ON) when the reel 31 starts to rotate, and turns off (OFF) when the second stop operation is performed, just as when presentation pattern 1 is determined.
Also, in presentation pattern 2, LED 2 (the LED mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a) does not light up, unlike when presentation pattern 1 is determined.

Furthermore, in effect pattern 2, LED3 (one red LED around the display window) lights up after the reel 31 starts to rotate and before the first stop operation, and goes out when the second stop operation is performed. LED1 and LED3 go out at the same time.
Furthermore, in presentation pattern 2, LED 4 (the other red LEDs around the display window) lights up after the start of rotation of the reel 31 and before the first stop operation, and goes out after the first stop operation and before the second stop operation, just as when presentation pattern 1 is selected. LED 3 and LED 4 also light up at the same time.

In this way, in a game in which the winning combination is not achieved by the role selection means 61, either presentation pattern 1 or presentation pattern 2 is determined by presentation pattern selection, and the light emission of LED1 to LED4 is controlled according to the determined presentation pattern.
In both presentation pattern 1 and presentation pattern 2, LED 1 is turned on when the reel 31 starts to rotate and is turned off when the second stop operation is performed.
In addition, in performance pattern 1, LED 2 turns on after the first stop operation and before the second stop operation, and turns off when the second stop operation is performed, but in performance pattern 2, it does not turn on.

Furthermore, with regard to LED 3, in presentation pattern 1, it lights up after the reel 31 starts to rotate and before the first stop operation, and goes out when the first stop operation is performed, and in presentation pattern 2, it lights up after the reel 31 starts to rotate and before the first stop operation, and goes out when the second stop operation is performed.
Furthermore, in both presentation pattern 1 and presentation pattern 2, LED 4 lights up after the reel 31 starts to rotate and before the first stop operation, and goes out after the first stop operation and before the second stop operation.

From the above, the average time for which LED1 is turned on in a game that is not won by the role selection means 61 is set to be longer than the average time for which LED2 to LED4 are turned on in a game that is not won by the role selection means 61.
Furthermore, since the entire LED mounting surface on the right frame lamp board 27a is composed of white, and the right frame lamp cover 27b is formed of colorless, translucent resin, the light emitted by LED1 (the LED mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a) can be made to look beautiful, and therefore a beautiful presentation using LED1 can be shown even in a game that is not won by the role selection means 61.

Furthermore, even when the gaming machine is a slot machine 10, just as when the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine 500, in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the light-emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, etc., can be made to emit white light in order to inform the hall staff that the machine is being controlled to the setting change state or setting confirmation state.
In the slot machine 10, when the setting key switch is turned on while the power is off (power-off state), and the power is then turned on in this state, the slot machine 10 transitions to a setting change state (step S212 in FIG. 38).

When the state shifts to the setting change state, the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 73 .
Furthermore, in the setting change state, the setting value is updated ("+1") each time the setting change switch is operated (steps S240 to S241 in FIG. 38).
Then, when the start switch 41 is operated in the setting change state ("Yes" in step S242 of FIG. 38), the setting value is confirmed, and when the setting key switch is turned off ("Yes" in step S243 of FIG. 38), the setting change state ends.

Furthermore, in the slot machine 10, when the power is on and the setting key switch is turned on, the slot machine 10 transitions to a setting confirmation state.
Furthermore, in the setting confirmation state, the setting value cannot be changed, but the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 73. This makes it possible to check the current setting value.
Then, when the setting key switch is turned off, the setting confirmation state ends.

In addition, when the setting change state is entered, the main control board 50 transmits a command (setting change start command) to the sub-control board 80 indicating that the setting change state has been entered.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the setting change start command, it controls the light-emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a to emit white light.

Furthermore, when the setting change state ends, the main control board 50 sends a command indicating the end of the setting change state (setting change end command) to the sub-control board 80.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the setting change end command, it ends the control of causing the light-emitting element to emit white light.
As a result, while the setting change state continues (while the setting change process of FIG. 39 is being executed), the light emitting element continues to emit white light, and when the setting change state ends, the light emitting element stops emitting white light.

Also, when the main control board 50 transitions to the setting confirmation state, the main control board 50 sends a command (setting confirmation start command) to the sub-control board 80 indicating that the main control board 50 has transitioned to the setting confirmation state.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the setting confirmation start command, it controls the light-emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a to emit white light.

Furthermore, when the setting confirmation state ends, the main control board 50 sends a command indicating the end of the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation end command) to the sub-control board 80.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the setting confirmation end command, it ends the control of causing the light-emitting element to emit white light.
As a result, while the setting confirmation state continues, the light emitting element continues to emit white light, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the light emitting element stops emitting white light.

As described above, by setting the red (R), green (G), and blue (B) output values of the light-emitting element to "255," the light-emitting element can be made to emit white light.
In addition, by causing the light-emitting elements mounted on lamp boards such as the upper frame lamp board 26a to emit white light in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, it is possible to inform the hall staff that the device is being controlled to the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

Furthermore, since lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 26b are formed from a colorless, translucent resin, and the entire mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp board such as the upper frame lamp board 26a is made of white, the light-emitting element stands out when it emits white light, making it easier for hall staff to notice that it has been controlled to the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

When the lamp is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the light-emitting elements mounted on one or more of the lamp boards may be made to emit white light. Therefore, only the light-emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 28a may be made to emit white light, or the light-emitting elements mounted on all of the lamp boards may be made to emit white light.

When the device is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the light emitting element may be caused to blink in a predetermined pattern corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.
Furthermore, in the case where the light-emitting element is made to blink when the front door 12 is open and when the door is controlled to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, the blinking pattern of the light-emitting element can be made different when the front door 12 is open and when the door is controlled to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state.

Also, even when the gaming machine is a slot machine 10, just as when the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine 500, when the power is restored from a power outage, the light-emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, etc. can be made to emit white light to notify the hall staff that the power is being restored from a power outage.
Here, in the slot machine 10, when the power is turned off (power failure), the main control board 50 executes a power failure process shown in FIG.

Furthermore, when the power is turned on (when recovering from a power outage), the main control board 50 executes the power recovery process shown in FIG.
Furthermore, when the main control board 50 starts the power recovery process, it sends a command indicating this (power recovery start command) to the sub-control board 80.
Furthermore, when the sub-control board 80 receives a power recovery start command, it controls the light-emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a to emit white light.

In addition, when the main control board 50 ends the power recovery process, it sends a command indicating this (power recovery end command) to the sub-control board 80.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the power recovery end command, it ends the control of causing the light-emitting element to emit white light.
As a result, the light emitting element continues to emit white light while the power restoration process of FIG. 40 is being executed, and when the power restoration process of FIG. 40 is completed, the light emitting element stops emitting white light.

As described above, by setting the red (R), green (G), and blue (B) output values of the light-emitting element to "255," the light-emitting element can be made to emit white light.
In addition, by making the light-emitting elements mounted on lamp boards such as the upper frame lamp board 26a emit white light while the power restoration process is being performed, it is possible to notify the hall staff that the power restoration process is being performed.

Furthermore, since lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 26b are formed from a colorless, translucent resin, and the entire mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp board such as the upper frame lamp board 26a is made of white, the light-emitting element stands out when it emits white light, making it easier for hall staff to notice that the power recovery process is being performed.
During the power recovery process, the light-emitting elements mounted on one or more of the lamp boards may be caused to emit white light. Therefore, only the light-emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 27a may be caused to emit white light, or the light-emitting elements mounted on all of the lamp boards may be caused to emit white light.

During the execution of the power restoration process, the light emitting element may be caused to blink in a predetermined pattern corresponding to the execution of the power restoration process.
Furthermore, when the light-emitting element is made to blink when the front door 12 is open, when it is controlled to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, and while the power restoration process is being executed, the blinking pattern of the light-emitting element can be made different when the front door 12 is open, when it is controlled to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, and while the power restoration process is being executed.

(12) In the twenty-third embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine 500 is given as an example of a gaming machine, and in the variant example (11), a slot machine 10 is given as an example of a gaming machine, but this is not limited to these.
For example, in the case of Parrot gaming machines, encapsulated gaming machines (medalless gaming machines), and casino machines, the mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp board of the decorative lamp unit is made white, and the lamp cover of the decorative lamp unit is made of a colorless or white translucent resin, so that the light emitted by the light-emitting element can be made to look beautiful.
"Parrot" is a slot machine that uses gaming balls as the gaming medium.

(13) The first to twenty-third embodiments and the various modified examples shown in the first to twenty-third embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but may be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Twenty-fourth embodiment>
The meanings of technical terms in the twenty-fourth embodiment are as follows:
(1) Light Diffusion Rate There is no definition of "light diffusion rate" prescribed by "ISO 80000-1" (JIS Z 8000-1) or the like. However, the light diffusion level is generally expressed as "haze". For this reason, the "light diffusion rate" in the present invention is equivalent (synonymous) to haze.

"Haze" is defined, for example, by "JIS K 7136.""JIS K 7136" defines the haze of transmitted light as "the percentage of transmitted light that deviates from the incident light by 0.044 rad (2.5°) or more due to forward scattering among the transmitted light that passes through a test piece."
Therefore, the "light diffusion rate" in the present invention can be defined as the proportion of transmitted light that deviates from the incident light axis by "0.044 rad (2.5°)" or more out of the total transmitted light emitted from the light-emitting element and transmitted through the light diffusion section (such as light diffusion section 615e and light diffusion section 670a described below).

The transmittance (total light transmittance) of all transmitted light passing through the test piece is defined as "Tt", and the transmittance (diffuse transmittance) of transmitted light that deviates from the incident optical axis by "0.044 rad (2.5°)" or more is defined as "Td", then haze can be expressed by the following formula.
Haze = (Td/Tt) x 100
The higher the haze value, the higher the light diffusion rate. The higher the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion, the more hazy the opposite side appears when viewed through the light diffusion portion.

It is also known that the intensity of transmitted light in the range of "-90°" to "+90°" is measured, and the angle of transmitted light at which the intensity is half that of transmitted light at "0°" (half-value angle) is measured. The larger the half-value angle, the higher the light diffusion performance (in other words, the light diffusion rate). Therefore, the "light diffusion rate" can be determined not only by the haze mentioned above, but also by the magnitude of the half-value angle of transmitted light.

(2) Regarding Brightness Scales for expressing brightness include "brightness,""luminousintensity," and "illuminance."
"Brightness" is an index indicating the intensity of light emitted from a light source toward an observer, and is expressed in units of "cd (candela)/m ² ".
Moreover, "luminous intensity" is an index indicating the solid angle density of a luminous flux, and the unit used is "cd."
Furthermore, "illuminance" is an index indicating the amount of luminous flux incident per unit area out of the luminous flux radiated from a light source to a flat body, and is expressed in units of "lx (lux)" or "lm (lumen)/ ^m2 ."

Luminous intensity is obtained by dividing luminous flux by unit solid angle, illuminance is obtained by dividing luminous flux by unit area illuminated, and luminous intensity is obtained by dividing luminous intensity by unit area illuminated.
Therefore, the amount of light, brightness, or light intensity can be expressed by using any of luminance, luminous intensity, and illuminance.
Therefore, the "brightness adjusting means 546" in the twenty-fourth embodiment (A) described later may be called "light intensity adjusting means 546" or "illuminance adjusting means 546".
Furthermore, the "brightness adjusting means 92" in a twenty-fourth embodiment (B) described later may be called "light intensity adjusting means 92" or "illuminance adjusting means 92".
Similarly, the "brightness adjustment mode" may also be called the "light intensity adjustment mode" or the "illuminance adjustment mode."

The twenty-fourth embodiment relates to a title display section of a gaming machine.
Below, the title display section will be described in the case where the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine (24th embodiment (A)) and in the case where the gaming machine is a slot machine (24th embodiment (B)).

<24th embodiment (A): When the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine>
The explanation of the 24th embodiment (A) partially overlaps with the 19th embodiment (B) and the 23rd embodiment, but will be explained again.
Figure 133 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 500 in the 24th embodiment (A), Figure 134 is an exploded oblique view of a portion of the title display section 615 of the pachinko gaming machine 500 in the 24th embodiment (A) seen from the front side (player side), and Figure 135 is a block diagram of the pachinko gaming machine 500 in the 24th embodiment (A).

As shown in FIG. 133, the pachinko game machine 500 comprises a rectangular outer frame 501 fixed to an island (not shown), and a front frame 502 attached to the front side of the outer frame 501.
Also, as shown in FIG. 133, a game board 504 is attached to the center of the front frame 502, and a title display section 615 as a performance lamp 541 is provided on the upper front portion of the game board 504.
Furthermore, a game area is provided on the front side of the game board 504 and below the title display unit 615. A start hole 532, a special symbol display unit 531, and an image display unit 543 are provided in this game area.
Furthermore, a glass door (glass frame) 505 is attached to the front side of the front frame 502 so as to cover the front of the game board 504. As a result, the title display unit 615 and the game area provided on the front of the game board 504 are covered by the glass door 505.

Furthermore, two transparent glass plates (not shown) are arranged in parallel at a predetermined distance from each other in the center of the glass door 505 .
Furthermore, when the glass door 505 is closed relative to the front frame 502, a glass plate is located in front of the game board 504. This allows a player to view the title display section 615 and the game area provided on the front of the game board 504 from the front side of the pachinko game machine 500 through the glass plate.
Furthermore, on the front side of the front frame 502, below the glass door 505, an upper tray 506, a lower tray 507, a launch handle 508, a selection switch 544, and a performance switch 545, etc. are provided.

Also, as shown in FIG. 133, a right frame lamp unit 620 serving as a performance lamp 541 is provided on the front right side of the glass door 505, and a left frame lamp unit 630 serving as a performance lamp 541 is provided on the front left side of the glass door 505.
The right frame lamp section 620 is a vertically long performance lamp 541 that extends from near the top to near the bottom of the front right side of the glass door 505, and the left frame lamp section 630 is a vertically long performance lamp 541 that extends from near the top to near the bottom of the front left side of the glass door 505.
In addition, the peripheral portion of the game board 504 on the front of the glass door 505, the peripheral portions of the right frame lamp portion 620 and the left frame lamp portion 630 on the front of the glass door 505, and the right frame lamp portion 620 and the left frame lamp portion 630 are each colored differently.

The title display unit 615 is a performance lamp 541 that emits light in the shape of letters, symbols, etc. Specifically, the title display unit 615 emits light in the shape of letters, symbols, etc. that indicate the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 500, for example.
Furthermore, the title display unit 615 is provided between the right frame lamp unit 620 and the left frame lamp unit 630 (to the left of the right frame lamp unit 620 and to the right of the left frame lamp unit 630) and above the center in the height direction of the pachinko gaming machine 500. This allows the title display unit 615 to be located slightly above the player's line of sight when the player looks at the pachinko gaming machine 500 from the front.

Also, as shown in FIG. 133 , the right frame lamp unit 620 includes a right frame lamp board 621 and a right frame lamp cover 622 .
The right frame lamp board 621 is a lamp board on which are mounted a light-emitting element (also referred to as "light-emitting means") for illuminating the right frame lamp unit 620 and a connector to which a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light-emitting element is connected, and it is attached to the front right side of the glass door 505 with the mounting surface of the light-emitting element facing the front side (player side).

The right frame lamp board 621 is formed in a generally rectangular shape that is vertically long and extends from near the upper end to near the lower end of the right side of the front surface of the glass door 505 .
Furthermore, a plurality of LEDs are mounted as light-emitting elements on the right frame lamp board 621. All of these LEDs are full-color LEDs.
The full-color LED is equipped with three LEDs, one that emits red light, one that emits green light, and one that emits blue light, and is capable of expressing full color by adjusting the output of these three LEDs.
In other words, a full-color LED is a light-emitting means that has three light-emitting elements, one that emits red light, one that emits green light, and one that emits blue light, and that can express full colors by adjusting the output of these three light-emitting elements.

The right frame lamp cover 622 is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the right frame lamp board 621 and is attached to the front right side of the glass door 505.
The right frame lamp cover 622 is formed in a vertically elongated shape extending from near the upper end to near the lower end of the front right side of the glass door 505, and is made of a translucent resin.
Furthermore, the right frame lamp cover 622 covers the mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the right frame lamp board 621. Therefore, light emitted from the light-emitting element mounted on the right frame lamp board 621 is irradiated onto the right frame lamp cover 622. As a result, when the light-emitting element mounted on the right frame lamp board 621 emits light, the right frame lamp cover 622 appears to glow.

In addition, a lens portion 670 is provided at a position on the right frame lamp cover 622 facing the right frame lamp substrate 621. Furthermore, an embossed portion 670b is provided on the inner surface of the lens portion 670 (the surface on the right frame lamp substrate 621 side). Furthermore, the embossed portion 670b is formed by providing a fine uneven pattern on the inner surface of the lens portion 670 during injection molding of the lens portion 670. Furthermore, examples of the uneven pattern that constitutes the embossed portion 670b include a pattern with a large number of triangular pyramid-shaped protrusions, a pattern with a large number of square pyramid-shaped protrusions, a pattern with a large number of hemispherical protrusions, and a pattern with a large number of stripe-shaped protrusions.

The textured portion 670b provided on the inner surface of the lens portion 670 functions as a light diffusing portion 670a that diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting element.
In this way, by providing an embossed portion 670b on the inner surface of the lens portion 670 and having this embossed portion 670b function as a light diffusing portion 670a, the LED can be made to look less noticeable, the entire lens portion 670 can be made to appear to shine evenly, and furthermore, the player can be prevented from feeling dazzled.

It should be noted that the light diffusion portion 670 a is not limited to being formed by providing the textured portion 670 b on the inner surface of the lens portion 670 .
For example, the light diffusion portion 670a may be formed by providing a textured portion 670b on the outer surface (the surface opposite to the right frame lamp substrate 621) of the lens portion 670. Also, for example, the light diffusion portion 670a may be formed by providing textured portions 670b on both the inner and outer surfaces of the lens portion 670.

Furthermore, the light diffusion portion 670a may be formed by kneading a light diffusion agent that diffuses light into the resin that constitutes the lens portion 670. Examples of the light diffusion agent include silicon particles, acrylic particles, titanium oxide particles, and calcium carbonate particles. Furthermore, the light diffusion rate can be varied by varying the content of the light diffusion agent. That is, the light diffusion rate can be increased by increasing the content of the light diffusion agent, or conversely, the light diffusion rate can be decreased by decreasing the content of the light diffusion agent.
Furthermore, for example, the light diffusion section 670a may be formed by disposing a light diffusion sheet (also referred to as a "light diffusion film") that diffuses light between the light emitting element and the lens section 670. In addition, examples of the light diffusion sheet include a resin sheet into which the above-mentioned light diffusion agent is kneaded, a resin sheet having fine irregularities on its surface, and the like.

The light diffusion section 670a may be formed by combining the textured section 670b with a light diffusion agent, or may be formed by combining the textured section 670b with a light diffusion sheet, or may be formed by combining a light diffusion agent with a light diffusion sheet, or may be formed by combining the textured section 670b with a light diffusion agent and a light diffusion sheet.

133, the left frame lamp unit 630 includes a left frame lamp board 631 and a left frame lamp cover 632. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the left frame lamp board 631, and the left frame lamp cover 632 is provided with a lens unit 670 that guides light emitted from the LEDs on the left frame lamp board 631 to the front side, and an embossed portion 670b that functions as a light diffusion portion 670a that diffuses the light emitted from the LEDs is provided on the inner surface of the lens unit 670. The left frame lamp unit 630 is formed symmetrically with the right frame lamp unit 620.
Also, in the left frame lamp section 630, an embossed section 670b that functions as a light diffusion section 670a is provided on the inner surface of the lens section 670, making the LED less noticeable, making the entire lens section 670 appear to glow evenly, and preventing the player from feeling dazzled.

As shown in FIG. 134, the title display section 615 includes a title display base 615c, a title display substrate 615a, a light diffusion sheet 615g, a lens section 615d, and a title display cover 615b.
The title display base 615c is a member that serves as the base of the title display unit 615. The title display unit 615 is configured by attaching a title display substrate 615a, a light diffusion sheet 615g, a lens unit 615d, and a title display cover 615b to the front side of this title display base 615c.

The title display board 615a is a lamp board on which light emitting elements for illuminating the title display section 615 and a connector for connecting a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light emitting elements are mounted.
134 shows a part of the title display board 615a and the LEDs 641a to 641j mounted on the front surface of the board. In this manner, the LEDs 641a to 641j are mounted as light-emitting elements on the front surface of the title display board 615a. All of these LEDs are full-color LEDs.

The mounting surface of the title display board 615a on which the LEDs 641a to 641j are mounted is configured in white color ("substantially white" or a "color similar to white").
This prevents the title display section 615 from looking bad, as explained in the twenty-third embodiment. Also, the light emitted from the LEDs 641a to 641j can be efficiently reflected toward the title display cover 615b, so that the title display cover 615b can be made to look brighter. Furthermore, the colors of the LEDs 641a to 641j can be made to look beautiful.

As described in the twenty-third embodiment, the term "substantially white" is a concept that includes "white." In addition, the term "substantially white" is a concept that includes a color that is not completely white but appears to be white.
Furthermore, the term "similar colors" refers to a concept that does not include the target color, but includes colors close to the target color. Therefore, the term "similar colors" to white refers to a concept that does not include white, but includes colors close to white.
For example, in the chromaticity diagram based on the CIE standard color system shown in Figure 129 of the 23rd embodiment, the range from 0.3 to 0.4 on the x-axis and from 0.3 to 0.4 on the y-axis is the range that an average player would recognize as white, and therefore can be considered the range of "similar colors" to white.

As shown in FIG. 134, the title display board 615a is fixed to the title display base 615c with screws 683a and 683b.
Furthermore, when the title display board 615a is fixed to the title display base 615c with the screws 683a to 683b, the screw heads 689a to 689b of the screws 683a to 683b are exposed on the mounting surface side of the title display board 615a on which the LEDs 641a to 641j are mounted. In this state, the height of the screw heads 689a to 689b of the screws 683a to 683b is set to be greater (higher) than the height of the LEDs 641a to 641j, based on the mounting surface of the title display board 615a on which the LEDs 641a to 641j are mounted.
That is, the screw heads 689a to 689b of the screws 683a to 683b are set to be higher (greater) than the LEDs 641a to 641j from the mounting surface of the title display board 615a on which the LEDs 641a to 641j are mounted.

Furthermore, the screw heads 689a to 689b of the screws 683a to 683b are formed into a convex curved shape (dome shape), and the surfaces of the screw heads 689a to 689b of the screws 683a to 683b are subjected to a surface treatment that reflects the light emitted from the LEDs 641a to 641j.
Specifically, the LEDs 641a to 641j are plated with silver as a surface treatment that reflects the light emitted from the LEDs 641a to 641j. Examples of silver plating include silver plating, chrome plating, nickel plating, tin plating, tin-cobalt plating, and zinc plating.

In this way, the height of the screw heads 689a to 689b of the screws 683a to 683b is set to be greater than the height of the LEDs 641a to 641j, with the mounting surface of the LEDs 641a to 641j as the reference. The screw heads 689a to 689b of the screws 683a to 683b are also formed into a convex curved shape. Furthermore, a surface treatment that reflects light is applied to the surfaces of the screw heads 689a to 689b of the screws 683a to 683b. This allows the light emitted from the LEDs 641a to 641j to be reflected by the screw heads 689a to 689b of the screws 683a to 683b. Therefore, the screw heads 689a to 689b of the screws 683a to 683b can be made to appear to glow like light-emitting elements, making the title display section 615 appear to glow brighter.

The light diffusion sheet 615g is for diffusing the light emitted from the LEDs 641a to 641j mounted on the title display board 615a. In other words, the light diffusion sheet 615g functions as a light diffusion section 615e that diffuses the light emitted from the LEDs 641a to 641j as light-emitting elements. As shown in FIG. 134, the light diffusion sheet 615g is disposed in front of the title display board 615a. Furthermore, the light diffusion sheet 615g is made of a resin sheet with a light diffusion agent kneaded into it, a resin sheet with fine irregularities on the surface, or the like.

The lens section 615d guides the light emitted from the LEDs 641a to 641j mounted on the title display board 615a to the title display cover 615b, and is made of a translucent resin. As shown in FIG. 134, a light diffusion sheet 615g is disposed in front of the title display board 615a, and the lens section 615d is disposed in front of the light diffusion sheet 615g.

As shown in Fig. 134, a textured portion 615f is provided on the front surface of the lens portion 615d. This textured portion 615f, together with a light diffusion sheet 615g, functions as a light diffusion portion 615e that diffuses light emitted from the LEDs 641a to 641j as light-emitting elements. This textured portion 615f is formed by providing a fine uneven pattern on the front surface of the lens portion 615d during the injection molding of the lens portion 615d. As shown in the enlarged view of part B in Fig. 134, the uneven pattern that constitutes the textured portion 615f is a pattern provided with a large number of streak-like protrusions.
In addition, the uneven pattern constituting the embossed portion 615f is not limited to a pattern having a large number of striated protrusions, but may be, for example, a pattern having a large number of triangular pyramid-shaped protrusions, a pattern having a large number of quadrangular pyramid-shaped protrusions, a pattern having a large number of hemispherical protrusions, etc.

The title display cover 615b is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the title display board 615a. As shown in Fig. 134, a light diffusion sheet 615g is arranged in front of the title display board 615a, and a lens section 615d is arranged in front of the light diffusion sheet 615g. The title display cover 615b is attached so as to cover the title display board 615a, the light diffusion sheet 615g, and the lens section 615d.
Furthermore, the title display cover 615b is provided with letters, symbols, etc., and these letters, symbols, etc. emit light. Specifically, the parts of the title display cover 615b that contain the letters, symbols, etc. are made of a resin that has light-transmitting properties, and the parts other than the letters, symbols, etc. are made of a resin that does not have light-transmitting properties. This allows the title display cover 615b to emit light in the shape of the letters, symbols, etc.

As described above, in this embodiment, the light diffusion sheet 615g is disposed between the title display substrate 615a and the lens portion 615d, and the textured portion 615f is provided on the front surface of the lens portion 615d. The light diffusion sheet 615g and the textured portion 615f on the front surface of the lens portion 615d function as a light diffusion portion 615e that diffuses the light emitted from the LEDs 641a to 641j.
This makes it possible to make the LEDs 641a to 641j less conspicuous, and also makes it possible to make the letters, symbols, etc. on the title display cover 615b appear to shine evenly, and further prevents the player from feeling dazzled.

The light diffusion portion 615e may be formed by kneading the above-mentioned light diffusion agent into the resin that constitutes the lens portion 615d.
Furthermore, the light diffusion portion 615e may be formed by the light diffusion sheet 615g, the textured portion 615f on the front surface of the lens portion 615d, and a light diffusion agent kneaded into the resin that constitutes the lens portion 615d.
Furthermore, without providing the light diffusion sheet 615g, the light diffusion portion 615e may be formed by the embossed portion 615f on the front surface of the lens portion 615d and a light diffusion agent mixed into the resin that constitutes the lens portion 615d.
Furthermore, instead of providing the textured portion 615f on the front surface of the lens portion 615d, the light diffusion portion 615e may be formed by the light diffusion sheet 615g and a light diffusion agent kneaded into the resin that constitutes the lens portion 615d.

In the right frame lamp portion 620 and the left frame lamp portion 630, an inner surface of the lens portion 670 is provided with an embossed portion 670b, which functions as a light diffusion portion 670a.
Furthermore, in the title display section 615, a light diffusion sheet 615g is arranged between the title display substrate 615a and the lens section 615d, and an embossed section 615f is provided on the front surface of the lens section 615d, so that the light diffusion sheet 615g and the embossed section 615f on the front surface of the lens section 615d function as a light diffusion section 615e.

The light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 615e in the title display section 615 is set to be higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 670a in the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630. In other words, the title display section 615 is more likely to scatter light emitted from the light-emitting elements than the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630.
This makes it possible to make the LEDs in the title display section 615 less noticeable than those in the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630, and also makes them appear to shine evenly, and further makes it possible to make the player less likely to feel dazzled.

As described above, the title display unit 615 is located between the right frame lamp unit 620 and the left frame lamp unit 630, and is located above the center of the height of the pachinko gaming machine 500, so that the title display unit 615 is located slightly above the line of sight of the player when the player looks straight at the pachinko gaming machine 500. For this reason, the light emitted from the title display unit 615 is more easily received by the player than the light emitted from the right frame lamp unit 620 or the left frame lamp unit 630.
Therefore, in this embodiment, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 615e in the title display section 615 is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 670a in the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630, thereby making it less likely that the player will feel dazzled.

Furthermore, characters, symbols, etc. are displayed on the title display section 615, but if the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 615e in the title display section 615 is low, the LEDs will stand out, the characters, symbols, etc. will not shine evenly, and the player will feel dazzled. This will make it difficult for the player to recognize the characters, symbols, etc.
Therefore, in this embodiment, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 615e in the title display section 615 is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 670a in the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630, thereby making the LED less noticeable and making letters, symbols, etc. appear to shine evenly and further preventing the player from feeling dazzled, making it easier for the player to recognize letters, symbols, etc.

The distance from the title display board 615 a and the LEDs 641 a to 641 j to the lens section 615 d in the title display section 615 is set to be shorter than the distance from the right frame lamp board 621 and the LEDs to the lens section 670 in the right frame lamp section 620 .
As described above, the title display section 615 is provided on the upper front surface of the game board 504, and the glass door 505 is attached to cover it. In other words, the title display section 615 is provided on the back side of the glass door 505, and the player can view the title display section 615 through the glass door 505.

For this reason, since glass door 505 is disposed in front of title display section 615, the distance from title display board 615a and LEDs 641a to 641j to lens section 615d cannot be made long.
Therefore, in the title display section 615, a light diffusion section 615e is formed using a light diffusion sheet 615g and an embossed section 615f, thereby making the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 615e relatively high, making the LED less noticeable, and making letters, symbols, etc. appear to shine evenly, and further making it less likely for the player to feel dazzled.

In contrast, the right frame lamp unit 620 is provided on the front right side of the glass door 505, and no other structures are provided in front of the right frame lamp unit 620 (on the player's side).
Therefore, in the right frame lamp section 620, the distance from the right frame lamp board 621 and the LEDs to the lens section 670 can be made relatively long.
Specifically, in the title display unit 615, the maximum distance from the title display board 615a to the lens unit 615d in the direction perpendicular to the mounting surface of the LEDs 641a to 641j is set as distance "M1."
In addition, in the right frame lamp section 620, the maximum distance from the right frame lamp board 621 to the lens section 670 in the direction perpendicular to the mounting surface of the LEDs is defined as distance "M2".
The distance "M1" is set to be shorter than the distance "M2." In other words, the distance "M2" is set to be longer than the distance "M1."

In this way, by setting the distance from the right frame lamp board 621 and LED in the right frame lamp unit 620 to the lens unit 670 longer than the distance from the title display board 615a and LED to the lens unit 615d in the title display unit 615, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dazzled even if the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 670a in the right frame lamp unit 620 is lower than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 615e in the title display unit 615.
As with the right frame lamp unit 620, the distance from the left frame lamp board 631 and LED to the lens unit 670 of the left frame lamp unit 630 is set to be longer than the distance from the title display board 615a and LED to the lens unit 615d.

In the title display unit 615, the title display substrate 615a is formed in a flat plate shape, but the lens unit 615d has curved and inclined portions, etc., and therefore the distance from the title display substrate 615a to the lens unit 615d is not constant.
Similarly, in the right frame lamp section 620, the right frame lamp substrate 621 is formed in a flat plate shape, but the lens section 670 has curved and inclined portions, etc., so the distance from the right frame lamp substrate 615a to the lens section 670 is not constant.
For this reason, the distance is compared between the portion where the distance from the title display board 615a to the lens portion 615d is the longest and the portion where the distance from the right frame lamp board 621 to the lens portion 670 is the longest.

As shown in FIG. 135, the pachinko game machine 500 includes a power supply board 510, a payout control board 520, a main control board 530, and a sub-control board 540.
The power supply board 510 is a board that controls the supply of power based on the power switch 511 being turned on, and the dispensing control board 520 is a board that controls the operation of the dispensing device 524.
The main control board 530 is a board that controls the progress of the game, and the sub-control board 540 is a board that controls the output of the effects. These control boards are all connected to each other by harnesses.

Furthermore, the main control board 530 and the sub control board 540 each include a CPU, a RWM, a ROM, and the like.
Furthermore, a start port switch 533 and a special pattern display device 531 are electrically connected to the main control board 530.
The main control board 530 also includes a lottery means 555 , a design control means 556 , and a reservation means 557 .

A start hole 532 , which is one of the winning holes, is provided in the play area of the game board 504 , and a start hole switch 533 is provided for detecting a win at the start hole 532 .
In addition, the special pattern display device 531 is provided on the game board 504, and is a device that displays the lottery results based on a random number value obtained upon winning at the starting hole 532, by displaying changing and stationary patterns.

Furthermore, the lottery means 555 is a means for conducting a lottery based on a random number value obtained upon winning at the start port 532 .
Furthermore, the symbol control means 557 is a means for controlling the variable display and stationary display of symbols on the special symbol display device 531 based on the lottery result by the lottery means 555 .
The holding means 556 is a means for holding the random number obtained upon winning at the start port 532 until the display of the varying patterns corresponding to the lottery result based on the random number starts.

When a game ball enters the start hole 532 and the start hole switch 533 is turned on (entry into the start hole 532 is detected), the main control board 530 acquires a random number value. Based on this acquired random number value, the lottery means 555 executes a jackpot lottery (lottery for a jackpot or a loss), a special symbol lottery (lottery for a symbol (stop symbol) to be displayed stationary on the special symbol display device 531), and a variable pattern lottery (lottery for a time (variable time) for which the symbol is displayed stationary on the special symbol display device 531). Then, based on the result of this lottery, the symbol control means 557 controls the variable display and stationary display of the symbol on the special symbol display device 531.

The sub-control board 540 is electrically connected to the main control board 530, and is a board that determines the content of the performance based on commands sent from the main control board 530, and controls the output of the determined performance.
As shown in FIG. 135, a selection switch 544, a performance switch 545, a performance lamp 541 (title display section 615, right frame lamp section 620, left frame lamp section 630), a speaker 542, and an image display device 543 are electrically connected to the sub-control board 540.
In addition, the sub-control board 540 is provided with a brightness adjustment means 546 and a light emission control means 547 .

The selection switch 544 and the effect switch 545 are switches used for effects and the like, and are operated when the player wants to display specific information or when making various settings.
The selection switch 544 also includes an up switch 544a, a down switch 544b, a right switch 544c, and a left switch 544d.

The title display section 615, right frame lamp section 620, and left frame lamp section 630 as the performance lamps 541 are lamps used for performances, etc., and light up or flash in a predetermined pattern when predetermined conditions are met.
The speaker 542 is used for effects and the like, and outputs a predetermined sound effect when a predetermined condition is met.
Furthermore, the image display device 543 is used for effects and the like, and displays the results of the lottery by the lottery means 555 and the like as images.

In addition, the brightness adjustment means 546 adjusts the brightness of the light-emitting elements of the title display section 615, the right frame lamp section 620, and the left frame lamp section 630, and the light emission control means 547 controls the light emission of the light-emitting elements of the title display section 615, the right frame lamp section 620, and the left frame lamp section 630.
The sub-control board 540 is connected by harnesses to the title display board 615a, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631. A brightness adjustment means 546 adjusts the brightness of the LEDs as light-emitting elements mounted on these boards, and a light emission control means 547 controls the light emission of the LEDs as light-emitting elements mounted on these boards.

When the main control board 530 executes a lottery using the lottery means 555, it transmits a command indicating the lottery result to the sub-control board 540. Then, when the sub-control board 540 receives the command indicating the lottery result, it determines the content of the performance based on the command, and controls the title display unit 615, right frame lamp unit 620, left frame lamp unit 630, speaker 542, and image display device 543 according to the determined content of the performance.

Specifically, when a jackpot is reached in the jackpot lottery, the main control board 530 transmits a jackpot command indicating that a jackpot has been reached to the sub-control board 540.
Then, when the sub-control board 540 receives a jackpot command, the light emission control means 547 causes the light emitting elements of the title display section 615 to emit light in a pattern corresponding to the jackpot.
In addition, as a pattern corresponding to a jackpot, the output values of the red (R), green (G), and blue (B) colors of the light-emitting elements are changed in a predetermined pattern within the range of "0" to "255". This allows the light-emitting elements to emit light in so-called rainbow colors, and makes it possible to inform the player that a jackpot has been won in the jackpot lottery. In particular, since the title display unit 615 is positioned slightly above the line of sight of the player, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice that a jackpot has been won in the jackpot lottery.

In addition, when the sub-control board 540 receives a jackpot command, it determines the presentation content corresponding to the jackpot, and controls the title display unit 615, right frame lamp unit 620, left frame lamp unit 630, speaker 542, and image display device 543 according to the determined presentation content.
In this case, when the light-emitting elements of the title display section 615, the right frame lamp section 620, and the left frame lamp section 630 are caused to emit light in a pattern corresponding to a jackpot, the light-emitting control means 547 controls the time for which the light-emitting elements of the title display section 615 are lit to be shorter than the time for which the light-emitting elements of the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 are lit.

For example, when the light-emitting elements of the title display section 615, the right frame lamp section 620, and the left frame lamp section 630 are caused to emit light in a pattern corresponding to a jackpot, the light-emitting control means 547 controls the light-emitting elements of the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 to emit light for 10 seconds, and the light-emitting element of the title display section 615 to emit light for 7 seconds.
Since the title display section 615 is positioned slightly above the line of sight of the player, the light emitted from the light-emitting element of the title display section 615 easily enters the player's eyes. For this reason, if the light-emitting element of the title display section 615 is made to emit light for a long period of time, the player is likely to feel dazzled.

In particular, when executing an effect corresponding to a big win, the light-emitting elements of the title display section 615, the right frame lamp section 620, and the left frame lamp section 630 are made to emit flashy lights, so if the light-emitting elements of the title display section 615 are made to emit light for a long period of time, the player may find it dazzling.
Therefore, when executing the performance corresponding to the big win, the time for which the light emitting element of the title display unit 615 is illuminated is made shorter than the time for which the light emitting elements of the right frame lamp unit 620 and the left frame lamp unit 630 are illuminated. This makes it possible to make the player less likely to feel dazzled.

In addition, the time for which the light-emitting elements of the title display unit 615 are illuminated may be made shorter than the time for which the light-emitting elements of the right frame lamp unit 620 and the left frame lamp unit 630 are illuminated, not limited to when executing an effect corresponding to a jackpot.
For example, even when executing an effect corresponding to a high probability state (high probability state) in which the probability of winning the jackpot lottery is higher than in normal play, the time for which the light-emitting element of the title display unit 615 is illuminated can be made shorter than the time for which the light-emitting elements of the right frame lamp unit 620 and the left frame lamp unit 630 are illuminated.

Furthermore, when a jackpot is obtained in the jackpot lottery and the sub-control board 540 receives a jackpot command, the light emission control means 547 may blink the light emitting elements of the title display unit 615, the right frame lamp unit 620, and the left frame lamp unit 630 in a pattern corresponding to the jackpot. At this time, the light emission control means 547 controls the time for which the light emitting elements of the title display unit 615 are blinked to be shorter than the time for which the light emitting elements of the right frame lamp unit 620 and the left frame lamp unit 630 are blinked.
For example, when the light-emitting control means 547 causes the light-emitting elements of the title display section 615, the right frame lamp section 620, and the left frame lamp section 630 to flash in a pattern corresponding to a jackpot, it controls the light-emitting elements of the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 to flash for 10 seconds, and the light-emitting element of the title display section 615 to flash for 7 seconds.

Moreover, "blinking" means that a light emitting element is repeatedly turned on and off.
Examples of blinking patterns include a pattern in which the light-emitting element is repeatedly turned on for 1 second and turned off for 1 second, a pattern in which the light-emitting element is repeatedly turned on for 2 seconds and turned off for 2 seconds, a pattern in which the light-emitting element is repeatedly turned on for 1 second and turned off for 2 seconds, and a pattern in which the light-emitting element is repeatedly turned on for 2 seconds and turned off for 1 second.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 500, for example, one game begins when the game ball enters the start hole 532 and the start hole switch 533 is detected as being on, and one game ends when the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display device 531 ends and the special symbol is displayed stationary. Furthermore, in the pachinko gaming machine 500, if a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has passed since the last game ended without the next game being started, the sub-control board 540 can be controlled to transition to a game standby state.

Furthermore, when the game transitions to a waiting state, the sub-control means 540 displays a demo screen on the image display device 543 .
In addition, in the game standby state, the light emission control means 547 controls the time for which the light emitting elements of the title display section 615 are illuminated to be longer than the time for which the light emitting elements of the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 are illuminated.

This makes the pachinko gaming machine 500 more noticeable, and can induce players to play on the pachinko gaming machine 500.
In addition, it is possible for players and hall staff to visually confirm from a distance that the pachinko gaming machine 500 is in a waiting state for play, and it is also possible for players and hall staff to instantly confirm that the power of the pachinko gaming machine 500 is on.
Furthermore, the power consumption of the light-emitting elements of the right frame lamp unit 620 and the left frame lamp unit 630 is set to be greater than that of the title display unit 615. For this reason, in a game standby state, the time for which the light-emitting elements of the right frame lamp unit 620 and the left frame lamp unit 630 are illuminated is set to be shorter than the time for which the light-emitting elements of the title display unit 615 are illuminated, thereby making it possible to enhance the power saving effect.

135, a door opening switch 522 and a frame opening switch 523 are electrically connected to the dispensing control board 520. The door opening switch 522 is a switch that detects the opening of the glass door 505, and the frame opening switch 523 is a switch that detects the opening of the front frame 502.
When the glass door 505 is opened, the door opening switch 522 turns on, resulting in a door opening error. A door opening signal indicating that the door opening switch 522 is on is input to the dispensing control board 520 and is further transmitted to the main control board 530. When the main control board 530 detects that the door opening switch 522 is on, it transmits a door opening command indicating that the door opening switch 522 is on to the sub-control board 540.
When the sub-control board 540 receives a door open command, the light emission control means 547 controls the light emitting element of the title display section 615 to be turned off.

Furthermore, when the front frame 502 is opened, the frame opening switch 523 turns on, resulting in a frame opening error. Furthermore, a frame opening signal indicating that the frame opening switch 523 is on is input to the dispensing control board 520 and is further transmitted to the main control board 530. When the main control board 530 detects that the frame opening switch 523 is on, it transmits a frame opening command indicating that the frame opening switch 523 is on to the sub-control board 540.
Then, when the sub-control board 540 receives a frame open command, the light emission control means 547 controls the light emitting element of the title display section 615 to be turned off, in the same manner as when a door open command is received.

The title display unit 615 is located between the right frame lamp unit 620 and the left frame lamp unit 630, and is located above the vertical center of the pachinko gaming machine 500, so it is easy to notice. Therefore, by turning off the light-emitting element of this title display unit 615, it is possible to make the player or the hall staff aware that an error has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 500 (that the machine is not in a normal state).
The light-emitting element of the title display unit 615 is turned off not only when a door open error or a frame open error occurs, but also when, for example, a dispensing error occurs abnormally in the dispensing device 524 or when a setting value error occurs abnormally in a setting value.

Furthermore, when a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed since the last game ended without the next game being started, and then the selection switch 544 (any of the up direction switch 544a, down direction switch 544b, right direction switch 544c, or left direction switch 544d) is operated, the sub-control board 540 displays the menu screen shown in FIG. 136 (1) on the image display device 543.
Similarly, when the game transitions to a waiting state and a demo screen is displayed on the image display device 543, when the selection switch 544 (any of the up direction switch 544a, down direction switch 544b, right direction switch 544c, or left direction switch 544d) is operated, the sub-control board 540 displays the menu screen shown in Figure 136 (1) on the image display device 543.

Furthermore, when a menu screen is displayed on the image display device 543, by operating the up switch 544a or the down switch 544b of the selection switch 544, a "volume adjustment mode" or a "brightness adjustment mode", etc., can be selected.
Then, when the effect switch 545 is operated with the “brightness adjustment mode” selected, the sub-control board 540 transitions to the brightness adjustment mode, and displays the brightness adjustment mode screen shown in FIG. 136 (2) on the image display device 543.

In the brightness adjustment mode, the brightness of the LEDs mounted on the title display board 615a, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 can be adjusted.
As shown in FIG. 136 (2), in this embodiment, in the brightness adjustment mode, the brightness of the LEDs mounted on the title display board 615a, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 can be adjusted in five stages from “Level 1” to “Level 5.”

When a brightness adjustment mode screen is displayed on the image display device 543, one of the levels "Level 1" to "Level 5" can be selected by operating the rightward switch 544c or the leftward switch 544d of the selection switch 544.
When the effect switch 545 is operated with one of the levels selected, the sub-control board 540 determines the luminance at that level. At this time, the luminance adjustment means 546 controls the luminance of the LEDs mounted on the title display board 615a, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 to the luminance corresponding to the determined level.

FIG. 137 is a diagram showing the relationship between each of the levels "Level 1" to "Level 5" and the brightness of each LED of the title display section 615, the right frame lamp section 620, and the left frame lamp section 630.
In Fig. 137, the luminance of the LEDs of the right frame lamp unit 620 and the left frame lamp unit 630 when set to "Level 5" is set to "100", which is the reference value. Note that each numerical value shown in Fig. 137 indicates a value relative to the reference value "100", and is not a value indicating candela per square meter (cd/ ^m2 ).

137, the brightness of the LEDs of the right frame lamp unit 620 and the left frame lamp unit 630 is a maximum of "100" and a minimum of "20." In contrast, the brightness of the LEDs of the title display unit 615 is a maximum of "80" and a minimum of "16."
Furthermore, in all of the levels “Level 1” to “Level 5”, the brightness of the LED of the title display section 615 is set to a value “20%” lower than the brightness of the LED of the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 .

Furthermore, when changing from "Level 5" to "Level 4", the brightness of the LEDs in the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 drops from "100" to "80", a drop of "20%". Similarly, when changing from "Level 5" to "Level 4", the brightness of the LEDs in the title display section 615 drops from "80" to "64", a drop of "20%".

Furthermore, when changing from "Level 5" to "Level 3", the brightness of the LEDs of the right frame lamp unit 620 and the left frame lamp unit 630 drops by "40%" from "100" to "60". Similarly, when changing from "Level 5" to "Level 3", the brightness of the LEDs of the title display unit 615 drops by "40%" from "80" to "48".
Furthermore, when changing from "Level 4" to "Level 2", the brightness of the LEDs of the right frame lamp unit 620 and the left frame lamp unit 630 drops by "50%" from "80" to "40". Similarly, when changing from "Level 4" to "Level 2", the brightness of the LEDs of the title display unit 615 drops by "50%" from "64" to "32".

In this way, the brightness of the LED of the title display section 615 is set darker than the brightness of the LED of the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 .
Furthermore, the brightness adjustment means 546 is configured to change the brightness of the LEDs of the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 and the brightness of the LED of the title display section 615 at the same rate of change.
The brightness of the LEDs of the title display section 615, the right frame lamp section 620, and the left frame lamp section 630 at each of "Level 1" to "Level 5" is not limited to the values shown in Fig. 137. Moreover, the brightness levels that can be adjusted in the brightness adjustment mode are not limited to the five levels of "Level 1" to "Level 5".

Although the twenty-fourth embodiment (A) of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the twenty-fourth embodiment (A), the brightness adjustment means 546 changes the brightness of the LEDs of the right frame lamp unit 620 and the left frame lamp unit 630 and the brightness of the LED of the title display unit 615 at the same rate of change, but this is not limited to this.
FIG. 138 is a diagram showing the relationship between each of the levels "Level 1" to "Level 5" in a modified example of the 24th embodiment (A) and the brightness of each LED of the title display section 615, the right frame lamp section 620, and the left frame lamp section 630.

In Fig. 138, as in Fig. 137, the luminance of the LEDs of the right frame lamp unit 620 and the left frame lamp unit 630 when set to "Level 5" is set to "100", which is the reference value. Note that each numerical value shown in Fig. 138 also indicates a value relative to the reference value "100", and is not a value indicating candela per square meter (cd/ ^m2 ).

138, the brightness of the LEDs of the right frame lamp unit 620 and the left frame lamp unit 630 is a maximum of "100" and a minimum of "20." In contrast, the brightness of the LEDs of the title display unit 615 is a maximum of "80" and a minimum of "12."
At “Level 5,” the brightness of the LED of the title display section 615 is set to a value “20%” lower than the brightness of the LED of the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 .
At “Level 4,” the brightness of the LED of the title display section 615 is set to a value “25%” lower than the brightness of the LED of the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 .
At “Level 3,” the brightness of the LED of the title display section 615 is set to a value approximately “27%” lower than the brightness of the LED of the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 .

At “Level 2,” the brightness of the LED of the title display section 615 is set to a value “30%” lower than the brightness of the LED of the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 .
At “Level 1,” the brightness of the LED of the title display section 615 is set to a value “40%” lower than the brightness of the LED of the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 .
In this way, the brightness of the LED of the title display section 615 is set to a lower value than the brightness of the LED of the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630, and further, it is set so that the rate of decrease in brightness increases as the level becomes lower.

Furthermore, when the brightness of the LEDs of the right frame lamp unit 620 and the left frame lamp unit 630 is changed from "Level 5" to "Level 4", it drops from "100" to "80", a decrease of "20%".
In contrast, when the brightness of the LED of the title display portion 615 is changed from "Level 5" to "Level 4", it goes from "80" to "60", a decrease of "25%".
Furthermore, when the brightness of the LEDs of the right frame lamp unit 620 and the left frame lamp unit 630 is changed from "Level 5" to "Level 3", it drops from "100" to "60", a decrease of "40%".
In contrast, when the brightness of the LED of the title display portion 615 is changed from "Level 5" to "Level 3", it goes from "80" to "44", a decrease of "45%".

Furthermore, when the brightness of the LEDs of the right frame lamp unit 620 and the left frame lamp unit 630 is changed from "Level 5" to "Level 2", it drops from "100" to "40", a decrease of "60%".
In contrast, when the brightness of the LED of the title display portion 615 is changed from "Level 5" to "Level 2", it drops from "80" to "28", a decrease of "65%".
Furthermore, when the brightness of the LEDs of the right frame lamp unit 620 and the left frame lamp unit 630 is changed from "Level 5" to "Level 1", it goes from "100" to "20", a decrease of "80%".
In contrast, when the brightness of the LED of the title display portion 615 is changed from "Level 5" to "Level 1", it goes from "80" to "12", a decrease of "85%".

Furthermore, when the brightness of the LEDs of the right frame lamp unit 620 and the left frame lamp unit 630 is changed from "Level 4" to "Level 2", it drops from "80" to "40", a decrease of "50%".
In contrast, when the brightness of the LED of the title display portion 615 is changed from "Level 4" to "Level 2", it changes from "60" to "28", a decrease of approximately "53%".
Furthermore, when the brightness of the LEDs of the right frame lamp unit 620 and the left frame lamp unit 630 is changed from "Level 4" to "Level 1", it drops from "80" to "20", a decrease of "75%".
In contrast, when the brightness of the LED of the title display portion 615 is changed from "Level 4" to "Level 1", it goes from "60" to "12", a decrease of "80%".

In this way, the brightness of the LED of the title display section 615 is set darker than the brightness of the LED of the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 .
In addition, the brightness adjustment means 546 is configured so that when changing the brightness of the light-emitting elements of the title display unit 615, the right frame lamp unit 620, and the left frame lamp unit 630, the rate of change of the brightness of the LED of the title display unit 615 is greater than the rate of change of the brightness of the LEDs of the right frame lamp unit 620 and the left frame lamp unit 630.
The brightness of the LEDs of the title display unit 615, the right frame lamp unit 620, and the left frame lamp unit 630 at each of "Level 1" to "Level 5" is not limited to the values shown in Fig. 138. Moreover, the brightness levels that can be adjusted in the brightness adjustment mode are not limited to the five levels of "Level 1" to "Level 5".

For example, in FIG. 138, the brightness of the LED of the title display unit 615 at "Level 1" may be "1", and the brightness of the LED of the right frame lamp unit 620 and the left frame lamp unit 630 at "Level 1" may be "2". That is, when changing to "Level 1", the brightness of each LED of the title display unit 615, the right frame lamp unit 620, and the left frame lamp unit 630 may be significantly reduced. In this case, when changing from "Level 5" to "Level 1", the brightness of the LED of the title display unit 615 changes from "80" to "1", a reduction of approximately "99%". Also, when changing from "Level 5" to "Level 1", the brightness of the LED of the right frame lamp unit 620 and the left frame lamp unit 630 changes from "100" to "2", a reduction of "98%".

(2) In the twenty-fourth embodiment (A), the title display unit 615 is provided at the upper front portion of the game board 504, behind the glass door 505, but this is not limited to the above.
Figure 139 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 500A in a modified example of the twenty-fourth embodiment (A).
139, for example, a title display section 615 as a performance lamp section 541 may be provided on the upper front surface of the glass door 505. That is, the title display section 615 may be formed in a horizontally elongated shape extending from near the right end of the upper front surface of the glass door 505 to near the left end.
In this case, the player will be able to see the title display section 615 on the front side of the glass door 505 and above the playing area of the game board 504 .

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 500A, a modified example of the 24th embodiment (A) shown in Figure 139, is similar to the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the 24th embodiment (A) shown in Figure 133, except that a title display unit 615 is provided on the upper front surface of the glass door 505.
Furthermore, even when the title display unit 615 is provided on the upper front part of the glass door 505, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion unit 615e in the title display unit 615 is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion unit 670a in the right frame lamp unit 620 and the left frame lamp unit 630, which is the same as the pachinko game machine 500 of the 24th embodiment (A) shown in Figure 133.

(3) Figure 140 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 500B in a modified example of the twenty-fourth embodiment (A).
As shown in Figure 140, an upper frame lamp unit 610 as a performance lamp unit 541 may be provided on the upper front part of the glass door 505, and this upper frame lamp unit 610 may be provided with a title display unit 615 that emits light in the shape of letters, etc., and a surrounding decorative unit 616 which is the part other than the title display unit 615.
In this case, an upper frame lamp unit 610 is provided in front of the glass door 505 and above the playing area of the game board 504, and a title display unit 615 is provided in this upper frame lamp unit 610. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the title display unit 615 in front of the glass door 505 and above the playing area of the game board 504.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 500B, a modified example of the 24th embodiment (A) shown in Figure 140, is similar to the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the 24th embodiment (A) shown in Figure 133, except that an upper frame lamp section 610 is provided on the upper front part of the glass door 505, and a title display section 615 and a surrounding decorative section 616 are provided within this upper frame lamp section 610.
Furthermore, even when an upper frame lamp section 610 is provided on the upper front part of the glass door 505, and a title display section 615 and a surrounding decorative section 616 are provided within this upper frame lamp section 610, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 615e in the title display section 615 is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 670a in the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630, which is the same as the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the 24th embodiment (A) shown in Figure 133.

In addition, the light emission control means 547 controls the emission of light-emitting elements of the title display section 615, the peripheral decorative section 616, the right frame lamp section 620, and the left frame lamp section 630.
Furthermore, the light emission control means 547 is configured to cause the light emitting elements of the title display portion 615 and the light emitting elements of the peripheral decorative portion 616 to emit light in the same pattern at times and in different patterns at other times.
Furthermore, the light emission control means 547 controls the time during which the light-emitting elements of the title display section 615 and the light-emitting elements of the peripheral decorative section 616 emit light in different patterns so that it is longer than the time during which the light-emitting elements of the title display section 615 and the light-emitting elements of the peripheral decorative section 616 emit light in the same pattern.

Specifically, when a jackpot is reached in the jackpot lottery, the main control board 530 transmits a jackpot command indicating that a jackpot has been reached to the sub-control board 540.
In addition, when the sub-control board 540 receives a jackpot command, it determines the presentation content corresponding to the jackpot, and controls the upper frame lamp unit 610 (title display unit 615, peripheral decoration unit 616), right frame lamp unit 620, left frame lamp unit 630, speaker 542, and image display device 543 according to the determined presentation content.

At this time, the light emission control means 547 executes an effect in which the light emitting elements of the upper frame lamp unit 610 (title display unit 615, peripheral decorative unit 616), right frame lamp unit 620, and left frame lamp unit 630 are illuminated in a pattern corresponding to a jackpot.
Furthermore, when executing an effect corresponding to a big win, the light emission control means 547 controls the time for which the light emitting elements of the upper frame lamp unit 610 (title display unit 615, peripheral decoration unit 616) are illuminated to be shorter than the time for which the light emitting elements of the right frame lamp unit 620 and the left frame lamp unit 630 are illuminated. For example, the light emitting elements of the right frame lamp unit 620 and the left frame lamp unit 630 are illuminated for 10 seconds, and the light emitting elements of the upper frame lamp unit 610 (title display unit 615, peripheral decoration unit 616) are illuminated for 7 seconds.

Furthermore, when executing an effect corresponding to a jackpot, when the light-emitting elements of the upper frame lamp section 610 (title display section 615, peripheral decoration section 616) are caused to emit light for seven seconds, the light emission control means 547, for example, causes the light-emitting elements of the title display section 615 and the peripheral decoration section 616 to emit light in the same pattern for three seconds, and then in a different pattern for four seconds. In this way, the time during which the light-emitting elements of the title display section 615 and the peripheral decoration section 616 are caused to emit light in different patterns is made longer than the time during which the light-emitting elements of the title display section 615 and the peripheral decoration section 616 are caused to emit light in the same pattern.

Furthermore, when executing an effect corresponding to a jackpot, the light emission control means 547 causes the light emitting elements of the title display unit 615 to emit light in a pattern corresponding to a jackpot. To achieve the pattern corresponding to a jackpot, the red (R), green (G), and blue (B) output values of the light emitting elements are changed in a predetermined pattern within the range of "0" to "255". This allows the light emitting elements to emit light in so-called rainbow colors, making it possible to inform the player that a jackpot has been won in the jackpot lottery. In particular, since the title display unit 615 is positioned slightly above the player's line of sight, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice that a jackpot has been won in the jackpot lottery.

(3) The right frame lamp unit 620, the left frame lamp unit 630, and the title display unit 615 are not limited to being composed of a single lamp unit, and may be composed of multiple lamp units.
Specifically, the right frame lamp unit 620 can be composed of, for example, three lamp units: a first right frame lamp unit, a second right frame lamp unit, and a third right frame lamp unit.
Similarly to the right frame lamp unit 620, the left frame lamp unit 630 can also be configured, for example, from three lamp units: a first left frame lamp unit, a second left frame lamp unit, and a third left frame lamp unit.

Furthermore, the title display section 615 can be composed of, for example, two lamp sections, a first title display section and a second title display section.
Furthermore, when comparing the first right frame lamp unit, the first left frame lamp unit, and the first title display unit, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the first title display unit may be set to be higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the first right frame lamp unit and the first left frame lamp unit.

(4) In the twenty-fourth embodiment (A), the brightness of the light-emitting elements of the title display section 615, the right frame lamp section 620, and the left frame lamp section 630 can be adjusted by the brightness adjustment means 546.
In this regard, as described above, measures of brightness include "brightness,""lightintensity," and "illuminance," and the "brightness adjustment means 546" can be referred to as the "light intensity adjustment means 546" or the "illuminance adjustment means 546."
The luminance of the light-emitting elements of the title display section 615, the right frame lamp section 620, and the left frame lamp section 630 may be adjustable by the luminance adjustment means 546.
Furthermore, the illuminance adjustment means 546 may be capable of adjusting the illuminance of the surface onto which the light emitted from the light-emitting elements of the title display section 615, the right frame lamp section 620, and the left frame lamp section 630 is irradiated.

<24th embodiment (B): When the gaming machine is a slot machine>
FIG. 141 is a front view of the slot machine 10 in the twenty-fourth embodiment (B), and FIG. 142 is an oblique view of the front door 12 of the slot machine 10 in the twenty-fourth embodiment (B) as viewed from the front side (player side).
Also, Figure 143 is an exploded perspective view of the right frame lamp portion 27 of the slot machine 10 in the twenty-fourth embodiment (B) as viewed from the front side (player side).

Furthermore, Figure 144 (1) is a diagram showing an embossed portion 29f formed on the surface of the lens portion 29d of the title display portion 29, and Figure 144 (2) is a diagram showing an embossed portion 27f formed on the surface of the lens portion 27d of the right frame lamp portion 27.
Furthermore, FIG. 145(1) is a plan cross-sectional view of the slot machine 10 in the twenty-fourth embodiment (B), and FIG. 146 is a block diagram of the slot machine 10 in the twenty-fourth embodiment (B).

As shown in FIG. 141, the slot machine 10 comprises a box-shaped cabinet 13 with an opening on the front side, and a front door 12 attached to the front opening of the cabinet 13 so as to be able to open and close.
Furthermore, a door sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the front door 12 is provided at a predetermined position of the cabinet 13. When the front door 12 is opened, the door sensor is turned on, thereby detecting that the front door 12 is opened.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 22 of the seventh embodiment, a pattern display device 14 having three reels 31 arranged in a row is arranged inside the cabinet 13, and a main control board 50 housed in a main board case 56 is arranged inside the cabinet 13 at a position corresponding to above the pattern display device 14.
141, a transparent display window 18 is provided in the center of the front door 12. This display window 18 is disposed in a position corresponding to the front of the symbol display device 14. This allows the player to view the symbols on each reel 31 of the symbol display device 14 from the front side of the slot machine 10 through the display window 18.

Also, as shown in Figures 141 and 142, on the front side (player side) of the front door 12, below the display window 18, there are arranged a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a settlement switch 43, a selection switch 88, a performance switch 89, and a medal insertion slot 47, etc.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 141, an image display device 23 is disposed on the front side (player side) of the front door 12 above the display window 18 .
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 22 of the seventh embodiment, a sub-control board 80 housed in a sub-board case 87 is disposed at the upper part of the rear side of the front door 12, at a position corresponding to the rear side of the image display device 23.

Also, as shown in Figures 141 and 142, a title display unit 29 as a performance lamp 21 is provided at the upper front part of the front door 12, a right frame lamp unit 27 as a performance lamp 21 is provided at the right side of the front part of the front door 12, and a left frame lamp unit 28 as a performance lamp 21 is provided at the left side of the front part of the front door 12.
The title display section 29 is a horizontally elongated performance lamp 21 that extends from near the right end to near the left end of the upper front surface of the front door 12 .
In addition, the right frame lamp portion 27 is a vertically elongated performance lamp 21 that extends from near the top end to near the bottom end of the front right side of the front door 12.
Furthermore, the left frame lamp portion 28 is a vertically elongated performance lamp 21 that extends from near the top end to near the bottom end of the front left side of the front door 12.

The title display unit 29 is the effect lamp 21 that emits light in the shape of letters, symbols, etc. Specifically, the title display unit 29 emits light in the shape of letters, symbols, etc. that indicate the model name of the slot machine 10, for example.
Furthermore, the title display unit 29 is provided between the right frame lamp unit 27 and the left frame lamp unit 28 (to the left of the right frame lamp unit 27 and to the right of the left frame lamp unit 28) and above the center in the height direction of the slot machine 10. As a result, when the player looks at the slot machine 10 from the front, the title display unit 29 is located slightly above the player's line of sight.
In addition, the peripheral portion of the display window 18 on the front surface of the front door 12, the peripheral portions of the right frame lamp portion 27 and the left frame lamp portion 28 on the front surface of the front door 12, and the right frame lamp portion 27 and the left frame lamp portion 28 are each colored differently.

The title display section 29 includes a title display board 29a and a title display cover 29b.
The title display board 29a is a lamp board on which light-emitting elements for illuminating the title display section 29 and a connector for connecting a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light-emitting elements are mounted. A plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted on the title display board 29a as light-emitting elements. All of these LEDs are full-color LEDs.

The title display cover 29b is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the title display board 29a, and is attached to the upper front part of the front door 12.
Furthermore, the title display cover 29b has characters, symbols, etc., affixed thereto, and these characters, symbols, etc. emit light.
Specifically, a lens portion 29d is provided on the title display cover 29b at a position facing the title display substrate 29a. The lens portion 29d is formed in the shape of a letter, symbol, or the like, and is made of a translucent resin. The rest of the title display cover 29b, except for the lens portion 29d, is made of a non-translucent resin.
Furthermore, light emitted from the light-emitting elements mounted on the title display board 29a is irradiated toward the inside of the title display cover 29b, passes through lens portions 29d formed in the shapes of letters, symbols, etc., and reaches the outside of the title display cover 29b. As a result, the title display cover 29b appears to emit light in the shapes of letters, symbols, etc.

The inner surface of the lens portion 29d (the surface on the side of the title display substrate 29a) is provided with an embossed portion 29f. This embossed portion 29f functions as a light diffusion portion 29e that diffuses the light emitted from the LEDs serving as light-emitting elements, and is formed by providing a fine uneven pattern on the inner surface of the lens portion 29d during injection molding of the lens portion 29d. As shown in FIG. 144(1), the uneven pattern that constitutes the embossed portion 29d is a pattern with numerous pyramidal protrusions.

In this way, by providing an embossed portion 29f on the inner surface of the lens portion 29d and having this embossed portion 29f function as a light diffusion portion 29e, the LED can be made less noticeable. Also, the entire lens portion 29d can be made to appear to shine evenly, and thus letters, symbols, etc. can be made to appear to shine evenly. Furthermore, even when looking at the letters, symbols, etc. on the title display portion 29, the player will not feel dazzled.

In addition, the uneven pattern constituting the embossed portion 29f is not limited to a pattern having a large number of quadrangular pyramidal protrusions, but may be, for example, a pattern having a large number of triangular pyramidal protrusions, a pattern having a large number of hemispherical protrusions, or a pattern having a large number of striated protrusions.
Further, the light diffusion portion 29e is not limited to being formed by providing the textured portion 29f on the inner surface of the lens portion 29d.
For example, the light diffusion section 29e may be formed by providing an embossed section 29f on the outer surface of the lens section 29d (the surface opposite to the title display substrate 29a). Also, for example, the light diffusion section 29e may be formed by providing an embossed section 29f on both the inner and outer surfaces of the lens section 29d.

Furthermore, for example, the light diffusion portion 29e may be formed by kneading a light diffusion agent that diffuses light into the resin that constitutes the lens portion 29d.
Furthermore, for example, the light diffusion section 29e may be formed by disposing a light diffusion sheet that diffuses light between the title display substrate 29a and the lens section 29d, that is, between the light emitting element and the lens section 29d.

The light diffusion section 29e may be formed, for example, by a combination of the textured section 29f and a light diffusion agent, or by a combination of the textured section 29f and a light diffusion sheet, or by a combination of a light diffusion agent and a light diffusion sheet, or by a combination of the textured section 29f, a light diffusion agent and a light diffusion sheet.

As shown in FIG. 143, the right frame lamp section 27 includes a right frame lamp base 27c, a right frame lamp board 27a, and a right frame lamp cover 27b.
The right frame lamp base 27c is a member that serves as the base of the right frame lamp unit 27. The right frame lamp unit 27 is configured by attaching the right frame lamp board 27a and the right frame lamp cover 27b to the front side of the right frame lamp base 27c.

The right frame lamp board 27a is a lamp board on which are mounted light-emitting elements for illuminating the right frame lamp section 27 and a connector to which a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light-emitting elements is connected, and it is attached to the front right side of the front door 12 with the mounting surface of the light-emitting elements facing the front side (player side).
143, four LEDs 160a to 160d are mounted as light-emitting elements on the front surface of the right frame lamp board 27a. All of these LEDs are full-color LEDs.

In addition, the mounting surface of the right frame lamp board 27a on which the LEDs 160a to 160d are mounted is configured in white color ("substantially white" or "a color similar to white").
This prevents the appearance of the right frame lamp unit 27 from being impaired, as described in the twenty-third embodiment. In addition, the light emitted from the LEDs 160a to 160d can be efficiently reflected toward the right frame lamp cover 27b, so that the right frame lamp cover 27b can be made to appear brighter. Furthermore, the colors of the LEDs 160a to 160d can be made to appear beautiful.
Incidentally, the "substantially white" and the "color similar to white" are as explained in the 24th embodiment (A).

As shown in FIG. 143, the right frame lamp board 27a is fixed to the right frame lamp base 27c with screws 683a to 683c.
Furthermore, when the right frame lamp board 27a is fixed to the right frame lamp base 27c with the screws 683a to 683c, the screw heads 689a to 689c of the screws 683a to 683c are exposed on the mounting surface side of the right frame lamp board 27a on which the LEDs 160a to 160c are mounted. In this state, the height of the screw heads 689a to 689c of the screws 683a to 683c is set to be larger (higher) than the height of the LEDs 160a to 160c, based on the mounting surface of the right frame lamp board 27a on which the LEDs 160a to 160c are mounted.
That is, the screw heads 689a to 689c of the screws 683a to 683c are set to be higher (greater) than the LEDs 160a to 160c from the mounting surface of the right frame lamp board 27a on which the LEDs 160a to 160c are mounted.

Furthermore, the screw heads 689a to 689c of the screws 683a to 683c are formed into a convex curved shape (dome shape), and the surfaces of the screw heads 689a to 689c of the screws 683a to 683c are subjected to a surface treatment that reflects the light emitted from the LEDs 160a to 160c.
Specifically, the LEDs 160a to 160c are plated with silver as a surface treatment that reflects the light emitted from them. Examples of silver plating include silver plating, chrome plating, nickel plating, tin plating, tin-cobalt plating, and zinc plating.

In this way, the height of the screw heads 689a to 689c of the screws 683a to 683c is set to be greater than the height of the LEDs 160a to 160c, based on the mounting surface of the LEDs 160a to 160c. The screw heads 689a to 689c of the screws 683a to 683c are also formed into a convex curved shape. Furthermore, a surface treatment that reflects light is applied to the surfaces of the screw heads 689a to 689c of the screws 683a to 683c. This allows the light emitted from the LEDs 160a to 160c to be reflected by the screw heads 689a to 689c of the screws 683a to 683c. Therefore, the screw heads 689a to 689c of the screws 683a to 683c can be made to appear to shine like light-emitting elements, making the right frame lamp unit 27 appear to shine brighter.

The right frame lamp cover 27b is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the right frame lamp board 27a, and is attached to the front right side of the front door 12.
The right frame lamp cover 27b also has a lens portion 27d, an auxiliary lens portion 27g, a decorative portion 27i, and a side wall portion 27h.
The lens portion 27d guides the light emitted from the LEDs 160a to 160d mounted on the right-frame lamp board 27a to the front side (the player side) and is made of a translucent resin. The lens portion 27d is provided in the right-frame lamp cover 27b at a position facing the right-frame lamp board 27a.

The inner surface of the lens portion 27d (the surface on the right frame lamp substrate 27a side) is provided with a textured portion 27f. This textured portion 27f functions as a light diffusion portion 29e that diffuses the light emitted from the LEDs 160a to 160d as light-emitting elements, and is formed by providing a fine uneven pattern on the inner surface of the lens portion 27d during injection molding of the lens portion 27d. In addition, as the uneven pattern that constitutes the textured portion 27d, a pattern with many quadrangular pyramidal protrusions is formed as shown in FIG. 144 (2).

The auxiliary lens section 27g, like the lens section 27d, guides the light emitted from the LEDs 160a to 160d mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a to the front side (the player side) and is made of a translucent resin. The inner surface of the auxiliary lens section 27g is provided with a textured section 27f that functions as a light diffusion section 29e, like the lens section 27d.
Furthermore, the decorative portion 27i is provided around the lens portion 27d and is made of a resin that does not transmit light. The surface of the decorative portion 27i is plated with silver.

Furthermore, the side wall portion 27h is a portion that supports the lens portion 27d and the decorative portion 27i, and is formed so as to protrude forward from a portion that corresponds to the outer periphery of the right frame lamp substrate 27a. Similarly to the decorative portion 27i, the side wall portion 27h is formed of a resin that does not have translucency, and the surface of the side wall portion 27h is plated in silver.
In the right frame lamp portion 27 as well, by providing an embossed portion 27f on the inner surface of the lens portion 27d and the auxiliary lens portion 27g and having this embossed portion 27f function as a light diffusion portion 27e, the LED can be made to look less noticeable, and the entire lens portion 27d and the auxiliary lens portion 27g can be made to appear to shine evenly, and further, the player can be prevented from feeling dazzled.

In addition, the uneven pattern constituting the embossed portion 27f is not limited to a pattern having a large number of quadrangular pyramidal protrusions, but may be, for example, a pattern having a large number of triangular pyramidal protrusions, a pattern having a large number of hemispherical protrusions, or a pattern having a large number of striated protrusions.
Further, the light diffusion portion 27e is not limited to being formed by providing the textured portion 27f on the inner surface of the lens portion 27d.
For example, the light diffusion portion 27e may be formed by providing a textured portion 29f on the outer surface of the lens portion 27d (the surface opposite to the right frame lamp substrate 27a). Also, for example, the light diffusion portion 27e may be formed by providing textured portions 27f on both the inner and outer surfaces of the lens portion 27d.

Furthermore, for example, the light diffusion portion 27e may be formed by kneading a light diffusion agent that diffuses light into the resin that constitutes the lens portion 27d.
Furthermore, for example, a light diffusion section 27e may be formed by disposing a light diffusion sheet that diffuses light between the right frame lamp substrate 27a and the lens section 27d, i.e., between the light emitting element and the lens section 27d.
In addition, the light diffusion portion 27e may be formed, for example, by a combination of the embossed portion 27f and a light diffusion agent, or may be formed by a combination of the embossed portion 27f and a light diffusion sheet, or may be formed by a combination of a light diffusion agent and a light diffusion sheet, or may be formed by a combination of the embossed portion 27f, a light diffusion agent and a light diffusion sheet.

141, the left frame lamp section 28 includes a left frame lamp board 28a and a left frame lamp cover 28b. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the left frame lamp board 28a, and the left frame lamp cover 28b is provided with a lens section 28d that guides light emitted from the LEDs on the left frame lamp board 28a to the front side, and the inner surface of the lens section 28d is provided with an embossed section 28f that functions as a light diffusion section 28e that diffuses the light emitted from the LEDs. The left frame lamp section 28 is formed in a shape symmetrical to the right frame lamp section 27.
Also, in the left frame lamp section 28, an embossed section 28f that functions as a light diffusion section 28e is provided on the inner surface of the lens section 28d, making the LED less noticeable and making the entire lens section 28d appear to shine evenly, and further preventing the player from feeling dazzled.

Also, as shown in Figures 144 (1) and (2), the embossed portion 29f serving as the light diffusion portion 29e formed on the surface of the lens portion 29d of the title display portion 29 has a finer uneven pattern than the embossed portion 27f serving as the light diffusion portion 27e formed on the surface of the lens portion 27d of the right frame lamp portion 27.
Furthermore, the embossed portion 28f as a light diffusion portion 28e formed on the surface of the lens portion 28d of the left frame lamp portion 28 is similar to the embossed portion 27f as a light diffusion portion 27e formed on the surface of the lens portion 27d of the right frame lamp portion 27.

As a result, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 29e in the title display section 29 is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 27e in the right frame lamp section 27 and the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 28e in the left frame lamp section 28. In other words, the title display section 29 is more likely to scatter light emitted from the light-emitting elements than the right frame lamp section 27 and the left frame lamp section 28.
Therefore, the LEDs in the title display section 29 can be made less noticeable than those in the right frame lamp section 27 and the left frame lamp section 28, can be made to shine evenly, and furthermore, can be made to be less likely to be felt as dazzling by the player.

As described above, the title display unit 29 is provided between the right frame lamp unit 27 and the left frame lamp unit 28, above the center in the height direction of the slot machine 10, and the title display unit 29 is located slightly above the line of sight of the player when the player looks straight at the slot machine 10. For this reason, the light emitted from the title display unit 29 is more easily received by the player than the light emitted from the right frame lamp unit 27 or the left frame lamp unit 28.
Therefore, in this embodiment, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 29e in the title display section 29 is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 27e in the right frame lamp section 27 and the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 28e in the left frame lamp section 28, making it less likely that the player will feel dazzled.

Furthermore, characters, symbols, etc. are displayed on the title display section 29, but if the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 29e in the title display section 29 is low, the LEDs will stand out, the characters, symbols, etc. will not shine evenly, and the player will feel dazzled. This will make it difficult for the player to recognize the characters, symbols, etc.
Therefore, in this embodiment, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 29e in the title display section 29 is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 27e in the right frame lamp section 27 and the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 28e in the left frame lamp section 28. This makes the letters, symbols, etc. appear to shine evenly, making it easier for the player to recognize the letters, symbols, etc.

The distance from the title display board 29a and the LEDs to the lens portion 29d in the title display section 29 is set to be shorter than the distance from the right frame lamp board 27a and the LEDs to the lens portion 27d in the right frame lamp section 27.
Specifically, in the title display unit 29, the maximum distance from the title display board 29a to the lens unit 29d in the direction perpendicular to the LED mounting surface is set to distance "M3."
In the right frame lamp section 27, the maximum distance from the right frame lamp board 27a to the lens section 27d in the direction perpendicular to the mounting surface of the LEDs is defined as distance "M4."
The distance "M3" is set to be shorter than the distance "M4." That is, the distance "M4" is set to be longer than the distance "M3."

In this way, by setting the distance from the right frame lamp board 27a and LED to the lens section 27d in the right frame lamp section 27 longer than the distance from the title display board 29a and LED to the lens section 29d in the title display section 29, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dazzled even if the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 27e in the right frame lamp section 27 is lower than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 29e in the title display section 29.
As with the right frame lamp unit 27, the distance from the left frame lamp board 28a and LEDs to the lens unit 28d of the left frame lamp unit 28 is set to be longer than the distance from the title display board 29a and LEDs to the lens unit 29d.

In the title display unit 29, the title display substrate 29a is formed in a flat plate shape, but the lens portion 29d has curved and inclined portions, etc., and therefore the distance from the title display substrate 29a to the lens portion 29d is not constant.
Similarly, in the right frame lamp section 27, the right frame lamp substrate 27a is formed in a flat plate shape, but the lens section 27d has curved portions and inclined portions, etc., so the distance from the right frame lamp substrate 27a to the lens section 27d is not constant.
For this reason, the distance is compared between the portion where the distance from the title display board 29a to the lens portion 29d is maximum and the portion where the distance from the right frame lamp board 27a to the lens portion 27d is maximum.

Also, as shown in the enlarged view of part A in Figure 145 (1), the left frame lamp unit 28 comprises a left frame lamp board 28a on which the LED 160 is mounted, and a left frame lamp cover 28b that covers the mounting surface of the LED 160 on the left frame lamp board 28a.
The left frame lamp cover 28b also includes a lens portion 28d and a side wall portion 28h.
The lens portion 28d guides the light emitted from the LED 160 mounted on the left frame lamp board 28a to the front side (the player side) and is made of a translucent resin. The lens portion 28d is provided in the left frame lamp cover 28b at a position facing the left frame lamp board 28a.

The side wall portion 28h is a portion that supports the lens portion 28d, and is formed so as to protrude forward from a portion that corresponds to the outer circumferential edge of the left frame lamp substrate 28a. The side wall portion 28h is made of a resin that does not have light-transmitting properties.
Since side wall portion 28h is formed from a resin that does not have translucency and lens portion 28d is formed from a resin that has translucency, light emitted from LED 160 mounted on left frame lamp board 28a does not transmit to the outside of left frame lamp cover 28b from side wall portion 28h closer to left frame lamp board 28a, but transmits to the outside of left frame lamp cover 28b from lens portion 28d farther from left frame lamp board 28a.

This prevents the light emitted from the LED 160 mounted on the left frame lamp board 28a from traveling in the direction of the display window 18 located in the center of the front of the front door 12, so that the light emitted from the LED 160 mounted on the left frame lamp board 28a is not reflected by the display window 18 and makes it difficult to see the display window 18.

As shown in modified example 1 of part A in FIG. 145(2), the side wall portion 28h may be provided only on the right side (the display window 18 side). Even in this way, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from the LED 160 mounted on the left frame lamp board 28a from traveling in the direction of the display window 18, and to prevent the light emitted from the LED 160 mounted on the left frame lamp board 28a from being reflected by the display window 18 and making it difficult to see the display window 18.

Also, as shown in modified example 2 of part A in FIG. 145(3), for example, the shape of the lens portion 28d in a plan cross section may be triangular, and the angle between the right side (display window 18 side) of the lens portion 28d and the display window 18 may be set to an obtuse angle. Even in this way, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from the LED 160 mounted on the left frame lamp board 28a from traveling in the direction of the display window 18, and to prevent the light emitted from the LED 160 mounted on the left frame lamp board 28a from obscuring the display window 18.

Furthermore, although not shown, the right frame lamp unit 27 and the left frame lamp unit 28 may be provided at a position behind the display window 18 (opposite the player). In other words, the mounting positions of the right frame lamp unit 27 and the left frame lamp unit 28 may be shifted (offset) behind the position of the display window 18. Even in this way, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from the LEDs 160 mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 28a from traveling in the direction of the display window 18, and it is possible to prevent the light emitted from the LEDs 160 mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 28a from obscuring the display window 18.

In addition, although not shown, the right frame lamp unit 27 and the left frame lamp unit 28 may be provided in front of the display window 18 (towards the player), as opposed to the above case. In other words, the mounting positions of the right frame lamp unit 27 and the left frame lamp unit 28 may be shifted (offset) forward from the position of the display window 18. Even in this way, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from the LEDs 160 mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 28a from traveling in the direction of the display window 18, and it is possible to prevent the light emitted from the LEDs 160 mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 28a from obscuring the display window 18.

As shown in FIG. 146, the slot machine 10 includes a main control board 50 and a sub-control board 80.
The main control board 50 controls the progress of the game, and includes an input port 51, an output port 52, a RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, etc. The main control board 50 is also electrically connected to a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a settlement switch 43, a symbol display device 14, a sub-control board 80, etc. via the input port 51 or the output port 52. The main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 further includes a role selection means 61, a reel control means 65, a winning determination means 66, a payout means 67, etc.

When the bet switch 40 is operated, the credited medals are bet. Also, when medals are inserted through the medal insertion slot 47, the inserted medals are bet. Then, when the start switch 41 is operated with the specified number of medals bet, the main control board 50 performs a lottery using the role selection means 61, and also controls the drive of all the motors 32 using the reel control means 65 to spin all the reels 31.

Thereafter, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the main control board 50 drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to that stop switch 42 to stop the reel 31 associated with that motor 32 in accordance with the lottery result of the role selection means 61.
The game result is displayed based on the symbol combination when all reels 31 stop. When a symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination stops on an active line, the winning determination means 66 determines that the winning combination has won, and the payout means 67 pays out medals corresponding to the winning combination.

The sub-control board 80 controls the output of the effects, and includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub-CPU 85, etc. The sub-control board 80 is also electrically connected to the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, the image display device 23, a selection switch 88, an effect switch 89, the main control board 50, etc. via the input port 81 or the output port 82. The sub-CPU 85 of the sub-control board 80 also includes effect output control means 91, brightness adjustment means 92, and light emission control means 93, etc.

The selection switch 88 and the effect switch 89 are switches used for effects and the like, and are operated when the player wants to display specific information or when making various settings.
Furthermore, the selection switch 88 includes an up switch 88a, a down switch 88b, a right switch 88c, and a left switch 88d.

The brightness adjustment means 92 adjusts the brightness of the light-emitting elements of the title display section 29, the right frame lamp section 27, and the left frame lamp section 28, and the light emission control means 93 controls the light emission of the light-emitting elements of the title display section 29, the right frame lamp section 27, and the left frame lamp section 28.
The sub-control board 80 is connected to the title display board 29a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a by harnesses. A brightness adjustment means 92 adjusts the brightness of the LEDs as light-emitting elements mounted on these boards, and a light emission control means 93 controls the light emission of the LEDs as light-emitting elements mounted on these boards.

When a lottery is conducted by the role selection means 61, the main control board 50 transmits a command corresponding to the lottery result to the sub-control board 80.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives a command corresponding to the lottery result, the performance output control means 91 determines a performance pattern based on the received command, and the light emission control means 93 controls the light emission of the light-emitting elements mounted on the title display board 29a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a in accordance with that determination.

Specifically, when the winning number corresponding to a special role is selected by the role selection means 61, the main control board 50 transmits a special role command indicating this to the sub-control board 80.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives a special role command, the performance output control means 91 determines a performance pattern corresponding to the special role based on the special role command, and the light emission control means 93 causes the light-emitting elements of the title display board 29a to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the special role in accordance with the determination.

In addition, as a light emission pattern corresponding to a special role, the output values of the red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light-emitting elements are changed in a predetermined pattern within the range of "0" to "255". This allows the light-emitting elements to emit light in so-called rainbow colors, informing the player that he or she has won a special role. In particular, since the title display unit 29 is positioned slightly above the player's line of sight, it is easy for the player to notice that he or she has won a special role.

When the sub-control board 80 receives a special role command, the performance output control means 91 determines a performance pattern corresponding to the special role based on the special role command, and the light emission control means 93 controls the light emission of the light-emitting elements mounted on the title display board 29a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a according to the determination. At this time, the light emission control means 93 controls the time for which the light-emitting elements mounted on the title display board 29a are illuminated to be shorter than the time for which the light-emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 28a are illuminated.

For example, when the light-emitting elements mounted on the title display board 29a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a are caused to emit light in a performance pattern corresponding to a special role, the light-emitting control means 93 controls the light-emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 28a to emit light for 10 seconds and the light-emitting element mounted on the title display board 29a to emit light for 7 seconds.
Since the title display section 29 is positioned slightly above the line of sight of the player, the light emitted from the light-emitting elements of the title display section 29 is likely to enter the player's eyes. For this reason, if the light-emitting elements of the title display section 29 are made to emit light for a long period of time, the player is likely to feel dazzled.

In particular, when executing a performance corresponding to a special role, the light-emitting elements of the title display section 29, the right frame lamp section 27, and the left frame lamp section 28 are made to emit flashy light, so if the light-emitting elements of the title display section 29 are made to emit light for a long period of time, the player may feel dazzled.
Therefore, when performing the effect corresponding to the special combination, the time for which the light emitting element of the title display unit 29 is illuminated is made shorter than the time for which the light emitting elements of the right frame lamp unit 27 and the left frame lamp unit 28 are illuminated. This makes it possible to make the player less likely to feel dazzled.

In addition, the time for which the light-emitting elements of the title display section 29 are illuminated may be made shorter than the time for which the light-emitting elements of the right frame lamp section 27 and the left frame lamp section 28 are illuminated, not only when executing a performance corresponding to a special role.
For example, even when a lottery as to whether or not to execute the AT is won and it is decided to execute the AT, the light-emitting elements of the title display section 29 can be illuminated in rainbow colors, and the time for which the light-emitting elements of the title display section 29 are illuminated can be made shorter than the time for which the light-emitting elements of the right frame lamp section 27 and the left frame lamp section 28 are illuminated.

In addition, when the winning number corresponding to a special role is won by the role selection means 61 and the sub-control board 80 receives a special role command, the light emission control means 93 may blink the light emitting elements mounted on the title display board 29a, right frame lamp board 27a, and left frame lamp board 28a (the light emitting elements of the title display section 29, right frame lamp section 27, and left frame lamp section 28) in a pattern corresponding to the special role. At this time, the light emission control means 93 controls the time for which the light emitting elements mounted on the title display board 29a are blinked to be shorter than the time for which the light emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a and left frame lamp board 28a are blinked.

For example, when the light emitting elements mounted on the title display board 29a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a are caused to flash in a performance pattern corresponding to a special role, the light emitting control means 93 controls the light emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 28a to flash for 10 seconds, and the light emitting elements mounted on the title display board 29a to flash for 7 seconds.

Moreover, "blinking" refers to repeatedly turning on and off a light-emitting element, as explained in the twenty-fourth embodiment (A).
Examples of blinking patterns include a pattern in which the light-emitting element is repeatedly turned on for 1 second and turned off for 1 second, a pattern in which the light-emitting element is repeatedly turned on for 2 seconds and turned off for 2 seconds, a pattern in which the light-emitting element is repeatedly turned on for 1 second and turned off for 2 seconds, and a pattern in which the light-emitting element is repeatedly turned on for 2 seconds and turned off for 1 second.

In addition, in the slot machine 10, for example, one game begins when the start switch 41 is operated with a specified number of medals bet, and one game ends when all the reels 31 stop, the winning determination means 66 determines whether or not a prize has been won, and the payout means 67 performs the medal payout process.
Furthermore, in the slot machine 10, when a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the end of the last game without any medals being bet, the sub-control board 80 can be controlled to transition to a game standby state.

Specifically, when the game ends, the main control board 50 transmits a game end command indicating that fact to the sub-control board 80. Then, when a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since receiving the game end command, the sub-control board 80 transitions to a game standby state and switches the display on the image display device 23 from a game screen to a demo screen.
In the game standby state, the light emission control means 93 shifts the light emission pattern of the light emitting elements of the title display section 29, the right frame lamp section 27, and the left frame lamp section 28 from the light emission pattern in the game state to the light emission pattern in the game standby state. Specifically, in the game standby state, the light emission control means 93 controls the time during which the light emitting elements of the title display section 29 are illuminated to be longer than the time during which the light emitting elements of the right frame lamp section 27 and the left frame lamp section 28 are illuminated. This makes the slot machine 10 more noticeable, and induces the player to play with the slot machine 10.

In addition, when a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 47 and bet, or when the bet switch 40 is operated to bet credited medals, the main control board 50 sends a bet command indicating this to the sub-control board 80.
When the sub-control board 80 receives a bet command in the game standby state, it ends the game standby state and switches the display of the image display device 23 from the demo screen to the game screen. Also, the light emission control means 93 switches the light emission patterns of the light-emitting elements of the title display unit 29, the right frame lamp unit 27, and the left frame lamp unit 28 from the light emission pattern in the game standby state to the light emission pattern in the game state.

Errors that may occur in the slot machine 10 include, for example, a medal jam (stagnation) error in the hopper 35, an empty medal error in the hopper 35, an abnormality in the payout sensor 37 of the hopper 35, a medal stall error in the medal selector, an illegal medal passage error in the medal selector, an abnormality in the passage sensor 46 located in the medal selector, an abnormality in the insertion sensor 44 located in the medal selector, an abnormal medal insertion error, a full sub-tank, an open front door 12, etc.

When the main control board 50 detects the occurrence of an error, it transmits an error command indicating the occurrence to the sub-control board 80. Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the error command, the light emission control means 93 controls the light emitting element of the title display section 29 to be turned off.
The title display section 29 is easily noticeable because it is located between the right frame lamp section 27 and the left frame lamp section 28 and above the center of the height of the slot machine 10. Therefore, by turning off the light-emitting element of this title display section 29, it is possible to make a player or a hall attendant aware that an error has occurred in the slot machine 10 (that the slot machine 10 is not in a normal state).

In addition, in the slot machine 10, after the last game is completed, if a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) passes without any medals being bet, and then the selection switch 88 (any of the up direction switch 88a, down direction switch 88b, right direction switch 88c, or left direction switch 88d) is operated, the sub-control board 80 displays on the image display device 23 a menu screen similar to the example of the pachinko game machine 500 shown in Figure 136 (1).
Furthermore, when the selection switch 88 (any of the up direction switch 88a, down direction switch 88b, right direction switch 88c, or left direction switch 88d) is operated in the game standby state, the sub-control board 80 displays on the image display device 23 a menu screen similar to the example of the pachinko game machine 500 shown in Figure 136 (1).

When the menu screen is displayed on the image display device 23, the "volume adjustment mode", "brightness adjustment mode", etc. can be selected by operating the up switch 88a or the down switch 88b of the selection switch 88.
Then, when the effect switch 89 is operated with the "brightness adjustment mode" selected, the sub-control board 80 transitions to the brightness adjustment mode, and displays on the image display device 543 a brightness adjustment mode screen similar to the example of the pachinko game machine 500 shown in Figure 136 (2).

In the brightness adjustment mode, the brightness of the LEDs mounted on the title display board 29a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a can be adjusted.
In this embodiment, similar to the example of the pachinko game machine 500 shown in Figure 136 (2), the brightness of the LEDs mounted on the title display board 29a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a can be adjusted in five levels from "Level 1" to "Level 5."

When the brightness adjustment mode screen is displayed on the image display device 23, one of the levels "Level 1" to "Level 5" can be selected by operating the right direction switch 88c or the left direction switch 88d of the selection switch 88.
When the effect switch 89 is operated with one of the levels selected, the sub-control board 80 determines the luminance at that level. At this time, the luminance adjustment means 92 controls the luminance of the LEDs mounted on the title display board 29a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a to the luminance corresponding to the determined level.

In this embodiment, similarly to the example of the pachinko game machine 500 shown in Fig. 137, the brightness of the LEDs of the right frame lamp unit 27 and the left frame lamp unit 28 is a maximum of "100" and a minimum of "20." In contrast, the brightness of the LEDs of the title display unit 29 is a maximum of "80" and a minimum of "16."
The brightness of the LEDs in the title display section 29 is set darker than the brightness of the LEDs in the right frame lamp section 27 and the left frame lamp section 28, similar to the example of the pachinko gaming machine 500 shown in Figure 137.
Also, the brightness adjustment means 92 is configured to change the brightness of the LEDs of the right frame lamp section 27 and the left frame lamp section 28 and the brightness of the LED of the title display section 29 at the same rate of change, which is similar to the example of the pachinko gaming machine 500 shown in Figure 137.

Although the twenty-fourth embodiment (B) of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the twenty-fourth embodiment (B), the brightness adjustment means 92 changes the brightness of the LEDs of the right frame lamp section 27 and the left frame lamp section 28 and the brightness of the LED of the title display section 29 at the same rate of change, but this is not limited to this.
As in the modified example of the pachinko game machine 500 shown in Figure 138, when the brightness of the light-emitting elements of the title display unit 29, right frame lamp unit 27, and left frame lamp unit 28 is changed, the rate of change of the brightness of the LED of the title display unit 29 may be configured to be greater than the rate of change of the brightness of the LED of the right frame lamp unit 27 and left frame lamp unit 28.

(2) Figure 147 is a front view of a slot machine 10A in a modified example of the twenty-fourth embodiment (B).
As shown in Figure 147, an upper frame lamp section 26 as a performance lamp section 21 may be provided on the upper front part of the front door 12, and this upper frame lamp section 26 may be provided with a title display section 29 that emits light in the shape of letters or the like, and a peripheral decorative section 26d which is the part other than the title display section 29.
In addition, the slot machine 10A of the modified example of the 24th embodiment (B) shown in Figure 147 is similar to the slot machine 10 of the 24th embodiment (B) shown in Figure 141 except that an upper frame lamp portion 26 is provided on the upper front part of the front door 12, and a title display portion 29 and a peripheral decorative portion 26d are provided within this upper frame lamp portion 26.

In the slot machine 10A of the modified example of the 24th embodiment (B) shown in FIG. 147, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 29e in the title display section 29 is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 27e in the right frame lamp section 27 and the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 28e in the left frame lamp section 28, just like the slot machine 10 of the 24th embodiment (B) shown in FIG. 141.

In addition, the light emission control means 93 controls the emission of light-emitting elements of the title display section 29, the peripheral decorative section 26d, the right frame lamp section 27, and the left frame lamp section 28.
Furthermore, the light emission control means 93 is configured to cause the light emitting elements of the title display section 29 and the light emitting elements of the peripheral decorative section 26d to emit light in the same pattern at times and in different patterns at other times.
Furthermore, the light emission control means 93 controls the time during which the light-emitting elements of the title display section 29 and the light-emitting elements of the peripheral decorative section 26d are illuminated in different patterns so that it is longer than the time during which the light-emitting elements of the title display section 29 and the light-emitting elements of the peripheral decorative section 26d are illuminated in the same pattern.

Specifically, when the winning number corresponding to a special role is selected by the role selection means 61, the main control board 50 transmits a special role command indicating this to the sub-control board 80.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives a special role command, the performance output control means 91 determines a performance pattern corresponding to the special role based on the special role command, and the light emission control means 93 controls the light emission of the light-emitting elements of the upper frame lamp unit 26 (title display unit 29, peripheral decorative unit 26d), right frame lamp unit 27, and left frame lamp unit 28 in accordance with the determination.

At this time, the light emission control means 93 executes an effect in which the light emitting elements of the upper frame lamp section 26 (title display section 29, peripheral decorative section 26d), right frame lamp section 27, and left frame lamp section 28 are illuminated in a pattern corresponding to the special role.
Furthermore, when executing a performance corresponding to a special role, the light emission control means 93 controls the time for which the light emitting elements of the upper frame lamp section 26 (title display section 29, peripheral decoration section 26d) are illuminated to be shorter than the time for which the light emitting elements of the right frame lamp section 27 and the left frame lamp section 28 are illuminated. For example, the light emitting elements of the right frame lamp section 27 and the left frame lamp section 28 are illuminated for 10 seconds, and the light emitting elements of the upper frame lamp section 26 (title display section 29, peripheral decoration section 26d) are illuminated for 7 seconds.

Furthermore, when executing a performance corresponding to a special role, when the light-emitting elements of the upper frame lamp section 26 (title display section 29, peripheral decoration section 26d) are illuminated for 7 seconds, the light-emitting control means 93, for example, causes the light-emitting elements of the title display section 29 and the light-emitting elements of the peripheral decoration section 26d to illuminate in the same pattern for 3 seconds and then in a different pattern for 4 seconds. In this way, the time during which the light-emitting elements of the title display section 29 and the light-emitting elements of the peripheral decoration section 26d are illuminated in different patterns is made longer than the time during which the light-emitting elements of the title display section 29 and the light-emitting elements of the peripheral decoration section 26d are illuminated in the same pattern.

Furthermore, when executing a performance corresponding to a special role, the light emission control means 93 causes the light emitting elements of the title display unit 29 to emit light in a pattern corresponding to the special role. To achieve the pattern corresponding to the special role, the red (R), green (G), and blue (B) output values of the light emitting elements are changed in a predetermined pattern within the range of "0" to "255". This allows the light emitting elements to emit light in so-called rainbow colors, and makes it possible to inform the player that he or she has won a special role. In particular, since the title display unit 29 is positioned slightly above the player's line of sight, it is possible to make the player easily realize that he or she has won a special role.

(3) The right frame lamp section 27, the left frame lamp section 28, and the title display section 29 are not limited to being composed of a single lamp section each, and may be composed of a plurality of lamp sections.
Specifically, the right frame lamp unit 27 can be composed of, for example, three lamp units: a first right frame lamp unit, a second right frame lamp unit, and a third right frame lamp unit.
Similarly to the right frame lamp unit 27, the left frame lamp unit 28 can also be configured, for example, from three lamp units: a first left frame lamp unit, a second left frame lamp unit, and a third left frame lamp unit.

Furthermore, the title display section 29 can be composed of, for example, two lamp sections, a first title display section and a second title display section.
Furthermore, when comparing the first right frame lamp unit, the first left frame lamp unit, and the first title display unit, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the first title display unit may be set to be higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the first right frame lamp unit and the first left frame lamp unit.

(4) In the 24th embodiment (B), the embossed portion 29f formed on the lens portion 29d of the title display portion 29 has a more finely textured pattern than the embossed portion 27f formed on the lens portion 27d of the right frame lamp portion 27, but this is not limited to this.
Figure 148 (1) is a diagram showing a modified example 1 of the embossed portion 29f (light diffusing portion 29e) formed on the lens portion 29d of the title display portion 29, and the embossed portion 27f (light diffusing portion 27e) formed on the lens portion 27d of the right frame lamp portion 27.

In Figure 148 (1), the protrusion on the right side indicates one of the numerous protrusions that constitute the embossed portion 29f formed on the lens portion 29d of the title display portion 29, and the protrusion on the left side indicates one of the numerous protrusions that constitute the embossed portion 27f formed on the lens portion 27d of the right frame lamp portion 27.
In the example of FIG. 148(1), the protrusion constituting the embossed portion 29f of the title display portion 29 and the protrusion constituting the embossed portion 27f of the right frame lamp portion 27 are both formed in a dome shape.
In addition, in the example of Figure 148 (1), the area of the bottom of the dome-shaped protrusion that constitutes the embossed portion 29f of the title display section 29 and the area of the bottom of the dome-shaped protrusion that constitutes the embossed portion 27f of the right frame lamp section 27 are set to be the same.

In the example of Figure 148 (1), the height of the dome-shaped protrusion that constitutes the embossed portion 29f of the title display section 29 is set higher than the height of the dome-shaped protrusion that constitutes the embossed portion 27f of the right frame lamp section 27.
As a result, the radius of the curved surface onto which the light emitted from the LED enters can be made smaller in the title display section 29 than in the right frame lamp section 27, and the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section can be made higher.

Figure 148 (2) is a diagram showing a modified example 2 of the embossed portion 29f (light diffusing portion 29e) formed on the lens portion 29d of the title display portion 29, and the embossed portion 27f (light diffusing portion 27e) formed on the lens portion 27d of the right frame lamp portion 27.
In Figure 148 (2), the protrusion on the right side indicates one of the numerous protrusions that constitute the embossed portion 29f formed on the lens portion 29d of the title display portion 29, and the protrusion on the left side indicates one of the numerous protrusions that constitute the embossed portion 27f formed on the lens portion 27d of the right frame lamp portion 27.

In the example of FIG. 148(2), the protrusions constituting the embossed portion 29f of the title display portion 29 and the protrusions constituting the embossed portion 27f of the right frame lamp portion 27 are both formed in a quadrangular pyramid shape.
In addition, in the example of Figure 148 (2), the area of the base of the pyramidal protrusion that constitutes the embossed portion 29f of the title display portion 29 and the area of the base of the pyramidal protrusion that constitutes the embossed portion 27f of the right frame lamp portion 27 are set to be the same.

In the example of Figure 148 (2), the height of the pyramidal protrusion that constitutes the embossed portion 29f of the title display portion 29 is set higher than the height of the pyramidal protrusion that constitutes the embossed portion 27f of the right frame lamp portion 27.
As a result, the angle between the light emitted from the LED and the incident surface of the light can be made smaller in the title display section 29 than in the right frame lamp section 27, thereby increasing the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section.
In this way, by setting the area of the bottom of the protrusions that make up the embossed portion to be the same in the title display portion 29 and the right frame lamp portion 27 while differing the height of the protrusions that make up the embossed portion, it is possible to differ the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion.

(5) In the twenty-fourth embodiment (B), the brightness of the light-emitting elements of the title display section 29, the right frame lamp section 27, and the left frame lamp section 28 can be adjusted by the brightness adjustment means 92.
In this regard, as mentioned above, measures of brightness include "brightness,""lightintensity," and "illuminance," and the "brightness adjustment means 92" can be referred to as the "light intensity adjustment means 92" or the "illuminance adjustment means 92."
The luminance of the light-emitting elements of the title display section 29, the right frame lamp section 27, and the left frame lamp section 28 may be adjustable by the luminance adjustment means 92.
In addition, the illuminance adjustment means 92 may be capable of adjusting the illuminance of the surface onto which the light emitted from the light-emitting elements of the title display section 29, the right frame lamp section 27, and the left frame lamp section 28 is irradiated.

(6) As described in the 24th embodiment (B), the right frame lamp unit 27 comprises a right frame lamp board 27a and a right frame lamp cover 27b, the left frame lamp unit 28 comprises a left frame lamp board 28a and a left frame lamp cover 28b, and the title display unit 29 comprises a title display board 29a and a title display cover 29b.
Furthermore, as in the 23rd embodiment, the mounting surfaces of the light-emitting elements (LEDs) on the right frame lamp board 27a, the left frame lamp board 28a, and the title display board 29a can be configured in white ("approximately white" or a "color similar to" white).

This prevents the right frame lamp section 27, the left frame lamp section 28, and the title display section 29 from looking bad, as described in the twenty-third embodiment. Also, the light emitted from the light-emitting elements can be efficiently reflected toward the right frame lamp cover 27b, the left frame lamp cover 28b, and the title display cover 29b, so that the right frame lamp cover 27b, the left frame lamp cover 28b, and the title display cover 29b can be made to look brighter. Furthermore, the color of the light-emitting elements can be made to look beautiful.
Incidentally, the "substantially white" and the "color similar to white" are as explained in the 24th embodiment (A).

Also, for example, the right frame lamp section 27 and the left frame lamp section 28 can be set larger than the title display section 29, and the total area of the mounting surfaces of the light-emitting elements on the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 28a can be set larger (wider) than the total area of the mounting surfaces of the light-emitting elements on the title display board 29a.
Furthermore, the right frame lamp board 27a, the left frame lamp board 28a, and the title display board 29a can each be fixed at a predetermined mounting position with a fixing member (screw 683).
Furthermore, the number of fixing members for fixing the right frame lamp board 27a to a predetermined mounting position and the number of fixing members for fixing the left frame lamp board 28a to a predetermined mounting position can be set to be greater than the number of fixing members for fixing the title display board 29a to a predetermined mounting position.

When the right frame lamp board 27a is fixed to a predetermined mounting position with a fixing member, the head of the fixing member (screw head 689) is exposed on the mounting surface side of the right frame lamp board 27a for the light-emitting element. In this state, the height of the head of the fixing member is set to be greater (higher) than the height of the light-emitting element, based on the mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the right frame lamp board 27a. In other words, the head of the fixing member is set to be greater (higher) than the light-emitting element from the mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the right frame lamp board 27a.

Furthermore, the head of the fixing member is formed in a convex curved shape (dome shape), and the surface of the head of the fixing member is subjected to a surface treatment that reflects the light emitted from the light-emitting element. Specifically, the surface is silver-plated as a surface treatment that reflects the light emitted from the light-emitting element. Examples of silver plating include silver plating, chrome plating, nickel plating, tin plating, tin-cobalt plating, and zinc plating.

As with the right frame lamp board 29a, the heads of the fixing members of the left frame lamp board 28a and the title display board 29a are exposed on the mounting surface side of the light-emitting element when they are fixed in the specified mounting position with the fixing members. Also, the height of the heads of the fixing members is set to be greater than the height of the light-emitting element, based on the mounting surface of the light-emitting element. Furthermore, the heads of the fixing members are formed into a convex curved shape, and a surface treatment is applied to the surface of the heads of the fixing members to reflect light.

In this way, by setting the height of the head of the fixing member to be greater than the height of the light-emitting element based on the mounting surface of the light-emitting element, forming the head of the fixing member into a convex curved shape, and applying a surface treatment to the surface of the head of the fixing member that reflects light, it is possible to make the light emitted from the light-emitting element be reflected by the head of the fixing member. This makes it possible to make the head of the fixing member appear to glow as if it were a light-emitting element, and therefore makes the right frame lamp unit 27, left frame lamp unit 28, and title display unit 29 appear to glow more brightly.

The right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 28a are set so that the total area of the mounting surface for the light emitting elements is larger than that of the title display board 29a. Furthermore, the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 28a are set so that the number of fixing members for fixing them to predetermined mounting positions is larger than that of the title display board 29a.
That is, for the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 28a, whose total mounting surface area of the light-emitting elements is larger than that of the title display board 29a, the number of fixing members for fixing them to the specified mounting positions is set to be greater than that of the title display board 29a.

As a result, although the total area of the mounting surface for the light-emitting elements of the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 28a is larger than that of the title display board 29a, the number of fixing members for fixing them to the specified mounting position is greater than that of the title display board 29a, so the light emitted from the light-emitting elements can be reflected efficiently.

Furthermore, as explained in the 24th embodiment (B), the embossed portion 29f (light diffusing portion 29e) formed on the surface of the lens portion 29d of the title display portion 29 has a finer uneven pattern than the embossed portion 27f (light diffusing portion 27e) formed on the surface of the lens portion 27d of the right frame lamp portion 27.
Furthermore, a textured portion 27f (light diffusing portion 27e) similar to the surface of the lens portion 27d of the right frame lamp portion 27 is formed on the surface of the lens portion 28d of the left frame lamp portion 28.

As a result, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion 29e in the title display portion 29 is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion 27e in the right frame lamp portion 27 and the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion 28e in the left frame lamp portion 28.
For this reason, the light emitted from the light-emitting elements is more easily scattered in the title display section 29 than in the right frame lamp section 27 and the left frame lamp section 28, making the light-emitting elements mounted on the title display board 29a and the heads of the fixing members for fixing the title display board 29a less noticeable, and the entire lens section 29d can be made to appear uniformly lit, and further making it less likely that the player will find it dazzling.

Also, as explained in the 24th embodiment (B), the light emission control means 93 causes the right frame lamp section 27 (light-emitting element mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a) and the left frame lamp section 28 (light-emitting element mounted on the left frame lamp board 28a) and the title display section 29 (light-emitting element mounted on the title display board 29a) to emit or blink in different patterns when a special role is won (the sub-control board 80 receives a special role command), when the AT lottery is won (it is decided to execute the AT), or when the game transitions to a standby state.
This makes it possible to diversify the presentation patterns using the right frame lamp section 27, the left frame lamp section 28, and the title display section 29.

Furthermore, the lens portion 27d of the right frame lamp portion 27, the lens portion 28d of the left frame lamp portion 28, and the lens portion 29d of the title display portion 29 can be formed from substantially the same resin.
The term "substantially the same" includes things that are roughly the same but not completely the same due to manufacturing errors, etc., and things that are not completely the same but look the same. Also, "substantially the same" includes the term "same."
In this way, by forming the lens portion 27d of the right frame lamp portion 27, the lens portion 28d of the left frame lamp portion 28, and the lens portion 29d of the title display portion 29 from approximately the same resin, the resin raw materials for forming these can be standardized, thereby reducing the effort required for managing the resin raw materials.

Furthermore, the lens portion 29d of the title display portion 29 can be formed from a colored (for example, red or blue) translucent resin.
Furthermore, the lens portion 27d of the right frame lamp portion 27 and the lens portion 28d of the left frame lamp portion 28 can be formed in part from a transparent resin, and the remaining portions can be formed from a resin that is approximately the same color and translucent as the lens portion 29d of the title display portion 29.

Specifically, the lens portion 27d of the right frame lamp portion 27 and the lens portion 28d of the left frame lamp portion 28 can be formed in portions from a transparent resin, and the remaining portions can be formed, for example, from a blue resin having translucency.
The light emission control means 93 can control the light emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 28a so that all of the light emitting elements, including those arranged at positions corresponding to the portions formed from transparent resin and those arranged at positions corresponding to the portions formed from blue resin, emit or blink in the same color.

In this case, although the light-emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 28a all emit or blink in the same color, the light-emitting elements arranged at positions corresponding to the portions formed from the transparent resin and the light-emitting elements arranged at positions corresponding to the portions formed from the blue resin can be made to appear to emit or blink in different colors.
This makes it possible to diversify the presentation patterns using the right frame lamp section 27, the left frame lamp section 28, and the title display section 29.

In addition, conversely to the case described above, the lens portion 27d of the right frame lamp portion 27 and the lens portion 28d of the left frame lamp portion 28 may be formed from a colored, translucent resin, and a portion of the lens portion 29d of the title display portion 29 may be formed from a transparent resin, with the remaining portion being formed from a colored, translucent resin that is approximately the same as the lens portion 27d of the right frame lamp portion 27 and the lens portion 28d of the left frame lamp portion 28.
Furthermore, for all of the lens portion 27d of the right frame lamp portion 27, the lens portion 28d of the left frame lamp portion 28, and the lens portion 29d of the title display portion 29, a portion may be formed from a transparent resin, and the remaining portions may be formed from a colored, translucent resin.

Also, for example, for the right frame lamp section 27, a lens section 27d can be formed so as to cover the entire mounting surface of the right frame lamp board 27a on which the light emitting elements are mounted.
Furthermore, for example, a textured portion 27f can be provided on the entire inner surface (the surface on the right frame lamp substrate 27a side) of the lens portion 27d of the right frame lamp portion 27, and this textured portion 27f can function as a light diffusion portion 27e. The light diffusion portion 27e may be formed by kneading a light diffusion agent into the resin constituting the lens portion 27d.

Furthermore, for the left frame lamp section 28, similarly to the right frame lamp section 27, a lens section 28d is formed to cover the entire mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the left frame lamp board 28a, and an embossed section 28f is provided on the entire inner surface of this lens section 28d to form a light diffusion section 28e.
Furthermore, for the title display section 29, similarly to the right frame lamp section 27 and the left frame lamp section 28, a lens section 29d is formed to cover the entire mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the title display board 29a, and an embossed section 29f is provided on the entire inner surface of this lens section 29d to form a light diffusion section 29e.

In this way, with regard to the right frame lamp unit 27, the entire mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the right frame lamp board 27a is covered with the lens portion 27d, and a light diffusion portion 27e is provided on the entire surface of the lens portion 27d. This makes it possible to make the light-emitting element mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a and the head (screw head 689) of the fixing member (screw 683) for fixing the right frame lamp board 27a less noticeable when the right frame lamp unit 27 is viewed from the front or from the side (the right frame lamp board 27a through the lens portion 27d), thereby preventing the design from being impaired.
In addition, the left frame lamp section 28 and the title display section 29 can also achieve the same effects as those described above for the right frame lamp section 27.

Also, the right frame lamp unit 27 can be configured, for example, from three lamp units: a first right frame lamp unit, a second right frame lamp unit, and a third right frame lamp unit.
Furthermore, like the right frame lamp unit 27, the left frame lamp unit 28 can also be composed of three lamp units, for example, a first left frame lamp unit, a second left frame lamp unit, and a third left frame lamp unit.
Furthermore, the title display section 29, like the right frame lamp section 27 and the left frame lamp section 28, can also be composed of three lamp sections, for example, a first title display section, a second title display section, and a third title display section.

In addition, the first right frame lamp section includes a first right frame lamp board on which a plurality of light-emitting elements are mounted, the first left frame lamp section includes a first left frame lamp board on which a plurality of light-emitting elements are mounted, and the first title display section includes a first title display board on which a plurality of light-emitting elements are mounted.
The mounting surfaces of the light-emitting elements on the first right frame lamp board, the first left frame lamp board, and the first title display board can be configured in white ("approximately white" or a "color similar to" white).

In addition, the total area of the mounting surface of the light-emitting elements on the first right frame lamp substrate and the total area of the mounting surface of the light-emitting elements on the first left frame lamp substrate can be set to be larger than the total area of the mounting surface of the light-emitting elements on the first title display substrate.
Furthermore, the first right frame lamp board, the first left frame lamp board, and the first title display board are each fixed to a predetermined mounting position with a fixing member (screw 683), and the number of fixing members for fixing the first right frame lamp board to the predetermined mounting position and the number of fixing members for fixing the first left frame lamp board to the predetermined mounting position can be set to be greater than the number of fixing members for fixing the first title display board to the predetermined mounting position.

Furthermore, when the first right frame lamp board is fixed to a predetermined mounting position with a fixing member, the head of the fixing member (screw head 689) is exposed on the mounting surface side of the light-emitting element on the first right frame lamp board, and at this time, the height of the head of the fixing member can be set greater than the height of the light-emitting element based on the mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the first right frame lamp board.
Furthermore, the head of the fixing member can be formed into a convex curved shape (dome shape), and the surface of the head of the fixing member can be subjected to a surface treatment that reflects the light emitted from the light emitting element.

As with the first right frame lamp board, when the first left frame lamp board and the first title display board are fixed in a predetermined mounting position with a fixing member, the head of the fixing member is exposed on the mounting surface side of the light-emitting element, and the height of the head of the fixing member can be set to be greater than the height of the light-emitting element based on the mounting surface of the light-emitting element. In addition, the head of the fixing member can be formed into a convex curved shape, and a surface treatment that reflects light can be applied to the surface of the head of the fixing member.

In this way, for the first right frame lamp section that constitutes the right frame lamp section 27, the first left frame lamp section that constitutes the left frame lamp section 28, and the first title display section that constitutes the title display section 29, the total area of the mounting surfaces of the light-emitting elements of the first right frame lamp board and the first left frame lamp board can be set to be larger than the total area of the mounting surfaces of the light-emitting elements of the first title display board.
Furthermore, the number of fixing members for fixing the first right frame lamp substrate and the number of fixing members for fixing the first left frame lamp substrate can be set to be greater than the number of fixing members for fixing the first title display substrate.
As a result, although the total area of the mounting surface for the light-emitting elements of the first right frame lamp board and the first left frame lamp board is larger than that of the first title display board, the number of fixing members for fixing them to a specified mounting position is greater than that of the first title display board, so that the light emitted from the light-emitting elements can be reflected efficiently.

That is, it comprises a first lamp substrate on which a plurality of light-emitting elements are mounted, and a second lamp substrate on which a plurality of light-emitting elements are mounted and the total area of the mounting surface for the light-emitting elements is set to be larger than that of the first lamp substrate.
Furthermore, the mounting surfaces of the first lamp board and the second lamp board on which the light emitting elements are mounted can be configured in white color ("substantially white" or a "color similar to" white).
Furthermore, the first lamp board and the second lamp board are each fixed to a predetermined mounting position with a fixing member, and the number of fixing members for fixing the second lamp board to the predetermined mounting position can be set to be greater than the number of fixing members for fixing the first lamp board to the predetermined mounting position.

Furthermore, when the first lamp board is fixed to a predetermined mounting position with a fixing member, the head of the fixing member is exposed on the mounting surface side of the light-emitting element on the first lamp board, and at this time, the height of the head of the fixing member can be set to be greater than the height of the light-emitting element based on the mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the first lamp board.
As with the first lamp board, when the second lamp board is fixed to a predetermined mounting position with a fixing member, the head of the fixing member is exposed on the mounting surface side of the light-emitting element on the second lamp board, and at this time, the height of the head of the fixing member can be set greater than the height of the light-emitting element based on the mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the second lamp board.

Furthermore, for both the first lamp substrate and the second lamp substrate, the head of the fixing member can be formed into a convex curved shape, and the surface of the head of the fixing member can be subjected to a surface treatment that reflects light emitted from the light-emitting element.
This makes it possible to make the head of the fixing member appear to glow like a light-emitting element, so that the first lamp section having the first lamp substrate and the second lamp section having the second lamp substrate appear to glow more brightly.
In addition, since the second lamp board has a greater number of fixing members for fixing it to a predetermined mounting position than the first lamp board, the light emitted from the light-emitting element can be reflected more efficiently.

Also, conversely to the above-mentioned case, a lamp may be provided that includes a first lamp board and a second lamp board in which the total area of the mounting surface for the light-emitting elements is set to be larger than that of the first lamp board, and the number of fixing members for fixing the first lamp board to a predetermined mounting position may be set to be greater than the number of fixing members for fixing the second lamp board to a predetermined mounting position.
The first lamp board has a smaller total area of the mounting surface for light-emitting elements than the second lamp board, making it difficult to mount more light-emitting elements than the second lamp board; however, the number of fixing members for fixing the first lamp board to a specified mounting position is greater than that of the second lamp board, and therefore the light emitted from the light-emitting elements can be reflected by the heads of many of the fixing members. This makes it possible to compensate for the smaller number of light-emitting elements by the reflected light from the heads of the fixing members.

Also, the right frame lamp board 27a can be composed of three boards, for example, a first right frame lamp board, a second right frame lamp board, and a third right frame lamp board.
Similarly, the left frame lamp substrate 28a can be composed of three substrates, for example, a first left frame lamp substrate, a second left frame lamp substrate, and a third left frame lamp substrate.
The title display board 29a may be made up of two boards, a first title display board and a second title display board, for example.

That is, the right frame lamp board 27a, the left frame lamp board 28a, and the title display board 29a are not limited to being composed of a single lamp board, but may be composed of a plurality of lamp boards.
The mounting surfaces of the light-emitting elements on the first right frame lamp board, the second right frame lamp board, the third right frame lamp board, the first left frame lamp board, the second left frame lamp board, the third left frame lamp board, the first title display board, and the second title display board can be configured in white ("approximately white" or a "color similar to" white).

In addition, the total area of the mounting surfaces of the light-emitting elements on the first right frame lamp board, the second right frame lamp board, and the third right frame lamp board, and the total area of the mounting surfaces of the light-emitting elements on the first left frame lamp board, the second left frame lamp board, and the third left frame lamp board can be set to be larger than the total area of the mounting surfaces of the light-emitting elements on the first title display board and the second title display board.
Furthermore, the first right frame lamp board, the second right frame lamp board, the third right frame lamp board, the first left frame lamp board, the second left frame lamp board, the third left frame lamp board, the first title display board, and the second title display board are each fixed at a predetermined mounting position with a fixing member (screw 683).
Furthermore, the total number of fixing members for fixing the first right frame lamp board, the second right frame lamp board, and the third right frame lamp board to the predetermined mounting positions, and the total number of fixing members for fixing the first left frame lamp board, the second left frame lamp board, and the third left frame lamp board to the predetermined mounting positions can be set to be greater than the total number of fixing members for fixing the first title display board and the second title display board to the predetermined mounting positions.

Furthermore, when the first right frame lamp board is fixed to a predetermined mounting position with a fixing member, the head of the fixing member (screw head 689) is exposed on the mounting surface side of the light-emitting element on the first right frame lamp board, and at this time, the height of the head of the fixing member can be set greater than the height of the light-emitting element based on the mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the first right frame lamp board.
Furthermore, the head of the fixing member can be formed into a convex curved shape (dome shape), and the surface of the head of the fixing member can be subjected to a surface treatment that reflects the light emitted from the light emitting element.

As with the first right frame lamp board, the second right frame lamp board, the first left frame lamp board, the second left frame lamp board, the third left frame lamp board, the first title display board, and the second title display board, when fixed to a specified mounting position with a fixing member, the head of the fixing member is exposed on the mounting surface side of the light-emitting element, and at this time, the height of the head of the fixing member can be set to be greater than the height of the light-emitting element based on the mounting surface of the light-emitting element. In addition, the head of the fixing member can be formed into a convex curved shape, and the surface of the head of the fixing member can be subjected to a surface treatment that reflects light.

As a result, for the first right frame lamp board, the second right frame lamp board, and the third right frame lamp board, as well as the first left frame lamp board, the second left frame lamp board, and the third left frame lamp board, the total area of the mounting surface of the light-emitting elements is larger than that of the first title display board and the second title display board, but the total number of fixing members for fixing to a specified mounting position is greater than that of the first title display board and the second title display board, so that the light emitted from the light-emitting elements can be efficiently reflected.

In the above description, the screw 683 is used as the fixing member, but the fixing member is not limited to the screw 683. For example, a locking pin that is pressed into a locking hole for fixing may be used as the fixing member. In this case, when the lamp board is fixed to a predetermined mounting position with the locking pin, the head of the locking pin is exposed on the mounting surface side of the light-emitting element on the lamp board. Also, when the lamp board is fixed to a predetermined mounting position with the locking pin, the height of the head of the locking pin is set to be greater than the height of the light-emitting element based on the mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp board. Furthermore, the head of the locking pin is formed into a convex curved shape, and a surface treatment is applied to the surface of the head of the locking pin to reflect the light emitted from the light-emitting element. This allows the light emitted from the light-emitting element to be reflected by the head of the locking pin, so that the head of the locking pin can be made to shine as if it were a light-emitting element.

<Twenty-fifth embodiment>
The twenty-fifth embodiment relates to lighting control of a special symbol display device 531 of a pachinko gaming machine 500.
Figure 149 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 500 in the twenty-fifth embodiment, and Figure 150 is an external oblique view of the pachinko gaming machine 500 in the twenty-fifth embodiment as viewed from the front side (player side).
As shown in Figures 149 and 150, the pachinko gaming machine 500 comprises an outer frame 501 fixed to an island (not shown), and a front frame 502 attached to the front side of the outer frame 501.
A game board 504 is provided in the center of the front frame 502, and a game area is provided on the front side of the game board 504.

Furthermore, the game area of the game board 504 is provided with a start hole 532, which is one of the winning holes, and a start hole switch 533 for detecting winning at the start hole 532, as well as a special pattern display device 531 and an image display device 543 (see Figure 135 of the 24th embodiment (A)).
Furthermore, the special symbol display device 531 is a device that displays the lottery result based on a random number value obtained upon winning at the start port 532 by displaying changing and stationary symbols.

The pachinko game machine 500 also includes a main control board 530 that controls the progress of the game, and a sub-control board 540 that controls the output of the effects (see FIG. 135 of the 24th embodiment (A)). Furthermore, the main control board 530 and the sub-control board 540 each include a CPU, RWM, ROM, etc. Furthermore, the main control board 530 and the sub-control board 540 are electrically connected.
A start switch 533 and a special pattern display device 531 are electrically connected to the main control board 530.
The main control board 530 also includes a lottery means 555 , a design control means 556 , and a reservation means 557 .

The lottery means 555 is a means for conducting a lottery (lottery for a big win, a lottery for a special symbol, or a lottery for a variable pattern) based on a random number value obtained upon winning at the starting port 532 .
The symbol control means 557 is a means for controlling the variable display and stationary display of symbols on the special symbol display device 531 based on the lottery result by the lottery means 555. That is, the special symbol display device 531 is controlled by the symbol control means 557 provided in the main control board 530.
Furthermore, the holding means 556 is a means for holding the random number obtained as a result of winning at the start port 532 until the display of the varying patterns corresponding to the lottery result based on the random number starts.

When the game ball enters the starting hole 532 and the starting hole switch 533 is turned on, the main control board 530 obtains a random number value, and based on this random number value, the lottery means 555 executes a jackpot lottery, a special pattern lottery, and a variable pattern lottery. The jackpot lottery is a lottery that determines whether there is a jackpot or a loss, the special pattern lottery is a lottery that determines the pattern (stop pattern) to be displayed stationarily on the special pattern display device 531, and the variable pattern lottery is a lottery that determines the time (variation time) for which the pattern is displayed variably on the special pattern display device 531. Based on the results of these lotteries, the pattern control means 557 controls the variable display and stationary display of the patterns on the special pattern display device 531.

Also, assume that before the variable display of the symbols based on the previously acquired random number value is completed, the game ball enters the start hole 532, the start hole switch 533 is turned on, and the main control board 530 acquires a random number value. In this case, the holding means 556 holds the random number value and the lottery result based on the random number value until the variable display of the symbols based on the random number value is started.
The reservation means 556 can reserve up to four random number values and the lottery results based on the random number values. That is, the upper limit of the number of reserved values is set to "4".

When the reserved number is between "0" and "2", the lottery means 555 determines a "10 second" fluctuation pattern by lottery, when the reserved number is "3", it determines a "5 second" fluctuation pattern by lottery, and when the reserved number is "4", it determines a "1 second" fluctuation pattern by lottery. As a result, when the reserved number is between "0" and "2", the special pattern fluctuation time is "10 seconds", when the reserved number is "3", the special pattern fluctuation time is "5 seconds", and when the reserved number is "4", the special pattern fluctuation time is "1 second". Note that shortening the special pattern fluctuation time is referred to as "time saving".

Furthermore, if a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery, the game will transition to a special game, which is more advantageous for the player than normal game. In the special game, a jackpot opening (not shown) provided in the game area of the game board 504 will be opened. Furthermore, after the special game ends, the game will transition to a high probability state (high probability state) where the probability of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is higher than in normal game. Then, when a predetermined number of games have been played in the high probability state (the number of times the special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number), the high probability state ends and the game returns to normal game.

FIG. 151 ( 1 ) is a diagram showing the eight LEDs 531 a to 531 h provided on the special pattern display device 531 .
In addition, Figure 151 (2) is a diagram showing the lighting pattern when the special pattern is displayed when the jackpot lottery result is a miss, and Figure 151 (3) is a diagram showing the lighting pattern when the special pattern is displayed when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot.
Furthermore, Figures 152 (1) to (8) are diagrams showing the lighting patterns during the changing display of special patterns.

In Figures 151(1) to (3) and Figures 152(1) to (8), the eight LEDs 531a to 531h are labeled with the letters "a" to "h."
In addition, in Figures 151 (2) to (3) and Figures 152 (1) to (8), lit LEDs are indicated by a "●" (black circle), and unlit LEDs are indicated by a "○" (white circle).

As shown in Fig. 151 (1), the special symbol display device 531 is provided with eight LEDs 531a to 531h. The eight LEDs 531a to 531h provided in the special symbol display device 531 are controlled to be turned on or off by a symbol control means 557 provided in the main control board 530.
151(2), the lighting pattern of the special symbols when the big win lottery result is a loss is to light only one LED 531a and turn off seven LEDs 531b to 531h. That is, the display mode in which only one LED 531a is lighted and seven LEDs 531b to 531h are turned off corresponds to the special symbols when the big win lottery result is a loss. This display mode indicates that the lottery result (game result) is a loss.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 151(3), the lighting pattern when the special symbol is displayed when a jackpot is selected in the jackpot lottery is that four LEDs 531a, 531b, 531e, and 531f are lit, and four LEDs 531c, 531d, 531g, and 531h are turned off. In other words, the display mode in FIG. 151(3) where the LEDs indicated by "●" (black circle) are lit and the LEDs indicated by "○" (white circle) are turned off corresponds to the special symbol that will be displayed when a jackpot is selected. This display mode indicates that the lottery result (game result) is a jackpot.

Furthermore, as shown in Fig. 152(1)-(8), the lighting pattern during the variable display of the special symbol is to sequentially light up the eight LEDs, LED531a-LED531h, one by one. Then, when the display mode shown in Fig. 152(8) is reached in which only one LED, LED531h, is turned on and the seven LEDs, LED531a-LED531g, are turned off, the display mode returns to the display mode shown in Fig. 152(1) in which only one LED, LED531a, is turned on and the seven LEDs, LED531b-LED531h, are turned off. That is, during the variable display of the special symbol, the display modes shown in Fig. 152(1)-(8) are repeated.
In addition, the display mode when the special pattern is displayed stopped when the jackpot lottery shown in Figure 151 (2) is lost, and the initial display mode during the changing display of the special pattern shown in Figure 152 (1) are the same display mode.

Figure 153 is a time chart showing the timing of lighting or extinguishing each LED during the changing display and stationary display of the special pattern when the reserved number is "0" and the jackpot lottery is lost.
In FIG. 153, the variable display of the special symbols starts at the timing of "A". As a result, the game result (the lottery result of the big win lottery) is not displayed.

Also, in Figure 153, at the timing of "A", the initial display mode during the variable display of the special pattern shown in Figure 152 (1) is achieved, that is, the display mode in which only one LED 531a is lit and the seven LEDs 531b to 531h are turned off.
Furthermore, in FIG. 153, the special symbol is displayed between "A" and "B". Between "A" and "B", the eight LEDs from LED531a to LED531h are turned on one by one in sequence. Also, as described above, when the reserved number is "0", the special symbol is displayed for a period of "10 seconds".

Then, at the timing of "B" in Fig. 153, the variable display of the special symbols ends and the static display starts. This causes the game result to be displayed.
Also, in Figure 153, at timing "B", the display mode when the special pattern is displayed in a stopped state upon a loss as shown in Figure 151 (2) is displayed, that is, only one LED 531a is lit and the seven LEDs 531b to 531h are turned off.
Furthermore, in FIG. 153, between "B" and "C", the stopped display of the special symbol, which indicates that the jackpot lottery has been lost, continues.

Then, at the timing of "C" in Fig. 153, the static display of the special symbols ends, and the variable display starts again. As a result, the game result is again hidden.
Also, the LED 531a continues to light up between "B" and "D" in Fig. 153. And, in Fig. 153, the lighting of the LED 531a between "B" and "C" corresponds to the display mode when the special symbol is stopped and displayed at the time of loss, and the lighting of the LED 531a between "C" and "D" corresponds to the initial display mode during the variable display of the special symbol.

As described above, the display mode when the special symbol is stopped when a win is lost (Fig. 151 (2)) and the initial display mode when the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (Fig. 152 (1)) are the same display mode. Therefore, even when moving from the special symbol when a win is lost to the initial symbol when the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the lighting pattern of the eight LEDs 531a to 531h on the special symbol display device 531 appears the same.

In this way, when the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state after a loss, only one LED 531a is lit, and the seven LEDs 531b to 531h are turned off (Figure 151 (2)). After that, when the game ball enters the starting hole 532, the game begins. At this time, the lottery means 555 executes a jackpot lottery, a special symbol lottery, and a variation pattern lottery, and the pattern control means 557 starts the variable display of the special symbol. After that, the variable display of the special symbol is performed for the variation time determined in the variation pattern lottery, and when the variation time determined in the variation pattern lottery has elapsed, the special symbol determined in the special pattern lottery is displayed in a stopped state. This causes the game result (the lottery result of the jackpot lottery) to be displayed, and the game ends.

Then, from the start to the end of one game, each of the eight LEDs 531a to 531h on the special pattern display device 531 turns on and off at least once, and then the special pattern is displayed in a stopped state to indicate the game result.
In FIG. 153, the reserved number is "0", a variation pattern of "10 seconds" is determined in the variation pattern lottery, and the special symbol is displayed in a varying manner for 10 seconds, during which time (from the start to the end of one game), three of the LEDs 531a to 531c light up and go out four times, and five of the LEDs 531d to 531h light up and go out three times.

In addition, in either a low probability state (normal play) in which the probability of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is a predetermined probability, or a high probability state (high probability state) in which the probability of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is higher than a predetermined probability, as shown in FIG. 153, three of the LEDs 531a to 531c light up and go out four times, and five of the LEDs 531d to 531h light up and go out three times between the start and end of one game.
This makes it possible to check whether all LEDs (LEDs 531a to 531h) on the special pattern display device 531 are lit up from the start to the end of one game, making it possible to check whether there is a malfunction with any of the LEDs on the special pattern display device 531.

Figure 154 is a time chart showing the timing of lighting or extinguishing of each LED during the changing display and stationary display of the special pattern when the reserved number is "4" and the jackpot lottery is lost.
As mentioned above, when the reserved number is "4", the variation pattern of "1 second" is determined by the variation pattern lottery. In other words, when the reserved number is "4", the variation time of the special pattern is 1 second. In FIG. 154, the period between "A" and "B" is the period during which the variation of the special pattern is displayed.

In Figure 154, at the timing of "A", the variable display of the special symbols begins. As a result, the game result (the lottery result of the jackpot lottery) is no longer displayed. Also, at the timing of "A" in Figure 154, the initial display mode during the variable display of the special symbols shown in Figure 152 (1) is achieved, that is, the display mode in which only one LED 531a is lit and the seven LEDs 531b to 531h are turned off. This is the same as in Figure 153.

Furthermore, in Fig. 154, between "A" and "B", the eight LEDs, LED 531a to LED 531h, are turned on one by one in sequence. In Fig. 154, between "A" and "B", the three LEDs, LED 531a to LED 531c, are turned on and off twice, and the five LEDs, LED 531d to LED 531h, are turned on and off once. Thus, in Fig. 154, the time between "A" and "B" is one second, which is shorter than Fig. 153, and therefore the number of times the eight LEDs, LED 531a to LED 531h, are turned on and off during that time is less than in Fig. 153.
Then, at the timing of "B" in Fig. 154, the variable display of the special symbols ends and the static display starts. This causes the game result to be displayed.

In addition, at the timing "B" in FIG. 154, the display mode when the special symbol is stopped and displayed upon a loss as shown in FIG. 151 (2) is displayed, that is, only one LED 531a is lit and the seven LEDs 531b to 531h are turned off. Furthermore, between "B" and "C" in FIG. 154, the stopped display of the special symbol, which indicates that the jackpot lottery has been lost, continues. Then, at the timing "C" in FIG. 154, the stopped display of the special symbol ends and the variable display begins again. As a result, the game result is once again hidden. This is the same as in FIG. 153.

Also in Fig. 154, similarly to Fig. 153, the LED 531a continues to light up between "B" and "D." In Fig. 154, the lighting of the LED 531a between "B" and "C" corresponds to the display mode when the special symbol is stopped and displayed at the time of a loss, and the lighting of the LED 531a between "C" and "D" corresponds to the initial display mode during the variable display of the special symbol.
Furthermore, in FIG. 154, the manner in which each LED is turned on or off between "C" and "F" is the same as the manner in which each LED is turned on or off between "A" and "C".

And even if the number of reserved symbols becomes "4" and the time for the special symbol to change becomes shorter than that in FIG. 153, i.e. even if the time for the special symbol to change becomes shorter, each of the eight LEDs 531a to 531h on the special symbol display device 531 will light up and go out at least once between the start and end of one game. In FIG. 154, three LEDs 531a to 531c will light up and go out twice, and five LEDs 531d to 531h will light up and go out once between the start and end of one game. After that, the game result is displayed by the special symbol being displayed in a stopped state.

Also, in either normal play or in the special probability state, as shown in FIG. 154, between the start and end of one game, the three LEDs 531a to 531c light up and go out twice, and the five LEDs 531d to 531h light up and go out once.
As a result, even if the time required for the special pattern to change is short, it is possible to check whether all of the LEDs (LEDs 531a to 531h) on the special pattern display device 531 are lit up from the start to the end of one game, making it possible to check whether there is a malfunction with any of the LEDs on the special pattern display device 531.

Although the twenty-fifth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described content, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the special pattern display device 531 is equipped with eight LEDs, but the number of LEDs equipped on the special pattern display device 531 is not limited to eight.
The number of LEDs provided in the special symbol display device 531 may be more than eight, for example, nine or ten, or may be less than eight, for example, five or six.

(2) In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the LEDs provided on the special pattern display device 531 are arranged in two rows of four, as shown in FIG. 151 (1), but this is not limited to this.
The LEDs provided on the special symbol display device 531 may be arranged, for example, in a circular shape.
Also, the special symbol display device 531 may be configured using, for example, a seven-segment LED.

(3) In the twenty-fifth embodiment, when the reserved number is between "0" and "2", the special pattern change time is set to "10 seconds", when the reserved number is "3", the special pattern change time is set to "5 seconds", and when the reserved number is "4", the special pattern change time is set to "1 second", but this is not limited to this.
The time it takes for the special symbols to change for each reserved number can be set appropriately.

(4) In the 25th embodiment, when the reserved number is "0" and the jackpot lottery is lost, the LEDs are turned on or off in the pattern shown in FIG. 153, and when the reserved number is "4" and the jackpot lottery is lost, the LEDs are turned on or off in the pattern shown in FIG. 154, but this is not limited to this. It is sufficient that each LED on the special pattern display device 531 is turned on and off at least once from the start to the end of one game, and the pattern of turning on or off each LED on the special pattern display device 531 from the start to the end of one game can be set appropriately.

(5) Figure 155 is a time chart showing the timing of lighting or extinguishing of each LED during the changing display and stop display of special patterns when the reserved number is "4" and the jackpot lottery is lost in a modified example of the twenty-fifth embodiment.
The modified example shown in FIG. 155 differs from FIG. 154 in that the LED 531a is temporarily turned off at the timings "C" and "F", but is otherwise similar to FIG.

The modified example shown in FIG. 155 is provided with miss display data for turning on or off each LED of the special symbol display device 531 in the pattern shown in FIG. 151 (2), and first variable display data for turning on or off each LED in the pattern shown in FIG. 152 (1). Similarly, second variable display data to eighth variable display data are provided for turning on or off each LED of the special symbol display device 531 in the patterns shown in FIG. 152 (2) to (8).

In addition, the loss display data and the first variable display data to the eighth variable display data are stored in a ROM provided in the sub-control board 540.
Furthermore, when the sub-control board 540 turns on or off each LED of the special symbol display device 531 in the pattern shown in Fig. 151 (2), it stores the miss display data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM of the sub-control board 540. As a result, each LED of the special symbol display device 531 turns on or off in the pattern shown in Fig. 151 (2).
Similarly, when the sub-control board 540 turns on or off each LED of the special symbol display device 531 in the pattern shown in Fig. 152(1), the sub-control board 540 stores the first variable display data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM of the sub-control board 540. As a result, each LED of the special symbol display device 531 turns on or off in the pattern shown in Fig. 152(1).

In Fig. 155, between "B" and "C", the sub-control board 540 stores the loss display data in a predetermined memory area of the RWM. This causes each LED of the special symbol display device 531 to light up or turn off in a pattern (Fig. 151 (2)) corresponding to the stopping symbol of the special symbol when the loss occurs.
In addition, in Fig. 155, between "C" and "D", the sub-control board 540 stores the first variable display data in a predetermined memory area of the RWM. This causes each LED of the special symbol display device 531 to light or turn off in the first pattern (Fig. 152 (1)) during the variable display of the special symbol.

In the modified example shown in Fig. 155, at the timing "C", the sub-control board 540 clears the loss display data stored in a specified memory area of the RWM, and then stores the first variable display data in the specified memory area of the RWM. In this way, the data stored in the specified memory area of the RWM is rewritten from the loss display data to the first variable display data. Therefore, in the modified example shown in Fig. 155, at the timing "C", the LED 531a appears to be temporarily turned off.
In FIG. 155, at the timing "F", the same process as at the timing "C" is carried out, so that the LED 531a appears to be temporarily turned off.

In addition, by temporarily turning off the LED 531a at the timings of "C" and "F" in FIG. 155, the player or the hall staff can check the timing when one game ends and the next game starts by looking at the special pattern display device 531. In other words, they can grasp the break between games.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine 500, when the variable display of the special pattern on the special pattern display device 531 ends (for example, when the loss display data is stored), an external signal indicating that one game has been played is output.
In addition, a game information display device (also called a "data display") is provided above the pachinko gaming machine 500, and external signals output from the pachinko gaming machine 500 are input to the game information display device.

Furthermore, each time an external signal indicating that one game has been played is input, the game information display device adds 1 to the number of games played. By looking at this number, the player can know the total number of games played on the pachinko gaming machine 500 on the day and over the past few days.
Even if the player or the hall staff cannot see the special symbols changing and stopping because the special symbols are switched on and off so quickly on the special symbol display device 531, they can see the value indicating the number of games played on the game information display device being updated (incremented) and can confirm the timing when one game ends and the next game starts. In other words, they can grasp the break between games.

<Twenty-sixth embodiment>
The twenty-sixth embodiment relates to lighting control of LEDs provided on the main control board 50 of the slot machine 10.
FIG. 156 is a diagram showing each LED provided on the main control board 50 of the slot machine 10 in the twenty-sixth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 156, the main control board 50 is provided with an insertion detection LED 59a, a left stop operation detection LED 59b, a middle stop operation detection LED 59c, a right stop operation detection LED 59d, a start operation detection LED 59e, a left index detection LED 59f, a middle index detection LED 59g, and a right index detection LED 59h.
In Fig. 156, eight LEDs are labeled with the letters "a" through "h." The turning on and off of all of these LEDs is controlled by the main control board 50.

The insertion detection LED 59a is an LED that lights up when a medal is inserted through the medal insertion port 47 and the insertion sensor 44 detects the inserted medal.
When the insertion sensor 44 is turned on (detects a medal), the main control board 50 turns on the insertion detection LED 59a, and when the insertion sensor 44 is turned off (no longer detects a medal), the main control board 50 turns off the insertion detection LED 59a.

The left stop operation detection LED 59b is an LED that lights up when the left stop switch 42 is operated.
When the left stop switch 42 is turned on (operated), the main control board 50 turns on the left stop operation detection LED 59b, and when the left stop switch 42 is turned off (released), the main control board 50 turns off the left stop operation detection LED 59b.

The middle stop operation detection LED 59c is an LED that lights up when the middle stop switch 42 is operated.
When the middle stop switch 42 is turned on (operated), the main control board 50 turns on the middle stop operation detection LED 59c, and when the middle stop switch 42 is turned off (released), the main control board 50 turns off the middle stop operation detection LED 59c.

The right stop operation detection LED 59d is an LED that lights up when the right stop switch 42 is operated.
When the right stop switch 42 is turned on (operated), the main control board 50 turns on the right stop operation detection LED 59d, and when the right stop switch 42 is turned off (released), the main control board 50 turns off the right stop operation detection LED 59d.

The start operation detection LED 59e is an LED that lights up when the start switch 41 is operated.
When the start switch 41 is turned on (operated), the main control board 50 turns on the start operation detection LED 59e, and when the start switch 41 is turned off (released), the main control board 50 turns off the start operation detection LED 59e.

The left index detection LED 59 f is an LED that lights up when the left reel sensor 33 detects the index of the left reel 31 .
When the left reel sensor 33 turns on (detects the index of the left reel 31), the main control board 50 turns on the left index detection LED 59f, and when the left reel sensor 33 turns off (no longer detects the index of the left reel 31), the main control board 50 turns off the left index detection LED 59f.

The middle index detection LED 59g is an LED that lights up when the middle reel sensor 33 detects the index of the middle reel 31.
When the middle reel sensor 33 turns on (detects the index of the middle reel 31), the main control board 50 turns on the middle index detection LED 59g, and when the middle reel sensor 33 turns off (no longer detects the index of the middle reel 31), the main control board 50 turns off the middle index detection LED 59g.

The right index detection LED 59h is an LED that lights up when the right reel sensor 33 detects the index of the right reel 31.
When the right reel sensor 33 turns on (detects the index of the right reel 31), the main control board 50 turns on the right index detection LED 59h, and when the right reel sensor 33 turns off (no longer detects the index of the right reel 31), the main control board 50 turns off the right index detection LED 59h.

As shown in Figure 146 of the 24th embodiment (B), the pattern display device has three (left, center, right) reels 31, three (left, center, right) motors 32 for driving each of the reels 31, and three (left, center, right) reel sensors 33 for detecting the position of each of the reels 31.
Each reel sensor 33 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. Each reel 31 is provided with an index. Each index is formed so as to be detectable by the corresponding reel sensor 33.

Further, the position of each reel 31 at the moment when each reel sensor 33 detects the corresponding index is set as a reference position.
When each reel sensor 33 detects the corresponding index, a signal indicating that (index signal) is input to the main control board 50. This allows the main control board 50 to determine that each reel 31 has passed the reference position every time each reel sensor 33 detects the corresponding index.
Furthermore, the main control board 50 can determine how far each reel 31 has rotated from the reference position by counting the number of pulses of the drive signal output to each (stepping) motor 32 from the moment each reel sensor 33 detects the corresponding index.

Fig. 157(1) is a diagram showing a lighting pattern when the left reel sensor 33 detects the index of the left reel 31. Fig. 157(2) is a diagram showing a lighting pattern when the center reel sensor 33 detects the index of the center reel 31. Fig. 157(3) is a diagram showing a lighting pattern when the right reel sensor 33 detects the index of the right reel 31.
In Fig. 157(1) to (3), the eight LEDs are labeled with the letters "a" to "h." Also, in Fig. 157(1) to (3), lit LEDs are indicated with a "●" (black circle), and unlit LEDs are indicated with a "○" (white circle).

As shown in FIG. 157(1), when the left reel sensor 33 turns on (detects the index of the left reel 31), the main control board 50 turns on the left index detection LED 59f. Note that in FIG. 157(1), the input sensor 44, left stop switch 42, center stop switch 42, right stop switch 42, start switch 41, center reel sensor 33, and right reel sensor 33 are all off.

Also, as shown in FIG. 157(2), when the center reel sensor 33 turns on (detects the index of the center reel 31), the main control board 50 turns on the center index detection LED 59g. Note that in FIG. 157(2), the input sensor 44, left stop switch 42, center stop switch 42, right stop switch 42, start switch 41, left reel sensor 33, and right reel sensor 33 are all off.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 157(3), when the right reel sensor 33 turns on (detects the index of the right reel 31), the main control board 50 turns on the right index detection LED 59h. Note that in FIG. 157(3), the input sensor 44, left stop switch 42, center stop switch 42, right stop switch 42, start switch 41, left reel sensor 33, and center reel sensor 33 are all off.

Figure 158 is a time chart showing an example of the operation when the previous game ended with the left reel sensor 33 detecting the index of the left reel 31 and a current game starts under this circumstance.
As described above, the left index detection LED 59f is turned on when the left reel sensor 33 detects the index of the left reel 31. Then, when the game ends in this state, the left index detection LED 59f remains turned on even after the game ends.

In Figure 158, at timing "A", when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) with the specified number of medals bet, the three reels 31 (left, center, right) begin to spin. This starts the game on the slot machine 10. Also, when the left reel 31 begins to spin, the left reel sensor 33 no longer detects the index of the left reel 31. This causes the left index detection LED 59f to turn off.

158, the section between "A" and "B" is the section in which the reel 31 is accelerating. Even if the reel sensor 33 detects an index between "A" and "B", the reel 31 has not yet reached a constant speed state, so the detection of this index is not treated as a means of validating the stop operation.
In Fig. 158, at the timing "B", all the reels 31 reach a constant speed state. Then, after all the reels 31 reach the constant speed state, when the reel sensors 33 detect the indexes of all the reels 31, the operation of each stop switch 42 can be accepted. In other words, the operation to stop each reel 31 can be performed.

In Fig. 158, after all the reels 31 have reached a constant speed state, at timing "C", the left reel sensor 33 detects the index of the left reel 31, and the reel sensor 33 detects the index of all the reels 31. This makes it possible to stop each reel 31 at timing "C".
In addition, in the slot machine 10, the game result is displayed based on the symbol combination when all the reels 31 are stopped. Therefore, the ability to stop each reel 31 means that the game result (symbol combination) can be displayed. In FIG. 158, the game result (symbol combination) can be displayed at the timing of "C".
158, the section between "A" and "C" is a section in which the reel 31 is rotating but the operation of the stop switch 42 cannot be accepted. In other words, this is a section in which the operation to stop the reel 31 is not allowed.

In Fig. 158, when the left stop switch 42 is turned on (operated) at the timing of "D", the left reel 31 is controlled to stop, and the left reel 31 stops at the timing of "E". In addition, the period from "C" to "D" is the period during which the left reel 31 can be stopped, and the period from "D" to "E" is the period during which the left reel 31 is decelerating.
In Fig. 158, when the middle stop switch 42 is turned on (operated) at timing "F", the middle reel 31 is controlled to stop, and the middle reel 31 stops at timing "G". In addition, the period from "C" to "F" is the section in which the middle reel 31 can be stopped, and the period from "F" to "G" is the section in which the middle reel 31 is decelerating.

In Fig. 158, when the right stop switch 42 is turned on (operated) at the timing of "H", the right reel 31 is controlled to stop, and at the timing of "I", the right reel 31 stops. In addition, the period between "C" and "H" is the period during which the right reel 31 can be stopped, and the period between "H" and "I" is the period during which the right reel 31 is decelerating.
158, all the reels 31 stop at the timing of "I" and the game result (symbol combination) is displayed. This ends the game on the slot machine 10.

In this way, when the game ends with the left reel sensor 33 detecting the index but the center reel sensor 33 and the right reel sensor 33 not detecting the index, the left index detection LED 59f turns on, and the center index detection LED 59g and the right index detection LED 59h turn off. In this state, when a specified number of medals are bet and the start switch 41 is turned on, the game starts. At this time, the three reels 31 start to rotate. After that, when all the reels 31 reach a constant speed state and further, when the reel sensor 33 detects the index for all the reels 31, the reels 31 can be stopped. In other words, the game result can be displayed. Then, when all the stop switches 42 are operated and all the reels 31 stop, the game result (symbol combination) is displayed and the game ends.

Then, from the start of the game until each reel 31 can be stopped (the game result (symbol combination) can be displayed), the left index detection LED 59f, the middle index detection LED 59g, and the right index detection LED 59h on the main control board 50 all light up and go out at least once. After that, each reel 31 can be stopped.
This makes it possible to check whether the left index detection LED 59f, middle index detection LED 59g, and right index detection LED 59h on the main control board 50 are lit or not during the time from the start of play to the time when the stopping operation of each reel 31 becomes possible, making it possible to check whether or not there is a malfunction with the left index detection LED 59f, middle index detection LED 59g, and right index detection LED 59h.

FIG. 159 is a time chart showing an example of the operation when the previous game ended in a state where none of the reel sensors 33 had detected the index, and a current game is started under this circumstance.
When none of the reel sensors 33 detects an index, the left index detection LED 59f, the middle index detection LED 59g, and the right index detection LED 59h are all turned off. When the game ends in this state, the left index detection LED 59f, the middle index detection LED 59g, and the right index detection LED 59h all remain turned off even after the game ends.

In FIG. 159, when a specified number of medals have been bet, the start switch 41 is turned on at the timing of "A," and the three reels 31 start to rotate. This starts a game on the slot machine 10.
In Fig. 159, at the timing of "B", all the reels 31 reach a constant speed state. Also, in Fig. 159, between "A" and "B" is the section in which the reels 31 are accelerating. Furthermore, in Fig. 159, between "A" and "B", the index of the left reel 31 is detected by the left reel sensor 33 and the left index detection LED 59f is turned on, but since the left reel 31 has not yet reached a constant speed state, this detection of the index is not treated as a means for validating the stop operation.

In Fig. 159, after all the reels 31 have reached a constant speed state, the left reel sensor 33 detects the index of the left reel 31 at the timing of "C", and the reel sensors 33 detect the indexes of all the reels 31. This makes it possible to stop each reel 31 at the timing of "C" (the game result (symbol combination) can be displayed).
Also, in FIG. 159, the section between "A" and "C" is a section in which the reel 31 is rotating but the operation of the stop switch 42 cannot be accepted (the operation to stop the reel 31 cannot be performed).
Furthermore, the operation after timing "D" in FIG. 159 is the same as that in FIG.
159, all the reels 31 stop at the timing of "I" and the game result (symbol combination) is displayed. This ends the game on the slot machine 10.

In this way, even if the previous game ended with none of the reel sensors 33 detecting an index, the left index detection LED 59f, middle index detection LED 59g, and right index detection LED 59h on the main control board 50 will all light up and go out at least once between the start of the current game and the time when each reel 31 can be stopped (the game result (symbol combination) can be displayed).
This makes it possible to check whether the left index detection LED 59f, middle index detection LED 59g, and right index detection LED 59h on the main control board 50 are lit up before the stopping operation of each reel 31 becomes possible, making it possible to check whether there is a malfunction with the left index detection LED 59f, middle index detection LED 59g, and right index detection LED 59h.

FIG. 160 is a time chart showing another example of the operation when the previous game ended in a state in which none of the reel sensors 33 had detected the index, and a current game is started under this circumstance.
In Figure 160, as in Figure 159, the previous game ends with all reel sensors 33 not detecting an index, and therefore the left index detection LED 59f, the middle index detection LED 59g, and the right index detection LED 59h are all off.

160, as in FIG. 159, at the timing of "A", when a specified number of medals have been bet, the start switch 41 is turned on and the game is started. At this time, the three reels 31 start to spin.
Furthermore, in Figure 160, as in Figure 159, all of the reels 31 reach a constant speed state at timing "B." In Figure 160, the period between "A" and "B" is the section during which the reels 31 are accelerating.

In FIG. 160, the reel sensor 33 does not detect the index between "A" and "B", and after all reels 31 reach a constant speed state at timing "B", the right reel sensor 33 detects the index of the right reel 31 at timing "C", causing the reel sensor 33 to detect the index for all reels 31. This makes it possible to stop each reel 31 at timing "C" (the game result (symbol combination) can be displayed).

Also, in Figure 160, the section between "A" and "C" is the section in which the reel 31 is rotating but operation of the stop switch 42 cannot be accepted (the operation to stop the reel 31 cannot be performed), as in Figures 158 and 159.
Furthermore, the operation after timing "D" in FIG. 160 is similar to that in FIGS. 158 and 159.
160, all the reels 31 stop at the timing of "I" and the game result (symbol combination) is displayed. This ends the game on the slot machine 10.

Thus, in FIG. 160, from the start of play until each reel 31 can be stopped (the game result (symbol combination) can be displayed), each of the left index detection LED 59f, middle index detection LED 59g, and right index detection LED 59h on the main control board 50 lights up and goes out at least once.
This makes it possible to check whether the left index detection LED 59f, middle index detection LED 59g, and right index detection LED 59h on the main control board 50 are lit up before the stopping operation of each reel 31 becomes possible, making it possible to check whether there is a malfunction with the left index detection LED 59f, middle index detection LED 59g, and right index detection LED 59h.

As described above in the 25th and 26th embodiments, in both pachinko machines and slot machines, multiple LEDs controlled by the main control board are turned on and off at least once between the time when the conditions for starting the game are met and the time when the game results can be displayed.
In particular, in a situation where one LED among the multiple LEDs controlled by the main control board is turned on and the other LEDs are turned off, even if the conditions for starting a game are satisfied, the multiple LEDs controlled by the main control board will be turned on and off at least once before the game result can be displayed.
This makes it possible, in both pachinko and slot machines, to check for malfunctions in multiple LEDs controlled by the main control board from the time the conditions for starting a game are met until the game results can be displayed.

<Twenty-seventh embodiment>
The twenty-seventh embodiment relates to the thickness of the lead wire (also called the "signal wire"), and corresponds to a modification of the twenty-first embodiment.
In the 21st embodiment, the lead wires related to startup were connected directly to the main control board 530, but in the 27th embodiment, the lead wires related to startup are not directly connected to the main control board 50, but are connected to the main control board 50 via the relay board 300.

FIG. 161 is a diagram showing various lead wires, a relay board 300, and a main control board 50 in the twenty-seventh embodiment.
In the first embodiment and other embodiments, the start switch 41 is referred to as a "start switch 41," but in the twenty-seventh embodiment, the start switch 41 is referred to as a "start switch unit 41."
The start switch unit 41 detects the movement of a start lever 41a (operation body) operated by a player by means of a light-emitting element and a light-receiving element provided inside, and outputs a signal thereto.
A connector 41b for outputting a signal is attached to the rear end of the start switch unit 41.

The harness J is composed of three lead wires j1, j2, and j3, and harness J connector terminals are attached to both ends of the harness J. In other words, the three lead wires j1, j2, and j3 are combined into one connector terminal as the harness J. The harness J connector terminal at one end of the harness J is connected to the connector 41b of the start switch unit 41, and the harness J connector terminal at the other end is connected to the connector 300a mounted on the relay board 300.

The lead j1 is a lead for outputting a signal from the light-emitting element of the start switch unit 41, and the lead j2 is a lead for outputting a signal from the light-receiving element of the start switch unit 41. The lead j3 is a GND line.
From the above, the "leads related to starting" in the 27th embodiment correspond to the leads j1 and j2. However, this is not limited to this, and the "leads related to starting" may include the GND line of the lead related to starting. In this case, the "leads related to starting" correspond to the leads j1, j2, and j3.

By connecting these lead wires j1 to j3 to the relay board 300, the light emitting element signal and the light receiving element signal of the start switch unit 41 (both of which are collectively referred to as the start signal) can be input to the relay board 300.
For example, if the signal of lead wire j1 (light-emitting element) is on and the signal of lead wire j2 (light-receiving element) is off when the start lever 41a is not operated, operation of the start lever 41a is detected based on the signal of lead wire j1 (light-emitting element) being on and the signal of lead wire j2 (light-receiving element) being on.

The lead wires j1 to j3 are all formed to have a circular cross section (not limited to a perfect circle, including cases where the cross section is approximately circular). Furthermore, the lead wires j1 to j3 are all formed to have a thickness (diameter of the cross section) of "α" (the same). Note that the lead wires do not strictly have the same thickness because there is some manufacturing error. Therefore, "the same thickness" is considered to include a range of "±ε" when the range of manufacturing error (variation) is "ε". In other words, the same thickness "α" is synonymous with "α±ε".
Furthermore, the cross section of the leads j1 to j3 is not limited to a circular shape, and may be non-circular. In this case, the "thickness" of the lead refers to the maximum dimension (maximum length) of the cross section.

Furthermore, in the 27th embodiment, the three lead wires j1 to j3 have the same thickness "α", but it is sufficient that the lead wires j1 and j2 have the same thickness "α", and the lead wire j3, which is the GND wire, is not limited to having the same thickness as the lead wires j1 and j2, and may be thinner or thicker than the lead wires j1 and j2. In the following description, the three lead wires j1 to j3 are assumed to have the same thickness "α".

The start switch unit 41 is attached to the front door 12 so that a start lever 41a can be operated by a player, as shown in Fig. 141. On the other hand, the main control board 50 is attached to the back plate 13b of the slot machine 10, as shown in Fig. 22.
On the other hand, the relay board 300 is attached, for example, to the back side of the front door 12. Signals from various switches (bet switch 40, start switch 41, stop switch 42, settlement switch 43, etc.) attached to the front side of the front door 12 are input to the relay board 300, and are further input from the relay board 300 to the main control board 50 via the harness L.

As shown in Fig. 161, a connector 300b is mounted on the relay board 300. Note that, although Fig. 161 illustrates connectors 300a to 300c as connectors on the relay board 300, this is not meant to be limiting.
On the other hand, the lead wire k1 of the bet switch 40, the lead wire k2 of the stop switch 42, and the lead wire k3 of the settlement switch 43 are collected into a harness K, which is integrated into one harness K connector terminal. In FIG. 161, the lead wire k2 of the stop switch 42 is illustrated as one, but in reality, the left, center, and right stop switches 42 each have a lead wire. That is, the lead wire k2 is composed of three lead wires k2-L (left stop switch 42), k2-C (center stop switch 42), and k2-R (right stop switch 42). In the following description, the term "lead wire k2" refers to one of the three lead wires k2.
Then, the harness K connector terminal is connected to the connector 300b on the relay board 300. As a result, the bet switch signal, each stop switch signal, and the settlement switch signal are also input to the relay board 300.

The lead wires k1, k2, and k3 are all formed to have a circular cross section (not limited to a perfect circle, including a nearly circular cross section). Here, when the thicknesses (diameters of the cross sections) of the lead wires k1, k2, and k3 are β1, β2, and β3, respectively, the thicknesses β1, β2, and β3 may be the same as or different from each other. In other words, β1 = β2 = β3 may be satisfied, or β1 ≠ β2, β1 ≠ β3, and β2 ≠ β3 may be satisfied.
Similarly to the lead wires j1 to j3, the cross section of the lead wires k1 to k3 is not limited to being circular, and may be non-circular. In this case, the "thickness" of the lead wires k1 to k3 refers to the maximum dimension (maximum length) of the cross section.
Furthermore, similarly to the lead wires j1 to j3, when the range of manufacturing error (variation) is "ε", the thickness of the lead wires k1 to k3 within the range of "±ε" is the same thickness.

In the twenty-seventh embodiment, when the minimum thickness among the thicknesses β1, β2, and β3 of the lead wires k1 to k3 is defined as "βmin," the relationship with the thickness "α" of the lead wires j1 to j3 is configured to be "α<βmin."
In other words,
α<β1, α<β2, and α<β3
It is.
In this way, by making the start-related leads j1 and j2 (and sometimes j3) thin (particularly thinner than the leads for other operation switch signals), the start-related leads can be made as inconspicuous as possible. Furthermore, by making the start-related leads thin, they become more likely to break when fraudulent acts (such as tampering) are performed, making fraud more difficult and making it easier to detect abnormalities if fraud is performed. In other words, thick leads are less likely to break even when fraud is performed compared to thin leads, and in the case of thick leads in a bundle, it is difficult to detect even if some of them are broken.

161 , a connector 300c is mounted on the relay board 300, and a connector 50b is mounted on the main control board 50. Then, a harness L connector terminal at one end of the harness L is connected to the connector 300c of the relay board 300, and a harness L connector terminal at the other end of the harness L is connected to the connector 50b of the main control board 50.
A start signal, a bet signal, a stop signal, and a settlement signal are input from the relay board 300 to the main control board 50 via a harness L.

In the example of Fig. 161, the lead wires j1 to j3 of the start switch unit 41 are combined into one connector terminal, and the lead wires k1 to k3 of the bet signal, stop signal, and settlement signal are combined into one connector terminal. In other words, the lead wires j1 to j3 of the start switch unit 41 and the lead wires k1 to k3 of the bet signal, etc. are made into separate connector terminals.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and all of the lead wires j1 to j3 of the start switch unit 41 and the lead wires k1 to k3 of the bet signal, etc. may be collected into one connector terminal and connected to the connector on the relay board 300. In this case, too, the thinnest lead wire among the lead wires in the one connector terminal becomes the start-related lead wires j1 and j2 (and may include j3).

The 27th embodiment has been described above, but the first to 27th embodiments and the various modified examples shown in the first to 27th embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, and can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Twenty-eighth embodiment>
The twenty-eighth embodiment relates to sealing a board case that houses a control board.
In the 28th embodiment, a board case 550 that stores a main control board 530 in a pachinko game machine 500 is taken as an example. However, the board case 550 of the 28th embodiment can be applied to a case that stores not only the main control board 530 in the pachinko game machine 500, but also the payout control board 520, the sub-control board 540, and other control boards equipped with a CPU and requiring security.

Furthermore, the board case 550 of the 28th embodiment can be applied to a case for storing not only the control board of a pachinko game machine 500, but also the main control board 50 of a slot machine 10, the sub control board 80, and other control boards equipped with a CPU and requiring security.
It should be noted that the second, twentieth, and twenty-eighth embodiments all relate to a board case, but each of these may be implemented alone or in appropriate combination.

Below, we will explain the case where the main control board 530 is fixed to the front cover 560 of the board case 550 and the sealing sticker 581 is affixed to the right side of the board case 550 (28th embodiment (A)), the case where the main control board 530 is fixed to the rear cover 570 of the board case 550 and the sealing sticker 581 is affixed to the right side of the board case 550 (28th embodiment (B)), and the case where the sealing sticker 581 is affixed to the front of the board case 550 (28th embodiment (C)).

<Twenty-eighth embodiment (A)>
In the twenty-eighth embodiment (A), a main control board 530 is fixed to a front cover 560 of a board case 550 , and a seal 581 is attached to the right side surface of the board case 550 .
The description of the 28th embodiment (A) partially overlaps with the second and twentieth embodiments, but will be described again.
FIG. 162(1) is a front view of the substrate case 550 in the 28th embodiment (A), and FIG. 162(2) is a right side view of the substrate case 550 in the 28th embodiment (A). FIG. 163 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A in FIG. 162(1). FIG. 164 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate case 550 showing a state in which a fake seal seal 582 is attached on a genuine seal seal 581. FIG. 165(1) is an explanatory diagram of a parting line 568c of a mold formed on the surface of the front cover 560 of the substrate case 550, and FIG. 165(2) is an explanatory diagram of a parting line 576c of a mold formed on the surface of the rear cover 570 of the substrate case 550.

Here, the "front (top) side" refers to the mounting surface (component surface) of the main control board 530 on which the electronic components 530b are mounted, and the "rear (bottom) side" refers to the side opposite the mounting surface (solder surface) of the main control board 530 on which the electronic components 530b are mounted.
Additionally, "upper side" refers to the upper side when the mounting surface of the main control board 530 on which the electronic components 530b are mounted is viewed from the front, and "lower side" refers to the lower side when the mounting surface of the main control board 530 on which the electronic components 530b are mounted is viewed from the front. Furthermore, "right side" refers to the right side when the mounting surface of the main control board 530 on which the electronic components 530b are mounted is viewed from the front, and "left side" refers to the left side when the mounting surface of the main control board 530 on which the electronic components 530b are mounted is viewed from the front.

In addition, in Fig. 162(1), the "front (front) side" refers to the front side of Fig. 162(1), and the "rear (back) side" refers to the back side of Fig. 162(1). Furthermore, the "upper side" refers to the upper side of Fig. 162(1), the "lower side" refers to the lower side of Fig. 162(1), the "right side" refers to the right side of Fig. 162(1), and the "left side" refers to the left side of Fig. 162(1).

The board case 550 includes a front cover 560 that covers the mounting surface (component surface) of the main control board 530 on which the electronic components 530b are mounted, and a rear cover 570 that covers the opposite side (solder surface) of the main control board 530 to the mounting surface on which the electronic components 530b are mounted. When the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570 are combined, the board case 550 capable of housing the main control board 530 therein is formed.
The front cover 560 is also referred to as the "first cover 560," and the rear cover 570 is also referred to as the "second cover 570."

Moreover, both the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570 are formed by injection molding using a transparent resin, so that the main control board 530 housed inside the board case 550 can be seen from the outside of the board case 550.
In addition, in the board case 550 (when the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570 are combined), the side in which the main control board 530 is stored is referred to as the "inside", and the side exposed to the outside is referred to as the "outside".

The front cover 560 is formed in a horizontally elongated, approximately rectangular box shape with an open rear surface. The front cover 560 also has a front surface 566 that faces the mounting surface (component surface) of the electronic components 530b on the main control board 530 in a substantially parallel manner. The front surface 566 is formed in a horizontally elongated, approximately rectangular plate shape. The front cover 560 also has an upper wall 565a that extends rearward from the upper edge of the front surface 566, a lower wall 565b that extends rearward from the lower edge of the front surface 556, a right side wall 565c that extends rearward from the right edge of the front surface 556, and a left side wall 565d that extends rearward from the left edge of the front surface 556.

The upper wall 565a, the lower wall 565b, the right side wall 565c, and the left side wall 565d are all formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape. The upper wall 565a, the lower wall 565b, the right side wall 565c, and the left side wall 565d are all perpendicular to the front surface 566. The upper wall 565a is perpendicular to the right side wall 565c and the left side wall 565d, and faces the lower wall 565b in approximately parallel relation. The right side wall 565c faces the left side wall 565d in approximately parallel relation.

The rear cover 570 is formed in a horizontally elongated, approximately rectangular box shape with an open front. The rear cover 570 also has a rear surface portion 573 that faces the surface (solder surface) of the main control board 530 opposite to the mounting surface of the electronic components 530b. This rear surface portion 573 is formed in a horizontally elongated, approximately rectangular plate shape. The rear cover 570 also has an upper wall 571a that extends forward from the upper edge of the rear surface portion 573, a lower wall 571b that extends forward from the lower edge of the rear surface portion 573, a right side wall 571c that extends forward from the right edge of the rear surface portion 573, and a left side wall 571d that extends forward from the left edge of the rear surface portion 573.

The upper wall 571a, the lower wall 571b, the right side wall 571c, and the left side wall 571d are all formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape. The upper wall 571a, the lower wall 571b, the right side wall 571c, and the left side wall 571d are all perpendicular to the rear surface portion 573. The upper wall 571a is perpendicular to the right side wall 571c and the left side wall 571d, and faces the lower wall 571b in approximately parallel relation. The right side wall 571c faces the left side wall 571d in approximately parallel relation.

When the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570 are combined, the front surface 566 of the front cover 560 faces the rear surface 573 of the rear cover 570 in a generally parallel manner. The upper wall 565a of the front cover 560 is continuous with the upper wall 571a of the rear cover 570 and is generally flush with the lower wall 571b of the rear cover 570. Similarly, the right side wall 565c of the front cover 560 is continuous with the right side wall 571c of the rear cover 570 and is generally flush with the left side wall 565d of the front cover 560 and is generally flush with the left side wall 571d of the rear cover 570.

Furthermore, a large number of electronic components 530b, such as a main CPU, RWM, and ROM, are mounted on the component side of the main control board 530. Furthermore, a connector for connecting to another control board or electronic device via a harness is mounted on the main control board 530. Furthermore, screw holes 530a that penetrate from the component side to the solder side are provided at the four corners of the main control board 530. These screw holes 530a are used when attaching (fixing) the main control board 530 to the front cover 560.
Meanwhile, bosses 564 are provided at the four corners of the inner surface of a front portion 566 of the front cover 560. These bosses 564 are used when mounting (fixing) the main control board 530.

When the inner surface of the front portion 566 of the front cover 560 and the component surface of the main control board 530 are faced to each other, the four bosses 564 of the front cover 560 overlap with the four screw holes 530a of the main control board 530. In this state, by inserting the screws 530f into the screw holes 530a from the solder surface side of the main control board 530 and screwing them into the bosses 564, the main control board 530 can be attached (fixed) to the front cover 560.
Furthermore, in the 28th embodiment (A), the substrate case 550 is of a sliding open/close type, and is configured so that the inner surfaces of the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570 are aligned opposite each other, and when the rear cover 570 is slid relative to the front cover 560, the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570 fit together.

In addition, the distance from the inner surface of the front portion 566 of the front cover 560 to the solder surface of the main control board 530 is set to be smaller than the distance from the inner surface of the front portion 566 of the front cover 560 to the joint between the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570.
That is, with respect to the inner surface of front surface portion 566 of front cover 560 as a reference, the height of the solder surface of main control board 530 is set lower than the height of the joint between front cover 560 and rear cover 570. As a result, the solder surface of main control board 530 is located closer to front surface portion 566 of front cover 560 than the joint between front cover 560 and rear cover 570.

In addition, the distance from the inner surface of the front portion 566 of the front cover 560 to the head of the screw 530f that secures the main control board 530 is set to be smaller than the distance from the inner surface of the front portion 566 of the front cover 560 to the joint between the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570.
That is, with respect to the inner surface of the front surface 566 of the front cover 560 as a reference, the height of the screw head of the screw 530f that fixes the main control board 530 is set lower than the height of the joint between the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570. As a result, the screw head of the screw 530f that fixes the main control board 530 is located closer to the front surface 566 of the front cover 560 than the joint between the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570.

An electronic component 530 b is mounted on the component surface of the main control board 530 , and legs 530 d of the electronic component 530 b protrude from the solder surface of the main control board 530 .
Furthermore, the distance from the inner surface of the front portion 566 of the front cover 560 to the tip of the foot 530d of the electronic component 530b protruding onto the solder surface of the main control board 530 is set to be smaller than the distance from the inner surface of the front portion 566 of the front cover 560 to the joint between the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570.

That is, with respect to the inner surface of the front surface portion 566 of the front cover 560 as a reference, the height of the tips of the feet 530d of the electronic components 530b protruding from the solder surface of the main control board 530 is set lower than the height of the joint between the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570. As a result, the tips of the feet 530d of the electronic components 530b protruding from the solder surface of the main control board 530 are located closer to the front surface portion 566 of the front cover 560 than the joint between the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570.
Therefore, when rear cover 570 is slid relative to front cover 560, rear cover 570 does not come into contact with main control board 530, nor does rear cover 570 come into contact with screws 530f that secure main control board 530, and further, rear cover 570 does not come into contact with legs 530d of electronic components 530b that protrude from the solder surface of main control board 530.

Further, on the right side surface of the board case 550, there are provided sticker attachment sections (a first sticker attachment section 567 and a second sticker attachment section 574) to which a sealing sticker 581 is attached.
Specifically, a first seal affixing portion 567 is provided on the right side surface of the front cover 560, and a second seal affixing portion 574 is provided on the right side surface of the rear cover 570 at a position corresponding to the first seal affixing portion 567. When the inner surfaces of the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570 are aligned opposite each other and the rear cover 570 is slid relative to the front cover 560 to fit the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570 together, the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574 are formed to be continuous with each other.

The first seal attachment portion 567 has a front-facing surface 567a that is substantially parallel to the front surface portion 566, and a right-facing surface 567b that is substantially parallel to the right side wall 565c. The front-facing surface 567a and the right-facing surface 567b are continuous and perpendicular to each other, and the boundary between the front-facing surface 567a and the right-facing surface 567b is a bent portion.
Furthermore, the second seal attachment portion 574 has a rearward surface 574a that is substantially parallel to the rear surface portion 573, and a rightward surface 574b that is substantially parallel to the right side wall 571c. The rearward surface 574a and the rightward surface 574b are continuous and perpendicular to each other, and the boundary between the rearward surface 574a and the rightward surface 574b is a bent portion.

As described above, when the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570 are fitted together, the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574 are continuous. At this time, the right-facing surface 567b of the first seal affixing portion 567 and the right-facing surface 574b of the second seal affixing portion 574 are continuous and form approximately the same plane. In addition, the forward surface 567a of the first seal affixing portion 567 and the rearward surface 574a of the second seal affixing portion 574 face each other approximately parallel to each other.

A sealing boss 574c is provided on the inner surface of the rearward surface 574a of the second seal attachment part 574. Furthermore, a sealing recess 567c is provided on the forward surface 567a of the first seal attachment part 567 at a position corresponding to the sealing boss 574c, and a sealing screw hole is provided in the center of this sealing recess 567c.

When the inner surfaces of the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570 are faced to each other and the rear cover 570 is slid relative to the front cover 560 to fit the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570 together, the sealing boss 574c and the sealing screw hole overlap. In this state, when the sealing screw 574d is inserted into the sealing screw hole and screwed into the sealing boss 574c, the rear cover 570 is fixed to the front cover 560, and the board case 550 cannot be opened. In addition, when the sealing screw 574d is inserted into the sealing screw hole and screwed into the sealing boss 574c, the screw head of the sealing screw 574d fits inside the sealing recess 567c.

Then, the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570 are fitted together, the sealing screw 574d is inserted into the sealing screw hole, and the sealing screw 574c is screwed into the sealing boss 574c. In this state, the sealing seal 581 is attached so as to straddle the first seal attachment part 567 and the second seal attachment part 574. At this time, the sealing seal 581 is attached so as to extend from the front surface 567a of the first seal attachment part 567, through the right surface 567b of the first seal attachment part 567 and the right surface 574b of the second seal attachment part 574, and to the rear surface 574a of the second seal attachment part 574. In other words, the sealing seal 581 is attached while being folded into an approximately U-shape. As a result, the seam between the right-facing surface 567b of the first seal attachment portion 567 and the right-facing surface 574b of the second seal attachment portion 574 is sealed with the seal 581. The sealing recess 567c is also sealed with the seal 581.

Furthermore, a generally U-shaped seal cover 583 is attached to cover the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574 to which the seal sticker 581 is affixed. This seal cover 583 has a front cover portion 583a that covers the forward surface 567a of the first seal affixing portion 567, a side cover portion 583b that covers the right surface 567b of the first seal affixing portion 567 and the right surface 574b of the second seal affixing portion 574, and a rear cover portion 583c that covers the rear surface 574a of the second seal affixing portion 574. In this way, the seal cover 583 covers the entire seal sticker 581, thereby preventing the seal sticker 581 from being peeled off, damaged, or soiled.

The seal cover 583 is formed by injection molding using a transparent resin, so that the sealing seal 581 can be seen through the seal cover 583 from the outside even when the seal cover 583 is attached.
Although not shown, the board case 550 is provided with a crimping portion similar to that of the twentieth embodiment. The crimping portion is used to crimp (seal) the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570 when they are engaged with each other. After crimping (sealing), the engagement between the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570 cannot be released unless at least a part of the crimping portion is destroyed. In this embodiment, a description of the crimping portion will be omitted.

When opening the board case 550, first remove the seal cover 583, then peel off the sealing sticker 581, and then remove the sealing screw 574d. Then, slide the rear cover 570 relative to the front cover 560 in the opposite direction to when the front cover 560 and rear cover 570 are fitted together. This allows the board case 550 to be opened, and the main control board 530 stored inside the board case 550 to be removed.

Here, the sealing seal 581 is configured to leave a trace when it is peeled off. Specifically, when the sealing seal 581 is peeled off, a part of the adhesive layer of the sealing seal 581 peels off from the seal base material in the shape of the characters "opened", and the characters "opened" appear on the surface of the first seal affixing part 567 and the second seal affixing part 574. Also, a fragile sheet with many cuts is used as the seal base material of the sealing seal 581, and when the sealing seal 581 is peeled off, the seal base material is damaged or broken. In this way, when the sealing seal 581 is peeled off, a trace is left on the sealing seal 581.

In addition, there are cases where the sealing seal 581 is not peeled off, but a hole is drilled in the sealing seal 581 at a position corresponding to the sealing recess 567c, and the sealing screw 574d is removed. In this case, since a hole is drilled in the sealing seal 581, a trace of the hole remains on the sealing seal 581.
Furthermore, the sealing seal 581 may not be peeled off, but may be cut with a blade such as a cutter along the seam between the right-facing surface 567b of the first seal affixing portion 567 and the right-facing surface 574b of the second seal affixing portion 574, thereby opening the board case 550. In this case, since the sealing seal 581 is cut with the blade, a trace of the cut remains on the sealing seal 581.

Furthermore, the board case 550 may be opened with the sealing seal 581 affixed so as to straddle the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574. In this case, the sealing seal 581 is damaged or broken due to the seam between the right-facing surface 567b of the first seal affixing portion 567 and the right-facing surface 574b of the second seal affixing portion 574, and a trace of this remains on the sealing seal 581. In this case, the seam between the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574 becomes the breaking portion that breaks the sealing seal 581.
In this way, when the substrate case 550 is opened, a trace thereof is left on the sealing seal 581. In other words, the substrate case 550 cannot be opened without leaving a trace of opening on the sealing seal 581. Therefore, by visually checking the state of the sealing seal 581, it can be confirmed whether or not the substrate case 550 has been opened.

Here, a fraudulent act may be committed in which a fake seal 582 is affixed over a genuine seal 581, which still shows signs of having been opened, and then a seal cover 583 is attached to cover the fake seal 582, thereby concealing the signs of having been opened.
164, suppose that a counterfeit seal 582 is affixed onto a genuine seal 581, and a seal cover 583 is attached to cover the counterfeit seal 582. In this case, even if traces of opening remain on the genuine seal 581, the traces of opening left on the genuine seal 581 cannot be visually confirmed by simply looking at the counterfeit seal 582 through the seal cover 583 from the outside.

In particular, if the sealing seal 581 is not peeled off and a hole is drilled at a position corresponding to the sealing recess 567c in the sealing seal 581 and the sealing screw 574d is removed, a trace of this will remain as a broken portion 581a, as shown in the enlarged view of part A in Figure 164.
As shown in the enlarged view of part A in Figure 164, when a fake seal 582 is affixed on top of a genuine seal 581 with a broken portion 581a remaining, and a seal cover 583 is attached to cover this fake seal 582, the broken portion 581a remaining on the genuine seal 581 cannot be visually confirmed from the outside of the seal cover 583.

Therefore, in the 28th embodiment (A), the first seal attachment portion 567 and the second seal attachment portion 574, their joints, and the sealing seal 581 attached thereto are formed so as to be visible from the surface of the board case 550 opposite the solder surface of the main control board 530.
That is, the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574, their seams, and the seal seal 581 affixed thereto are formed so as to be visible through the rear surface portion 573 of the rear cover 570.
Specifically, when viewed from the rear surface 573 side of the rear cover 570 in the direction of line of sight D5 in FIG. 163, the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574, their seams, and the seal seal 581 affixed thereto can be visually confirmed.

In addition, in the 28th embodiment (A), the first seal attachment portion 567 and the second seal attachment portion 574, their joints, and the sealing seal 581 attached thereto are formed so as to be visible from the surface of the board case 550 facing the component surface of the main control board 530.
That is, the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574, their seams, and the seal seal 581 affixed thereto are formed so as to be visible through the front surface portion 566 of the front cover 560.
When viewed in the direction of line of sight D6 in Figure 163, the line of sight is blocked by the main control board 530, and the rearward facing surface 574a of the second seal affixing portion 574 cannot be seen. However, if the viewpoint is moved to the right from the viewpoint of line of sight D6 in Figure 163, the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574, their seams, and the seal sticker 581 affixed to them can be seen from the front portion 566 of the front cover 560.

Furthermore, in the 28th embodiment (A), the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574, their seams, and the sealing seal 581 affixed thereto are formed so as to be visible from the side of the substrate case 550 opposite the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574.
That is, the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574, their seams, and the seal seal 581 affixed thereto are formed so as to be visible through the left side wall 571d of the rear cover 570.
Specifically, when viewed from the left side wall 571d of the rear cover 570 in the direction of line of sight D3 or D4 in FIG. 163, the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574, their seams, and the seal seal 581 affixed thereto can be visually confirmed.
In particular, when viewed from the left side wall 571d of the rear cover 570 in the direction of line of sight D4 in Figure 163, the seam between the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574 can be seen without overlapping with the seam between the left side wall 565d of the front cover 560 and the left side wall 571d of the rear cover 570, and without being obstructed by the feet 530d of the electronic component 530b protruding from the solder surface of the main control board 530.

Furthermore, in the 28th embodiment (A), the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574, their joints, and the sealing seal 581 affixed thereto are formed so as to be visible from the upper wall 571a and the lower wall 571b of the rear cover 570.
In this way, in the 28th embodiment (A), the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574, their joints, and the sealing seal 581 affixed thereto are formed so as to be visible from the rear surface portion 573 of the rear cover 570, the front surface portion 566 of the front cover 560, and the left side wall 571d, upper wall 571a, and lower wall 571b of the rear cover 570.

Therefore, the genuine seal seal 581 affixed to the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574 can be visually confirmed from the inside (inner surface side) of the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574.
As a result, even if a counterfeit seal 582 is affixed on top of a genuine seal 581, the genuine seal 581 cannot be peeled off, the genuine seal 581 cannot be cut with a blade along the seam between the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574, and traces of the genuine seal 581 being damaged or broken by the seam between the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574 can be visually confirmed.

In addition, in the 28th embodiment (A), the sealing recess 567c provided on the forward surface 567a of the first seal attachment portion 567 is formed so as to be visible from the surface of the board case 550 that faces the solder surface of the main control board 530.
That is, the sealing recess 567 c provided on the front surface 567 a of the first seal attachment portion 567 is formed so as to be visible through the rear surface portion 573 of the rear cover 570 .
Specifically, when viewed from the rear surface 573 side of the rear cover 570 in the direction of line of sight D7 in Figure 164, the sealing recess 567c provided on the forward surface 567a of the first seal attachment portion 567 can be visually confirmed.

This makes it possible to visually check the portion of the genuine seal sticker 581 that covers the sealing recess 567c from inside (the inner surface side) of the forward surface 567a of the first seal attachment portion 567.
Therefore, even if a fake seal 582 is affixed on top of a genuine seal 581, the trace of a hole made in the part of the genuine seal 581 that covers the sealing recess 567c can be visually confirmed.

In other words, if a hole is made in the part of the genuine seal seal 581 that covers the sealing recess 567c, the trace will remain as a broken point 581a, as shown in the enlarged view of part A in Figure 164. Even if a fake seal seal 582 is affixed on top of the genuine seal seal 581 with the broken point 581a, the broken point 581a left in the genuine seal seal 581 can be visually confirmed by looking in the direction of line of sight D7 in Figure 164 from the rear surface 573 side of the rear cover 570.

In addition, the distance from the component surface of the main control board 530 to the tip of the foot 530 of the electronic component 530b is set to be smaller than the distance from the component surface of the main control board 530 to the joint between the first seal attachment portion 567 and the second seal attachment portion 574.
In other words, based on the component side of the main control board 530, the height of the tip of the foot 530d of the electronic component 530b that protrudes from the solder side of the main control board 530 is set lower than the height of the joint between the first seal attachment portion 567 and the second seal attachment portion 574.

163 shows an example in which three legs 530d of an electronic component 530b protrude from the solder surface of a main control board 530. Of the three legs 530d, the two legs 530d on the left side are bent slightly to the left for temporary fixing during soldering, while the one leg 530d on the right side extends straight without being bent.
Using the component surface of the main control board 530 as a reference, the height of the tip of all of the legs 530d of the electronic components 530b protruding from the solder surface of the main control board 530 is set lower than the height of the joint between the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574. In other words, using the component surface of the main control board 530 as a reference, the height of the tip of the bent legs 530d and the height of the tip of the straight legs 530d that are not bent are both set lower than the height of the joint between the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574.

Furthermore, the distance from the component surface of the main control board 530 to the head of the screw 530f that fixes the main control board 530 is set to be smaller than the distance from the component surface of the main control board 530 to the joint between the first seal attachment portion 567 and the second seal attachment portion 574.
In other words, based on the component surface of the main control board 530, the height of the screw head of the screw 530f that fixes the main control board 530 is set lower than the height of the joint between the first seal attachment portion 567 and the second seal attachment portion 574.

This ensures that when looking at the seam between the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574 from the side of the board case 550 opposite the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574 (the left side wall 571d of the rear cover 570), the feet 530d of the electronic component 530b protruding from the solder surface of the main control board 530 and the screw heads of the screws 530f that secure the main control board 530 are not obstructing the line of sight.
Specifically, when looking at the seam between the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574 from the left side wall 571d of the rear cover 570 in the direction of line of sight D3 in FIG. 163, the feet 530d of the electronic component 530b protruding from the solder surface of the main control board 530 and the heads of the screws 530f that secure the main control board 530 are prevented from obstructing the line of sight.

Furthermore, a test terminal 530e is provided on the component surface of the main control board 530 at a position adjacent to the first seal attachment portion 567 and the second seal attachment portion 574. This test terminal 530e is a terminal to which a test electronic component is attached during a test firing test.
Here, the test electronic components are electronic components that are mounted on the main control board 530 only during the test firing test, and are not mounted on the gaming machines installed in the hall (store). The test electronic components are surface-mounted on the test terminals 530e. That is, the test terminals 530e are terminals formed to surface-mount the test electronic components.

For this reason, there is no socket for mounting a test electronic component at the position of the test terminal 530e on the component side of the main control board 530. And since test electronic components are not mounted in gaming machines installed in halls (stores), only a circuit wiring pattern for surface mounting the test electronic component is provided at the position of the test terminal 530e on the component side of the main control board 530.

In a gaming machine installed in a hall (store), when the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574, their seams, and the sealing seals 581 affixed thereto are viewed from the surface of the board case 550 facing the component surface of the main control board 530 (the front surface 566 of the front cover 560), the line of sight passes through the space between the front surface 566 of the front cover 560 and the test terminal 530e. This prevents the line of sight from being blocked by the electronic components mounted on the component surface of the main control board 530.
Furthermore, when looking from the upper wall 565a of the front cover 560 in the direction of line of sight D1 in FIG. 162 at the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574, their seams, and the sealing seal 581 affixed thereto, the line of sight passes through the space between the front portion 566 of the front cover 560 and the test terminal 530e, so that the line of sight D1 is not obstructed by the electronic components mounted on the component side of the main control board 530.

Furthermore, when looking from the left side wall 565d of the front cover 560 in the direction of line of sight D2 in FIG. 162 at the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574, their seams, and the seal seal 581 affixed thereto, the line of sight passes through the space between the front portion 566 of the front cover 560 and the test terminal 530e, so line of sight D2 is not blocked by the electronic components mounted on the component side of the main control board 530.

Here, the parting line of the mold will be described.
A mold used in injection molding is usually composed of a core (male mold, movable side) and a cavity (female mold, fixed side). A streak-like protrusion is formed on the outer periphery of the molded product at a position corresponding to the parting surface between the core and the cavity. This streak-like protrusion is called a parting line.
For example, when injection molding a molded product having a protrusion or undercut on the outer circumferential surface, the mold is composed of a core, a cavity, and a slide core that moves in a direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the core. In this case, streak-like convex portions are formed on the outer circumferential surface of the molded product at positions corresponding to the dividing surface between the slide core and the cavity and at positions corresponding to the dividing surface between the slide core and the core. These streak-like convex portions are also called parting lines.

In the 28th embodiment (A), as shown in FIG. 165(1), two flanges 568a to 568b are provided on the outer surface (outer surface) of the left side wall 565d of the front cover 560, which protrude outward. These flanges 568a to 568b extend from the end of the upper wall 565a side of the left side wall 565d of the front cover 560 to the end of the lower wall 565b side, and are formed parallel to the front surface 566 of the front cover 560. When the front cover 560 having such a shape is injection molded, a parting line 568c is formed in the left side wall 565d of the front cover 560 at a position corresponding to the dividing surface between the slide core and the cavity, since the mold is composed of a core, a cavity, and a slide core. Similarly, parting lines are also formed on the outer surfaces of the upper wall 565a, the lower wall 565b, and the right side wall 565c of the front cover 560.

As shown in FIG. 165(2), two flanges 576a-576b are provided on the outer surface (outer surface) of the left side wall 571d of the rear cover 570, protruding outward. These flanges 576a-576b extend from the end of the upper wall 571a side of the left side wall 571d of the rear cover 570 to the end of the lower wall 571b side, and are formed parallel to the rear surface portion 573 of the rear cover 570. When the rear cover 570 having such a shape is injection molded, a parting line 576c is formed in the left side wall 571d of the rear cover 570 at a position corresponding to the dividing surface between the slide core and the cavity, since the mold is composed of a core, a cavity, and a slide core. Similarly, parting lines are formed on the outer surfaces of the upper wall 571a, the lower wall 571b, and the right side wall 571c of the rear cover 570.

In the 28th embodiment (A), the distance from the component surface of the main control board 530 to the parting line 576c formed on the outer surfaces of the upper wall 571a, the lower wall 571b, the right side wall 571c, and the left side wall 571d of the rear cover 570 is set to be greater than the distance from the component surface of the main control board 530 to the seam between the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574. In other words, based on the component surface of the main control board 530, the height of the parting line 576c formed on the outer surfaces of the upper wall 571a, the lower wall 571b, the right side wall 571c, and the left side wall 571d of the rear cover 570 is set to be greater than the height of the seam between the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574.

When the seam between the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574 is viewed from the upper wall 571a, the lower wall 571b, or the left side wall 571d of the rear cover 570, if the parting line 576c formed on the outer surface of the upper wall 571a, the lower wall 571b, or the left side wall 571d of the rear cover 570 appears to overlap with the seam between the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574, it becomes difficult to visually confirm the seam between the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574, which in turn makes it difficult to visually confirm the state of the sealing seal 581.

Therefore, in the 28th embodiment (A), the height of the parting line 576c formed on the outer surfaces of the upper wall 571a, the lower wall 571b, the right side wall 571c and the left side wall 571d of the rear cover 570 is set to be higher than the height of the seam between the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574, based on the component surface of the main control board 530.
As a result, when looking at the seam between the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574 from the upper wall 571a, lower wall 571b, or left side wall 571d of the rear cover 570, the parting line 576c formed on the outer surface of the upper wall 571a, lower wall 571b, or left side wall 571d of the rear cover 570 does not overlap with the seam between the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574, making it easier to visually check the seam between the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574 and the condition of the sealing seal 581.

Also, as shown in FIG. 97 of the 19th embodiment (B), the board case 550 housing the main control board 530 is attached to the back of the game board 504 of the pachinko game machine 500. At this time, the board case 550 is attached to be rotatable relative to the back of the game board 504 of the pachinko game machine 500 around a rotation axis provided near its left side surface (near the left side wall 565d of the front cover 560 and the left side wall 571d of the rear cover 570).

In this embodiment, the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574 to which the sealing seal 581 is affixed are provided on the right side surface of the substrate case 550. In other words, the substrate case 550 is attached rotatably about a rotation axis provided near the side surface opposite to the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574.
Therefore, by rotating the board case 550 relative to the back surface of the game board 504 of the pachinko game machine 500 and pulling out the right side of the board case 550 toward the front, the first sticker attachment portion 567 and the second sticker attachment portion 574 provided on the right side of the board case 550 can be easily seen.

Furthermore, by rotating the board case 550 relative to the back surface of the game board 504 and pulling out the right side surface of the board case 550 toward the front, the seam between the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574 can be easily seen from the rear surface portion 573 of the rear cover 570, the front surface portion 566 of the front cover 560, the upper wall 571a of the rear cover 570, and the lower wall 571b of the rear cover 570. The seal sticker 581 affixed across the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574 can be easily visually confirmed from the inside (inner surface side) of the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574.

Although the twenty-eighth embodiment (A) of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the 28th embodiment (A), the seal attachment portion (first seal attachment portion 567 and second seal attachment portion 574) to which the sealing seal 581 is attached is provided on the right side surface of the substrate case 550 (front cover 560 and rear cover 570), but this is not limited to this.
The sticker attachment portion (first sticker attachment portion 567 and second sticker attachment portion 574) may be provided, for example, on the left side surface, the upper side surface, or the lower side surface of the board case 550.
In addition, the seal attachment portion (first seal attachment portion 567 and second seal attachment portion 574) may be formed, for example, in a flat plane inclined with respect to the front surface 566 of the front cover 560, the right side wall 565c of the front cover 560, and the right side wall 571c of the rear cover 570.

(2) In the 28th embodiment (A), the sticker attachment portion (first sticker attachment portion 567 and second sticker attachment portion 574) is provided in only one location on the right side surface of the board case 550, but it may be provided in multiple locations, not limited to one location.
The sticker attachment portions (first sticker attachment portion 567 and second sticker attachment portion 574) may be provided, for example, in two locations on the right and left sides of the substrate case 550, or in three locations on the upper side, right and left sides of the substrate case 550.

(3) In the twenty-eighth embodiment (A), the sealing sticker 581 is folded into a substantially U-shape and attached, but this is not limited thereto.
As long as the sealing sticker 581 is attached so as to span at least the first sticker attachment portion 567 and the second sticker attachment portion 574 (the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570), it may be attached by folding it into an L shape, for example, or it may be attached only on the same plane without folding it.
However, when the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570 are sealed with the sealing screw 574d, it is preferable to cover the sealing recess 567c, in which the head of the sealing screw 574d fits, with the sealing seal 581, whether the sealing seal 581 is folded into an L shape and attached, or whether the sealing seal 581 is attached only on the same plane without being folded.

(4) In the twenty-eighth embodiment (A), no breaking member is provided for breaking the sealing seal 581, but this is not limiting.
For example, a breaking member for breaking the sealing seal 581 is provided inside the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574 (between the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574). When a substantially U-shaped seal cover 583 attached so as to cover the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574 from the outside is removed, the breaking member protrudes (jumps out) from the joint between the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574 to the outside of the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574. At this time, the breaking member may be configured to break the sealing seal 581.

The breaking member may be made of a transparent resin, or may be made of a translucent or opaque resin.
Furthermore, the board case 550 (the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570) and the breaking member may be formed from resin of the same color, or from resins of different colors.
When a breaking member for breaking the sealing seal 581 is provided inside the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574, it is preferable to form the breaking member so as to be visually identifiable from the left side surface, upper surface, or lower surface of the substrate case 550 (the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570). Furthermore, it is preferable to form the breaking member so as to be visually identifiable from the front surface portion 566 of the front cover 560 and the rear surface portion 573 of the rear cover 570.

(5) In the twenty-eighth embodiment (A), an example was shown in which the board case 550 housing the main control board 530 is attached to the rear surface of the game board 504 of the pachinko gaming machine 500, but this is not limited to this.
22 of the seventh embodiment, a board case 550 housing a main control board 530 may be attached to the inner surface of the back plate 13b of the cabinet 13 of the slot machine 10. In this case, the board case 550 may be attached directly to the inner surface of the back plate 13b of the cabinet 13, or may be attached via another member.
Furthermore, the substrate case 550 is not limited to being attached to the inner surface of the back plate 13 b of the cabinet 13 , but may be attached to the inner surfaces of the left and right side plates of the cabinet 13 , for example.

Furthermore, the substrate case 550 may be fixed to a bracket, and the bracket may be attached to the inner surface of the back panel 13b of the cabinet 13. In this case, a crimping portion may be provided on the substrate case 550 and the bracket, and after the substrate case 550 is fixed to the bracket and crimped (sealed) using the crimping portion, the substrate case 550 may be configured so that it cannot be removed from the bracket unless at least a part of the crimping portion is destroyed.

Furthermore, a seal sticker may be affixed across the board case 550 and the bracket, so that when the board case 550 is removed from the bracket, a trace is left behind.
Moreover, the bracket is preferably formed by injection molding using a transparent resin, so that even when the substrate case 550 is fixed to the bracket, the substrate case 550 can be seen through the bracket from the outside of the bracket, and further the first seal attachment portion 567 and the second seal attachment portion 574, as well as the sealing seal 581 attached thereto, can be seen.

Furthermore, the bracket may be rotatably attached to the inner surface of the back panel 13b of the cabinet 13, centering on a pivot axis provided on its left side (the side opposite the first seal attachment portion 567 and the second seal attachment portion 574 of the board case 550).
This makes it possible to easily see the first seal attachment portion 567 and the second seal attachment portion 574 provided on the right side of the substrate case 550 when the bracket and substrate case 550 are rotated relative to the inner surface of the back panel 13b of the cabinet 13 and the right side of the bracket and substrate case 550 is pulled out toward the front.

Furthermore, by rotating the bracket and board case 550 relative to the inner surface of the back panel 13b of the cabinet 13 and pulling the right side surface of the bracket and board case 550 forward, the seam between the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574 can be easily seen from the rear surface portion 573 of the rear cover 570, the front surface portion 566 of the front cover 560, the upper wall 571a of the rear cover 570, and the lower wall 571b of the rear cover 570. The seal seal 581 affixed across the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574 can be easily visually confirmed from the inside (inner surface side) of the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574.

(6) In the 28th embodiment (A), the seal attachment portion (first seal attachment portion 567 and second seal attachment portion 574) is provided on the right side surface of the substrate case 550 (front cover 560 and rear cover 570), and further, the sealing seal 581 is folded into a U-shape and attached to the outer surfaces of the first seal attachment portion 567 and the second seal attachment portion 574, but this is not limited to this.
For example, the first seal attachment portion 567 and the second seal attachment portion 574 can be provided flat on approximately the same plane as the front surface 566 of the front cover 560 (the surface facing the component surface of the main control board 530).

In this case, the sealing sticker 581 is attached flat without being folded so as to straddle the first sticker attachment portion 567 and the second sticker attachment portion 574 which are provided on approximately the same plane as the front surface portion 566 of the front cover 560 .
Furthermore, the substrate case 550 (front cover 560 and rear cover 570) cannot be opened unless the sealing seal 581 is peeled off or cut with a blade along the seam between the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574, and if the sealing seal 581 is peeled off or cut with a blade, a trace remains on the sealing seal 581.

Furthermore, when the substrate case 550 (front cover 560 and rear cover 570) is opened while the sealing seal 581 is attached so as to straddle the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574, the sealing seal 581 breaks at the seam between the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574, leaving a trace on the sealing seal 581.
The seam between the first seal attachment portion 567 and the second seal attachment portion 574 is formed so as to be visible (visually confirmable) from a rear surface 573 of the rear cover 570 (the surface facing the solder surface of the main control board 530).

This makes it possible for the seal sticker 581 affixed to the first sticker affixing portion 567 and the second sticker affixing portion 574 to be visually confirmed from the inside (inner surface side) of the first sticker affixing portion 567 and the second sticker affixing portion 574.
Therefore, even if a fake seal 582 is affixed on top of a genuine seal 581, the genuine seal 581 can be peeled off, or the genuine seal 581 can be cut with a blade along the seam between the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574, and traces of the genuine seal 581 being damaged or broken by the seam between the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574 can be visually confirmed.

Also, for example, a breaking protrusion for breaking the sealing seal 581 may be provided in the rear cover 570 at a position corresponding to the first seal affixing portion 567 or the second seal affixing portion 574. Then, when the substrate case 550 (front cover 560 and rear cover 570) is opened (the rear cover 570 is slid relative to the front cover 560), the breaking protrusion breaks the sealing seal 581, so that a trace that the substrate case 550 has been opened may remain on the sealing seal 581.
In this case, in addition to the seam between the first seal attachment portion 567 and the second seal attachment portion 574, a breakage protrusion is formed so as to be visible (visually confirmable) from the rear surface 573 of the rear cover 570 (the surface facing the solder surface of the main control board 530).

This allows the seal seal 581 affixed to the first seal affixing section 567 and the second seal affixing section 574 to be visually confirmed from the inside (inner surface side) of the first seal affixing section 567 and the second seal affixing section 574, and makes it possible to visually confirm traces of damage to the seal seal 581 caused by the breaking protrusion (traces of the board case 550 being opened).

(7) In the twenty-eighth embodiment (A), an example was shown in which the legs 530d of the electronic components 530b protruded from the solder surface of the main control board 530, but this is not limited to this.
The electronic component 530b may be surface-mounted on the component surface of the main control board 530. In this case, the legs 530d of the electronic component 530b do not protrude from the solder surface of the main control board 530. This makes it possible to prevent the legs 530d of the electronic component 530b from blocking the line of sight when viewing the seam between the first seal attachment portion 567 and the second seal attachment portion 574 from the left side wall 571d side of the rear cover 570.

The first to twenty-eighth embodiments (A) and the various modified examples shown in the first to twenty-eighth embodiments (A) are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Twenty-eighth embodiment (B)>
In the twenty-eighth embodiment (B), a main control board 530 is fixed to a rear cover 570 of a board case 550A, and a seal 581 is attached to the right side surface of the board case 550A.
The 28th embodiment (B) differs from the 28th embodiment (A) in that the main control board 530 is fixed to the rear cover 570 of the board case 550A, but the first seal attachment portion 567 and the second seal attachment portion 574 are similar to the 28th embodiment (A).
The 28th embodiment (B) will be described below, focusing on the differences from the 28th embodiment (A).

FIG. 166 is a cross-sectional view of a board case 550A in the twenty-eighth embodiment (B), and corresponds to FIG. 163 in the twenty-eighth embodiment (A).
In the 28th embodiment (B), as in the 28th embodiment (A), the board case 550A is provided with a front cover 560 that covers the component side of the main control board 530, and a rear cover 570 that covers the solder side of the main control board 530.
Also, similarly to the twenty-eighth embodiment (A), the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570 are both formed by injection molding using a transparent resin.

Furthermore, the front cover 560 is formed in a horizontally elongated, approximately rectangular box shape, and has a front surface 566, an upper wall 565a, a lower wall 565b, a right side wall 565c, and a left side wall 565d, which is similar to the 28th embodiment (A).
Furthermore, the rear cover 570 is formed in a horizontally elongated, approximately rectangular box shape, and has a rear surface portion 573, an upper wall 571a, an upper wall 571b, a right side wall 571c, and a left side wall 571d, similar to the 28th embodiment (A).

Also, as in the 28th embodiment (A), a large number of electronic components 530b to 530c are mounted on the component side of the main control board 530, and screw holes 530a that penetrate from the component side to the solder side are provided in the four corners of the main control board 530.
In the 28th embodiment (B), unlike the 28th embodiment (A), bosses 575 used when attaching (fixing) the main control board 530 are provided on the four corners of the inner surface of the rear portion 573 of the rear cover 570.

In addition, in the 28th embodiment (B), when the inner surface of the rear portion 573 of the rear cover 570 and the solder surface of the main control board 530 are faced to each other, the four bosses 575 of the rear cover 570 overlap with the four screw holes 530a of the main control board 530. In this state, by inserting the screws 530f into each screw hole 530a from the component side of the main control board 530 and screwing them into each boss 575, the main control board 530 can be attached (fixed) to the rear cover 570.

Furthermore, in the 28th embodiment (B), unlike the 28th embodiment (A), the board case 550A is of a pivotable opening and closing type. In the 28th embodiment (B), a pivot shaft is provided near the left side wall 565d of the front cover 560 and the left side wall 571d of the rear cover 570, and the board case 550A is opened and closed by pivoting the front cover 560 relative to the rear cover 570 about this pivot shaft.

Also, in the 28th embodiment (B), as in the 28th embodiment (A), a first seal affixing portion 567 is provided on the right side of the front cover 560, and a second seal affixing portion 574 is provided on the right side of the rear cover 570 at a position corresponding to the first seal affixing portion 567.
In the twenty-eighth embodiment (B), when the front cover 560 is rotated relative to the rear cover 570 and the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570 are fitted together, the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574 are formed so as to be continuous with each other.

Moreover, the structures of the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574 are similar to those of the twenty-eighth embodiment (A).
Furthermore, as in the 28th embodiment (A), the sealing seal 581 is folded into a U-shape and attached so as to span the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574, the seam between the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574 is sealed with the sealing seal 581, the sealing recess 567c is also sealed with the sealing seal 581, and a seal cover 583 is attached to cover the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574 to which the sealing seal 581 has been affixed.

In the 28th embodiment (B), when opening the board case 550A, first remove the seal cover 583, then peel off the sealing sticker 581, and then remove the sealing screw 574d. Then, rotate the front cover 560 relative to the rear cover 570 in the opposite direction to when the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570 are fitted together. This allows the board case 550A to be opened, and the main control board 530 stored inside the board case 550A to be removed.

Also, in the 28th embodiment (B), as in the 28th embodiment (A), the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574, their seams, and the sealing seal 581 affixed thereto are formed so as to be visible from the surface of the board case 550A facing the component surface of the main control board 530.
That is, the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574, their seams, and the seal seal 581 affixed thereto are formed so as to be visible through the front surface portion 566 of the front cover 560.
Specifically, when viewed from the front surface 566 side of the front cover 560 in the direction of line of sight D8 in FIG. 166, the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574, their seams, and the seal seal 581 affixed thereto can be visually confirmed.

Furthermore, in the 28th embodiment (B), as in the 28th embodiment (A), the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574, their seams, and the sealing seal 581 affixed thereto are formed so as to be visible from the surface of the board case 550A opposite the solder surface of the main control board 530.
That is, the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574, their seams, and the seal seal 581 affixed thereto are formed so as to be visible through the rear surface portion 573 of the rear cover 570.

When viewed in the direction of line of sight D10 in FIG. 166, the line of sight is blocked by the main control board 530, and the forward surface 567a of the first seal affixing portion 567 cannot be seen. However, if the viewpoint is moved to the right from the viewpoint of line of sight D10 in FIG. 166, the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574, their seams, and the seal sticker 581 affixed thereto can be seen from the rear surface 573 side of the rear cover 570.

Furthermore, in the 28th embodiment (B), the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574, their seams, and the sealing seal 581 affixed thereto are formed so as to be visible from the side of the substrate case 550A opposite the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574.
That is, the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574, their joints, and the seal sticker 581 affixed thereto are formed so as to be visible through the left side wall 565d of the front cover 560.

When viewed in the direction of line of sight D9 in Figure 166, the line of sight is blocked by the electronic component 530c mounted on the main control board 530, and the right-facing surface 567b of the first seal affixing portion 567 cannot be seen. However, if the viewpoint is moved above the viewpoint of line of sight D9 in Figure 166, the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574, their seams, and the seal seal 581 affixed to them can be seen from the left side wall 565d of the front cover 560.
In addition, in the 28th embodiment (B), the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574, their joints, and the sealing seal 581 affixed thereto are formed so as to be visible from the upper wall 565a and the lower wall 565b of the front cover 560.

In this way, by forming the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574, their joints, and the seal sticker 581 affixed thereto so that they are visible from the front surface 566 of the front cover 560, the rear surface 573 of the rear cover 570, and the left side wall 565d, upper wall 565a, and lower wall 565b of the rear cover 570, it is possible to visually confirm the genuine seal sticker 581 affixed to the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574 from the inside (inner surface side) of the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574.

As a result, even if a counterfeit seal 582 is affixed on top of a genuine seal 581, the genuine seal 581 cannot be peeled off, the genuine seal 581 cannot be cut with a blade along the seam between the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574, and traces of the genuine seal 581 being damaged or broken by the seam between the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574 can be visually confirmed.

Also, in the 28th embodiment (B), similarly to the 28th embodiment (A), the sealing recess 567c provided on the forward surface 567a of the first seal attachment portion 567 is formed so as to be visible from the surface of the board case 550A that faces the solder surface of the main control board 530. That is, the sealing recess 567c provided on the forward surface 567a of the first seal attachment portion 567 is formed so as to be visible through the rear surface portion 573 of the rear cover 570.

This allows the portion of the genuine seal seal 581 that covers the sealing recess 567c to be visually confirmed from the inside (inner surface side) of the forward surface 567a of the first seal attachment portion 567. Therefore, even if a fake seal seal 582 is attached on top of a genuine seal seal 581, it is possible to visually confirm the traces of a hole being made in the portion of the genuine seal seal 581 that covers the sealing recess 567c.

In addition, in the 28th embodiment (B), the distance from the inner surface of the rear portion 573 of the rear cover 570 to the component surface of the main control board 530 is set to be smaller than the distance from the inner surface of the rear portion 573 of the rear cover 570 to the seam between the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570.
That is, with respect to the inner surface of rear surface portion 573 of rear cover 570 as a reference, the height of the component surface of main control board 530 is set lower than the height of the joint between front cover 560 and rear cover 570. Therefore, the component surface of main control board 530 is located closer to rear surface portion 573 of rear cover 570 than the joint between front cover 560 and rear cover 570.

This ensures that the main control board 530 does not block the line of sight when looking at the seam between the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574 from the side of the board case 550A opposite the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574 (the left side wall 565d of the front cover 560).

In addition, in the 28th embodiment (B), the distance from the inner surface of the rear portion 573 of the rear cover 570 to the head of the screw 530f that fixes the main control board 530 is set to be shorter than the distance from the inner surface of the rear portion 573 of the rear cover 570 to the joint between the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570.
That is, with respect to the inner surface of the rear surface 573 of the rear cover 570 as a reference, the height of the screw head of the screw 530f that fixes the main control board 530 is set lower than the height of the joint between the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570. Therefore, the screw head of the screw 530f that fixes the main control board 530 is located closer to the rear surface 573 of the rear cover 570 than the joint between the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570.

This ensures that when looking at the seam between the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574 from the side of the board case 550A opposite the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574 (the left side wall 565d of the front cover 560), the head of the screw 530f that secures the main control board 530 does not block the line of sight.

Furthermore, numerous electronic components 530b to 530c are mounted on the component surface of main control board 530. Furthermore, with respect to the component surface of main control board 530 as a reference, the height of electronic component 530b is set lower than the height of the joint between front cover 560 and rear cover 570, and the height of electronic component 530c is set higher than the height of the joint between front cover 560 and rear cover 570.
Electronic component 530b, which is shorter than the seam between front cover 560 and rear cover 570, is mounted in a position on the component side of the main control board 530 close to the first seal attachment portion 567 and the second seal attachment portion 574, and electronic component 530c, which is taller than the seam between the front cover 560 and rear cover 570, is mounted in a position on the component side of the main control board 530 away from the first seal attachment portion 567 and the second seal attachment portion 574.

This ensures that when looking at the seam between the first seal attachment section 567 and the second seal attachment section 574 from the surface of the board case 550A facing the component surface of the main control board 530 (the front surface 566 of the front cover 560), the line of sight is not obstructed by the electronic components 530b to 530c mounted on the component surface of the main control board 530.

Also, in the 28th embodiment (B), as in the 28th embodiment (A), a test terminal 530e is provided on the component side of the main control board 530 in a position adjacent to the first seal attachment portion 567 and the second seal attachment portion 574.
As a result, in an amusement machine installed in a hall (store), when looking at the seam between the first seal attachment portion 567 and the second seal attachment portion 574 from the surface of the board case 550A facing the component surface of the main control board 530 (front surface 566 of front cover 560), the line of sight passes through the space between the front surface 566 of the front cover 560 and the test terminal 530e, so that the line of sight is not obstructed by the electronic components mounted on the component surface of the main control board 530.

In addition, in the 28th embodiment (B), the distance from the component surface of the main control board 530 to the parting line 568c formed on the outer surfaces of the upper wall 565a, the lower wall 565b, the right side wall 565c, and the left side wall 565d of the front cover 560 is set to be greater than the distance from the component surface of the main control board 530 to the seam between the first seal attachment portion 567 and the second seal attachment portion 574.
In other words, based on the component surface of the main control board 530, the height of the parting line 568c formed on the outer surfaces of the upper wall 565a, the lower wall 565b, the right side wall 565c and the left side wall 565d of the front cover 560 is set higher than the height of the seam between the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574.

As a result, when the seam between the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574 is viewed from the upper wall 565a, lower wall 565b, or left side wall 565d of the front cover 560, the parting line 568c formed on the outer surface of the upper wall 565a, lower wall 565b, or left side wall 565d of the front cover 560 does not overlap with the seam between the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574, making it easier to visually check the seam between the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574 and the state of the sealing seal 581.

Also, in the 28th embodiment (B), as in the 28th embodiment (A), the substrate case 550A is rotatably attached to the back surface of the game board 504 of the pachinko game machine 500, centered on a pivot axis provided near its left side surface (near the left side wall 565d of the front cover 560 and the left side wall 571d of the rear cover 570).
That is, the first seal attachment section 567 and the second seal attachment section 574 are provided on the right side of the substrate case 550A, and the substrate case 550A is rotatably attached to the back surface of the game board 504 of the pachinko game machine 500, centering on a rotation axis provided near the side opposite the first seal attachment section 567 and the second seal attachment section 574.
As a result, by rotating the board case 550A relative to the back surface of the game board 504 of the pachinko game machine 500 and pulling the right side of the board case 550A out towards the front, the first sticker attachment section 567 and the second sticker attachment section 574 provided on the right side of the board case 550A can be easily seen.

Furthermore, by rotating the board case 550A relative to the back surface of the game board 504 and pulling the right side of the board case 550A toward the front, the seam between the first seal attachment portion 567 and the second seal attachment portion 574 can be easily seen from the front portion 566 of the front cover 560, the rear portion 573 of the rear cover 570, the upper wall 565a of the front cover 560, and the lower wall 565b of the front cover 560.
Furthermore, the seal sticker 581 affixed across the first sticker affixing portion 567 and the second sticker affixing portion 574 can be easily visually confirmed from the inside (inner surface) of the first sticker affixing portion 567 and the second sticker affixing portion 574.

The above describes the 28th embodiment (B) of the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned content, and modifications shown in the modified example of the 28th embodiment (A) are possible.
Furthermore, the first to twenty-eighth embodiments (B) are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combination.

<Twenty-eighth embodiment (C)>
In the twenty-eighth embodiment (C), a sealing sticker 581 is attached to the front surface of a board case 550B.
In the 28th embodiment (C), a substrate case 550B is fixed to a bracket 584, a seal sticker 581 is affixed across the front of the substrate case 550B and the front of the bracket 584, and the bracket 584 is attached to the inner surface of the back panel 13b of the cabinet 13.

Fig. 167(1) is a front view of the slot machine 10 and the board case 550B in the 28th embodiment (C), and Fig. 167(2) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B-B in Fig. 167(1). Fig. 168 is a view showing a state in which the left side of the board case 550B has been rotated forward with respect to the back plate 13b of the cabinet 13, and corresponds to Fig. 167(2).
In the 28th embodiment (C), as in the 28th embodiments (A) and (B), the board case 550B has a front cover 560 that covers the component side of the main control board 530, and a rear cover 570 that covers the solder side of the main control board 530.
Also, similarly to the twenty-eighth embodiments (A) and (B), the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570 are both formed by injection molding using a transparent resin.

Furthermore, the front cover 560 is formed in a horizontally elongated, approximately rectangular box shape, and has a front surface 566, an upper wall 565a, a lower wall 565b, a right side wall 565c, and a left side wall 565d, similar to the 28th embodiments (A) and (B).
Furthermore, the rear cover 570 is formed in a horizontally elongated, approximately rectangular box shape, and has a rear surface portion 573, an upper wall 571a, an upper wall 571b, a right side wall 571c, and a left side wall 571d, similar to the 28th embodiments (A) and (B).

In the twenty-eighth embodiment (C), the main control board 530 is attached (fixed) by screws to the inside of either the front cover 560 or the rear cover 570. When the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570 are fitted together in this state and sealed by screws, the main control board 530 can be stored inside the board case 550B.
Moreover, the twenty-eighth embodiment (C) includes a bracket 584 capable of housing the board case 550B. The bracket 584 is formed in a horizontally elongated, substantially rectangular box shape with an open front, and is formed by injection molding using transparent resin.

Specifically, the bracket 584 has a back plate portion 584a that faces the rear surface portion 573 of the rear cover 570 of the board case 550B in approximately parallel relation. This back plate portion 584a is formed in the shape of a horizontally long, approximately rectangular plate. The bracket 584 also has an upper edge portion 584b that extends forward from the upper edge of the back plate portion 584a, a lower edge portion 584c that extends forward from the lower edge of the back plate portion 584a, a right edge portion 584d that extends forward from the right edge of the back plate portion 584a, and a left edge portion 584e that extends forward from the left edge of the back plate portion 584a.

The upper edge 584b, the lower edge 584c, the right edge 584d, and the left edge 584e are all formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape. The upper edge 584b, the lower edge 584c, the right edge 584d, and the left edge 584e are all perpendicular to the back plate 584a. Furthermore, the upper edge 584b is perpendicular to the right edge 584d and the left edge 584e, and faces the lower edge 584c in approximately parallel relation. Furthermore, the right edge 584d faces the left edge 584e in approximately parallel relation.

Then, the board case 550B is stored inside the bracket 584 so that the front surface (inner surface) of the back plate portion 584a of the bracket 584 faces the rear surface (outer surface) of the rear portion 573 of the rear cover 570 of the board case 550B.
At this time, the upper edge 584b of the bracket 584 is positioned along the upper side of the upper wall 565a of the front cover 560 and the upper wall 571a of the rear cover 570 in the board case 550B, and the lower edge 584c of the bracket 584 is positioned along the lower side of the lower wall 565b of the front cover 560 and the lower wall 571b of the rear cover 570 in the board case 550B.

In addition, the right edge 584d of the bracket 584 is located along the right side of the right side wall 565c of the front cover 560 and the right side wall 571c of the rear cover 570 in the board case 550B, and the left edge 584e of the bracket 584 is located along the left side of the upper wall 565d of the front cover 560 and the left side wall 571d of the rear cover 570 in the board case 550B.
The surface of the board case 550B facing the component surface of the main control board 530 (front surface 566 of the front cover 560) and the front surfaces of the upper edge 584b, lower edge 584c, right edge 584d and left edge 584e of the bracket 584 are continuous and form approximately the same plane.

Although not shown, a crimping portion is provided on the right side of the board case 550B and the bracket 584. This crimping portion is used to crimp (seal) the board case 550B when it is stored inside the bracket 584. After crimping (sealing) is performed using this crimping portion, it is not possible to remove the board case 550B from inside the bracket 584 (to remove the board case 550B from the bracket 584) without destroying at least a part of the crimping portion, and furthermore it is not possible to open the board case 550B (to release the engagement between the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570), and therefore it is not possible to access the main control board 530.

167(1), a case side seal affixing portion 569 is provided on the upper front surface of the front surface portion 566 of the front cover 560 of the board case 550B, and a bracket side seal affixing portion 584f is provided on the front surface of the upper edge portion 584b of the bracket 584 at a position corresponding to the case side seal affixing portion 569. The case side seal affixing portion 569 and the bracket side seal affixing portion 584f are portions to which the seal 581 is affixed.
When the board case 550B is stored inside the bracket 584, the case side seal affixing portion 569 and the bracket side seal affixing portion 584f are continuous. At this time, the case side seal affixing portion 569 and the bracket side seal affixing portion 584f form approximately the same plane as the surface of the board case 550B facing the component surface of the main control board 530 (the front surface portion 566 of the front cover 560). Then, the seal sticker 581 is affixed so as to straddle the case side seal affixing portion 569 and the bracket side seal affixing portion 584f. The seal sticker 581 is the same as that in the twenty-eighth embodiment (A).

In the twenty-eighth embodiment (C), when opening the board case 550B, the sealing sticker 581 is peeled off, the crimped portion is broken, and the board case 550B is taken out from inside the bracket 584 (the board case 550B is removed from the bracket 584). This makes it possible to open the board case 550B (release the engagement between the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570), and to take out the main control board 530 housed inside the board case 550B.
Therefore, unless the sealing sticker 581 is peeled off and the crimped portion is destroyed, it is not possible to remove the board case 550B from inside the bracket 584, it is not possible to open the board case 550B, and it is not possible to remove the main control board 530.

Furthermore, sealing sticker 581 is configured to leave a trace when it is peeled off, and the crimped portion is also configured to leave a trace when it is destroyed, so that when board case 550B is removed from bracket 584 or when board case 550B is opened, the traces will remain.
Furthermore, when the sealing seal 581 is cut with a blade along the seam between the case side seal attachment portion 569 and the bracket side seal attachment portion 584f without peeling off the sealing seal 581 (while the sealing seal 581 is still attached) and the board case 550B is removed from the bracket 584, traces of the cut with the blade will remain on the sealing seal 581.

Furthermore, if the substrate case 550B is forcibly removed from the bracket 584 without peeling off the sealing seal 581 (with the sealing seal 581 still attached), the sealing seal 581 will be damaged or broken due to the seam between the case side seal attachment portion 569 and the bracket side seal attachment portion 584f, and traces of this will remain on the sealing seal 581.
In this way, when board case 550B is removed from bracket 584, a trace remains on sealing seal 581. In other words, board case 550B cannot be removed from bracket 584 without leaving a trace on sealing seal 581. For this reason, by visually checking the state of sealing seal 581, it can be confirmed whether board case 550B has been removed from bracket 584 or not.

167(1) and (2), in the 28th embodiment (C), the bracket 584 is attached to the front surface (inner surface) of the back plate 13b of the cabinet 13 of the slot machine 10. At this time, as shown in FIG. 168, the bracket 584 is attached to be rotatable with respect to the front surface (inner surface) of the back plate 13b of the cabinet 13 about a rotation axis provided near its left end (left edge 584e).
Furthermore, as described above, the front cover 560 and rear cover 570 of the board case 550B and the bracket 584 are formed by injection molding using transparent resin.

When the substrate case 550B is attached to the bracket 584, the case side seal attachment portion 569 and the bracket side seal attachment portion 584f, their joints, and the seal seal 581 affixed thereto can be seen (visually confirmed) from the rear (outer) surface of the back plate portion 584a of the bracket 584.
Therefore, when the substrate case 550B is attached to the bracket 584, the case side seal attachment portion 569 and the bracket side seal attachment portion 584f, their joints, and the sealing seal 581 affixed thereto can be visually confirmed from the rear surface portion 573 of the rear cover 570 through the back plate portion 584a of the bracket 584.

In addition, the case side seal attachment portion 569 and the bracket side seal attachment portion 584f, their joints, and the seal seal 581 affixed thereto are configured to be visible (visually confirmed) from the upper surface (outer surface) of the upper edge portion 584b of the bracket 584 and from the right surface (outer surface) of the right edge portion 584d of the bracket 584.
Therefore, the case side seal attachment portion 569 and the bracket side seal attachment portion 584f, their joints, and the seal seal 581 attached thereto can be visually confirmed from the upper wall 571a side of the rear cover 570 and the right side wall 571c side of the rear cover 570.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 168, when the bracket 584 is rotated relative to the back panel 13b of the cabinet 13 and the right end (right edge 584d) of the bracket 584 is pulled out toward the front, when viewed in the direction of line of sight D11 in FIG. 168, it becomes easier to visually check the case side seal attachment portion 569 and the bracket side seal attachment portion 584f, their joints, and the seal seal 581 attached thereto, from the rear (outer) surface of the back panel portion 584a of the bracket 584.

Furthermore, even if a counterfeit seal 582 is affixed on top of a genuine seal 581, the genuine seal 581 can be peeled off, or the genuine seal 581 can be cut with a blade along the seam between the case side seal affixing portion 569 and the bracket side seal affixing portion 584f, and traces of damage or breakage of the genuine seal 581 can be visually confirmed by the seam between the case side seal affixing portion 569 and the bracket side seal affixing portion 584f.

The above describes the 28th embodiment (C) of the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned content, and modifications shown in the modified example of the 28th embodiment (A) are possible.
Furthermore, the first to twenty-eighth embodiments (C) are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combination.

<Twenty-ninth embodiment>
The twenty-ninth embodiment relates to an air hole (also called an "air hole") provided in a board case.
In the twenty-ninth embodiment, a board case 700 for storing a sub-control board 540 in a pachinko game machine 500 is taken as an example. However, the board case 700 of the twenty-ninth embodiment can be applied to a case for storing a main control board 530 and other control boards equipped with CPUs.

Furthermore, the board case 700 of the 29th embodiment can be applied not only to the control board of a pachinko game machine 500, but also to cases for storing the main control board 50, sub control board 80, and other control boards equipped with CPUs of a slot machine 10.
It should be noted that the second, twentieth, twenty-eighth, and twenty-ninth embodiments all relate to a substrate case, but each of these may be implemented alone or in appropriate combination.

FIG. 169 is a perspective view of a board case 700 in the twenty-ninth embodiment.
Here, the "front (top) side" refers to the side of the sub-control board 540 on which electronic components are mounted (the component side), and the "rear (bottom) side" refers to the side opposite the side on the sub-control board 540 on which electronic components are mounted (the solder side).
Additionally, "upper side" refers to the upper side when the surface on the sub-control board 540 on which electronic components are mounted is viewed from the front, and "lower side" refers to the lower side when the surface on the sub-control board 540 on which electronic components are mounted is viewed from the front. Furthermore, "right side" refers to the right side when the surface on the sub-control board 540 on which electronic components are mounted is viewed from the front, and "left side" refers to the left side when the surface on the sub-control board 540 on which electronic components are mounted is viewed from the front.

169, the board case 700 includes a front cover 710 that covers the mounting surface (component surface) of the sub-control board 540 on which electronic components are mounted, and a rear cover 720 that covers the side (solder surface) opposite the mounting surface on the sub-control board 540. When the front cover 710 and the rear cover 720 are combined, the board case 700 capable of housing the sub-control board 540 therein is formed.
The front cover 710 is also referred to as the "first cover 710" or the "upper case 710", and the rear cover 720 is also referred to as the "second cover 720" or the "lower case 720".
In addition, in the board case 700 (when the front cover 710 and the rear cover 720 are combined), the side in which the sub-control board 540 is stored is referred to as the "inside", and the side exposed to the outside is referred to as the "outside".

The front cover 710 is formed in a box shape with an opening at the rear. The front cover 710 also has a front portion 711 that faces and is approximately parallel to the mounting surface (component surface) of the electronic components on the sub-control board 540. The front cover 710 also has an upper wall 712 that extends rearward from the upper edge of the front portion 711, a lower wall 713 that extends rearward from the lower edge of the front portion 711, a right side wall 714 that extends rearward from the right edge of the front portion 711, and a left side wall 715 that extends rearward from the left edge of the front portion 711.

In addition, electronic components such as a sub-CPU 540a, RWM, ROM, etc. are mounted on the component side of the sub-control board 540, and a connector 540b (board side connector 540b) is also mounted for connecting the sub-control board 540 to other control boards, etc. via a harness.
Furthermore, a cooling fan 717 for cooling the sub-CPU 540a and a fan intake hole 718 for taking in air sent by the cooling fan 717 are provided in the front cover 710 at a position corresponding to the sub-CPU 540a.

Furthermore, the front cover 710 is provided with a connector recess 716 for connecting a harness at a position corresponding to the board-side connector 540b.
This connector recess 716 has a bottom surface portion 716a that covers the periphery of the board side connector 540b on the component side of the sub-control board 540, and a side surface portion 716b that connects the bottom surface portion 716a to the front surface portion 711 and separates the inside and outside of the board case 700.

The bottom surface portion 716a is a portion for covering the periphery of the board-side connector 540b on the component surface of the sub-control board 540, and is formed in a substantially flat plate shape. Then, in a state in which the component surface of the sub-control board 540 is covered with the front cover 710, the bottom surface portion 716a is formed to cover the periphery of the board-side connector 540b on the component surface of the sub-control board 540.
An opening 716c for exposing the board-side connector 540b is provided at a position on the bottom surface 716a corresponding to the board-side connector 540b. When the component surface of the sub-control board 540 is covered with the front cover 710, a part of the board-side connector 540b is exposed to the outside of the board case 700 through the opening 716c.

The side surface portion 716 b connects the bottom surface portion 716 a and the front surface portion 711 , and also functions as a side wall that separates the inside and outside of the board case 700 .
When the component side of the sub-control board 540 is covered with the front cover 710, the side portion 716b is positioned at a position corresponding to the periphery of the opening 716c and the board-side connector 540b, and is formed so as to extend in a direction approximately perpendicular to the component side of the sub-control board 540.

Further, the side surface portion 716b is provided with an air hole 716d that connects the inside and outside of the board case 700.
Furthermore, air holes 716d that communicate between the inside and outside of the board case 700 are provided in the upper wall 712, the lower wall 713, the right side wall 714, and the left side wall 715.
The air sent into the inside of the substrate case 700 by the cooling fan 717 is configured to be discharged (blowed out) to the outside of the substrate case 700 through air holes 716d provided in the side portion 716b, the upper wall 712, the lower wall 713, the right wall 714, and the left wall 715.

Further, the rear cover 720 is formed in a plate shape that closes the opening on the rear surface of the front cover 710 .
When the front cover 710 and the rear cover 720 are combined, the front surface 711 of the front cover 710 and the rear cover 720 are formed to face each other substantially in parallel.
Below, the relationship between the air hole 716d provided in the side portion 716b, the board side connector 540b exposed to the outside of the board case 700 from the opening 716c, and the harness 730 connected to this board side connector 540b will be explained in more detail.

First, a case where the air hole 716d is opened only at a position corresponding to the height of the board side connector 540b will be described with reference to FIG. 170(1).
As shown in FIG. 170(1), a board-side connector 540b is mounted on the component side of the sub-control board 540 (the upward surface in FIG. 170(1)).
Further, a connector recess 716 is provided in a position on the front cover 710 of the board case 700A corresponding to the board-side connector 540b. This connector recess 716 has a bottom surface portion 716a that covers the periphery of the board-side connector 540b on the component surface of the sub-control board 540, and a side surface portion 716b that connects the bottom surface portion 716a and the front surface portion 711 and separates the inside and outside of the board case 700A.

An opening 716c is provided in the bottom surface 716a, and a portion of the board side connector 540b is exposed to the outside of the board case 700A through this opening 716c.
Furthermore, the side surface portion 716b is disposed at a position corresponding to the periphery of the opening 716c and the board-side connector 540b, and extends in a direction approximately perpendicular to the component surface of the sub-control board 540. Furthermore, the side surface portion 716b is provided with an air hole 716d that connects the inside and outside of the board case 700A.

The harness 730 is for connecting the sub-control board 540 to other control boards, etc., and includes a number of separate lead wires 730a and connectors 730b (harness side connectors 730b) provided at the ends of these lead wires 730a. The multiple lead wires 730a further include a lead wire 730a for supplying power. The harness side connector 730b is further connected to the board side connector 540b. When the board side connector 540b and the harness side connector 730b are connected, the multiple lead wires 730a extend from the harness side connector 730b on the side opposite the board side connector 540b.

In the example shown in FIG. 170(1), the air hole 716d is opened only at a position on the side surface portion 716b corresponding to the height of the board side connector 540b.
170(1), the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the upper surface (outer surface) of the front part 711 of the front cover 710 is set higher than the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the upper end of the harness side connector 730b. In other words, with the component surface of the sub-control board 540 as the reference, the height of the upper surface (outer surface) of the front part 711 of the front cover 710 is set higher than the height of the upper end of the harness side connector 730b.

170(1), the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the upper end of the side surface portion 716b is set to be higher than the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the upper end of the harness-side connector 730b. In other words, with the component surface of the sub-control board 540 as the reference, the height of the upper end of the side surface portion 716b is set to be higher than the height of the upper end of the harness-side connector 730b.
Furthermore, the air hole 716d is formed so as to extend from a position corresponding to the height of the component surface of the sub-control board 540 in Figure 170 (1) to a position corresponding to the height approximately midway between the top and bottom of the board side connector 540b.

In other words, the opening range of air hole 716d is formed so as to extend from a position corresponding to the height of the lower end of board-side connector 540b to a position corresponding to a height approximately halfway between the upper and lower ends of board-side connector 540b, based on the component surface of the sub-control board 540.
For this reason, in the example shown in FIG. 170(1), the air hole 716d is opened only at a position on the side surface portion 716b corresponding to the height of the board side connector 540b.

In addition, the air sent into the inside of the substrate case 700A by the cooling fan 717 is discharged (blowed out) to the outside of the substrate case 700A through the air hole 716d provided in the side portion 716b, as shown by the arrow pointing to the left in Figure 170 (1).
The air discharged (blown out) from the air hole 716d hits the side surface of the board side connector 540b and cools the board side connector 540b.

Here, the lead wire 730a, the harness side connector 730b, and the board side connector 540b may generate heat due to the current flowing therethrough. In particular, the lead wire 730a for supplying power is prone to generating heat because a relatively large current flows through it.
Furthermore, when the lead wire 730a generates heat, the conductor and coating that constitute the lead wire 730a may deteriorate or melt.
Furthermore, when the harness side connector 730b or the board side connector 540b generates heat, they may deteriorate or expand or contract, causing the connectors to adhere to each other and making it difficult to separate the connectors. In addition, the housings of these connectors may deform, and the terminals of these connectors may weld together.

Therefore, in the example shown in Figure 170 (1), an air hole 716d is provided at a position on the side portion 716b corresponding to the height of the board-side connector 540b, and as shown by the arrow pointing to the left in Figure 170 (1), air blowing out from the air hole 716d hits the side of the board-side connector 540b, thereby cooling the board-side connector 540b.
Even if the board side connector 540b generates heat, deterioration of the board side connector 540b, deformation of the housing of the board side connector 540b, and welding of the terminals of the board side connector 540b to the terminals of the harness side connector 730b are prevented.

170(1), a distance "d" is provided between the side surface 716b of the front cover 710 and the board-side connector 540b and the harness-side connector 730b. This distance "d" is set to a size large enough for a person's finger to fit between the side surface 716b and the board-side connector 540b and the harness-side connector 730b.
Here, for example, it may become necessary to remove (separate) the harness side connector 730b from the board side connector 540b for maintenance (service inspection) of the sub-control board 540. At this time, if the gap between the side portion 716b of the front cover 710 and the board side connector 540b and the harness side connector 730b is too narrow for a finger to fit in, it becomes difficult to remove (separate) the harness side connector 730b from the board side connector 540b.

In the example shown in FIG. 170(1), a distance "d" large enough for a person's finger to fit between the side portion 716b of the front cover 710 and the board side connector 540b and harness side connector 730b is provided. This makes it easier to remove the harness side connector 730b from the board side connector 540b by allowing a finger to fit between the side portion 716b of the front cover 710 and the board side connector 540b and harness side connector 730b during maintenance of the sub-control board 540, etc.

In addition, an engagement claw or locking mechanism may be provided as an engagement means for engaging the board side connector 540b and the harness side connector 730b, and this engagement claw or locking mechanism may be positioned on the side of the board side connector 540b and the harness side connector 730b that faces the side portion 716b.
In such a case, by providing a distance "d" between the board side connector 540b and the harness side connector 730b and the side portion 716b, which is large enough for a person's fingers to fit through, the engagement claws or locking mechanism can be easily operated with fingers, which in turn makes it easier to perform maintenance of the sub-control board 540.

Next, with reference to FIG. 170(2), a case where the air hole 716d is opened only at a position corresponding to the height of the harness side connector 730b will be described.
As in Figure 170 (1), a board side connector 540b is mounted on the component side of the sub-control board 540, and a connector recess 716 is provided at a position corresponding to the board side connector 540b on the front cover 710 of the board case 700B.

In addition, the connector recess 716 has a bottom portion 716a and a side portion 716b, and the bottom portion 716a covers the periphery of the board side connector 540b on the component side of the sub-control board 540, and the side portion 716b connects the bottom portion 716a and the front portion 711 and separates the inside and outside of the board case 700B, as in Figure 170 (1).
Furthermore, as in Figure 170 (1), an opening 716c is provided in the bottom portion 716a, and a portion of the board side connector 540b is exposed to the outside of the board case 700B through this opening 716c, and a side portion 716b is arranged at a position corresponding to the periphery of the opening 716c and the board side connector 540b, and an air hole 716d is provided in this side portion 716b.

Furthermore, the harness 730 has a plurality of separate lead wires 730a and a harness side connector 730b provided at the end of each of the lead wires, and the plurality of lead wires 730a include a lead wire 730a for supplying power, and the harness side connector 730b is connected to the board side connector 540b, and when the board side connector 540b and the harness side connector 730b are connected, the plurality of lead wires 730a extend from the harness side connector 730b on the side opposite the board side connector 540b, similar to FIG. 170(1).

Also, similar to FIG. 170 (1), there is a gap of a distance "d" between the side portion 716b of the front cover 710 and the board side connector 540b and the harness side connector 730b, which is large enough for a person's finger to fit through.
In the example shown in FIG. 170(2), the air hole 716d is opened only at a position on the side surface portion 716b that corresponds to the height of the harness side connector 730b.

Specifically, in FIG. 170(2), the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the upper surface (outer surface) of the front part 711 of the front cover 710 is set to be higher than the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the bottom end of the harness side connector 730b, and lower than the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the top end of the harness side connector 730b. In other words, based on the component surface of the sub-control board 540, the height of the upper surface (outer surface) of the front part 711 of the front cover 710 is set to be higher than the height of the bottom end of the harness side connector 730b, and lower than the height of the top end of the harness side connector 730b.

In addition, in FIG. 170(2), the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the upper end of the side portion 716b is set to be higher than the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the lower end of the harness side connector 730b, and lower than the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the upper end of the harness side connector 730b. In other words, based on the component surface of the sub-control board 540, the height of the upper end of the side portion 716b is set to be higher than the height of the lower end of the harness side connector 730b, and lower than the height of the upper end of the harness side connector 730b.

Furthermore, the air hole 716d is formed so as to extend from a position slightly higher than the lower end of the harness side connector 730b in Figure 170 (2) to the front surface 711 of the front cover 710 (the surface facing the component surface of the sub-control board 540 in the board case 700B).
That is, in the example shown in Figure 170 (2), the opening range of the air hole 716d is formed so as to extend from a position corresponding to a height slightly above the lower end of the harness side connector 730b to a position corresponding to a height slightly below the upper end of the harness side connector 730b, based on the component surface of the sub-control board 540.
For this reason, in the example shown in FIG. 170(2), the air hole 716d is opened only at a position on the side surface portion 716b that corresponds to the height of the harness side connector 730b.

In the example shown in Figure 170 (2), the harness side connector 730b is cooled by air blown out from the air hole 716d in the side portion 716b to the outside of the board case 700B, as indicated by the arrow pointing to the left in Figure 170 (2).
This prevents deterioration of the harness side connector 730b, deformation of the housing of the harness side connector 730b, and welding of the terminals of the harness side connector 730b to the terminals of the board side connector 540b even if the harness side connector 730b generates heat.

Next, with reference to FIG. 171(3), a case will be described in which the air hole 716d is formed so as to extend from a position corresponding to the height of the board side connector 540b to a position corresponding to the height of the harness side connector 730b.
Similar to Figure 170 (1), a board side connector 540b is mounted on the component side of the sub-control board 540, and a connector recess 716 is provided at a position corresponding to the board side connector 540b on the front cover 710 of the board case 700C.

In addition, the connector recess 716 has a bottom portion 716a and a side portion 716b, and the bottom portion 716a covers the periphery of the board side connector 540b on the component side of the sub-control board 540, and the side portion 716b connects the bottom portion 716a and the front portion 711 and separates the inside and outside of the board case 700C, as in Figure 170 (1).
Furthermore, as in Figure 170 (1), an opening 716c is provided in the bottom portion 716a, and a portion of the board side connector 540b is exposed to the outside of the board case 700C through this opening 716c, and a side portion 716b is arranged at a position corresponding to the periphery of the opening 716c and the board side connector 540b, and an air hole 716d is provided in this side portion 716b.

Furthermore, the harness 730 has a plurality of separate lead wires 730a and a harness side connector 730b provided at the end of each of the lead wires, and the plurality of lead wires 730a include a lead wire 730a for supplying power, and the harness side connector 730b is connected to the board side connector 540b, and when the board side connector 540b and the harness side connector 730b are connected, the plurality of lead wires 730a extend from the harness side connector 730b on the side opposite the board side connector 540b, similar to FIG. 170(1).

Also, similar to FIG. 170 (1), there is a gap of a distance "d" between the side portion 716b of the front cover 710 and the board side connector 540b and the harness side connector 730b, which is large enough for a person's finger to fit through.
In the example shown in Figure 171 (3), the air hole 716d is formed so as to extend from a position on the side portion 716b corresponding to the height of the board side connector 540b to a position corresponding to the height of the harness side connector 730b.

Specifically, in FIG. 171 (3), the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the upper surface (outer surface) of the front portion 711 of the front cover 710 is set to be higher than the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the lower end of the harness side connector 730b, and lower than the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the upper end of the harness side connector 730b.
Also, in FIG. 171 (3), the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the upper end of the side portion 716b is set to be higher than the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the lower end of the harness side connector 730b, and lower than the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the upper end of the harness side connector 730b.

Furthermore, the air hole 716d is formed so as to extend from a position slightly higher than the middle point between the top and bottom of the board side connector 540b in Figure 171 (3) to the front surface 711 of the front cover 710 (the surface facing the component surface of the sub-control board 540 in the board case 700C).
That is, in the example shown in Figure 171 (3), the opening range of the air hole 716d is formed so as to extend from a position corresponding to a height slightly above the midpoint between the upper and lower ends of the board side connector 540b, based on the component surface of the sub-control board 540, to a position corresponding to a height slightly below the midpoint between the upper and lower ends of the harness side connector 730b.

For this reason, in the example shown in Figure 171 (3), the air hole 716d opens so as to reach from a position on the side portion 716b corresponding to the height of the board side connector 540b to a position corresponding to the height of the harness side connector 730b.
The opening range of air hole 716d may be formed so as to extend from a position corresponding to any height between the upper end and the lower end of board side connector 540b to a position corresponding to any height between the upper end and the lower end of harness side connector 730b, based on the component surface of sub-control board 540.

In the example shown in Figure 171 (3), the board side connector 540b and the harness side connector 730b are cooled by air blown out from the air hole 716d in the side portion 716b to the outside of the board case 700C, as indicated by the arrow pointing to the left in Figure 171 (3).
This makes it possible to prevent the board-side connector 540b and the harness-side connector 730b from deteriorating, their housings from deforming, and their terminals from welding together, even if the board-side connector 540b and the harness-side connector 730b generate heat.

Next, a case where the air hole 716d is opened only at a position corresponding to the height of the lead wire 730a will be described with reference to FIG. 171(4).
Similar to Figure 170 (1), a board side connector 540b is mounted on the component side of the sub-control board 540, and a connector recess 716 is provided at a position corresponding to the board side connector 540b on the front cover 710 of the board case 700D.

In addition, the connector recess 716 has a bottom portion 716a and a side portion 716b, and the bottom portion 716a covers the periphery of the board side connector 540b on the component side of the sub-control board 540, and the side portion 716b connects the bottom portion 716a and the front portion 711 and separates the inside and outside of the board case 700D, as in Figure 170 (1).
Furthermore, as in Figure 170 (1), an opening 716c is provided in the bottom portion 716a, and a portion of the board side connector 540b is exposed to the outside of the board case 700D through this opening 716c, and a side portion 716b is arranged at a position corresponding to the periphery of the opening 716c and the board side connector 540b, and an air hole 716d is provided in this side portion 716b.

Furthermore, the harness 730 has a plurality of separate lead wires 730a and a harness side connector 730b provided at the end of each of the lead wires, and the plurality of lead wires 730a include a lead wire 730a for supplying power, and the harness side connector 730b is connected to the board side connector 540b, and when the board side connector 540b and the harness side connector 730b are connected, the plurality of lead wires 730a extend from the harness side connector 730b on the side opposite the board side connector 540b, similar to FIG. 170(1).

Also, similar to FIG. 170 (1), there is a gap of a distance "d" between the side portion 716b of the front cover 710 and the board side connector 540b and the harness side connector 730b, which is large enough for a person's finger to fit through.
In the example shown in FIG. 171(4), the air hole 716d is opened only at a position on the side surface portion 716b corresponding to the height of the lead wire 730a.

Specifically, in Figure 171 (4), the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the upper surface (outer surface) of the front portion 711 of the front cover 710 is set higher than the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the upper end of the harness side connector 730b.
Also, in FIG. 171 (4), the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the upper end of the side portion 716b is set higher than the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the upper end of the harness side connector 730b.
For this reason, in the example shown in Figure 171 (4), lead wires 730a are arranged at a position corresponding to the height of the upper surface (outer surface) of the front surface portion 711 of the front cover 710, and at a position corresponding to the height of the upper end of the side surface portion 716b.

In addition, the air hole 716d is formed so as to extend from a position slightly higher than the upper end of the harness side connector 730b in Figure 171 (4) to the front surface 711 of the front cover 710 (the surface facing the component surface of the sub-control board 540 in the board case 700D).
That is, in the example shown in Figure 171 (4), the opening range of the air hole 716d is formed so as to extend from a position corresponding to a height slightly above the lower end of the lead wire 730a to a position corresponding to a height halfway up the lead wire 730a, based on the component surface of the sub-control board 540.
For this reason, in the example shown in FIG. 171(4), the air hole 716d is opened only at a position on the side surface portion 716b corresponding to the height of the lead wire 730a.

In the example shown in FIG. 171(4), the lead wire 730a is cooled by air blown out from the air hole 716d in the side portion 716b to the outside of the board case 700D, as indicated by the arrow pointing left in FIG. 171(4).
This makes it possible to prevent the conductor and coating constituting the lead wire 730a from deteriorating or melting even if the lead wire 730a generates heat.
Furthermore, by separating the multiple lead wires 730a from each other, air can easily flow between them, so that the multiple lead wires 730a can be efficiently cooled by the air blown out from the air holes 716d.

Next, with reference to FIG. 172(5), a case will be described in which the air hole 716d is formed so as to extend from a position corresponding to the height of the board side connector 540b to a position corresponding to the height of the lead wire 730a.
Similar to Figure 170 (1), a board side connector 540b is mounted on the component side of the sub-control board 540, and a connector recess 716 is provided at a position corresponding to the board side connector 540b on the front cover 710 of the board case 700E.

In addition, the connector recess 716 has a bottom portion 716a and a side portion 716b, and the bottom portion 716a covers the periphery of the board side connector 540b on the component side of the sub-control board 540, and the side portion 716b connects the bottom portion 716a and the front portion 711 and separates the inside and outside of the board case 700E, as in Figure 170 (1).
Furthermore, as in Figure 170 (1), an opening 716c is provided in the bottom portion 716a, and a portion of the board side connector 540b is exposed to the outside of the board case 700E through this opening 716c, and a side portion 716b is arranged at a position corresponding to the periphery of the opening 716c and the board side connector 540b, and an air hole 716d is provided in this side portion 716b.

Furthermore, the harness 730 has a plurality of separate lead wires 730a and a harness side connector 730b provided at the end of each of the lead wires, and the plurality of lead wires 730a include a lead wire 730a for supplying power, and the harness side connector 730b is connected to the board side connector 540b, and when the board side connector 540b and the harness side connector 730b are connected, the plurality of lead wires 730a extend from the harness side connector 730b on the side opposite the board side connector 540b, similar to FIG. 170(1).

Also, similar to FIG. 170 (1), there is a gap of a distance "d" between the side portion 716b of the front cover 710 and the board side connector 540b and the harness side connector 730b, which is large enough for a person's finger to fit through.
In the example shown in FIG. 172(5), the air hole 716d opens from a position on the side portion 716b corresponding to the height of the board side connector 540b to a position corresponding to the height of the lead wire 730a.

Specifically, in FIG. 172 (5), the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the upper surface (outer surface) of the front portion 711 of the front cover 710 is set higher than the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the upper end of the harness side connector 730b.
Also, in FIG. 172 (5), the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the upper end of the side portion 716b is set to be higher than the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the upper end of the harness side connector 730b.
For this reason, in the example shown in Figure 172 (5), lead wires 730a are arranged at a position corresponding to the height of the upper surface (outer surface) of the front surface portion 711 of the front cover 710, and at a position corresponding to the height of the upper end of the side surface portion 716b.

Furthermore, the air hole 716d is formed so as to extend from a position slightly lower than the upper end of the board side connector 540b in Figure 172 (5) to the front surface 711 of the front cover 710 (the surface facing the component surface of the sub-control board 540 in the board case 700E).
That is, in the example shown in Figure 172 (5), the opening range of the air hole 716d is formed so as to extend from a position corresponding to a height slightly below the upper end of the board side connector 540b to a position corresponding to a height slightly above the lower end of the lead wire 730a, based on the component surface of the sub-control board 540.

For this reason, in the example shown in FIG. 172 (5), the air hole 716d is open so as to extend from a position on the side portion 716b corresponding to the height of the board side connector 540b to a position corresponding to the height of the lead wire 730a.
The opening range of air hole 716d may be formed so as to extend from a position corresponding to any height between the upper end and the lower end of board-side connector 540b, based on the component surface of sub-control board 540, to a position corresponding to any height midway along lead wire 730a.

In the example shown in FIG. 172 (5), the board side connector 540b, the harness side connector 730b, and the lead wire 730a are cooled by air blown out from the air hole 716d in the side portion 716b to the outside of the board case 700E, as indicated by the arrow pointing to the left in FIG. 172 (5).
This makes it possible to prevent the board-side connector 540b and the harness-side connector 730b from deteriorating, their housings from deforming, and their terminals from welding together, even if the board-side connector 540b and the harness-side connector 730b generate heat.

In addition, since the multiple lead wires 730a are separated from each other, air can easily flow between them, and the multiple lead wires 730a can be efficiently cooled by the air blown out from the air hole 716d. By cooling the lead wires 730a, it is possible to prevent the conductors and coatings that make up the lead wires 730a from deteriorating or melting even if the lead wires 730a generate heat.

Next, with reference to FIG. 172(6), a case will be described in which the air hole 716d is formed so as to extend from a position corresponding to the height of the harness side connector 730b to a position corresponding to the height of the lead wire 730a.
Similar to Figure 170 (1), a board side connector 540b is mounted on the component side of the sub-control board 540, and a connector recess 716 is provided at a position corresponding to the board side connector 540b on the front cover 710 of the board case 700F.

In addition, the connector recess 716 has a bottom portion 716a and a side portion 716b, and the bottom portion 716a covers the periphery of the board side connector 540b on the component side of the sub-control board 540, and the side portion 716b connects the bottom portion 716a and the front portion 711 and separates the inside and outside of the board case 700F, as in Figure 170 (1).
Furthermore, as in Figure 170 (1), an opening 716c is provided in the bottom portion 716a, and a portion of the board side connector 540b is exposed to the outside of the board case 700F through this opening 716c, and a side portion 716b is arranged at a position corresponding to the periphery of the opening 716c and the board side connector 540b, and an air hole 716d is provided in this side portion 716b.

Furthermore, the harness 730 has a plurality of separate lead wires 730a and a harness side connector 730b provided at the end of each of the lead wires, and the plurality of lead wires 730a include a lead wire 730a for supplying power, and the harness side connector 730b is connected to the board side connector 540b, and when the board side connector 540b and the harness side connector 730b are connected, the plurality of lead wires 730a extend from the harness side connector 730b on the side opposite the board side connector 540b, similar to FIG. 170(1).

Also, similar to FIG. 170 (1), there is a gap of a distance "d" between the side portion 716b of the front cover 710 and the board side connector 540b and the harness side connector 730b, which is large enough for a person's finger to fit through.
In the example shown in FIG. 172(6), the air hole 716d opens from a position on the side surface portion 716b corresponding to the height of the harness side connector 730b to a position corresponding to the height of the lead wire 730a.

Specifically, in Figure 172 (6), the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the upper surface (outer surface) of the front portion 711 of the front cover 710 is set higher than the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the upper end of the harness side connector 730b.
Also, in FIG. 172 (6), the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the upper end of the side portion 716b is set higher than the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the upper end of the harness side connector 730b.
For this reason, in the example shown in Figure 172 (6), lead wires 730a are arranged at a position corresponding to the height of the upper surface (outer surface) of the front surface portion 711 of the front cover 710, and at a position corresponding to the height of the upper end of the side surface portion 716b.

Furthermore, the air hole 716d is formed so as to extend from a position slightly higher than the lower end of the harness side connector 730b in Figure 172 (6) to the front surface 711 of the front cover 710 (the surface facing the component surface of the sub-control board 540 in the board case 700F).
That is, in the example shown in Figure 172 (6), the opening range of the air hole 716d is formed so as to extend from a position corresponding to a height slightly above the lower end of the harness side connector 730b to a position corresponding to a height slightly above the lower end of the lead wire 730a, based on the component surface of the sub-control board 540.

For this reason, in the example shown in Figure 172 (6), the air hole 716d opens so as to reach from a position on the side portion 716b corresponding to the height of the harness side connector 730b to a position corresponding to the height of the lead wire 730a.
The opening range of the air hole 716d may be formed so as to extend from a position corresponding to any height between the upper end and the lower end of the harness side connector 730b, based on the component surface of the sub-control board 540, to a position corresponding to any height midway along the lead wire 730a.

In the example shown in Figure 172 (6), the harness side connector 730b and the lead wires 730a are cooled by air blown out from the air hole 716d in the side portion 716b to the outside of the board case 700F, as indicated by the arrow pointing to the left in Figure 172 (6).
This prevents deterioration of the harness side connector 730b, deformation of the housing of the harness side connector 730b, and welding of the terminals of the harness side connector 730b to the terminals of the board side connector 540b even if the harness side connector 730b generates heat.

In addition, since the multiple lead wires 730a are separated from each other, air can easily flow between them, and the multiple lead wires 730a can be efficiently cooled by the air blown out from the air hole 716d. By cooling the lead wires 730a, it is possible to prevent the conductors and coatings that make up the lead wires 730a from deteriorating or melting even if the lead wires 730a generate heat.

Next, with reference to FIG. 173(7), a case will be described in which the air hole 716d is formed so as to extend from a position corresponding to the height of the board side connector 540b to a position corresponding to the height of the lead wire 730a.
Similar to Figure 170 (1), a board side connector 540b is mounted on the component side of the sub-control board 540, and a connector recess 716 is provided at a position corresponding to the board side connector 540b on the front cover 710 of the board case 700G.

In addition, the connector recess 716 has a bottom portion 716a and a side portion 716b, and the bottom portion 716a covers the periphery of the board side connector 540b on the component side of the sub-control board 540, and the side portion 716b connects the bottom portion 716a and the front portion 711 and separates the inside and outside of the board case 700G, as in Figure 170 (1).
Furthermore, as in Figure 170 (1), an opening 716c is provided in the bottom portion 716a, and a portion of the board side connector 540b is exposed to the outside of the board case 700G through this opening 716c, and a side portion 716b is arranged at a position corresponding to the periphery of the opening 716c and the board side connector 540b, and an air hole 716d is provided in this side portion 716b.

Furthermore, the harness 730 has a plurality of separate lead wires 730a and a harness side connector 730b provided at the end of each of the lead wires, and the plurality of lead wires 730a include a lead wire 730a for supplying power, and the harness side connector 730b is connected to the board side connector 540b, and when the board side connector 540b and the harness side connector 730b are connected, the plurality of lead wires 730a extend from the harness side connector 730b on the side opposite the board side connector 540b, similar to FIG. 170(1).

Also, similar to FIG. 170 (1), there is a gap of a distance "d" between the side portion 716b of the front cover 710 and the board side connector 540b and the harness side connector 730b, which is large enough for a person's finger to fit through.
In the example shown in FIG. 173(7), the air hole 716d opens from a position on the side portion 716b corresponding to the height of the board side connector 540b to a position corresponding to the height of the lead wire 730a.

Specifically, in Figure 173 (7), the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the upper surface (outer surface) of the front portion 711 of the front cover 710 is set higher than the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the upper end of the harness side connector 730b.
Also, in FIG. 173 (7), the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the upper end of the side portion 716b is set higher than the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the upper end of the harness side connector 730b.
For this reason, in the example shown in Figure 173 (7), lead wires 730a are arranged at a position corresponding to the height of the upper surface (outer surface) of the front surface portion 711 of the front cover 710, and at a position corresponding to the height of the upper end of the side surface portion 716b.

Furthermore, the air hole 716d is formed so as to extend from a position slightly lower than the upper end of the board side connector 540b in Figure 173 (7) to the front surface 711 of the front cover 710 (the surface facing the component surface of the sub-control board 540 in the board case 700G).
That is, in the example shown in Figure 173 (7), the opening range of the air hole 716d is formed so as to extend from a position corresponding to a height slightly below the upper end of the board side connector 540b to a position corresponding to a height slightly above the lower end of the lead wire 730a, based on the component surface of the sub-control board 540.

For this reason, in the example shown in FIG. 173 (7), the air hole 716d is open so as to extend from a position on the side portion 716b corresponding to the height of the board side connector 540b to a position corresponding to the height of the lead wire 730a.
The opening range of air hole 716d may be formed so as to extend from a position corresponding to any height between the upper end and the lower end of board-side connector 540b, based on the component surface of sub-control board 540, to a position corresponding to any height midway along lead wire 730a.

In addition, in Figure 173 (7), portions of the housings of the board side connector 540b and the harness side connector 730b are cut away to illustrate the board side terminals 540c provided inside the board side connector 540b and the harness side terminals 730c provided inside the harness side connector 730b.
As shown in FIG. 173(7), the air hole 716d opens at a position corresponding to the contact point between the board-side terminal 540c of the board-side connector 540b and the harness-side terminal 730c of the harness-side connector 730b.

In the example shown in Figure 173 (7), as indicated by the arrow pointing to the left in Figure 173 (7), the air blown out from the air hole 716d in the side portion 716b to the outside of the board case 700G cools the board side connector 540b, the harness side connector 730b, and the lead wire 730a, and also cools the contact point between the board side terminal 540c and the harness side terminal 730c.
This prevents the board-side connector 540b and the harness-side connector 730b from deteriorating and their housings from deforming even if they generate heat. In particular, in the example shown in Fig. 173 (7), the contact points between the board-side terminal 540c and the harness-side terminal 730c are cooled, so that the board-side terminal 540c and the harness-side terminal 730c can be prevented from welding to each other.

In addition, since the multiple lead wires 730a are separated from each other, air can easily flow between them, and the multiple lead wires 730a can be efficiently cooled by the air blown out from the air hole 716d. By cooling the lead wires 730a, it is possible to prevent the conductors and coatings that make up the lead wires 730a from deteriorating or melting even if the lead wires 730a generate heat.

Next, with reference to FIG. 173(8), a case will be described in which the air hole 716d is formed so as to extend from a position corresponding to the height of the harness side connector 730b to a position corresponding to the height of the lead wire 730a.
Similar to Figure 170 (1), a board side connector 540b is mounted on the component side of the sub-control board 540, and a connector recess 716 is provided at a position corresponding to the board side connector 540b on the front cover 710 of the board case 700H.

In addition, the connector recess 716 has a bottom portion 716a and a side portion 716b, and the bottom portion 716a covers the periphery of the board side connector 540b on the component side of the sub-control board 540, and the side portion 716b connects the bottom portion 716a and the front portion 711 and separates the inside and outside of the board case 700H, as in Figure 170 (1).
Furthermore, as in Figure 170 (1), an opening 716c is provided in the bottom portion 716a, and a portion of the board side connector 540b is exposed to the outside of the board case 700G through this opening 716c, and a side portion 716b is arranged at a position corresponding to the periphery of the opening 716c and the board side connector 540b, and an air hole 716d is provided in this side portion 716b.

Furthermore, the harness 730 has a plurality of separate lead wires 730a and a harness side connector 730b provided at the end of each of the lead wires, and the plurality of lead wires 730a include a lead wire 730a for supplying power, and the harness side connector 730b is connected to the board side connector 540b, and when the board side connector 540b and the harness side connector 730b are connected, the plurality of lead wires 730a extend from the harness side connector 730b on the side opposite the board side connector 540b, similar to FIG. 170(1).

Also, similar to FIG. 170 (1), there is a gap of a distance "d" between the side portion 716b of the front cover 710 and the board side connector 540b and the harness side connector 730b, which is large enough for a person's finger to fit through.
In the example shown in Figure 173 (8), the air hole 716d opens so as to reach from a position on the side portion 716b corresponding to the height of the harness side connector 730b to a position corresponding to the height of the lead wire 730a.

Specifically, in FIG. 173 (8), the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the upper surface (outer surface) of the front portion 711 of the front cover 710 is set higher than the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the upper end of the harness side connector 730b.
Also, in FIG. 173 (8), the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the upper end of the side portion 716b is set higher than the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the upper end of the harness side connector 730b.
For this reason, in the example shown in Figure 173 (8), lead wires 730a are arranged at a position corresponding to the height of the upper surface (outer surface) of the front surface portion 711 of the front cover 710, and at a position corresponding to the height of the upper end of the side surface portion 716b.

Furthermore, the air hole 716d is formed so as to extend from a position slightly higher than the middle point between the top and bottom of the harness side connector 730b in Figure 173 (8) to the front surface 711 of the front cover 710 (the surface facing the component surface of the sub-control board 540 in the board case 700H).
That is, in the example shown in Figure 173 (8), the opening range of the air hole 716d is formed so as to extend from a position corresponding to a height slightly above the midpoint between the upper and lower ends of the harness side connector 730b to a position corresponding to a height slightly above the lower end of the lead wire 730a, based on the component surface of the sub-control board 540.

For this reason, in the example shown in Figure 173 (8), the air hole 716d opens so as to reach from a position on the side portion 716b corresponding to the height of the harness side connector 730b to a position corresponding to the height of the lead wire 730a.
The opening range of the air hole 716d may be formed so as to extend from a position corresponding to any height between the upper end and the lower end of the harness side connector 730b, based on the component surface of the sub-control board 540, to a position corresponding to any height midway along the lead wire 730a.

In the example shown in FIG. 173 (8), the board-side connector 540b is formed in an L-shape and has a base 540d that extends in a direction substantially parallel to the component surface of the sub-control board 540, and an upright portion 540e that extends from one end of the base 540d in a direction substantially perpendicular to the component surface of the sub-control board 540. The base 540d is a portion that is fixed to the component surface of the sub-control board 540, and the upright portion 540e is a portion that supports the harness-side connector 730b.

Furthermore, the standing portion 540e supports the side surface of the harness side connector 730b opposite the side portion 716b. Furthermore, in FIG. 173 (8), the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the upper end of the standing portion 540e is set higher than the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the lower end of the air hole 716d. In other words, based on the component surface of the sub-control board 540, the height of the upper end of the standing portion 540e is set higher than the height of the lower end of the air hole 716d.

In the example shown in Figure 173 (8), the harness side connector 730b and the lead wire 730a are cooled by air blown out from the air hole 716d in the side portion 716b to the outside of the board case 700H, as indicated by the arrow pointing to the left in Figure 173 (8).
This prevents deterioration of the harness side connector 730b, deformation of the housing of the harness side connector 730b, and welding of the terminals of the harness side connector 730b to the terminals of the board side connector 540b even if the harness side connector 730b generates heat.

In addition, since the multiple lead wires 730a are separated from each other, air can easily flow between them, and the multiple lead wires 730a can be efficiently cooled by the air blown out from the air hole 716d. By cooling the lead wires 730a, it is possible to prevent the conductors and coatings that make up the lead wires 730a from deteriorating or melting even if the lead wires 730a generate heat.

Although the twenty-ninth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described content, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the twenty-ninth embodiment, the cooling fan 717 is provided in the front cover 710 at a position corresponding to the sub-CPU 540a, but natural wind may be used without providing the cooling fan 717. The natural wind referred to here may be the air flow generated by an air conditioner in a hall (store) environment, or the air flow generated by the rotation of reels in a slot machine.
(2) In the twenty-ninth embodiment, the harness 730 uses a plurality of separate lead wires 730a. However, this is not limited to this. For example, a flat cable or a ribbon cable in which a plurality of lead wires are arranged in parallel on the same plane and adjacent lead wires are welded together may be used.

(3) In the twenty-ninth embodiment, the harness 730 includes the lead wire 730a for supplying power. However, the harness 730 does not have to include the lead wire 730a for supplying power.
(4) In the twenty-ninth embodiment, the air holes 716d are provided in the side portion 716b, the upper wall 712, the lower wall 713, the right side wall 714, and the left side wall 715. However, this is not limited to this.
The air hole 716d needs to be provided at least in the side surface portion 716b, and therefore the air hole 716d does not need to be provided in the upper wall 712, the lower wall 713, the right side wall 714, and the left side wall 715. As a result, the air sent into the inside of the board case 700 by the cooling fan 717 is exhausted (blows out) to the outside of the board case 700 only from the air hole 716d provided in the side surface portion 716b, thereby improving the cooling effect of the board side connector 540b, the harness side connector 730b, and the lead wires 730a.

(5) For example, a board-side connector 540b is provided on the underside of the sub-control board 540, and an opening 716c is provided on the underside of the board case 700 to expose the board-side connector 540b.
Furthermore, a side surface portion 716b is provided at a position corresponding to the periphery of the board side connector 540b exposed to the outside of the board case 700 through the opening 716c, and an air hole 716d is provided in this side surface portion 716b.

Furthermore, an air hole 716d is provided in a side surface portion 716b located on the lower side of the substrate case 700, and an air hole 716d is also provided in an upper wall 712 located on the upper side (opposite the side surface portion 716b) of the substrate case 700. The side surface portion 716b and the upper wall 712 are set to face each other substantially in parallel.
Furthermore, the air heated inside the substrate case 700 is discharged to the outside of the substrate case 700 through an air hole 716d provided in the upper wall 712, and air is taken into the inside of the substrate case 700 through an air hole 716d provided in the side portion 716b.

That is, the board case 700 is formed so that air flows in such a way that air is taken into the inside of the board case 700 through the air hole 716d provided on the lower side of the board case 700 and air is exhausted to the outside of the board case 700 through the air hole 716d provided on the upper side of the board case 700. This air flow may be used to cool the board side connector 540b, the harness side connector 730b, and the lead wires 730a.
In this case, the cooling fan 717 may or may not be provided. In addition, the right side wall 714 and the left side wall 715 may also have air holes 716d, or the right side wall 714 and the left side wall 715 may not have air holes 716d.

(6) Contrary to the above-mentioned case, a board-side connector 540b is provided on the upper side of the sub-control board 540, and an opening 716c is provided on the upper side of the board case 700 to expose the board-side connector 540b.
Furthermore, a side surface portion 716b is provided at a position corresponding to the periphery of the board side connector 540b exposed to the outside of the board case 700 through the opening 716c, and an air hole 716d is provided in this side surface portion 716b.

Furthermore, an air hole 716d is also provided in the lower wall 713 on the lower side of the board case 700.
The air heated inside the substrate case 700 is discharged to the outside of the substrate case 700 through an air hole 716d provided in the upper side portion 716b of the substrate case 700, and air is taken into the inside of the substrate case 700 through an air hole 716d provided in the lower wall 713 on the lower side of the substrate case 700.

In other words, the air is drawn into the inside of the substrate case 700 through the air hole 716d provided on the lower side of the substrate case 700, and the air is discharged to the outside of the substrate case 700 through the air hole 716d provided on the upper side of the substrate case 700.
This air flow may be used to cool the board-side connector 540b, the harness-side connector 730b, and the lead wires 730a.
In this case as well, the cooling fan 717 may be provided, or may not be provided. In addition, the right side wall 714 and the left side wall 715 may also have air holes 716d, or may not have air holes 716d.

(7) For example, in order to cool sub-CPU 540a, a heat sink may be provided in addition to cooling fan 717. Also, a heat sink may be provided instead of cooling fan 717.
(8) For example, the distance from the sub-CPU 540a to the air hole 716d provided in the side portion 716b located around the board-side connector 540b can be set to be greater than the distance from the sub-CPU 540a to the air hole 716d provided in the right side wall 714 (the side wall located on the opposite side of the board-side connector 540b when viewed from the sub-CPU 540a).
This makes it possible to make the temperature of the air discharged from the air hole 716d provided in the side portion 716b located around the board side connector 540b lower than the temperature of the air discharged from the air hole 716d provided in the right side wall 714.

(9) For example, the board-side connector 540b may be configured to cover (hide) 80% or more of the surface of the harness-side connector 730b. This allows the board-side connector 540b to protect the harness-side connector 730b.
(10) For example, an engagement claw or a locking mechanism may be provided as an engagement means for engaging the board-side connector 540b and the harness-side connector 730b, and the engagement claw or the locking mechanism may be disposed on the side of the board-side connector 540b and the harness-side connector 730b that faces the air hole 716d of the side portion 716b. This allows air discharged from the air hole 716d of the side portion 716b to hit the engagement claw or the locking mechanism, so that cooling of the engagement claw or the locking mechanism can be prioritized. This allows the manager of the gaming machine (a hall staff member) to safely release the engagement of the engagement claw or the locking mechanism for maintenance (maintenance inspection) of the sub-control board 540 without touching the overheated engagement claw or the locking mechanism.

Furthermore, in order to enhance the cooling effect of the engagement claw or locking mechanism, it is preferable to reduce (shorten) the distance between the air hole 716d of the side portion 716b and the engagement claw or locking mechanism; however, if the gap between the side portion 716b and the board side connector 540b and the harness side connector 730b is too narrow for a finger to fit in, it becomes difficult to release the engagement of the engagement claw or locking mechanism.
Therefore, by providing a gap "d" between the side portion 716b and the board side connector 540b and the harness side connector 730b, which is large enough for a person's finger to fit through, it is possible to make it easier to disengage the engagement claws or locking mechanism, and ultimately to make it easier for the manager of the gaming machine (hall staff) to perform maintenance (repair and inspection) of the sub-control board 540.

Conversely to the above-mentioned case, the locking mechanism for engaging the board-side connector 540b and the harness-side connector 730b can be disposed on the side surfaces of the board-side connector 540b and the harness-side connector 730b opposite the air hole 716d of the side surface portion 716b. This allows the air discharged from the air hole 716d of the side surface portion 716b to hit the side surface opposite the locking mechanism, thereby prioritizing cooling of the terminals of the board-side connector 540b and the harness-side connector 730b.
The first to twenty-ninth embodiments and the various modified examples shown in the first to twenty-ninth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

Thirty Embodiment
The thirtieth embodiment relates to a board case that houses a main control board and a two-dimensional code attached to a main CPU mounted on the main control board.
In the 30th embodiment, a board case 550 that stores a main control board 530 in a pachinko game machine 500 is taken as an example. However, the board case 550 of the 30th embodiment can be applied to a case that stores not only the main control board 530 in the pachinko game machine 500, but also the payout control board 520, the sub-control board 540, and other control boards equipped with CPUs.

Furthermore, the board case 550 of the 30th embodiment can be applied not only to the control board of the pachinko game machine 500, but also to cases for storing the main control board 50, sub control board 80, and other control boards equipped with CPUs of the slot machine 10.
It should be noted that the second, twentieth, twenty-eighth, twenty-ninth, and thirtieth embodiments all relate to substrate cases, but each of these may be implemented alone or in appropriate combination.

FIG. 174(1) is a front view of the substrate case 550 in the 30th embodiment, and FIG. 174(2) is a bottom view of the substrate case 550 in the 30th embodiment.
Here, the "front (top) side" refers to the mounting side (component side) of the main control board 530 on which electronic components such as the main CPU 530g are mounted, and the "rear (bottom) side" refers to the side opposite the mounting side of the main control board 530 on which electronic components are mounted (solder side).
Additionally, "upper side" refers to the upper side when the component side of the main control board 530 is viewed from the front, and "lower side" refers to the lower side when the solder side of the main control board 530 is viewed from the front.
Furthermore, "right side" refers to the right side when the component side of the main control board 530 is viewed from the front, and "left side" refers to the left side when the component side of the main control board 530 is viewed from the front.

In Figure 174(1), the "front (front) side" refers to the front side of Figure 174(1), and the "rear (back) side" refers to the back side of Figure 174(1). Additionally, the "upper side" refers to the upper side of Figure 174(1), the "lower side" refers to the lower side of Figure 174(1), the "right side" refers to the right side of Figure 174(1), and the "left side" refers to the left side of Figure 174(1).

174(1) and (2), board case 550 includes front cover 560 that covers the component side of main control board 530, and rear cover 570 that covers the solder side of main control board 530. When front cover 560 and rear cover 570 are combined, board case 550 capable of housing main control board 530 therein is formed.
The front cover 560 is also referred to as the "first cover 560" or the "upper case 560", and the rear cover 570 is also referred to as the "second cover 570" or the "lower case 570".

Moreover, both the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570 are formed by injection molding using a transparent resin, so that the main control board 530 housed inside the board case 550 can be seen from the outside of the board case 550.
In addition, in the board case 550 (when the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570 are combined), the side in which the main control board 530 is stored is referred to as the "inside", and the side exposed to the outside is referred to as the "outside".

The front cover 560 is formed in a horizontally elongated, roughly rectangular box shape with an open rear face, and has a front face 566 that faces the component surface of the main control board 530 in a roughly parallel manner, an upper wall 565a that extends rearward from the upper edge of the front face 566, a lower wall 565b that extends rearward from the lower edge of the front face 556, a right side wall 565c that extends rearward from the right edge of the front face 556, and a left side wall 565d that extends rearward from the left edge of the front face 556, as in the 28th embodiment.

The rear cover 570 is also formed in a horizontally elongated, roughly rectangular box shape with an open front, and has a rear surface 573 that faces the solder surface of the main control board 530 in a roughly parallel manner, an upper wall 571a that extends forward from the upper edge of the rear surface 573, a lower wall 571b that extends forward from the lower edge of the rear surface 573, a right side wall 571c that extends forward from the right edge of the rear surface 573, and a left side wall 571d that extends forward from the left edge of the rear surface 573, as in the 28th embodiment.

174(1) and (2), in the 30th embodiment, a main CPU 530g is mounted on the component surface of the main control board 530. This main CPU 530g is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and has a board-facing surface 530h that faces (faces) the component surface of the main control board 530, and an outward surface 530i located on the opposite side to the board-facing surface 530h. The outward surface 530i of the main CPU 530g is substantially parallel to the component surface of the main control board 530, and is also substantially parallel to the front surface 566 of the front cover 560 of the board case 550.
Furthermore, in addition to the main CPU 530g, the component side of the main control board 530 is equipped with a number of electronic components such as an RWM and a ROM (not shown), as well as a connector for connecting to other control boards or electronic devices via a harness.

In the 30th embodiment, main control board 530 is stored inside rear cover 570 with the inner surface of rear portion 573 of rear cover 570 facing the soldered surface of main control board 530, and in this state, main control board 530 is attached (fixed) to rear cover 570 by screws. Thereafter, the inner surfaces of front cover 560 and rear cover 570 are brought into opposition to each other, and front cover 560 and rear cover 570 are fitted together to form board case 550 with main control board 530 stored therein.
In addition, although explanation will be omitted for the 30th embodiment, the crimping (sealing) of the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570 using the crimping portion, the seal affixing portion (first seal affixing portion 567, second seal affixing portion 574), and the sealing seal 581 are the same as those in the 28th embodiment.

In the 30th embodiment, as shown in Figures 174 (1) and (2), a two-dimensional code 551a is provided on the front surface 566 (the surface facing the component surface of the main control board 530) of the front cover 560 of the board case 550, a two-dimensional code 530k is provided on the component surface of the main control board 530, and a two-dimensional code 530j is provided on the outward surface 530i of the main CPU 530g.

Specifically, a management sticker 551 on which a two-dimensional code 551a is printed is attached to the surface of a front portion 566 of a front cover 560 of a substrate case 550, thereby attaching the two-dimensional code 551a to the front portion 566 of the front cover 560 of the substrate case 550.
Furthermore, a two-dimensional code 530k is printed directly on the surface of the component side of the main control board 530, so that the two-dimensional code 530k is affixed to the component side of the main control board 530.
Furthermore, a two-dimensional code 530j is printed directly on the surface of the outward surface 530i of the main CPU 530g, so that the two-dimensional code 530j is affixed to the outward surface 530i of the main CPU 530g.

Because the main CPU 530g is an important electronic component that affects the number of balls dispensed, the board case 550 housing the main control board 530 has almost no air holes to ensure security. Because of this, the air inside the board case 550 heats up easily, and if a sticker with a two-dimensional code 530j printed on it is affixed to the surface of the main CPU 530g, there is a risk that the sticker will peel off due to the heat emitted from the main CPU 530g or the warm air inside the board case 550. Furthermore, there is a risk that the peeled-off sticker will adhere to other electronic components and cause a fire. For this reason, the two-dimensional code 530j is printed directly on the surface of the main CPU 530g.

Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 174 (1), when the front portion 566 of the front cover 560 of the board case 550, the component surface of the main control board 530, and the outward surface 530i of the main CPU 530g are viewed from the front, the management sticker 551 and the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the outward surface 530i of the main CPU 530g are positioned so that they do not overlap but are close to each other.
Therefore, in the example shown in Figure 174 (1), when the front portion 566 of the front cover 560 of the board case 550, the component surface of the main control board 530, and the outward surface 530i of the main CPU 530g are viewed from the front, the two-dimensional code 551a on the board case 550 and the two-dimensional code 530j on the outward surface 530i of the main CPU 530g are not overlapping but are located close to each other.

As described above, the outward surface 530 i of the main CPU 530 g is substantially parallel to the front surface 566 of the front cover 560 of the board case 550 .
For this reason, the two-dimensional code 530j attached (printed) to the outward surface 530i of the main CPU 530g is approximately parallel to the front portion 566 of the front cover 560 of the board case 550, and is also approximately parallel to the two-dimensional code 551a attached (pasted) to the front portion 566 of the front cover 560 of the board case 550.

In addition, the two-dimensional code 551a attached to the base case 550 includes information about the pachinko gaming machine 500, such as information about the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 500, information about the model (type) of the pachinko gaming machine 500, and information about the serial number of the pachinko gaming machine 500.
Furthermore, the two-dimensional code 530k attached to the main control board 530, like the two-dimensional code 551a attached to the board case 550, contains information about the pachinko gaming machine 500, such as information about the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 500, information about the model of the pachinko gaming machine 500, and information about the serial number of the pachinko gaming machine 500.
Furthermore, the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g includes information about the main CPU 530g, such as information about the manufacturer of the main CPU 530g, information about the model number of the main CPU 530g, and information about the serial number of the main CPU 530g.

As explained in the 9th embodiment (B) and the 23rd embodiment, the main CPU 530g is an important electronic component that controls the progress of the game, obtains a random number when a game ball enters the starting hole 532, and executes the jackpot lottery, special symbol lottery, and variable pattern lottery, etc., based on the obtained random number value. If the two-dimensional code 530j attached to this main CPU 530g is read, there is a risk that the information contained therein may be analyzed to obtain information regarding the performance of the main CPU 530g and the jackpot lottery, etc., and may be used to commit fraudulent acts in the game.

Therefore, in the 30th embodiment, the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g is set to be more difficult to read than the two-dimensional code 551a attached to the board case 550.
Similarly, the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g is set to be more difficult to read than the two-dimensional code 530k attached to the main control board 530.
Specifically, the two-dimensional code 551a attached to the board case 550 is printed in black ink on the surface of the white (white background) management seal 551. In this way, since the two-dimensional code 551a attached to the board case 550 is printed in black ink on a white background, the color contrast with the background color is large (high), making it relatively easy to read by a two-dimensional code reader.

Moreover, the two-dimensional code 530k attached to the main control board 530 is printed in white ink on the surface of the green main control board 530. In this way, the two-dimensional code 530k attached to the main control board 530 is printed in white ink on a green background, and therefore has a large (high) color contrast with the background color, making it relatively easy to read by a two-dimensional code reader.
In contrast, the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g is printed in light gray ink on the surface of the exterior of the main CPU 530g, which is made of dark gray resin. In this way, the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g is printed in light gray ink on a dark gray background, and therefore has low color contrast with the background color, making it relatively difficult to read with a two-dimensional code reader.

For this reason, when the same reading device is used, the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g is more difficult to read than the two-dimensional code 551a attached to the board case 550.
Similarly, when the same reading device is used, the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g is set to be more difficult to read than the two-dimensional code 530k attached to the main control board 530.
Conversely to the above, the two-dimensional code 530j may be printed in dark gray ink on the surface of the exterior of the main CPU 530g, which is made of light gray resin. In this way, even if dark gray ink is printed on a light gray background, the color contrast with the background color is reduced, making the two-dimensional code 530j difficult to read.

In addition, the area of the code region of the two-dimensional code 530j affixed to the main CPU 530g is set to be smaller than the area of the code region of the two-dimensional code 551a affixed to the board case 550.
Here, the "code area" refers to an area in which a plurality of information display unit cells are arranged (disposed) in a matrix, as described in, for example, JP 2019-175033 A.
That is, the size of the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g is set to be smaller than the size of the two-dimensional code 551a attached to the board case 550.
As a result, when the same reading device is used, the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g is more difficult to read than the two-dimensional code 551a attached to the board case 550.

Similarly, the area of the code region of the two-dimensional code 530j affixed to the main CPU 530g is set to be smaller than the area of the code region of the two-dimensional code 530k affixed to the main control board 530.
That is, the size of the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g is set to be smaller than the size of the two-dimensional code 530k attached to the main control board 530.
As a result, when the same reading device is used, the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g is more difficult to read than the two-dimensional code 530k attached to the main control board 530.

Furthermore, when viewed from the front at the front portion 566 of the front cover 560 of the board case 550, the component surface of the main control board 530, and the outward surface 530i of the main CPU 530g, the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g is located further back (farther away) than the two-dimensional code 551a attached to the board case 550.
For this reason, when two-dimensional codes are read from the same position using the same reading device, the distance from the reading device to the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g is greater (farther) than the distance from the reading device to the two-dimensional code 551a attached to the board case 550, making the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g more difficult to read than the two-dimensional code 551a attached to the board case 550.

In addition, the main control board 530 on which the main CPU 530g is mounted is housed inside the board case 550. Although the board case 550 is formed using transparent resin, the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g is read through a front surface 566 of a front cover 560 of the board case 550.
In contrast, the management sticker 551 on which the two-dimensional code 551a is printed is affixed to the surface of the front part 566 of the front cover 560 of the substrate case 550. Therefore, when reading the two-dimensional code 551a attached to the substrate case 550, it can be read without passing through the front part 566 of the front cover 560 of the substrate case 550.

Furthermore, when reading the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g through the front surface 566 of the front cover 560 of the substrate case 550, the focus of the reading device is set on the front surface 566 of the front cover 560 of the substrate case 550, rather than on the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g.
Therefore, the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g is more difficult to read than the two-dimensional code 551a attached to the board case 550.
In other words, since the two-dimensional code 551a attached to the board case 550 is easier to read than the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g, the information about the pachinko game machine 500 contained in the two-dimensional code 551a attached to the board case 550 can be easily and reliably read.

In this way, when the same reading device is used, the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g is more difficult to read than the two-dimensional code 551a attached to the board case 550.
This makes it possible to prevent information contained in the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g from being illegally obtained (stolen).

Although not shown in Figures 174 (1) and (2), light-emitting elements (LEDs) that turn on or off in response to signals from various sensors connected to the main control board 530 are mounted on the component side of the main control board 530. The light emitted from these light-emitting elements is set so as not to reach the main CPU 530g. In other words, the main CPU 530g is mounted in a position that is outside the irradiation range of the light emitted from the light-emitting elements.
This prevents the light emitted from the light-emitting element mounted on the component surface of the main control board 530 from making it difficult to read the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g.

Although the thirtieth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the 30th embodiment, the management sticker 551 on which the two-dimensional code 551a is printed is attached to the front surface 566 of the front cover 560 of the substrate case 550, thereby attaching the two-dimensional code 551a to the front surface 566 of the front cover 560 of the substrate case 550, but this is not limited to this.
For example, the two-dimensional code 551 a may be attached to the front portion 566 of the front cover 560 of the substrate case 550 by printing the two-dimensional code 551 a directly on the surface of the front portion 566 of the front cover 560 of the substrate case 550 .

(2) In the thirtieth embodiment, the two-dimensional code 530j is attached to the outward surface 530i of the main CPU 530g by printing the two-dimensional code 530j directly on the surface of the outward surface 530i of the main CPU 530g. However, this is not limited to this.
For example, a sticker on which the two-dimensional code 530j is printed may be attached to the outward surface 530i of the main CPU 530g, thereby attaching the two-dimensional code 530j to the outward surface 530i of the main CPU 530g.

(3) In the thirtieth embodiment, the two-dimensional code 551a is printed in black ink on the surface of the white management sticker 551. However, this is not limited to this.
The two-dimensional code 551a affixed to the board case 550 only needs to have high color contrast. For example, the two-dimensional code 551a may be printed in dark blue ink on the surface of a white management sticker 551.

(4) In the thirtieth embodiment, the two-dimensional code 530j is printed in light gray ink on the surface of the exterior of the main CPU 530g, which is made of dark gray resin. However, this is not limited to this.
The two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g only needs to have low color contrast. For example, the two-dimensional code 530j may be printed in ink of a similar color to the exterior of the main CPU 530g, such as by printing the two-dimensional code 530j in dark gray ink on the surface of the exterior of the main CPU 530g, which is made of black resin.

(5) In the 30th embodiment, the size of the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g is set to be smaller than the size of the two-dimensional code 551a attached to the board case 550. However, this is not limited to the above. For example, the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g and the two-dimensional code 551a attached to the board case 550 may be set to be the same size.

(6) In the 30th embodiment, the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the outward surface 530i of the main CPU 530g is approximately parallel to the front portion 566 of the front cover 560 of the board case 550 and is also approximately parallel to the two-dimensional code 551a attached to the front portion 566 of the front cover 560 of the board case 550, but this is not limited to the above.
For example, the outward surface 530i of the main CPU 530g may be inclined with respect to a front surface 566 of a front cover 560 of the board case 550 (the surface facing the component surface of the main control board 530 in the board case 550). Then, a two-dimensional code 530j may be attached to the inclined outward surface 530i.
This makes it possible to tilt the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g with respect to the front surface 566 of the front cover 560 of the board case 550 and the two-dimensional code 551a attached to this front surface 566. This makes it possible to make the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g difficult to read from the front of the front surface 566 of the front cover 560 of the board case 550.

(7) In the 30th embodiment, when the front surface 566 of the front cover 560 of the board case 550 and the component surface of the main control board 530 are viewed from the front, the management sticker 551 and the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g are arranged so as not to overlap, and further, the two-dimensional code 551a attached to the board case 550 and the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g are arranged so as not to overlap.

However, this is not limited to the above, and for example, when the front portion 566 of the front cover 560 of the board case 550 and the component side of the main control board 530 are viewed from the front, the management sticker 551 and the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g may be positioned so as to overlap.
This makes it possible to make the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g difficult to read, and prevents the information contained in the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g from being illegally obtained (stolen).

Furthermore, for example, when the front portion 566 of the front cover 560 of the board case 550 and the component side of the main control board 530 are viewed from the front, the management sticker 551 and the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g may be arranged to overlap, so that the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g cannot be read unless the management sticker 551 is peeled off or the board case 550 is opened.
Even in this manner, it is possible to prevent information contained in the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g from being illegally obtained (stolen).

Also, for example, a read-protection sticker for preventing (blocking or hindering) reading of the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g may be affixed to a position corresponding to the main CPU 530g on the front surface 566 of the front cover 560 of the board case 550, or a read-protection cover for preventing reading of the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g may be attached. Then, it may be possible to make it impossible to read the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g unless the read-protection sticker is peeled off or the read-protection cover is removed.
Even in this manner, it is possible to prevent information contained in the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g from being illegally obtained (stolen).

(8) In the 30th embodiment, the two-dimensional code 551a attached to the board case 550 and the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g were described, but the two-dimensional code attached to the gaming machine is not limited to these two two-dimensional codes.
When the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine 500, multiple two-dimensional codes are attached to the front side (player side) of the pachinko gaming machine 500, and multiple two-dimensional codes are also attached to the back side (opposite the player) of the pachinko gaming machine 500.

In addition, on the front side (player side) of the pachinko gaming machine 500, a two-dimensional code is attached by attaching a sticker with the two-dimensional code printed on it to the bottom right and bottom left periphery of the front of the gaming board 504. These two-dimensional codes contain information about the pachinko gaming machine 500, such as information about the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 500, information about the model (type) of the pachinko gaming machine 500, and information about the serial number of the pachinko gaming machine 500.

Furthermore, an image display device 543 is provided on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 500, approximately in the center of the playing area of the game board 504. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 500 is turned on, the checksum data of the RWM implemented on the main control board 530 and the sub-control board 540 is calculated, and a determination is made as to whether the calculated checksum data is a normal value or not. Then, a two-dimensional code including information showing the result of the determination can be displayed on the image display device 543.

Furthermore, as explained in the 19th embodiment (B), in the pachinko gaming machine 500, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 535 and the reset switch 536 on, the pachinko gaming machine 500 can transition to the setting change mode. In the setting change mode, a two-dimensional code including information on the error history, such as the time and number of occurrences of a frame opening error (notified when the frame opening switch 523 is turned on) and the time and number of occurrences of a door opening error (notified when the door opening switch 522 is turned on), can be displayed on the image display device 543.

Furthermore, on the back side of the pachinko game machine 500 (the side opposite the player), as shown in Figure 98 of the 19th embodiment (B), a board case 550 housing a main control board 530 is attached to the back side of the game board 504.
Furthermore, although not shown in Figure 98 of the 19th embodiment (B), the back surface of the game board 504 is equipped with a board case in which the power supply board 510 is stored, a board case in which the payout control board 520 is stored, and a board case 700 in which the sub-control board 540 is stored.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 99 of the 19th embodiment (B), the power supply board 510 and the dispensing control board 520 are connected by a harness, the dispensing control board 520 and the main control board 530 are connected by a harness, and the main control board 530 and the sub-control board 540 are connected by a harness.
The main CPU 530g mounted on the main control board 530, the sub-CPU 540a mounted on the sub-control board 540, and the CPU mounted on the payout control board 520 are provided with two-dimensional codes by directly printing the two-dimensional codes on their surfaces. These two-dimensional codes include information about the CPU, such as information about the CPU manufacturer, information about the CPU model number, and information about the CPU serial number.

In addition, two-dimensional codes are attached to the surfaces of the board case housing the power supply board 510, the board case housing the payout control board 520, the board case 550 housing the main control board 530, and the board case 700 housing the sub-control board 540 by attaching a sticker with a two-dimensional code printed on it. These two-dimensional codes include information about the type of board, as well as information about the pachinko gaming machine 500, such as information about the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 500, information about the model (type) of the pachinko gaming machine 500, and information about the serial number of the pachinko gaming machine 500.

Furthermore, a band that ties together the lead wires is attached to the harness that connects each board, and a two-dimensional code is attached by printing the two-dimensional code directly on the surface of this band. These two-dimensional codes contain information about the type of harness, as well as information about the pachinko gaming machine 500, such as information about the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 500, information about the model (type) of the pachinko gaming machine 500, and information about the serial number of the pachinko gaming machine 500.

In this way, multiple two-dimensional codes are attached to the front side (player side) and back side (opposite side to the player) of the pachinko gaming machine 500, respectively.
Moreover, most of the two-dimensional codes on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 500 are placed facing forward. Furthermore, most of the two-dimensional codes on the rear side of the pachinko gaming machine 500 are placed facing backward. The two-dimensional codes on the board case that houses the power board 510 are placed sideways, not facing backward. Furthermore, some of the two-dimensional codes on the rear side of the pachinko gaming machine 500 have a specific part attached in front of them, and cannot be read by a reading device unless the specific part is removed.

The number of two-dimensional codes attached to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 500 is set to be less than the number of two-dimensional codes attached to the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 500.
The two-dimensional code attached to the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 500 cannot be read unless one enters the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 500, so by attaching more two-dimensional codes to the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 500, which is normally inaccessible, than to the front side, it is possible to make the two-dimensional code attached to the pachinko gaming machine 500 more difficult to read.

Next, a case where the gaming machine is a slot machine 10 will be described.
As shown in Figure 131 of the twenty-third embodiment, the slot machine 10 comprises a box-shaped cabinet 13 with an opening on the front side, and a front door 12 attached so as to be able to open and close the opening on the front side of the cabinet 13.
A panel called a middle panel is provided in the center of the front door 12, and a transparent display window is provided in this middle panel. This display window is located in a position corresponding to the front of the symbol display device 14. This makes it possible to view the three symbols on each reel 31 of the symbol display device 14 from the front side (player side) of the slot machine 10 through the display window.

Furthermore, on the front side (player side) of the front door 12, below the middle panel, there are arranged a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a settlement switch 43, a medal insertion slot 47, etc. Furthermore, below the above-mentioned switches, there is provided a panel called the lower panel, on which letters indicating the model name of the slot machine 10 and character images, etc. are displayed.
Furthermore, on the front side (player side) of the front door 12, below the lower panel, there are provided a medal payout opening 16 through which medals are paid out, and a medal tray for receiving medals paid out from this medal payout opening 16.

Two-dimensional codes are then attached to the lower front part of the lower panel and the front of the medal tray by attaching a sticker with a two-dimensional code printed on it. These two-dimensional codes contain information about the slot machine 10, such as information about the manufacturer of the slot machine 10, information about the model (type) of the slot machine 10, and information about the serial number of the slot machine 10.

An image display device 23 is also provided on the upper front surface of the front door 12. When the slot machine 10 is powered on, the checksum data of the RWM implemented on the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is calculated, and a determination is made as to whether the calculated checksum data is a normal value. Then, a two-dimensional code including information showing the result of the determination can be displayed on the image display device 23.

Furthermore, as explained in the 19th embodiment (A), in the slot machine 10, when the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 151 and rotated 90 degrees clockwise to turn on the setting key switch 152, and the power is turned on in this state (the power switch 11 is turned on), the slot machine 10 can transition to the setting change mode. In the setting change mode, a two-dimensional code including information on the error history, such as the time of occurrence and number of occurrences of a door open error (which is notified when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on), can be displayed on the image display device 23.

As shown in FIG. 22 of the seventh embodiment, a main control board 50 stored in a main board case 56 is disposed inside the cabinet 13, and a sub-control board 80 stored in a sub-board case 87 is disposed at the top of the rear side of the front door 12. Furthermore, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are connected by a harness, and the sub-control board 80 and the image display device 23 are connected by a harness. These cannot be seen unless the front door 12 is opened.

The main CPU 55 mounted on the main control board 50 and the sub-CPU 85 mounted on the sub-control board 80 are provided with two-dimensional codes by printing the codes directly on their surfaces. These two-dimensional codes contain information about the CPU, such as information about the CPU manufacturer, information about the CPU model number, and information about the CPU serial number.

In addition, two-dimensional codes are attached to the surfaces of the main board case 56, which houses the main control board 50, and the sub-board case 87, which houses the sub-control board 80, by attaching stickers with two-dimensional codes printed on them. These two-dimensional codes contain information about the type of board, as well as information about the slot machine 10, such as information about the manufacturer of the slot machine 10, information about the model (type) of the slot machine 10, and information about the serial number of the slot machine 10.

Furthermore, the harness connecting the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80, the harness connecting the main control board 50 and various electronic devices, and the harness connecting the sub-control board 80 and various electronic devices such as the image display device 23 are fitted with bands for bundling the lead wires, and two-dimensional codes are attached by printing the two-dimensional code directly on the surface of the band. These two-dimensional codes contain information about the type of harness, as well as information about the slot machine 10, such as information about the manufacturer of the slot machine 10, information about the model (type) of the slot machine 10, and information about the serial number of the slot machine 10.

In this way, in the slot machine 10, multiple two-dimensional codes are attached to the front side (player side) of the front door 12, and multiple two-dimensional codes are attached to various devices, etc. arranged inside the cabinet 13.
In addition, most of the two-dimensional codes attached to the front side of the front door 12 are attached facing forward, making them visible when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front, and readable by a reading device from the front of the slot machine 10.

Furthermore, the two-dimensional codes attached to various devices etc. placed inside the cabinet 13 cannot be seen or read by a reading device unless the front door 12 is opened.
Furthermore, some of the two-dimensional codes attached to various devices etc. placed inside cabinet 13 have a specific part attached in front of them, and cannot be read by a reading device unless the specific part is removed.

In the slot machine 10, the number of two-dimensional codes attached to the front side (player side) of the front door 12 is set to be less than the number of two-dimensional codes attached to the various devices, etc. arranged inside the cabinet 13.
By attaching more two-dimensional codes to the inside of a cabinet 13, which cannot be seen unless the front door 12 is opened and cannot be read by a reading device, than to the front side of the front door 12, the two-dimensional codes attached to the slot machine 10 can be made difficult to read.

As described above, two-dimensional codes are attached to and displayed at various positions on the gaming machine, but the area of the code area of the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g is smaller than the area of the code areas of the other two-dimensional codes, and the color contrast between the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g and the background color is smaller (lower) than the color contrast between the other two-dimensional codes and the background color.
This makes the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g more difficult to read with a reading device than other two-dimensional codes.

The first to thirtieth embodiments and the various modified examples shown in the first to thirtieth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Additional Notes>
The inventions (original inventions) described in the original specification etc. of this application can be, for example, the following original inventions 1 to 55, and the problems that the original inventions aim to solve, the means for solving the problems related to the original inventions, and the effects of the original inventions are as follows. However, this does not mean that the inventions described in this specification are limited to original inventions 1 to 55.

1. Initial invention 1
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 1 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that is configured not to execute any processing related to gaming media after a power outage occurs.
In conventional gaming machines, a technology is known in which a blocker is turned off before a backup process is executed as a power-off process, so that even if a medal is inserted while the backup process is being executed, the medal is returned to the player via the blocker, thereby preventing the medal from being added (for example, JP 2015-173832 A).
However, for example, if the power is cut off at the moment a medal is inserted into the medal slot, the medal may pass through the blocker before the power cut process is executed, and the medal may be counted. Note that, from a control standpoint, it is not preferable to execute medal addition process (medal bet process or medal credit process) after the power cut occurs.
The problem that the original invention aims to solve is to prevent the addition process of game media from being executed even when a power outage occurs at approximately the same time as game media is inserted into the game media insertion port.

(b) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 1 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (first embodiment (A)) is
A gaming medium insertion port (a medal insertion port 47);
a blocker (45) that is provided in a passage (a medal passage) for a game medium (a medal) inserted from a game medium insertion port and that is controllable to a state that permits the game medium to pass (on state) or a state that prohibits the game medium from passing (off state);
The game machine includes detection means A (insertion sensor 44a) and B (insertion sensor 44b) (detection means B is located downstream of detection means A) that are provided in the path of the game medium inserted through the game medium insertion port and that are capable of detecting the game medium;
The time from when an event occurs in which the supply of power is cut off while the blocker is controlled to a state in which the passage of the game medium is permitted, to when the event in which the supply of power is cut off is detected and the blocker is controlled to a state in which the passage of the game medium is not permitted is defined as T1 (T1 in FIGS. 2 and 3 ).
When the blocker is controlled to allow the passage of the game medium and the game medium is released from the game medium slot into the inside of the game machine, the time from when the game medium becomes invisible from the front of the game machine (position M2 in FIG. 2) to when the detection means B detects the game medium and when the detection means B no longer detects the game medium (position M4 in FIG. 2) is defined as T2 (T2 in FIG. 2 and FIG. 3),
T1 < T2
The present invention is characterized in that:

(c) Effect of Original Invention 1 According to the original invention, if a power outage occurs when a gaming medium is released from the gaming medium insertion port into the gaming machine and the gaming medium is no longer visible from the front of the gaming machine, the blocker detects the event of the power supply being cut off and controls the blocker to a state that does not allow the gaming medium to pass through before detection means B can no longer detect the gaming medium, so that the gaming medium will not be detected, at least by detection means B.
Therefore, the gaming medium is not properly detected by the detection means A and B, and the addition process (betting process or credit process) of the gaming medium is not executed. Therefore, even if a power outage occurs when the gaming medium becomes invisible from the front of the gaming machine, that is, even if a power outage occurs immediately after the gaming medium is released inside the gaming machine, the gaming medium can be prevented from being accepted. This makes it possible to prevent the addition process of the gaming medium from being executed after the power outage occurs.

2. Initial invention 2
(a) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 2 The initial invention relates to a gate mark on a board case in an amusement machine having a board case that houses a control board therein.
In conventional gaming machines, a board case that houses a main control board is known. Here, the board case is generally formed by molding, so a gate mark remains on the board case. A technology has been proposed that uses this gate mark as a marker (for example, JP 2017-042270 A).
However, the gate marks on the circuit board case are unclear when viewed from the outside because they contain cut portions of the resin, which creates the risk that the gate marks may be opened and someone may gain access to the inside of the main control board.
The problem that the invention initially aims to solve is to prevent cheating that takes advantage of gate marks on the circuit board case.

(b) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 2 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (second embodiment) is as follows:
A predetermined IC (main CPU 55) having a calculation function;
a control board (main control board 50) having the predetermined IC mounted on one surface (the surface facing the upper surface of the upper cover 57);
a board case (board case 56 consisting of an upper cover 57 and a lower cover 58) having a plurality of surfaces (top surface, side surface, etc.) and housing the control board;
The substrate case is formed so that the inside can be seen,
A gate mark (57b) formed during molding of the board case is disposed on the outer side of the board case and on a surface (the outer side of the upper surface of the upper cover 57) facing the one surface of the control board,
The specified IC of the control board is not positioned in a direction perpendicular to the gate trace on the opposing surface.

(c) Effect of the original invention 2 According to the original invention, the specified IC of the control board is not located vertically to the gate mark of the board case, so that it is possible to prevent unauthorized opening of the gate mark and access to the specified IC.
In addition, since there are no gate marks of the board case in the vertical direction of the specified IC of the control board, the specified IC can be visually confirmed without being obstructed by the gate marks. This makes it easy to visually check whether or not tampering has been performed on the specified IC.

3. Initial invention 3
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 3 The original invention relates to processing when communication between a main control board and a sub-control board is restored after a disconnection occurs.
2. Description of the Related Art In conventional gaming machines, a main control board transmits commands to a sub-control board, and the sub-control board controls an image display device and the like based on the received commands.
Here, a technique is known in which the sub-control board compares the command received last time with the command received this time, and determines that a command reception abnormality has occurred based on the consistency between the received commands (for example, JP 2014-226503 A).
However, when sending commands from the main control board to the sub-control board, a disconnection may occur between the main control board and the sub-control board, and when communication is restored, the sub-control board may not be able to output a normal performance.
The problem that the original invention aims to solve is to provide a proper presentation when communication is restored after a disconnection occurs between a main control board and a sub-control board.

(b) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 3 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (third embodiment) is as follows:
A main control board (50);
A sub-control board (80) that controls the performance based on information received from the main control board;
The sub-control board is capable of receiving information of an operated stop switch (42) from the main control board,
The sub-control board, in a predetermined game state (AT), is capable of outputting a performance corresponding to the operation of a stop switch based on receiving information of the operated stop switch,
The sub-control board includes:
When a predetermined stop switch is operated on the "N" game number in the predetermined game state, when information that the predetermined stop switch has been operated is received, a predetermined effect corresponding to the operation of the predetermined stop switch (an effect when the reel corresponding to the predetermined stop switch stops) is output; thereafter, before all remaining stop switches on the "N" game number are operated, information from the main control board becomes unreceivable, and then, on the "N+a" game number, information from the main control board becomes receivable; thereafter, when information that a specific stop switch different from the predetermined stop switch has been operated is received on the "N+a" game number, an effect corresponding to the operation of the specific stop switch and related to the predetermined effect (an effect following the predetermined effect and when the reel corresponding to the specific stop switch stops) is output; and thereafter, when predetermined information is received on the "N+a+1" game number, an effect for the "N+a+1" game number is output based on the predetermined information.

(c) Effects of the Original Invention 3 According to the original invention, when communication is restored in the middle of the "N+a"th game, a presentation related to the predetermined presentation of the "N"th game that had been output up until that point is output, so that in the "N+a"th game, a presentation following the "N"th game can be output. Then, when moving to the "N+a+1"th game, normal presentation is restored, so that it is possible to prevent a sudden change in presentation due to the restoration of communication in the middle of the "N+a"th game. This makes it possible to output presentations that do not feel out of place before and after the disconnection.

4. Initial invention 4
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 4 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that allows the stop switch to be operated at high speed.
In conventional gaming machines, when a stop switch is operated, the reel corresponding to that stop switch is stopped at a predetermined position corresponding to the lottery result. After the reel is stopped at the predetermined position, the motor is energized for a predetermined time. Here, while the operated stop switch is in the on state or the motor is in the excited state, the next stop switch operation is not accepted.
Here, there is known technology that prevents a stop operation from being accepted even if a second stop switch is operated until the reel status becomes stopped after the first stop switch is operated (see, for example, JP 2017-093576 A).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional technology, if there is a long time between when the stop switch is operated and when the next stop switch operation can be accepted, there is a problem that the game cannot be completed quickly.
The problem that the original invention aims to solve is to enable the stop switch to be operated at high speed.

(b) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 4 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (fourth embodiment) is as follows:
Reel (31),
A motor (32) for rotating the reel;
a reel control means (65) for controlling the drive of the motor to stop the rotation of the reel based on detection of an operation of a stop button (stop button 42a);
An internal lottery means (a role lottery means 61);
A sensor (detection sensor 42e) that detects the operation of the stop button is turned on while the stop button is pressed down to the deepest part (the position shown in FIG. 12(c)). When the pressing of the stop button is released, the stop button is allowed to move to its initial position (the position shown in FIG. 12(a)) by the biasing force, and the sensor is turned off while the stop button moves to its initial position.
In a game in which the internal lottery means has determined a predetermined result, the stop button for a predetermined reel is operated at a predetermined timing while all reels are being rotated by the reel control means, and after detecting that the sensor for the stop button for the predetermined reel is turned on, the device is configured to enter an excited state (four-phase excited state) for stopping the predetermined reel, and when a predetermined time (T12 in FIG. 13) has elapsed since entering the excited state, the device is configured to terminate the excited state;
Let T1 (T11 in FIG. 13) be the time from the moment the stop button, which has been pressed to the deepest part, is released until the sensor is turned off, and let T2 be the predetermined time.
T1 < T2
The present invention is characterized in that:

(c) Effects of the Original Invention 4 According to the original invention, if it is assumed that the start of the motor excitation state when the reel stops and the moment when the stop button that has been pushed all the way in is released are simultaneous, the excitation state ends after the sensor goes off. Therefore, it is possible to accept the operation of the next stop button at the timing when the motor excitation state ends.

5. Initial invention 5
(a) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 5 The initial invention relates to the control of a medal payout device.
It is known that in conventional gaming machines, it takes approximately 100 ms to pay out one medal (for example, JP 2016-214434 A).
Here, a DC motor (direct current motor) is used as a hopper motor for rotating the hopper disk. When a constant current is passed through a DC motor, the rotation of the drive shaft gradually accelerates from a stopped state, and then reaches a constant speed (constant speed).
As a result, the rotation of the hopper motor's drive shaft gradually accelerates from when the hopper motor starts to drive until the first medal is discharged, so the time required from when the hopper motor starts to drive until the first medal is discharged is longer than the medal discharge interval when the hopper motor's drive shaft is rotating at a constant speed, which could give the player the impression that the discharge of the first medal is delayed.
The problem that the original invention was trying to solve was to prevent the player from feeling that the first medal was being dispensed late.

(b) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 5 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (sixth embodiment) is as follows:
A hopper (35) for storing medals;
A hopper disk (101) provided in the hopper;
a hopper motor (36) for rotating the hopper disk;
A control means (main control board 50) for controlling the driving of the hopper motor,
The hopper disk is provided with a plurality of (eight) holding portions (102) capable of holding medals stored in the hopper along the outer periphery of the hopper disk,
When the hopper motor is driven and the hopper disk rotates, the medals held in the holding section are discharged sequentially from the discharge section (103),
The position of the holding section in which the last medal discharged in one payout process was held at the moment when the last medal discharged in one payout process was discharged from the discharge section is set as a first position;
The position of the holding section in which the first medal to be discharged in the next payout process is held at the moment when the last medal to be discharged in the one payout process is discharged from the discharge section is set as a second position;
The control means is characterized in that, when one payout process is completed, the control means controls the driving of the hopper motor so that the rotation of the hopper disk stops with the holding section, which holds the first dispensed medal in the next payout process, positioned between the first position and the second position.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 5 According to the original invention, when the holder that holds the first dispensed medal stops between the first position and the second position, the distance it takes to reach the first position is shorter than when it stops at the second position. As a result, the time it takes to reach the first position is also shorter than when it stops at the second position, so even if the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor gradually accelerates, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the dispense of the first medal has been delayed.

6. Original invention 6
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 6 The original invention relates to the arrangement of a main control board mounted inside the cabinet and a sub-control board mounted on the back surface of the front door.
Among conventional gaming machines, there are known ones that have an electrolytic capacitor for storing electricity on a sub-control board for controlling the presentation (for example, JP 2014-131656 A).
In this case, the electrolytic capacitor for storing electricity is filled with an electrolyte, but if the electrolytic capacitor breaks down due to a malfunction, causing the electrolyte to scatter and adhere to the main CPU on the main control board, the main CPU may malfunction. Also, the main CPU may be damaged by the impact caused by the breakage of the electrolytic capacitor.
The problem that the original invention was intended to solve was to prevent the main CPU from malfunctioning even if the electrolytic capacitor burst and the electrolyte was scattered, and also to prevent the main CPU from being damaged by the impact caused by the bursting of the electrolytic capacitor due to a malfunction.

(b) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 6 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (seventh embodiment) is as follows:
A cabinet (13);
A front door (12) attached to the cabinet so as to be capable of opening and closing;
A main control board (50) that controls the progress of the game;
A sub-control board (80) for controlling the performance;
The main control board is mounted inside the cabinet,
the sub-control board is attached to the rear surface of the front door,
the main control board and the sub-control board are disposed so as to face each other when the front door is closed,
A main CPU (55) is disposed on the main control board,
The sub-control board is characterized in that an electrolytic capacitor (86) is disposed at a position other than the position facing the main CPU.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 6 According to the original invention, the electrolytic capacitor is disposed in a position on the sub-control board other than the position facing the main CPU. Therefore, even if a malfunction causes the electrolytic capacitor to burst and electrolyte to splash, the splashed electrolyte will not adhere to the main CPU, thereby preventing the main CPU from malfunctioning.
Furthermore, even if the electrolytic capacitor explodes, the main CPU is prevented from directly receiving the impact, and therefore the main CPU is prevented from being damaged.

7. Original invention 7
(a) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 7 The initial invention relates to reel stopping control on the main control board side and control of performance output on the sub-control board side.
Conventional gaming machines are known that are capable of executing multiple types of presentation content, and the probability of selecting each presentation content differs when a special role is won (internal) from when the special role is not won (non-internal) (for example, JP 2013-146608 A).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the content of the presentation is selected regardless of the result of the internal lottery, whether it is in the internal or non-internal state.
The problem that the original invention aims to solve is to appropriately determine the presentation to be output depending on the result of the internal lottery.

(b) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 7 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (ninth embodiment) is as follows:
A plurality of reels (31) displaying a plurality of symbols;
a plurality of stop switches (42) operated by a player when stopping each of the reels;
A main control means (main control board 50) for controlling the progress of the game;
A sub-control means (sub-control board 80) for controlling the performance;
The main control means
An internal lottery means (role selection means 61) for performing a lottery so as to have a first lottery result (for example, a "BB" single winning during a non-internal period) or a second lottery result (for example, a "non-winning" during a BB period);
a plurality of stop position determination tables that determine stop positions of the reels corresponding to the positions of the reels at the moment when the stop switch is operated;
a reel control means (65) for determining a stop position of the reel using any one of the stop position determination tables and for stopping the reel at the determined stop position,
The reel control means determines stop positions of the reels using the same stop position determination table for a game resulting from a first drawing result and a game resulting from a second drawing result;
The sub-control means
A plurality of effect determination tables that determine the effects to be output;
A performance output control means (91) for determining a performance to be output using any one of the performance determination tables and outputting the determined performance,
The effect output control means determines the effect to be output using different effect determination tables for a game resulting from a first drawing result and a game resulting from a second drawing result.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 7 According to the original invention, in a game resulting in the first lottery result by the internal lottery means and a game resulting in the second lottery result, on the main control means side, the reel control means determines the reel stopping positions using the same stopping position determination table, but on the sub-control means side, the performance output control means determines the performance to be output using a different performance determination table.
As a result, even if the reel stop control on the main control means side is the same, different effects can be output on the sub-control means side, making it possible to diversify the effects.

8. Original invention 8
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 8 The original invention relates to the gap between the cabinet and the front door.
In conventional gaming machines, a protruding edge that protrudes outward is provided on the edge of the opening on the front side of the cabinet, and when the front door is closed, the protruding edge is configured to be stored inside the front door, thereby bending the gap between the cabinet and the front door and making it difficult for foreign objects to enter (for example, JP 2005-198949 A).
However, if the front door is opened slightly so that the protruding edge comes off the front door, it is possible that a foreign object may enter through the gap between the cabinet and the front door.
The problem that the original invention was intended to solve was to prevent fraudulent acts (cheating) in which a foreign object is inserted through the gap between the cabinet and the front door by slightly opening the front door.

(b) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 8 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (eighth embodiment) is as follows:
A cabinet (13);
A front door (12) attached to the cabinet so as to be capable of opening and closing;
A door sensor that detects the opening of the front door,
A first closing portion (13c) is provided at a lower portion of the cabinet and protrudes toward the front door when the front door is closed,
a second closing portion (12a) is provided at a position below the first closing portion in the lower portion of the front door, the second closing portion protruding toward the cabinet when the front door is closed;
a third closing portion (12b) protruding toward the cabinet when the front door is closed is provided at a position above the first closing portion in the lower portion of the front door;
When the front door is closed, the first blocking portion is disposed between the second blocking portion and the third blocking portion,
a position of the front door when the door sensor first detects the opening of the front door as a detection start position;
The invention is characterized in that the first blocking portion is disposed between the second blocking portion and the third blocking portion even when the front door is in the detection start position.

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 8 According to the original invention, when the front door is opened from a closed state, the door sensor first detects the opening of the front door, and then the first blocking part comes out from between the second blocking part and the third blocking part. In addition, when the door sensor detects the opening of the front door, it becomes possible to notify that the front door is open.
For this reason, the first blocking part will not come out from between the second blocking part and the third blocking part before it becomes possible to notify that the front door is open, and even in a position where it becomes possible to notify that the front door is open, the gap between the cabinet and the front door has a curved shape, so that it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts (cheating) of inserting foreign objects through the gap between the cabinet and the front door.

9. Original invention 9
(a) Problem to be solved by the original invention 9 The original invention relates to a gaming machine equipped with a favorable zone indicator.
Gaming machines equipped with advantageous zone indicators have been known for some time (see, for example, JP 2018-000797 A).
However, in gaming machines equipped with conventional advantageous zone indicators, the lighting control of the advantageous zone indicator when power is restored after a power outage has not been sufficiently considered.
The problem that the original invention aims to solve is to properly control the advantageous zone indicator when power is restored after a power outage.

(b) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 9 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (11th embodiment) is as follows:
An informing game state (AT) capable of informing the operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop button (stop switch 42);
An advantageous zone in which the notification game state can be executed;
A favorable zone indicator (favorable zone display LED 77) for indicating that the zone is favorable,
When the power supply is interrupted while the advantageous zone indicator is on, and then the power supply is resumed with the setting change switch in the off state, a process for turning on the advantageous zone indicator can be executed after starting an interrupt process;
When the power supply is cut off while the advantageous zone indicator is on, and then the power supply is resumed with the setting change switch on, a process for turning off the advantageous zone indicator is executed, and then it is possible to move on to the setting change process.

(c) Effect of the original invention 9 According to the original invention, when power is restored after a power outage, the advantageous zone indicator can be appropriately controlled depending on the situation.

10. Original invention 10
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 10 The original invention relates to a gaming machine having four reels and a stop button.
Conventional gaming machines generally have three reels and three stop buttons (see, for example, JP 2018-000797 A).
In conventional gaming machines, it has been proposed to increase the number of reels and stop buttons to four. However, when the number of stop buttons is increased to four, there is a problem that it becomes easier to make mistakes in operating the stop buttons during AT.
The problem that the original invention was intended to solve was how to make it less likely for mistakes to occur when operating the stop buttons when the number of stop buttons is set to four.

(b) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 10 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (13th embodiment) is as follows:
Four reels (31A to 31D)
and four stop buttons (stop switches 42A to 42D) corresponding to the four reels, respectively;
A predetermined operation button (24) is disposed above the four stop buttons,
At least a part of the stop button (stop switch 42A) on the left end side is positioned vertically downward from the left end of the predetermined operation button,
The stop button (stop switch 42D) on the right end side is at least partially positioned vertically downward from the right end of the predetermined operation button.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 10 According to the original invention, even when the number of stop buttons becomes four, the stop buttons at both ends can be operated using the left and right ends of the operation button as landmarks, making it less likely that errors will occur when operating the stop buttons.

11. Original invention 11
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 11 The original invention relates to a gaming machine capable of indicating a set number.
Conventionally, gaming machines that allow play with any one of a plurality of types of prescribed numbers have been known (see, for example, JP 2018-000797 A).
However, in conventional gaming machines, even in a game in which a game can be played with any one of a plurality of types of prescribed numbers, there are cases in which an appropriate prescribed number and an inappropriate prescribed number occur.
The problem that the original invention aims to solve is to enable a game to be played with an appropriate set number of plays.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 11 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (12th embodiment) is as follows:
A notification game state (AT) capable of notifying the operation mode of a stop button (stop switch 42) is provided,
When the operation mode is notified in the notification game state, information corresponding to the operation mode (push order instruction information) can be displayed on a predetermined display unit (the number of acquisitions display LED 78);
In the notification game state, a game can be started when at least one of a plurality of prescribed numbers ("2" or "3") of game values is inserted;
In the notification game state, information corresponding to a prescribed number can be displayed on the predetermined display unit;
In the notification game state, when the information corresponding to the prescribed number is to be displayed on the predetermined display unit, the information is displayed at a predetermined timing (step S322 in FIG. 42) between after all reels have stopped and when the start switch is detected to be turned on.
When the information corresponding to the specified number is displayed on the specified display unit, it is displayed in a display manner that is distinguishable from the information corresponding to the operation mode (for example, when the specified number is "2", "0A" is displayed).

(c) Effect of Original Invention 11 According to the original invention, it is possible to display information corresponding to the specified number at a predetermined timing before the start switch is detected as being turned on, so that the player can be notified of the appropriate specified number for that game at the appropriate timing.
It is also possible to prevent the player from confusing the information corresponding to the operation mode with the information corresponding to the specified number.

12. Original invention 12
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 12 The original invention relates to a gaming machine equipped with a counter that counts the difference in the number of coins in the notifying game state.
Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a counter that counts the difference in the number of coins during an AT have been known (see, for example, JP 2018-000797 A).
In conventional gaming machines, when the advantageous zone ends, it is required to initialize the information about the advantageous zone. However, after the AT ends, there are cases where the next AT is won early, and there are also cases where it is desired to carry over the difference in the number of coins from the previous AT.
The problem that the original invention aims to solve is to initialize information related to the advantageous zone when the advantageous zone ends, while making it possible to carry over the difference in the number of coins from the previous notified game state (AT).

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 12 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (11th embodiment) is as follows:
An informing game state (AT) capable of informing the operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop button (stop switch 42);
An advantageous zone in which the notification game state can be executed;
In the first control means (main control board 50), a first difference counter (difference counter) is provided for storing a cumulative value of a difference between the number of bets and the number of payouts (including addition to credits; the same applies below) of the gaming value, the minimum value of which is set to "0";
The second control means (sub-control board 80) includes a second difference counter (sub-difference number counter) that stores an accumulated value of a difference number indicating a difference between the number of bets and the number of payouts of the game value,
At the end of the advantageous period, the first difference number counter is cleared (step S435 in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52), and the second difference number counter is not cleared.

(c) Effects of the Original Invention 12 According to the original invention, the first difference counter is cleared at the end of the advantageous zone, so that the rule of initializing the information about the advantageous zone can be observed. Also, there are cases where the second difference counter is not cleared, and in that case, it is possible to carry over the difference number of the previous notified game state at the start of the next notified game state.

13. Original invention 13
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 13 The original invention relates to a gaming machine equipped with a counter that counts the difference in the number of coins in the notifying game state.
Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a counter that counts the difference in the number of coins during an AT have been known (see, for example, JP 2018-000797 A).
However, in conventional gaming machines, there has been no sufficient consideration given to how to count (update) the difference in the number of coins when a replay is won.
The problem that the original invention is intended to solve is to properly execute the update process for the difference in the number of coins when a replay is won.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 13 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (11th embodiment) is as follows:
an announcing game state (AT) capable of announcing the operation mode of the stop button (stop switch 42);
An advantageous zone in which the notification game state can be executed;
a difference counter for storing a cumulative value of a difference between the number of bets and the number of payouts (including addition to credits; the same applies below) of the game value, the minimum value of which is "0";
A favorable zone counter (favorable zone clear counter) that counts the number of times a game is played in the favorable zone;
1. In a game in which at least a small win has been won, after all reels have stopped (after step S289 in FIG. 41), it is determined whether or not the value of the advantageous zone counter is a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous zone (step S424 in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52).
1) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous zone counter is a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous zone, a process for ending the advantageous zone (step S435) can be executed without determining the value of the difference counter (without executing the process of step S434);
2) When it is determined that the value of the favorable zone counter is not a value that satisfies the end condition of the favorable zone (when the answer is "No" in step S424), an update process of the difference counter (steps S428 and S429) is executed, and then it is determined whether or not the value of the difference counter is a value that satisfies the end condition of the favorable zone (step S434). When it is determined that the value satisfies the end condition of the favorable zone (when the answer is "Yes" in step S434), a process for terminating the favorable zone (step S435) can be executed.
2. In a game in which a replay has been won, after all reels have stopped (after step S289 in FIG. 41), it is determined whether or not the value of the advantageous zone counter is a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous zone (step S424 in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52).
1) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous zone counter is a value that satisfies the condition for terminating the advantageous zone (when the answer is "Yes" in step S424), it is possible to execute a process for terminating the advantageous zone (step S435) without determining the value of the difference counter (without executing the process of step S434);
2) When it is determined that the value of the favorable zone counter is not a value that satisfies the end condition of the favorable zone (when step S424 is "No"), it is determined whether or not the value of the difference counter is a value that satisfies the end condition of the favorable zone without executing the update process of the difference counter (in Figures 51 and 52, when step S426 is "Yes", proceed to step S434), and when it is determined that the value satisfies the end condition of the favorable zone (when step S434 is "Yes"), it is possible to execute a process for terminating the favorable zone (step S435).

(c) Effects of the Original Invention 13 According to the original invention, in a game in which a replay is won, regardless of whether the value of the advantageous zone counter is a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous zone, the update process of the difference number counter is not executed, so that the update process of the difference number in a game in which a replay is won can be executed appropriately. Furthermore, the program processing can be accelerated.

14. Original invention 14
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 14 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that is capable of executing a process related to an instruction function a predetermined number of times.
Gaming machines having an instruction function have been known for some time (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-000797).
However, in conventional gaming machines, the relationship between the specified number and the processing related to the instruction function and the processing related to the advantageous zone was not sufficiently considered.
The problem that the original invention aims to solve is to appropriately execute processing related to the instruction function and processing related to the advantageous zone according to a specified number.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 14 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (11th embodiment) is as follows:
An informing game state (AT) capable of executing an instruction function for informing the operation mode of the stop button (stop switch 42);
An advantageous zone in which the notified game state can be executed;
A favorable zone counter (favorable zone clear counter) for counting a predetermined variable related to the favorable zone;
A notification game counter (AT game number counter or AT difference number counter) for counting a specific variable (for example, a number of games or a difference number) related to the notification game state,
A game in which at least a first prescribed number (prescribed number "3") or a second prescribed number (prescribed number "2") of game value can be input,
In a game in the advantageous zone (AT), in a game started based on the insertion of a first specified number, a process related to the instruction function (for example, notification of the correct button press sequence) can be executed (in FIG. 48, step S382 is "Yes"), and in a game started based on the insertion of a second specified number, a process related to the instruction function cannot be executed (in FIG. 48, step S382 is "No").
In the notification game state, in a game started based on the insertion of the first specified number, the update of the advantageous zone counter is enabled (step S422 in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52), and the update of the notification game counter is enabled (step S333 in FIG. 43),
In the notification game state, in a game that is started based on the insertion of the second specified number, the update of the advantageous zone counter is made executable (step S422 in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52), and the update of the notification game counter is made inexecutable ("No" in step S332 in FIG. 43).
It is characterized by:

(c) Effect of Original Invention 14 According to the original invention, the advantageous zone counter can be updated during play of either the first specified number or the second specified number, thereby making it possible to optimize the advantageous zone.
In addition, by not updating the notification game counter during the second specified number of games in which the processing related to the instruction function cannot be executed, it is possible to ensure consistency between the execution of the processing related to the instruction function and the updating of the notification game counter.

15. Original invention 15
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 15 The original invention relates to a gaming machine having a signal line related to start-up.
It has been known in the past to use a harness consisting of a plurality of signal wires (lead wires) for electrically connecting control boards of a gaming machine, and one of the signal wires is a signal wire related to starting.
In the prior art, since the start-related signal is used for the lottery, it is necessary to suppress cheating on the start-related signal line.
The problem that the original invention aims to solve is to make it difficult to identify the signal lines related to starting and to prevent cheating.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 15 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (21st embodiment) is as follows:
In a gaming machine (slot machine 10, pachinko gaming machine 500) equipped with a control board (main control board 50, 530),
A plurality of signal lines (lead wires) electrically connected to the control board are provided,
the plurality of signal lines include at least a first signal line, a second signal line, and a third signal line;
The first signal line is a signal line related to the start of a game (for example, lead wire No. 7 of harness D in FIG. 111 ),
The second signal line (for example, lead wire No. 8 of harness D in FIG. 111) and the third signal line (for example, lead wire No. 3 of harness D in FIG. 111) are both signal lines different from the signal line related to the start of a game,
the first signal line and the second signal line have substantially the same diameter;
The first signal line and the third signal line have different diameters.

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 15 According to the original invention, it is possible to make it difficult to identify which signal line is related to starting. This makes it possible to suppress cheating on the signal lines related to starting.

16. Original invention 16
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 16 The original invention relates to a gaming machine capable of outputting a setting change completion sound.
2. Description of the Related Art Gaming machines that are capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values are known.
In the prior art, for example, the configuration is such that the setting change process ends when the setting key is turned off, and it is not easy to know from the outside when the setting change process has ended.
Therefore, when the setting change process is completed, it is possible to notify the user of this.
However, if a game is started immediately after the setting change process is completed, and a notification that the setting change process has been completed is given, there is a risk that the notification that the setting change process has been completed and the notification output during that game will be output at the same time (overlapping), which may make it difficult to understand the important notification output during that game.
The problem that the original invention is intended to solve is to appropriately output an end sound that indicates that the setting change state has ended.

The initial invention (19th embodiment) is as follows:
A gaming machine (slot machine 10, pachinko gaming machine 500) capable of changing an advantage degree for a player,
A specific operation detection means (setting key switch 152, 535) for detecting a specific operation in order to control the game to either a setting change state in which the advantage degree can be changed, or a normal state in which the advantage degree cannot be changed and a game can be started;
A speaker (22, 542);
When a condition for transitioning to the normal state is satisfied in the setting change state, an end sound indicating that the setting change state has ended can be output from the speaker for a time T1 ("T01" in FIG. 96 );
In one game in which the game start conditions (in the case of the slot machine 10, a specified number of coins have been bet and the start switch 41 has been operated, and in the case of the pachinko game machine 500, the game ball has entered the start hole 532) have been satisfied, the game can be ended at time T2 (in FIG. 96, “T12” or “T22”).
In the setting change state, after the transition to the normal state, it takes at least a time T3 ("T11" or "T12" in FIG. 96) until the game start condition is satisfied,
When a game is started immediately after the change from the setting change state to the normal state, the following formula is established: T1<T2+T3 (T1>0, T2>0, T3>0).
It is characterized by:

(c) Effects of the Original Invention 16 According to the original invention, even if a game is started at the same time as the end of the setting change state, the ending sound indicating that the setting change state has ended is outputted before the game is ended, so the presentation outputted at the end of the game does not overlap with the ending sound indicating that the setting change state has ended. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the presentation outputted at the end of the game from being difficult to understand due to the ending sound indicating that the setting change state has ended.

17. Original invention 17
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 17 The original invention relates to a gaming machine in which the light emitted by the light-emitting means mounted on the lamp board is made clearly visible.
Among conventional gaming machines, there is known one which includes a lamp board on which multiple LEDs are mounted and a lamp cover which covers the lamp board, the lamp cover being formed using a milky white resin material having translucency (for example, JP 2015-196069 A).
Here, the LED mounting surface of the lamp substrate is generally formed in green or black.
However, if a lamp cover is formed using a translucent milky white resin material, there is a possibility that the color of the LED mounting surface on the lamp board will be visible when the LED is turned off, and when the LED is turned on, it may appear to emit a color different from the set color.
Furthermore, even if the lamp cover is formed using a colorless, translucent resin material, when the LED is turned off, the color of the LED mounting surface on the lamp board will be visible, and when the LED is turned on, it may appear to emit a color different from the set color.
The problem that the original invention aims to solve is to prevent the LED mounting surface on the lamp board from looking bad even when it is visible through the lamp cover, and to make the color of the LED when it emits light look beautiful.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 17 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (23rd embodiment) is as follows:
In a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 500) equipped with an openable front door (e.g., a glass door 505),
There is a lamp cover (for example, upper frame lamp cover 613) that covers a lamp board (for example, upper frame right lamp board 611) on which light emitting means (LEDs 641a to 641d) are mounted,
At least a part of the lamp cover is configured to be visible in substantially the same color or a similar color when the light emitting means emits light in one color;
The mounting surface of the lamp board on which the light emitting means is mounted is at least partially configured in approximately white color.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 17 According to the original invention, the mounting surface of the light-emitting means on the lamp board is made approximately white in color, so that even if the mounting surface of the light-emitting means on the lamp board is visible through the lamp cover when the light-emitting means is turned off, the appearance is not unsightly.
Furthermore, when the light-emitting means is emitting light, the light emitted from the light-emitting means is reflected by the mounting surface of the light-emitting means on the lamp board, making the light-emitting means appear to shine brighter, and since the mounting surface of the light-emitting means is constructed in approximately white color, the light-emitting means can be made to appear to emit light in the set color.

18. Original invention 18
(a) The problem that the original invention 18 aims to solve is the same as the problem that the original invention 17 aims to solve.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 18 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (23rd embodiment) is as follows:
In a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 500) having a decorative lamp unit (e.g., a right frame lamp unit 620) on an openable front door (e.g., a glass door 505),
The decorative lamp unit includes:
A lamp board (for example, the right frame lamp board 621) on which light emitting elements (LEDs 641e-k) are mounted;
A lamp cover (for example, a right frame lamp cover 622) through which light emitted from the light emitting element is irradiated;
A substrate mounting portion (for example, the right frame substrate mounting portion 653) to which the lamp substrate is attached;
a cover mounting portion (e.g., a right frame cover mounting portion 654) to which the lamp cover is attached;
The lamp cover has a colorless or white light-transmitting portion,
The mounting surface of the lamp substrate on which the light emitting element is mounted is formed in white,
The lamp substrate is generally rectangular in shape,
The lamp board has a width in the short side direction ("W1" in FIG. 116) that is approximately the same as the width in the short side direction ("W2" in FIG. 124) of the board mounting portion.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 18 According to the original invention, the mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp board is made white, so that even when the light-emitting element is turned off, the mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp board can be seen through the lamp cover, and the appearance of the decorative lamp part is not impaired.
In addition, when the light-emitting element emits light, the light emitted from the light-emitting element is reflected by the mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp substrate, making the light-emitting element appear to shine brighter, and since the mounting surface of the light-emitting element is made of white color, the light-emitting element can be made to appear to emit light in the set color.
Furthermore, since the short-side width of the lamp board and the short-side width of the board mounting portion are made approximately the same, the board mounting portion can be covered by the lamp board and the mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp board can function as a reflector, making the light emitted from the light-emitting element look beautiful.

19. Original invention 19
(a) The problem that the original invention 19 aims to solve is the same as the problem that the original invention 17 aims to solve.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 19 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (23rd embodiment) is as follows:
In a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 500) having a decorative lamp unit (e.g., an upper frame lamp unit 610) on an openable front door (e.g., a glass door 505),
The decorative lamp unit includes:
A lamp board (for example, the upper frame right lamp board 611) on which light emitting elements (LEDs 641a to 641d) are mounted;
A lamp cover (for example, an upper frame lamp cover 613) through which light emitted from the light emitting element is irradiated;
A board mounting portion (for example, the upper frame right board mounting portion 651) to which the lamp board is attached;
a cover mounting portion (for example, upper frame right cover mounting portion 652) to which the lamp cover is attached,
The lamp cover has a colorless or white light-transmitting portion,
The mounting surface of the lamp substrate on which the light emitting element is mounted is formed in white,
A fastener (e.g., a screw 683a) used to fasten the lamp board to the board mounting portion has an exposed portion (screw head 689) exposed on the mounting surface side,
a height ("T1" in FIG. 123) of the exposed portion from the mounting surface is greater than a height ("T2" in FIG. 123) of the light-emitting element from the mounting surface;
The exposed portion is subjected to a surface treatment (for example, silver plating) for reflecting the light emitted from the light emitting element.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 19 According to the original invention, the mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp board is made white, so that even when the light-emitting element is turned off, the mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp board can be seen through the lamp cover, and the appearance of the decorative lamp part is not impaired.
In addition, when the light-emitting element emits light, the light emitted from the light-emitting element is reflected by the mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp substrate, making the light-emitting element appear to shine brighter, and since the mounting surface of the light-emitting element is made of white color, the light-emitting element can be made to appear to emit light in the set color.
Furthermore, by setting the height of the exposed portion from the light-emitting element mounting surface to be greater than the height of the light-emitting element from the light-emitting element mounting surface and applying a surface treatment to the exposed portion to reflect the light emitted from the light-emitting element, the light emitted from the light-emitting element is reflected by the exposed portion, making the light emitted from the light-emitting element look beautiful.

20. Original invention 20
(a) The problem that the original invention 20 aims to solve is the same as the problem that the original invention 17 aims to solve.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 20 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (23rd embodiment) is as follows:
In a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 500) having a decorative lamp unit (e.g., an upper frame lamp unit 610) on an openable front door (e.g., a glass door 505),
The decorative lamp unit includes:
A lamp board (for example, the upper frame right lamp board 611) on which light-emitting elements (LEDs 641a to 641d) are mounted;
A lamp cover (for example, an upper frame lamp cover 613) through which light emitted from the light emitting element is irradiated;
A board mounting portion (for example, the upper frame right board mounting portion 651) to which the lamp board is attached;
a cover mounting portion (for example, upper frame right cover mounting portion 652) to which the lamp cover is attached,
The lamp cover has a colorless or white light-transmitting portion,
The mounting surface of the lamp substrate on which the light emitting element is mounted is formed in white,
The lamp board is provided with a positioning hole (positioning hole 685a) into which a positioning member (positioning boss 682a) is inserted when positioning the lamp board at a predetermined position on the board mounting portion, and a fixing hole (fixing hole 686a) used when fixing the lamp board to the board mounting portion, the positioning hole being provided adjacent to the positioning member (positioning hole 685a).
The opening area of the positioning hole and the opening area of the fixing hole are set to be different from each other,
the positioning member has a protrusion (protrusion 687) that protrudes toward the mounting surface when the lamp board is positioned at the predetermined position of the board mounting portion,
The protrusion is characterized in that it is formed into a convex curved shape.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 20 According to the original invention, the mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp board is made white, so that even when the light-emitting element is turned off, the mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp board can be seen through the lamp cover, and the appearance of the decorative lamp part is not impaired.
In addition, when the light-emitting element emits light, the light emitted from the light-emitting element is reflected by the mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp substrate, making the light-emitting element appear to shine brighter, and since the mounting surface of the light-emitting element is made of white color, the light-emitting element can be made to appear to emit light in the set color.
Furthermore, since the opening area of the positioning hole and the opening area of the fixing hole are made different, it is possible to prevent confusion between the positioning hole and the fixing hole when fixing the lamp board to the board mounting portion, and the assembly work can be carried out smoothly.
Furthermore, since the protrusion of the positioning member is formed in a convex curved shape, the light emitted from the light-emitting element is reflected by the protrusion in the convex curved shape, so that the light emitted from the light-emitting element can be made to look beautiful.

21. Original invention 21
(a) The problem that the original invention 21 aims to solve is the same as the problem that the original invention 17 aims to solve.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 21 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (23rd embodiment) is as follows:
In a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 500) having a decorative lamp unit (e.g., a right frame lamp unit 620) on an openable front door (e.g., a glass door 505),
The decorative lamp unit includes:
A lamp board (for example, the right frame lamp board 621) on which light emitting elements (LEDs 641e-k) are mounted;
A lamp cover (for example, a right frame lamp cover 622) through which light emitted from the light emitting element is irradiated;
A substrate mounting portion (for example, the right frame substrate mounting portion 653) to which the lamp substrate is attached;
a cover mounting portion (e.g., a right frame cover mounting portion 654) to which the lamp cover is attached;
The lamp cover has a colorless or white light-transmitting portion,
The mounting surface of the lamp substrate on which the light emitting element is mounted is formed in white color,
The lamp cover is characterized by having a lens portion (lens portion 670) configured by connecting curved surfaces having different curvatures but the same thickness.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 21 According to the original invention, the mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp board is made white, so that even when the light-emitting element is turned off, the mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp board can be seen through the lamp cover, and the appearance of the decorative lamp part is not impaired.
In addition, when the light-emitting element emits light, the light emitted from the light-emitting element is reflected by the mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp substrate, making the light-emitting element appear to shine brighter, and since the mounting surface of the light-emitting element is made of white color, the light-emitting element can be made to appear to emit light in the set color.
Furthermore, the shape of the lens portion is made by connecting curved surfaces with different curvatures but the same thickness, so that the manufacturing cost of the mold for forming the lamp cover can be reduced while the lens portion makes the light emitted from the light-emitting element look beautiful.

22. Original invention 22
(a) The problem that the original invention 22 aims to solve is the same as the problem that the original invention 17 aims to solve.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 22 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (23rd embodiment) is as follows:
In a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 500) having a decorative lamp unit (e.g., an upper frame lamp unit 610 and a right frame lamp unit 620) on an openable front door (e.g., a glass door 505),
The decorative lamp unit includes:
A lamp board (for example, the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the right frame lamp board 621) on which light-emitting elements (LEDs 641a to 641k) are mounted;
A lamp cover (for example, an upper frame lamp cover 613 and a right frame lamp cover 622) onto which light emitted from the light emitting element is irradiated;
A board mounting portion (for example, an upper frame right board mounting portion 651 and a right frame board mounting portion 653) to which the lamp board is attached;
and a cover mounting portion (e.g., an upper frame right cover mounting portion 652 and a right frame cover mounting portion 654) to which the lamp cover is attached,
The lamp cover has a colorless or white light-transmitting portion,
The mounting surface of the lamp substrate on which the light emitting element is mounted is formed in white,
The decorative lamp unit includes:
An upper lamp unit (upper frame lamp unit 610) disposed at the upper portion of the front door;
A side lamp portion (right frame lamp portion 620) disposed on the side of the front door,
The upper lamp unit and the side lamp unit each include the lamp substrate (upper frame right lamp substrate 611, right frame lamp substrate 621), thereby including a plurality of the lamp substrates;
When a specific lottery result (a big win in a big win lottery) is achieved, the light-emitting elements mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp boards are controlled to emit light in a pattern corresponding to the specific lottery result (the output values of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) are changed in a predetermined pattern within the range of "0" to "255").

(c) Effect of Original Invention 22 According to the original invention, the mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp board is made white, so that even when the light-emitting element is turned off, the mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp board can be seen through the lamp cover, and the appearance of the decorative lamp part is not impaired.
In addition, when the light-emitting element emits light, the light emitted from the light-emitting element is reflected by the mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp substrate, making the light-emitting element appear to shine brighter, and since the mounting surface of the light-emitting element is made of white color, the light-emitting element can be made to appear to emit light in the set color.
Furthermore, by illuminating the light emitting elements in a pattern corresponding to a specific lottery result, it is possible to inform the player with beautiful light that a specific lottery result has been achieved.

23. Original invention 23
(a) The problem that the original invention 23 aims to solve is the same as the problem that the original invention 17 aims to solve.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 23 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (23rd embodiment) is as follows:
In a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 500) having a decorative lamp unit (e.g., an upper frame lamp unit 610 and a right frame lamp unit 620) on an openable front door (e.g., a glass door 505),
The decorative lamp unit includes:
A lamp board (for example, the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the right frame lamp board 621) on which light-emitting elements (LEDs 641a to 641k) are mounted;
A lamp cover (for example, an upper frame lamp cover 613 and a right frame lamp cover 622) onto which light emitted from the light emitting element is irradiated;
A board mounting portion (for example, an upper frame right board mounting portion 651 and a right frame board mounting portion 653) to which the lamp board is attached;
and a cover mounting portion (e.g., an upper frame right cover mounting portion 652 and a right frame cover mounting portion 654) to which the lamp cover is attached,
The lamp cover has a colorless or white light-transmitting portion,
The mounting surface of the lamp substrate on which the light emitting element is mounted is formed in white,
The decorative lamp unit includes:
An upper lamp unit (upper frame lamp unit 610) disposed at the upper portion of the front door;
A side lamp portion (right frame lamp portion 620) disposed on the side of the front door,
The upper lamp unit and the side lamp unit each include the lamp substrate (upper frame right lamp substrate 611, right frame lamp substrate 621), thereby including a plurality of the lamp substrates;
When the opening of the front door is detected or a specific lottery result is reached (a big win in a big win lottery), the light-emitting elements mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp boards are controlled to emit at least white light.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 23 According to the original invention, the mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp board is made white, so that even when the light-emitting element is turned off, the mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp board can be seen through the lamp cover, and the appearance of the decorative lamp part is not impaired.
In addition, when the light-emitting element emits light, the light emitted from the light-emitting element is reflected by the mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp substrate, making the light-emitting element appear to shine brighter, and since the mounting surface of the light-emitting element is made of white color, the light-emitting element can be made to appear to emit light in the set color.
Furthermore, by making the light-emitting element emit white light when the opening of the front door is detected or a specific lottery result is reached, it is possible to inform the hall staff and players that the front door has been opened or a specific lottery result has been reached with a beautiful light.

24. Original invention 24
(a) The problem that the original invention 24 aims to solve is the same as the problem that the original invention 17 aims to solve.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 24 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (23rd embodiment) is as follows:
In a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 500) having a decorative lamp unit (e.g., an upper frame lamp unit 610 and a right frame lamp unit 620) on an openable front door (e.g., a glass door 505),
The decorative lamp unit includes:
A lamp board (for example, the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the right frame lamp board 621) on which light-emitting elements (LEDs 641a to 641k) are mounted;
A lamp cover (for example, an upper frame lamp cover 613 and a right frame lamp cover 622) onto which light emitted from the light emitting element is irradiated;
A board mounting portion (for example, an upper frame right board mounting portion 651 and a right frame board mounting portion 653) to which the lamp board is attached;
and a cover mounting portion (e.g., an upper frame right cover mounting portion 652 and a right frame cover mounting portion 654) to which the lamp cover is attached,
The lamp cover has a colorless or white light-transmitting portion,
The mounting surface of the lamp substrate on which the light emitting element is mounted is formed in white,
The decorative lamp unit includes:
An upper lamp unit (upper frame lamp unit 610) disposed at the upper portion of the front door;
A side lamp portion (right frame lamp portion 620) disposed on the side of the front door,
The upper lamp unit and the side lamp unit each include the lamp substrate (upper frame right lamp substrate 611, right frame lamp substrate 621), thereby including a plurality of the lamp substrates;
When the setting change state is reached in which the degree of advantage given to the player can be changed, or when the setting confirmation state is reached in which the degree of advantage given to the player cannot be changed but can be confirmed, the light-emitting elements mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp boards are controlled to emit at least white light.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 24 According to the original invention, the mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp board is made white, so that even when the light-emitting element is turned off, the mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp board can be seen through the lamp cover, and the appearance of the decorative lamp part is not impaired.
In addition, when the light-emitting element emits light, the light emitted from the light-emitting element is reflected by the mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp substrate, making the light-emitting element appear to shine brighter, and since the mounting surface of the light-emitting element is made of white color, the light-emitting element can be made to appear to emit light in the set color.
Furthermore, by making the light-emitting element emit white light when the device is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the clear light can inform the waiting room staff that the device is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.

25. Original invention 25
(a) The problem that the original invention 25 aims to solve is the same as the problem that the original invention 17 aims to solve.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 25 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (23rd embodiment) is as follows:
In a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 500) having a decorative lamp unit (e.g., an upper frame lamp unit 610 and a right frame lamp unit 620) on an openable front door (e.g., a glass door 505),
The decorative lamp unit includes:
A lamp board (for example, the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the right frame lamp board 621) on which light-emitting elements (LEDs 641a to 641k) are mounted;
A lamp cover (for example, an upper frame lamp cover 613 and a right frame lamp cover 622) onto which light emitted from the light emitting element is irradiated;
A board mounting portion (for example, an upper frame right board mounting portion 651 and a right frame board mounting portion 653) to which the lamp board is attached;
and a cover mounting portion (e.g., an upper frame right cover mounting portion 652 and a right frame cover mounting portion 654) to which the lamp cover is attached,
The lamp cover has a colorless or white light-transmitting portion,
The mounting surface of the lamp substrate on which the light emitting element is mounted is formed in white,
The decorative lamp unit includes:
An upper lamp unit (upper frame lamp unit 610) disposed at the upper portion of the front door;
A side lamp portion (right frame lamp portion 620) disposed on the side of the front door,
The upper lamp unit and the side lamp unit each include the lamp substrate (upper frame right lamp substrate 611, right frame lamp substrate 621), thereby including a plurality of the lamp substrates;
When power is restored from a power outage, the light-emitting elements mounted on one or more of the lamp boards are controlled to emit at least white light.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 25 According to the original invention, the mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp board is made white, so that even when the light-emitting element is turned off, the mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp board can be seen through the lamp cover, and the appearance of the decorative lamp part is not impaired.
In addition, when the light-emitting element emits light, the light emitted from the light-emitting element is reflected by the mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp substrate, making the light-emitting element appear to shine brighter, and since the mounting surface of the light-emitting element is made of white color, the light-emitting element can be made to appear to emit light in the set color.
Furthermore, when the power is restored after being turned off, the light emitting element is made to emit white light, so that a waiter in the waiting room can be informed by a clear light that the power is being restored after being turned off.

26. Original invention 26
(a) The problem that the original invention 26 aims to solve is the same as the problem that the original invention 17 aims to solve.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 26 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (23rd embodiment) is as follows:
In a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 500) having a decorative lamp unit (e.g., an upper frame lamp unit 610 and a right frame lamp unit 620) on an openable front door (e.g., a glass door 505),
The decorative lamp unit includes:
A lamp board (for example, the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the right frame lamp board 621) on which light-emitting elements (LEDs 641a to 641k) are mounted;
A lamp cover (for example, an upper frame lamp cover 613 and a right frame lamp cover 622) onto which light emitted from the light emitting element is irradiated;
A board mounting portion (for example, an upper frame right board mounting portion 651 and a right frame board mounting portion 653) to which the lamp board is attached;
and a cover mounting portion (e.g., an upper frame right cover mounting portion 652 and a right frame cover mounting portion 654) to which the lamp cover is attached,
The lamp cover has a colorless or white light-transmitting portion,
The mounting surface of the lamp substrate on which the light emitting element is mounted is formed in white,
The decorative lamp unit includes:
An upper lamp unit (upper frame lamp unit 610) disposed at the upper portion of the front door;
A side lamp portion (right frame lamp portion 620) disposed on the side of the front door,
The upper lamp unit and the side lamp unit each include the lamp substrate (upper frame right lamp substrate 611, right frame lamp substrate 621), thereby including a plurality of the lamp substrates;
During a predetermined game in which the lottery means does not win (during a game in which the lottery means does not win), the light-emitting element (LED 641 e-k) mounted on at least one of the lamp boards (right frame lamp board 621) among the plurality of lamp boards is controlled to emit light;
The average time for which the light-emitting element is illuminated during the specified game is set to be longer than the average time for which other lamps (red LEDs mounted on a substrate provided in a decoration on the game board 504) are lit during the specified game.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 26 According to the original invention, the mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp board is made white, so that even when the light-emitting element is turned off, the mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp board can be seen through the lamp cover, and the appearance of the decorative lamp part is not impaired.
In addition, when the light-emitting element emits light, the light emitted from the light-emitting element is reflected by the mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp substrate, making the light-emitting element appear to shine brighter, and since the mounting surface of the light-emitting element is made of white color, the light-emitting element can be made to appear to emit light in the set color.
Furthermore, even in a predetermined game in which the player does not win in the lottery means, a beautiful presentation using the light-emitting elements can be shown to the player.

27. Original invention 27
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 27 The original invention relates to a gaming machine equipped with a title display unit that emits light in the shape of letters or the like.
Among conventional gaming machines, there is known one which has a title display section (lighting unit) on the upper front part, and by illuminating an LED provided inside this title display section, characters and the like attached to the title display section are displayed so as to be visible to the player (for example, JP 2007-312984 A).
In the conventional gaming machine described above, the inner surface of the lens portion of the title display unit is stamped, and the light emitted by the LED is diffused by the stamping, so that the entire surface of the lens portion emits light.
Here, "stamper processing" refers to forming minute dots consisting of recesses of a predetermined shape at a predetermined density on the inner surface of the lens portion. These recesses are rectangular or round. A rectangular recess has a flat inclined portion, and a round recess has a curved inclined portion. The recesses on the inner surface of the lens portion formed by stamper processing refract or reflect the light emitted from the LED, making the entire surface of the lens portion appear to be illuminated.
However, even if the light emitted by the LED is diffused by stamper processing so that the entire surface of the lens section emits light, if the player who looks at the title display section feels that it is too dazzling, it will be difficult for the player to recognize the letters and other marks on the title display section.
The problem that the original invention was intended to solve was to prevent a player from feeling dazzled when looking at the title display section and to make it easier for the player to recognize the characters and the like attached to the title display section.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 27 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (24th embodiment (A)) is as follows:
A predetermined side lamp unit (right frame lamp unit 620) provided on at least one side of the front of the gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 500);
A predetermined title display unit (615) that is provided at the upper part of the front surface of the gaming machine and emits light in the form of letters or the like;
The predetermined side lamp portion and the predetermined title display portion are each
A light emitting element (such as LED 641a),
A light diffusion unit (670a, 615e) that diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting element,
The light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined title display portion is set to be higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined side lamp portion.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 27 According to the original invention, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the designated title display section is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the designated side lamp section, so that the designated title display section is less dazzling to the player than the designated side lamp section, making it easier for the player to recognize letters and the like affixed to the designated title display section.

28. Original invention 28
(a) The problem that the original invention 28 aims to solve is the same as the problem that the original invention 27 aims to solve.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 28 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (24th embodiment (A)) is
A predetermined side lamp unit (right frame lamp unit 620) provided on at least one side of the front of the gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 500);
A predetermined title display unit (615) that is provided at the upper part of the front surface of the gaming machine and emits light in the form of letters or the like;
The predetermined side lamp portion and the predetermined title display portion are each
A light emitting element (such as LED 641a),
A lens portion (670, 615d) provided to cover the light emitting element;
A light diffusion unit (670a, 615e) that diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting element,
a light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined title display portion is set to be higher than a light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined side lamp portion,
The light diffusion section in the specified title display section is characterized by being composed of an embossed portion (615f) formed on the surface of the lens portion in the specified title display section, and a light diffusion sheet (615g) arranged between the lens portion and the light-emitting element in the specified title display section.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 28 According to the original invention, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the designated title display section is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the designated side lamp section, so that the designated title display section is less dazzling to the player than the designated side lamp section, making it easier for the player to recognize letters and the like affixed to the designated title display section.
Furthermore, by constructing the light diffusion section in the specified title display section from an embossed section formed on the surface of the lens section in the specified title display section and a light diffusion sheet arranged between the lens section and the light-emitting element in the specified title display section, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section can be increased, thereby preventing the player from feeling dazzled and making it easier for the player to recognize letters and the like attached to the specified title display section.

29. Original invention 29
(a) The problem that the original invention 29 aims to solve is the same as the problem that the original invention 27 aims to solve.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 29 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (24th embodiment (A)) is as follows:
A predetermined side lamp unit (right frame lamp unit 620) provided on at least one side of the front of the gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 500);
A predetermined title display unit (615) that is provided at the upper part of the front surface of the gaming machine and emits light in the form of letters or the like;
The predetermined side lamp portion and the predetermined title display portion are each
A lamp board (right frame lamp board 621, title display board 615a) on which light emitting elements (LEDs 641a, etc.) are mounted;
A lens portion (670, 615d) provided to cover a mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate;
A light diffusion unit (670a, 615e) that diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting element,
a light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined title display portion is set to be higher than a light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined side lamp portion,
The maximum distance from the lamp substrate to the lens unit in the direction perpendicular to the mounting surface of the light-emitting element in the predetermined title display unit is defined as a distance “M1”,
The maximum distance from the lamp substrate to the lens portion in the direction perpendicular to the mounting surface of the light-emitting element in the predetermined side lamp portion is defined as distance "M2";
The distance "M1" is characterized by being set shorter than the distance "M2".

(c) Effect of Original Invention 29 According to the original invention, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the designated title display section is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the designated side lamp section, so that the designated title display section is less dazzling to the player than the designated side lamp section, making it easier for the player to recognize letters and the like affixed to the designated title display section.
Furthermore, by setting the distance from the lamp substrate to the lens portion in a specified side lamp portion longer than the distance from the lamp substrate to the lens portion in a specified title display portion, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dazzled even if the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in a specified side lamp portion is lower than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in a specified title display portion.

30. Original invention 30
(a) The problem that the original invention 30 aims to solve is the same as the problem that the original invention 27 aims to solve.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 30 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (24th embodiment (A)) is as follows:
A predetermined side lamp unit (right frame lamp unit 620) provided on at least one side of the front of the gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 500);
A predetermined title display unit (615) that is provided at the upper part of the front surface of the gaming machine and emits light in the form of letters or the like;
The predetermined side lamp portion and the predetermined title display portion are each
A light emitting element (such as LED 641a),
A light diffusion unit (670a, 615e) that diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting element,
a light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined title display portion is set to be higher than a light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined side lamp portion,
a brightness adjustment means (546) for adjusting the brightness of the light-emitting elements of the predetermined side lamp portion and the predetermined title display portion;
The brightness adjusting means is configured to change the brightness of the light-emitting element of the predetermined side lamp portion and the brightness of the light-emitting element of the predetermined title display portion at the same rate of change.

(c) Effect of the original invention 30 According to the original invention, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the designated title display section is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the designated side lamp section, so that the designated title display section is less dazzling to the player than the designated side lamp section, making it easier for the player to recognize letters and the like affixed to the designated title display section.
Furthermore, when the brightness of the light-emitting element of a specified side lamp section is lowered (darkened), the brightness of the light-emitting element of a specified title display section can also be lowered (darkened) at the same rate of change, so that the player does not feel dazzled by the specified title display section.

31. Original invention 31
(a) The problem that the original invention 31 aims to solve is the same as the problem that the original invention 27 aims to solve.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 31 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (24th embodiment (A)) is as follows:
A predetermined side lamp unit (right frame lamp unit 620) provided on at least one side of the front of the gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 500);
A predetermined title display unit (615) that is provided at the upper part of the front surface of the gaming machine and emits light in the form of letters or the like;
The predetermined side lamp portion and the predetermined title display portion are each
A light emitting element (such as LED 641a),
A light diffusion unit (670a, 615e) that diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting element,
a light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined title display portion is set to be higher than a light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined side lamp portion,
a brightness adjustment means (546) for adjusting the brightness of the light-emitting elements of the predetermined side lamp portion and the predetermined title display portion;
The brightness adjustment means is configured to, when changing the brightness of the light-emitting elements of the specified side lamp portion and the specified title display portion, make the rate of change in brightness of the light-emitting elements of the specified title display portion greater than the rate of change in brightness of the light-emitting elements of the specified side lamp portion.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 31 According to the original invention, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the designated title display section is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the designated side lamp section, so that the designated title display section is less dazzling to the player than the designated side lamp section, making it easier for the player to recognize letters and the like affixed to the designated title display section.
Furthermore, by lowering (darkening) the brightness of the light-emitting element of a specified side lamp section, the brightness of the light-emitting element of a specified title display section can be lowered (darkened) even more significantly, thereby preventing the player from feeling dazzled by the specified title display section.

32. Original invention 32
(a) The problem that the original invention 32 aims to solve is the same as the problem that the original invention 27 aims to solve.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 32 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (24th embodiment (A)) is as follows:
A predetermined side lamp unit (right frame lamp unit 620) provided on at least one side of the front of the gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 500);
A predetermined title display unit (615) that is provided at the upper part of the front surface of the gaming machine and emits light in the form of letters or the like;
The predetermined side lamp portion and the predetermined title display portion are each
A light emitting element (such as LED 641a),
A light diffusion unit (670a, 615e) that diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting element,
a light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined title display portion is set to be higher than a light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined side lamp portion,
a light emission control means (547) for controlling the light emission of the light emitting elements in the predetermined side lamp portion and the predetermined title display portion;
The light emission control means is characterized in that, when executing a predetermined performance in which the light-emitting elements of the predetermined side lamp section and the predetermined title display section are illuminated, the light emission control means controls the time for which the light-emitting elements of the predetermined title display section are illuminated so as to be shorter than the time for which the light-emitting elements of the predetermined side lamp section are illuminated.
In addition, the initial invention (24th embodiment (A)) is as follows:
A predetermined side lamp unit (right frame lamp unit 620) provided on at least one side of the front of the gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 500);
A predetermined title display unit (615) that is provided at the upper part of the front surface of the gaming machine and emits light in the form of letters or the like;
The predetermined side lamp portion and the predetermined title display portion are each
A light emitting element (such as LED 641a),
A light diffusion unit (670a, 615e) that diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting element,
a light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined title display portion is set to be higher than a light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined side lamp portion,
a light emission control means (547) for controlling the light emission of the light emitting elements in the predetermined side lamp portion and the predetermined title display portion;
The light emission control means is characterized in that, when executing a predetermined performance in which the light-emitting elements of the predetermined side lamp section and the predetermined title display section are caused to blink, the light emission control means controls the time for which the light-emitting elements of the predetermined title display section are blinked to be shorter than the time for which the light-emitting elements of the predetermined side lamp section are blinked.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 32 According to the original invention, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the designated title display section is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the designated side lamp section, so that the designated title display section is less dazzling to the player than the designated side lamp section, making it easier for the player to recognize letters and the like affixed to the designated title display section.
Furthermore, when a specified performance is performed, the time for which the light-emitting element of the specified title display section is illuminated or blinks is shorter than the time for which the light-emitting element of the specified side lamp section is illuminated or blinks, so that the player does not feel dazzled by the specified title display section.

33. Original invention 33
(a) The problem that the original invention 33 aims to solve is the same as the problem that the original invention 27 aims to solve.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 33 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (24th embodiment (A)) is as follows:
A predetermined side lamp unit (right frame lamp unit 620) provided on at least one side of the front of the gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 500);
A predetermined title display unit (615) that is provided at the upper part of the front surface of the gaming machine and emits light in the form of letters or the like;
The predetermined side lamp portion and the predetermined title display portion are each
A light emitting element (such as LED 641a),
A light diffusion unit (670a, 615e) that diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting element,
a light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined title display portion is set to be higher than a light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined side lamp portion,
a light emission control means (547) for controlling the light emission of the light emitting elements in the predetermined side lamp portion and the predetermined title display portion;
The light emission control means is characterized in that, in a game standby state, the time for which the light-emitting element of the specified title display section is illuminated is controlled to be longer than the time for which the light-emitting element of the specified side lamp section is illuminated.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 33 According to the original invention, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the designated title display section is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the designated side lamp section, so that the designated title display section is less dazzling to the player than the designated side lamp section, making it easier for the player to recognize letters and the like affixed to the designated title display section.
In addition, in the game standby state, the light-emitting time of the light-emitting element of a designated title display section can be made longer than the light-emitting time of the light-emitting element of a designated side lamp section, thereby making the gaming machine more noticeable and guiding the player to play on the gaming machine.

34. Original invention 34
(a) The problem that the original invention 34 aims to solve is the same as the problem that the original invention 27 aims to solve.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 34 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (24th embodiment (A)) is as follows:
A predetermined side lamp unit (right frame lamp unit 620) provided on at least one side of the front of the gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 500);
A predetermined title display unit (615) that is provided at the upper part of the front surface of the gaming machine and emits light in the form of letters or the like;
The predetermined side lamp portion and the predetermined title display portion are each
A light emitting element (such as LED 641a),
A light diffusion unit (670a, 615e) that diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting element,
a light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined title display portion is set to be higher than a light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined side lamp portion,
a light emission control means (547) for controlling the light emission of the light emitting elements in the predetermined side lamp portion and the predetermined title display portion;
The light emission control means controls the light emitting element of the predetermined title display portion to be turned off when a predetermined error occurs.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 34 According to the original invention, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the designated title display section is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the designated side lamp section. This makes it possible to make the designated title display section less dazzling to the player than the designated side lamp section, and makes it easier for the player to recognize letters and the like affixed to the designated title display section.
In addition, when a specified error occurs, the light-emitting element of a specified title display section is turned off, making it easier for players and hall staff to notice that a specified error has occurred.

35. Original invention 35
(a) The problem that the original invention 35 aims to solve is the same as the problem that the original invention 27 aims to solve.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 35 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (24th embodiment (A)) is as follows:
A predetermined side lamp unit (right frame lamp unit 620) provided on at least one side of the front of the gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 500);
An upper lamp unit (610) provided at the upper part of the front surface of the gaming machine;
The upper lamp portion is
A predetermined title display section (615) that emits light in the shape of letters or the like;
A peripheral decorative portion (616) other than the title display portion;
The predetermined side lamp portion and the predetermined title display portion are each
A light emitting element (such as LED 641a),
A light diffusion unit (670a, 615e) that diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting element,
a light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined title display portion is set to be higher than a light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined side lamp portion,
A light emission control means (547) is provided for controlling the light emission of the light emitting elements in the predetermined side lamp portion, the predetermined title display portion and the peripheral decorative portion,
The light-emitting control means is characterized in that it controls the time during which the light-emitting elements of the specified title display unit and the light-emitting elements of the surrounding decorative unit emit light in different patterns so that it is longer than the time during which the light-emitting elements of the specified title display unit and the light-emitting elements of the surrounding decorative unit emit light in the same pattern.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 35 According to the original invention, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the designated title display section is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the designated side lamp section, so that the designated title display section is less dazzling to the player than the designated side lamp section, making it easier for the player to recognize letters and the like affixed to the designated title display section.
In addition, since the time during which the light-emitting elements of a specified title display part and the light-emitting elements of the surrounding decorative part emit light in different patterns is longer than the time during which the light-emitting elements of a specified title display part and the light-emitting elements of the surrounding decorative part emit light in the same pattern, it is possible to diversify the patterns of presentation using the specified title display part and the surrounding decorative part.

36. Original invention 36
(a) The problem that the original invention 36 aims to solve is the same as the problem that the original invention 27 aims to solve.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 36 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (24th embodiment (A)) is as follows:
A predetermined side lamp unit (right frame lamp unit 620) provided on at least one side of the front of the gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 500);
An upper lamp unit (610) provided at the upper part of the front surface of the gaming machine;
The upper lamp portion is
A predetermined title display section (615) that emits light in the shape of letters or the like;
A peripheral decorative portion (616) other than the title display portion;
The predetermined side lamp portion and the predetermined title display portion are each
A light emitting element (such as LED 641a),
A light diffusion unit (670a, 615e) that diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting element,
a light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined title display portion is set to be higher than a light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined side lamp portion,
A light emission control means (547) is provided for controlling the light emission of the light emitting elements in the predetermined side lamp portion, the predetermined title display portion and the peripheral decorative portion,
The light emission control means is characterized in that, when a specific lottery result is achieved which transitions the player to a gaming state advantageous to the player, the light emitting element of the specified title display section is controlled to emit light in a pattern which emits light only when the specific lottery result is achieved.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 36 According to the original invention, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the designated title display section is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the designated side lamp section, so that the designated title display section is less dazzling to the player than the designated side lamp section, making it easier for the player to recognize letters and the like affixed to the designated title display section.
In addition, when a specific lottery result is obtained, the light-emitting element of a predetermined title display section emits light in a pattern that is emitted only when a specific lottery result is obtained, making it easier for the player to notice that a specific lottery result has been obtained.

37. Original invention 37
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 37 The original invention relates to a gaming machine having a plurality of light-emitting elements controlled by a main control means.
Among conventional gaming machines, there are known ones equipped with a plurality of light-emitting elements (LEDs) controlled by a main control means (main board) (for example, JP 2017-047069 A).
Specifically, a main control display device having 26 LEDs, LED "A" to LED "Z", is connected to the main control means. Furthermore, of the 26 LEDs, eight LEDs, LED "G" to LED "N", constitute the first special symbol display section. Furthermore, the main control means performs the variable display and stationary display of the first special symbol by turning on or off the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display section. In particular, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, two LEDs, LED "M" and LED "N", among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display section, are flashed every 100 msec. Then, when the variable time of the first special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stationary on the first special symbol display section.
However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, while the first special symbol is being displayed in a varying manner, only two LEDs, LED "M" and LED "N", flash, making it impossible to check whether the other LEDs are malfunctioning or not.
The problem that the original invention aims to solve is to make it possible to check whether or not there is a malfunction in the light-emitting elements controlled by the main control means between the time when the conditions for starting a game are met and the time when the game result can be displayed.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 37 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (25th embodiment) is as follows:
A main control means (530) for controlling the progress of a game;
a light-emitting element A (LED 531 a), a light-emitting element B (LED 531 b), and a light-emitting element C (LED 531 c) controlled by the main control means;
The main control means is characterized in that, when the conditions for starting a game are met (the game ball enters the start hole 532 and the start hole switch 533 is turned on) in a situation where the light-emitting element A is turned on, the light-emitting element B is turned off, and the light-emitting element C is also turned off, the main control means controls each of the light-emitting elements A, B, and C to light and turn off at least once, and then makes it possible to display the game result (to stop displaying the special pattern).

(c) Effect of Original Invention 37 According to the original invention, the light-emitting elements A, B, and C light-emitting elements turn on and off at least once between the time when the conditions for starting a game are met and the time when the game result can be displayed, so that it is possible to check whether these light-emitting elements are lit or not and to check whether or not there is a malfunction with these light-emitting elements.

38. Original invention 38
(a) The problem that the original invention 38 aims to solve is the same as the problem that the original invention 37 aims to solve.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 38 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (25th embodiment) is as follows:
A main control means (530) for controlling the progress of a game;
a light-emitting element A (LED 531 a), a light-emitting element B (LED 531 b), and a light-emitting element C (LED 531 c) controlled by the main control means;
The main control means
A lottery means (555) for performing a lottery based on a random number value obtained upon winning at the starting hole (532);
A holding means (557) for holding the random number acquired upon winning the starting slot until the display of the pattern corresponding to the lottery result based on the random number starts.
The main control means is characterized in that, in a situation where light-emitting element A is turned on, light-emitting element B is turned off, and light-emitting element C is also turned off, when the probability of winning in the lottery means is a predetermined low probability state or a high probability state higher than the predetermined probability, and the number of random number values held in the holding means is "0", when a non-winning event occurs in the lottery means and the varying display of patterns is started, the main control means controls each of light-emitting element A, light-emitting element B, and light-emitting element C to light on and off at least once and then end the varying display of patterns.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 38 According to the original invention, the light-emitting elements A, B, and C are turned on and off at least once between the start of the display of the changing patterns and the end of the display of the changing patterns, making it possible to check whether these light-emitting elements are turned on and to check whether there is a malfunction with these light-emitting elements.

39. Original invention 39
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 39 The original invention relates to an amusement machine that has a board case that houses a control board, and in which a sealing sticker is affixed across a first cover and a second cover that constitute the board case.
In a conventional gaming machine, it is known to house a control board in a board case.
Here, the board case includes a first cover and a second cover, and when the first cover and the second cover are combined, the board case is formed into a box shape capable of housing a control board inside. After housing the control board inside the board case, a seal is attached across the first cover and the second cover to seal the board case (for example, JP 2010-167124 A).
However, if the genuine seal is cut with a blade to open the circuit board case, the genuine ROM mounted on the control board is replaced with an illegal ROM, and then the control board is returned to the inside of the circuit board case and a fake seal is affixed over the genuine seal that was cut, there is a risk that the fraudulent act will go unnoticed.
The problem that the original invention is intended to solve is to prevent fraudulent acts from being discovered by pasting a counterfeit seal over a damaged genuine seal.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 39 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (28th embodiment (A)) is
A control board (main control board 530);
A board case (550) for housing the control board;
The substrate case is
A first cover (front cover 560) for covering a mounting surface side of the control board on which electronic components (530b) are mounted;
a second cover (rear cover 570) for covering the control board on the side opposite to the side on which electronic components are mounted,
Both the first cover and the second cover are transparent.
The first cover is provided with a first seal attachment portion (567),
The second cover is provided with a second seal attachment portion (574),
When the first cover and the second cover are combined, the first seal affixing portion and the second seal affixing portion are formed so as to be continuous with each other;
the first seal affixing portion and the second seal affixing portion are provided on one side surface of the board case,
A seal (581) is attached so as to span the first seal attachment portion and the second seal attachment portion,
The seal is configured to leave a trace when peeled off,
The joint between the first and second sticker affixing portions is formed so as to be visible from the surface of the second cover facing the control board (in the direction of line of sight D5 in Figure 163).

(c) Effect of Original Invention 39 According to the original invention, the seam between the first seal affixing portion and the second seal affixing portion is visible from the surface of the second cover facing the control board. Therefore, even if a fake seal is affixed over a damaged, genuine seal, the condition of the damaged, genuine seal can be visually confirmed, making it impossible to avoid detection of fraudulent activity.

40. Original invention 40
(a) The problem that the original invention 40 aims to solve is the same as the problem that the original invention 39 aims to solve.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 40 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (28th embodiment (A)) is
A control board (main control board 530);
A board case (550) for housing the control board;
The substrate case is
A first cover (front cover 560) for covering a mounting surface side of the control board on which electronic components (530b) are mounted;
a second cover (rear cover 570) for covering the control board on the side opposite to the side on which electronic components are mounted,
Both the first cover and the second cover are transparent.
The first cover is provided with a first seal attachment portion (567),
The second cover is provided with a second seal attachment portion (574),
When the first cover and the second cover are combined, the first seal affixing portion and the second seal affixing portion are formed so as to be continuous with each other;
the first seal affixing portion and the second seal affixing portion are provided on one side surface of the board case,
The first seal affixing portion and the second seal affixing portion have a plurality of surfaces facing in different directions,
A seal (581) is attached so as to span the first seal attachment portion and the second seal attachment portion,
The seal is configured to leave a trace when peeled off,
The joint between the first seal affixing portion and the second seal affixing portion is formed so as to be visible from the side opposite the joint between the first seal affixing portion and the second seal affixing portion in the substrate case (in the direction of line of sight D4 in Figure 163).

(c) Effect of the original invention 40 According to the original invention, the seam between the first seal affixing portion and the second seal affixing portion on the board case can be seen from the side opposite to the seam between the first seal affixing portion and the second seal affixing portion. Therefore, even if a counterfeit seal is affixed on top of a damaged, genuine seal, the condition of the damaged, genuine seal can be visually confirmed, making it impossible to avoid detection of fraudulent activity.

41. Original invention 41
(a) The problem that the original invention 41 aims to solve is the same as the problem that the original invention 39 aims to solve.

(b) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 41 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (28th embodiment (C)) is as follows:
A control board (main control board 530);
A board case (550B) for accommodating the control board;
The substrate case is
A first cover (front cover 560) for covering a mounting surface side of the control board on which electronic components (530b) are mounted;
a second cover (rear cover 570) for covering the control board on the side opposite to the side on which electronic components are mounted,
Both the first cover and the second cover are transparent.
A seal attachment section (case side seal attachment section 569) to which a seal (581) is attached is provided on approximately the same plane as the surface of the first cover facing the control board,
When the substrate case is opened, a trace of the opening is left on the sealing seal.
The seal attachment portion is formed so as to be visible from a surface of the second cover facing the control board.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 41 According to the original invention, the seal attachment portion, which is provided on approximately the same plane as the surface of the first cover facing the control board, is visible from the surface of the second cover facing the control board. Therefore, even if a counterfeit seal is affixed over a damaged, genuine seal, the condition of the damaged, genuine seal can be visually confirmed, making it impossible to avoid detection of fraudulent activity.

42. Original invention 42
(a) The problem that the original invention 42 aims to solve is the same as the problem that the original invention 39 aims to solve.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 42 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (28th embodiment (C)) is as follows:
A control board (main control board 530);
A board case (550B) for accommodating the control board;
The substrate case is
A first cover (front cover 560) for covering a mounting surface side of the control board on which electronic components (530b) are mounted;
a second cover (rear cover 570) for covering the control board on the side opposite to the side on which electronic components are mounted,
Both the first cover and the second cover are transparent.
A seal attachment section (case side seal attachment section 569) to which a seal (581) is attached is provided on approximately the same plane as the surface of the first cover facing the control board,
When the substrate case is opened, a trace of the opening is left on the sealing seal.
The seal attachment portion is formed so as to be visible from any one of the side surfaces of the board case.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 42 According to the original invention, the seal attachment portion, which is provided on approximately the same plane as the surface of the first cover facing the control board, can be seen from either side of the board case. Therefore, even if a counterfeit seal is affixed over a damaged, genuine seal, the condition of the damaged, genuine seal can be visually confirmed, making it impossible to avoid detection of fraudulent activity.

43. Original invention 43
(a) The problem that the original invention 43 aims to solve is the same as the problem that the original invention 39 aims to solve.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 43 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (28th embodiment (A)) is
A control board (main control board 530);
A board case (550) for accommodating the control board;
The substrate case is
A first cover (front cover 560) for covering a mounting surface side of the control board on which electronic components (530b) are mounted;
a second cover (rear cover 570) for covering the control board on the side opposite to the side on which electronic components are mounted,
Both the first cover and the second cover are transparent.
The first cover is provided with a first seal attachment portion (567),
The second cover is provided with a second seal attachment portion (574),
When the first cover and the second cover are combined, the first seal affixing portion and the second seal affixing portion are formed so as to be continuous with each other;
the first seal affixing portion and the second seal affixing portion are provided on one side surface of the board case,
A seal (581) is attached so as to span the first seal affixing portion and the second seal affixing portion,
The seal is configured to leave a trace when peeled off,
a joint between the first seal affixing portion and the second seal affixing portion is formed so as to be visible from a side surface of the board case opposite to the joint between the first seal affixing portion and the second seal affixing portion,
The height of the legs (530d) of the electronic components protruding from the surface of the control board opposite the mounting surface of the electronic components on the control board is set lower than the height of the seam between the first seal affixing portion and the second seal affixing portion, based on the mounting surface of the electronic components on the control board.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 43 According to the original invention, the seam between the first seal affixing portion and the second seal affixing portion on the board case can be seen from the side opposite to the seam between the first seal affixing portion and the second seal affixing portion. Therefore, even if a counterfeit seal is affixed on top of a damaged, genuine seal, the condition of the damaged, genuine seal can be visually confirmed, making it impossible to avoid detection of fraudulent activity.
Furthermore, the height of the legs of the electronic components protruding from the side of the control board opposite the mounting surface of the electronic components is set lower than the height of the joint between the first seal affixing portion and the second seal affixing portion. This ensures that the legs of the electronic components do not obstruct the view when looking at the joint between the first seal affixing portion and the second seal affixing portion from the side of the board case opposite the first seal affixing portion and the second seal affixing portion.

44. Original invention 44
(a) The problem that the original invention 44 aims to solve is the same as the problem that the original invention 39 aims to solve.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 44 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (28th embodiment (A)) is
A control board (main control board 530);
A board case (550) for housing the control board;
The substrate case is
A first cover (front cover 560) for covering a mounting surface side of the control board on which electronic components (530b) are mounted;
a second cover (rear cover 570) for covering the control board on the side opposite to the side on which electronic components are mounted,
Both the first cover and the second cover are transparent.
The first cover is provided with a first seal attachment portion (567),
The second cover is provided with a second seal attachment portion (574),
When the first cover and the second cover are combined, the first seal affixing portion and the second seal affixing portion are formed so as to be continuous with each other;
the first seal affixing portion and the second seal affixing portion are provided on one side surface of the board case,
A seal (581) is attached so as to span the first seal affixing portion and the second seal affixing portion,
The seal is configured to leave a trace when peeled off,
a joint between the first seal affixing portion and the second seal affixing portion is formed so as to be visible from a side surface of the board case opposite to the joint between the first seal affixing portion and the second seal affixing portion,
The height of the mold parting line (576c) formed on the surface of the second cover when molding the second cover is set higher than the height of the seam between the first seal affixing portion and the second seal affixing portion, based on the mounting surface of the electronic components on the control board.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 44 According to the original invention, the seam between the first seal affixing portion and the second seal affixing portion on the board case can be seen from the side opposite to the seam between the first seal affixing portion and the second seal affixing portion. Therefore, even if a counterfeit seal is affixed on top of a damaged, genuine seal, the condition of the damaged, genuine seal can be visually confirmed, making it impossible to avoid detection of fraudulent activity.
Furthermore, the height of the parting line formed on the surface of the second cover is set higher than the height of the seam between the first seal affixing portion and the second seal affixing portion, so that when the seam between the first seal affixing portion and the second seal affixing portion is viewed from the side of the substrate case opposite the first seal affixing portion and the second seal affixing portion, the parting line and the seam between the first seal affixing portion and the second seal affixing portion do not overlap.

45. Original invention 45
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 45 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that includes a board case that houses a control board, and has air holes on the side of the board case.
In a conventional gaming machine, it is known to house a control board in a board case.
It is also known to provide a heat dissipation port on the side surface of the substrate case for dissipating heat inside the substrate case to the outside (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9-271569).
The control board housed in the board case is provided with a connector for connecting to another control board or electronic device via a harness, and there is a risk that the harness or connector may become heated and damaged by the current flowing through the harness or connector.
The problem that the original invention is intended to solve is to prevent damage caused by heat generation to a connector provided on a control board and to a harness connected to this connector.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 45 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (29th embodiment) is as follows:
A control board (sub-control board 540),
A board case (700) for accommodating the control board;
The control board is provided with a first connector (board-side connector 540b),
an opening (716c) for exposing the first connector to the outside of the board case is provided at a position corresponding to the first connector in the board case;
An air hole (716d) is provided in the side wall (side surface portion 716b) around the opening of the board case,
A second connector (harness side connector 730b) provided at the tip of the harness (730) is connected to the first connector,
The opening range of the air hole is formed so as to extend from a position corresponding to any height between the upper end and the lower end of the first connector to a position corresponding to any height between the upper end and the lower end of the second connector, based on the mounting surface of the electronic components on the control board.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 45 According to the original invention, an air hole is provided in the side wall surrounding the opening that exposes the first connector to the outside of the board case, and the opening range of this air hole is formed to extend from a position corresponding to any height between the upper end and the lower end of the first connector to a position corresponding to any height between the upper end and the lower end of the second connector. Therefore, the first connector and the second connector can be cooled by the air discharged from the air hole, and thus damage to the first connector and the second connector due to heat generation can be prevented.

46. Original invention 46
(a) The problem that the original invention 46 aims to solve is the same as the problem that the original invention 45 aims to solve.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 46 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (29th embodiment) is as follows:
A control board (sub-control board 540),
A board case (700) for accommodating the control board;
The control board is provided with a first connector (board-side connector 540b),
an opening (716c) for exposing the first connector to the outside of the board case is provided at a position corresponding to the first connector in the board case;
An air hole (716d) is provided in the side wall (side surface portion 716b) around the opening of the board case,
a second connector (harness side connector 730b) connected to the first connector;
a lead wire (730a) extending from the second connector opposite the first connector;
The opening range of the air hole is formed so as to extend from a position corresponding to any height between the upper end and the lower end of the first connector, based on the mounting surface of the electronic components on the control board, to a position corresponding to any height halfway along the lead wire.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 46 According to the original invention, an air hole is provided in the side wall surrounding the opening that exposes the first connector to the outside of the board case, and the opening range of this air hole is formed to extend from a position corresponding to any height between the top and bottom ends of the first connector to a position corresponding to any height halfway along the lead wire. Therefore, the first connector, the second connector, and the lead wire can be cooled by the air discharged from the air hole, and thus damage due to heat generation of the first connector, the second connector, and the lead wire can be prevented.

47. Original invention 47
(a) The problem that the original invention 47 aims to solve is the same as the problem that the original invention 45 aims to solve.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 47 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (29th embodiment) is as follows:
A control board (sub-control board 540),
A board case (700) for accommodating the control board;
The control board is provided with a first connector (board-side connector 540b),
an opening (716c) for exposing the first connector to the outside of the board case is provided at a position corresponding to the first connector in the board case;
An air hole (716d) is provided in the side wall (side surface portion 716b) around the opening of the board case,
a second connector (harness side connector 730b) connected to the first connector;
a plurality of lead wires (730a) extending from the second connector opposite to the first connector;
an opening range of the air hole is formed so as to extend from a position corresponding to any height between the upper end and the lower end of the first connector to a position corresponding to any height midway along the lead wire, based on a mounting surface of the electronic components on the control board;
The plurality of lead wires includes a lead wire for supplying power.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 47 According to the original invention, an air hole is provided in the side wall surrounding the opening that exposes the first connector to the outside of the board case, and the opening range of this air hole is formed to extend from a position corresponding to any height between the top and bottom ends of the first connector to a position corresponding to any height halfway along the lead wire. Therefore, the first connector, the second connector, and the lead wire can be cooled by the air discharged from the air hole, and thus damage due to heat generation of the first connector, the second connector, and the lead wire can be prevented.

48. Original invention 48
(a) The problem that the original invention 48 aims to solve is the same as the problem that the original invention 45 aims to solve.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 48 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (29th embodiment) is as follows:
A control board (sub-control board 540),
A board case (700) for accommodating the control board;
The control board is provided with a first connector (board-side connector 540b),
an opening (716c) for exposing the first connector to the outside of the board case is provided at a position corresponding to the first connector in the board case;
An air hole (716d) is provided in the side wall (side surface portion 716b) around the opening of the board case,
a second connector (harness side connector 730b) connected to the first connector;
a plurality of lead wires (730a) extending from the second connector opposite to the first connector;
an opening range of the air hole is formed so as to extend from a position corresponding to any height between the upper end and the lower end of the first connector to a position corresponding to any height midway along the lead wire, based on a mounting surface of the electronic components on the control board;
The plurality of lead wires are each separated from one another.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 48 According to the original invention, an air hole is provided in the side wall surrounding the opening that exposes the first connector to the outside of the board case, and the opening range of this air hole is formed to extend from a position corresponding to any height between the upper and lower ends of the first connector to a position corresponding to any height halfway along the lead wire. Therefore, the first connector, the second connector, and the lead wire can be cooled by the air discharged from the air hole, and thus damage due to heat generation of the first connector, the second connector, and the lead wire can be prevented.
Furthermore, since the multiple lead wires are separated from each other, air can easily flow between them, and the multiple lead wires can be efficiently cooled by the air discharged from the air holes.

49. Original invention 49
(a) The problem that the original invention 49 aims to solve is the same as the problem that the original invention 45 aims to solve.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 49 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (29th embodiment) is as follows:
A control board (sub-control board 540),
A board case (700) for accommodating the control board;
The control board is provided with a first connector (board-side connector 540b),
an opening (716c) for exposing the first connector to the outside of the board case is provided at a position corresponding to the first connector in the board case;
A first air hole (716d) is provided in a side wall (side surface portion 716b) around the opening of the board case,
A second connector (harness side connector 730b) provided at the tip of the harness (730) is connected to the first connector,
an opening range of the first air hole is formed so as to extend from a position corresponding to any height between the upper end and the lower end of the first connector to a position corresponding to any height between the upper end and the lower end of the second connector, based on a mounting surface of the electronic components on the control board;
A second air hole (air hole 716d) is provided in the side wall (upper wall 712) opposite to the side wall in which the first air hole is provided in the board case.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 49 According to the original invention, a first air hole is provided in the side wall surrounding the opening that exposes the first connector to the outside of the board case, and the opening range of this first air hole is formed to extend from a position corresponding to any height between the upper end and the lower end of the first connector to a position corresponding to any height between the upper end and the lower end of the second connector.Therefore, the first connector and the second connector can be cooled by the air discharged from the first air hole, and thus damage to the first connector and the second connector due to heat generation can be prevented.
In addition, the first connector can be efficiently cooled by the air flow between the first air hole and the second air hole.

50. Original invention 50
(a) The problem that the original invention 50 aims to solve is the same as the problem that the original invention 45 aims to solve.

(b) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 50 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (29th embodiment) is as follows:
A control board (sub-control board 540),
A board case (700) for accommodating the control board;
The control board is provided with a first connector (board-side connector 540b),
an opening (716c) for exposing the first connector to the outside of the board case is provided at a position corresponding to the first connector in the board case;
A first air hole (716d) is provided in a side wall (side surface portion 716b) around the opening of the board case,
a second connector (harness side connector 730b) connected to the first connector;
a lead wire (730a) extending from the second connector opposite the first connector;
an opening range of the first air hole is formed so as to extend from a position corresponding to any height between the upper end and the lower end of the first connector to a position corresponding to any height midway along the lead wire, based on a mounting surface of the electronic components on the control board;
A second air hole (air hole 716d) is provided in the side wall (upper wall 712) opposite to the side wall in which the first air hole is provided in the board case.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 50 According to the original invention, a first air hole is provided in the side wall surrounding the opening that exposes the first connector to the outside of the board case, and the opening range of this first air hole is formed to extend from a position corresponding to any height between the top and bottom ends of the first connector to a position corresponding to any height halfway along the lead wire. Therefore, the first connector, the second connector, and the lead wire can be cooled by the air discharged from the first air hole, and thus damage due to heat generation of the first connector, the second connector, and the lead wire can be prevented.
In addition, the harness can be efficiently cooled by the air flow between the first air hole and the second air hole.

51. Original invention 51
(a) The problem that the original invention 51 aims to solve is the same as the problem that the original invention 45 aims to solve.

(b) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 51 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (29th embodiment) is as follows:
A control board (sub-control board 540),
A board case (700) for accommodating the control board;
The control board is provided with a first connector (board-side connector 540b),
an opening (716c) for exposing the first connector to the outside of the board case is provided at a position corresponding to the first connector in the board case;
An air hole (716d) is provided in the side wall (side surface portion 716b) around the opening of the board case,
A second connector (harness side connector 730b) provided at the tip of the harness (730) is connected to the first connector,
an opening range of the air hole is formed so as to extend from a position corresponding to any height between the upper end and the lower end of the first connector to a position corresponding to any height between the upper end and the lower end of the second connector, based on a mounting surface of the electronic components on the control board;
The board case is characterized in that it is provided with a fan (cooling fan 717) for cooling the electronic components mounted on the control board.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 51 According to the original invention, an air hole is provided in the side wall surrounding the opening that exposes the first connector to the outside of the board case, and the opening range of this air hole is formed to extend from a position corresponding to any height between the upper end and the lower end of the first connector to a position corresponding to any height between the upper end and the lower end of the second connector. Therefore, the first connector and the second connector can be cooled by the air discharged from the air hole, and thus damage to the first connector and the second connector due to heat generation can be prevented.
Furthermore, since the fan is provided in the board case, the air sent by the fan is blown out through the air hole, making it possible to efficiently cool the first connector.

52. Original invention 52
(a) The problem that the original invention 52 aims to solve is the same as the problem that the original invention 45 aims to solve.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 52 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (29th embodiment) is as follows:
A control board (sub-control board 540),
A board case (700) for accommodating the control board;
The control board is provided with a first connector (board-side connector 540b),
an opening (716c) for exposing the first connector to the outside of the board case is provided at a position corresponding to the first connector in the board case;
An air hole (716d) is provided in the side wall (side surface portion 716b) around the opening of the board case,
a second connector (harness side connector 730b) connected to the first connector;
a lead wire (730a) extending from the second connector opposite the first connector;
an opening range of the air hole is formed so as to extend from a position corresponding to any height between the upper end and the lower end of the first connector to a position corresponding to any height midway along the lead wire, based on a mounting surface of the electronic components on the control board;
The board case is characterized in that it is provided with a fan (cooling fan 717) for cooling the electronic components mounted on the control board.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 52 According to the original invention, an air hole is provided in the side wall surrounding the opening that exposes the first connector to the outside of the board case, and the opening range of this air hole is formed to extend from a position corresponding to any height between the upper and lower ends of the first connector to a position corresponding to any height halfway along the lead wire. Therefore, the first connector, the second connector, and the lead wire can be cooled by the air discharged from the air hole, and thus damage due to heat generation of the first connector, the second connector, and the lead wire can be prevented.
Furthermore, since a fan is provided in the board case, the air sent by the fan is blown out from the air holes, thereby efficiently cooling the harness.

53. Original invention 53
(a) Problem to be solved by the original invention 53 The original invention relates to an amusement machine having a board case housing a control board, and in which two-dimensional codes are affixed to the board case and to the electronic components on the control board.
In conventional gaming machines, it is known that a two-dimensional code capable of identifying model information, etc., is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming board for production management, etc. (for example, JP 2016-049997 A). Such two-dimensional codes are attached not only to the gaming board, but also to the circuit board case and electronic components on the control board.
However, if the two-dimensional code attached to the electronic components on the control board is read, the information contained therein may be analyzed to obtain information regarding the performance of the electronic components, lotteries, etc., and may be used to commit fraud in games.
The problem that the original invention is intended to solve is to prevent the misuse of information contained in two-dimensional codes attached to electronic components on a control board.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 53 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The first original invention (thirtieth embodiment) is
A control board (main control board 530);
A board case (550) for housing the control board;
A predetermined electronic component having a calculation function (main CPU 530g) is mounted on the control board.
A first two-dimensional code (530j) is attached to the predetermined electronic component,
A second two-dimensional code (551a) is attached to the substrate case,
The first two-dimensional code is set to be more difficult to read than the second two-dimensional code (the area of the code region of the first two-dimensional code is set to be smaller than the area of the code region of the second two-dimensional code, and the color contrast between the first two-dimensional code and the background color is set to be smaller (lower) than the color contrast between the second two-dimensional code and the background color).
It is characterized by:
The second original invention is the first original invention,
The color contrast between the first two-dimensional code applied to the specified electronic component and a background color is lower than the color contrast between the second two-dimensional code applied to the board case and a background color.
The third original invention is the first or second original invention,
The area of the code region of the first two-dimensional code affixed to the specified electronic component is smaller than the area of the code region of the second two-dimensional code affixed to the board case.

(c) Effect of the original invention 53 According to the original invention, the first two-dimensional code attached to a specific electronic component on the control board is more difficult to read than the second two-dimensional code attached to the board case, thereby preventing misuse of the information contained in the first two-dimensional code.

54. Original invention 54
(a) The problem that the original invention 54 aims to solve is the same as the problem that the original invention 53 aims to solve.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 54 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The first original invention (thirtieth embodiment) is
A control board (main control board 530);
A board case (550) for housing the control board;
A predetermined electronic component having a calculation function (main CPU 530g) is mounted on the control board.
A first two-dimensional code (530j) is attached to the predetermined electronic component,
A second two-dimensional code (551a) is attached to the substrate case,
The first two-dimensional code is set to be more difficult to read than the second two-dimensional code (the area of the code region of the first two-dimensional code is set to be smaller than the area of the code region of the second two-dimensional code, and the color contrast of the first two-dimensional code with the background color is set to be smaller (lower) than the color contrast of the second two-dimensional code with the background color),
A predetermined member that prevents the first two-dimensional code from being read is disposed at a position on the board case facing the predetermined electronic component.
The second original invention is the first original invention,
The color contrast between the first two-dimensional code applied to the specified electronic component and the background color is lower than the color contrast between the second two-dimensional code applied to the board case and the background color.
The third original invention is the first or second original invention,
The area of the code region of the first two-dimensional code affixed to the specified electronic component is smaller than the area of the code region of the second two-dimensional code affixed to the board case.

(c) Effect of the original invention 54 According to the original invention, the first two-dimensional code attached to a specific electronic component on the control board is more difficult to read than the second two-dimensional code attached to the board case, thereby preventing misuse of the information contained in the first two-dimensional code.

55. Original invention 55
(a) The problem that the original invention 55 aims to solve is the same as the problem that the original invention 53 aims to solve.

(b) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 55 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first original invention (thirtieth embodiment) is
A control board (main control board 530);
A board case (550) for housing the control board;
A predetermined electronic component having a calculation function (main CPU 530g) is mounted on the control board.
A first two-dimensional code (530j) is printed on a surface of the predetermined electronic component,
A sticker (management sticker 551) on which a second two-dimensional code (551a) is printed is attached to the surface of the substrate case,
The first two-dimensional code is set to be more difficult to read than the second two-dimensional code (the area of the code region of the first two-dimensional code is set to be smaller than the area of the code region of the second two-dimensional code, and the color contrast between the first two-dimensional code and the background color is set to be smaller (lower) than the color contrast between the second two-dimensional code and the background color).
It is characterized by:
The second original invention is the first original invention,
The color contrast between the first two-dimensional code applied to the specified electronic component and a background color is lower than the color contrast between the second two-dimensional code applied to the board case and a background color.
The third original invention is the first or second original invention,
The area of the code region of the first two-dimensional code affixed to the specified electronic component is smaller than the area of the code region of the second two-dimensional code affixed to the board case.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 55 According to the original invention, the first two-dimensional code attached to a specific electronic component on the control board is more difficult to read than the second two-dimensional code attached to the board case, thereby preventing misuse of the information contained in the first two-dimensional code.

10, 10A Slot machine (game machine)
REFERENCE SIGNS LIST 11 power switch 12 front door 12a second closing section 12b third closing section 12c control panel 12d index 13 cabinet 13a bottom plate 13b back plate 13c first closing section 14 pattern display device 14a reel frame 15 medal payout device 16 medal payout port 17 door switch 21 performance lamp (decorative lamp section)
22 Speaker 23 Image display device 24 Operation button 25 Operation indicator lamp 26 Upper frame lamp section 26a Upper frame lamp board 26b Upper frame lamp cover 26d Peripheral decorative section 27 Right frame lamp section 27a Right frame lamp board 27b Right frame lamp cover 27c Right frame lamp base 27d Lens section 27e Light diffusion section 27f Textured section 27g Auxiliary lens section 27h Side wall section 27i Decorative section 28 Left frame lamp section 28a Left frame lamp board 28b Left frame lamp cover 28d Lens section 28e Light diffusion section 28f Textured section 29 Title display section 29a Title display board 29b Title display cover 29d Lens section 29e Light diffusion section 29f Textured section 31 Reel 32 Motor 33 Reel sensor 35 Hopper 36 Hopper motor 37a, 37b Payout sensor 38a Fixed shaft 38b Movable shaft 39a Movable piece 39b Spring 40a 1 bet switch 40b 3 bet switch 41 Start switch 42 Stop switch 42a Stop button 42b Stopper 42c Coil spring 42d Movable piece 42e Detection sensor 43 Settlement switch 44a, 44b Insertion sensor 45 Blocker 46 Passage sensor 47 Medal insertion slot 47a Medal guard section 47b Medal placement section 48 Chute passage 49 Chute sensor 50 Main control board (main control means)
50a Screw hole 50b Connector 51 Input port 52 Output port 53 RWM
54 ROM
55 Main CPU
56 Circuit board case (main circuit board case)
57 Upper cover 57a Crimping portion 57b Gate mark 57c Recessed portion 57d Protrusion 57e Protrusion 58 Lower cover 58a Crimping portion 58b Gate mark 58c Boss 59a Insertion detection LED
59b Left stop operation detection LED
59c Mid-stop operation detection LED
59d Right stop operation detection LED
59e Start operation detection LED
59f Left index detection LED
59g Medium index detection LED
59h Right index detection LED
61 Role selection means 62 Winning flag control means 63 Push order instruction number selection means 64 Performance group number selection means 65 Reel control means 66 Winning determination means 67 Payout means 71 Control command transmission means 73 Setting value display LED
74 Management information display LED (role ratio monitor)
75 Display board 76 Credit number display LED
77 Advantageous section display LED
78 Obtained number display LED
79 Status indicator LED
79a 1 bet display LED
79b 2 bet display LED
79c 3 bet display LED
79d Game start display LED
79e Loading display LED
79f Replay display LED
80 Sub-control board (sub-control means)
81 Input port 82 Output port 83 RWM
84 ROM
85 Sub CPU
Description of the symbols 86: electrolytic capacitor 87: sub-board case 88: selection switch 88a: up switch 88b: down switch 88c: right switch 88d: left switch 89: performance switch 91: performance output control means 92: brightness adjustment means 93: light emission control means 101: hopper disk 102: holding section 103: discharge section 110: reel base 120: reel control board 121: reel board case 130: passage forming member 131: upper medal receiving port 132: return medal passage 133: lower medal receiving port 134: payout medal passage 151: setting key insertion port 152: setting key switch 153: setting change (reset) switch 160a-160d: LED (full color LED)
300 Relay board 300a to 300c Connectors 500, 500A, 500B Pachinko game machine 501 Outer frame 502 Front frame 503 Hinge mechanism 504 Game board 505 Glass door (glass frame)
506 Upper tray 507 Lower tray 508 Firing handle 510 Power supply board 511 Power switch 512 Firing board 513 Firing device 520 Dispensing control board 521 Key insertion slot 522 Door opening switch 523 Frame opening switch 524 Dispensing device 525 External terminal board 530 Main control board (main control means)
530a hole (screw hole)
530b-530c Electronic components 530d Foot 530e Test terminal 530f Screw 530g Main CPU
530h: Substrate-facing surface 530i: Outer surface 530j: Two-dimensional code 530k: Two-dimensional code 531: Special pattern display device 531a to 531h: LED
532 Start port 533 Start port switch 534 Setting key insertion port 535 Setting key switch 536 Setting change (reset) switch 537 Setting value display LED
538 Management information display LED (performance display monitor)
539a to 539h Connectors 539b' to 539h' Connector legs 540 Sub-control board 540a Sub-CPU
540b Connector (Board side connector)
540c: Board side terminal 540d: Base portion 540e: Standing portion 541: Performance lamp (decorative lamp portion)
542 Speaker 543 Image display device 544 Selection switch 544a Upward switch 544b Downward switch 544c Rightward switch 544d Leftward switch 545 Performance switch 546 Brightness adjustment means 547 Light emission control means 550, 550A, 550B Board case 551 Management seal 551a Two-dimensional code 555 Lottery means 556 Design control means 557 Reservation means 560 Upper case (front cover, first cover)
560a Lower edge 561 Cover 562 Crimping portion 563a to 563g Opening 564 Boss 565 Side wall 565a Upper wall 565b Lower wall 565c Right side wall 565d Left side wall 566 Front surface 567 First seal attachment portion 567a Front-facing surface 567b Right-facing surface 567c Sealing recess 568a to 568b Flange 568c Parting line 569 Case-side seal attachment portion 570 Lower case (rear cover, second cover)
570a Outer edge 571 Side wall 571a Upper wall 571b Lower wall 571c Right side wall 571d Left side wall 572 Crimping portion 573 Rear surface 574 Second seal attachment portion 574a Rear-facing surface 574b Right-facing surface 574c Sealing boss 574d Sealing screw 575 Boss 576a-576b Flange 576c Parting line 581 Sealing seal 581a Fracture point 582 False sealing seal 583 Seal cover 583a Front cover portion 583b Side cover portion 583c Rear cover portion 584 Bracket 584a Back plate portion 584b Upper edge portion 584c Lower edge portion 584d Right edge portion 584e Left edge 584f Bracket side seal attachment section D1 to D11 Line of sight B to H, J to L Harness 610 Upper frame lamp section 611 Upper frame right side lamp board 612 Upper frame left side lamp board 613 Upper frame lamp cover 615 Title display section 615a Title display board 615b Title display cover 615c Title display base 615d Lens section 615e Light diffusion section 615f Textured section 615g Light diffusion sheet 616 Peripheral decorative section 620 Right frame lamp section 621 Right frame lamp board 622 Right frame lamp cover 630 Left frame lamp section 631 Left frame lamp board 632 Left frame lamp cover 641a to 641k LED (full color LED)
642a to 642c Connector 650 Right base member 651 Upper frame right side board attachment portion 652 Upper frame right side cover attachment portion 653 Right frame board attachment portion 654 Right frame cover attachment portion 661a to 661e Board support rib 662a to 662b Cover fitting groove 670 Lens portion 670a Light diffusion portion 670b Textured portion 681 Screw boss 682a to 682c Positioning boss 683a to 683c Screw 684 Screw hole 685a to 685b Positioning hole 686a to 686b Fixing hole 687 Protrusion 688 Screw shaft 689a to 689c Screw head 700, 700A to 700H Board case 710 Front cover (first cover, upper case)
711 Front portion 712 Upper wall 713 Lower wall 714 Right side wall 715 Left side wall 716 Connector recess 716a Bottom portion 716b Side portion 716c Opening 716d Air hole 717 Cooling fan 718 Fan intake hole 720 Rear cover (second cover, lower case)
730 Harness 730a Lead wire 730b Harness side connector 730c Harness side terminal

Claims (1)

A control board;
A board case that houses the control board,
The control board is provided with a first connector,
an opening for exposing the first connector to an outside of the board case is provided at a position corresponding to the first connector in the board case;
The substrate case is provided with a predetermined air hole,
a second connector connected to the first connector;
a plurality of lead wires extending from the second connector;
an opening range of the predetermined air hole is formed so as to extend from any position between the upper end and the lower end of the first connector on a side surface of the board case facing the first connector, to a midpoint of the lead wire when the lead wire is vertically aligned with respect to a mounting surface of electronic components on the control board, and further to a top surface of the board case;
When the first connector and the second connector are connected to each other, the first connector and the second connector are configured to be engaged with each other by a lock mechanism,
The locking mechanism is located on a side surface of the first connector and the second connector opposite to the side surface of the first connector and the second connector facing the predetermined air hole.

Images